Toh 543 — The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa
Translated by Dharmachakra Translation Committee under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha
The Root Manual of the Rites of Mañjuśrī
Chapter 1
F.88.aF.105.a[1]Oṁ, homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas!
Thus did I hear at one time. Lord Śākyamuni dwelt above the Pure Abode, in an inconceivable, wondrous pavilion, circular in shape, with a congregation of bodhisattvas[2] distributed all around, located in the canopy of the sky. There the Lord addressed the gods of the Pure Abode: {1.1}
“Honored gods! Listen as I tell of the inconceivable, wondrous miracles of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, bodhisattva, and great being—listen as I tell of his conduct, different types of samādhi, and magical power; his liberation, maṇḍala, and his miraculous bodhisattva manifestations; and how he is the sustenance for all beings and brings them life, health, and sovereignty! I will explain, for the benefit of all beings, the mantra subjects that completely fulfill one’s wishes. Listen well and duly reflect upon it—I will now tell you about him.” {1.2}
Thereupon the gods of the Pure Abode, folding their hands, said:[3]
“Then tell us, Lord, about the conduct of the bodhisattvas; their different samādhis and their attainment of the bodhisattva levels; their sitting upon the vajra throne, overpowering of Māra, and turning of the wheel of Dharma; their liberating of all śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas; their ensuring for all beings rebirth as a god or a human and the pacification of all suffering; their removal of diseases of the poor, sick, and wealthy alike; their invulnerability to the use of all mundane and supramundane mantras; and their fulfilling of all wishes that thus makes the speech of all the tathāgatas fruitful.[4] Lord, speak with a mind full of love and concern for our welfare, F.88.bF.105.b and out of pity for all sentient beings.” {1.3}
Then Lord Śākyamuni, casting a glance with his buddha eye over the entire realm of the Pure Abode, entered the samādhi called the spreading and diffusing of the light of the pure sphere.[5] As soon as the Lord entered this samādhi, out of his ūrṇā came an array of light rays called arouser of the bodhisattva Saṃkusumita;[6] he was surrounded by many hundreds of thousands of millions of rays. The light circumambulated the Buddha three times and, having passed through billions of trichiliocosms and crossed as many worlds in the northeastern direction as there are grains of sand in one hundred thousand Gaṅgā rivers, it came to the world sphere called Kusumāvatī, where the tathāgata Saṃkusumita Rājendra was staying. Due to the power of his previous aspirations, Mañjuśrī was also staying there together with other bodhisattvas, great beings engaged in bodhisattva activity. Seeing this effulgence of light, he gently smiled and addressed the multitude of bodhisattvas: {1.4}
“This arousing ray of light, O sons of the victorious ones, has come here to wake me up. Do pay attention!” {1.5}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the bodhisattva, the great being, with his eyes wide and unblinking, sat facing the radiance of the ray. And this arousing ray, illuminating the Kusumāvatī world sphere with great radiance, circumambulated the thus-gone lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra clockwise three times and dissolved into the head of the great being, the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī. {1.6}
The divine youth Mañjuśrī then got up from his seat F.89.aF.106.a and circumambulated the thus-gone lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra three times. Then, bowing his head and placing his right knee on the ground, he spoke to Lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra: {1.7}
“May Lord Śākyamuni, the tathāgata, the arhat, the completely awakened one, think of me. Let me go, O lord, from here to the Sahā world sphere to see Lord Śākyamuni, to honor him and serve him. Let me go so that he may instruct me in the mantra practice, the sādhana practice, and the procedure of constructing the right maṇḍala; the secrets of the ritual and the procedure of drawing the picture; and the secret mudrā empowerment into the heart of all the tathāgatas, so that all the wishes of all beings are fulfilled.” {1.8}[7]
Being so addressed, the thus-gone lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“You may go, divine youth Mañjuśrī, if you think that this is the right time. And please ask Lord Śākyamuni, on my behalf, if he is without pain and without worry, if his efforts come easily to him, and if his life is comfortable.” {1.9}
Then, the thus-gone lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra F.90.aF.107.a[8] further said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Also, O divine youth, the tathāgatas, the arhats, the completely awakened ones, numerous as grains of sand in one hundred thousand Gaṅgā rivers, have taught and will teach again of your proficiency in mantra practice, maṇḍala ritual, the secret empowerment, the mudrās, the picture drawing procedure, the homa rite, the mantra recitation, and the regular observations, all of which fulfill every wish and bring joy to every being. They will teach of your proficiency in the vast fields of astrology and gemology; of your knowledge of the past, present, and future; and of your ability to govern and make predictions. They will teach of your mantra repetition, your ability to travel to the ends of the earth and to become invisible, and your vast knowledge of the right time and occasion for anything. They will teach how to traverse all the stages of the buddhas, bodhisattvas, śrāvakas, and pratyekabuddhas, and all the mundane and supramundane stages without exception. They will teach the way in which you are established in the practice of all of these. So that I too may rejoice, please go Mañjuśrī, O divine youth, if you think that the time is right. You will hear these teachings in the presence of Śākyamuni, face to face with him, and you will later give them yourself. The mantra for this is as follows: {1.10}
“Homage to all the tathāgatas whose instructions are inconceivable and perfect!
“Oṁ, ra ra! Do remember! O perfect teacher possessing the form of a divine youth! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Svāhā![9]{1.11}
“This was, O divine youth Mañjuśrī, the root mantra. It is the heart essence of all the tathāgatas, and it was and will be[10] recited by them. You will also now recite this, the all-accomplishing mantra, together with all its parts, having arrived in the Sahā world. This has been sanctioned by Śākyamuni. Here, the ultimate heart mantra is:
“Oṁ, this [mantra] is [my] homage to speech![11]{1.12}
“The subsidiary heart mantra in this set is:
“Speech, hūṁ!”[12]{1.13}
Lord Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, being thus granted leave by Saṃkusumita Rājendra, F.90.bF.107.b the tathāgata, entered the samādhi called the ornament of all supernal manifestations that brings the attainment of the essence of awakening which is a product of the conduct of a bodhisattva. As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, the world sphere with all its directions—above, below, and across—up to its farthest reaches, became filled with lord buddhas. Saṃkusumita Rājendra then said: {1.14}
“Good, good it is, O son of the Victorious One, that you have entered this particular samādhi! No śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, or bodhisattvas who are established in the perfect conduct, not even those on the tenth bodhisattva level, are able to enter this samādhi.” {1.15}
Then Saṃkusumita Rājendra, having conferred with the lord buddhas, the tathāgatas, taught the following mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth—his ultimately secret, innermost heart essence that accomplishes all purposes. This most secret, divine mantra, called One Syllable,[13]F.89.bF.106.b which serves the interests of all beings, is also fit to accomplish the special mantra practice.[14]{1.16}
Lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra, the tathāgata, became quiet for a moment. Looking with his buddha eye over all the world spheres, he considered all the lord buddhas dwelling there, and with a mind filled with love, pronounced the mantra:[15]
“Homage to all the buddhas!
“Oṁ maṁ!”[16]
“This mantra is the ultimate heart essence of Mañjuśrī, which accomplishes all endeavors.” {1.17}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, arose from the aforementioned samādhi and performed, in the time that it takes a strong person to bend or to extend their arm, or to snap their fingers, or to close and open their eyes, the miraculous, special samādhi called the intellect with the force of magical power, and went to the Sahā world. Having arrived there, he established himself in the palace of the gods of the Pure Abode founded upon fine jewels and gems in the canopy of the sky. Illuminating this entire realm of the Pure Abode with powerful rays of light, he entered the samādhi called the illuminator adorned with brilliant jewels. {1.18}
As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, he manifested through the power of bodhisattva transformation, for the worship of Lord Śākyamuni, a divinely created palace sumptuously studded with many gems and adorned with jeweled parasols spanning many hundred of thousands of leagues; bedecked with divinely beautiful great bundles of silk streamers; decorated with celestial flowers, banners, flags, garlands, and jewels; and pleasant with the sweet sound of draperies of latticed wind-chimes. Also, in the act of worshiping Lord Śākyamuni, he manifested a copious rain of perfume, garlands, ointments, wreaths, and scented powders. {1.19}
Seeing this extraordinary and marvelous display—a miracle of a bodhisattva—the hair of the gods of the Pure Abode stood on end in excitement. When, however, they saw their abodes trembling, their hearts became tormented and pained. They immediately began to wail loudly, with a sense of great urgency, “Oh, what can this be? Could it be that we are being deprived of our divine powers?” And they implored, “Please protect us, Lord! Please protect us, Śākyamuni!” {1.20}
Lord Śākyamuni then addressed the entire assembly of the gods of the Pure Abode:
“Do not be afraid, friends! Do not be afraid! Mañjuśrī, the divine youth present here, the bodhisattva, the great being, has come here from the presence of the tathāgata Saṃkusumita Rājendra in the buddhafield Saṃkusumita, in order to see, worship, and serve me. He has come to teach the conduct of great purpose, the mantra subjects, and the vast and amazing Dharma subjects.” {1.21}
The divine youth Mañjuśrī, in turn, circumambulated Lord Śākyamuni three times and, looking at him with unblinking eyes, bowed down to his feet and praised him with these succinct words: {1.22}
“Homage to the omniscient one who is established, and is establishing others, in nirvāṇa and in the path of the three vehicles that encompasses all consciousnesses and all knowable objects, both conditioned and unconditioned!” {1.29}
Having praised Lord Śākyamuni in his presence with these words, Mañjuśrī said:
“There is, O lord, in the eastern direction beyond world spheres as numerous as the grains of sand in one hundred thousand Gaṅgā rivers, a buddhafield called Saṃkusumita. There is a world sphere there called Kusumāvatī where the tathāgata Lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra dwells. An arhat, one perfectly awakened, perfected in wisdom and conduct, the bliss-gone one, the supreme knower of the world, the guide of people who need to be tamed, the preceptor of gods and men, he expounds the Dharma that is good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end. He presented an account of the buddha activity[18] that is profoundly meaningful, full of beautiful figures of speech, original, complete, perfectly pure, and highly polished. He is presently living and teaching all sentient beings the Dharma, the bodhisattva basket[19] that pertains to the mantra practice, F.91.bF.108.b the path that conforms to the practice of the threefold path, the protection, the place of rest, the refuge, the highest aim, the well-being, and the ultimate and final cessation. It is by his command that I have arrived here in your presence, to be at your feet. Lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra, the tathāgata, asks if you are without pain and without worry, if your efforts come easily to you, and if your life is comfortable. He also said this: {1.30}
“ ‘It is indeed wonderful that in this time of the five degenerations Lord Śākyamuni, the awakened one, has appeared and is giving complete Dharma teachings with nothing missing[20]—the Dharma that consists of the threefold path and that brings about rebirth as a god or a human and final emancipation. Wonderful indeed is Lord Śākyamuni’s courage, that in this world of helpless beings he establishes them on the path that leads to escape from the three realms, and he also establishes them in the state of nirvāṇa, which is complete with boundless spiritual accomplishment and happiness.[21] Is it not true that only the awakened ones can know the minds of the lord buddhas? How could I know how to perform the magical feats[22] of the lord buddhas, whose miracles stem from an inconceivable, wondrous, superhuman power? How could I know of their engagement in the mental and physical conduct that constitutes their potential for the accomplishment of tasks?[23] Would I be able to even summarize these things in hundreds of thousands of millions of eons? The accomplishments of the tathāgatas, and all their forms without exception, whether separate and distinct or altogether, should be seen in terms of unconditioned dharmas. Only you, O Lord, the tathāgata, can explain the conduct and the qualities related to the elimination of traits eliminable through the path of seeing.
[24] I cannot do that.’ ” {1.31}
Seated on a great jeweled lotus miraculously created through his own magical power, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, F.92.aF.109.a watched Lord Śākyamuni with anticipation. The latter, following the usual practice of a tathāgata, first gave by way of introduction the customary manifold preamble preceded by questions from the audience, and then he spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the bodhisattva, the great being, with a voice as sweet as Brahmā’s, a voice that resembled the call of a cuckoo or the resounding of thunder or a drum, a voice that is fitting to a Dharma discourse and causes the bodhisattva to be accomplished: {1.32}
“Welcome to you, Mañjuśrī! The extensive tract of this great manual will now be explained; it has been approved by me and taught by all the buddhas. It is the manual that effects the accomplishment of the conduct of great beings; that is blessed by the buddhas; that achieves the aims of bodhisattvas; that contains the mantra topics together with the secret empowerments, mudrās, maṇḍalas, and empowerment rituals; that brings about long life, lack of illness, and dominion and fulfills all wishes; that contains all the tantras on sādhana rites; that causes one to know all minds and mental objects, the occurrences in all times, all hidden phenomena, and the kingdoms and realms in the past, present, and future—in short, the fulfillment of all the wishes of all beings. This is a mantra practice that facilitates the generation of good qualities and is the cause of the joy of beings. This manual contains instructions on becoming invisible; traveling through space; fast walking; increasing intelligence; the magic of summoning; the ability to visit subterranean paradises; the rites of assault; the obtainment of every sensual pleasure; the power to summon the multitudes of yakṣas and yakṣiṇīs, kiṃkaras, piśācas, and bhūtas; and the power to become a child, an old person, or a youth, as required by circumstances. {1.33}
“In short, this teaching has the power to perform all actions; it fulfills the heart’s every wish, magically manifesting itself in the magic of assault, of enriching, and of pacifying. It will be accomplished exactly according to how it is applied. Please teach now this ornament of the bodhisattva basket, this great, jewel-like, extensive manual, F.92.bF.109.b this treasury of teachings on the mantra practice of pure beings that was sanctioned by me and taught by all the buddhas. Teach it for the benefit and happiness of many beings, gods and humans, with all sentient beings in mind.” {1.34}
Upon hearing this, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered the bodhisattva samādhi called arousing with an array of light rays the blessing power of all the buddhas.[25] As soon as he, the pure being, entered this samādhi, the light primarily illuminated the world spheres that were as numerous as the grains of sand in many Gaṅgā rivers, as well as all the buddhafields from the Akaniṣṭha heaven to the Avīci hell. Any beings that were experiencing pain attained a peaceful state with their suffering pacified. Having aroused all the śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, bodhisattvas, and lord buddhas, the light again disappeared into the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī’s forehead. Immediately, all the lord buddhas who inhabited the buddhafields in the eastern direction were impelled by the display of the light sphere illuminating everything around. These buddhas were: {1.35}
The tathāgata Jyotissaumyagandhāvabhāsaśrī, the tathāgata Bhaiṣajyaguruvaiḍūryaprabharāja, the tathāgata Samantāvabhāsaśrī, the tathāgata Samudgatarāja, the tathāgata Śālendrarāja, the tathāgata Lokendrarāja, the tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarāja, the tathāgata Anantāvabhāsarājendra, and the tathāgata Jyotiraśmirājendra. {1.36}
The lord buddhas headed by those just mentioned, F.93.aF.110.a surrounded by multitudes of bodhisattvas and residing in numberless and infinite world spheres—the tathāgatas, the arhats, the fully awakened ones—all congregated in the Sahā world in the realm of the Pure Abode where Śākyamuni, the tathāgata, the arhat, the fully awakened one, was staying together with Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, and expounding the vast topic of mantras and bodhisattva conduct. {1.37}
So it was also in the southern, western, and northern directions, and in the intermediate directions. The light illuminated there all the buddhafields that lie above, below, and across, and it obscured all the abodes of the māras. All the tathāgatas who were surrounded by multitudes of bodhisattvas and accompanied by congregations of śrāvakas, desiring to see the Pure Abode, the miraculous power of the buddhas, and the greatness of bodhisattvas, and desiring to make the instructions of the tathāgatas—the vast topics of the different types of samādhi produced by the mantra practice—shine unimpeded throughout the world, took their places. They were: {1.38}
Subāhu, Suratna, Suvrata, Sunetra, Surata, Sudharma, Sarvārthasiddhi, Sarvodgata, Dharmodgata, Ratnodgata, Ratnaśrī, Meruśrī, Acintyaśrī, Prabhākaraśrī, Prabhaśrī, Jyotiśrī,[26] Sarvārthaśrī, Sarvaratnapāṇi, Cūḍāmaṇi,[27] Merudhvajapāṇi, Vairocanagarbha, Ratnagarbha, Jñānagarbha, Sacintyārthagarbha,[28] Acintyārthagarbha,F.93.bF.110.b Dharmodgatagarbha, Dhvajaketu, Suketu, Anantaketu, Raśmiketu,Vimalaketu, Aśeṣaketu, Gaganaketu,Ratnaketu, Garjitaghoṣadundubhisvararāja, Anantāvabhāsajñānarāja, Sarvatamāndhakāravidhamanarāja, Sarvavikiraṇabodhividhvaṃsanarāja,[29] Sarvacaryātiśayajñānarāja,[30] Lokendrarāja, Atiśayendrarāja,[31] Vidhamanarāja, Nirdhūtarāja, Ādityarāja, Abhāvasamudgatarāja, Svabhāvasamudgatarāja,[32] Abhāvasvabhāvasamudgatarāja, Avipakṣitarāja, Svabhāvabha,Puṇyābha, Lokābha, Amitābha,[33] Anantābha, Sunetrābha, Susambhavābha,[34] Arthabhāvābha, Adhṛṣya, Amṛṣya, Akarma, Akaniṣṭha, Amala, Anala, Dyuti, Pati,[35] Mati, Sukha, Sukhanemi, Nimiketu, Ṛkṣa, Divideva, Divya,[36] Nābhi,Bharata, Lokaśānti, Umāriṣṭa, Dundubhi,Siddha, Sita, Ākhyadivya, Duḥprasaha, Durgharṣa,[37] Durālabha,[38] Dūraṅgama, Durāla, Dūrasthita, Ucca, Uccatama, Khadyota, Samantadyota, Adyota, Ṛṣabha, Ābha, Sumanāpa, Sumanas, Mahādeva,Sunirmala, Malānta, Dānta, Sami,F.94.aF.111.a Sūci, Cihna,[39] Śvetadhvaja, Imi, Kimi, Kaniṣṭha, Nikarṣa, Jīva, Sujāta, Dhūmaketu, Dhvajaketu,[40] Śvetaketu, Suketu,[41] Vasuketu, Vasava, Pitāmaha, Pitā, Niṣkakuru, Lokākhya, Sahākhya, Mahākhya, Śreyās, Tejās, Jyotis,Kiṃkara, Samaṃkara, Lokaṃkara, Divaṃkara,[42] Dīpaṃkara, Bhūtāntakara, Sarvārthaṃkara, Siddhaṃkara, Jyotiṃkara, Avabhāsaṃkara, Dundubhisvara, Rutasvara,Susvara, Anantasvara, Ketusvara, Bhūtamuni,[43] Kanakamuni,
Krakucchanda, Kāśyapa, Śikhin, Viśvabhuk, Vipaśyin, and Śākyamuni.{1.39}
These and many other lord buddhas, having illuminated the realm of the Pure Abode, sat on their lotus seats. There was also a multitude of bodhisattvas there who arrived in a similar way. They were: {1.40}
Ratnapāṇi, Vajrapāṇi, Supāṇi, Gagaṇapāṇi, Anantapāṇi, Kṣitipāṇi, Ālokapāṇi,Sunirmala, Sukūpa,[44] Prabhūtakūṭa, Maṇikūṭa, Ratnakūṭa, Ratnahastin, Samantahastin, Gandhahastin, Sugati, Vimalagati, Lokagati, Cārugati, Anantagati, Anantakīrti, Sukīrti, Vimalakīrti, Gatikīrti, Amalakīrti, Kīrtikīrti,[45] Nātha,F.94.bF.111.b Anātha,[46] Nāthabhūta, Lokanātha,[47] Samantanātha, Ātreya, Anantatreya, Samantatreya,Maitreya, Sunetreya, Namantreya,[48] Tṛdhatreya, Saphalātreya, Triratnātreya, Triśaraṇātreya, Triyāṇātreya, Visphūrja, Sumanojña, Valgusvara, Dharmeśvara, Abhāveśvara, Samanteśvara,[49] Lokeśvara, Avalokiteśvara, Sulokeśvara, Vilokiteśvara, Lokamaha, Sumaha, Garjiteśvara, Dundubhīśvara,[50] Vitateśvara, Vidhvasteśvara, Suvakṣa, Sumūrti, Sumahat,[51] Yaśovat, Ādityaprabhāva, Prabhaviṣṇu,[52] Someśvara,[53] Soma, Saumya, Anantaśrī, Lokaśrī, Gagana, Gaganāḍhya, Gaganagañja, Kṣiteśvara, Maheśvara, Kṣiti, Kṣitigarbha, Nīvaraṇa, Sarvāvaraṇa, Sarvāvaraṇaviṣkambhin, Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin, Samantanirmathana, Samantabhadra, Bhadrapāṇi, Sudhana, Susaṃhata, Supuṣya, Sunala,[54] Ākāśa, Ākāśagarbha, Sarvārthagarbha, Sarvodbhava, Anivartin,[55] Anivartita,[56] Apāyajaha, Avivartita, Avaivarttika,[57] and Sarvadharmopaccheda.
[58]{1.41}
Lord Śākyamuni dwelt with these and other bodhisattvas in the realm of the Pure Abode. There were also other bodhisattva great beings. Some, with female forms, fulfill the purpose of bodhisattva conduct throughout the infinite universe.[59] Some embody the inconceivable magical formulae of mantras and dhāraṇīs with the power to establish the minds of all beings on the path of no return. Some take on the forms of medicinal herbs. Some emulate the ways of different types of beings, entering flocks of birds,yakṣas, rākṣasas, or entities not designated as sentient beings (asattvasaṁkhyāta), such as jewels, mantras, or wish-fulfilling kings of gems.F.95.aF.112.a They act in a manner suitable for taming beings according to their individual capacities and take on the forms most suited to this purpose. The Lord dwelt there with uṣṇīṣa kings who[60] grant proficiency in the Dharma based on perfect realization in accordance with the instructions pertaining to vidyārāja.[61] They cause beings to enter the Tathāgata,Lotus, and Vajra families and all the worldly and supramundane families. They prevent beings from breaking their samaya vows, establish them on the path of the teachings, and keep the lineages of the Three Jewels from breaking up.
They were: {1.42}
Uṣṇīṣa, Atyadbhuta, Atyunnata, Sitātapatra, Anantapatra, Śatapatra, Jayoṣṇīṣa, Lokottara, Vijayoṣṇīṣa, Abhyudgatoṣṇīṣa, Kamalaraśmi,[62] Kanakaraśmi,[63] Sitaraśmi, Vyūḍhoṣṇīṣa, Kanakarāśi, Sitarāśi, Tejorāśi, Maṇirāśi, Samanantarāśi, Vikhyātarāśi, Bhūtarāśi, Satyarāśi, Abhāvasvabhāvarāśi, and Avitatharāśi. {1.43}
Lord Śākyamuni dwelt with these and other uṣṇīṣa kings, who abide in the sphere of phenomena fulfilling the heart aspirations of beings and pursuing the heart essence of all the victorious ones, in the realm of the Pure Abode. It would be impossible to list all of these uṣṇīṣa kings[64] down to the last one, or to describe their greatness, with their inconceivable might and powers, even in hundreds of thousands of millions of eons. Therefore, they are described here only briefly in an abbreviated form. {1.44}
The gathering of vidyārājñīs will now be enumerated:
Ūrṇā, Bhrū, Locanā, Pakṣmā, F.95.bF.112.bŚravaṇā, Grīvā, Abhayā, Karuṇā, Maitrī, Kṛpā, Prajñā, Raśmi, Cetanā, Prabhā, Nirmalā, and Dhavalā.[65]{1.45}
Along with the vidyārājñīs, emitted from the infinite and unbounded form[66] of the tathāgatas, there were others, namely:
Tathāgata’s Bowl, Tathāgata’s Dharma Wheel, Tathāgata’s Couch, Tathāgata’s Splendor, Tathāgata’s Speech, Tathāgata’s Lip, Tathāgata’s Thigh, Tathāgata’s Purity, Tathāgata’s Banner, Tathāgata’s Ensign, and Tathāgata’s Sign. {1.46}
Lord Śākyamuni dwelt with these and with other beings—the vidyārājas and vidyārājñīs, the ceṭas and ceṭīs, the dūtas and dūtīs, the yakṣas and yakṣiṇīs, and other sentient and non-sentient beings—uttering tathāgata mantras, created out of the Cloud of Dharma, and distinguishable by their adornments. They were themselves a product of special samādhis, surrounded by enormous retinues of hundreds of thousands of millions, vidyārājas ranking at the top of all the groups of vidyā beings. They also dwelt in the realm of the Pure Abode. Among the vidyārājas belonging to the Lotus family, there were: {1.47}
The lords, Dvādaśabhuja, Ṣaḍbhuja, Caturbhuja, Halāhala, Amoghapāśa, White Hayagrīva, Anantagrīva, Nīlagrīva, Sugrīva, Sukarṇa,[67] Śvetakarṇa,[68] Nīlakaṇṭha, Lokakaṇṭha, Vilokita,[69] Avalokita, Īśvara, Sahasraraśmi, Manas, Manasa, Vikhyātamanasa, F.96.aF.113.a Kamala, Kamalapāṇi, Manoratha, Āśvāsaka, Prahasita, Sukeśa, Keśānta, Nakṣatra, Nakṣatrarāja, Saumya, Sugata,[70] and Damaka. {1.48}
He dwelt with these and with other vidyārājas, headed by Abjoṣṇīṣa, who had attained the samādhis arising from the infinite accomplishment, the Cloud of Dharma, and who were surrounded by many hundreds of thousands of millions of vidyās and many vidyārājñīs created through the form-samādhi of the lord of the world. These vidyārājñīs were: {1.49}
Tārā, Sutārā, Naṭī, Bhṛkuṭī, Anantaṭī, Lokaṭī, Bhūmiprāpaṭī, Vimalaṭī,Sitā, Śvetā, Mahāśvetā, Pāṇḍaravāsinī, Lokavāsinī, Vimalavāsinī,[71] Abjavāsinī, Daśabalavāsinī,Yaśovatī, Bhogavatī, Mahābhogavatī, Ulūkā, Alūkā,[72] Amalāntakarī, Vimalāntakarī,[73] Samantāntakarī, Duḥkhāntakarī, Bhūtāntakarī,Śriyā, Mahāśriyā, Stupaśriyā,[74] Anantaśriyā, Lokaśriyā, Vikhyātaśriyā,Lokamātā, Samantamātā, Buddhamātā,Bhaginī,[75] Bhāgīrathī, Surathī,[76] Rathavatī, Nāgadantā,[77] Damanī, Bhūtavatī, Amitā,[78] Āvalī, Bhogāvalī, Ākarṣaṇī, Adbhutā, Raśmī, Surasā, Suravatī, Pramodā, Dyutivatī,F.96.bF.113.b Taṭī, Samantataṭī, Jyotsnā, Somā, Somāvatī, Māyūrī, Mahāmāyūrī, Dhanavatī, Dhanandadā, Suravatī,[79] Lokavatī, Arciṣmatī, Bṛhannalā,[80] Bṛhantā, Sughoṣā, Sunandā, Vasudā, Lakṣmī, Lakṣmīvatī, Rogāntikā, Sarvavyādhicikitsanī, Asamā,Devī, Khyātikarī, Vaśakarī, Kṣiprakarī, Kṣemadā, Maṅgalā, Maṅgalāvahā, Candrā, Sucandrā, and Candrāvatī.
{1.50}
These and other vidyārājñīs, headed by Parṇaśavarī, Jāṅgulī, and Mānasī, whose accomplishment is limitless, who have the nature of the space of the sphere of phenomena, and whose mental states arise due to the presence of the bodhisattva conduct and marvels—the dūtas and dūtīs, ceṭas and ceṭīs, kiṃkaras and kiṃkarīs, yakṣas and yakṣiṇīs, rākṣasas and rākṣasīs, and piśācas and piśācīs who have taken the samaya vows of the Lotus family and perform the mantra practice—also dwelt in the gods’ realm of the Pure Abode inhabited by pure beings. Staying there, they remained wholly preoccupied with acts of worship of Lord Śākyamuni. {1.51}
In Lord Śākyamuni’s presence, the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi then summoned his own retinue of vidyās, saying, “Please gather here, venerable friends—hosts of vidyās of my retinue—krodharājas,[81]vidyārājas and vidyārājñīs, and great dūtīs!” Then, merely by the power of thought, all the multitudes of vidyā beings were gathered. The male vidyā beings were: {1.52}
Vidyottama, Suvidya,F.97.aF.114.a Susiddha,Subāhu, Suṣeṇa, Surāntaka, Surada, Supūrṇa, Vajrasena, Vajrāntaka, Vajrākara, Vajrabāhu, Vajrahasta, Vajradhvaja, Vajrapatāka, Vajraśikhara, Vajraśikha,[82] Vajradaṃṣṭra, Śuddhavajra, Vajraroman, Vajrasaṃhata, Vajrānana, Vajrakavaca, Vajragrīva, Vajravakṣas, Vajranābhi, Vajrānta, Vajrapañjara, Vajraprākāra, Vajrāstra, Vajradhanuḥ, Vajraśara, Vajranārāca,[83] Vajrāṅka, Vajrasphoṭa,[84] Vajrapāṭāla, Vajrabhairava, Vajranetra,Vajrakrodha, Jalānantaścara, Bhūtāntaścara, Bandhanānantaścara, Mahāvajrakrodhāntaścara, Maheśvarāntaścara, Dānavendrāntaścara, Sarvavidyāntaścara, Ghora, Sughora, Kṣepa, Upakṣepa, Padavikṣepa, Vināyakāntakṣepa, Suvinyāsakṣepa, Utkṛṣṭakṣepa, Bala, Mahābala, Sumbha,[85] Bhramara,[86] Bhṛṅgiriṭi,Krodha,Mahākrodha, Sarvakrodha, Ajara, Ajagara, Jvara, Śoṣa, Nāgānta, Daṇḍa, Nīladaṇḍa, Aṅgada, Raktāṅga, Vajradaṇḍa, Megha, Mahāmegha, Kāla, Kālakūṭa, Śvitraroga, Sarvabhūtasaṃkṣayaka,Śūla, Mahāśūla, Ārti, Mahārti, Yama, Vaivasvata, Yugāntakara, Kṛṣṇapakṣa, Ghora,[87] Ghorarūpin, Paṭṭisa, Tomara, Gada, Pramathana,F.97.bF.114.b Grasana, Saṃhāra, Arka,[88] Yugāntārka, Prāṇahara, Śakraghna, Dveṣa, Āmarṣa, Kuṇḍalin, Sukuṇḍalin, Amṛtakuṇḍalin, Anantakuṇḍalin, Ratnakuṇḍalin, Bāhu, Mahābāhu,Mahoraga, Duṣṭasarpa,[89] Visarpa, Kuṣṭha, Upadrava, Vidrava,[90] Vidrāpaka, Bhakṣaka, Atṛṣṇa, and Ucchuṣma.
{1.53}
These and other vidyārājas and mahākrodhas[91] who completely tame all beings; who perform the activities of banishing, dispersing, killing, and destroying; who are generous toward worshipers; and who engage in the awakened activities of pacifying, enrichment, and assault, themselves surrounded by their own retinues of hundreds of thousands of millions of vidyārājas, bowed, in anticipation of orders, to their vidyārāja Vajrapāṇi, who, for his part, was intently observing Lord Śākyamuni and the divine youth Mañjuśrī.[92] All these vidyārājas sat down on their seats in the places assigned to them according to their buddha family affiliation. {1.54}
Also the great dūtīs, the messengers of Lord Vajrapāṇi, together with their retinues of thousands of millions of vidyārājñīs, abiding nonconceptually in their own sphere of phenomena that has the nature of the sky, gathered in that place. They were: {1.55}
Mekhalā, Sumekhalā, Śṛṅkhalā, Vajrārṇā,[93] Vajrajihvā, Vajrabhrū,[94] Vajralocanā, Vajrāṃsā, Vajrabhṛkuṭī, Vajraśravaṇā, Vajralekhā, Vajrasūcī, Vajramuṣṭī, Vajrāṅkuśī, Vajraśāṭī,[95] Vajrāsanī,[96] Vajraśṛṅkhalā, Vajraśālavatī,[97] Śālā,[98]F.98.aF.115.a Viraṭī, Kāminī, Vajrakāminī, Kāmavajriṇī, Paśyikā, Paśyinī, Mahāpaśyinī, Śikharavāsinī, Guhilā,[99] Guhamatī, Guhavāsī, Dvāravāsinī, Kāmavajriṇī,[100] Manojavā, Atijavā, Śīghrajavā, Sulocanā, Surasavatī, Bhramarī, Bhrāmarī, Yātrā, Siddhā, Anilā, Pūrā,Keśinī,[101] Sukeśā, Hiṇḍinī, Tarjanī,Dūtī, Sudūtī, Māmakī, Vāmakī,Rūpiṇī, Rūpavatī, Jayā, Vijayā,Ajitā, Aparājitā, Śreyasī, Hāsinī, Hāsavajriṇī, Lokavatī, Yaśavatī, Kuliśavatī, Adāntā, Trailokyavaśaṅkarī, Daṇḍā, Mahādaṇḍā, Priyavādinī, Saubhāgyavatī,Arthavatī, Mahānarthā,[102] Tittarī, Dhavalatittarī, Dhavalā, Sunirmitā, Sunirmalā, Ghaṇṭā, Khaḍgapaṭṭiśā,[103] Sūcī,[104] Jayantī, Ambarā,[105] Nirmitā,[106] Nāyikā,[107]Guhyakī,[108] Viśrambhikā, Musalā,[109] and Sarvabhūtavaśaṅkarī.
{1.56}
These and other great dūtīs, surrounded by retinues of many other dūtīs, were all gathered in that great assembly. There were also many dhāraṇī goddesses who arise in the mind absorbed in samādhi, and who let their chastising sticks fall upon wicked beings to control them. They were: {1.57}
Vajrānalapramohanīdhāraṇī, Meruśikharakūṭāgārādhāraṇī, F.98.bF.115.b Ratnaśikharakūṭāgāradharaṇiṃdharā, Sukūṭā, Bahukūṭā, Puṣpakūṭā, Daṇḍadhāriṇī, Nigrahadhāraṇī, Ākarṣaṇadhāriṇī, Keyūrā, Keyūravatī, Dhvajāgrakeyūrā, Ratnā,[110] Ratnāgrakeyūrā, Lokāgrakeyūrā, Patāgrakeyūrā, Triparivartā, Lokāvartā, Sahasrāvartā, Vivasvatāvartā, Sarvabhūtāvartā, Ketuvatī, Ratnavatī, Maṇiratnacūḍā, Bodhyaṅgā, Balavatī,[111]Anantaketu, Samantaketu, Ratnaketu, Vikhyātaketu, Sarvabhūtaketu, Ajiravatī,[112] Asvarā,[113] Sunirmalā,[114] Ṣaṇmukhā, Vimalā, and Lokākhyā. {1.58}
These and other dhāraṇī goddesses, surrounded by retinues of many hundreds of thousands of millions of such dhāraṇīs, all gathered in this great assembly. Through the infinite blessing of the buddhas, and the great blessing of the samādhi of the bodhisattvas, there assembled in this great gathering also venerable pratyekabuddhas from other buddhafields where there are no tathāgatas[115] present. Among them were both the solitary, rhinoceros-like ones and those who move among people, working for the benefit of beings. They demonstrate the way of the Dharma that involves habituation to silence. However, as their mindstreams are devoid of great compassion, they circle in saṃsāra with their minds ever weary. Their minds brim over with habitual thought patterns, and thus their previously generated bodhicitta is also tainted by habitual thinking. Their minds thus stall in progress when they reach the first, second, third … or any bodhisattva level up to the eighth, and they are fearful of saṃsāra, with minds ever weary. F.99.aF.116.a They were: {1.59}
Gandhamādana, Samantāyatana, Samantaprabha, Candana,[116] Kāla, Upakāla, Nemi, Upanemi, Riṣṭa,[117] Upariṣṭa,[118] Upāriṣṭa,[119] Pārśva,[120] Supārśva, Dundubhi, Upadundubhi,[121] Lokākhya,[122] Lokaprabha,[123] Jayanta,[124] Areṇu, Reṇu, Upareṇu, Aṃśa, Upāṃśa, Cihna, Sucihna, Dinakara, Sukara, Prabhāvanta,[125] Prabhākara, Lokakara, Viśruta, Suśruta,[126] Sukānta, Sudhānta,[127]Sudānta, Anantānta, Bhavānta, Sitaketu, Cihnaketu, Ketu, Upaketu, Tiṣya, Padmottara,[128] Padmasambhava, Svayambhu, Adbhuta, Manojña, Manasa, Mahendra, Kūṭākhya, Kumbhaka,[129] Saṃlākṣa, Śaṅkara, Upakara, Śānta, Śāntamānasa, Dharma, Upadharma, Vairocana, Kusuma, Sunīla, Śreyasa, Svabandhudūrāntaka, Duḥprasaha, Kanaka, Vimalaketu, Soma, Susoma, Suṣeṇa, Sucīrṇa, Śukra, Kratu, Iṣṭa, Upendra, and Vasu.[130]{1.60}
Lord Śākyamuni dwelt with these and other hundreds of thousands of millions of pratyekabuddhas who had entered and were established in what is taught as the “middling vehicle,”[131] which, unconditioned and free from mental elaboration, corresponds in nature to the sky-like sphere of phenomena, which is inconceivable, unmatched, and free of aim[132]—the pratyekabuddhas who are basically free from attachment and anger. There was also a great congregation of śrāvakas who, in turn, F.99.bF.116.b were accompanied by many hundreds of thousands of millions of śrāvakas. They were: {1.61}
Kāśyapa,[133] Mahākāśyapa, Nadīkāśyapa, Gayākāśyapa,[134] Urubilvākāśyapa,[135] Bharadvāja, Piṇḍola,[136] Maudgalyāyana, Mahāmaudgalyāyana, Śāriputra, Mahāśāriputra, Subhūti, Mahāsubhūti, Gavāmpati, Kātyāyana, Mahākātyāyana, Upāli, Bhadrika, Kaphiṇa, Nanda, Ānanda, Sunanda,[137] Upananda, Sundarananda,[138] Lokabhūta, Anantabhūta,[139] Varṇaka, Upavarṇaka, Nandika, Upanandika, Aniruddha, Pūrṇa, Saṃpūrṇa, Upapūrṇa, Tiṣya, Punarvasu, Aruru,[140]Raudraka,Raurava,Kuru, Pañcika, Upapañcika, Kāla, Sukāla, Devala, Rāhula, Harita, Upaharita, Dhyāyanandi, Dhyāyika, Udāyin, Upodāyika, Śreyasaka, Dravya, Mallaputra, Upadravya, Upeta,[141] Khaṇḍa, Tiṣya,[142] Mahātiṣya, Samantatiṣya, Āhvayana, Yaśoda, Yaśika, Dhanika, Dhanārṇava,[143] Upadhanika, Pilindavatsa,[144]Pippala, Kimphala,[145] Upaphala, Anantaphala, Saphala,Kumāra, Kumārakāśyapa, Mahodaya,[146] Ṣoḍaśavargika, Nandana,[147] Upanandana, Jihva, Jihma, Jitapāśa, Maheśvāsa, Vātsīka, Kurukulla, Upakurukulla, Śroṇakoṭīkarṇa, Śravaṇa,[148] Śroṇaparāntaka,[149] Gāṅgeyaka, Girikarṇika, Koṭikarṇika,[150] Vārṣika, Jeta,[151] Sujeta,[152] Śrīgupta, Lokagupta,F.100.aF.117.a Gurugupta, Guruka, Dyotīrasa, Śamaka, Ḍimbhaka, Upaḍimbhaka, Viṃśachoṭika,[153] Anāthada, Upavartana, Nivartana, Unmattaka, Dyota, Samanta, Bhaddāli,[154] Suprabuddha, Svāgata,[155] Upāgata, Lokāgata, Duḥkhānta, Bhadrakalpika, Mahābhadrika, Arthacara, Pitāmaha, Gatika,Puṣpa, Pālaka, Puṣpapālaka, Puṣpakāśika, Upakāśika, Mahauṣadha,Mahojaska, Mahojas, Anurādha, Rādhaka, Rāśika, Subrahma, Suśobhana, Suloka, Samāta, and Susmita.
[156]{1.62}
Lord Śākyamuni dwelt with these and many other śrāvakas who knew the taste of infinite freedom in the sphere of phenomena. Out of the collection of the three vehicles, they had reached the lesser one. Fleeing saṃsāra,[157] they had immersed themselves in the contemplation of the triple liberation. They were endowed with the deportment of the four immeasurable thoughts. They focused single-mindedly, became properly ordained, and followed the correct conduct. Having adopted the right system (sunaya),[158] they attained the state of nirvāṇa with its mental tranquility and freedom from mental elaboration. They too were seated in this great assembly along with Lord Śākyamuni and the others, established on the tenth level, who constitute the Three Jewels. {1.63}
Together with them there were many female śrāvakas. Relying on the path of the unconditioned, they abided in the state of nirvāṇa—the attainment of śrāvakas. Pure and free from desire, they developed halos of light. They were all objects worthy of veneration, being repositories of good qualities who facilitate purification. The best among the multitude of beings, they were the foremost leaders of the world. F.100.bF.117.b They were objects of worship of gods and humans and were their fields of merit. They were the supreme leaders of two-legged, four-legged, multi-legged, and legless beings. They were: {1.64}
Yaśodharā, Yaśodā, Mahāprajāpatī, Prajāpatī,[159] Sujātā, Nandā, Sthūlanandā, Sunandā, Dhyāyinī, Sundarī, Anantā, Viśākhā,[160] Manorathā, Jayavatī, Vīrā,[161] Upavīrā,[162] Devatā, Sudevatā, Āśritā, Śriyā, Pravarā, Pramuditā, Priyaṃvadā, Rohiṇī, Dhṛtarāṣṭrā, Dhṛtā,[163] Svāmikā, Sampadā, Vapuṣā, Śrāddhā, Premā, Jaṭā, Upajaṭā, Samantajaṭā, Bhavāntikā,[164] Bhāvatī,[165] Manojavā, Keśavā, Viṣṇulā, Viṣṇuvatī, Sumanā, Bahumatā, Śreyasī, Duḥkhāntā, Karmadā, Karmaphalā, Vijayavatī, Jayavatī, Vāsavā,[166] Vasudā, Dharmadā, Narmadā, Nāmrā, Sunāmrā, Kīrtivatī, Manovatī, Prahasitā, Tribhavāntā, Trimalāntā, Duḥkhaśāmikā,[167] Nirviṇṇā, Trivarṇā, Padmavarṇā, Padmāvatī, Padmaprabhā, Padumā, Padumāvatī,[168] Triparṇā, Saptaparṇā, and Utpalaparṇā. {1.65}
These and other of the most senior of the great female śrāvakas approached in order to salute the Lord’s feet. Desiring to swell the ranks[169] of this great gathering, which was a great miraculous feat of the bodhisattvas, they congregated and took their seats. They were eager to hear the Lord’s teaching and to become a shining example to demonstrate the accomplishment of mantra practice. {1.66}F.101.aF.118.a
Lord Śākyamuni then looked at this entire gathering and, knowing with his pure heart that the realm of beings[170] extends beyond the three times and is sky-like in nature, without independent existence, he addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {1.67}
“Please focus your attention, Mañjuśrī, on the acts that serve the interests of beings! Enter now the bodhisattva samādhi that will delight them according to their wishes, that is accompanied by faith in karmic results, and that will fulfill the purpose of their mantra practice; the samādhi that is the seat of the Dharma, the seat of right action, and the seat of tranquility and liberation; the samādhi that accomplishes ritual procedures and brings a state of equipoise free of all conceptuality; the bodhisattva samādhi that is endowed with the complete power of the ten powers of the tathāgatas and overwhelms the power of Māra.” {1.68}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, then entered the samādhi that was just described by the Lord. As soon as he entered it, he illuminated with a great light and caused to shake great trichiliocosms equal in number to the minute dust particles in many hundreds of thousands of world spheres, similar to this trichiliocosm of ours. He also displayed the use of magical powers, and then pronounced the words of his own mantra: {1.69}
“Homage to all the buddhas who arise out of the nature of nonexistence of individual entities! Homage to the pratyekabuddhas and the noble śrāvakas! Homage to the bodhisattvas, the lords established on the ten levels, the great beings! This is the mantra proper: {1.70}
“Oṁ, kha kha! Devour, devour! O tamer of evil beings, with a sword, a club, an axe, and a noose in your hands! One with four arms, four faces, and six feet, go, go! O great destroyer of obstacles with contorted face, inspiring fear in all nonhuman beings! One who roars with wild laughter and wears a tiger skin, perform, perform all tasks![171]F.101.bF.118.b Cut, cut all the mantras [of non-believers]! Break, break all the mudrās of non-believers! Draw here, draw here all nonhuman beings! Grind, grind all the wicked ones! Cause them to enter into the center of the maṇḍala! O terminator of the life of Vaivasvata, perform, perform tasks for me! Burn, burn! Cook, cook! Do not delay, do not delay! Remember your samaya pledge! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Split, split! Fulfiller of all wishes! Hey, hey, blessed one! Why do you tarry? Accomplish all my aims! Svāhā![172]{1.71}
This mantra of Lord Mañjuśrī, called Yamāntaka, Great Lord of Wrath, will crush or summon even the king Yama, not to mention ordinary beings. As soon as the Great Lord of Wrath is pronounced, all beings will come into Lord Mañjuśrī’s presence, unhappy, frightened, and terrified, their minds disturbed and their spirits broken, without any other refuge, no other protection or recourse apart from Lord Buddha and the divine youth Mañjuśrī. {1.72}
Any beings that live on dry land, or in water, or fly in the sky, the mobile and the immobile, those enumerated as born from a womb, from an egg, from moisture, or as born spontaneously, those that are situated in the infinite world spheres up to their farthest reaches, and those that are hidden in the cardinal and intermediate directions, above, across, and below will be removed at that very moment from those places by the Great Lord of Wrath himself and brought into the presence of Mañjuśrī. The Lord of Wrath must not be pronounced in the presence of those whose desires have not been extinguished, for they also would wither and die. It should be recited by those who keep their samaya pledges, in front of a buddha image, or a caitya containing relics, or a book containing a genuine Dharma teaching, or in front of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. It must not be recited for the sake of performing other acts in just any place, otherwise terrible omens and great ruin will come to the reciter. {1.73}F.102.aF.119.a
For the lord buddhas are indeed filled with utmost compassion, and the bodhisattvas, the great beings, exclusively strive to establish beings in the practice of the insight of omniscient knowledge; enthralling all beings, they establish them in the way of the Dharma. They deliver into nirvāṇa the entire realm of sentient beings; they give instructions and establish beings on the triple path; they prevent breaks in the lineages of the Three Jewels; they illuminate the mantra practice. With minds born of the power of great compassion, they obliterate the power of Māra. They destroy obstacle makers and keep the lords of evil in check. They increase[173] their own power and hold back the power of opponents. They perform the acts of paralyzing, killing, destroying, chastising, burning, and gratifying. They teach the practice of their own mantra. They cause the lifespan, health, and power of beings to increase. They swiftly accomplish all tasks. They readily assume the modes of[174] great love, great compassion, great equanimity, and great sympathetic joy. That is why the Yamāntaka mantra was now recited with a mind free from all doubt and deliberation. Summoned by the mantra were: {1.74}
Nāgas, great nāgas,yakṣas, great yakṣas, rākṣasas, great rākṣasas, piśācas, great piśācas, pūtanas, great pūtanas, kaṭapūtanas, great kaṭapūtanas, mārutas, great mārutas,[175] kuṣmāṇḍas, great kuṣmāṇḍas, vyāḍas, great vyāḍas, vetāḍas, great vetāḍas, kambojas, great kambojas, bhaginīs, great bhaginīs, ḍākinīs, great ḍākinīs, cūṣakas, great cūṣakas, utsārakas, great utsārakas, ḍimphikas, great ḍimphikas, kimpakas, great kimpakas, rogas,F.102.bF.119.b great rogas, apasmāras, great apasmāras, grahas, great grahas, ākāśamātṛs, great ākāśamātṛs, rūpiṇīs, great rūpiṇīs, virūpiṇīs,[176] great virūpiṇīs,[177] krandanās, great krandanās, chāyās, great chāyās, preṣakās, great preṣakās, kiṅkarās,[178] great kiṅkarās,[179] yakṣiṇīs, great yakṣiṇīs, piśācīs, great piśācīs, jvarās, great jvarās, cāturthakās, great cāturthakās, nityajvarās, viṣamajvarās, sātatikās, mauhūrtikās, vātikās, paittikās, śleṣmikās, sānnipātikās,[180]vidyās,[181] great vidyās,[182]siddhas, great siddhas, yogins, great yogins, ṛṣis, great ṛṣis, kinnaras, great kinnaras, mahoragas, great mahoragas, gandharvas, great gandharvas, gods, great gods, humans, great humans, country people, great country people, oceans, great oceans, rivers, great rivers, mountains, great mountains, treasures, great treasures, lands, great lands, trees, great trees, birds, great birds, kings, great kings, Śakras,Mahendras, Vāsavas, Kratis, Īśāna the Lord of Beings, Yama, Brahmā, Great Brahmā, Vaivasvata, Dhanada, Dhṛtarāṣṭra,[183]Virūpākṣa, Kubera, Pūrṇabhadra, Maṇibhadra, Pañcika, Jambhala, Stambhala, Kūṣmala,[184] Hārīta, Harikeśa,Hari, Hārīti, Piṅgalā, Priyaṅkara, Arthaṅkara,F.103.aF.120.a Jalendra, Lokendra, Upendra,Guhyaka, Great Guhyaka, Cala,Capala, Jalacara, Sātatagiri, Hemagiri, Mahāgiri, Kūtākṣa, and Triśiras.
{1.75}
These and other great yakṣa generals, surrounded by many hundreds of thousands of millions of yakṣas, gathered together through the blessing and magical power of the bodhisattva, in that great assembly in the realm of the Pure Abode. Having assembled, they took their seats in order to listen to the Dharma. Also, the great kings of the rākṣasas, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of millions of rākṣasas, had been brought by the Great Lord of Wrath. They were: {1.76}
Rāvaṇa, Draviṇa, Vidrāvaṇa, Śaṅkukarṇa, Kumbha,[185] Kumbhakarṇa, Samantakarṇa, Yama, Vibhīṣaṇa, Bhīṣaṇa, Ghora, Sughora,[186] Akṣayamati,[187] Saṃghaṭṭa,[188] Indrajit, Lokajit,[189] Yodhana, Suyodhana, Śūla, Triśūla, Triśiras, and Anantaśiras. {1.77}
They all gathered to hear the Dharma. Also the great piśācas with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of millions of piśācas gathered there. They were: {1.78}
Pīlu, Upapīlu, Supīlu, Anantapīlu, Manoratha, Amanoratha,[190] Sutāpa, Grasana, Supāna,[191] Ghora, and Ghorarūpin. {1.79}
They all gathered to hear the Dharma. Also, the great nāga kings, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of millions of nāgas, were brought by the Lord of Wrath through his display of the power of the bodhisattva. They were: {1.80}
Nanda, Upananda, Kambala, Upakambala, Vāsuki, Ananta, Takṣaka, Padma, Mahāpadma,[192] Śaṅkha, Śaṅkhapāla, Karkoṭaka, Kulika, F.103.bF.120.b Akulika, Māṇa, Kalaśoda, Kuliśika, Cāṃpeya, Maṇināga, Mānabhañja, Dukura, Upadukura, Lakuṭa, Mahālakuṭa, Śveta, Śvetabhadra, Nīla, Nīlāmbuda, Kṣīroda, Apalāla, Sāgara, and Upasāgara. {1.81}
These and other nāgas, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of millions of nāgas, gathered together in this great assembly and took their seats to hear the Dharma. Also, the sages and the great sages gathered there. They were: {1.82}
Ātreya, Vasiṣṭha, Gautama, Bhagīratha, Jahnu, Aṅgirasa, Agasti,[193] Pulasti,[194] Vyāsa, Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇagautama, Agni, Agnirasa, Jāmadagni, Āstika, Muni,[195] Munivara, Ambara, Vaiśampāyana, Parāśara,[196] Paraśu, Yogeśvara, Pippala, Pippalāda, Vālmīki, and Mārkaṇḍa. {1.83}
These along with other great sages, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of other great sages, entered this great gathering. Having saluted Lord Śākyamuni, they sat down in order to hear and rejoice at this basket of bodhisattva teachings explaining the purpose of mantra practice. Also, the great kings of the mahoragas entered this great gathering and took their seats. They were: {1.84}
Bheraṇḍa,[197] Bheruṇḍa,[198] Maruṇḍa,[199] Marīca, Mārīca, Dīpta, and Sudīpta.[200]{1.85}
Also, the garuḍa kings came together in this great assembly, with retinues of many of hundreds of thousands of garuḍas. They were: {1.86}
Suparṇa,[201] Śvetaparṇa, Pannaga, Parṇaga, F.104.aF.121.a Sujātapakṣa, Ajātapakṣa, Manojava, Pannaganāśana, Dhenateya,[202] Vainateya, Bharadvāja, Śakuna, Mahāśakuna, and Pakṣirāja.[203]{1.87}
They too joined this great assembly. Also, the kinnara kings, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of kinnaras, came to this great gathering. They were: {1.88}
Druma, Upadruma, Sudruma, Anantadruma, Lokadruma, Ledruma, Ghanoraska, Mahoraska, Mahojaska, Mahoja,[204] Maharddhika, Viruta, Susvara, Manojña, Cittonmādakara,[205] Unmāda,[206] Unnata,[207] Upekṣaka, Karuṇa, and Aruṇa.[208]{1.89}
These and other great kinnara kings, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of kinnaras, came all together for the purpose of hearing the Dharma. So did come: {1.90}
The Sahāmpati Brahmās, the Great Brahmās, the gods from the heavens of Ābhāsvara,[209] Prabhāsvara, Śuddhābha, Puṇyābha, Avṛha, Atapas, Akaniṣṭha, Sukaniṣṭha, Lokaniṣṭha,[210] Ākiñcanya, Naivakiñcanya, Ākāśānantya, Naivākāśānantya,[211] Sudṛśa, Sudarśana, Sunirmita, Paranirmita, Śuddhāvāsa, Tuṣita, and Yāma; the gods from the realm of the Thirty-Three and from the realm of the four great kings; the gods from the heavens of Sadāmatta, Mālādhāra, Karoṭapāṇi, and Vīṇātṛtīyaka; the gods who dwell in mountains, on mountaintops, and on mountain peaks; those dwelling in Alaka, those who dwell in palaces and mansions, those who dwell in the sky, those who dwell on the earth, those who dwell in trees, and those who dwell in houses. {1.91}
Also came the kings of the dānavas, headed by Prahlāda, Balin, Rāhu,[212] Vemacitri, Sucitri, Kṣemacitri, Devacitri,[213] Rāhu,[214] and Bāhu. {1.92}
They had retinues of many hundreds of thousands of asuras—titans with F.104.bF.121.b extravagant habits, great and varied wealth, and a predilection to engage the gods in battle. Because of the bodhisattva’s blessing, they also joined this great assembly in order to witness, pay respect to, and attend this miraculous bodhisattvic event. In addition, there were also the grahas and the great grahas who work for the benefit of mankind and who dwell in the sky. They were: {1.93}
Āditya, Soma, Aṅgāraka, Budha, Bṛhaspati, Śukra, Śanaiścara, Rāhu, Kampa, Ketu, Aśani, Nirghāta, Tāra, Dhvaja, Ghora, Dhūmra, Dhūma, Vajra, Ṛkṣa,[215] Vṛṣṭi, Upavṛṣṭi, Naṣṭārka,[216] Nirnaṣṭa, Hasānta, Yāṣṭi,[217] Ṛṣṭi,[218] Duṣṭi, Lokānta, Kṣaya,[219] Vinipāta, Āpāta,[220] Tarka, Mastaka, Yugānta, Śmaśāna, Piśita, Raudra,[221] Śveta, Abhija, Abhijata, Maitra, Śaṅku, Triśaṅku, Lubdha, Raudraka,[222]Dhruva, Nāśana, Balavān, Ghora, Aruṇa, Vihasita, Mārṣṭi,[223] Skanda, Sanat, Upasanat, Kumāra, Krīḍana, Hasana, Prahasana, Nartāpaka,[224] Nartaka, Khaja, and Virūpa. {1.94}
These great grahas too, along with retinues of many of hundreds of thousands of grahas, were in this great assembly. They gathered together in the great assembly in the realm of the Pure Abode by the blessing of the Buddha and took their seats. Also, the nakṣatras, who move across the sky in the manner of birds, along with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of nakṣatras, were present there.[225] They were: {1.95}
Aśvinī, Bharaṇī, Kṛttikā, Rohiṇī, Mṛgaśirā, Ārdrā, both Punarvasus,[226] Puṣya, Āśleṣā, Maghā, both Phalgunī,[227] Hastā, Citrā, Svāti, Viśākhā, Anurādhā, Jyeṣṭhā, Mūlā, both Āṣāḍhās,[228] Śravaṇā, Dhaniṣṭhā, Śatabhiṣā, both Bhadrapadās,[229] Revatī, Devatī, Abhijā, Punarnavā,[230] Jyotī, Aṅgirasī, Nakṣatrikā, both Phalgu and Phalguvatī, Lokapravarā, Pravarāṇikā, Śreyasī, F.105.aF.122.a Lokamātā,[231] Īrā,[232] Ūhā,[233] Vahā,[234] Arthavatī, and Surārthā. {1.96}
These nakṣatra queens, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of nakṣatras, gathered together in this great assembly in the realm of the Pure Abode through the blessing of the Buddha and took their seats. Present were also the following thirty-six signs of the zodiac: {1.97}
Meṣa, Vṛṣabha, Mithuna, Karkaṭaka, Siṃha, Kanyā, Tula, Vṛścika, Dhanus, Makara, Kumbha, Mīna, Vānara,[235] Upakumbha, Bhṛṅgāra, Khaḍga, Kuñjara, Mahiṣa, Deva, Manuṣya, Śakuna, Gandharva, Loka, Sarvajita,[236] Ugratejas, Jyotsna, Chāya,[237] Pṛthivī, Tama, Raja, Uparaja, Duḥkha, Sukha, Mokṣa,[238]Bodhi,[239] Pratyeka, Śrāvaka, Naraka, Vidyādhara,[240]Mahoja, Mahojaska, Tiryak, Preta, Asura, Piśita, Piśāca, Yakṣa, Rākṣasa, Sarvabhūtika, Bhūtika, Nimnaga,[241] Ūrdhvaga, Tiryaga, Vikasita, Dhyānaga, Yogapratiṣṭha,[242] Uttama, Madhyama, and Adhama. {1.98}
These great rāśis, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of rāśis, came to this great gathering in the realm of the Pure Abode. Having arrived, they bowed to the Lord’s feet and sat down in their respective seats. Also, the great yakṣiṇīs, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of yakṣiṇīs, were present there. They were: {1.99}
Sulocanā, Subhrū, Sukeśā, Susvarā, Sumatī, Vasumatī, Citrākṣī, F.105.bF.122.b Pūrāṃśā, Guhyakā, Suguhyakā,[243] Mekhalā,[244] Sumekhalā, Padmoccā, Abhayā,[245] Abhayadā, Jayā, Vijayā, Revatikā, Keśinī, Keśāntā, Anilā, Manoharā, Manovatī, Kusumā,[246]Kusumāvatī, Kusumapuravāsinī, Piṅgalā, Hārītī, Vīramatī, Vīrā, Suvīrā, Sughorā, Ghoravatī, Surasundarī, Surasā, Guhyottarī, Vaṭavāsinī, Aśokā, Andhārasundarī, Ālokasundarī, Prabhāvatī, Atiśayavatī, Rūpavatī, Surūpā, Asitā, Saumyā, Kāṇā,[247] Menā,[248] Nandinī, Upanandinī, and Lokottarā. {1.100}
These great yakṣiṇīs, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of yakṣiṇīs, bowing to Lord Śākyamuni from a distance, were present in this great gathering. Also the great piśācīs, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of piśācīs, joined in, paying respects to Lord Śākyamuni. They were: {1.101}
Maṇḍitikā, Pāṃsupiśācī, Raudrapiśācī, Ulkāpiśācī, Jvālāpiśācī, Bhasmodgirā, Piśitāśinī, Durdharā, Bhrāmarī, Mohanī, Tarjanī, Rohiṇikā, Govāhiṇikā, Lokāntikā, Bhasmāntikā, Pīluvatī, Bahulavatī, Bahulā, Durdāntā, Elā, Cihnitikā, Dhūmāntikā,[249] Dhūmā, and Sudhūmā.[250]{1.102}
These great piśācīs, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of piśācīs, also entered this great gathering. Also, the mātṛs and the great mātṛs, F.106.aF.123.a who wander throughout the world harming living beings and seizing oblatory offerings of food and garlands, joined in. They were: {1.103}
Brahmāṇī, Māheśvarī, Vaiṣṇavī, Kaumārī, Cāmuṇḍā, Vārāhī, Aindrī, Yāmyā, Āgneyā, Vaivasvatī, Lokāntakarī, Vāruṇī, Aiśānī, Vāyavyā, Paraprāṇaharā, Mukhamaṇḍitikā, Śakunī, Mahāśakunī, Pūtanā, Kaṭapūtanā, and Skandā. {1.104}
These great mātṛs, with retinues of many hundreds of thousands of mātṛs, were present in this great assembly, calling out, “Homage to the Buddha!” {1.105}
Similarly, the entire expanse of space with its many hundreds of thousands of beings, both human and nonhuman, sentient and non-sentient, from the great hell of Avīci to the pinnacle of saṃsāra, became open and accessible to sight. Within the totality of beings there was not a single one who would be in disharmony with another. By the blessing of the Buddha enriched with the magical power of the bodhisattvas, all these beings then saw Lord Buddha and the divine youth Mañjuśrī seated on the crowns of their heads. {1.106}
Now, Lord Śākyamuni, having looked over this entire assembly with his buddha eye, said to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, “Please speak, O pure being! Give a full presentation of the section on samādhi that explains the meaning of mantra practice. Present this basket of bodhisattva teachings if you think that the moment is right.” {1.107}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, with the approval of Lord Śākyamuni, entered the samādhi called the ornament of a contiguous formationF.106.bF.123.bsolid as fused vajras, adorned with miraculous displays[251]of the space-like nature. As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, he blessed the realm of the Pure Abode, which extended over many hundreds of thousands of leagues, so that it became made of vajras. All the many yakṣas, rākṣasas, gandharvas, mārutas, and piśācas—in short, the entire universe inhabited by living beings—became situated by the blessing of the bodhisattvas in this great palace that resembled diamond jewels and gems, and there took their seats together, without any mutual enmity. {1.108}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, seeing that this great assembly had gathered, said to Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, “Ho, ho, Great Lord of Wrath, who emanates from all the buddhas and bodhisattvas! Please protect this great gathering! Protect and enthrall it! Tame the wicked ones! Awaken the gentle ones into realization! Placate the implacable ones! As long as I am teaching this bodhisattva basket that accords with my own mantra practice and contains the extensive instructions on mantra practice and the maṇḍala, please go outside and guard this gathering.” {1.109}
Thus addressed, the Great Lord of Wrath, of extremely ugly, misshapen appearance,[252] acknowledged the command and went outside in order to protect all the beings and to train the assembled audience in every respect. Letting out a terrible roar into the four directions, above, below, and across, he took up his position in the form of Yamāntaka Lord of Wrath, with a retinue of many hundreds of thousands of wrathful deities. Thus all beings, having become peaceful and content, did not transgress his orders. They also heard these words: “Those who would disobey this injunction, their heads will split into one hundred parts F.107.aF.124.a like a garland made of basil plants. For such is the power of the bodhisattvic blessing. {1.110}
Mañjuśrī then gave a Dharma teaching on the practice of his mantra.
“When a bodhisattva, a great being, possesses a single quality, his mantras become effective. What is this single quality? It is the mind that beholds all phenomena without mentally elaborating upon them. {1.111}
“When a bodhisattva, a great being, possesses two qualities, his mantras become effective. What are these two? They are (1) never abandoning bodhicitta, and (2) having equanimity toward all sentient beings. {1.112}
“With three qualities, his exposition of the meaning of mantra practice will be perfect. What are these three? They are (1) never abandoning any sentient being, (2) guarding the vows of the bodhisattva’s discipline, and (3) never abandoning his mantra. {1.113}
“When a bodhisattva, who has made the initial resolution of a bodhisattva, possesses four qualities, his mantras become effective. What are these four? They are (1) never abandoning his mantra, (2) not neutralizing the mantras of others,[253] (3) generating loving kindness for all sentient beings, and (4) suffusing his mindstream with compassion. The mantras of a bodhisattva who has made an initial resolution and possesses these four qualities become effective. {1.114}
“Five qualities will bring the bodhisattva’s mastery of his mantra practice and his engagement in the basket of teachings to perfection. What are these five? They are (1) frequenting solitary places, (2) frequenting remote, peaceful places, (3) not hating others, (4) not considering employing mundane mantras, and (5) establishing others in discipline, learning, and good character. These five qualities F.107.bF.124.b will completely fulfill the purpose of his mantra practice. {1.115}
“Six qualities will completely fulfill the purpose of mantra practice. What are these six? They are (1) not giving up faith in the Three Jewels, (2) not giving up faith in the bodhisattvas, (3) praising both mundane and supramundane mantras, (4) perceiving the sphere of phenomena that is free of elaboration, (5) not rejecting the sūtras of the Great Vehicle that contain profound words and meaning, (6) never losing heart, (7) pursuing the mantra practice, and (8) not letting virtue decline.[254] These six qualities will bring complete success in the practice of mantra and the knowledge of vidyās. {1.116}
“There are seven qualities that lead to the taking up of mantra practice that are helpful at the time of the actual application of magical vidyās. What are these seven? They are (1) taking up the profound path by cultivating the perfection of wisdom; (2) resolving upon the bodhisattva conduct that consists in reciting, teaching, studying, and writing; (3) taking up the right demeanor, thoughts, recollections, and the holding on to insight, without being impeded by time, place, ritual injunctions, mantra recitation, homa offerings, vows of silence, or the practice of austerities;[255] (4) entering the way of the deep teachings of the Great Vehicle through the two accumulations of a bodhisattva; (5) skill in the procedures of summoning the mantra deities of one’s own lineage[256] or in effecting protection;[257] (6) cultivating great compassion, great loving kindness, great equanimity, and great sympathetic joy, as well as the six perfections;[258] (7) pursuing the two types of omniscient wisdom by bringing together the sphere of sentient beings, the sphere of phenomena, and ‘suchness’ through nonconceptuality; (8) never abandoning any sentient being; and (9) not seeking the Lesser Vehicle.
[259] These seven qualities lead to the perfect mastery of mantras and magical knowledge.{1.117}F.108.aF.125.a
“Eight qualities will completely fulfill the purpose of the practice of mantra and magical vidyās.[260] What are these eight? They are (1) faith in karmic results, both seen and unseen; (2) refraining from investigating anything out of mere curiosity or the desire to know;[261] (3) displaying magical powers made effective through the grace of a bodhisattva;[262] (4) out of respect for the teacher, learning from him the undistorted mantras;[263] (5) taking to heart the master’s instructions on the buddhas and bodhisattvas’ own mantra system; (6) keeping one’s word;[264] (7) renouncing all of one’s possessions; (8) being able to skillfully explain the signs received in one’s sleep about suitable and unsuitable places for gaining accomplishment;[265] (9) freeing oneself from all stains of stinginess, sleepiness, and dullness, and constantly practicing diligence; and (11) always offering oneself to the buddhas and bodhisattvas.
[266] In short, never being complacent about accumulating the roots of virtue, donning great armor, or desiring to remove all obstacles, one will ascend the seat of awakening and experience great bliss as anticipated. One will be known as a great being and will also fall in with other great beings. One will never be separated from a spiritual friend and will be accompanied by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the bodhisattva. The aforementioned eight qualities will completely fulfill the purpose of mantra practice.{1.118}
“Friends! To sum up, a person who is not separated from bodhicitta, who is devoted to the Three Jewels, who continually exerts himself with unwearied mind even if he were of extremely bad disposition, will succeed in the infinite and marvelous mantra practice of a bodhisattva as taught in the detailed chapter on my mantra, and will develop the mind that arises from this practice. It should not be known to be otherwise. Once someone has become free from dualistic thinking, he will succeed even if his original motive was mere curiosity.” {1.119}F.108.bF.125.b
Then, the entire gathering, graced with the presence of buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and venerable śrāvakas, said these words: {1.120}
“Good! It is good, O son of the victorious ones! This Dharma discourse, which leads beings to enter an illustrious Dharma path whose special purpose is mantra practice, has been well presented for the benefit of all beings. O divine youth Mañjuśrī, this talk that is in accord with mantra practice and complies with the requirements of a fine Dharma discourse has been eloquently presented. If any king has this chapter, which records the coming together of the audience, retold, or causes it to be memorized or reflected upon, or if, before a battle, he has it mounted on an elephant and worshiped with various flowers, incense, scents, and ointments, there we will also be present. We will bring his opponents and enemies under control, and we will destroy the armies that oppose him. Or, if anyone keeps it in their house written in the form of a book, we will grant to that son or daughter of the Buddha family—be they a king or a queen, a monk or a nun, or a male or female lay practitioner—protection, prosperity, long life, life free from disease, and the continuous increase of good fortune.” {1.121}
Having said this, the great assembly fell silent. {1.122}
This concludes the first chapter, describing the coming together of the audience, from this great root manual containing an exposition of the mantra practices of the Great Vehicle, an extensive textbook that is a miraculous bodhisattva display of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth.Chapter 2
Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, gazing at this entire assembly, F.109.aF.126.a entered the samādhi called the gaze that causes all sentient beings to take up the samaya pledge. As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, a ray of light issued from his navel. Along with many hundreds of thousands of millions of other rays, it entirely illuminated all the realms of sentient beings and, reflecting back onto the realm of the Pure Abode, suffused it with light. {2.1}
Then the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, the great being, addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Please teach, O son of the victorious ones,[267] the full chapter on the maṇḍala called Establishing All Beings in the Samaya, which concerns the accomplishment of the practice that is common to all beings. Having taken up this practice, beings will accomplish your collection of mantras, in addition to accomplishing all mundane and supramundane mantras.” {2.2}
Being thus requested by the lord of guhyakas and yakṣas, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, taught the most secret system of the maṇḍala. He displayed the magical feat called impelling all the vidyā beings. Raising his right hand, he drew the attention of the assembled congregation by using the tip of his finger, from which emerged many hundreds of thousands of millions of vidyādhara kings.[268] Upon emerging, they illuminated the entire realm of the Pure Abode with great light and remained there. {2.3}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, then pronounced the heart mantra of Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, a sole hero suitable for all activities. This mantra effects summoning, dismissing, pacifying, enriching,[269] and assaulting. It bestows the ability to become invisible, travel through space, enter subterranean paradises, and walk with great speed.[270] It can be used for the activities of bringing beings into one’s presence, sowing enmity among them or enthralling them, and obtaining all kinds of F.109.bF.126.b perfume, garlands, ointments, and lamps. Being the chief mantra in its own tradition, it can accomplish, in short, anything that it is employed for. It is called Three Syllables. It is a great hero that accomplishes all purposes; it is the Great Lord of Wrath himself.[271] And what is it? {2.4}
“Oṁ āḥ hrūṃ!”
This is the all-accomplishing heart mantra of the Great Lord of Wrath, prescribed by the great being Mañjughoṣa for all maṇḍalas and all types of mantra practice. It will destroy all obstacles. {2.5}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, then raised his right hand and, placing it next to the head of Lord of Wrath, said, “Homage to all the buddhas! May the lord buddhas, established in the infinite world spheres throughout the ten directions, pay heed! May the bodhisattvas with great magical powers, present throughout the limitless universe, empower this pledge!” {2.6}
Having said this, he turned the Lord of Wrath around and dispatched him. As soon as he was dispatched, the Great Lord of Wrath went to every world sphere and, in an instant, subjugated all ill-willed beings possessed of great magical powers and brought them into the great assembly in the realm of the Pure Abode. Having thus established them there, he assumed a form surrounded by a blaze of light and placed himself atop the heads of the evil beings. {2.7}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, looking at the gathering, said, “Please listen, all you respectable beings! Anyone who would transgress my samaya will here be brought into submission by the Lord of Wrath. For that reason F.110.aF.127.a the words of the lord buddhas and the bodhisattvas who possess great magical powers—the words that convey the meaning of the samaya pledges and the secret mantra—should not be disobeyed. Please listen well and keep in your minds what I will tell you. {2.8}
“Homage to all the buddhas!
“Oṁ, ra ra! Do remember! O perfect teacher possessing the form of a divine youth! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Svāhā![272]{2.9}
“This, friends, is my root mantra. It is called Noble Mañjuśrī. The mudrā that should be employed with this root mantra is the so-called great five-crested mudrā. {2.10}
“Next is the all-accomplishing heart mantra. I will now pronounce this auspicious mantra that is suitable for all actions:
“Oṁ, this [mantra] is [my] homage to speech![273]{2.11}
“The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is the one called three-crested. It increases all pleasure and good fortune. {2.12}
“There is, in this set, also the subsidiary heart mantra:
“Speech, hūṁ![274]{2.13}
“The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is also the one called three-crested. It will magically summon any being. {2.14}
“There is, in this set, also the ultimate, one-syllable heart mantra:
“Oṁ.[275]{2.15}
“The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is the one called peacock seat. It enthralls all beings and captivates the hearts of all buddhas.[276]{2.16}
“There is another mantra, of eight syllables,[277] most propitious, with great purificatory power, which is called Great Hero. It severs the path of the threefold existence,[278] it prevents all unhappy rebirths, it pacifies everything, it performs all activities, it brings forbearance,[279] and it leads to nirvāṇa. It is like meeting the Buddha directly. I myself, the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī,[280] have assumed the form of this most secret mantra[281] for the benefit of beings. It fulfills all wishes and, merely by being called to mind, purifies the five acts of immediate retribution. Is there a need to say more? So, what is this mantra? {2.17}
“Oṁ, āḥ! O wise one,[282]hūṁ! You, the sky traveler![283]
“Friends, this mantra is my very self in the form of the eight syllables. F.110.bF.127.b It is a great hero, the ultimately secret heart mantra that is like buddhahood itself.[284] It can, in short, help with any task. The extent of its qualities cannot be described in full even in many hundreds of thousands of millions of eons. There is also a mudrā that belongs with it—it is called great fortitude, and it fulfills all aspirations. {2.18}
“There is also, in this set of mantras, a summoning mantra:
“Oṁ, he he! O divine youth! You [assume] every form to awaken childish beings through speech. Please come, O lord, come! You, who playfully hold the blue lotus of the divine youth,[285] please remain in the center of the maṇḍala, please do! Please remember your samaya pledge! You are a perfect teacher, hūṁ! Do not delay! Act! Phaṭ, svāhā![286]{2.19}
“This mantra calls upon Lord Mañjuśrī and also summons all beings—all bodhisattvas, all pratyekabuddhas, venerable śrāvakas, gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, garuḍas, kinnaras, mahoragas, piśācas, rākṣasas, and all spirits. {2.20}
“Should one incant sandalwood water seven times and throw it upward, downward, across, and all around in the four directions, all the buddhas and bodhisattvas will come, along with Mañjuśrī himself with his retinue, all the mundane and supramundane mantra deities,[287] the entire host of spirits, and all beings. {2.21}
The incense mantra is as follows:
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! [The mantra is:]
“Oṁ, dhu, be steady, be steady! Remain within the fragrant flame of incense, hūṁ! Remember your samaya! Svāhā![288]{2.22}
“Having blended together sandalwood, camphor, and saffron, one should offer it as incense to the tathāgatas, all the bodhisattvas, and all beings. Their minds gratified by the incense, they will all be drawn[289] to it. The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is called garland of lotuses. This auspicious mudrā attracts all sentient beings. This is the mudrā of ritual activity,[290] called F.111.aF.128.agarland of lotuses. {2.23}
“When all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, and also all sentient beings, have arrived, one should prepare a welcome offering. Having infused water with camphor, sandalwood, and saffron, one should mix into it the flowers of royal jasmine, sacred jasmine, or Arabian jasmine; the blossoms of the pannay tree, cobra’s saffron tree, bulletwood tree, and the flowers of crepe jasmine; or any other fragrant flowers that may be in season. One should present the welcome offering while saying the following mantra: {2.24}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is:
“He, he, O greatly compassionate one who assumes all forms! Please accept the welcome offering and let [the others] accept it. Remember your samaya pledge! Endure, endure! Enter into the center of the maṇḍala and let [the others] enter! You who have compassion for all beings, please take, take [this offering], hūṁ! Svāhā to the one who abides in space![291]{2.25}
“The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is called the complete; it is steadfast and suitable for all beings. There is also, in this set, the mantra of perfume: {2.26}
“Homage to all the buddhas! Homage to the tathāgata Glorious with Surrounding Fragrance and Light! The mantra is:
“Gandhā, Gandhā! Rich in fragrance! You who gratify with fragrance! Take this perfume, take![292]Svāhā to the one who abides in equanimity![293]{2.27}
“In this set there is also the mudrā that fulfills all hopes called blossom, and a mantra of flowers, which is as follows: {2.28}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! Homage to the tathāgata Saṃkusumita Rājendra! The mantra is:
“Kusumā, Kusumā! Rich in flowers! Dwelling in the flower palace with an abundance of flowers! Svāhā![294]
“One should burn incense while saying the mantra of incense given above. {2.29}
“Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is:
“He, he! O venerable great being with the gaze of the Buddha! Do not delay! Please take this bali and let [the others] take it! Hūṁ, hūṁ! You with all [forms]! Ra ra, ṭa ṭa! Phaṭ! Svāhā![295]{2.31}
“One should offer, with the above mantra, bali of food that satisfies all the senses. F.111.bF.128.b In this set there also is a mudrā called spear, which wards off all evildoers. Here belongs also the mantra of lamps: {2.32}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers who remove the darkness of ignorance! Homage to the tathāgata Splendid with Light and Fragrance All Around! The mantra is:
“He, he! O venerable lord with a body adorned with hundreds of thousands of rays of light! Please manifest [yourself] magically, please do! O great bodhisattva with a body illuminated by radiating light! Please frolic and play! Behold [with compassion] the totality of beings, behold! Svāhā![296]{2.33}
“This is the mantra of lamps; with it, one should offer butter lamps. The mudrā that belongs with it is called beholder of all beings. In this set belongs also the mantra that produces fire: {2.34}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is:
“Burn, burn! Set ablaze, set ablaze! Huṁ! [297]{2.35}
“This is the mantra that produces fire. The mudrā that belongs with this mantra is called the hollow space. It is famed throughout the world and illuminates all beings with light. It has been taught before by the best among sages to the bodhisattva Dhīmat.”[298]{2.36}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, said this to the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi:
“These mantric formulae, O lord of guhyakas, are most esoteric and require secrecy. {2.37}
“Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, the perfect teachers!
“Oṁ, act, act! Please carry out my task! Break all the troublemakers, break! Burn all the vajravināyakas,[300] burn! Mūrdhaṭaka, you who bring death! One with misshapen form! Cook, cook all miscreants! Bringer of the death of Mahāgaṇapati! Bind, bind all the spirits who cause possession! O six-faced, six-armed, six-footed one! Please summon Rudra! Summon Viṣṇu! Summon the gods, Brahmā and so forth! Do not delay, do not delay! Protect, protect! Enter into the center of the maṇḍala! Remember your samaya pledge! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! F.112.aF.129.aSvāhā![301]{2.40}
“This mantra, O supreme lord of guhyakas, which is supremely secret, is called Six-Faced Mañjuśrī of Great Courage.[302] He is the Great Lord of Wrath himself, the destroyer of all obstacle makers. As soon as it is recited, even the bodhisattvas established on the tenth bodhisattva level will flee, not to mention wicked trouble makers. As soon as it is recited, great protection is effected. The mudrā that belongs with it is called great spear;[303] it destroys all obstacles. The following is the heart mantra of this Lord of Wrath: {2.41}
“Oṁ, hrīṁḥ, jñīḥ! You with contorted face, huṁ! Destroy all the enemies! Paralyze them! Phaṭ phaṭ! Svāhā![304]
“With this mantra one can afflict all enemies with severe pain or quartan fever.[305] But if one keeps reciting for as long as one likes, or until loving kindness or compassion arise,[306] the target will not be freed at the end of the recitation and will die.[307] Thus, this should only be performed on enemies of the Three Jewels and not on others with peaceful minds. {2.42}
“One should also employ the mudrā great spear.[308] In this set there is also a subsidiary heart mantra:
“Oṁ, hrīṁḥ! O Kālarūpa! Huṁ, khaṁ! Svāhā![309]{2.43}
“Only the great spear mudrā should be employed. One will be able to deal with any wicked being that one wants to. There is also a supreme heart mantra, rich in the blessing of all the buddhas, consisting of just one syllable: {2.44}
“Hūṁ!
“This mantra accomplishes all ritual activities. With this mantra, too, only the great spear mudrā should be employed. It will put an end to all misfortune, and will enthrall all beings. In short, this mantra, the Lord of Wrath, can be employed in all ritual activities. It should be recited, especially at the time of the accomplishment, at the center of the maṇḍala. {2.45}
“The following are the mantras of dismissing:
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantras are:
“Win a victory, an auspicious victory, O most compassionate [lord] whose nature is everything! F.112.bF.129.b Go, go to your own abode and dismiss [also] all the buddhas with their retinues. Cause them to return to their respective dwellings. Remember the pledge. May the words of [these] mantras fulfill my every purpose. Make my wishes come true, svāhā![310]{2.46}
“The above mantra of dismissing can be employed in all ritual activities. The accompanying mudrā is called auspicious seat. With this mudrā one should provide the seat.[311] The dismissal is effected after mentally reciting the above mantra seven times. {2.47}
“Mastery of this mantra is useful for all mundane and supramundane maṇḍalas and mantras. It is to be applied to the observances at the time of samaya recitation.”[312]{2.48}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, again directed his gaze at the Pure Abode and the great assembly gathered there, and taught in full the section on the mantras of the host of vidyās from his own great retinue-circle: {2.49}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers!
“Oṁ riṭi svāhā!
“This vidyā, Keśinī by name, is an attendant of Mañjuśrī and may be employed in all rites. When combined with the great five-crested mudrā, she may be employed in all rites involving poison. {2.50}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers!
“Oṁ niṭi!
“This vidyā, Upakeśinī by name, may be employed in all rites. When combined with the mudrā budding blossom, she may be employed in all rites involving demonic possession.[313]{2.51}
“Homage to all the buddhas, whose conduct is impeccable!
“Oṁ niḥ![314]
“Oṁ jñaiḥ svāhā![315]
“Homage to all the buddhas, the followers of impeccable paths! The vidyā of Varadā is: F.113.aF.130.a
“Oṁ, Varadā! Svāhā![317]
“Oṁ bhūri svāhā![318]
“Oṁ ture svāhā!
“Oṁ, Vilokinī! Svāhā![320]
“Oṁ, you are the totality [of things], the source of everything, possessed of all forms! Summon, summon! Enter [them], enter! Remember your pledge! Ru ru! Please remain! Svāhā![321]{2.59}
“Oṁ, you with the white, splendorous body! Svāhā![323]{2.61}
“Oṁ, khi khiri khi riri! The wrinkled one! Paralyze, smash, stupefy, and enthrall all enemies! Svāhā![324]{2.63}
“Oṁ, Śrī![326]{2.65}
“Oṁ, Ajitā! One with a youthful form! Come, come! Help me with my affairs! Svāhā![327]{2.67}
“Oṁ, Jayā, svāhā! Vijayā, svāhā! Ajitā, svāhā! Aparājitā, svāhā![328]{2.69}
“Oṁ, divine youth! Great prince, play, play! O six-faced one, authorized by the bodhisattvas! Mounted on a peacock seat and raising your hand with a spear in it! Your color is red and you are fond of red fragrances and unguents. Kha kha! Eat, eat, eat! Huṁ! Dance, dance! Your images are worshiped with red flowers. Please remember your samaya! Move about, move! Stir them up, do, do! Quick, quick! Don’t delay! Carry out all my tasks, do! You with a bright and colorful form, remain, remain, huṁ! You have the authorization from all of the buddhas, svāhā!”[331]{2.72}
“Oṁ hūṁ jaḥ.
“Oṁ, you disfigured graha! Huṁ phaṭ, svāhā![334]{2.82}
“This divine youth called Mañjuśrī-Kārttikeya is an attendant of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. He may be employed in all rites. By merely reciting him, he will accomplish all tasks—frighten any being away,[335] summon it, enthrall it, cause it to wither, or smash it; or, he will bring whatever the practitioner who has mastered his mantra may desire. {2.85}
“Oṁ, Brahmā, good Brahmā! You with infinite energy and splendor! Bring peace, svāhā![336]{2.86}
“Oṁ, you with a garuḍa for a mount! Holding a discus in your hand! The four-armed one! Hūṁ hūṁ! Remember your samaya! Bodhisattva [Mañjuśrī] is commanding you, svāhā![337]{2.89}
“Oṁ, great Maheśvara, lord of living beings! Having a bull for an emblem! With your matted hair hanging down from a topknot, and your form ash-colored with [the dusting of] white ashes! Hūṁ, phaṭ phaṭ! Bodhisattva [Mañjuśrī] is commanding you, svāhā![340]{2.92}
“Oṁ, bird, great bird! With your wings spread like lotuses! Destroyer of all serpents! Kha kha! Devour, devour! Remember your samaya, hūṁ! Remain! Bodhisattva Mañjuśrī is commanding you, svāhā![342]{2.95}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, gazing at the realm of the Pure Abode and the great gathering that had assembled there, entered the samādhi called the one that animates all samayas. When this samādhi is entered, every being develops the intention to engage in conduct to liberate all sentient beings.[349]{2.106}
As soon as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, entered this samādhi, the entire realm of the Pure Abode changed, by way of a wondrous and inconceivable transformation through his bodhisattva power, into a beautiful maṇḍala adorned with ornaments of jewels and gems of many colors. None of those who have undertaken the conduct of pratyekabuddhas or venerable śrāvakas, nor any of the bodhisattvas, these mighty lords established on the tenth level, would be able to paint or supervise the painting of such a maṇḍala, so what need is there to mention ordinary people? {2.107}F.115.bF.132.b
When they beheld Mañjuśrī, the princely youth, established in the state of accomplishment of the samaya of this divine, noble maṇḍala,[350] all the blessed buddhas, pratyekabuddhas, venerable śrāvakas, bodhisattvas established on the tenth level, crown princes consecrated to kingship, and all those who undertook their respective conduct including beings that are free from or subject to karmic influences perceived themselves, through the blessing of the divine youth Mañjuśrī, as being part of this inconceivable maṇḍala arisen as the consequence of buddha or bodhisattva activity through the mental power of his special samādhi. It is not possible for ordinary people even to visualize this maṇḍala in their minds, let alone paint it or supervise a painting of it. {2.108}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, addressed the beings who were about to enter the samaya[351] of the maṇḍala of this great assembly as follows:
“Listen, friends! This samaya[352] must not be violated even by the tathāgatas and the bodhisattvas, let alone by other beings, be they noble or not.” {2.109}
Then Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, spoke to Vajrapāṇi, the general of the guhyakas:
“Mentally generated samayas[353] beyond the scope of humans have been taught before, O son of the victorious ones. But I will now teach the samaya[354] of the completely liberated tathāgatas, suitable for humans, whereby beings, once they have entered it, will attain the accomplishment of all worldly and transcendent mantras.”[355]{2.110}
Vajrapāṇi, the general of the guhyakas, replied to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, “Speak, speak, O son of the victorious ones, if the time seems right to you! {2.111}F.116.aF.133.a
At that moment, Vajrapāṇi, the general of the guhyakas, supplicated the great being Mañjuśrī:
“Ho, ho, great bodhisattva! Please teach concisely the maṇḍala procedure for the benefit of all beings.” {2.118}
Being thus requested by the general of the guhyakas, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, commenced teaching the maṇḍala procedure for the benefit of all beings. {2.119}
“To start, on a bright fortnight of the month of Caitra or Vaiśākha, which is a ‘fortnight of miracles,’ on an auspicious day, after ascertaining the favorable positions of the planets and when the moon is in the right constellation, either on the first day of the bright fortnight or during the full moon, or at some other time, other than the rainy months, one[363] should consecrate the ground in the morning. {2.120}
“One should take one’s quarters in a city, or where oneself or the maṇḍala master lives, or by a river that flows into the ocean, or near an ocean shore that is to the northeast of the city,[364] neither too near nor too far from F.116.bF.133.b where the maṇḍala master lives. One should build there a hut of leaves and stay there alone for a period of a week or two. {2.121}
“There, one should choose a place on the ground that is clean, covers a square area measuring sixteen or twelve cubits across,[365] and is free from stones, gravel, ash, coals, chaff, eggshells,[366] and bones. Having cleaned and prepared this place well, one should sprinkle it using water that is free of living organisms and mixed with the five products of the cow,[367] or water mixed with sandalwood, camphor, and saffron. This water should be incanted one thousand and eight times with Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, recited while forming the great five-crested mudrā. One should throw the water in the four cardinal and four intermediate directions, upward, downward, horizontally, and all around the area. {2.122}
“This square area on the ground with four equal sides may be sixteen, twelve, or eight cubits across—sixteen cubits is the largest size, twelve the medium size, and eight cubits is the smallest. Such a maṇḍala has been proclaimed by the all-knowing ones to be of three kinds: the largest is for those who desire kingship, the medium serves for bringing enjoyments, and the smallest, which merely safeguards[368] the samaya, can be used in all activities as it is auspicious. {2.123}
“One should thus draw the maṇḍala in the size that one desires, and excavate its area to the depth of two cubits. If one sees stones, coals, ashes, bones, hairs, or any other products of living beings, one should dig at another location. It ought to be a place where one will not be obstructed or disturbed. If such a place is difficult to find, one should go to a mountaintop, or dig the layers of sand, or other soil, on the beach of an estuary, the sea, or a large river. After examining the place with great care, cleaning it, and removing all living creatures, one should draw the outline. {2.124}
“One should further smear this entire area with the five products of the cow mixed with water uncontaminated by living organisms and fill it with unpolluted clay from a riverbank or an anthill, making sure that the clay does not contain living creatures. Once the area has been filled and well beaten, with an even surface, one should create the threefold maṇḍala as required,[369] with a well-beaten and even surface all over. F.117.aF.134.a In its four corners one should plant four stakes made of cutch wood, incanting them seven times with the Lord of Wrath.[370] Then, having likewise incanted a five-colored thread seven times with the heart mantra of the Lord of Wrath, one should completely enclose with it the maṇḍala, tracing its four-sided shape. {2.125}
“One should trace in the same way a four-sided shape delimiting the intermediate area and another one delimiting the inner area.[371] The maṇḍala master, standing in the intermediate area, should recite the root mantra of his own vidyā[372] one thousand and eight times. By forming the great five-crested mudrā while reciting the root mantra the master will afford protection for his assistants and himself. After reciting, he should step outside and circumambulate the maṇḍala clockwise. Then, facing east, he should sit on a bundle of kuśa grass and contemplate all the buddhas and bodhisattvas.[373] Then, he should completely surround the maṇḍala with kuśa grass,[374] tracing its quadrangular shape. On the outside of it, he should keep two cows for one night without food and then have them led away.[375]{2.126}
“The maṇḍala master, who has completed the preparatory rites, is skilled in the art of mantra in his tantric tradition, is fully intent on the Mahāyāna goal of benefiting sentient beings through skillful means, and has fasted for one night, should prepare, with help from his able assistants and following the prescribed procedure as gleaned from scientific treatises (śāstra), five-colored powder, finely ground, sparkling, and well refined. Having incanted it with the six-syllable heart mantra,[376] he should place it in the center of the maṇḍala.[377]{2.127}
“On the outside, he should adorn the area with raised banners and flags and four gateways. Upon supports of plantain posts he should hang clusters of fruits and have the area resound with kettledrums, tambourines, and the sounds of conchs and lutes. He should have others recite texts of the Mahāyāna sūtras, with their exalted words, containing Dharma teachings suitable for the fourfold assembly. They should be recited in the four quarters[378] as follows: {2.128}
“The blessed Prajñāpāramitā should be read in the south, F.117.bF.134.b the noble Candrapradīpasamādhi[379] in the west, the noble Gaṇḍavyūha[380] in the north, and the noble Suvarṇaprabhāsottamasūtra[381] in the eastern direction. If the texts are not available, the master should instruct four Dharma reciters, learned in these four sūtras, to recite them accordingly. Then the maṇḍala master, rising up in order to listen to the Dharma,[382] should strew white flowers of nice fragrance mixed with sandalwood, camphor, and saffron all over the maṇḍala while reciting the root mantra. Having thus bestrewn it, he should exit the maṇḍala. {2.129}
“After seven days, he should bring in two or three highly skilled painters of sacred images—ones who rely on sacrificial food, give rise to bodhicitta, and follow the prescribed observances and fasts. The master should tie their hair into topknots while reciting the root mantra. Then, after obtaining nice and finely ground powder in five vivid colors and made from gold, silver,[383] and various shining jewels, the master should request some great kings who follow the Dharma, very wealthy and pure, to commission the painters to do the main drawing,[384] one which has awakening for its goal and invariably leads to such.[385]{2.130}
“The maṇḍala master should take up the previously prepared powder, form the great five-crested mudrā, and seal[388] the powder with it while reciting the root mantra. He should have the second officiating master dig a fire pit outside of the maṇḍala to the southeast, following the prescribed ritual. F.118.aF.135.a The pit should be two cubits across and one cubit deep, its rim with anthers like a lotus flower.[389]{2.134}
“A fire should be lit outside using sticks of the bilva tree for firewood and sticks of the dhak tree, as thin as the anthers of a lotus flower, for kindling. The former should be nine inches[390] long, moist with sap, and smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. The officiant should summon the fire deity[391] by reciting the root mantra or the six-syllable heart mantra[392] while forming the mudrā the fist. Having summoned it, he should use the previously explained single-syllable root mantra or the heart mantra[393] to once again perform one hundred and eight oblations. {2.135}
“Then the master of the maṇḍala, having tied on a turban and prepared the implements, should himself guide the skilled painters in their work.[394] Thinking of the buddhas and bodhisattvas, he should light incense while saying the same incense mantra[395] as previously specified. Folding his cupped palms together, he should bow to all the buddhas[396] and bodhisattvas, and to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Having thus paid homage, he should fetch the colored powders and let the painters do their work. They should fill in with the powders each shape as outlined.[397] Employing this procedure, the maṇḍala master should first supervise the painting of the blessed lord, Buddha Śākyamuni endowed with all the supreme features, sitting on a bejeweled lion throne in the realm of the Pure Abode and teaching the Dharma. When the image has been created, the assistant to the maṇḍala master should perform self-protection by reciting the root mantra and then offer bali that satisfies all spirits. He should throw it into the four directions outside of the maṇḍala and also upward and downward. {2.136}
“After bathing, ritually pure and wearing clean clothes, he should go to the fire pit and perform the rite of protection and offer one thousand and eight oblations of ghee mixed with saffron while reciting the root mantra. Subsequently, he should sit down on a bundle of kuśa grass and remain there, reciting. {2.137}
“He should incant white mustard seeds one hundred and eight times with Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, and place them between two earthenware bowls.[398]F.118.bF.135.b If an obstacle maker is perceived in any form, be it a misshapen figure, a terrible sound, wind, rain, bad weather, or any other form, the assistant should, in a wrathful state of mind, offer seven mustard seed oblations.[399] The obstacles will then vanish. If the obstacle makers are human, he should offer five oblations.[400] They will become paralyzed, lose their strength, and die or will immediately be seized by nonhuman beings. There is no doubt about this. Even Śakra would die swiftly, let alone human beings with wicked minds or other obstacle makers.[401] Seized by the fear of Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, they will disappear, fleeing in all directions. {2.138}
“The assistant should remain seated at the same place, on a bundle of kuśa grass, and keep reciting Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath. The master of the maṇḍala should then let the painters execute the painting of two pratyekabuddhas, sitting in a cross-legged posture on lotus seats to the right of the painting of Lord Śākyamuni. Below the pratyekabuddhas, two great śrāvakas listening to the Dharma discourse should be painted. {2.139}
“To the right of them, there should be the blessed lord, the noble Avalokiteśvara, adorned with every ornament, white as the autumn moon,[402] sitting on a lotus seat, holding a lotus with his left hand and making a boon-granting gesture with his right. To the right of him, again, there should be the blessed Pāṇḍaravāsinī, holding a lotus with her left hand and saluting Lord Śākyamuni with her right, sitting on a lotus seat, and wearing a diadem on her hair tied in a topknot,[403] a turban of white silk,[404] white garments, and a tightly fitting silken bodice.[405] She should be painted with three dots made of black ash.[406] Tārā and Bhṛkuṭī should be depicted in a similar way, sitting on their respective seats and displaying their specific postures. Above them are the blessed Prajñāpāramitā, F.119.aF.136.aTathāgatalocanā, and Uṣṇīṣarājñī.[407]{2.140}
“The sixteen bodhisattvas should also be included: Samantabhadra; Kṣitigarbha; Gaganagañja; Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin; Apāyajaha; Maitreya with yak-tail whisk in his hand and looking at the Blessed Buddha; Vimalamati; Vimalaketu; Sudhana;[408] Candraprabha; Vimalakīrti; Bhaiṣajyarāja; Sarvadharmīśvararāja; Lokagati; Mahāmati; and Patidhara.[409] Each of these sixteen great bodhisattvas should be depicted in a peaceful form adorned with all types of jewelry. {2.141}
“The chief vidyārājas and vidyārājñīs should all be painted in the forms and postures of the Lotus family as passed down by the tradition[410] or described in scriptures and arranged in their respective places. On the periphery, a four-sided area should be designated and strewn with lotus flowers; in this should be included whatever other vidyā deities one can think of. {2.142}
“The two pratyekabuddhas on the right side of Lord Śākyamuni, as mentioned above, are Gandhamādana and Upāriṣṭa.[411] The maṇḍala, facing east, should have entry gates painted on all sides. On the left side of Lord Śākyamuni should be the other two pratyekabuddhas, Candana and Siddha. Below them should be the two great śrāvakas, Mahākāśyapa and Mahākātyāyana. {2.143}
“To their left is the noble Vajrapāṇi in his peaceful form, dark blue like a water lily, adorned with all types of jewelry. He holds a fly-whisk in his right hand; his left is clenched into a vajra fist in an expression of wrath. Vajrāṅkuśī, Vajraśṛṅkhalā, Subāhu, and Vajrasenā should all be painted in their respective locations, wearing their specific apparel and emblems and surrounded by retinues of vidyārājas and vidyārājñīs. F.119.bF.136.b Their forms,[412] postures, and so forth should be drawn according to the tradition. To their left, a symbol of the double vajra should be painted in the shape of a square. Once painted, the following should be said: ‘In this place, where vidyā beings have not been known to assemble, may they now come to reside.’[413]{2.144}
“Above them should be painted the six pāramitā goddesses and the blessed Māmakī,[414] all of them with serene forms adorned with all types of jewelry. Above them are the eight uṣṇīṣa kings, each surrounded by a halo of blazing light. Having first formed the appropriate mudrā, the respective forms of these great cakravartin kings should be painted, golden in color, with pacified senses and adorned with all types of jewelry. Their gaze is cast slightly in the direction of the image[415] of the Tathāgata (Śākyamuni). These eight are Cakravartyuṣṇīṣa,[416] Abhyudgatoṣṇīṣa, Sitātapatra, Jayoṣṇīṣa, Kamaloṣṇīṣa, Vijayoṣṇīṣa, Tejorāśi, and Unnatoṣṇīṣa. {2.145}
“These eight uṣṇīṣa kings should be painted to the left of the pratyekabuddhas. At the gate should be two bodhisattvas: to the right of the entrance, one called Lokātikrāntagāmin, and to the left, the great bodhisattva called Ajitañjaya. The first should be depicted as having a peaceful form, wearing a diadem on his topknotted hair,[417] holding a rosary in his right hand and a water jar in his left, facing the gate, and with a slight frown on his face. The other has a peaceful form, wears a diadem on his topknotted hair and carries a staff and a water jar in his left hand, and in his right hand, which displays a boon-granting gesture, he carries a rosary. He should be painted facing the gate, with a slight frown on his face. {2.146}F.120.aF.137.a
“Below the lion throne should be painted a Dharma wheel surrounded by a halo of blazing light. Below that should be painted a jeweled palace within which is Lord Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the great bodhisattva, with a youthful body of pale saffron color. He has a peaceful form of beautiful appearance and a gentle smile on his face. In his left hand he holds a blue lotus; with his right he displays a boon-granting gesture and holds a wood-apple fruit. {2.147}
“He is adorned with all the ornaments of youth and is decorated with five locks of hair.[418] He wears a string of pearls, a sacred cord, a silken bodice, and garments of silk. Shining in all directions, he is surrounded by a halo of blazing light. He sits on a lotus seat facing the entrance gate of the maṇḍala and looks toward Yamāntaka, Lord of Wrath. He should be painted as being beautiful to behold in every respect. {2.148}
“On his right side, below the lotus,[419] should be painted Yamāntaka, Lord of Wrath, in his ugly misshapen form, completely surrounded by blazing light. Awaiting a command, he looks at the great bodhisattva Mañjuśrī. He should be painted complete in every detail. On the left side of Mañjuśrī, below the lotus, should be painted five bodhisattvas in the form of gods of the realm of the Pure Abode. These five are Sunirmala, Sudānta, Suśuddha, Tamodghātana, and Samantāvaloka. All of them should be depicted as residing in the realm of the Pure Abode, their beautiful forms covered with flowers and bright all around with multicolored light like multifaceted gemstones. {2.149}
“The inner maṇḍala has an outer perimeter in the shape of a square. It has four archways and shines in the four cardinal directions with a vivid light of five colors.[420] It should be demarcated with nicely colored cord stretched in straight lines. In the eastern quarter, above Lord Śākyamuni, is Saṃkusumita Rājendra. He should be drawn in the center within the cord-lined area, sitting on a lotus, F.120.bF.137.b with the body of a tathāgata but small in size, and surrounded by a halo of blazing light. His right hand displays the boon-granting gesture, and he sits in the cross-legged posture. {2.150}
“To the right and left of Saṃkusumita Rājendra should be drawn, respectively, the mudrās of the uṣṇīṣa [kings] Cakravartin and Tejorāśi. The mudrā of Prajñāpāramitā should be drawn above Tathāgatalocanā. Above the noble Avalokiteśvara and to the right of the mudrā of Prajñāpāramitā should be drawn Lord Amitābha with the body of a tathāgata. With his right hand Amitābha displays the boon-granting gesture; he sits on a lotus seat and is surrounded by a halo of blazing light. {2.151}
“To Amitābha’s right the mudrās of the alms bowl and the monk’s robe should be drawn. Following the sequence, the lotus mudrā should be drawn at the entrance. To the left of Lord Saṃkusumita Rājendra, the mudrā of the uṣṇīṣa king Tejorāśi should be drawn surrounded by a halo of blazing light. To his left the thus-gone Ratnaketu should be drawn sitting upon a jewel mountain and expounding the Dharma. He should be depicted as surrounded by light emanating all around from a multicolored blaze of sapphires, beryls, emeralds, and rubies. {2.152}
“To the left of Ratnaketu should be painted the mudrā of Jayoṣṇīṣa, surrounded by a halo of blazing light. To its left is the mudrā of the Dharma wheel, with light blazing all around it. To its left are the mudrās of a mendicant’s staff, water jar, rosary, and the auspicious throne. Next in sequence, at the gate of the maṇḍala, should be painted an earth vajra[421] with three prongs at either end, radiating blazing light. The great five-crested mudrā and the utpala[422] mudrā, both radiating blazing light and connected to one another, should be painted below Lord Mañjuśrī. {2.153}F.121.aF.138.a
“Then the surrounding maṇḍala should be drawn. It should be made so that one enters it via the western gate, and it should be facing to the east.[423] This outer maṇḍala should be painted in all its aspects the same as the inner one—it radiates five-colored light, is beautiful to behold in its vividness, and it has four gateways in the four cardinal directions. It should extend two cubits beyond the inner maṇḍala. {2.154}
“In the eastern quarter should be painted the Great Brahmā with four faces, wearing white apparel including a white shirt and a white sacred thread. He is of golden color, wears a diadem on his topknotted hair, and carries a water jar and a walking stick in his left hand. To his right there is a god from the Ābhāsvara realm—golden in color, distinguished in appearance due to his meditation, wearing silken garments and a silken shirt, and with a serene expression on his face. He wears a diadem on his topknotted hair and a white sacred thread. He sits in the cross-legged posture with his right hand displaying the boon-granting gesture. {2.155}
“To his right should be painted a god from the Akaniṣṭha realm, adorned with all types of jewelry. With his mind steeped in meditation, he is of peaceful appearance. He is wearing silk garments and a silk shirt, sits in the cross-legged posture, and displays with his right hand the boon-granting gesture. He is invested with a white sacred thread. The gods from the Tuṣita, Sunirmita, and Paranirmita realms should be painted following the same sequence, and they are headed by Suyāma and Śakra, each at his assigned location, and following the right order. Below Śakra should be painted gods from the realm of the four great kings, as well as the sadāmattas, mālādhārins, karoṭapāṇis, and vīṇādvītiyakas. The gods of the earth should likewise be painted sequentially arranged, with all their respective attributes. {2.156}
“Similarly, in the southern quarter, the gods starting with those from the Avṛha, Atapas, Sudṛśa, Sudarśana, Parīttābha, and Puṇyaprasava realms should be drawn, all in their respective places and wearing their individual ornaments. F.121.bF.138.b The same should be done for the western and northern quarters. More are drawn below the ones just mentioned, arranged in two rows. {2.157}
“Outside of the second circle there is the third circle in which the four great kings are drawn sequentially in the four quarters. To the right of the entrance gate in the northern direction should be painted Dhanada in the form of a yakṣa standing next to a treasure trove. He is adorned with all types of jewelry and wears a slightly curved[424] diadem. To his right are the two yakṣa generals, Maṇibhadra and Pūrṇabhadra. {2.158}
“Next, following the proper order, should be drawn the great yakṣiṇī Hārītī with an amiable boy sitting in her lap who is looking at the maṇḍala, as well as Pañcika, Piṅgala, and Vibhīṣaṇa, with the emblems (mudrā) of the yakṣas near them.[425]{2.159}
“Following next, in the west, should be drawn Varuṇa with a noose in his hand, followed by the two nāgas Nanda and Upananda and the eight great nāga kings, starting with Takṣaka and Vāsuki. {2.160}
“In this way should be painted two sequentially arrayed rows of yakṣas, rākṣasas, gandharvas, kinnaras, mahoragas, ṛṣis, siddhas, pretas, piśācas, garuḍas, and other human and nonhuman beings, as well as medicinal herbs, gems and jewels in all their variety, mountains, rivers, and islands—with the chief and most important among them at the head. {2.161}
“In the southern quarter should be painted Yama along with his retinue, which includes the seven mothers. In the southeastern quarter is Agni, depicted as surrounded by a halo of flames; holding a staff, a water jar, and a rosary in his hands; wearing a diadem atop his matted hair; and dressed in white garments including a shirt of fine silk. He is of golden color, wearing a white sacred thread, and has a triple line drawn with ash on his forehead. They are all painted arranged in two rows, with their various respective adornments, weapons, attire, body postures, and colors. {2.162}
“All around the area outside this triple maṇḍala are distributed the following deities: Umā’s husband, riding a bull, with a trident in his hand; the goddess Umā herself, of golden color,[426]F.122.aF.139.a adorned with all kinds of jewelry; and Kārttikeya, in his form of a divine youth with six faces and a red body, sitting on a peacock, raising a javelin in his hand, wearing yellow garments and a yellow shirt, and holding in his left hand a bell and a red banner. Next in sequence are Bhṛṅgiriṭi, extremely emaciated, Mahāgaṇapati, Nandikeśvara, Mahākāla, and the seven mothers. They should be painted with their respective adornments, weapons, attire, and body postures. {2.163}
“Next to be painted are the eight vasus and seven ṛṣis. Viṣṇu[427] should be painted with four arms, holding a discus, a mace, a conch, and a sword. He rides a garuḍa and is adorned with all types of jewelry. Next are the eight grahas, the twenty-seven constellations, and the eight upagraha deities who roam the expanse of the earth. Following next are the personifications of the fifteen lunar days of the bright fortnight and the fifteen of the dark fortnight, the twelve signs of the zodiac, the six seasons, the twelve months, and of the year. Next are the four sisters, riding in boats, and the five brothers who live in water. For conciseness these[428] deities can be represented by their respective mudrās and arranged sequentially in two rows. {2.164}
“In[429] short, as regards the three maṇḍalas, one should draw them also as the three dwelling places (āśraya), each with the four corners, with the distribution [of the deities] as follows:[430]{2.165}
“In short, Lord Buddha must be painted at the head of all beings. Representing the Lotus family, Noble Avalokiteśvara must be painted to Śākyamuni’s right.[431] Representing the Vajra family, Noble Vajrapāṇi must be painted to Śākyamuni’s left.[432] Samantabhadra must be painted at the head of all bodhisattvas, and likewise the divine youth, Mañjuśrī, should also be included. The remaining ones should each be represented by his or her mudrā in their respective places. This is how the inner maṇḍala should be painted. {2.166}F.122.bF.139.b
“In the middle maṇḍala, Brahmā Sahāmpati must be painted in the eastern quarter. Similarly, in the southern quarter are the Ābhāsvara and Akaniṣṭha gods, the form gods, and the gods from the realm of neither consciousness nor unconsciousness who do not appear in the maṇḍala in any particular form. In the northern quarter are the king of gods Śakra and the gods starting with those from the realms of Suyāma, Tuṣita, Sunirmita, Paranirmita, and Parīttābha. Each king of the gods’ realms must be painted individually. The rest should be represented by their respective mudrās. {2.167}
“Similarly, in the third maṇḍala, Īśāna the Lord of Beings must be painted in the northern quarter together with Umā. Kārttikeya-Mañjuśrī should be painted near the second gate,[433] riding on a peacock and holding a javelin in his hand. His body is of red color and he is dressed in a yellow upper shirt and other garments. In his right hand he holds a bell and a red banner. He possesses the beauty of a youth and looks upon the maṇḍala. Vainateya, who has the form of a bird, should always be painted in the eastern quarter, along with the sage Mārkaṇḍa. The rest should be represented by their respective mudrās. {2.168}
“In the southeastern division should be the four girls of royal bearing together with their brothers, the divine youths. They are aboard boats, traveling around the great ocean. Also Agni, the lord of gods, should always be painted in the same area of the maṇḍala. Also in the southern quarter should be painted Vibhīṣaṇa, the king of rākṣasas, in the country of Laṅkā. Also located there, dwelling in a neem tree, is the bodhisattva named Jambhala, the Lord of Waters, who has the form of a yakṣa.[434] Painted next in the same sequence should be the king Yama, a preta of great power. So too the king of piśācas named Vikarāla. The remaining ones should be represented by their respective mudrās. {2.169}
“Similary, the two chief nāgas, Nanda and Upananda, and also F.123.aF.140.a Āditya, the chief among celestial bodies, must be painted in the southwestern division. The best of ṛṣis, the sage named Kapila, should be in the western quarter. The preeminent one among non-Buddhists, he should have the form of a naked mendicant. The remaining ones should be represented by their respective mudrās, arranged in a proper order.[435]{2.170}
“In the northwestern division should be the king of yakṣas Dhanada, the king of gandharvas Pañcaśikha, and the king of kinnaras Druma. These three must always be included in the painting. The remaining ones should be represented by their respective mudrās and arranged in sequence according to their respective places. {2.171}
“Outside the third maṇḍala there should be a fourth, comprised of five concentric zones and adorned with rows of mudrās. It has four sides, each including a gateway graced with [one of] the four great kings. The emblems are arranged in the following order: {2.172}
“At the entrance gate in the east should be painted a blue lotus. From right to left,[436] there should be a lotus, vajra, axe, sword, trident, mace, discus, swastika, water jar, fish, conch, earring,[437] banner, flag, noose, bell, dagger, bow, arrow, and hammer. All four of the maṇḍala’s sides should be filled with rows of symbols[438] (mudrā) [representing] these various weapons and implements. Outside all of this, in the four directions, should be placed the four great oceans. {2.173}
“In the northern direction should be drawn a small four-sided maṇḍala,[439] within which is placed a three-pronged double vajra that radiates blazing light. In the eastern direction should be drawn a small triangular maṇḍala, within which is placed a lotus that radiates blazing light. In the southern direction should be drawn a small bow-shaped maṇḍala, within which is placed a bowl that radiates blazing light.[440] In the western direction should be drawn a small maṇḍala entirely made of light,[441] within which is placed a blue lotus complete with a stalk and leaves and radiating blazing light. {2.174}
“In the four intermediate directions should be the following four mudrās, each of them blazing with light all around: A noose should be placed in the northwestern direction, within a round maṇḍala. A staff should be placed in the southwestern direction, within an elongated maṇḍala.[442]F.123.bF.140.b An axe should be placed in the southeastern direction, within a triangular maṇḍala. A sword should be placed in the northeastern direction. {2.175}
“When all this has been drawn, three mudrās should be traced with colored powders outside the gate of the main maṇḍala: one above, one below, and one at the same level. The three mudrās to be painted are clothes, a fly-whisk, and a pair of shoes, each surrounded by blazing light.” {2.176}
“Then, the maṇḍala master should first of all select the right disciples. They should have unimpaired faculties and bodies beautiful in every limb; should belong to the brahmin, kṣatriya, vaiśya, or śūdra castes; should have developed bodhicitta; should be followers of the Great Vehicle; should possess discipline that is not related to other vehicles; should be great beings (bodhisattvas); should have faith and follow the auspicious Dharma; should wish for the great kingship;[443] should shun trivial enjoyments but delight in the great ones; should be gracious, well mannered, and disciplined;[444] should be monks or nuns, or male or female lay practitioners; should observe their particular rules, fasts, and ritual observances; should abide by their vows of conduct; should not harbor hatred for great bodhisattvas; should belong to a spiritual family of many adherents; and should have a natural inclination to practice Dharma. {2.178}
“They will have fasted for one day and one night, put on clean clothes, nicely scented their hair, bathed three times, and observed silence. On the day of the empowerment, they should perfume their mouths with the fragrances of camphor, saffron, and cloves,[445] and, after the regular performance of ritual besprinkling, they should sit on bundles of kuśa grass and have the protection ceremony performed for them. Celibate and committed to truth, they should be placed outside the maṇḍala Victorious over the Divisions of Time, not too far from it and not too near to it.[446]F.124.aF.141.a Clean and ritually purified, they should number no more than between one and eight and be close associates of one another. They will include kṣatriyas who are closely associated with one another and great kings who have had their heads anointed, as well as their offspring—the princes and princesses who have not yet experienced sex. This is because Lord Mañjuśrī, the great bodhisattva in a youthful form, loves to engage in youthful play, awakening foolish people to realization. {2.179}
“Consequently, it is the princely youths who should be ushered in first. This will elevate their regal status and promote long life, health, power, and the ability to savor sensual enjoyments. In particular, this will stabilize the accomplishment of mantra for them, the inexperienced. {2.180}
“Once they are positioned in front, assigned an assistant, and attentive, the maṇḍala master should exit backward[447] while burning incense of camphor. After exiting, he should bathe and besprinkle himself, as convenient for the season, with water[448] that has been incanted one hundred and eight times with the root mantra and sealed with the great mudrā called five-crested. Dressed in clean white clothes, he should then approach the sacrificial fire pit, and, {2.181}
“Having summoned and then dismissed the deities according to the previously described procedure, he should again enter the maṇḍala. After entering he should prepare eight full vases draped in clean cloth, adorned with mango blossoms, and containing gold, silver, gems, grain, and rice. He should allocate the first to Lord Śākyamuni, the second to all the buddhas, the third to all the pratyekabuddhas and the noble congregation of the śrāvakas, the fourth to all the great bodhisattvas, F.124.bF.141.b the fifth to the great bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, and the sixth to all the gods. The seventh and the eighth should be placed in the niches by the gate of the second maṇḍala. They should be draped in clean white cloth. One of them should be assigned to all the spirits, and the second should be dedicated to all beings equally. {2.183}
“Then, following the previously described procedure, the maṇḍala master should burn incense and, forming the great five-crested mudrā, should do the summoning again. Following the procedure as before, he should summon all the buddhas, pratyekabuddhas, noble śrāvakas, great bodhisattvas, spirits, and beings, as well as Mañjuśrī, the divine youth.[450]{2.184}
“Similarly, he should offer, in a ritual as previously described, flowers, incense, fragrances, light, and foodstuffs; he should offer all this to all the recipients, thoroughly and in the right order. For the offering of light, he should offer butter lamps. When offering food to all the noble recipients and others, he should offer rice pudding with curds. {2.185}
“To all the tathāgatas he should offer cakes rich particularly in honey and milk and fried in butter, as well as pastry-rolls (vartī), candies (khaṇḍa), and other delicacies.[451] To all the pratyekabuddhas, noble śrāvakas, great bodhisattvas, and the noble deities he should offer dishes prepared with honey and cooked in milk, rich in butter, and flavored with chir pine resin.[452] Similarly, to all the gods[453] and hosts of spirits, and all beings in general, he should offer cake products, particularly sweetmeats,[454] incanted with the mantra according to procedure. {2.186}
“Similarly, to all the buddhas, pratyekabuddhas, noble śrāvakas, and great bodhisattvas as well as all noble and ordinary beings[455] he should offer fragrant flowers as described before, starting with royal jasmine, crepe jasmine, champak, and the blossom of the pannay tree. Royal jasmine flowers are particularly suitable for the Tathāgata family, lotuses for the Lotus family, and water lilies for the family of Vajrapāṇi. For other mantra deities[456] other flowers may be suitable. {2.187}
“Camphor incense is suitable for the Tathāgata family, sandalwood for the Lotus family, F.125.aF.142.a and bdellium for the family of Vajrapāṇi, the lord of guhyakas. For all other mantra deities[457] the master should offer a different incense. Butter lamps should be offered to all the noble ones, and scented oil lamps to all the ordinary mantra deities.[458]{2.188}
“The maṇḍala master then, following the previously described procedure, should perform the ritual acts of summoning, making offerings, burning incense, and the rest, and he should offer food and service as well.[461] Having done this, he should have his skillful assistants promptly prepare the meatless bali for all the spirits. He should have them beat the kettledrums, blow the conchs, and utter cries of joy in every direction. The bali should include incense, flowers, lamps, and garlands. {2.191}
“Circling then the maṇḍala to the right, the master should scatter the extensive bali that satisfies all spirits,[462] upward, downward, and horizontally, into each of the four cardinal and four intermediate directions and everywhere outside the maṇḍala. After bathing, he should offer into the fire one thousand and eight oblations consisting of rice grains smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. As the master offers the oblations while reciting the heart mantra and the six-syllable root mantra, the great beings who have entered the maṇḍala and now stand before him; who have had the protection rite performed for them and have been accepted as disciples by the maṇḍala master; who have developed bodhicitta, observed the ritual fast, and offered their own bodies to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas; who for the sake of spiritual accomplishments[463] share in the experiences of ordinary beings; who are fit to ascend to the seat of unsurpassable awakening;[464] and who desire omniscient awakening will become liberated from all their vices through merely beholding the maṇḍala. F.125.bF.142.b Even those people who have committed the five deeds of immediate retribution are immediately liberated. {2.192}
“The maṇḍala master then should cover the faces of the initiands[465] who wish to enter the maṇḍala[466] with a veil fashioned from a newly made, unbleached cloth from which the loose[467] threads have been pulled out and hairs removed,[468] that has been incanted with the root mantra seven times,[469] and that has been anointed with fragrant ointments, sandalwood, and saffron. First, boys should be brought into the maṇḍala starting from the sixteen- and finishing with the three-year-olds.[470] They may be embellished with either five decorative locks of hair or just one,[471] and they may wear a topknot of hair or not.[472] They should be princes whose crowns have been anointed, sons of kṣatriyas, or others of great endeavor who desire sovereignty.
{2.193}
“When the initiand stands in the second maṇḍala with a veiled face, the master should form the utpala[473] mudrā and have him recite the root mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, once. Guiding his actions, he should give him a flower of nice fragrance and have him throw it onto the maṇḍala with both hands that have been purified with the mixture of sandalwood and saffron. The master should give him the mantra corresponding to the spot where the flower falls. {2.194}
“That is said to be his personal mantra and will stay with him through the succession of his future births. This mantra is like his spiritual guide; it will bring about his ascension to the seat of awakening and the complete unfolding of the omniscient knowledge of great bodhisattvas. He should master this mantra, which will bring great enjoyments, the status of a king, and the company of eminent people. That which is to be accomplished will be accomplished in this very life without doubt, including all the activities. {2.195}
“Thus, in due course, those who desire magical accomplishments will obtain each one of them until all eight are obtained, but no other accomplishments. If one desires other accomplishments, such as the removal of sins, only the samaya may be given. For this purpose, the maṇḍala master who bestows the empowerment F.126.aF.143.a should first consecrate an area outside the maṇḍala toward the northeast, neither too far nor too near, by purifying it with the root mantra. Just as in the case of the royal empowerment, he should admit disciples whom he regards as single-mindedly devoted to the Buddha, the Dharma, and the Saṅgha; who have faith and great energy; who are never separated from bodhicitta and follow the Great Vehicle; and who serve the Three Jewels. They should have unimpaired faculties, be irreproachable, and wish to accomplish the mantras in this very life. Their hearts may be kind and their minds resolved upon mantra practice, or they may be merely interested in the nonconceptual meaning of the mantra out of curiosity and a desire to know. They should be granted the first through the fifth empowerments; the remaining ones should be omitted.[474] Only those with the special qualities of insight and full understanding of the conduct should be initiated; others should not be. {2.196}
“The master should then collect the requisites as in every royal empowerment, or any that he finds pleasing. A canopy should be spread above him, banners and flags raised, and a white parasol should be held above his head. He should be fanned with a white yak-tail whisk with great care, and praised with well-wishing, auspicious, and excellent verses as spoken by the buddhas themselves, accompanied by cries of joy, the sounds of conchs, kettledrums and tambourines, and cries of victory. After circumambulating the maṇḍala clockwise, the disciples should bow to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, bow their heads to the master,[475] and say the following: {2.197}
“ ‘O master![476] I will exert myself in order to engage in carrying out the mantra activities of all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, in order to enter the secret maṇḍala of liberation that surpasses all that is mundane, and to realize the state of buddhahood that affords sovereignty over all phenomena. In short, I will become a buddha.’ {2.198}F.126.bF.143.b
“Then, the initiand should sit on a bundle of kuśa grass, facing east and looking at the maṇḍala. He will first be given the knowledge (vidyā) empowerment and then made to[477] form the mudrā called five-crested. Then, whatever mantra he desires should be written on a leaf of birchbark with bovine bezoar. Having written it, he should smear both his hands and the interior of an earthenware vessel with sandalwood and saffron and place the birchbark leaf between two earthenware bowls.[478] He should then place the leaf, enclosed between the two bowls, inside the maṇḍala[479] at the soles of the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī’s feet. {2.199}
“Next, the disciple sitting there should first be made to recite the root vidyā mantra one hundred and eight times and then should be consecrated while still sitting on the bundle of kuśa grass. The master should take the full vase that had been allocated to all beings in common from outside the inner[480] maṇḍala where it was earlier placed near the gate and, while reciting the root mantra, anoint[481] the disciple’s head. For the remaining empowerments, he should use whatever water is appropriate. {2.200}
“The earthenware container should then be handed to him, and, while a butter lamp is burning, he should be made to recite the mantra. If it is the same mantra,[482] the disciple will succeed through merely reciting it. If it is a different one, he will succeed gradually, after applying effort.[483] It is said that even if the mantra given to him lacks or has extra syllables, he can still succeed, without a doubt, at the first sādhana session, for this mantra was written earlier by the master himself. If he keeps practicing, he will arrive, within three sādhana sessions, at the stage where success comes without effort. In this way, the master should first give the knowledge empowerment. {2.201}
“As for the empowerment in the second maṇḍala, he should take the full vase that had been allocated to all the gods in this maṇḍala and anoint the disciple’s head with it. As before, this procedure will free him from all his vices. He is then authorized by all the buddhas to enter samayas for any worldly or transcendent maṇḍala, as well as the practice of F.127.aF.144.a any mantra or mudrā. He will be blessed by all the bodhisattvas.[484] Consequently, the master may now give him the ācārya empowerment.[485]{2.202}
“The ācārya empowerment is given in the third maṇḍala. The master should take the full vase that had been allocated to all the śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas and, following the same procedure, anoint the disciple’s head with it. The master should say, ‘All the buddhas and bodhisattvas of great power have authorized you to write and recite all worldly and transcendent mantras, to use the instructions on the maṇḍala, and to give to others, as well as apply yourself, the instructions on the practice of the mantra methods, including the mudrās. In this very life, and in the lives to come until the final one, you will definitely obtain the state of awakening.’[486]{2.203}
“Similarly, in the empowerment of victory and the empowerment of conquest, the master should perform the sprinkling following the previously described procedure, using, respectively, the full vase that had been allocated to the blessed buddhas and the one allocated to the bodhisattvas. He should say, ‘You are authorized by all the blessed buddhas, the great bodhisattvas, and the śrāvakas, {2.204}
“The master should then usher them, one by one, into the maṇḍala, present them to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, have them circumambulate the maṇḍala clockwise three times, and dismiss them. At a later time they should be gradually instructed in and enjoined to practice the mantra. On the present occasion, however, the master should take the full vase that had earlier been allocated to the great bodhisattva Mañjuśrī F.127.bF.144.b and make those disciples who have entered the maṇḍala drink three handfuls of water while facing east. He should say to them: {2.207}
“ ‘Do not generate a great amount of nonvirtue by transgressing the secret samaya of the divine youth, the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī. You must not discard any of the mantras. You must be loyal to all the buddhas or bodhisattvas and must please the master. Otherwise you will break your samaya, your mantras will not be successful, and there will be much nonvirtue.’ Having said this, he should dismiss them. {2.208}
“The maṇḍala master should, in addition, offer oblations of rice grains smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, while reciting the eight-syllable heart mantra. Getting up, he should then enter into the middle of the maṇḍala and make a welcome offering to all the visualized recipients[488] using the previously mentioned flowers and following the procedure as previously described. Using the previously specified incense, he should make an incense offering to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas and noble śrāvakas, and all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, garuḍas, gandharvas, kinnaras, mahoragas,[489] rākṣasas, piśācas, and bhūtas, as well as the divine yogins, siddhas, and ṛṣis and all beings. He should strew flowers over them, sprinkle them with water scented with sandalwood and saffron, and then dismiss them following the previously described procedure. He should imagine that all of them become liberated.[490]{2.209}
“The maṇḍala master should then take the food, bali,[491] and aromatic powder and let all these articles float[492] upon a river. Alternatively, he should give them to suffering beings. He should select an area on the ground, sweep and clean it well, adorn it, and smear it with cow dung.[493] Optionally, he may wash it with water, smear it with well-purified clay, F.128.aF.145.a or cover it with sand. He should do this himself and may proceed as he desires. Those who have entered the maṇḍala should themselves partake of the milk porridge[494] or sacrificial food.” {2.210}
This concludes the second chapter, that of the instructions on the maṇḍala procedure, from this great king of manuals that forms a garland-like[495] basket of bodhisattva teachings, an extensive bodhisattva textbook that is a miraculous display of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth.Chapter 3
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode and, bowing to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas gathered together in that great assembly, pronounced the most secret single-syllable mantra, which removes all poisons and can be employed in all rites the mantra that is effective in the practices of his maṇḍala and which can also be used in all minor ritual activities. What is that mantra? {3.1}
“Homage to all the buddhas! This mantra is:
“jaḥ.[496]
“This very mantra, friends and all hosts of spirits, the one syllable, is to be used, in short, in the second maṇḍala procedure.[497]{3.2}
“After cleaning an area on the ground either eight or four cubits in size, it should be delimited using five-colored powder by oneself, not by anyone else. No matter where this is done, there is no fault. The area should be four sided, with sides of equal length, and should include the triple maṇḍala.[498] First one should draw the great five-crested mudrā, the utpala[499] mudrā of Lord Mañjuśrī, and the mudrās the fangs, the mouth, and the stick. These mudrās should be drawn in the eastern quarter of the inner maṇḍala. {3.3}
“Next, outside the door base[500] should be drawn a red lotus, a vajra, a blue lotus, a banner, a flag, a parasol, a doorway, a chariot, an elephant, a horse, a bull, a buffalo, a swastika, a peacock, a goat, a ram, and a man of youthful appearance. They should be arranged in successive rows F.128.bF.145.b fitting in with the threefold maṇḍala. {3.4}
“Then, in the southeastern direction, one should perform the fire kindling ritual using the one-syllable mantra and offer one hundred and eight[501] oblations with sticks of the devil’s horsewhip plant smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. Then a welcome offering of flowers should be presented. Using the one-syllable mantra, one may also offer, whenever desired, a bali,[502] sacrificial food, lamps, or incense or perform the summoning and the dismissing.[503]{3.5}
“One should usher the supplicant into the maṇḍala.[504] If he wants royal power, the maṇḍala should be drawn in the middle of a city; if he wishes for enjoyments, then near a banyan tree;[505] if he wants a son, then near a lucky bean tree. If he desires a wife,[506] horses, or elephants, then inside an elephant stable or a horse stable; if he has been bitten [by a snake],[507] then at a pond or a place where nāgas live; if he is afflicted with a quartan, chronic, or any other fever, then near a solitary liṅga or to the south of a village; if he is possessed by rākṣasas, then in a cemetery or in an empty house; if he is possessed by piśācas,[508] then near a beleric myrobalan tree or a castor oil plant; if he is possessed by any of the mātṛs, then at a crossroad or near a house where a male offspring has died; if he is possessed by brahmarākṣasas,[509] then under a palm tree or a large sebesten tree. If he was fed poison, he should be given water incanted seven times[510] with the one-syllable mantra and made to lie down in the middle of the maṇḍala—he will be released from the effects of the poison. {3.6}
“Similarly, in the case of a woman or a man who seeks fame, one should draw the maṇḍala at a crossroad or on brahmins’ land.[511] If it is a woman whose child has died, then it should be drawn near a fruit-bearing tree or a sap-filled tree. In the case of a childless woman, it should be drawn in the middle of a field of rice ready to harvest. For those who have contracted the three diseases[512] or have been afflicted by others, it should be drawn at a crossing point[513] or a similar place. In the case of severe illness, a maṇḍala that destroys rākṣasas[514] should be drawn on a river island or a riverbank. Drawn on a mountaintop, the maṇḍala counters all diseases, in whatever form they may be.[515] For the diseases caused by ḍākinīs, it should be drawn in a brahmin’s garden,[516] an empty house, F.129.aF.146.a a lonely spot, or a depression in the terrain. {3.7}
“In all rituals such as these, the maṇḍala should be drawn at midnight, or midday,[517] or otherwise at any time. Employing this very one-syllable mantra, one should present a welcome offering of flowers to the deity and then dismiss him. Having done so, one should inundate the maṇḍala with water. This will provide strong protection to all those who are weary. {3.8}
Chapter 4
Homage to the Buddha and all buddhas and bodhisattvas![521]
Mañjuśrī then looked at the entire realm of the Pure Abode and again directed his gaze at the great assembly gathered there. Prostrating at the feet of Śākyamuni, he smiled and said this to the Blessed One: {4.1}
“It is good fortune, O Blessed One, that there is a painting procedure, intended for the benefit of all beings, from the extensive chapters that produce a rain of desired results falling down from the Cloud of Dharma that arises from the accomplishment of sādhana methods of mantra practice. This procedure generates a vast amount of merit and creates the seed of perfect awakening; it also brings complete omniscience.[522]{4.2}
“In short, it completely fulfills all wishes; it grants the complete acquisition of the fruits of all mantras; it brings about accomplishments that are fruitful and effective, as well as the complete fulfillment of bodhisattva conduct; it equips one with the armor of a great bodhisattva; and it overpowers and puts to flight the entire army of Māra. Please take pity on us, O Blessed One, and on all beings, and teach us this procedure.” {4.3}F.129.bF.146.b
Being thus addressed by the divine youth Mañjuśrī, Lord Śākyamuni said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Good, Mañjuśrī! It is good that you, acting for the benefit of many people, with compassion for the world, deem this topic to be worthy of asking the Tathāgata. Listen well and reflect upon it thoroughly. I will teach your painting procedure to you in full—the procedure that is the means for all sentient beings to accomplish their practice.[523] I will teach it just as it was previously taught by all the tathāgatas, introducing and expounding it in the right order. I will teach it now. {4.4}
“To start, the maṇḍala master should bring cotton to a patch of ground free of impurities and have it cleaned by people who have taken up the samaya vows. When it has been cleaned, the maṇḍala master[524] should incant it with the mantra, as given next, one hundred and eight times. {4.5}
“Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas whose intentions are impeccable and who practice impeccable conduct. Homage to the sovereign king of kings who purifies and pacifies suffering, the tathāgata, the worthy one, the perfectly awakened one. The mantra is as follows:
“Oṁ, purify purify! You are the destroyer of all obstacle makers, one of great compassion, possessed of the form of divine youth! Transform, transform! Remember your samaya! Remain, remain! Huṁ huṁ, phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā![525]{4.6}
“Then the maṇḍala master should procure a young girl, who has not yet had a sexual experience, born into a brahmin, kṣatriya, or vaiśya family. Those of a low-caste origin should be avoided.[526] She should be physically unimpaired[527] and beautiful in every limb. She should have obtained permission to take part in the ritual from her mother and father and should be observing the ritual fast. She should have developed bodhicitta and be compassionate. She should have a clear, light complexion without any discoloration. In short, she must have all the auspicious marks of a woman. On an auspicious day of the bright fortnight, having ascertained that the planets are astrologically auspicious and bright, in a clean, windless place that is free from smoke, fog, and clouds,[528] having bathed the previously described girl, the maṇḍala master should dress her nicely in clean clothes F.130.aF.147.a and perform the protection ritual employing the mantra as given next along with the great mudrā.
[529] He should mix some white sandalwood and saffron with water that is free of living organisms and, while the girl is drinking it, he should sprinkle her with this water,[530] purified with the same mantra.{4.7}
“He should throw white sandalwood and saffron-scented water in the four cardinal directions, upward, downward, and in the four intermediate directions.[531] Having blended white sandalwood, saffron, and camphor together,[532] the master should offer it himself or have the practitioner do this.[533] The following should be spoken three times: {4.8}
“ ‘May the blessed buddhas and the great bodhisattvas established on the tenth bodhisattva level bless the thread for making this cloth.’ ” {4.9}
“The blessed buddhas and the great bodhisattvas will subsequently give their attention to the ritual. While the master burns incense, at that time peacocks, curlews, wild geese, cranes, and ruddy geese—many beautiful birds who live on water or on land—will fly up into the air and utter their auspicious cries. The practitioner should then know, ‘My rite will bear fruit. The holy buddhas and the great bodhisattvas have blessed my canvas thread for me. My present life will be a happy one, and my mantra accomplishment will not be in vain.’ {4.10}
“The sounds of drums—big, medium, and small—conchs, lutes, flutes, cymbals, and tambourines will be heard. Women, boys, girls, and men—both real and imagined[534]—will at that time spontaneously say the following:
“ ‘Victory is accomplished! Take the offering that has been offered! This is glorious and fruitful, with an opulence matching that of Śakra!’[535]{4.11}
“They, and others too, will say similar words. Sounds of a bell or sounds of rejoicing may also be heard. Only then will the knowledge holder[536] know F.130.bF.147.b that the thread has been blessed by the holy buddhas and the great bodhisattvas, not in any other way. The accomplishment will not be futile. {4.12}
“But, on that occasion, they may also say harsh words, such as:
“ ‘Seize, devour, and cause others to devour! It is lost, lost completely. Alas! It is far, very far! It is gone!’ {4.13}
“They could say words such as these. Also, the monkeys, buffaloes, jackals, donkeys, cats, and other detestable humans and animals might utter their cries. The practitioner will then realize that he has not succeeded, and that his present life will be short.[537] As an option, he can do the preliminary practice and repeat the procedure from the beginning up to seven times. After the seven performances of the ritual, even someone who has committed the five acts of immediate retribution will succeed. {4.14}
“The practitioner should then perform the protection ritual for the previously selected girl and have her sit on a bundle of kuśa grass. He should place her facing the east or north, get his sacrificial food, and feed it to her.[538] Following this procedure, he should have her spin the cotton upon the bundle of kuśa grass that was prepared beforehand. {4.15}
“The thread, well spun and white, should be twisted together by a girl who has previously been trained. It should be well measured into units of one, three, five, eight, or up to sixteen palas or karṣas.[539][540]The best would be of sixteen units.[541] The middling would be of eight units. The next in rank would be of five units. In rites where the target is of minor significance, the thread should be of one unit.[542] A mantra adept should use this scheme in all rites according to his ability.[543]{4.16}
“Then the knowledge holder should prescribe to the weaver the observance of a fast and, during an auspicious lunar asterism, on a bright day during the ‘fortnight of miracles’ when the planets have been ascertained as auspicious, or during another bright fortnight, in the spring, that best of seasons when mango trees are garlanded with blossoms and the best of trees are fully in bloom, in the morning when the sun has risen, he should give sacrificial food to the weaver who fits the previously described characteristics. He should dress him in clean clothes, tie a turban on his head, bathe and anoint him well, and smear his body with white sandalwood and saffron or some other such fragrance. F.131.bF.148.b He should perfume the weaver’s mouth with camphor, cheer him up, and make sure that he is neither hungry nor thirsty. The knowledge holder should then thoroughly clean the weaving implements, the rope, and other tools, using clay and cow dung. Placing them in front, he should rinse them with the five products of a cow again and again. {4.30}
“Then, having rinsed them with water free of living organisms, he should ritually besprinkle them with white sandalwood and saffron. Having chosen a clean spot on the ground in a place free from noise and people, the practitioner should sit on a seat that is secluded, peaceful, and adorned with flowers. He should then throw white mustard seeds incanted one hundred and eight times with the purification mantra in the four cardinal directions, upward, downward, and in the four intermediate directions. Then, having cast mustard seeds at the weaver, he should form the great five-crested mudrā and tie his hair into a topknot. This will afford powerful protection. {4.31}
“If the cloth is going to be of the superior kind, it should be four cubits wide and eight cubits long;[554] he should supply the weaver with enough material for these measurements. If the cloth is going to be of the medium kind, it should be two cubits wide and five cubits long. If it is to be of the smallest kind, it should have the width equal to the thumb-to-index-finger measurement of the Sugata, and the length of one cubit.[555] Regarding these particular measurements, the thumb-to-index-finger measurement of Lord Buddha corresponds to the length of the forearm of a man from the central region[556]—this is what is known as the Buddha’s thumb-to-index-finger measurement as a unit of length. The cloth is said to be of the authentic size when these measurements are used. {4.32}
“Therefore, only a well-trained painter skilled in sādhana,[562] or oneself if able to, should do the painting using uncontaminated paints. F.133.aF.150.a The painter, having undergone the ritual procedure as previously described for preparing the weaver, and endowed with the auspicious marks and so forth should choose any bright paints of strong colors and execute the painting in detail. The painting may be commissioned or done by oneself adhering to the same procedure as before in the case of the weaver. {4.63}
“One should infuse the paints with camphor, saffron, sandalwood, and so forth, and then, burning incense, incant them with the very same mantra one hundred and eight times.[563] One should bestrew the cloth with the blossoms of the ironwood tree, pannay tree, bulletwood tree, and the flowers of champak, Arabian jasmine, dhānuṣkārika jasmine, and royal jasmine. Then, sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass and facing east, with a settled mind and thoughts directed to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, one should take hold of a fine-tipped brush and, with a relaxed mind, commence the painting. {4.64}
“First one should paint the Tathāgata Śākyamuni, endowed with all of his excellent forms, his body marked with the thirty-two marks of a perfect man and adorned with the eighty minor characteristics. He sits on a jeweled lotus, his form surrounded by a halo of light to the distance of one fathom all around. He teaches the Dharma with a serene expression. {4.65}
“Beneath the great throne in the center, which consists of a lotus with a strong beryl stalk, are two nāga kings—Nanda and Upananda—who support the stalk. They should be painted in half-human, half-serpent form, looking at the Tathāgata and greeting him with their right hands. A lotus pond should be painted surrounding them that is filled with lotus leaves and flowers with opening buds and teeming with aquatic creatures such as birds, fish, and so forth. All the figures throughout it should be of exquisite form. {4.66}
“At the base of the stem of the Blessed One’s lotus spring several other lotus flowers, all growing progressively higher. F.133.bF.150.b To his left, eight lotuses should be drawn with the figures of the eight great bodhisattvas seated upon them. {4.67}
“On the first lotus is Noble Mañjuśrī. His color is either whitish like the filaments of a lotus[564] or golden like saffron. His form is that of a divine youth with the features of a young male child. On his head are five decorative locks of hair, and he is ornamented with all the adornments of a divine youth. In his left hand he holds a blue lotus, and with his right he salutes the Tathāgata, at whom he is directing his gaze. His bodily form is charming and peaceful, with a slightly laughing countenance, and a halo of blazing light encircling him. {4.68}
“The noble Candraprabha should be painted on the second lotus, also in the form of a divine youth. On the third should be Sudhana; on the fourth, Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin; on the fifth, Gaganagañja; on the sixth, Kṣitigarbha; on the seventh, Anagha; and on the eighth, Sulocana. All of them should be painted as divine youths ornamented with the corresponding adornments. {4.69}
“To the right of the Blessed One there are another eight great bodhisattvas, all of them, except Maitreya, adorned with all types of jewelry. The noble Maitreya, who is next to the Blessed One, wears the attire of one who is celibate and has a topknot held up with a crown. His body is golden colored and his robes red ocher. His silken upper garment is red. His elegant form is marked with the triple line[565] of an ascetic. Inside his left arm he carries a staff with a water jar suspended from it, and he has a black antelope skin thrown over his left shoulder. With his right hand he holds a rosary and greets the Tathāgata at whom he directs his gaze. His mental activity has its basis in mental absorption. {4.70}
“On the second lotus is Samantabhadra, his body the dark color of the beautyberry flower F.134.aF.151.a and adorned with all types of jewelry. In his left hand he holds a wish-fulfilling gem and in his right a bel fruit, which he holds out in the boon-granting gesture. He should also be painted with a charming form. {4.71}
“On the third lotus is the noble Avalokiteśvara, white as the autumn moon[566] and adorned with all types of jewelry. He wears a topknot and a crown and is invested with a white sacred thread. On his head is the noble omniscient Amitābha, sitting nestled in the ends of his matted hair—wondrous and beautiful in form and possessed of the ten powers. He should be painted holding a lotus in his left hand[567] and displaying the boon-granting gesture with his right. His mental activity is grounded in mental absorption, and his body is surrounded by light. {4.72}
“On the fourth lotus is the noble Vajrapāṇi, with a vajra in his left hand. Golden in color, he is adorned with all kinds of jewelry. His right hand is clasped around a fruit and displays a boon-granting gesture. His charming form is of gentle aspect. His body is adorned with long and short pearl necklaces, and a pearl necklace serves as his sacred thread. He wears a crown studded with sparkling jewels, short trousers[568] of fine cloth, and an upper garment of white silk. Just like the noble Avalokiteśvara and Samantabhadra, he wears a cloak used for visiting holy bathing places, and his appearance[569] is as previously described. {4.73}
“On the fifth lotus is the noble Mahāmati; on the sixth, Śāntamati; on the seventh, Vairocanagarbha; and on the eighth, Apāyajaha—these bodhisattvas, too, should be depicted. They hold in their hands fruits and books, are adorned with all types of jewelry, and wear an upper garment and short trousers of fine silk. {4.74}
“Above them should be painted the eight pratyekabuddhas, F.134.bF.151.b attired in monks’ garb. Their robes are red ocher and their bodies possess the marks of a great being. They sit cross-legged on seats of jeweled lotuses in serene absorption,[570] surrounded by halos of blazing light. While painting the picture, one should strew the cloth with fragrant flowers such as royal jasmine, Arabian jasmine, dhānuṣkārikā jasmine, blossoms of the pannay tree and ironwood tree, and so forth. {4.75}
“To the left of Lord Śākyamuni and above Noble Mañjuśrī one should paint a lofty palatial maṇḍala, decorated with many gems and adorned with the king of mountains.[571] It has the shape of a mountain entirely covered with precious stones.[572] There one should paint the eight blessed buddhas, as listed below. {4.76}
“The first, Ratnaśikhin, should be painted adorned with jewels the color of beryl and with an aura of light extending one fathom all around him. He shines in all directions with the glow of many exquisite jewels, such as rubies, sapphires, emeralds, beryls, and so forth. His body of a tathāgata has the soft color of the rising sun. He wears the yellow robes and upper garment of a monk, sits in the cross-legged posture, and expounds the Dharma. His outer garment is yellow. His body is armored with the thirty-two marks of a great being and is also adorned with the eighty minor marks. He is of peaceful appearance and in all aspects excellent. Thus should Tathāgata Ratnaśikhin be depicted. {4.77}
“The second, Tathāgata Saṃkusumitarājendra, should be painted in golden color and richly bestrewn with flowers, such as the blossoms of the ironwood tree, bulletwood tree, and so forth. His gaze is directed at Noble Mañjuśrī. He is surrounded with light that forms a halo sparkling with the colors of precious jewels.[573]{4.78}
“Tathāgata Śālendrarāja[574] should be painted as the third. He is of the color of lotus filaments and is expounding the Dharma. The fourth to be painted is Tathāgata Sunetra; the fifth is Duḥprasaha; the sixth is Vairocana, the Victorious One; the seventh, Bhaiṣajyavaidūryarāja; and the eighth, Tathāgata Rājendra, the pacifier of all suffering.[575]F.135.aF.152.a All of them should be depicted endowed with tathāgata forms of golden color, displaying the hand gesture of granting fearlessness. {4.79}
“Two gods from the realm of the Pure Abode should be painted among the clouds above the tathāgatas, each in an upper corner of the canvas. They should be depicted releasing a rain of flowers. Standing in the midst of space, they salute all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and the noble śrāvakas. {4.80}
“Beneath[576] the pratyekabuddhas should be painted the eight great śrāvakas, seated separately near the bodhisattvas’ heads. They are Elder Śāriputra, Mahāmaudgalyāyana, Mahākāśyapa, Subhūti, Rāhula, Nanda, Bhadrika, and Kaphiṇa. {4.81}
“The eight pratyekabuddhas are Gandhamādana, Candana,[577] Upariṣṭa, Śveta, Sita, Ketu,[578] Nemi, and Sunemi. All of them are beautiful, serene, and self-controlled. They and the great śrāvakas fold their hands in reverence, looking at the blessed Buddha Śākyamuni. {4.82}
“Above them should be painted two more gods, near to the other two gods of the Pure Abode. They hold a long, elegant canopy of fine cloth, spreading it above all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas. They should be depicted wearing celestial garlands and clothes. {4.83}
“Above the head of Lord Śākyamuni one should paint a bundle of jeweled threads, including strings of pearls, gems, rubies, sapphires, and so forth. On this bundle, there should be a well-arrayed canopy of silk, decorated all around with hanging strings of pearls. {4.84}
“Below the lotus seat of Lord Śākyamuni, near the base of Noble Mañjuśrī’s F.135.bF.152.b feet and to the side of Upananda, the king of nāgas, one should paint a great jewel mountain, rising up from a lotus lake. The mountain is overgrown with jeweled sprouts, vines of coral, and jeweled trees; it abounds in gorges and hidden caves and is frequented by great sages and siddhas. {4.85}
“On the mountain’s summit one should paint Yamāntaka, Lord of Wrath, most terrible in form, holding a noose in his right hand and a staff[579] in his left. He knits his brow and looks at Noble Mañjuśrī, awaiting orders. He has a ‘wolf’s belly’[580] and upwardly flowing hair. His body color is that of collyrium or a dark cloud. He has a reddish beard, prominent fangs, long nails, and red eyes.[581] He is adorned with snakes coiling around his neck and clothed in tiger skin. Extremely fierce, he destroys all obstacles. One should thus paint Yamāntaka, Lord of Great Wrath, with flames blazing all around him. {4.86}
“Below this mountain, one should paint the practitioner sitting on a slab of stone, with his knees touching the ground, and with an incense censer in his hand. He holds the emblems consistent with his dress and form and acts in the attitude of obedience. He should be depicted with his gaze directed at Noble Mañjuśrī. {4.87}
“Near Nanda, the king of nāgas, and off to the right below Lord Śākyamuni, one should paint the great jewel king of mountains[582] rising from a lotus lake, as previously described.[583] This time one should paint it without Yamāntaka, Lord of Wrath; also it should be bestrewn with celestial flowers and located below the noble Avalokiteśvara.[584] This tall and lofty mountain should be painted as made of ruby, with a single summit made of beryl in the shape of a sprout.[585]{4.88}
“Resting there should be painted the goddess who is the compassion of the noble Avalokiteśvara embodied—the noble Tārā. She is adorned with all types of jewelry and wears a red bodice and brightly colored silken garments. Her whole body is adorned with feminine adornments. F.136.aF.153.a In her left hand she holds a blue lotus. Her body color is golden and her waist slim, but not overly so. She is neither too young nor too old.[586] Her mind is absorbed in meditation, and she is awaiting an order. Her body is slightly bent forward with her right hand displaying the boon-granting gesture, and so forth. She sits in a cross-legged posture, turning her gaze slightly toward[587] Avalokiteśvara. She is surrounded by a halo of blazing light. {4.89}
“There, on the jeweled peak made of beryl, completely enclosed and shaded by a pannay tree whose branches are all covered in flowers with buds fully open, is the blessed Tārā. The tree’s overspread branches are bent down with fresh sprouts, in a variety of shapes, bright and colorful. The goddess Tārā should be painted looking ahead. {4.90}
Chapter 5
Now, Lord Śākyamuni, looking at the entire assembly, spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another procedure from your ritual of cloth painting—the medium one. I will teach it now, so listen well and duly reflect upon it. {5.1}
“First, to produce the medium painting, thread should be used as previously described, following the same procedure as before. The work should be done by craftsmen who have been trained beforehand, applying the same measurements as the previous cloth. Just as before, the cloth should be of excellent quality, white, tightly woven, and thoroughly clean[597] and have fringe tassels.[598] The painting should then be executed using uncontaminated paints free of hairs, dust, or other debris, with everything done just as before, except for the sizes and forms of the painted figures. {5.2}
“First one should paint the realm of the Pure Abode, its form beautiful in every respect, abounding in things made of jewels, and adorned with garlands of white pearls. Portrayed in the middle should be Lord Śākyamuni, sitting on the lion throne expounding the Dharma and excellent in every aspect. {5.3}
“To his right is Noble Mañjuśrī, the color of lotus filaments, saffron, F.137.bF.154.b or the sun, with a blue lotus near his left shoulder. With the palms of his hands folded in reverence, he looks toward Lord Śākyamuni. He has the form of a divine youth, with a gentle smile on his face, and his head is adorned with a crown of five decorative locks of hair. He is ornamented with the adornments of a young boy and inclines his head toward his right knee. {5.4}
“To the left of Lord Śākyamuni is the noble Avalokiteśvara, white as the autumn moon and painted just as he was described before, but this time fanning the Blessed One with a yak-tail whisk. To his left, arranged one next to the other, are the noble Maitreya, Vajrapāṇi, Mahāmati, Śāntamati, Gaganagañja, and Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin. They should be painted as before and adorned with all kinds of jewelry. {5.5}
“Situated above them the eight blessed buddhas should be painted in a standing position, displaying the boon-granting gesture with their right hands, their bodies covered in the yellow robes of a monk and an upper cloak. With their left hands they hold the corner of their robes. The well-fitting robes are yellowish with a slightly red hue. They are surrounded with halos of light and are excellent in every aspect. The blessed buddhas that should be portrayed are the tathāgatas Saṃkusumitarājendra, Ratnaśikhin, Śikhin, Viśvabhuk, Krakucchanda, Bakagrīvin, Kāśyapa, and Sunetra. {5.6}
“To the right of the Blessed One and near Noble Mañjuśrī should be depicted the great assembly. The eight great śrāvakas and eight pratyekabuddhas should be painted exactly as before, except that the noble Mahāmaudgalyāyana and Śāriputra are standing up and fanning Lord Śākyamuni with a yak-tail whisk. {5.7}F.138.aF.155.a
“The gods from the realm of the Pure Abode, Śakra, the lord of gods, and Suyāma, as well as the gods from the heavens of Tuṣita, Sunirmita, Śuddha, Vimala, Sudṛśa, Atapas, and Ābhāsvara should also be included. In addition, Brahmā Sahāmpati and the gods from the Akaniṣṭha heaven should be included. These and other gods who dwell in the realm of form and the realm of desire should be painted arranged in sequence, near to Noble Mañjuśrī. They should be painted arranged in tiers above the assembly with their respective features and dress. {5.8}
“Below the lion throne of the Blessed One, a great mountain should be painted rising from a great ocean and extending up to the edges of the canvas. In one corner of the canvas should be depicted the practitioner in the same form and dress as in real life. He should be depicted with his head inclined toward his knees and holding an incense holder in his hand. On the same jewel mountain, below Noble Mañjuśrī, is Yamāntaka, Lord of Wrath. He should be painted as previously described. {5.9}
“To the left of the Blessed One, below his lion throne, and near to the soles of the noble Avalokiteśvara’s feet, the Goddess Tārā should be painted sitting on that jewel mountain. She should be depicted exactly as previously described. The canvas should be strewn all over with flowers, such as champak, fragrant blue lotus, royal jasmine, Arabian jasmine, dhānuṣkārīka jasmine, and blossoms of the pannay tree, ironwood tree, and so forth. {5.10}
“And above, in the upper two corners, two gods should be painted releasing a great flood of flowers. They each have variegated, bright forms and rest within rain clouds in the midst of space. They should be depicted as white and flying. {5.11}
Chapter 6
Now, Lord Śākyamuni again addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, Mañjuśrī, yet another secret[604] cloth-painting procedure,[605] a third type, referred to as ‘smallest,’[606] by the means of which all beings can effortlessly win accomplishment. {6.1}
“Following the procedures as previously described, skilled craftsmen should prepare a cloth one width of the Buddha’s hand across that is in the same four-sided shape as before. The painting should then be done with the paints as previously described. {6.2}
“First one should paint Noble Mañjuśrī, sitting on a lion throne with the form, as before, of a young boy expounding the Dharma. F.139.aF.156.a He should be painted as having a charming form that radiates light. To his left, the noble Samantabhadra stands on a dais of precious stone, with his right hand extended forth holding a yak-tail whisk and his left hand holding a wish-fulfilling gem. As before, he should be painted in the dark blue color of the beautyberry flower. To the right of Noble Mañjuśrī stands the noble Avalokiteśvara on a dais of precious stone.[607] As before, he has a yak-tail whisk in his [right] hand and a lotus[608] in his left. He should be drawn with his form haloed in blazing light. {6.3}
“Below Mañjuśrī’s lion throne should be painted a golden-colored mountain, extending down to the edge of the canvas. In the corner at the edge of the canvas, below the lion throne of Noble Mañjuśrī and to his right, Yamāntaka, the Lord of Wrath, should be painted with the same details as before. The practitioner should be painted[609] as before, holding an incense holder. {6.4}
“Above Noble Mañjuśrī should be painted Tathāgata Saṃkusumitarājendra, sixteen fingers tall, sheltering in a cave on a jeweled mountain. Its ten peaks should be drawn to resemble palaces.[610] Around the perimeter of the cloth one should draw a ring of mountains.[611] Above, perched on the front slopes of the mountains located in the two upper corners of the cloth, are two divine sons from the realm of the Pure Abode, named Śuddha and Viśuddha, who scatter heaps of flowers that float in arrays. They should be painted [with the same details] as before.[612] The painting should be drawn with various flowers placed all around it. {6.5}
Chapter 7
Now Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, circumambulated Lord Śākyamuni three times clockwise and, having prostrated at his feet, said this to the Blessed One:
“Good! It is good that you, the blessed one, the tathāgata, the worthy one, the perfectly awakened one, gave this Dharma discourse in such a clear way for the benefit, the welfare, and the happiness of all who observe their vidyā vows and in order to show your compassion for the world. You exemplified the bodhisattvas’ skill in means with this particular method that takes them higher than nirvāṇa[616]F.140.aF.157.a and, with their continuous dedication to the goal of awakening,[617] accomplishes their conduct consistent with all the goals of the mantras. This will promote the spread of this[618] secret mantra among all people. {7.1}
“In the future, when the teachers of the world have entered nirvāṇa and the sun of the tathāgatas has set—when their lineages have ended and all the buddhafields are empty of all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, noble śrāvakas, and pratyekabuddhas; when the inhabitants of the world have become blind with ignorance; when the noble eightfold path has been cut and the medicine of all the vidyā mantras that are like precious gems is lost; when the world spheres have gone dark, devoid of good people[619]—at that time, beings will be lazy because of lack of interest;[620] they will lack faith, will be willfully destructive,[621] and will not rely on spiritual friends.
They will be deceitful and treacherous, and they will act like rogues.{7.2}
“Such people, when hearing this Dharma discourse, will become frightened. Indulging in idleness and apathy, they will lack faith. Seeking sensual enjoyments, they will lack conviction. Delighting in wrong views,[622] they will generate a lot of negativity. Rejecting the true Dharma, they will move from one terrible state to one even worse, bound for Avīci Hell.[623] For the sake of those suffering like this, to enthrall the unsubmissive and, once they are enthralled, to grant them fearlessness, please muster your skill in means, O Blessed One, and teach them the procedure of painting involving mantras if you think that the time is right.” {7.3}
Then Lord Śākyamuni applauded Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Good, Mañjuśrī! It is good that you ask the Tathāgata about this matter. There is, Mañjuśrī, your most secret and detailed teaching on another procedure of cloth painting, with its associated conduct and practice of the vidyā observances. It includes the supreme and most secret meaning of the mantras of the ultimate essence—the great meaning that is the foundation of all mantras. {7.4}F.140.bF.157.b
“These six six-syllable mantras of the ultimate essence will, at that time, lead to an accomplishment without a doubt. I too will now teach what was previously taught by seven hundred and sixty million buddhas in order to tame such beings, to help them develop the skill in means, to cause them to take up the practice of the mantra, and to invariably bring them to perfect awakening. Focusing on the people of the future, listen well and reflect on the meaning thoroughly. I will now tell you, so what are they?” {7.5}
Lord Śākyamuni then pronounced the mantras:
“Oṁ vākyārthe jaya.[624]
“Oṁ vākyaśeṣe sva.[625]
“Oṁ vākyeyanayaḥ.[626]
“Oṁ vākyaniṣṭheyaḥ.[627]
“Oṁ vākyeya namaḥ.
“Oṁ vākyeda namaḥ.[628]{7.6}
“These six mantras of yours, Mañjuśrī, each numbering six syllables, are of great power and equal in their great potency. They are the supreme heart mantras that bring the highest accomplishment, as if they originated from the Buddha himself. They have been proclaimed by every buddha for the benefit of all beings. They involve and activate the samaya[629] and are suitable for all types of activity. They are signposts for the road to awakening and are the most important mantras of the Tathāgata family. They can be employed in all three levels of ritual, the highest, the medium, and the lowest. They bring the ripening of the fruit of virtuous karma. They will lead to accomplishment at the time when the Buddha’s teaching has disappeared. {7.7}
“For those who will have succeeded in finding, for the sake of protection, a true Dharma guide, these mantras will, even through only basic application, accomplish the goals of kingship, good fortune, and great powers.[630] They will swiftly lead them to accomplishment at that time and juncture. Therefore, these supreme heart mantras should be accomplished even if it were only out of curiosity. In short, in whatever way they are employed, they will lead to corresponding accomplishments. The painting procedure involving these mantras will now be presented in brief.[631]{7.8}
“At that time, during the terrible period of five degenerations, beings will have very little merit. They will be petty,[632] with short lifespans and little happiness. Being weak in diligence,[633]F.141.aF.158.a they will not even be able to begin the very elaborate rites for the painting procedures. It is for their benefit that I will teach a very short procedure. {7.9}
“First, one should purchase thread with due care, one pala or half a pala in weight, and commission a weaver to make a cloth one cubit long and half a cubit across, together with a fringe.[634] Alternatively, one should obtain a different, new piece of cloth that is free from hairs,[635] measuring—as one prefers—two, four, six, five, ten, or eight cubits from top to bottom,[636] and very white,[637] and one should have the painter do the painting according to one’s wish. {7.10}
“It should be painted using uncontaminated paints infused with sandalwood, camphor, and saffron. First one should mix together sandalwood, camphor, and saffron into a homogenous substance and blend this with water free of living organisms and impurities. One should soak the cloth in a vessel with this mixture, cover it well with a lid, and leave it for three days. Then, having performed the protection rite, in a clean place, having ritually purified oneself, during the bright fortnight, on the full moon day,[638] one should sit on a bundle of kuśa grass in front of the vessel with the cloth in it and, facing the east, recite the words of the following mantra one hundred and eight times: {7.11}
“Oṁ he he! O blessed one with many forms and the divine eye, look after me, look! Remember your samaya! O great bodhisattva with the form of a divine youth, why do you delay? Hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā![639]{7.12}
“Having recited this mantra, one should go to sleep right then. While asleep, one will receive a sign whether the procedure will be successful or not. Upon awakening, one should commission the painting without delay if one’s dreams indicated success. If the dreams conveyed no sign of success, one should take the cloth out of the vessel and dry it in the sun. When dry, one should again place it in a different new vessel. One should keep it well hidden, and also do the protection rite over it. Then, choosing whichever among the six-syllable heart mantras given previously one wishes, recite its syllables one hundred thousand times. One will then be able to swiftly[640] accomplish the cloth-painting procedure. {7.13}
“To begin, one should take this cloth, F.141.bF.158.b and, during the prātihāra fortnight, or any day during the bright fortnight when the stars are auspicious, and during an auspicious lunar asterism, on a night augured as favorable by the cries of auspicious birds, at midnight, one should have the painter do the painting. This should be done in a clean place, by a painter who is observing the ritual fast and burning an incense of camphor.[641]{7.14}
“The painter should first[642] paint Noble Mañjuśrī with the form of a young boy, his hair in five locks, and dressed with all the adornments of a boy. Golden in color, he wears short trousers and a shirt of blue silk. He expounds the Dharma while sitting on a lion throne in the cross-legged posture with his right foot placed on a jeweled footstool and his left[643] on the seat of the lion throne. Adorned with all types of jewelry, he is of charming appearance.[644] Smiling slightly, he is directing his gaze at the practitioner. {7.15}
“On his right side should be painted the noble Samantabhadra, waving a white yak-tail whisk. He is of the dark blue color of the beautyberry flower. In his left hand he holds a wish-fulfilling gem. He is beautiful in every limb and adorned with all types of jewelry. He wears short trousers of blue silk and is invested with the sacred thread made of a garland of pearls. He should be painted standing on a white lotus. {7.16}
“The noble Avalokiteśvara, white as the autumn moon and wearing short trousers of blue silk, should be painted to left side of Noble Mañjuśrī. Beautiful in his every limb and adorned with all types of jewelry, he is invested with the sacred thread made of a garland of pearls. He holds a white lotus in his left hand, and with his right he holds a white yak-tail whisk with a golden handle, which he waves. Peaceful in form, he, just like the noble Samantabhadra, directs his gaze at Noble Mañjuśrī. Both of them should be painted standing on white lotuses.[645]{7.17}
“Next, three lotuses spring from a single stalk. On the pericarp of the middle, primary lotus is the lion throne of Noble Mañjuśrī and his jeweled footstool. On the second lotus the noble Samantabhadra stands on a white[646] lotus seat. On the third lotus is the noble Avalokiteśvara. The beautiful, emerald-like stalk F.142.aF.159.a rises from Anavatapta Lake, which is covered in lotus buds with leaves, half-opened lotuses, and lotuses in full bloom. This lotus stalk is supported by two nāga kings, Nanda and Upananda. {7.18}
“These two nāga kings should be painted as white, each of them adorned with seven hoods. Their bodies, adorned with all types of jewelry, are half human, and the other half is distinguished by the coils of a snake. With their [lower] bodies submerged in water, they direct their gaze at Noble Mañjuśrī. They are shaded with parasols decorated with jewels. {7.19}
“In the right corner of the cloth, on the margins below the great lake, the practitioner should be painted looking at the orb of Noble Mañjuśrī’s face. He holds an incense holder in his hand and inclines his head toward his knee. He should be depicted with all the respective details of dress and colors.[647]{7.20}
“Above Noble Mañjuśrī, in the two corners at the edge of the cloth, two divine sons wearing garlands[648] and holding garlands of flowers should be painted. They float nestled within clouds and release a great flood of flowers. Both are very beautiful. Blossoms of the ironwood tree and so forth should be painted strewn all around the cloth. One may create this painting, presided over by the three forms,[649] however one desires.[650]{7.21}
“They may be painted as the practitioner pleases, but these three figures must be included—the noble Mañjuśrī expounding the Dharma and the noble Samantabhadra and Avalokiteśvara, both of whom are painted with yak-tail whisks in their hands. Optionally, other forms may be added as desired, arranged according to their respective places. Whatever forms the practitioner finds agreeable, these forms may be painted. {7.22}
“Noble Mañjuśrī should always be painted in the middle, with the noble Avalokiteśvara and Samantabhadra on either side. The other forms, however, can be painted as preferred.[651] One can also use any piece of cloth as available, which could be one vitasti or one cubit in size and either do the painting oneself or have it done by any painter whether he observes the fast or not, has faith or not, is pure or impure, or of good or bad morals. F.142.bF.159.b If, however, the practitioner does the painting himself, he must certainly first complete the preparatory rites, have faith, and have given rise to bodhicitta. {7.23}
Chapter 8
Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“The full topic of the cloth-painting procedure, Mañjuśrī, has now been taught by me for the benefit of those beings you foretold. They will succeed even with little skillful means.[657] For their benefit I will now teach a sādhana method classified according to the type of activity, describing at length its different virtues. Listen to it well, F.143.aF.160.a and reflect upon it thoroughly. I will speak for the benefit of all beings.”[658]{8.1}
The divine youth Mañjuśrī, in turn, said to the Blessed One, “Good! It is good, O Blessed One, that you will give this eloquent exposition that illuminates our incisive meditation and causes the qualities of mantra practice to fully manifest.[659] So do teach this method, Blessed One, if you think that the time is right. Do so out of compassion for us.” {8.2}
Lord Śākyamuni looked then at the entire assembly and smiled. At that moment rays of blue, yellow, and translucent crystalline light[660] issued from the mouth of Lord Śākyamuni. As soon as these rays issued forth, they illuminated the entire assembly and dimmed the worldly realm of the great trichiliocosm, including the abodes of all the māras. This included the light of the entire multitude of stars, celestial bodies, mountain ranges, and the moon and the sun, those two luminaries of great power and might, which were also dimmed by the light of Śākyamuni’s rays. They lost their radiance and did not illuminate the worlds. They did not shine and appeared dark. The rays dimmed also the jewel light of all gems, mantras, and medicines and then disappeared back into Lord Śākyamuni’s mouth. {8.3}
Bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, the great being, was present at that time in the midst of this great gathering. Seated, he rose from his seat in his beautiful form pleasing to beings,[661] prostrated at the Blessed One’s feet, and said this to him:
“It is not without a cause or a reason that the blessed[662] buddhas smile. What is the cause, Blessed One, what is the reason for your smile?” {8.4}
Being thus asked, the Blessed One said to Bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, “It is so, Vajrapāṇi, it is so. It is exactly as you say. The smile of the tathāgatas does not happen without a cause or a reason.[663] There is a cause, F.143.bF.160.b there is a reason: future beings will take up and follow this king of the lords of sūtras, this root manual of Mañjuśrī, which arose out of the tenth bodhisattva level, Cloud of Dharma—a collection of skillful methods such as ritual practices that involve knowledge-vidyās and practicing the right conduct. Future beings will study this manual in full, memorize it, spread it by word of mouth, and put their faith in it. {8.5}
“Having written it down in the form of a book, they will worship it with sandalwood powder, ointments, incense, flower garlands, parasols, flags and banners, or other different means, in particular with the music[664] of various instruments and cymbals. Through that they will attain a continuous mental state of inner rejoicing that makes their bodily hair bristle with joy. Learning about the power and efficacy of vidyās, they will be thrilled, rejoice, and will take up the right conduct. I predict that all of them will become blessed buddhas, established in supreme, perfect awakening. It is for this and no other reason that the victorious ones smile. {8.6}
“To start, one who observes his samaya of, who has completed the preparatory rites for, and who has been ritually initiated into this king of manuals should choose either the root mantra, heart mantra, subsidiary heart mantra, or another mantra, whether of one syllable or another one as desired and go to a large forest. There one should recite the mantra three million times, living on fruits, water, roots, or leaves. This constitutes the preliminary practice. {8.7}
“One should then climb to the top of a mountain and position the superior[665] painting so that it faces the west. Then, sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass and facing east, one should offer, below the painting, one hundred thousand white lotuses smeared with white sandalwood[666] and saffron to Lord Śākyamuni and all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas. One should burn camphor incense according to one’s means[667] and make offerings to the gods and nāgas F.144.aF.161.a of whatever flowers are available. {8.8}
“Then, at the midnight hour, on a bright full moon night, the completely full moon of the prātihāra fortnight, one should dig, in front of the painting, a fire pit in the shape of a lotus and kindle the fire using white sandalwood sticks. One should blend together saffron and camphor and offer it into the fire one thousand and eight times, [or as many times] as one can. [In this way] one becomes ritually protected. {8.9}
“Then rays of light emanate from Lord Śākyamuni, encircle the painting, and envelop it with blazing light. The practitioner,[668] in a form pleasing to beings,[669] should then circumambulate the painting three times clockwise, bow to all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas, and take the painting into his hands.[670]{8.10}
“As soon as one grasps the end of the cloth where the practitioner had been painted earlier, one will fly upward.[671] In the snap of a finger, one will ascend to the realm of Brahmā. One will reach the world sphere called Kusumāvatī, where dwells Tathāgata Saṃkusumita Rājendra. There he upholds, maintains, and expounds the Dharma. One will see there Noble Mañjuśrī in person and will hear his Dharma discourse. One will also see many hundreds of thousands[672] of bodhisattvas and attend upon them. One will live for one thousand great eons, enjoying[673] freedom from old age and death. {8.11}
“The painting also remains there and is blessed by all the buddhas and bodhisattvas; one can clearly feel the blessing. One will be able to visit hundreds of thousands of buddhafields, display hundreds of thousands of bodies, and develop many magical powers. Noble Mañjuśrī will become one’s spiritual friend, and one will be destined to attain awakening.” {8.12}F.144.bF.161.b
This concludes the eighth chapter of this extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings. This chapter constitutes the detailed first chapter on the ritual involving the supreme sādhana method.Chapter 9
Now Lord Śākyamuni addressed the hosts of gods who were sitting among the entire assembly:
“Esteemed friends! Please listen to my discourse about the method for accomplishing the conduct, maṇḍala, and mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Hear this great vidyārāja—the supremely secret and sublime heart mantra that was taught by all the tathāgatas for the sake of protecting the practitioner—by the uttering of which all mantras are uttered. {9.1}
“This vidyārāja, O hosts of gods, is inviolable. With this vidyārāja even Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, can be summoned, enthralled, and made to comply. Why say more? There are, O bodhisattvas, other mantras, both worldly and transcendental, but this unique mantra of great valor and power is said to be the best of all mantras—it can destroy all obstacles.[674] Among all one-syllable mantras, only this one is called the syllable.[675]{9.2}
“This single syllable fulfills all purposes and accomplishes every task; it nullifies all the mantras of evildoers and removes all sins;[676] it makes all the other mantras effective; it brings that which is virtuous. It surpasses all other worldly and transcendental mantras. It is the impeccable essence of all the tathāgatas that fulfills all wishes. Which mantra is this? It is kḷlhīṁ.[677]{9.3}
“Friends, this most secret vidyārāja called One Syllable can be employed in all rites. No being F.145.aF.162.a may transgress it; it cannot be assailed by any spirit; it constitutes the auspiciousness of all the buddhas; it makes all mantras effective; it is the master of the worlds; it is the lord of all the lords of wealth;[678] it is the love for all those who hate; it awakens the compassion of all beings; and it is the remover of all obstacles. In short, whatever it is employed in, that very thing it will accomplish. It can perform tasks even when it is not fully mastered. {9.4}
“Whomever one touches while reciting this mantra[679] will become enthralled. If one wears incanted clothes, one will obtain good fortune. If one bites an incanted tooth stick, one will get rid of a toothache. If one bites an incanted tooth stick from the white oleander tree,[680] food will be found without one’s having to ask for it. {9.5}
“If one has eye pain, one should grind sea salt, incant it seven times, and apply it to the eye. This will remove the pain. If one has an earache, one should take a mushroom[681] that has grown in elephant dung while it thundered, wrap it in a leaf of kedhuka, and cook it over a low fire until it is well cooked. Having then added a lukewarm solution of sea salt, one should incant the decoction seven times and pour it into the ear.[682] The pain will be assuaged at that moment. {9.6}
“If, at the time of giving birth, a woman is having a difficult delivery and is overcome with pain, one should grind the root of Malabar nut with water that is free of living organisms and smear it over the navel area.[683] She will give birth with ease. If a person with a splinter in his flesh[684] drinks old ghee incanted one hundred and eight times, or smears it over the affected area, the splinter will come out. {9.7}
“In the case of indigestion with vomiting and dysentery,[685] one should incant seven times some sochal salt, sea salt, or other type of salt, and eat it. One will be free from this disease the same day and will become well. In the case of the twofold dysentery or a sudden dysentery,[686] one should mash the fruits[687] of citron[688] with water that is free of living organisms and has been incanted once or more.[689]F.145.bF.162.b By this method one will be freed from the unpleasant symptoms. {9.8}
“In the case of a barren woman, or a woman who wants but is unable to conceive, one should cook the root of winter cherry with ghee,[690] blend it with cow’s milk, and dilute it with more milk. One should incant it twenty-five times and give it to such a woman to drink during her period, after bathing. The householder-husband, staying away from the wives of others and avoiding inappropriate sexual conduct, should then approach her sexually, or she him. She will then conceive a son. {9.9}
“If she experiences bleeding within the next three to five years when she is with child; if she does not conceive a child for many years;[691] if she is harmed by the mantra magic, medicines, or mudrās of others;[692] if she suffers a miscarriage; if she falls ill; if there is any other disorder caused by others; or if she is poisoned by animate or inanimate, or natural or artificial means—if any of this was effected by the friendly or hostile use of any root or medicine mantras, one should chant the mantra twenty-seven times and then grind old ghee with the moon-like eye of a peacock feather, making it homogenous. When it is finely ground, one should mix it with sugar and eat an amount the size of myrobalan fruit every day over seven days. {9.10}
“The patient should be made to drink milk cooked with sugar, having incanted it again and again. If one has a headache, one should wipe the head with a crow’s pinion incanted seven times. One will become well. {9.11}
“For female disease such as hypermenorrhea, one should grind the root of nīlikā[693] together with milk,[694] add to it some root of the indigo plant, and incant this one hundred and eight times. One should then blend it with milk and give it to the patient to drink. Similarly, in the case of a fever, be it a quartan, one-day, two-day, three-day, chronic,F.146.aF.163.a constant, or recurrent one, one should have the patient drink milk with ghee, incanted one hundred and eight times. The patient will become well. {9.12}
“Similarly, if someone is seized by a ḍākinī or a graha,[695] one should incant one’s own face one hundred and eight times and face the affected person; they will become well. Similarly, if someone is seized by any terrible and evil nonhuman being, such as a mātṛkā, a pūtanā that attacks children, a vetāla, or a graha that seizes children, one should incant one’s own hand one hundred and eight times and touch the affected person on the head. They will become well. {9.13}
“A single repetition of the mantra will protect oneself; a double repetition, one’s friends; a triple one, one’s house; a fourfold one, one’s village; a fivefold one, everybody within the greater village area; up until, with one thousand repetitions, one may protect an army. One may perform these and all the other similar minor acts, even if one has not fully mastered the mantra. {9.14}
“One who desires accomplishment should not engage in trivial activities.[696] One should go alone to a secluded place at the source of a river that flows into the ocean or on the ocean shore, on the bank of the Gaṅgā, or on the bank of any big river. There, in a clean spot, one should build a hut.[697] One should perform the threefold ablutions, wear the three garments, observe silence, and live on food obtained by begging or on the practitioner’s diet of milk, barley, and fruit. Living thus, one should recite the mantra three million times. Then, once the sign has been observed, one should commence the sādhana practice. {9.15}
“On that location, in the same place, one should install the superior[698] painting and offer a big pūjā with lamps of gold and silver, or of copper and clay, filled with olibanum oil or ghee,[699]F.146.bF.163.b with wicks made of high-quality fabric. One should prepare one hundred thousand[700] such lamps and offer all of them before the painting. {9.16}
“With the lighted lamps evenly arranged in contiguous rows, light will radiate from the painting. The moment the light shines, the painting will be haloed with a blazing ring of light that pervades everywhere. In the sky above drums will sound and congratulatory cheers will be heard. {9.17}
“At that point, a vidyādhara, in a form that delights sentient beings, will emerge from the corner where the practitioner is depicted on the previously painted cloth. One should give him a welcome offering, circumambulate him, bow to all the buddhas, and seize him. As soon as one has seized him, one will fly up together with all the beings holding lamps and, perhaps, ascend to 100,001[701] palaces. Surrounded by vidyādharīs playing divine instruments, singing songs in sweet voices, and dancing, one will be consecrated by them to kingship as a vidyādhara-cakravartin. Together with the holders of the lamps, one will revel in freedom from old age and death, endure for a great eon, have the luster of the rising sun and divinely beautiful limbs, and be adorned with a diverse array of garments.[702]{9.18}
“The vidyādharas, for their part, will become one’s servants.[703] Together with them, one will travel around as the king of all of them,[704] and they will attend upon one as servants. One will become a monarch of vidyādharas. One will live long, be unassailable by all siddhas, be supremely attractive to vidyādhara girls, and will master all substances. One will worship the buddhas and bodhisattvas and will be placed on the pinnacle of their victory banners.[705] One will be able to ascend even to the world of Brahmā in an instant. One will not even need to consider Śakra, let alone other vidyādharas. F.147.aF.164.a In the end, one will attain the state of awakening. Noble Mañjuśrī will become one’s spiritual friend.[706]{9.19}
“There are, however, those practitioners whose[707] sādhana practice is more intense. In such a case, one should go alone to a secluded place free from the distractions of attachment. One should retreat to a big forest and find a place where there is a lotus pond adjacent to a lonely mountain and fed by a stream.[708] One should climb to the top of the mountain and, having chosen either the single-syllable vidyārāja taught in the Mañjuśrī’s manual of rites, one taught by the Tathāgata or another bodhisattva, or any other one prefers, one should live on lotus roots and milk products, recite the vidyāmantra three million six hundred thousand times. At the end of the recitation, one should install, following the same procedure as previously taught, the superior one of the previously taught types of painting and prepare the lotus flowers smeared with white sandalwood and saffron paste. Having lit a fire of cutch tree sticks, one should offer into the fire the already-prepared lotuses thirty-six thousand times. {9.20}
“Then, at the conclusion of the homa rite, rays of light will issue forth from the painting of Lord Śākyamuni. Having illumined the practitioner, they will dissolve into his head. As soon as one is touched by these rays, one will attain the five superknowledges. Having attained the levels of a bodhisattva, one will go about as one pleases in the form of a god. One will live thirty-six eons and will traverse thirty-six buddhafields, beholding all their might. One will memorize the teachings of the thirty-six buddhas and will delight in worshiping and serving them. In the end, dedicated to the attainment of awakening, one will be wholly taken care of by the spiritual friend, Noble Mañjuśrī, right until the ultimate state of awakening, the final nirvāṇa.” {9.21}F.147.bF.164.b
This concludes the ninth chapter of “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings. This chapter constitutes the detailed second[709] chapter on the ritual involving the supreme sādhana method.Chapter 10
At that time Lord Śākyamuni taught yet another supreme ritual practice:
“Having chosen another mantra from this king of manuals, one should go down to [the bank of] the great river Gaṅgā. Staying in a boat in the middle of the river, one should incant rice gruel mixed with milk three million times on the days of one’s choice. Subsequently, at the end of recitation, one will perceive all the nāgas. One should then start the main practice. For that, one should prepare, in the middle of the boat, a fire pit in the shape of a lotus. One should prepare a big offering of ironwood blossoms to the painting. The painting of the superior type should be positioned facing west, with oneself sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass facing east. One should incant each of the ironwood blossoms seven times and offer it into the blazing fire of cutch tree sticks. One should do this until one has offered thirty thousand such blossoms, each smeared with white sandalwood and saffron paste. One should use nothing else. One should wait for the nāgas to appear.[710] They will be enticed by the power substances, but will not take them. {10.1}
“Then, at the conclusion of the homa ritual, one will fly up together with the boat. One will become a vidyādhara-cakravartin, and all the nāga kings will become one’s followers, acting as servants. One will live thirty intermediate eons and will be able to act as one pleases. One’s activities will be unimpeded. One will be able to perceive Noble Mañjuśrī face to face. He will touch one on the head, and as soon as he has done so, one will obtain the five superknowledges. One will be certain to attain buddhahood. {10.2}F.148.aF.165.a
“There is another supreme ritual practice. One should descend to the bank of the great river Gaṅgā and construct a boat from a single block of wood from the bilva tree. It ought to be well made and attractive. One should board it,[711] bringing an oar of bilva wood. With this, one should propel the boat, employing a genuinely skilled assistant. One should have him row the boat, without leaving the great river Gaṅgā, in circles, across, or lengthwise.[712] One should choose either the six-syllable root mantra, the eight-syllable mantra, the single-syllable one, or another, such as those of the wrathful deities, dūtas, or dūtīs, or yet another mantra.[713] One should then install the painting of the superior type facing west, with the practitioner facing east. From this point onward one can conduct the ritual as one wishes. One should use either a dish of milk, barley, and fruit, or one of water, radishes, and fruit. One should observe silence, ritually bathe three times a day, and possess three changes of clothing. One should practice pure conduct, with a very pure mind. First, one should recite the mantra,[714] in front of the painting, six million times, following the previously described procedure. Then, at the end of the recitation, the boat will be fit to sail across a big ocean.{10.3}
“For that reason, the practitioner should collect the things that he will need and put them in the boat in advance. He should not be afraid when sailing across the great ocean. The boat will not be obstructed. It cannot be forced to turn back, except through the practitioner’s own will. He will thus be able to enter the big ocean in an instant even if this ocean is a thousand leagues away, so what need is there even to mention short distances? {10.4}
“Having entered it, this home of all rivers, one should start one’s practice.[715] Having lit a fire of cutch tree sticks in a previously constructed pit or a clay basin made by a potter, one should offer into the fire six million oblations of stamens of ironwood blossoms mixed with white sandalwood and camphor. These individual oblations could be either small or big. {10.5}F.148.bF.165.b
“While one is offering the oblations, the rākṣasas who dwell in Laṅkā and assume many forms will cry, ‘Ha, ha!’ The nāga kings who dwell in Bhogavatī, a city of the nāgas, will emerge from the water in their different forms, ranging from exceedingly fierce to very peaceful. These nāgas and rākṣasas will say, ‘Get up, sir, get up! Become our master!’ In this way, the asuras, the yakṣas, the gods, the mahoragas, the celestial siddhas, and all the humans will try to entice the practitioner. One should neither get up, nor be afraid. {10.6}
“At that time, the adept of vidyās should, while reciting the mantra, threaten them with the index finger of the left hand. They will then disperse, running hither and thither, and be gone.[716] Then, at the conclusion of the homa ritual, they will seize the boat together with the practitioner and, in an instant, take it to the realm of Akaniṣṭha. One can thus go to and return from other world spheres. One will become equal in mental power to a bodhisattva,[717] possessing the five superknowledges, great magical abilities, and great power. One will be able to see Noble Mañjuśrī at all times. All the nāgas, rākṣasas, gods, asuras, and every other being will come under one’s control, having been appointed to carry out one’s orders by all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, noble śrāvakas, and those who have accomplished the mantra. They will be lovingly disposed toward the practitioner and act in his interest, so that he cannot be harmed by any being.[718]{10.7}
“There is another supreme ritual practice. One should commission the construction of a boat from a big log of bilva wood, or perhaps from the pieces of a single block of wood. One should construct a big wharf on an island in the middle of the Gaṅgā. F.149.aF.166.a One should build a boat docked at that place. In that boat, there should be one hundred and twenty passengers—each holding a flower and a lamp—who have performed the protection rite and are wearing white clothes. One should have them place the flowers and the lamps in front of the superior of the different types of painting, installed according to the previously described procedure.[719] One should then perform a large pūjā in front of the painting and offer into the cutch-wood fire thirty-six thousand oblations of powdered ironwood blossoms mixed with saffron, white sandalwood, and camphor. {10.8}
“Subsequently, at the conclusion of the homa ritual, the boat will ascend to the world of Brahmā in an instant. When one arrives there, one will be able to move around at will. One will perceive Noble Mañjuśrī face to face. As soon as one beholds him, one will attain the bodhisattva levels and the five superknowledges. One will live for a long time, enduring for one great eon. One will become the great monarch of the vidyādharas, who, holding lamps in their hands, will become one’s helpers. Together with them one will be able to wander as one pleases; one will be able to go wherever one wants to. One will delight in worshiping the blessed buddhas.[720] In the end, one will be certain to attain buddhahood. {10.9}
“If one does not find, among those places that were taught for all rites, places for the practice of the rites that bring supreme accomplishment, one should perform the preliminary practices in any clean place anywhere. With faith and resolve, one should commence the supreme rites employing the sādhana method.[741]{10.51}
“To start, one should install the painting of the superior[742] type facing west, with oneself facing east. One should take some clay, either from a fine anthill or from the bank of the Gaṅgā, and, optionally, [the root of] khaskhas grass, white sandalwood, and saffron. One should mix this very well with camphor and fashion from this an effigy of a peacock. One should place it in front of the painting and fashion with kuśa grass that has grown in a clean place, with the tips of the grass blades untrimmed, the shape of a ring. Holding this ring with one’s right hand in front of the painting, and the peacock[743] with one’s left, one should, on the night of the full moon, offer to the painting a large pūjā, burning an incense of camphor.[744] One should recite the mantra until daybreak. {10.52}
“Then, at sunrise, this clay peacock will become the great king of peacocks,[745] and the ring of grass will blaze with light. Oneself will become possessed of a divine body, adorned with divine garlands, clothes, and ornaments. One will be graced with a desirable form that resembles the rising sun. One should bow to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, circumambulate the painting clockwise, take the painting into one’s hands, F.151.aF.168.a and sit upon the peacock as one’s mount. In an instant one will ascend to the realm of Brahmā. One will become the great emperor of vidyādharas, surrounded by many hundreds of thousands of millions of them. One will live for sixty eons of Manu.[746] One will be able to go wherever one wants, and one’s movement will not be impeded. One will be endowed with divine good fortune and be able to see Noble Mañjuśrī face to face. Mañjuśrī will become one’s spiritual friend and, in the end, one will attain buddhahood. {10.53}
“Similarly, one should procure a mendicant’s staff, a water pitcher, a sacred cord, red arsenic and bovine orpiment, a sword, an arrow, a javelin, an axe, and [other] different kinds of weapons and also, made of clay, humans and animals, different types of birds for riding, lions, tigers, hyenas, and so forth, fashioning them from clay from an anthill or clay from a riverbank[747] richly scented with pleasant scents. Likewise, one should procure conveyances provided with a chair or a bed, white parasols, various types of head ornaments, all types of jewels, and all the different requisites of one who has gone forth, including a rosary of rudrākṣa beads,[748] sandals, wooden clogs, an alms bowl, an ascetic’s robes and staff, a needle, and a knife and any other implements made of ‘flower-metal,’[749] starting with a bowl. One should fashion them from flower-metal, clay from an anthill, or clay from the riverbank, and smear or sprinkle all of them with the five products of a cow.[750] One should incant them one hundred and eight times with the purificatory mantra, one-syllable mantra, or any other mantra taught in this king of manuals, with the exception of the mantras employed in subsidiary practices.[751] Having performed, as appropriate, the desired protection ritual for oneself and one’s friends, one who is well acquainted with the knowledge of the mantra system F.151.bF.168.b should secretly install, in any of the previously described places, the painting of the superior type facing west, with oneself facing east, and offer to it a large pūjā.
Burning incense of camphor, one should grasp any one of the previously mentioned individual weapons and implements,[752] fashioned as specified, and recite over it the mantra on a bright night of the full moon until sunrise.{10.54}
“Immediately, the painting will appear enveloped in a great halo of light. If it was a mode of conveyance that was grasped by the practitioner, he will be able, after boarding it, to go wherever he pleases. If, on the other hand, it was an ornament or a weapon item, he will become, when holding it, a venerable[753] vidyādhara-cakravartin. He will be able to go wherever he pleases, possessed of divine form, effulgent as the rising sun, enveloped in a halo of great light, with the body as bright as lightning.[754] He will be the master of all vidyādharas, will live for one great eon, have a retinue of many hundreds of thousands of millions of vidyādharas, and live in a divine palace made of precious jewels and gems.[755]{10.55}
[The ability] that was perceived in the previously crafted conveyance, whatever [that being] was good at, will now become its great power.[756] This being will become one’s conveyance for riding and a companion. Thwarting the minute powers of others’ mantras[757] and employing the powers of one’s own, it will become compassionate at heart, desiring to benefit others, and always devoted [to the practitioner]. And whatever items of weaponry, ornaments, jewels, and so forth one took up, starting with the beings who serve as seat and bed conveyances, they will always follow the practitioner to give him good protection, cover, and shelter. {10.56}
“One will obtain great power, energy, and a superb physical body. One will behold Noble Mañjuśrī face to face and be applauded F.152.aF.169.a by him. When touched by him on the head, one will receive the boon of spiritual friendship until one has reached the essence of awakening. One will definitely obtain the ten powers. One will be venerated by all beings[758] and will never be assailed or defeated by spirits. One will not be separated from the lineage of the final goal and will attain the bodhisattva levels. One will follow the obligations of a bodhisattva consistent with the ten powers.[759] In short, all the supreme rites should be performed in these supreme places, and one who delights in the supreme worship in front of the superior painting should only perform the supreme rites.[760]{10.57}
“One should become a sky-traveling vidyādhara—a bodhisattva endowed with the five superknowledges, established on the bodhisattva levels, and able to traverse the world spheres in this very body—in order to swell the lineage of the buddhas possessed of the ten powers, to be able to see Noble Mañjuśrī face to face, to give Dharma discourses that will bear fruit, to encourage others to listen to Dharma teachings, to prevent the lineage of the buddhas from dying out, to gradually attain omniscience, to reach the tenth bodhisattva level called The Cloud of Dharma,[761] to dry up and pacify the afflictions with the rain of ambrosia, to continually confer benefits on the people of the world, to guard the Dharma eye of the Tathāgata, to make the doctrine of the Tathāgata bear fruit, to manifest the power of the sādhana methods that involve the mantra practice,[762] and to propagate the teaching of the greatness of all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas.[763] For all this, one needs to accomplish the complete teachings in this king of manuals. {10.58}
“This ritual of the king of paintings should be accomplished following the procedure taught in all the tantras and manuals of worldly and supramundane mantras that are to be recited by the practitioner in front of the superior type of painting. F.152.bF.169.b Briefly speaking, it can be accomplished through the rites taught in this and also other manuals. These mantras will quickly bring on the accomplishment. Whatever I have taught here will definitely bring accomplishment.” {10.59}
This concludes the tenth chapter of “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings. This chapter constitutes the detailed chapter on the procedure involving the superior painting.Chapter 11
Now Lord Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual, a painting procedure of the medium type, a practice procedure serving as the means for accomplishing middling rites. I will teach it in brief, so please listen carefully and reflect upon it well. I will teach it now.” {11.1}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, for his part, said this to the Blessed One:
“May the Blessed One, the teacher, full of compassion for the world and delighting in benefiting all beings, speak! Please speak, if you think that the time is right, out of compassion for us and regard for future generations.” {11.2}
Having been thus addressed by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the Blessed One said this:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī. All the rites involved in the practice of the mantra conduct will bear fruit and not be futile for those who, first of all, are firmly established in discipline, ritual observances, purificatory acts, ritual obligations, mantra recitations, homa ritual, and the meditation methods.[764] Then, the application of all the mantras will swiftly[765] lead to success. Why is this so? I will explain that. Listen, O divine youth! {11.3}
“To start, one should assume the disciplined conduct and observances pertaining to the practice of vidyās. First, one should take the samaya pledge according to the instructions[766] of the maṇḍala master as clearly taught in your king of manuals. One should acquire a learned master who has received the ‘master empowerment’ (ācāryābhiṣeka) and has the acumen of a spiritual instructor.[767]F.153.aF.170.a Such a master should possess the Dharma that is virtuous and clear and be truthful, diligent, grateful, steadfast,[768] good natured, not too old and not too young, free from desire with regard to all gain and favors, and celibate. He should be compassionate, but not merely on account of desire or based on sensual pleasure or emotional attachment. He should not speak untruth out of strong delusion and greed, let alone due to trivial reasons. He should keep his promises and be equanimous toward all beings, have compassion for them, and practice generosity.[769] He should have completed the preparatory rites and the preliminary practice that involves the recitation of your secret mantra and have gained [therefrom the requisite] knowledge.[770] He should have entered your maṇḍala according to the right order of succession.
He must understand the ways of the world and also know the ritual procedure. He should be kind, industrious, and wise. He must practice goodness and be fearless, free from hesitation or vacillation,[771] stable, and diligent. He should not be afflicted by any disease that would render him inactive, and he should be disciplined.[772] He should come from a great and illustrious family. These are the qualities that the maṇḍala master should be endowed with.{11.4}
“The practitioner, for his part, should be either the same as him or lacking in some attributes.[773] After worshiping such a maṇḍala master, he should supplicate him as follows:
“ ‘I would like to enter the samaya with you, master, who are identical with the great bodhisattva, the divine youth Mañjuśrī.[774] Out of the master’s[775] kindness, please instruct me with a benevolent and kind mind.’ {11.5}
“The maṇḍala master then, F.153.bF.170.b following the same procedure as previously explained, should examine the disciples as before and usher them in. He should give the empowerment as before and give them the mantra.[776] He should then explain the stages of samaya and the secret tantra, mudrā, and rites. After examining them for a long time and determining their character, he teaches them the rites for all tantras, mantras, and so forth. He should not teach this to anyone else.[777] This is the accepted procedure. {11.6}
“The disciple, for his part, should gratify the maṇḍala master with anything that may be pleasing to him, and offer himself and the enjoyments. {11.7}
“The maṇḍala master should then regard the disciple as his son, and treat him as such. Like a mother, he should offer him comforts and enjoyments. {11.8}
“The disciple then, having obtained a particular mantra, should retire to a secluded area, to a place as previously described in more detail, and, in short, employ this mantra for the summoning, dismissing, and offering to the deities a bali consisting of lamps, perfume, and incense, following the elaborate procedure that has been taught as part of the maṇḍala instructions. He should thus summon the deity and present it with a welcome offering and a seat at the three junctions of the day. He should perform ritual ablutions three times a day, wear the three-piece apparel of an ascetic, and recite the mantra every day. Regarding the junctions of the day, the first junction is said to be from the end of the night until the sun is four angular cubits[778] above the horizon. The second junction is said to be at midday, for as long as the center of the sun disk traverses in the sky the distance of four cubits. The third junction is said to be at sunset, for as long as it takes the sun to move the full distance of four cubits. {11.9}
“ ‘Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers. The mantra is:
“ ‘Oṁ, bring everyone to your celestial palace in the sky, quick, quick! Remember your samaya pledge! O summoner, do not tarry, do not tarry! Give me good fortune’[853]
“Having said this, Lord Kāśyapa remained silent. {11.149}
“As soon as Lord Kāśyapa, the perfectly awakened one, spoke the words of this mantra in full, the entire sky appeared filled with a cloud consisting of choicest foodstuffs. The entire great trichiliocosm appeared to have its sky canopied with a cloud consisting of food. Whatever food the beings F.159.bF.176.b desired to satisfy their individual needs, whatever food they wished for, that had manifested for them. Whatever food preparations the beings desired to appease the pains of hunger, whatever drinks the thirsty ones wanted to drink, a stream of water along with the eight articles of offering, [all this] fell down exactly wherever it was wished for. {11.150}
“All the beings, for their part, had on that occasion, at that particular time, the suffering of their hunger completely pacified and all their thirst completely removed. The entire assembly became greatly amazed and elated and rejoiced at the Blessed One’s words. Joyfully they bowed their heads to his feet and disappeared at that very moment. Lord Kāśyapa, for his part, said, ‘Lord Śākyamuni and I sojourned on earth as tathāgatas. At that time this mantra was taught in this king of manuals and celebrated.’[854]{11.151}
“This mantra[855] ought to be accomplished for the benefit of all beings, in particular the mantra reciters, to remove their hunger and thirst, just as it was previously accomplished by the reciter [Kāśyapa]. If one does not feel up to wandering around for the sake of alms, one should climb to a mountaintop and recite that mantra six hundred thousand times,[856] living on the three pure food products[857] or milk dishes. {11.152}
“There, on the mountaintop, one should install the medium painting of Noble Mañjuśrī and, as before, offer a big pūjā [followed] by a big bali offering of food. Employing the mantra taught by Kāśyapa and other perfectly awakened buddhas, one should make a fire of cutch tree sticks and offer into it, [while reciting the mantra], one thousand and eight sticks of either the cluster fig or bilva tree, nine inches long, [moist with sap], and smeared with curds,[858] honey, and ghee. {11.153}
“Then, at the midnight hour, a great whirlwind will arrive in the form of a black cloud. F.160.aF.177.a One should not be afraid, nor should one get up or approach it.[859] Just as before,[860] one should effect protection for oneself and the protective binding of the maṇḍala for one’s companions by means of the eight-syllable heart mantra of Noble Mañjuśrī. The black whirlwind will subsequently disappear, and in front of the practitioner will appear women adorned with all types of jewelry. One of them, with a halo of light illuminating the space around her, will say, ‘Rise up, O great being! You have reached accomplishment.’[861]{11.154}
“The practitioner should then give her a welcome offering of water with floating jasmine flowers. At that very moment she will disappear. On that very day, she will give to the practitioner and twenty-five of his companions, or whomever the practitioner fancies, foodstuffs and any useful objects that they may want. At that point the practitioner should give a farewell offering and circumambulate the painting clockwise three times. He should then take the painting, bow to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas three times,[862] and go to a place of his choice that is conducive to sādhana practice as previously described, such as a big forest, a mountaintop, or any uninhabited place. There, he should build a hut and live there alone or with companions. While living there, he should do the rites that involve sky travel, and so forth. {11.155}
“As before, the practitioner should sit on a bundle of kuśa grass, place the medium painting before himself, and, as before, light a fire of cutch tree sticks. He should offer one thousand and eight oblations of white flowers[863] smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, three times a day for twenty-one days. {11.156}
“Then, at the end of the homa ritual, at the midnight hour, one will see Noble Mañjuśrī in person. He will grant a desired boon, such as the ability to fly, F.160.bF.177.b become invisible, an attainment of a bodhisattva level, the state of a pratyekabuddha or a śrāvaka, the five superknowledges,[864] long life, a great kingdom with its many pleasures, the affection of a king, or the ability to commune with Noble Mañjuśrī himself. In short, he will grant whatever one may wish for. Or whatever one may ask for, that he will give. One may obtain all the power substances or be able to magically summon great beings. In short, he will do anything the way it is described to him. He may also purify one’s former transgressions. This was taught by Lord Śākyamuni. {11.157}
“Another practice procedure that constitutes the means of accomplishing medium rites will now be taught. To start, one should select a place in a clean area or a sandy bank of a river,[865] distinguished by the necessary qualities, and do everything as before. One should position the painting to face west, with oneself facing east. Sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass, one should repeat in full the same procedure as before. One should recite the mantra at the three junctions of the day six hundred thousand times.[866] At the end of the recitation, one should offer into the fire, prepared exactly as before, one hundred thousand blossoms of the bayur tree mixed with white sandalwood or saffron. {11.158}
“If the painting trembles violently at the conclusion of the homa ritual, it is a sign that one will become a minister. If the painting becomes luminous with light and rays of light issue forth from it, one will obtain a kingship. If the painting is completely enveloped in a halo of light, one will obtain the kingship over the realm of the four great kings. If the painting speaks,[867] one will obtain the position of Śakra—dominion over the realm of the Thirty-Three. If the painting delivers Dharma instructions, one will attain lordship of the [first] three bodhisattva levels. If one touches one’s head and arms with the painting, one will obtain the five superknowledges, the seventh bodhisattva level, and the ten powers. One will certainly obtain them one after the other. {11.159}F.161.aF.178.a
“When one has accomplished the mantra taught by Lord Kāśyapa and achieved the goal of removing hunger and thirst, one should practice the teachings on the method for accomplishing the goal of mantra activity, strictly following the procedure and using the specified implements. Otherwise one will not succeed. {11.160}
“In brief, one should follow the mantra practice step by step in this way, and one will certainly succeed.[868] One will definitely obtain all the power substances, special implements, and medicines, as well as jewels and gems as previously described. {11.161}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is as follows:
“Oṁ, you who remove all faults, destroy, destroy all those who engage in evil! Remember your samaya! Hūṁ jaḥ, svāhā![877]{11.188}
“Whatever rice dishes one has obtained through alms, or any other food that one is going to eat, one should eat it after incanting it with the above mantra.[878] Having eaten and ritually rinsed one’s mouth, one should wash the whole body as before, in the direction toward the head, and then take rest. Having rested for three quarters of an hour, or half of a half of one night-watch,[879] one should respectfully salute the painting and recite[880] genuine Dharma texts taught by all the buddhas.[881]{11.189}
“The texts to be recited are the noble Prajñāpāramitā, Candrapradīpasamādhi,[882]Daśabhūmika,[883]Suvarṇaprabhāsottama,[884]Mahāmāyūrī,[885] or Ratnaketudhāraṇī.[886] One should recite them in turns,[887] until the sun has risen one angular cubit above the horizon. Then, when one has finished reading and bowed down to one’s ability, one should put the books aside and cover them with a clean cloth. Having bowed to this work of Dharma, one should descend to a riverbank or a big pond in order to bathe. There, one should take some clay that is free of living organisms, incant it seven times F.152.bF.179.b with the following mantra, and throw it into the water. What mantra? {11.190}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers. The mantra is:
“Oṁ, paralyze all evildoers, hūṁ! You who hold a blue lotus and possess the graceful form of a divine youth, bind them, bind! Remember your samaya! Phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā![888]{11.191}
“One should use this mantra to effect protection [for oneself], bind the directions, form a protective circle for one’s companions, bind the fire pit,[889] and summon all the wicked and utterly wicked beings. With this mantra one can also arrest semen.[890] One should roam everywhere with a cord tied around one’s waist and incanted seven times. One should recite this mantra one hundred thousand times in order to destroy or appease the evil obstacle makers, reciting both during recitation sessions and the time of ritual bathing. In this way one will be able to accomplish all activities. When performing any ritual, one should put on the great fivefold seal [of Mañjuśrī].[891] One will be able to accomplish everything; it cannot be otherwise.[892]{11.192}
“The practitioner should take some powder consisting of dried clay and cow dung and do the ritual ablutions as he pleases. He should bathe in water that is free of living organisms. In all the rites, one should always use only water that is free of living organisms. Having bathed, one should smear oneself with a paste of clay and cow dung, or other fragrant unguents that are especially helpful.[893] One must not release into the water any phlegm,[894] urine, or feces. One should not splash in the water or engage in play. One should compassionately reflect on oneself and others and on the absence of self, emptiness, and the pain of experiencing pervasive suffering, which is like the pain experienced by someone separated from their mother.[895] A mantra adept should thus imagine himself to be a being without a practice to follow, one subject to ruin, fall, decay, and destruction, all of which are attended by suffering. He should think of himself as sinking deep into the ocean of saṃsāra,F.163.aF.180.a without a place to rest, protection, or refuge, and miserable. He should thus meditate, focusing his mind one-pointedly, while standing right there surrounded by water, submerged up to his neck or his waist.
{11.193}
“First one should visualize a huge lotus stalk supporting a big lotus flower. It is adorned with big petals and made of beautiful-looking jewels. Its pericarp is of beryl, its petals of emerald, and its stamens of crystal.[896] It has one thousand petals and is in full bloom. It is adorned with flowers made of crystal and ruby.[897] On this lotus there is a lotus throne made of precious stone, adorned with many gems, and shaded by a pair of cloth canopies. On the throne, one should visualize Lord Buddha expounding the Dharma. He is of pure golden color, surrounded by bright light, and adorned with a halo one fathom wide. He is large in size, appearing as if painted in the sky, and sitting in a cross-legged posture. {11.194}
“To his right, on a lotus seat, one should visualize Noble Mañjuśrī, adorned with all the superb ornaments. He is not sitting but standing,[898] and holding, in his extended hand, a yak-tail whisk to fan the Blessed One. He is of light red hue or the color of ground saffron. To the left of the Blessed One, there is the noble Avalokiteśvara, the color of a full autumn moon, with a yak-tail whisk in his hand. Similarly, the eight bodhisattvas[899]—the noble Maitreya, Samantabhadra, Kṣitigarbha, Gaganagañja, Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin, Apāyajaha, the noble Vajrapāṇi, and Sudhana—should be visualized. These are the ten[900] bodhisattvas. {11.195}
“To the right,[901] one should visualize the eight pratyekabuddhas—Candana, Gandhamādana, Ketu, Suketu, Sitaketu, Riṣṭa, Upāriṣṭa, and Nemi. F.163.bF.180.b In the same place[902] there are also the eight great śrāvakas—the noble Mahāmaudgalyāyana, Śāriputra, Gavāmpati, Piṇḍolabharadvāja, Pilindavatsa, the noble Rāhula, Mahākāśyapa, and the noble Ānanda. {11.196}
“Next to these eight great śrāvakas, one should visualize an infinite assembly of monks; next to the pratyekabuddhas, an infinite numbers of other pratyekabuddhas; and in the eight places of the eight great bodhisattvas, infinite assemblies of other bodhisattvas. In this auspicious way should one visualize the canopy of the sky filled with this great assembly. {11.197}
“Still standing in water reaching up to one’s navel, one should perform a big pūjā, offering flowers of many types, earthly and celestial, including māndarava and great māndarava, lotuses and great lotuses, or, according to season, blue lotuses[903]—different flowers of great size, baskets with flowers, and flowers piled as high as a mountain. Also, one should perform a pūjā, pleasing to the mind, for all the śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and bodhisattvas, offering fragrant powders, parasols, flags, and banners—both earthly and celestial, in great numbers—including thousands of millions of billions of bright lamps. One should offer, in the same manner, requisites and articles used for a bali offering, such as incense and food. {11.198}
“One should then visualize oneself and everything illumined by the light issuing forth from the tuft of hair between Lord Śākyamuni’s eyebrows. Immediately entering samādhi while reciting the mantra, one will obtain fruits of the accumulated great merit and will certainly become destined for awakening. {11.199}
Chapter 12
Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the entire Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to [the instructions] for the followers of your vidyā mantra who strive to benefit all beings—what mantras[949] they should be made to recite, by whom these mantras are to be recited, and the attendant rosary rites that are methods for accomplishing all the common mantras of all tantras. Listen carefully and reflect on this well. I will teach this [now].” {12.1}
At these words, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, said this to the Blessed One:
“Good! May the Blessed One show us[950] the favor of teaching this for the sake of all those who entered the samaya of mantra practice, as well as every other being.” {12.2}
After Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, spoke thus, the Blessed One said this to him:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, as I will teach at length and in detail how beings can accomplish all their aims by applying all the mantra conduct. And how [do they do this]? First there is [the following] mantra. Homage to all the buddhas whose forms are marvelous and inconceivable. It is:
“Oṁ, act, act! Accomplish all aims, accomplish![951] O (female) sky dweller who dumbfounds all the wicked ones, effect the purification! Svāhā![952]{12.3}
“One should employ this mantra in the rites of crafting all types of rosaries, those that involve cleaning, drilling, threading, separating, and so forth.[953]{12.4}F.167.bF.184.b
Chapter 13
Now Lord Śākyamuni again looked at the realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a ritual sequence for a special worship of [the god of] fire, which is meant for those practitioners of vidyā who engage in the rite of homa according to the special procedure that has been succinctly explained in the chapter on mantras in your manual. Once established in this routine, beings become actively engage in the conduct of all vidyās. What is this sequence? The mantric words of the secret vidyā spell are as follows: {13.1}F.169.bF.186.b
“Oṁ, rise up, O tawny [flame] with red eyes! Give and cause to give! Hūṁ, phaṭ phaṭ![983] Destroy all the obstacles, svāhā![984]
“This, O Mañjuśrī, is the supreme heart [mantra] of [the god of] fire that accomplishes all activities and fulfills all wishes. {13.2}
“At the beginning, the practitioner should offer into the fire three oblations of ghee, incanted each time with this heart mantra of fire. For someone engaged in this way in the performance of the pacifying, nourishing, or wrathful activities, there are prescribed three types of firewood, respectively. {13.3}
“Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, the perfect teachers. The mantra is:
“Oṁ, burn! Remain, hūṁ! Ru ru, you from whom all things arise! You who are the origin, svāhā![1009]{13.60}
Chapter 14
Then Lord Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, O Mañjuśrī, a secret vidyā mantra of yours that accomplishes all mantras. It was granted by the tathāgatas, arose from the treasury of their teachings, belongs to the ‘Cloud of Dharma,’ and is of the essence of the sky. This vidyā is the supreme lord of all mundane and supramundane mantras, just like the divine youth is the lord of all beings. This lord is described as a tathāgata, the supreme and the most excellent. Just as Lord Buddha, O divine youth, is the most eminent person among gods and men, so he—this supreme vidyārāja—is among all the mantras. He has been formerly taught by the blessed buddhas who are equal in number to the grains of sand in the river Gaṅgā and whose merits are ineffable. He has been regarded by them as the supremely secret heart mantra F.172.bF.189.b of the tathāgata Ratnaketu, auspicious in every respect. He is praised and extolled by all the buddhas, is the relief of all beings, and is the destroyer of every evil. He grants every wish and fulfills every hope. So what is this mantra?”[1014]{14.1}
While he spoke, a ray of light called arouser of all the buddhas emerged from the tuft of hair between the eyebrows of the blessed Śākyamuni. It illuminated all the buddhafields in the ten directions, above, below, and everywhere, delighting the minds of all beings. It then disappeared into Blessed Śākyamuni’s uṣṇīṣa. Subsequently, there emerged from the same uṣṇīṣa the lord of vidyās named One Syllable, as a form ablaze all around with the light that all ordinary beings find impossible to look at, or to lay hold of. Out of this great effulgence emerged his body, consisting of a halo of light, displaying multiple aspects and the great form of a cakravartin. {14.2}
Having emerged, he illuminated the entire sky. He had a retinue of all the vidyā kings and was attended on and worshiped by many hundreds of thousands of millions of vidyās. He was praised by all the supramundane cakravartins and vidyārājas, eulogized by all the mantras,[1015] and cherished by all the buddhas and the bodhisattva great beings who had attained the tenth level of realization. Together they filled the entire canopy of the sky. His body was adorned with celestial gems and bedecked with great jewels and gems, beautiful in appearance, supremely radiant, emanating hundreds of thousands of millions of magical creations in various forms,[1016] pronouncing the one-syllable word of his mantra, and radiating a great mass of light. He positioned himself in midair above Lord Śākyamuni, facing and looking upon the entire realm of the Pure Abode and illuminating the circle of the great assembly. {14.3}
Lord Śākyamuni then pronounced the One Syllable, this vidyā cakravartin, the heart essence of all the tathāgatas, the supreme secret heart essence of the tathāgata called Ratnaketu; the One Syllable that is taught and cherished by all the tathāgatas intimately connected with Lord Ratnaketu[1017]—Śālendrarāja, F.173.aF.190.a Amitābha, Duḥprasaha, Sunetra, Suketu, Puṣpendra, and the sage Supināntaloka—and also by the [three] tathāgatas starting with Kanaka; the One Syllable that is taught and celebrated by all the perfectly awakened ones who have gone beyond. What is this One Syllable? {14.4} It is bhrūṁ.[1018]
“This, Mañjuśrī, is the supreme essence of all the tathāgatas.[1019] This is the great means of purification, One Syllable by name, the vidyādhara-cakravartin. When used along with him, all mantras will be successful.[1020] He is, O divine youth, recommended as the secret, supreme mantra that accords with all the mantras in your excellent king of manuals. He is the purifier of obscurations in all rites. A practitioner must first utter this mantra three hundred thousand times, and then, O divine youth, the rites for all the mantras and all the worldly and transcendent mantra methods in your king of manuals will be accomplished.[1021] When protected by One Syllable, one becomes invulnerable to attacks by any being.
One will also not succumb to any obstacles, whether mundane or supramundane.”{14.5}
As soon as the One Syllable was pronounced by Lord Śākyamuni, all the world spheres of the great trichiliocosm shook in six different ways. All the buddhafields became filled with light and all the blessed buddhas dwelling there joined the circle of the great assembly gathered in the realm of the Pure Abode. So, too, all the bodhisattvas on the tenth level of realization who were irreversibly established in perfect awakening, all the śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, all the beings possessed of great powers, roused by the light from One Syllable, the vidyārāja, arrived enthralled[1022] in the assembly. F.173.bF.190.b And other beings living in infinite worldly realms who followed the painful destinies of hell, the hungry ghosts, and animals, were touched by the radiance of the great light. When thus illuminated, those who were acutely suffering, immersed in their painful experience, became cheered in their minds. They entered definitively into the three vehicles. {14.6}
Then Lord Śākyamuni looked again at this great circle of the assembly and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, as I tell about this vidyārāja! He possesses great magical power. As a maṇḍala deity, he is depicted without a retinue. He is suitable for all types of activity. He is the supreme monarch of all vidyās and fulfills the hopes of all beings. For all the profusion of rites,[1023] he is present in the large body of rites of the mantra system associated with you. He accomplishes all mantras and is universally applicable. He is renowned as a great lord who is very energetic and is particularly skilled in the method and wisdom that benefit beings who practice. He clears up the entire path to awakening and establishes beings in nirvāṇa. He causes one to ascend to the seat of awakening,[1024] and he [facilitates] the accumulation of virtue. {14.7}
“It is his extensive ritual that I will now briefly teach, including the procedure of making his painting and his maṇḍala and how it is the means of accomplishment, and also how to practice the previously mentioned mantra conduct, established in which sentient beings will succeed in the practice of this great cakravartin, the marvelous vidyārāja, the supreme lord of all mantras, the illuminator, the fulfiller of all wishes, the guide, the benefactor of the whole world, who, like the Buddha, appears directly, is self-arisen, and may be employed in all activities—the highest, the medium, and the minor. {14.8}
Chapter 15
At that time, the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi, the great being, was present in the midst of the same gathering. Seated, he rose from his seat, circumambulated the Blessed One clockwise three times, and, prostrating at the Blessed One’s feet, said this to him: {15.1}
“Good, O Blessed One! For the sake of those who follow the conduct entailing the ritual divisions of vidyā and homa rites performed at the junctions of the day, you have clearly explained and elucidated with supreme eloquence the path that consists of rites involving vidyā mantras; the path that manifested from the great Cloud of Dharma; the path that comprises the detailed ritual instructions pertaining to the cakravartin, the great vidyārāja who is the heart essence of all the tathāgatas; the path that brings results and fulfills all aims completely; the unsurpassable path that leads to awakening; the path marked with the cause that generates the conditions, actions, and their certain results; the path that is the root of virtue that causes the attainment of the ten miraculous powers, and whose ultimate goal is to ascend to the seat of awakening. That, Blessed One, is excellent! May the teacher please instruct us on the signs that accord with the accomplishment of mantra that appear in dreams, signs indicating the time[1116] when the beings who engage in the practice of all vidyā mantras should commence the activities that cause accomplishment, so that all vidyā mantras—the causes that fulfill the rites—bear results.” {15.2}
Thus addressed, Lord Śākyamuni said this to the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi:
“Good, O lord of yakṣas! You act[1117] for the benefit and happiness of many people. You act out of compassion for the world, in the interest of great numbers of people, for their benefit and happiness. You act in the interest of all the practitioners of vidyā mantras. F.180.bF.197.b Listen well then, and carefully reflect upon what I will now tell you. {15.3}
“First, commencing the preparatory procedure as before, which is the same for all types of activity, one should go to a secluded place such as a mountaintop, a riverbank, a cave, or near a crossroad[1118] and build a hut at a clean spot. Following the same procedure as before for all types of activity, one should install the painting and worship it with sumptuous offerings. Then, during the bright fortnight or the prātihāra fortnight, always on an auspicious day, during the first watch of the night, one should prepare a mixture of white sandalwood, camphor, and saffron, and light a fire using sticks of the cutch tree. Sitting in front of the painting at a distance of four cubits,[1119] one should throw the oblation into the smokeless and flameless embers one thousand and eight times. Then, at the end of this offering, one should offer into the fire one thousand and eight lotus blossoms smeared with white sandalwood.[1120] At the end of the homa, one should form the mudrā of the auspicious seat and offer a seat to one’s mantra deity, using the same mantra.[1121] One should, however, perform the homa reciting the following mantra.
{15.4}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is as follows:
“Oṁ, you with the form of a divine youth! Show it, show! Reveal the truth to me in my dreams for the sake of my good fortune! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Svāhā![1122]{15.5}
“After performing the protection rite using this mantra, one should complete the required number of oblations in the homa rite as just described. Then, having spread around blades of kuśa grass that are pointed at both ends, one should go to sleep in front of the painting, not too far from it and not too near, with one’s head pointing east, using for a pillow a bundle of kuśa grass. During the first watch, while keeping oneself awake, one should salute all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, confess one’s wrongdoings, and offer oneself to all the buddhas. Then,[1123] one should surrender to the power of sleep as one likes. {15.6}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers! The mantra is:
“He he, Mahākrodha! The six-faced, six-legged destroyer of all obstacles, hūṁ hūṁ! Why do you tarry? O destroyer of the life of vināyakas, destroy my bad dreams! Lunge forward, lunge! Remember your pledge! Phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā!”[1180]{15.104}
As soon as this king, the Lord of Wrath,[1181] was pronounced, all the vināyakas and obstructers became disturbed and frightened. With fainting hearts and panicked minds, they paid homage to Lord Śākyamuni and Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, and remained samaya-bound to them. {15.105}
Lord Śākyamuni then looked at the entire realm of the Pure Abode, and said this to the great assembly of his followers:
“Ho ho, assembly of gods! He is the Lord of Wrath. While any of the worldly or transcendent mantras are being accomplished, the Lord of Wrath will tame any evil being that causes harm to the reciter, along with the culprit’s family. He will cause them to wither but will not take their lives.[1182]F.184.bF.201.b Having burnt them and dried them up, he will assign a role to them, appointing them to protect, support, and guard the reciter. The being thus appointed will have to sustain the reciter. Any such being who would transgress this obligation and harm the practitioner who is under the protection of the Lord of Wrath{15.106}
Chapter 16
The blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Mañjuśrī! Requested by the wise king of yakṣas who holds a vajra in his hand, I already taught in detail, in the middle of this assembly, your complete chapter[1288] on the ritual activities intended for all purposes.[1289]{16.1}
Chapter 17
Now Lord Śākyamuni entered the samādhi called the magical display of all the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, rays of blue, yellow, dazzling white, red, and crystal-colored light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. They brightened the entire buddhafield and illuminated the interior of every realm of the universe, while darkening all the planets and constellations and summoning them in an instant. After summoning them, the light assigned them to their respective places and drew them, by the power of the Buddha’s blessing, into the circle of the assembly. It then disappeared into the same tuft of hair between Lord Śākyamuni’s eyebrows. All the planets, constellations, and stars, their light blocked, approached Lord Śākyamuni, pained and frightened. They stood with folded hands, trembling and prostrating themselves on the ground again and again. {17.1}
“Listen, esteemed friends, hosts of gods along with men. The karma of individual beings causes them to experience the world differently. The way the bodies of beings manifest, whether the vajra bodies of the blessed buddhas F.192.aF.209.a or the various bodies of gods, asuras, and humans circling in saṃsāra, lost in its wilderness—all of this is a product of karma. This karma, whether it is good or bad, still constitutes fetters. There is no creator here who creates, nor godhead, nor the puruṣa and prakṛti as espoused in the Sāṃkhya system. Nothing of this kind exists, except for that which is produced by karma. Everything that is generated in dependence upon karma thus has a cause. This cause, in turn, depends on its own causes and conditions. In this way, everything is mutually interconnected, being generated through dependent origination. Living beings are generated from the [five] great elements that coalesce together.[1318]{17.3}
“These great elements exist within the five aggregates[1319] throughout the beginningless transmigrations. They manifest in the place of another birth, developing into an elaborate [whole] with all the [constituent] parts. The habitual tendencies generated by karmic actions can, however, be completely burnt by the fire of gnosis that blocks and prevents [the arising of elements] at another time. One can effectively accomplish the equality of the three vehicles and the state without conceptual elaboration. This will happen as the result of the karma produced by following the Mahāyāna for a long time. Following [the Mahāyāna] for a medium length of time will bring about the self-arising gnosis of a rhinoceros-like pratyekabuddha. Within a short time, one can attain the regal state of a śrāvaka[1320] who listens to the teachings of others. If naive and confused people do not turn to non-Buddhist doctrines, their intelligence will grow.[1321]{17.4}
“This world, with its different places and situations, is produced by different types of karma. Its cessation—the auspicious state without old age, sorrowless and pure—[is produced by] karma based on worldly accomplishments that are pure, [namely] the detached eightfold karma that arises out of the [eightfold] path. Karma is produced by karma and has no other basis but itself. {17.5}
“Homage to all the buddhas, the perfect teachers!
“Oṁ, kha kha! Eat, eat! Huṁ huṁ! Burn, burn! Blaze, blaze! Remain, remain! Ṣṇīḥ, phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā![1343]
Chapter 24
[1352]The blessed Śākyamuni now addressed all the most important grahas among the constellations, planets, stars, and celestial bodies that exist in all the world spheres—the grahas dwelling in all the directions and endowed with great magical powers: {24.1}F.194.aF.211.a
“Listen, venerable friends, to my presentation on the respective powers of all the planets and constellations. Show your power, sirs, and accomplish the purpose of all the rituals involving the mantra. Keep your samayas and eagerly pursue an accomplishment in the doctrine contained in this sovereign manual of Mañjughoṣa and later expounded in other manuals as well.” {24.2}
In the interest of all beings, the blessed Śākyamuni then taught about the action[1353] of the grahas. He, the omniscient one, taught everything for the benefit of all mantra reciters and in order to fulfill the aims of the mantra [system]. {24.3}
Chapter 25
Lord Śākyamuni once again addressed the planets, the nakṣatras, the stars, and other celestial bodies: {25.1}
“Please listen, all of you, venerable sirs, the planets and the nakṣatras![1480] This sovereign manual of the divine youth Mañjuśrī, which contains ritual instructions on the empowerment and the maṇḍala according to the mantra system,[1481] should not be transgressed against. You honored celestial bodies should not obstruct the knowledge holders trained in this supreme manual who engage in the practice of recitation, homa,[1482] the observance of rules, and magic. F.203.bF.220.b Nor should you hinder the insights gained by the calculations of the behavior (carita) of the asterisms and nakṣatras.[1483] Instead, you and the hosts of gods should all protect those who engage in the instructions thereof. All the wicked beings should be warded off, restrained,[1484] and properly instructed. None of them should be hurt in any way. [Instead,] they should be established in the stages of this doctrine that confers the ten powers.” {25.2}
Lord Śākyamuni then entered the samādhi called the erect uṣṇīṣa of all the tathāgatas in order to keep away all evildoers from every sentient being. As soon as the blessed Śākyamuni entered this samādhi, all the tathāgatas dwelling in the world spheres in the ten directions clearly saw the blessed Tathāgata Śākyamuni in the realm of the Pure Abode and came over to him. They approached with their inconceivable buddha mien, and spoke to the blessed Tathāgata Śākyamuni as follows: {25.3}
At that time, the entire congregation of the buddhas and all the world spheres within the great trichiliocosm, with all the living beings and inanimate objects there, became bathed in the same light. Through the Buddha’s blessing, not a single being suffered pain, and a great light could be seen. {25.11}
The blessed Śākyamuni, looking at the entire realm of the Pure Abode, the bodhisattva great beings there, the gods, all the śrāvakas, the pratyekabuddhas, and the blessed buddhas congregated in this great gathering, then said: {25.12}
“Pay attention, O blessed buddhas and all the pratyekabuddhas and noble śrāvakas, to this teaching on the ritual of this vidyā cakravartin, the one syllable who resides above the uṣṇīṣas of all the tathāgatas. He is Uṣṇīṣarāja, the blessed cakravartin, the perfect teacher of infinite power and valor. I will teach his ritual again now, during the lowest eon. I will now, at this time in the lowest eon, say again the mantra of that blessed teacher of the triple universe whose instructions are difficult to find, who is honored by all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, asuras, garuḍas, kinnaras, and mahoragas, and who fulfills the goal of every activity.[1487]{25.13}
“At the time when the Buddha’s teaching disappears, he—the universal blessed cakravartin Uṣṇīṣa—becomes the preserver of the teaching. He bestows accomplishments. He, a blessed buddha, fulfills the interests of beings during the entire time when the teachings of all the buddhas have disappeared. He, the blessed one, is the preserver[1488] in whom the entire Dharma basket of all the tathāgatas is condensed. O venerable hosts of gods and all beings! Please listen! {25.14}F.204.bF.221.b
“Now, the ritual of One Syllable,[1494] previously taught at length, will be taught in brief—the ritual of the blessed cakravartin, the tathāgata-uṣṇīṣa who frustrates the activities employed by one’s enemies and conquers the unconquerable[1495] ones, the lord of all mantras who is respected by all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, Uṣṇīṣa the cakravartin. {25.24}F.205.aF.222.a
“Right from the beginning, in whatever place he is recited, all the evil grahas within the radius of one league will flee; no other mantra, even though it may have been accomplished, is more powerful, and all the gods will depart the vicinity for some other place. He can take away the accomplishments of other practitioners, whether worldly or supramundane, if this were the wish of the practitioner. He can break, destroy, and nail down[1496] the mantras employed by others. {25.25}
“If one wishes to break a vidyā of others,[1497] one should grasp a handful of green kuśa grass, incant it [with the Uṣṇīṣarāja] one hundred and eight times, and, targeting the vidyā, cut the grass with a weapon. The vidyā will be broken. If one makes an effigy[1498] with the same[1499] and nails it through the heart,[1500] the vidyā will be nailed. If one makes a knot on a safflower-red thread incanted seven times,[1501] the vidyā will be bound. If one encloses [the effigy] within an earthenware vessel incanted one hundred and eight times, the vidyā will be arrested. If one slices [the effigy] in two with a weapon through the heart, the vidyā will be broken. If one paints [the effigy], using brown mustard[1502] stained red with poison and blood, the vidyā will be chastised.[1503] If one strikes [the effigy] with a vine of oleander, the vidyā will be afflicted with pain. One can thus assail any vidyā at will in any way whatever. {25.26}
“Apart from the rites just mentioned, if one performs a homa having bathed in milk, one will attain peace. By offering a homa of ghee, one will bring peace and prosperity to everyone. By making one’s hand into a fist, one can block all mantras. One can then unblock them mentally. If one wants to accomplish a mantra, one can gain mastery of it by first blocking it with the [Uṣṇīṣarāja]. If one wants to accomplish another rite, one can do this with the same [Uṣṇīṣarāja]. With this mantra alone one can summon a deity F.205.bF.222.b and also dismiss it. One for whom a protection rite is performed with this mantra will become invincible. {25.27}
“If any mantra does not produce the intended result or carry out the order,[1504] it should be recited together with the [Uṣṇīṣarāja]. It will then produce results or fulfill the command. If it does not produce the result or carry out the order, it will die.[1505]{25.28}
“One should offer into the fire sesame seeds smeared with curds, honey, and ghee one hundred and eight times, three times a day, for seven days. Then, whatever [deity] mantra one pronounces, that [deity] will come under one’s control. It will carry out whatever task is mentioned and fulfill any command. {25.29}
“If one wishes to enthrall gods, one should offer cedar sticks one thousand and eight[1506] times—one will enthrall them within seven nights. If it is nāgas that one wants to enthrall, one should offer into the fire the three sweet substances[1507]—the nāgas will become enthralled. If one wants to enthrall yakṣas, one should offer a dish made of curds— they will become enthralled. One should [also] offer a curd dish if one wants to enthrall a yakṣiṇī.[1508] One will enthrall gandharvas with [a homa of] ‘all fragrances,’ or with [a homa of] sticks or flowers of the aśoka or the beautyberry tree. {25.30}
“To enthrall yakṣiṇīs, nāgas,[1509] nāginīs, or grahas, one should use brown mustard. One can enthrall a king with a homa of white mustard; a brahmin, with a homa of flowers; a vaiśya, with a homa of curds, milk, and ghee; a śūdra, with a homa of chaff dust; a woman, with a homa of salt; a harlot, with a homa of beans or jambul; and a virgin, with a homa of parched rice. One can enthrall anyone, in any place, with a homa of ghee and sesame oil offered at the three junctions of the day for seven days.”
Chapter 26
At that time Blessed Śākyamuni, looking again[1514] at the realm of the Pure Abode, addressed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to my short teaching on the painting procedure of One Syllable—the cakravartin of great power. This procedure was previously taught at length, but now only briefly.[1515]{26.1}
“During this lowest eon beings have little diligence or wisdom, and are rather dull. They would be unable to successfully execute the painting in its extensive version.[1516]{26.2}
“If one wants to perform the supreme[1517] sādhana, one should paint the Blessed One on an undamaged cloth with untrimmed fringes, shorn to remove loose fibers, using uncontaminated paints. [The Blessed One,] the Dharma king who turns the wheels of Dharma, the supreme[1518] lord of all worlds, the best of humans, the most eminent among two-legged beings, F.206.bF.223.b the jewel of[1519] a tathāgata, the supreme victor by the name Ratnaketu[1520] should be depicted teaching the Dharma with a halo of light surrounding him. {26.4}
“Below [Ratnaketu] are Brahmā and Vajrapāṇi, and above, holding garlands, two gods. Below there is the practitioner. One should recite [One Syllable] in front of the painting at the three junctions of the day while burning agalloch incense, until one has completed one million repetitions. Afterward one may perform the following rites. {26.5}
“The sādhana of the wheel.
“First, if one wants to perform this sādhana, one should construct a twelve-spoked wheel out of ‘flower-metal’ and, during the prātihāra bright fortnight, recite the mantra one million times before the Blessed One, while burning an incense of agalloch, at the three junctions of the day. At the final stage during the full moon, one should prepare many offerings and, holding them up in one’s hands, recite the mantra until the wheel blazes with light. By grasping it, one will become a monarch of vidyādharas. One will fly through space together with those of them who see him, or whom he himself sees. {26.6}
“The sādhana of the parasol.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should commission a new, white,[1521] bright parasol marked with a golden wheel and adorned with hanging [strips of] silk.[1522] According to procedure, one should place the parasol above one’s head and recite the mantra. The vidyā will attend upon one of her own accord. One should recite the mantra in this manner one million times before the Blessed One, at the three junctions of the day, while burning agalloch incense. At the final stage during the full moon, one should prepare many offerings and, holding them up in one’s hands, recite the mantra until [the parasol] blazes with light. When taking hold of it, one will become a monarch of vidyādharas. Doing this during the full moon every month, one will succeed within five fortnights, during the prātihāra fortnight. Once this practice is accomplished, all phenomena will become apparent. One will attain all the [five] superknowledges. One will become a siddha praised by all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, and one will be able to adapt to every being.[1523]F.207.aF.224.a In the next world, too, one will become a monarch with a retinue of thousands. {26.7}
“The sādhana of Uṣṇīṣa.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make a stick, one cubit long, out of gold, silver, copper, or precious stone. One should then recite the mantra until [the stick] emits light. When one takes hold of it, one will be able to go[1524] wherever one pleases and teach Dharma to sentient beings. One will live one great eon. {26.8}
“The sādhana of the auspicious pot.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make a pot out of gold; fill it completely with all types of seeds, jewels, and herbs; cover it with white cloth; and imbue it with magical power by means of the same [mantra]. If one starts in a prātihāra bright fortnight, one will accomplish the sādhana in the next prātihāra fortnight.[1525] If one places this pot in one’s hand, one will obtain whatever one wishes for. [The wealth] will be inexhaustible. {26.9}
“The sādhana of the wish-fulfilling gem.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should fashion a jewel out of precious gems, crystal, or gold, with a golden handle,[1526] and attach to it [strips of] cloth. By this method one will succeed. One will accomplish anything one can think of. By taking hold of it, one will be free of impediments and will surpass in power gods and men. If one recites the mantra of the blessed [One Syllable] ten million times, one will be able to levitate. One will obtain the body[1527] of a god and will live for many great eons. {26.10}
“There are also other chief [uṣṇīṣa kings], starting with Sitātapatra. By incanting [the wish-fulfilling gem] one million times with the mantra of this blessed lord, one will succeed in all the tasks that need to be performed. This inviolable tathāgata-uṣṇīṣa will thus accomplish, before long, whatever he is employed at, even if it involves the rites of other [religions].
“Similarly, one will be able to accomplish anything with one million repetitions of the mantra of the blessed uṣṇīṣa [king] Cakravartin, the lord of all the vidyā mantras. {26.11}
“The sādhana of the vajra.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make F.207.bF.224.b a one-pointed vajra from red sandalwood or ‘flower-metal’ and wipe it with the five products of the cow. Then, on the fifteenth day of the bright fortnight, one should lay out before the painting many offerings, light butter lamps,[1528] and rinse the vajra with scented water. One will thus enthrall the yakṣas.[1529]{26.12}
“Commending oneself to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, one should perform the protection rite for oneself and also for one’s assistants within the confines of the maṇḍala, using the mantra[1530] of Uṣṇīṣarāja with his retinue, or of Tejorāśi or Sitātapatra.[1531] One should take the vajra with one’s right hand and, starting when the first watch of the night has passed and the second set in, recite the mantra with a one-pointed mind until the vajra emits light. As the result, all the vidyādharas, gods, nāgas, and yakṣas will arrive together. All the vidyādhara kings will arrive too. Praised by them, one will ascend to the abode of vidyādharas and will become their emperor. With the body like that of Vajrapāṇi and a power[1532] equal to his, one will be able to ascend, within an instant or a brief moment, to the realm of the Akaniṣṭha gods. Remaining [there] for one great eon, one will behold the noble Lord Maitreya and hear the Dharma. After death, one will be born wherever one wishes to. If so wishing, one will arrive in the presence of Vajrapāṇi. {26.13}
“The sādhana of the sword.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should take a sword without any defect and, having fasted for one day and one night, offer worship with many offerings to the Blessed One. One should recite the mantra until the sword blazes with light. Having accomplished that, one will fly through space with one’s retinue. With curly hair[1533] and the form of a sixteen-year-old, never discommoding—or discommoded by—any vidyādhara, one will live among them for one intermediate eon. {26.14}
“The sādhana of red arsenic.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should purchase some red arsenic in an honorable transaction, fast F.208.aF.225.a for three nights when the moon is in the asterism of Puṣya, offer food to the members of the saṅgha, and request their permission. When this has been granted, one should commence the sādhana.[1534] One should give many offerings and light one thousand butter lamps. Having fasted for three nights while giving rise to loving kindness for all beings and commending oneself to the buddhas, one should take hold of the arsenic and recite the mantra until one has attained the threefold accomplishment, namely that the arsenic emits heat, smoke, and flames. Whatever one has previously thought of will be accomplished.[1535]{26.15}
“If, without losing this accomplishment, one places a bindi on one’s forehead while the arsenic is emitting heat, all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, bhūtas, piśācas, and so forth, and all the beings dwelling in Jambūdvīpa, will become one’s servants attentive to orders. One will live one thousand years. {26.16}
“If one places the bindi while the arsenic is emitting smoke, one will become invisible. If one wants, one will be invisible even to gods. One can reappear and again disappear in a single instant. One will become the king of all invisible beings and will live for three thousand years. {26.17}
“[If one places the bindi while the arsenic] is emitting flames, one will become a vidyādhara and will be able to fly surrounded by a retinue. One will become the king of vidyādharas. One will obtain the body of a celestial youth that can’t be harmed even by gods, let alone vidyādharas. One will live for an eon, and when one dies, one will be reborn among the Tuṣita gods. {26.18}
“The sādhana of the trident.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make a trident from ‘flower-metal’ and recite the mantra for one year. One should then build from sand a caitya the size of one cubit and worship it with many offerings, including a large bali. Holding the trident in one’s right hand, one should recite the mantra while sitting in a cross-legged posture F.208.bF.225.b until the trident starts sparkling, emitting thousands of light rays. Subsequently the gods will arrive, headed by Maheśvara. All the vidyādharas will rain flowers.[1536] Then, surrounded by them, one will fly up together with all those whom one sees and those that see oneself. Having three eyes, one will become like a second Maheśvara,[1537] will be saluted by all the vidyādharas, and will live for one great eon. One will destroy evil-minded beings merely by looking at them. No one in the world will be able to harm one, not even in the realm of gods, let alone among the vidyādharas. When one dies, one will be reborn in Sukhāvatī. {26.19}
“The sādhana of the vetāla.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should procure an uninjured human corpse, secure its chest with four stakes of khadira[1538] wood and, sitting on it, offer into the fire powdered jewels.[1539] A wish fulfilling gem will then appear at the tip of the corpse’s tongue. If one seizes it, one will become a monarch of the vidyādharas. Whatever weapons one thinks of, they will materialize by the power of mind alone. One will radiate light for a distance of one hundred leagues and will be able to choose the time of one’s death and to go wherever one pleases. Also, in another world, one will be a monarch of the vidyādharas. When one dies, one will be reborn in the Vimala world. {26.20}
“The second sādhana of the vetāla.
“One should procure an uninjured corpse, nail it down with stakes of jujube wood, and offer into its mouth a homa of iron filings. The corpse’s tongue will move out. If one cuts it off, one will fly up surrounded by a retinue of one hundred. One will live for one intermediate eon, F.209.aF.226.a playing and enjoying oneself on the top of Mount Sumeru. After death, one will become a king of a province. {26.21}
“The sādhana of the goad.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make a goad out of kuśa grass, rinse it with the five products of a cow,[1540] and fast for one night. The handle of the goad should be one cubit long. One should make bountiful offerings to Vajrapāṇi and light one hundred butter lamps. One should also make a vajra. In this way one will be protected by Sitātapatra.[1541] Tejorāśi should be employed in creating the maṇḍala enclosure on the ground. One should incant the stakes seven times and drive them into the ground on the four sides. Then one should secure the location and build a fence. {26.22}
“Then, during the second watch, one should sit cross-legged and, with a focused mind, offer perfume, flowers, and incense to the goad—this is the rite of protection. Having bowed to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, one should take the goad into one’s hand and recite the mantra until, as the result, the pain of the hell beings and the gods[1542] is pacified. If one then bows to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas, one will fly up as a king of vidyādharas with a goad in one’s hand and without being obstructed. All the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, and so forth, seeing one from afar, will bow. One will remain in this condition for one eon, and when one dies, one will be reborn in the Vajra realm. One will behold Vajrapāṇi there.[1543]{26.23}
“If one uses the painting[1544] as the object of the sādhana, one will become a vidyādhara once the painting emits light. Whatever rite one wants to accomplish, one should recite the mantra of this rite one hundred thousand times, including in the mantra the target’s name.[1545] In the end, after one night’s fast, one should offer a large pūjā, light a fire with sticks of the crown flower plant, and offer into it one thousand and eight oblations of sesame seeds smeared with curds, honey,[1546] and ghee. F.219.bF.226.b At the end of the homa, [the target] will arrive and give whatever wealth one may desire. He will remain enthralled and attentive to orders. {26.24}
“The sādhana of Maheśvara.
“If one wants to enthrall Maheśvara,[1547] one should worship him in his benevolent (dakṣiṇa) form with bountiful offerings. One should light a fire[1548] with sticks of the crown flower plant and offer into it one thousand and eight homas. The sound ‘ha ha’ will be heard; one should not be afraid. Maheśvara will arrive and ask, ‘What should I do?’ One should reply, ‘May all the vidyās of Maheśvara be accomplished by me.’ Maheśvara will grant whatever boon one may wish for. Saying, ‘May it be so,’ he will disappear. {26.25}
“Similarly, one can summon Viṣṇu, Brahmā, and so forth. Whatever boon one wishes for, one should perform the rite accordingly. This should be done by someone who has performed the protection rite. {26.26}
“The sādhana of the yakṣiṇī.
“If one wants to summon a yakṣiṇī, one should offer, while saying her name, oblations of aśoka flowers for seven days. She will arrive and grant a boon. She will certainly arrive on the seventh day. According to one’s wish, she will become one’s mother, sister, or wife. If she subsequently fails to arrive, her head will split. If one wants to summon[1549] a nāginī instead, one should follow exactly the same procedure, but use, [instead of aśoka], flowers of cobra’s saffron.[1550]{26.27}
“The sādhana of the yakṣa.
“If one wants to summon a yakṣa, one should offer a homa of curds and cooked rice for three months. At the end of this period, one should fast for one night and then offer a large pūjā to the Blessed One, and also make a bali offering of rice porridge to the yakṣas. In one’s mind, one should resolve, ‘I am going to summon the yakṣas,’ and offer into the fire one thousand and eight sticks of the banyan tree smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. Subsequently, the yakṣas, including Kubera, will arrive. {26.28}
“One should welcome them with an offering of red flowers. They will say, ‘What can we do for you?’ and should be told in reply, F.210.aF.227.a ‘Send me a different yakṣa every single day who will carry out my orders.’ They will then provide the yakṣas, one at a time. One should issue orders to them. They can procure a woman, even if she is one hundred leagues away. In the morning, they will take her back to the place where she belongs. They will provide refreshments also for one’s retinue of one hundred. One can travel wherever one wants, mounted on the back [of a yakṣa]. One will be brought back [in the same manner]. They will give one an elixir of long life.[1551] They will do whatever they are commanded. {26.29}
“The sādhana of Vajrapāṇi.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should do the preliminary practice either four or seven times. One should then offer a complete worship with bountiful offerings during the prātihāra bright fortnight right until the full moon. When the full moon pūjā is thus completed, one should feed the monks and all those categorized as saṅgha. To propitiate the noble Vajradhara,[1552] one should offer another big pūjā and, when the first watch of the night has passed and the second has set in, one should sit in a cross-legged position and, focused one-pointedly, resolve in one’s mind, ‘I will now behold Vajradhara.’ One should then offer into the fire [oblations of] bdellium pills, the size of kernels of the jujube fruit, throughout one watch of the night. At that time the garlands and chaplets[1553] of the Blessed One will move, the earth will shake, and thunder will roll through the clouds. All the vidyādharas will rain flowers. While [all this is happening,] Blessed Vajrapāṇi will arrive surrounded by all the vidyās, headed by the most prominent [among them]; by the vidyādhara kings; and by all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, kinnaras, and bodhisattvas. {26.30}
“At that moment, the acute suffering of hell beings will cease. One should welcome Vajrapāṇi with scented water [for the feet], prostrate to him, and stand up. Vajradhara will then ask, ‘What boon shall I give you?’ F.210.bF.227.b One can obtain from the Blessed One whatever one wishes for—a universal supremacy over the vidyādharas, the ability to find and enter the passages leading into the subterranean paradises, a kingdom, or the ability to disappear at will. If one wishes, one may become a monarch of the vidyādharas with a vajra body similar to Vajrapāṇi’s. One may procure any article by merely thinking of it. One will remain for one great eon, and when one dies, one will be reborn in the Vajra realm. {26.31}
“In short, the same procedure may also be used for other vidyādharas.[1554] The rites that are found in the ritual lore of Vajrapāṇi or Avalokiteśvara, those that have been taught by the Blessed One, those found in the ritual lore of Brahmā or Maheśvara—in short, the sādhanas given previously—will succeed in all the mundane and supramundane rites. The great mantras, if they are not thus made effective, will not succeed. If, however, they are recited as part of this procedure, [the vidyādhara] will make his appearance within seven nights. If he does not, he will perish. If one recites the mantra before the gods headed by Maheśvara, [the vidyādhara] will make his appearance within seven nights. If he does not, his head will split into twenty-one parts. {26.32}
“[The sādhana of substances, etc.]
“Ghee, sweet flag, collyrium, sacrificial grass,[1555] a wooden staff, the sacred thread, yellow or red arsenic, and so forth can be magically empowered during a lunar or solar eclipse. If one wants to perform the sādhana of the substances, one should take some red arsenic, grind it with human milk, and prepare five pills. One should place them in a box containing agalloch and imbue them with power (sādhayet) during a lunar or solar eclipse by adding white mustard seeds. One should then offer a bali. When the mustard seeds make a hissing sound, the first accomplishment has been obtained. F.211.aF.228.a With it, one can enthrall all people and accomplish all worldly aims.[1556] The [pills’ spirit] will do whatever it is ordered to. If the pills emit smoke, one will become the king of all those able to disappear at will and will live for one intermediate eon. If the pills emit light, one will obtain the youthful body of a god and the splendor of a newly risen sun. One will become the king of vidyārājas and will live for one great eon. This is the way to perform the sādhana of bezoar, yellow arsenic, and other substances. {26.33}
“The sādhana of collyrium.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should blend together antimony-based collyrium, blue lotuses, costus root, and sandalwood, and place the mixture in a copper vessel. Then, during a lunar eclipse, one should recite the mantra until the mixture emits smoke. One whose eyes are anointed with this preparation will become invisible. One will become the king of all those able to disappear at will, oneself being able to assume any form. {26.34}
“The sādhana of the sword.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should take an undamaged sword, and lay out before the painting bountiful offerings during the eighth or the fourteenth day of the dark fortnight. One should offer bali according to procedure and, having performed the protection, should grasp the sword with the right hand and recite the mantra until the sword sparkles. If it does, one will become a sole vidyādhara. If, however, it flashes with light, one will become the king of all vidyādharas, with invincible power and valor, and will fly up together with all those whom one sees and those that see oneself. {26.35}
“The sādhana of the vajra.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should make a vajra from ‘flower-metal,’ three-pointed at either end and sixteen fingers long, and wipe it with red sandalwood. Then, starting on the prātihāra bright fortnight, one should lay out before the painting many offerings and recite the mantra daily. One should also give food to the monks to nourish them. In the final stage, one should fast for three nights, F.211.bF.228.b place the painting in a caitya containing relics, offer a large pūjā, and light one hundred butter lamps. Sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass, one should grasp the vajra with both hands and recite the mantra until the vajra emits light. When one holds this vajra, one will fly up surrounded by a retinue of seven[1557] and become the monarch of vidyādharas with power and valor equal to Vajrapāṇi’s. One will live for one great eon. At the time of physical demise, one will ascend to Vajrapāṇi’s realm. {26.36}
“Similarly, one can magically empower all weapons, such as spears, discuses, arrows, javelins, and so forth, as well as cloth[1558] shoes, wooden staffs, and sacred threads, following other procedures. For each of them the accomplishment is threefold. {26.37}
“The rite of pacifying a pestilence.
“If one wants to perform the rite of pacifying, one should construct a lotus-shaped altar,[1559] light a fire using sticks suitable for sacrifice, and, using the small sacrificial ladle, offer one thousand and eight oblations of sweet rice pudding mixed with curds, honey, and ghee. Within three nights, the pestilence will be pacified for oneself or for one other person. Within seven nights, it will be pacified for the entire village or town. In the event of a pestilence with high mortality, one should offer oblations of sticks of the śamī tree smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. In the event of drought, one should offer oblations of sticks of the udumbara tree smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. If one offers the three sweet things, it will completely pacify any pestilence.[1560] In the event of famine, one should recite the mantra three million times.
[1561]{26.38}
“[Rites for obtaining longevity.]
“On the night of the full moon of a prātihāra bright fortnight, during a lunar eclipse, having fasted for three nights, one should incant milk of a black cow one hundred and eight times and drink it, as it has now become an elixir of long life endowed with many qualities.
One should offer, over a period of ten nights, one thousand and eight oblations of panic grass sprouts smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. This will prevent untimely death and ensure long life. {26.39}
“Various rites.
“One should incant a banner, a conch, or another such item. The mere sight or F.212.aF.229.a sound of it will paralyze an enemy army. One should prepare a new jar, completely filled with rice and scented water, and incant it one hundred and eight times. If one sprinkles with the contents someone attacked by vināyakas and then washes them, the person thus consecrated will acquire great fortune and will be free from all their nonvirtue. One can also perform maṇḍala rites and the rites [to control] grahas. {26.40}
“One can remove all poisons with a peacock’s feather incanted one hundred thousand times. Using the same feather, one can cure fever, pain in the eyes, and other diseases. Using [an incanted] thread, one can cure all fevers.[1562] By using the mantra in combination with the mudrā, one can smash the magical diagrams of the asuras.[1563]{26.41}
“If one descends to a river that flows toward the ocean and sets adrift one hundred thousand lotuses smeared with red sandalwood paste, one will obtain a treasure trove equal to the heap of lotuses that one has offered. When given away, the treasure will remain undiminished.[1564]
“If one offers one thousand and eight oblations of bilva fruit smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will obtain enjoyments.[1565]{26.42}
“Rites of enthrallment.
“If one wants to enthrall gods, one should offer one thousand and eight oblations of agalloch sticks smeared with curds, honey, and ghee at the three junctions of the day for twenty-one days. If one offers oblations of rice grains mixed with curds, honey, and ghee, one’s store of food will never diminish. {26.43}
“When enthralling yakṣas, one should offer oblations[1566] of bdellium pills smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. For yakṣiṇīs, one should use sticks of the aśoka tree; for nāgas, flowers of cobra’s saffron. For the noble Vajrapāṇi, one should use agalloch sticks; for vidyādharas, damanaka[1567] twigs; for gandharvas, sticks of agalloch smeared with olibanum oil. To enthrall pretas, one should offer oblations of frankincense;[1568] for kinnaras, oblations of pine resin; F.212.bF.229.b for vināyakas, oblations of sarja[1569] resin.[1570] For each of these classes of beings one should offer one hundred and eight oblations for seven days.
“To enthrall a king,[1571] one should offer, at the three junctions of the day for seven days, one hundred and eight oblations of ‘royal’ mustard[1572] seeds smeared with sesame oil.
“If one recites the mantra[1573] 100,000 times while facing the sun, one will be free from all one’s nonvirtue. {26.44}
“Propitiation of vidyās.
“One desiring to propitiate any vidyā should fashion, while living on a diet of barley and cow urine, an effigy of her out of an uśīra root. One should worship it with white flowers, offer one hundred and eight oblations of milk, wash the effigy in milk, and offer incense of agalloch incanted one hundred and eight times. The vidyā goddess will be propitiated.[1574] With a single utterance of her vidyā, one’s own protection will be effected; with a double utterance, the protection of other beings; with a triple utterance, the protection of substances. {26.45}
“One desiring to help a vidyā [goddess] who has been broken, crushed, and destroyed[1575] by being nailed down with stakes should fashion her effigy out of uśīra root and worship it with white flowers. One should then offer, before the painting of the same[1576] Uṣṇīṣarāja, one thousand and eight oblations of ‘royal’ mustard[1577] smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. As for the vidyā, she will be freed from the stakes. {26.46}
“If one knows that the vidyā [formula] has been corrupted by bad people,[1578] one should write it on birchbark with bezoar [ink] and incant it one hundred and eight times with one’s own mantra. Then, one should offer a large pūjā to the Blessed One[1579] and recite [the vidyā] together with the Blessed One[1580] one thousand and eight times. If one goes to sleep right at the place of recitation on a bed of kuśa grass, the vidyā goddess will arrive in one’s dream and tell the missing or superfluous [parts of the vidyā formula].[1581]{26.47}
“The sādhana of the lotus.
“If one wants to perform this sādhana, one should fashion a lotus flower out of red sandalwood and offer a large pūjā. After three nights’ fast, one should take the flower with one’s right hand and recite the mantra until the flower emits light. One will then fly up surrounded by a retinue of twenty and become a monarch of vidyādharas. F.213.aF.230.a One’s movement will not be obstructed. When one dies, one will ascend to Sukhāvatī. {26.48}
“The sādhana of the one-pronged vajra.
“If one wants to perform the sādhana of the vajra, one should make a vajra from clay from an anthill, mixed with sand. Living on alms, observing silence, and acting in a non-threatening manner,[1582] one should take hold of this vajra and recite the mantra three hundred thousand times.[1583] The vajra thus used must be one-pronged. One should place this vajra nearby among white mustard seeds and keep it there[1584] while reciting the mantra until the mustard makes a hissing sound, which indicates that the vajra is now successfully empowered. While holding it, one can accomplish any activity, such as pulverizing mountains; drying up nāga ponds;[1585] reversing the flow of rivers; putting the nāgas to flight; removing poison; paralyzing, confusing, or bringing ruin upon any being; destroying magical devices; or arresting the movement of carts and so forth, or turning them to dust.[1586] One can perform all this and any other activity. {26.49}
“Nobody can possibly create obstacles for someone doing the practice of the uṣṇīṣa [king] Cakravartin,[1587] as one becomes Mūrdhaṭaka in person, if the right procedure is followed, but not without it.[1588] During the recitation session, one should always recite the mantra of Buddhalocanā at the beginning and at the end. In this way one will invoke gentle benevolence. One’s accomplishment will become apparent. {26.50}
“[The sādhana of Śrī (Lakṣmī).]
“One should descend to a river that flows into the ocean and set afloat as an offering one hundred thousand lotuses.[1589] [The goddess] Śrī will arrive and grant a boon; she will grant a kingdom. If one then offers three hundred thousand lotuses,[1590] one will become the king of all the land, as well as the supreme monarch of Jambūdvīpa.[1591] If one erects the painting before a hole in the ground and recites the mantra three hundred thousand times, all the magical devices [that block the entrance] will fall. One should enter without fear.[1592] Inside, one should extract the elixir of longevity. One should remain there.F.213.bF.230.b There will be no[1593] danger from Viṣṇu’s discus.
[1594] Even if the discus makes it inside, it will be turned to ashes by the mere recollection of the mantra. It can be revived by a mere wish. It will never enter again.{26.51}
“[Various rites.]
“Starting from the first day of a bright fortnight, one should strike, thrice a day, the big toe of the Blessed One’s foot with jasmine flowers incanted one time until light radiates from the toe and enters one’s own body.[1595] At this very moment one’s straight hair will become curly, and one will fly up surrounded by a retinue.[1596] One will become the king of vidyādharas and will live for one eon. {26.52}
“One should erect on the ocean shore the painting facing west, light a fire using sticks of cobra’s saffron, and offer into it one hundred thousand oblations of flowers of cobra’s saffron, dedicating them to the ocean. Waves will arise there. One should not fear such signs of success; they will continue to appear until Samudra himself appears in the guise of a brahmin[1597] and says, ‘What can I do for you?’ One should reply, ‘Surrender to my control.’ He will then do whatever one asks for. {26.53}
“One should draw a thousand-petaled lotus on the ground, sit upon it, and recite the mantra one hundred thousand times. A [real] lotus will grow out of the earth. Being thus lifted up, one will fly up surrounded by a retinue of one thousand. One will become the king of vidyādharas with a lifespan of one great eon. One’s halo will radiate within a five-league radius without causing any alarm [to anyone].[1598]{26.54}
“One should offer, during the prātihāra bright fortnight, one hundred thousand jasmine flowers above the uṣṇīṣa of the Blessed One, reciting the mantra over each and every flower,[1599] until a light radiates from the uṣṇīṣa and enters one’s own body. At that very moment one will acquire F.214.aF.231.a the five superknowledges. When one has thus incanted and offered one million flowers, if one then recites whatever vidyā one wants to employ along with the mantra of the Blessed One, she will definitely arrive in person while being recited. If she fails to arrive, she will burst at the head and wither away. {26.55}
“This One Syllable is indeed the cakravartin Uṣṇīṣa, a tathāgata in person. Who else could be the tathāgata king of all the mantras and vidyās in this world with its gods? The most prominent uṣṇīṣa kings in his retinue are Sitātapatra and Tejorāśi. One should employ the same complete sādhana procedure of each of the uṣṇīṣa kings. All the uṣṇīṣa kings can be accomplished by means of this [sādhana alone].[1600] If one desires the supreme accomplishment, one must not employ [him] in the wrong place or time. If one does, the supreme accomplishment will not come. In short, all the gods can be summoned with this [One Syllable]. {26.56}
“[With One Syllable,] one can also unveil a treasure trove. One should go to where the trove is, take a white jar, smear it with ‘all fragrances,’ fill it with water infused with white sandalwood, incant it with the mantra one thousand and eight times, and deposit it where the trove [is supposed to be].[1601] If the trove is there, the earth will burst open. If it is at the depth of a human height, one should sprinkle the area with water—one will be able to grasp it after digging one cubit deep. {26.57}
“If one wants to perform the sādhana of a lion, one should make its effigy from the clay of an anthill, smear it with bovine bezoar, place it on a pedestal, and offer a large pūjā. One should recite the mantra until the lion moves; once it does, the practitioner has accomplished the rite. His hair forming curls like earrings, he will fly up surrounded by a retinue of four,[1602] mounted on [the lion’s] back. F.214.bF.231.b He will live as long as Brahmā—ninety thousand years—without being interfered with by any of the vidyādharas. The sādhanas of elephants, horses,[1603] and buffaloes can be accomplished in the same way. Whenever he utters a lion’s roar, the gods will fall off their seats. {26.58}
“If one goes to a lotus pond and offers one hundred thousand lotuses, one will obtain an entire kingdom.[1604] Should one offer one hundred thousand buds of red oleander flowers, one will obtain a king’s daughter. If one offers one hundred thousand jasmine flowers[1605] into a river that empties into the ocean, one will obtain whatever girl one desires and will accomplish the highest practices. {26.59}
“Through this mantra of the cakravartin Uṣṇīṣa, wherever one goes, even Indra himself will vacate and offer his seat. All the gods, seeing one at a distance, will become awed and afraid. One will reduce the radius of the gods’ halos to just one fathom, while radiating one’s own for one hundred leagues.[1606]{26.60}
“He, One Syllable, is the tathāgata-cakravartin in this world with its gods. All the other blessed uṣṇīṣa cakravartins taught in this manual remain in his thrall. All the other mantra systems along with their respective detailed manuals are subordinate to him.”[1607]{26.61}
So spoke Blessed lion Śākyamuni, the lion and the most eminent among men.
This concludes the detailed twenty-sixth[1608] chapter, with instructions on the ritual procedures of the rites of the cakravartin One Syllable and his painting, from “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.Chapter 27
At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and the hosts of gods dwelling there, as well as all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and the noble śrāvakas, and once again addressed Mañjuśrī the divine youth: {27.1}
“This complete basket of teachings of all the tathāgatas, O Mañjuśrī, is as illustrious as a wish-fulfilling gem. It is taught in order to make beings into receptacles wherein results will be born.[1609] During the lowest eon, at the time when the buddhafield is empty,F.215.aF.232.a the tathāgatas are in the state of nirvāṇa and the genuine Dharma tools have disappeared. At such a time, in order to preserve the mantra basket of all the tathāgatas’ teachings, this One Syllable, O Mañjuśrī, taught in this king of manuals of your mantra methods, the manual of the divine youth, will become a shared treasure, which, when recited according to procedure, will fulfill the wishes of all beings.[1610] This cakravartin, One Syllable, taught in your king of manuals, constitutes the essential core of the mantra systems of all the tathāgatas and is the most prominent [part of] them. When one recites him, all the tathāgata-vidyārājas[1611] are being recited.
{27.2}
“But there is, Mañjuśrī, yet another one-syllable mantra in your king of manuals, taught in the past, that is a treasure of great excellence, the most eminent and precious. In bygone times, as many eons ago as the grains of sand in sixty-two Gaṅgā rivers, there was a tathāgata by the name of Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, an arhat, a fully realized buddha endowed with the vidyā conduct, a supreme sugata who knows the ways of the world, a leader able to tame people, an instructor of gods and men, a blessed buddha the mere recollection of whom, or hearing whose name, neutralizes even the five acts of immediate retribution. Many beings who merely hear his name will definitely progress toward awakening—how much more is this true for those beings who accomplish his mantra! {27.3}
“It is necessary that all mantra reciters keep in their minds, first and foremost, this blessed tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra. They also should say, ‘Homage to the blessed tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, F.215.bF.232.b the arhat, the perfectly realized buddha!’[1612] After that they should pay homage to Amitābha, Ratnaketu, and all the buddhas and recite the mantras of their choice. They will swiftly obtain accomplishments. {27.4}
“For that reason, if one wants to greatly increase one’s store of merit, one should salute and call out the names of the three tathāgatas[1613] and always bow to all the tathāgatas. Always dedicated to the pursuit of awakening, one will complete the accumulation of virtue and henceforth will be counted among the bodhisattvas. One’s mantras will swiftly fulfill their aim. {27.5}
“This single-syllable mantra was taught[1614] by Tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, the arhat, the perfectly realized buddha. This mantra, the essence of all the tathāgatas, is cherished in all the mantra systems. It accomplishes all activities.[1615] O Mañjughoṣa! This mantra, the most secret in your king of manuals, should be employed by people in utmost secrecy for their own good.[1616]{27.6}
“Homage to Tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, the arhat, the perfectly realized buddha! Homage to all the buddhas, starting with Śālendrarāja, Amitāyus, Amitābha,[1629] and Ratnaketu.
After saluting them, one should recite the one-syllable mantra thrice. What is this mantra?
“Muṁ.[1630]{27.27}
“It is this mantra, friends, that was taught by Tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, the arhat, the perfectly realized buddha who dwells in the world sphere Amitavyūhavatī. He passed on [this mantra] to the eldest and closest son of all the tathāgatas,[1631] the bodhisattva great being Mahāsthāmaprāpta, in order to bring benefit, welfare, and happiness to all beings. He did this out of compassion for and in order to benefit many people, especially the future generations at the time when [the Buddha’s] teaching would disappear, knowing that such a time would come. He did this in order to rein in the wicked kings who would transgress against the Three Jewels during the last, lowest eon. {27.28}
“[Mahāsthāmaprāpta,] through the Buddha’s blessing, passed on [this mantra] to Samantabhadra. Bodhisattva Samantabhadra, the great being, passed it on to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, out of his kindness for all beings and the power of his compassion, then placed this mantra in his heart, in his own body. {27.29}
“Thinking about the future time, when the Buddha’s teaching disappears during the lowest eon, F.217.aF.234.a I will be the last tathāgata.[1632] During that debased time, the lowest eon, this excellent mantra will effectively protect my teachings. {27.30}
“I will now teach the ritual of this [mantra]. Listen, Mañjusvara,[1633] O divine youth with a pleasant voice, to the detailed instructions on the great ritual of your [mantra]! I will [now] teach at great length the king of rituals [that employs] this [mantra]. {27.31}
“To start, one should climb a mountain and recite the mantra two million[1634] times; this constitutes the preliminary practice. One should recite while living on a diet of milk dishes, observing silence, focusing the mind on the mantra and nothing else,[1635] fully embracing the triple refuge, generating bodhicitta, observing [the prescribed fasts] and the precepts of morality, and fully embracing the conduct consistent with the bodhisattva vows.[1636] After this, one can commence the rites. {27.32}
“First, one should commission a painting. This should be done in a clean place by a painter who is observing the ritual fast, using uncontaminated paints and a clean piece of either cloth or silk suffused with sandalwood, camphor, and saffron. The painter himself must be clean, eat the three white foods,[1637] and wear clean[1638] clothes. He should be requested to paint during an auspicious nakṣatra, on the fifteenth day of the bright fortnight when the moon is perfectly full, [starting] at sunrise and [continuing] until midday. He should avoid [painting] past [midday]. He should continue in this way day after day until the painting is finished. {27.33}
“On the canvas, one should first paint the world called Amitāyurvatī. On a cloth measuring one cubit, or a square piece of silk one width of the Buddha’s hand across, one should paint Amitāyurvatī, adorned below with mountains consisting of ruby, sapphire, and emerald, with palaces upon them embellished with fine jewels and adorned with raised flags and banners. {27.34}
“In the center, one should paint Tathāgata Amitāyurviniścayarājendra, F.217.bF.234.b sitting on a jeweled[1639] throne [supported by] lions and expounding the Dharma. He is surrounded by a halo of light, and has a pure, pink complexion. {27.35}
“To [Amitāyurviniścayarājendra’s] left, one should paint the bodhisattva great being Mahāsthāmaprāpta, sitting on a seat of precious stone,[1640] holding forth in his [right] hand a yak-tail whisk, and directing his gaze at the tathāgata. In his left hand he is holding a citron. His body, adorned with all the ornaments, is of the light purple color of beautyberry and is surrounded by a blazing halo of light. {27.36}
“To [Amitāyurviniścayarājendra’s] right, one should paint the bodhisattva great being Blessed Samantabhadra sitting[1641] on [a seat of] precious stone,[1642] waving a white yak-tail whisk held forth in his [right] hand. In his left, he is holding a jewel. He is adorned with all the ornaments and wears a crown blazing with jewels. His body color is that of the light purple beautyberry. He is wearing short trousers of blue silk and a pearl necklace, is invested with a jeweled sacred thread, and is surrounded by a halo of blazing light. {27.37}
“To [Samantabhadra’s] right, one should paint Noble Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, with his head adorned with five locks of hair, wearing the ornaments of a boy-child, and of golden complexion. He is wearing short trousers of blue silk, a pearl necklace, and a sacred thread adorned with various jewels. His gaze is directed at Tathāgata [Amitāyurviniścayarājendra], and he is smiling slightly. His beautiful form is of a peaceful aspect. He should be painted endowed with all the supreme features and with his hands folded together. {27.38}
“Below [Samantabhadra], one should paint the practitioner in his usual form and bearing his distinguishing marks.[1643] He should be painted in the furthermost corner of the canvas, kneeling down, with his head bowed forward. {27.39}
“Above Blessed [Amitāyurviniścayarājendra], one should paint four blessed buddhas: to the right, Amitābha and Puṇyābha and F.218.aF.235.a above on the left the other two tathāgatas, Śālendrarāja and Ratnaketu. They all are surrounded by halos of blazing light, have golden complexions, and are endowed with all the supreme features.[1644] Bestrewn with all kinds of flowers, they sit on identical lotus seats in cross-legged posture. Peaceful in appearance, they expound the Dharma.[1645]{27.40}
“Above[1646] Blessed [Amitāyurviniścayarājendra], one should paint Sunetra with the body of a tathāgata, flying among the clouds and raining down flowers. He is endowed with all the supreme features and surrounded by a halo of blazing light. With his right hand he shows the boon-granting gesture and, with his left, he is holding the corner of his robe. {27.41}
“This is the painting procedure of the blessed tathāgata Amitāyurviniścayarājendra, the arhat, the fully realized buddha. And the one-syllable mantra [given before] is his mantra. This mantra is equal to an uṣṇīṣa king, a cakravartin; it is equal to him in courage and power. It has great magical efficacy and power, and a mighty array of inconceivable qualities. {27.42}
“In short, this mantra will accomplish, just like the tathāgata-uṣṇīṣa king, the great Cakravartin, all the rites that have been taught in detail for One Syllable. This mantra will accomplish these rites through mere recitation even when it has yet to be fully mastered, let alone when it has been. It will bring whatever result is desired. Through merely seeing the painting, whatever is pleasing to the mind will come true, and one will definitely be on course toward awakening. {27.43}
“Through the blessing of Blessed Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, this mantra is said to be the heart essence of all F.218.bF.235.b the tathāgatas; it is said to be the uṣṇīṣa king of all the tathāgatas; it is said to be the cakravartin; and it is said to be the great king of cakravartins. It is also said to be the heart essence of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. It is called One Syllable. In short, its power is inconceivable because the Buddha’s blessing is inconceivable, and so are his miracles. {27.44}
“One may not have fully mastered the One Syllable or performed the preparatory rites. One may have to do all the house chores, may eat everything [including] wine and meat, or indulge in sex. If, however, one has no faith and has not developed bodhicitta, the accomplishment will not be won. Similarly, those that offend against or harm the followers of the Three Jewels will not accomplish even a minor rite, let alone obtain a middling or supreme accomplishment.
Those who predominantly pursue sexual and culinary pleasures can fulfill them by engaging in minor activities with over one thousand and eight rites.[1647] What are these rites? {27.45}
“At the beginning, one will effect self-protection with a single recitation. A double recitation will protect others. With three recitations, one will effect ‘great protection,’ whereby not even a great bodhisattva established on the tenth level would be able to disturb one, not to mention other beings. {27.46}
“If one ties around one’s hips a five-colored thread incanted four times, one will arrest the semen, so that no emission will occur during one’s sleep unless one wants it to. If one is content being alone, whether by day or by night, one should do [the arresting] every day. If not, one can instead incant ashes seven times and sprinkle one’s abdomen—the semen will be arrested for F.219.aF.236.a three weeks. If one incants [the ashes] five times while contemplating Lord Buddha, the person whom one besprinkles with it will become enthralled. {27.47}
“During a lunar eclipse when the moon disk has disappeared, one should light a fire with sticks of the crown flower plant and, even if one does not use the painting, offer ten thousand oblations of ghee while facing east. One should perform this homa near the place where the king lives—by a river close to the royal palace, or by a temple, but not inside it.[1648] In the morning the king will be enthralled and do whatever he is told. If, at the time, he does not grant an audience,[1649] he will become downcast or slow, and will be unable to concentrate. {27.48}
“If this happens, one must follow up with a countermeasure—one should offer one thousand and eight oblations of milk at the first opportunity. From then on, the king will be well again. One must not target with this rite those who have faith and trust in the Three Jewels or who have given rise to bodhicitta. If one were to target them, one would accumulate an enormous amount of nonvirtue. One can only target others who are miscreants. One should show oneself every day to the wicked-minded and impetuous; they will become gentle. If they do not, they will be separated from much wealth and left with nothing but their living breath.[1650]{27.49}
“There is also the following rite. At the time of a lunar eclipse, one should light a fire with sticks of the dhak tree and offer one thousand and eight oblations of ghee. In the morning, the king of the country will accept advice on matters that require consultation. One will be able to point out to him what is right to do.[1651] If one instructs him, he will donate, within six months, a village capable of providing one thousand alms of food. If one does the above homa for half a night, one will obtain the village within three months; if one does the homa throughout all the watches F.219.bF.236.b of the night, within one month. If one does the homa every night for one month, one will obtain a district, or a village equal to a district, or another domain with some wealth. One will not have any enemies; should enemies appear, one should do the rite again. {27.50}
“At the time of a lunar eclipse, one should light a fire with sticks of devil’s horsewhip. If one’ enemies[1652] are brahmins, one should offer one thousand and eight oblations of dhak sticks smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, and after that, one thousand and eight oblations of neem tree leaves, smeared with white mustard oil. In the morning the brahmins will be appeased and the king will cease to be hostile.[1653]{27.51}
“There is also the following rite. At the time of a lunar eclipse, one should light a fire of whatever sticks are available and offer one thousand and eight oblations of ghee. At the end of the homa, one should throw the ashes in the direction where the king lives; he will become enthralled. He will grant in abundance whatever enjoyments, and at whatever time, one desires, including his [personal] assistance. He will donate a small, medium, or large village or district. Within six months, one will certainly obtain an unfailing (amogha) accomplishment.[1654]{27.52}
“If a member of any of the four castes develops a cruel disposition, then, regardless of whether he is of a degraded or an elevated status, or is a devotee of other deities or worldly beings, if one casts the ashes in the direction where he lives, he will be driven from his home to another country. He will feel uneasy and escape at night, or his family will be destroyed. To undo this, one should offer one thousand and eight oblations of milk; [the target] will become well.[1655]{27.53}
“There is also another rite.[1656] It should be performed during a lunar eclipse following the same procedure,[1657] before a painting depicting the buddhas and the bodhisattvas, before a holy scripture, or before a caitya containing relics, by a practitioner who is clean, wears clean clothes, and has fasted for one day and one night on water free of living organisms. He should fumigate the place [for the rite] with an incense of camphor, fragrant dried[1658] flowers, sandalwood, and saffron. {27.54}F.220.aF.237.a
“If the rite is performed on account of enemies who are brahmins, one should light the fire with sticks of the dhak tree; if they are kṣatriyas, with sticks of the bodhi tree; if they are vaiśyas, with sticks of the cutch tree; if they are śūdras, with sticks of some other tree. One should then undertake the rite proper. The sticks to be offered in the homa for the brahmins should be of the dhak tree; those for the kṣatriyas, of the bodhi tree; those for the vaiśyas, of the cutch tree; those for the śūdras, of devil’s horsewhip, or another tree as available. The homa rite should be performed using ghee.[1659]{27.55}
“Similarly, for a homa on account of an important king, one should offer one thousand and eight oblations of the root of butterfly pea and the same number of the oblations of ghee. At the end, one should throw the ashes in the direction where the wicked-minded king lives, or from where he will arrive. One may, in addition, form the mudrā of the one-syllable uṣṇīṣa cakravartin, or the utpala[1660] mudrā. The king will become frightened and will turn back, or his army will fall, or another unexpected calamity will befall him. He may be struck by disease, develop mental problems, or have his words refuted. {27.56}
“There are these and other rites—any that one may wish for. If one incants clothes and wears them, one will become very prosperous. If one incants [collyrium] and anoints the eyes, one will be loved by all people. If one incants the eyes and one’s entire face seven times and then looks an angry person in the face, they will become enthralled and peaceful. If one incants seven times a fruit, a flower, or anything with a pleasant smell, and then offers it to the king, he will become enthralled through merely smelling it. Any other being will become enthralled through merely seeing it. If one suffers from pain in any limb, F.220.bF.237.b one should wash it with warm water incanted one hundred and eight times; one will become well again. {27.57}
Chapter 28
Now the blessed Śākyamuni looked again at the realm of the Pure Abode and said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your ritual a painting procedure—a sādhana aid that accomplishes all activities. The ritual performed in front of this painting[1678] should employ the aforementioned one-syllable heart mantra, or the six-syllable mantra that ends with ma, or your six-syllable root mantra that starts with oṁ, or the one-syllable mantra.[1679] This king of rites will become the means of protection in the future time, when I, the Tathāgata, am in parinirvāṇa and the buddhafield is empty—at the time when the lowest eon has arrived, and the world is without protection or refuge, and with nothing to resort to. This king of rites will then become the refuge, the succor, the place of rest, and the final resort. What is this rite? {28.1}
“To begin, one should draw Blessed Śākyamuni just as before, F.222.aF.239.a on an undamaged cloth that is shorn to remove loose fibers, seven cubits long and three cubits across,[1680] with a fringe, and infused with the essence of saffron and sandalwood. He is sitting on a lotus seat and expounding the Dharma, while looking at the divine youth Mañjuśrī. On his right, one should draw Sudhana, Subhūmi,[1681] the noble Akṣayamati, and Mañjuśrī, all of them bowing to the Blessed One. Each of them has the form of a divine youth with limbs adorned with all kinds of jewelry. On his left, one should draw Samantabhadra, the noble Avalokiteśvara, Bhadrapāla, and Suśobhana.[1682]{28.2}
“They should all be painted smaller than the Blessed One. Avalokiteśvara and Sudhana should be painted with yak-tail whisks in their hands. Below the Blessed One, Vasudhā should be drawn with a basketful of jewels in her hand and the upper half of her body emerging from the earth.[1683] Two vidyādhara youths adorned with garlands, and clouds releasing rain and lightning,[1684] should be painted above the Blessed One. All the bodhisattvas hold flowers and jewels and look at the Blessed One’s face.[1685] They should be painted adorned with all types of jewelry, looking peaceful and happy, with the upper half of their bodies inclined in a sitting position.[1686]{28.3}
“One should place the painting near to a caitya containing relics and recite the syllable of Mañjuśrī one hundred thousand times while facing west. One should carefully observe the vow of silence, bathe three times a day, use three pieces of clothing,[1687] and continually fast, eating dishes of vegetables and barley and whatever has been obtained as alms.[1688] One should divide the food into four parts and offer one part to the Three Jewels, one part to Mañjuśrī, one part to all beings, F.222.bF.239.b and use one part oneself. Not weakened in one’s body, one should visualize the Blessed One and, with the mind focused on all beings, recite the mantra while contemplating, ‘May I never do anything for my own sake, but always for the sake of all beings.’ {28.4}
“One should offer water for bathing, fragrances, flowers, incense, a bali, and lamps, placing the water in the painting’s shadow, the fragrances below the painting, and the flower and bali articles all around. One should first offer these things to the Three Jewels, then to Maitreya, and immediately after to Avalokiteśvara, Noble Samantabhadra, Noble Ākāśagarbha, Noble Akṣayamati, the divine youth Candraprabha, Sarvanīvaraṇaviṣkambhin, Noble Vajradhara, Noble Tārā, Noble Mahāmāyūrī, Noble Aparājitā, and Blessed Prajñāpāramitā. First one should offer all of the fragrances, flowers, incense, and the bali articles[1689] to those [just mentioned], and then to the painting. {28.5}
“Afterward, at some place outside, using clay from an anthill, one should make figurines of all the vināyakas in the form of camels, donkeys, dogs, and elephants,[1690] and offer everything to them. One should remember to avoid oil-seed cakes,[1691] cakes made of pounded sesame seeds, horse gram (kulattha), fish, meat, root vegetables, and eggplant. Vessels made of lotus leaves or bell metal should also be avoided. {28.6}
“One should practice the recollection of all the buddhas while sitting and resting on a bundle of kuśa grass. Mantra recitation should be performed mentally. One should prepare a bed in some other secluded place overspread with kuśa grass. One should avoid taking too much food or drink, or going out, seeing people, or sleeping too much. One should thus contemplate the buddhas three times F.223.aF.240.a a day and ensure the retention of semen.[1692] One should not disclose one’s auspicious dreams to anyone but offer them instead to the Blessed One. {28.7}
“Proceeding on, one should speedily[1693] recite the One[1694] Syllable one hundred thousand times. At the end, one should read aloud [the text of] the blessed Prajñāpāramitā. At the time of recitation one should look at the face of Blessed One or the divine youth Mañjuśrī[1695] and recite without mixing up the syllables or words. [Each time] one reaches the end of the rosary, one should bow [to them] and offer [oneself to the deity]. Having, in this manner, completed the preliminary practice, one should install the painting in some good place, where one will be able to do the [main] rite in a happy frame of mind.”
This concludes the instructions on the painting procedure. {28.8}
“Subsequently, one should fashion out of white sandalwood [an effigy of] Blessed Mañjuśrī sitting on a lotus seat, with the text of the blessed Prajñāpāramitā in his left hand and, in his right, a fruit.[1696] One should install the effigy facing west in a secluded, clean place and dig a fire pit in front of it. The pit should be, for all rites, square and two vitastis across. At the bottom, one should place the fragrances and all kinds of grain and make [the fire] above it.[1697] Following this procedure, one should start a new fire, using sticks of the bodhi tree or aśoka tree. One should procure ghee, rice grains, boiled rice, milk, curds, and honey, and place all of it together in a copper bowl. Having incanted it one thousand and eight times, one should perform the complete homa.[1698]{28.9}
“Later, on another day, starting during the bright fortnight, one should perform the following rite. One should make the fire using bodhi tree sticks and, seeing that the fire is without smoke, one should summon the god of fire:
“Come! Come, O tawny-yellow one! One with a flaming tongue and red eyes! Give, give generously, O tawny-yellow one! Svāhā![1699]{28.10}
“With this mantra, one should offer three oblations, and then summon Blessed Mañjuśrī[1700] with the mantra:
“Come, come, O divine youth! F.223.bF.240.b Please help me as I strive for the welfare of all beings! Take these fragrances, flowers, and incense! Svāhā![1701]{28.11}
“Whatever one offers, one should offer with this [mantra]. When the Blessed One arrives, one should present him with a welcome offering consisting of water with fragrant flowers and later perform a homa rite. One should offer only one oblation incanted seven times. In this way, one should gratify him with ghee, rice, sesame, and barley for seven days.[1702] At some point during this period one will certainly see Noble Mañjuśrī in the form of divine youth. {28.12}
“One should offer one thousand and eight oblations of sticks of sandalwood, two fingers long. If one does this every day, one will enthrall one hundred princes.[1703] If one offers one hundred thousand flowers of royal jasmine, one will enthrall a king.[1704] If one offers one thousand[1705] lotuses smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will obtain power substances.[1706] If one lights a fire of śamī sticks and offers into it sesame seeds, one will become an owner of great wealth. If one always gets up early and offers oblations of water into water, one will become dear to all the people. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of sticks of the crown flower plant smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will obtain a village [able to provide] one thousand alms rations. If one offers oblations of fenugreek, one will obtain whatever virgin girl one desires. If one offers [sticks of] devil’s horsewhip, one will pacify any pestilence. {28.13}
“If one lights a fire with sticks of a tree rich in sap and offers into it one hundred thousand[1707] oblations of sesame, one will obtain whichever girl one wishes for. If one desires sensual pleasures, one should offer one hundred thousand lotuses, and one will obtain them. By offering one hundred thousand oblations of barley,[1708] one’s food supply will become inexhaustible. If one offers oblations of bdellium and beautyberry together with ghee, one will obtain a son.[1709] If one offers royal jasmine flowers into the water where the crown flower plant [grows on] the bank,[1710] one will obtain a village within seven days. If one offers into the water royal jasmine flowers one by one,[1711] one will enthrall any person to whom one gives the remaining fragments to smell—the enthrallment will happen through merely smelling them. If one recites the mantra, having put in one’s mouth some saffron, musk, and cloves, the person that one subsequently engages in conversation will become enthralled.{28.14}
“If one puts in one’s mouth some black pepper [seeds], having incanted them one thousand and eight times, F.224.aF.241.a one’s words will be endearing even though one may be angry. If one ties these [seeds] into one’s topknot, one will become invisible. If one looks at an enemy and keeps them in mind, the [enemy’s] anger will depart. {28.15}
“If one recites the mantra continually, one will be loved by all people. If one gets up very early and offers water with [the petals of] royal jasmine flowers, [spilling it] onto a clean place on the ground, one will become a minister whose words cannot be challenged. When fear arises, one should bring to mind [the mantra],[1712] and the fear will go away. If one looks at the face of an angry person while engendering and sustaining loving kindness, their anger will depart. {28.16}
“One should offer a homa consisting of all flowers with nice fragrance. Whoever one does this for will become enthralled. If, early in the morning, one drinks water incanted seven times, one will purify the imminent experiences of [ripening] karma. If one washes one’s face with water incanted seven times, one will be loved by all people. Whomever one gives incanted flowers to will become enthralled. {28.17}
“By offering one hundred thousand oblations of [incanted] rice grains, one will become an ācārya. If one does the same with sesame seeds, one will obtain dominion over a district. If one offers one thousand lotuses, one will obtain one thousand dinars. If, on every fifth lunar day, one offers an oblation of bdellium, sarja[1713] resin, myrrh, and pine resin, all obtained in a fair bargain and blended together, one will obtain, when six months have passed, one thousand times more. {28.18}
“One should make an effigy of the desired person out of ‘all fragrances,’ chop up its foot with a sharp, single-bladed weapon, and offer the bits as oblations. If the target is a man, one should chop the right foot; if it is a woman, the left. One will thus enthrall whoever one desires. {28.19}
“If one offers oblations of thorn apple flowers for seven days, three times a day, one will obtain cattle. Similarly, if one offers sticks of the crown flower plant, one will obtain grain. With flea tree flowers, one will obtain horses; F.224.bF.241.b with aśoka flowers, gold; with vyādhighātaka, clothes. One can obtain anything one desires with oblations of royal jasmine flowers. Whatever are the colors of the flowers that one offers into the water at sunrise, one will obtain clothes of the same colors. If one does alms rounds with a bowl[1714] incanted seven times, one’s supply of alms will never wane. If one gets up at night[1715] and incants one’s own body, one will have auspicious dreams. {28.20}
“If one wants to enthrall a king, one should obtain some dust from his feet, mix it with mustard and sesame seeds, and offer this as an oblation for seven days, three times a day. The king will become enthralled. If one wants to enthrall a queen, one should blend together sochal salt, dill, and yams, and offer this as an oblation for seven days, three times a day. She will become enthralled. If one wants to enthrall a royal minister, one should make his effigy out of cashew nut, sesame, and sweet flag, and perform the homa for seven days, three times a day. He will become enthralled. If one wants to enthrall the family priest, one should blend together tubeflower and dill and offer this as an oblation for seven days, three times a day. He will become enthralled. {28.21}
“If one wants to enthrall brahmins, one should offer oblations of milk blended with ghee. All of them will become enthralled. If one wants to enthrall kṣatriyas, one should offer an oblation of rice gruel mixed with ghee for seven days. To enthrall vaiśyas, one should offer barley with sugar. They will become enthralled. If one offers oil-cakes,[1716] śūdras will become enthralled. If one mixes all these ingredients together, all the castes will become enthralled.[1717]{28.22}
“If anyone suffering from exhaustion offers a bali at a road junction or in an empty house, F.225.aF.242.a they will be freed from exhaustion. If one recites the mantra while touching[1718] someone’s face, their fever will depart. If one’s knot of hair is incanted one hundred and eight times, one will be freed from all disease. For any disease, one should make a knot on a thread,[1719] tie one’s hair [with it], and go to sleep;[1720] all diseases will depart. When one is ravaged by a disease, one can be freed through mantra recitation alone. When one is seized by a throat obstruction, one should incant some clay from an anthill and apply it as a plaster. The disease will depart. In the case of eye disease, one should offer oblations of nīlīkalikas;[1721] it will go away.”
This concludes the section on the rites that rely on the painting procedure.[1722]{28.23}
“Following the previously described procedure, one should draw on an undamaged cloth, shorn to remove loose fibers, the divine youth Noble Mañjuśrī. He is fully adorned, red in color, has the form of a divine youth, and sits on a lotus seat. On his right is Noble Avalokiteśvara, and on his left, Samantabhadra. Both of them are a little smaller [than Mañjuśrī]. Having installed this painting, one should recite the mantra ten million times; one will become a king. One will, likewise, become a king if one offers one hundred thousand oblations of sandalwood sticks smeared with saffron. The same will occur if one offers one hundred thousand oblations of agalloch sticks smeared with curds, honey, and ghee.[1723] The same will occur if one offers ten million oblations of royal jasmine flowers smeared with ghee. {28.24}
“If one offers into the fire a pile of lotuses, one will obtain a hoard of dinars equal in number to the lotuses in the pile. If one does not obtain them while repeating the mantra over each lotus,[1724] one will become the monarch of the vidyādharas. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of cashew nuts, this will bring one thousand dinars. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of vyādhighātaka fruits, one will become an owner of great wealth. By offering one hundred and eight oblations of agalloch sticks, one will obtain grain.[1725] If one continually offers oblations of sesame, one’s supply of grain will, likewise, F.225.bF.242.b be unbroken. {28.25}
“If one offers into the fire one hundred thousand oblations of cow’s rice[1726] mixed with curds, one will obtain one thousand cows. If one offers fenugreek seeds mixed together with śamī fruits, one will obtain whatever virgin girl one desires. If one offers śamī leaves, this will bring all types of pleasure. If one offers flowers of the agati tree[1727] smeared with milk, one will enthrall a brahmin. If one offers flowers of white oleander,[1728] one will enthrall a kṣatriya. If one offers blossoms of the bayur tree, one will enthrall a king. If one offers flowers of the thorn apple, one will enthrall a śūdra. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of flowers of the crown flower plant smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will be freed from all disease. {28.26}
“Following the same procedure, one should offer one hundred thousand fragrant flowers at the feet;[1729] one will definitely obtain happiness. If one lights a fire using sticks of the bodhi tree and offers one thousand oblations of śamī flowers, one will pacify the problems caused by the nakṣatras. If one goes into battle with the mantra inscribed with bovine bezoar tied to one’s head, one will not be touched by weapons. If one places the Mañjuśrī [mantra] on the shoulders of the elephants in the front line of the army, the enemy army will be crushed through merely seeing it. If one goes into battle, having affixed, at the end of a banner, a figurine of the divine youth sitting on a golden peacock throne,[1730] the enemy army will be crushed through merely seeing it. {28.27}
“One should offer one hundred thousand flowers of royal jasmine at the feet[1731] and go to sleep on a bed of kuśa grass spread at the same spot. In one’s dreams one will be told whatever one wanted [to know].[1732] Having offered one thousand lamps, one should prepare a single lamp with a wick of lotus stalk fibers, wrap it in licorice, light it, and look on; one will behold Mañjuśrī, F.226.aF.243.a the divine youth, as he really is.”
This concludes the second [group of rites that rely on] the painting procedure. {28.28}
“One should make a figurine of the divine youth out of gold or silver, with the right hand forming the boon-granting gesture and the left holding a text of the blessed Prajñāpāramitā. Having placed it before a suchlike[1733] basket containing relics, one should recite the one-syllable[1734] mantra one hundred thousand times. One should worship it with offerings during the daytime and feed, in front of the figurine, male and female children.[1735] One should provide song, music, and book reading. When the mantra recitation [of one hundred thousand repetitions] is completed, one should make a farewell offering of the three types of flowers and ask [the deity] to depart. This should be done following the previously described procedure for the summoning and the dismissing. {28.29}
“One should form the padma[1736] mudrā and recite the mantra. Then, with the banner mudrā, one should do the invoking; with the swastika mudrā,[1737] one should offer the seat; with the complete mudrā, the welcome offering; with the singleliṅga mudrā, flowers; with the wishing mudrā, lamps; with the twin mudrā,[1738] incense; with the peacock throne mudrā, fragrances; and with the staff mudrā, a bali. Following this procedure, one should practice day and night, day after day, until the mantra recitation [of one hundred thousand repetitions] is completed. After that, one can commence the rites. {28.30}
“If one sets afloat on a river that flows toward the ocean one hundred thousand flowers of royal jasmine, one will obtain a dominion. If one places, at nighttime, a heap of royal jasmine flowers before the Blessed One and goes to sleep there, one will see in one’s dream the Blessed One teaching the Dharma, surrounded by bodhisattvas. One should do this rite only for the intended person and no one else.[1739]{28.31}
“If one offers, while fasting, oblations of pine resin incense mixed with honey, starting during the bright fortnight, one will obtain a kingdom. If one recites the mantra ten million times, one will behold Mañjuśrī in person, and he will teach the Dharma. If one brings [him] up[1740] [in conversation] with someone, he will appear directly. F.226.bF.243.b One will become a bodhisattva irreversibly established on the path to buddhahood.”
This concludes the third group of rites that rely on the painting procedure. {28.32}
“One should fashion out of red sandalwood the form of the divine youth flanked by Priyaṅkara on one side and Vīramatī, sheltered by an aśoka tree, on the other. One should place them to one side and make a replica [of them] from red sandalwood mixed with salt, mustard, and brown mustard. One should finely chop [the replica] and offer [the fragments] as oblations. One whose name one recites while making the offering will become enthralled. Similarly, one whose name one recites while offering udumbara fruits will become enthralled.[1741] So too, one whose name one recites while offering kākodumbarikā fruits will become enthralled. {28.33}
“If one wants to enthrall a brahmin, one should offer oblations of śṛṅgāṭaka;[1742] if it is a kṣatriya, one should offer lotus roots; if it is a vaiśya, one should offer kaśeruka[1743] roots; if it is a śūdra, one should offer oblations of śālūka.[1744] If one offers one thousand and eight oblations of salt and sugar grains three times a day for seven days, whoever’s name one recites while offering, that person will be enthralled. If one offers one thousand and eight oblations of neem tree leaves smeared with mustard oil three times a day for seven days, whoever’s name one uses while offering, that person will be enthralled. Each of these homa rites will result in enthrallment. {28.34}
“If one offers into the fire one hundred thousand flowers of yellow-berried nightshade, one will obtain gold. If one offers one thousand and eight kālāñjikā[1745] flowers, one will obtain a large village. If one offers flowers of the trumpet flower tree,[1746] one’s supply of grain will be inexhaustible. If one offer flowers of śrīparṇī,[1747] one will obtain gold. If one offers sweet flag smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will have an upper hand in all debates. If one places in a copper dish juice of the brāhmī plant[1748] blended with ghee, incants it ten thousand times, and drinks it, F.227.aF.244.a one will be victorious in all debates. If one throws, in front of an angry person, a lump of earth incanted one thousand and eight times, their anger will depart.”
This concludes the fourth group of rites that rely on the painting procedure. {28.35}
“One should commission a painter to paint, while observing the ritual fast, on an undamaged, shorn[1749] cloth and using uncontaminated paints, Noble Mañjuśrī sitting on a lotus seat and teaching the Dharma. On his right is Noble Mahāmekhalā, and on his left, Noble Prajñāpāramitā. The latter is reciting mantras, is adorned in all types of adornments, and is dressed in white clothes. Below Noble Mañjuśrī, there is a lotus lake dotted with many different species of lotus, where two nāga kings, their bodies submerged, hold lotus stalks in their hands.[1750]{28.36}
“Noble Aparājitā, to one side, is destroying vināyakas and obstructers. Her mouth[1751] is blazing with fire and her brow is knitted. On the other side there is Noble Parṇaśavarī. She is dark, with red eyes, and she holds a noose and an axe in her hands. Mounted upon a peacock, she is the practitioner’s protectress. The practitioner, for his part, should be painted holding a garland of lotuses in his hands and looking at the face of Noble Mañjuśrī. Above Noble Mañjuśrī two gods should be painted, holding in their hands yak-tail whisks, flower garlands, and drums. {28.37}
“One should install this painting facing west in a caitya containing relics and recite the mantra ten million times. At the end of the recitation, one should offer a large pūjā,[1752] have the Prajñāpāramitā read aloud, and recite the mantra ten thousand times while looking at Mañjuśrī’s face. The painting will subsequently shake. One will obtain a kingdom and the divine[1753] eye. One will become a vidyādhara and will laugh,[1754] will become a wheel turner, and will teach. One will attain F.227.bF.244.b the first bodhisattva level and will listen to Mañjuśrī’s Dharma teachings. {28.38}
“One should, in front of the same painting, obtain ghee from a tawny cow that has given birth to a calf of the same color, place it in a copper bowl, and recite the mantra until the ghee becomes hot, then emits smoke, and then bursts into flames. If one drinks it when it becomes hot, one will become supremely intelligent with the power to remember [everything heard]; if one drinks it when it emits smoke, one will become invisible; if one drinks it when it bursts into flames, one will be able to walk on air. One should place the ghee inside a bowl of unbaked clay with a lid, wrap the bowl in sweet flag and royal jasmine flowers, and recite the mantra until sprouts appear. If one eats the sprouts, one will be able to retain in one’s memory [everything heard]. If one recites the mantra another ten million times, one will behold Mañjuśrī in person, hear his Dharma teachings, and have faith in them. {28.39}
“One should make a hundred-petaled lotus out of gold, place one’s right knee on the ground, and recite the mantra until the lotus emits flames. Through merely holding it, one will become the monarch of the vidyādharas, unassailable by others. One should put some red arsenic, yellow orpiment, or collyrium in a box make of śrīparṇī[1755] wood and recite the mantra until the substance makes a crackling sound. Through merely holding it, one will become an invincible[1756]master of the rākṣasas and piśācas who roam the earth. {28.40}
“One should take an undamaged sword with all the characteristics of good quality and recite the mantra until the sword acquires a hood like a snake. By holding the sword, one will become an unassailable emperor of vidyādharas and live for an eon. One should wrap some red arsenic in the three metals,[1757] place it in one’s mouth, and recite the mantra until it makes a gurgling sound. One will become an invisible sword bearer.[1758] Unseen, one will be able to pursue all kinds of virtuous quests, except for the hedonistic ones. One should obtain some pith from a bodhi tree that grows on[1759] a śamī tree, wrap it F.228.aF.245.a in the three metals, place it in the mouth, and recite the mantra until it makes a gurgling sound. One will become invincible[1760] and will live one thousand years. {28.41}
“One should place a silver wheel in front of an asura opening[1761] and recite the mantra until the wheel has breached the [locking] devices set by the asuras and enters there. At that very moment, asura girls will emerge. If one enters their place with them, one will live one eon. One should place an iron trident at the opening of that passage and recite the mantra there. All the locking devices in there will break up. One will be able to enter with the girls that one desires[1762] and live there for one eon. One will behold Blessed Maitreya.”[1763]
This concludes the fifth group of rites that rely on the painting procedure. {28.42}
“One should commission [a figurine of] Noble Mañjuśrī, the size of a thumb, made from the white crown flower plant. If one offers to it one hundred thousand flowers of the crown flower plant, one will obtain a vassal kingdom. If [the figurine] is made from the root of white oleander, one thumb in size, and one offers to it ten million flowers of the same plant, one will become a minister. If the figurine is made of karahāṭa wood, one vitasti in size, and one offers to it one hundred thousand flowers of the same tree, one will become the general of an army. If the figurine of Noble Mañjuśrī is made of white sandalwood, one vitasti in size, and one offers to it one hundred thousand flowers of royal jasmine, one will become a family priest. {28.43}
“One should commission a figurine of Noble Mañjuśrī made from the wood of the bodhi tree, one finger in size. If one offers to it a jar of unsullied[1764] water, one will be highly esteemed by many people. If the figurine is made of ‘all fragrances,’ one will obtain, by offering to it flowers of all the fragrances, whatever one desires. If a practitioner of mantra continually offers oblations of agalloch sticks, he will be highly esteemed by many people.[1765] By reciting continually he will purify even the five karmas of immediate retribution; he will see Mañjuśrī at the time of death; and he will propagate F.228.bF.245.b Mañjuśrī’s teachings. {28.44}
“If one recites the mantra one hundred and eight times every time one rises up [in the morning], one will be unassailable by any being. If one looks at the master, having incanted one’s eyes, he will become kindly disposed. Whoever one targets with the rite will be affected within seven days if they are in the same locality;[1766] if they are in another village, within twenty-one days; if they are in another province, after four[1767] months; if they are in a river, after six months.[1768] One may thus accomplish every activity, except for the pleasure-oriented or violent, using the procedure particular to one’s own lineage, and not other mantra [lineages].”[1769]
This concludes the sixth group of rites that rely on the painting procedure. {28.45}
Chapter 29
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {29.1}
“There is, Mañjuśrī, in this division of your ritual prescriptions, a seventh [set of] rites involving a painting that will be effective at the end of the [dark] eon and will without fail lead to accomplishment. This accomplishment will include the arising and maturing of happiness, the knowledge of the physical world, and the forestalling of all painful destinies, and it will certainly lead to awakening.” {29.2}
The blessed Śākyamuni then taught the heart mantra of Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Oṁ vākyeda namaḥ!
“Now its ritual will be taught. Living on a diet of solid and liquid dishes of vegetables or barley, bathing F.229.bF.246.b and changing clothes thrice a day, one should recite the mantra one hundred thousand times. This constitutes the preliminary practice. Then, one should commission a painter who is fasting to paint Noble Mañjuśrī on an undamaged cloth with fringed edges, using uncontaminated paints. He sits on a lotus seat and teaches the Dharma in the form of a divine youth, adorned with all the ornaments, with his upper robe over one shoulder.[1779]{29.6}
“To his left there is Noble Avalokiteśvara with a lotus and a yak-tail whisk[1780] in his hands,[1781] and to his right, Noble Samantabhadra. Above [Mañjuśrī], two vidyādharas should be drawn emerging from the clouds and holding garlands. Below [Mañjuśrī] should be drawn the practitioner, holding an incense holder in his hand. Mountain peaks should be drawn all around, and below, a lotus lake. {29.7}
“One should install this painting, facing west, in a caitya containing relics, offer a large pūjā, light butter lamps, and cast one thousand and eight flowers of royal jasmine at Mañjuśrī’s face, one at a time, incanting each of them with the mantra. Subsequently, a loud and deep sound of hūṁ will be heard, or the painting will shake. If the sound is heard, one will become a king over the entire earth; if the painting shakes, one will excel among all speakers and will become an adept of all worldly treatises. If one does not succeed [in this], one will become proficient in all rites.”[1782]
This concludes the first rite. {29.8}
“One should offer oblations, throughout the entire night, of agalloch sticks smeared with mustard oil, more than half a finger long, onto the smokeless embers of cutch firewood. At sunrise, one will behold Noble Mañjuśrī, who will grant whatever boon one desires, except for hedonistic ones. {29.9}
“One should recite the mantra all night, while burning sandalwood incense in front of the painting without interruption. Subsequently, Blessed Mañjuśrī will arrive in person and give profound F.230.aF.247.a Dharma teachings. One should apply oneself to them with confidence. By doing so, one will be free from all disease and able to fully exercise one’s own will.[1783]{29.10}
“One should make a lotus flower out of red sandalwood, six fingers in circumference, complete with a stem, and wipe it with red sandalwood paste. One should then incant the residue of one thousand such oblations one thousand times.[1784] Then, during the full moon, one should place it on a lotus leaf[1785] and hold it up in one’s hands in front of the painting. One should recite the mantra until the substance emits light. By taking hold of it, one will obtain the form of a sixteen-year-old divine youth, the color of molten gold, exceeding in splendor the sun itself. One will be honored by all the vidyādharas and will live one great eon. After death, one will be reborn in Abhirati. {29.11}
“During a lunar eclipse, one should get some white sweet flag, wipe it with the five products of a cow, stuff some pipal leaves underneath it, and recite the mantra until the sweet flag gets hot, then emits smoke, and then bursts into flames. If it gets hot, one will be able[1786] to enthrall all people and outmatch all speakers. If it emits smoke, one will become invisible and live thirty thousand years. If it bursts into flames, one will be able to walk on air and will live for one great eon. {29.12}
“One should obtain some ghee from a tawny cow that has given birth to a calf of the same color, place it in a copper bowl stuffed with seven pipal leaves, and recite the mantra until the triple effect occurs [of the ghee becoming hot, emitting smoke, and bursting into flames]. After drinking it, one will be able to, [respectively], retain in one’s memory everything that one has heard, become invisible, and walk on air. {29.13}
“During a lunar eclipse, one should place some puṣkara seeds in one’s mouth and recite the mantra until the seeds make a bubbling sound. If one places them in the mouth wrapped in the three metals, one will become invisible.[1787] One will become visible again after spitting them out. {29.14}
“One should place in one’s mouth some fragrant cloves and recite the mantra six hundred thousand[1788] times. Whoever one speaks to will become enthralled. If one recites the mantra one million two hundred thousand times[1789] while subsisting on dishes of milk and barley, F.230.bF.247.b one will become a vidyādhara. If one recites the mantra one hundred thousand times while living on alms and observing a strict vow of silence, one will become invisible. If one recites the mantra ten million times, one will receive Dharma teachings from Noble Mañjuśrī [himself] so that one becomes a bodhisattva who sojourns on earth for the last time. If one recites continually, all one’s aims will be accomplished. {29.15}
“The target whose effigy, made of ‘all fragrances,’ one chops up and offers the fragments of as oblations will become enthralled after seven nights. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of bdellium pills, the size of a kernel of the jujube[1790] fruit, smeared with ghee, one will obtain one hundred thousand dinars.[1791]{29.16}
“One should descend to a river that empties into the ocean and offer one hundred thousand lotuses. One will obtain a great treasure equal in size to the heap [of the offered] lotuses. This treasure will never become exhausted. If one offers into the fire one thousand and eight oblations of white mustard seeds smeared with saffron [paste], one will enthrall a king. If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of sesame seeds smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will become a great householder who gives everything away.[1792]{29.17}
“One should draw a circle with uncontaminated cow dung, bestrew it with flowers, and recite the mantra one hundred and eight times. If one subsequently reads aloud a genuine Dharma text, one will become supremely intelligent within one month. If one incants bovine bezoar one hundred and eight times and applies it as a bindi, one will be loved by all the people. If one incants [one’s] topknot seven times, one will become invulnerable to assault by any being. {29.18}
“If one offers ten thousand[1793] oblations of kiri[1794] garlands, one will become free from all disease. If one recites the mantra seven times every day, one will purify the karma that would otherwise be inevitably experienced. If one recites the mantra one hundred and eight times at the time of death, one will behold the complete [form of] Noble Mañjuśrī face to face.
This concludes the seventh [set of] rites [that employ] the painting.” {29.19}
This concludes the detailed chapter with the seventh[1795] [set of] rites in the section on the ritual procedures that employ the painting of Noble Mañjuśrī, twenty-ninth[1796] in “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.Chapter 30
At that time, the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {30.1}F.231.aF.248.a
“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your mantra treatise, a list of places for accomplishing any vidyārāja mantra, starting with the mantra of Cakravartin—the foremost among all tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas.[1797] In brief, everywhere in the northern regions, the mantras of tathāgata-[1798]vidyārājas will become accomplished. {30.2}
Chapter 31
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and said to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Listen Mañjuśrī, divine youth, as I teach about the ways of spirits who possess other beings, and the accompanying auspicious and inauspicious signs.” {31.1}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, prostrated at the feet of the Blessed One, folded his hands, and said to the Blessed One:
“Good it is, O Blessed One! Please teach about the thoughts and actions (cittacaritāni) of beings who enter other beings’ bodies—the noble and divine siddhas, gandharvas, yakṣas, rākṣasas, piśācas, mahoragas, and so forth, and the human and nonhuman beings whose bodies are generated by different types of karma and who have taken different types of birth and have different forms and characteristics. Now it has come to pass, O Blessed One! Now it has come to pass, O Sugata, if you think that the time is right!” {31.2}
Having thus spoken, Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, became silent. Having made his request, he now remained in his seat, waiting for Gautama, the supreme Victor, the guide of the world, the seventh of the victorious ones.[1831] Blessed Śākyamuni, for his part, taught the knowledge of the thoughts, actions, external aspects, and characteristics of such beings, and also the time when the possession occurs. {31.3}
Chapter 32
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {32.1}
“Your mantras, Mañjuśrī, hold the key to the complete understanding of all the tantras; they possess the secrets of all the vidyās,[1870] and, in consequence, they can also cause the ripening of all the results of good qualities accumulated over a long period of time. I will now authoritatively teach the factors of accomplishment, which are as follows: {32.2}
Chapter 33
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {33.1}
“Your king of manuals, Mañjuśrī, styled as a nirdeśa,[1892] is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, as it proceeds from the sphere of phenomena, which is the essence of the tathāgatas. This great sūtra, precious as a jewel, is divided into detailed sections. It is sanctioned [to teach] the greatest secrets of the tathāgatas and brings accomplishment of the supreme mantras. It contains auxiliary practices pertaining to the knowledge of signs and the rules for ascertaining the right time.[1893] [It also explains] the voices of all the [different] beings, differentiating the sounds made by sentient and insentient entities. {33.2}
Chapter 34
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to the divine youth Mañjuśrī as follows: {34.1}
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, to your most esoteric and secret teaching on your mudrās and mantras. No followers of your mantra path should ever disclose this teaching to people who have no trust and no faith in the doctrine of the Tathāgata; to people who do not have the authorizing samaya or do not maintain the continuity of the lineage of the Three Jewels; to people who are in bad company; to people who do not desire religious merit; to people who interact and mix with evil companions or are surrounded by bad friends; to people who distance themselves from the Buddha’s teaching; to people who have not been instructed by their master and so this manual would bring no results for them; to people, divine youth, who have not been initiated into your supreme and most secret maṇḍala; or to people who do not observe their samaya or who have no connection to the family of the Tathāgata. {34.2}
Chapter 35
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode F.245.aF.262.a and entered the samādhi called that which animates the great receptacle of mudrās of the tathāgatas. As soon as he entered this samādhi, a great light issued from the tuft of hair between his eyebrows. This mass of light, surrounded by innumerable billions of light rays, illuminated many buddhafields, arousing all the buddhas [dwelling there], and entered back into Lord Śākyamuni’s tuft of hair. {35.1}
As soon as they were roused, all the blessed buddhas entered the samādhi of the nature of the sky and positioned themselves in the sky above the Pure Abode. Having greeted all of them reverentially, the blessed Śākyamuni spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī, about the procedures pertaining to the receptacle of mudrās, blessed by all the buddhas to come.” {35.2}
Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, prostrated to the feet of the Blessed One,[2016] bowed to all the buddhas, and spoke to blessed Tathāgata Śākyamuni as follows: {35.3}
“Very good, O Blessed One! Please teach, if you think that the time is right, the most secret chapter on the receptacle of the mudrās of all the tathāgatas. This will be for the benefit and happiness of many people. Teach it out of kindness for the world, for the welfare and happiness of great numbers of people. This will create happiness and the ripening [of the causes of] happiness for gods, men, and all beings.” {35.4}
Being thus supplicated by Blessed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the blessed Śākyamuni began to teach, gazing at all the buddhas, directing his attention to all the beings,[2017] gladdening all the bodhisattvas, perfectly calming F.245.bF.262.b all the pratyekabuddhas and noble śrāvakas, animating all those whose minds were occupied with the meaning of their respective mantras,[2018] keeping all the evil beings at bay, restoring confidence in all the frightened ones, and establishing in the ease of the auspicious nirvāṇa all those that were in difficult predicaments. For the happiness of all suffering beings, he taught the procedures from the chapter on the mudrās as follows: {35.5}
Chapter 36
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“There is, Mañjuśrī, a most secret mudrā presentation that includes your root[2231] mudrā and its assorted mudrās. [These mudrās] may be employed in all rites. In short, they bring every kind of good fortune and produce results; they supplement every mantra and accomplish the aim of every activity. {36.1}
“To start, one should extend the hands in the añjali gesture, with the index and the ring fingers folded in at the middle joint and the fingers not touching.[2232] This, Mañjuśrī, is described as your root mudrā; it is suitable for all rites. {36.2}
“If one joins the hands the same way, but with the ring, index, and middle fingers touching closely and the small fingers positioned along an upward line toward the tips of the thumbs,[2233] this, Mañjuśrī, is another mudrā of yours, called the mouth. {36.3}
“If one makes a fist in such a way that the facing fingers touch,[2234]F.258.bF.275.b extends the middle fingers to form the shape of a needle, and places the two index fingers in such a way that they surround this [needle] on either side, this, Mañjuśrī, is your mudrā called the fangs. {36.4}
“If one [subsequently] positions the thumbs on either side,[2235] that mudrā is you, Mañjuśrī, in person. You remain contained in that place, in the cavity between the hands, as the blessing of the samaya. {36.5}
“If one stretches out the index fingers of the mutually touching fists and positions both thumbs in the space in between,[2236] this, Mañjuśrī, is another one of your mudrās, [called] the crest. {36.6}
“If one extends the hands in the añjali gesture and places the index finger, crossed at the joints with the ring finger, between the tips of the middle fingers,[2237] this, Mañjuśrī, is another root mudrā that is said to be yourself in person.[2238]{36.7}
“If one forms the same mudrā as before, but with the index fingers extended, this, Mañjuśrī, is your eye[2239] mudrā. {36.8}
“If the small and ring fingers are entwined and positioned in the cavity between the hands, the middle fingers are placed on the outside with their tips folded in above the index fingers,[2240] and the tips of the thumbs press against each other, this, Mañjuśrī, is yet another mouth mudrā of yours. {36.9}
“Proceeding in the same way, one should loosen up the fingers one by one—all of them, including the thumbs—and then extend them one by one, with the right thumb raised up. This, Mañjuśrī, is your uṣṇīṣa mudrā. {36.10}
“When the right … is curled[2241] and the left extended, that [same mudrā] becomes the forehead mudrā; seeing it,[2242] all the wicked grahas will flee. {36.11}
“In the same way [one should form the mudrās of] the ears, neck, arms, heart, hands, throat, hips, navel, thighs, calves, feet, eyes, mouth, and tongue. By extending the ten fingers one after the other, one will display the mudrā signs in their respective order. They accomplish their respective activities: {36.12}
“A mouth mudrā will shut [the opponent’s] mouth. The fangs mudrā will effect release from the wicked grahas.[2243] The tongue mudrā will suppress evil talk. The heart mudrā will appease the king’s anger, or the anger of any other displeased being— F.259.aF.276.a a god or asura, or any other human or nonhuman being born in whatever form. In this way, one can successively accomplish all activities in all respects. {36.13}
“Following this pattern, there are innumerable mudrās. Accordingly, Mañjuśrī, you can accomplish every activity whatsoever. All activities arise because of all these mudrās. These great mudrās are used by tathāgatas impossible to count, great heroes and protectors, and also by the great heroes who have reached all the higher levels that transcend the world—ever and ever beyond it—where myriads [of them abide].[2244] They are the thirty-six … eighty … nine … five … who are sixty billion in number.[2245]{36.14}
Chapter 37
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, as follows: {37.1}
“There is, Mañjuśrī, in your root manual, another most secret mudrā. Its ritual procedure [represents] the entire mudrā system. F.259.bF.276.b It is recommended for all the mantras and can be employed with any of them. It accomplishes all rites and purifies the path to perfect awakening.[2247] It destroys all the paths that lead to saṃsāric existence. It sustains all beings and grants long life, freedom from disease, and powerful sense faculties. It fulfills all wishes and gives rise to all the factors of awakening. It gives joy to all beings and produces the results they all wish and hope for. It fulfills all activities and makes all mantras efficacious. It comprises all the other mudrās and mantras. Listen, Mañjuśrī, divine youth! {37.2}
“One starts with the [hand] sign of uṣṇīṣa. Both hands should be extended and evenly aligned, forming the shape of a flame. The ring fingers should be between the hands, their nails placed one against the other and covered by the tips of the thumbs. The small fingers should form a ‘needle’ with their tips joined, and the middle fingers should be centered, aligned, and touching at the nails. The index fingers should form a ‘needle.’[2248] This is the great[2249] mudrā called the great representation of the uṣṇīṣa surrounded by light. The corresponding mantra is āḥ maḥ haṁ. {37.3}
“If, subsequently, one brings the index fingers together[2250] so that one fingernail touches the other and the fingertips form the shape of a circle, this is the great Dharma-wheel mudrā called incinerating[2251]the perversions—the thorns of the wrong views. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ,[2252] make [them] tremble and fall! Crush [them], O wheel! You are the possessor of the vajra, hūṁ![2253]{37.4}
“If, subsequently, one … the index fingers…,[2254] this is the great mudrā called the seat of the enemies of the four māras—the vajra heroine who devours the great afflictions [experienced] on the earth with its animate and inanimate entities.[2255] The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ Vajrānanī![2256]Hūṁ phaṭ![2257]{37.5}
“This great mudrā is known throughout the three worlds under the name of the garland of light rays of the great lord. The corresponding mantra is:
“OṁVijayā! Haḥ![2262]{37.8}
“There is also the fist mudrā of the tathāgata, [where] the two hands are evenly aligned below.[2263] During formal or preliminary practice, one should recite the mantra just once while forming any of these mudrās with both hands, and then recite as long as one likes, either sitting or standing.[2264] Consequently, no vighnas or vināyakas will be able to cause harm, and the accomplishment will be imminent. {37.9}
“If one brings the same index fingers together in such a way that their tips touch above the middle fingers, this is the mudrā of Udgatoṣṇīṣa.[2265] The corresponding mantra is
Oṁ, burn, blaze up! O blazing Udgatoṣṇīṣa! Make [them] tremble, do! Hūṁ![2266][2267]{37.10}
“If one brings the same index fingers into contact with the ‘needle’ formed by the middle fingers and joins them at the tips of the fingernails so that they form the shape of a straightened anklet, this is the mudrā of the uṣṇīṣa [king] Sitātapatra. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, ma ma ma ma, hūṁ niḥ![2268]{37.11}
“If, subsequently, the same index fingers are evenly raised so that they cling to the ‘needle’ formed by the middle fingers, this is the mudrā of Tejorāśi. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ Tejorāśi! You are the uṣṇīṣa of the tathāgatas, invisible on their head! Blaze, blaze! You are one and unique! Rip and tear! Chop and split! Hūṁ hūṁ, sphaṭ sphaṭ, svāhā![2269][2270]{37.12}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are joined, forming the shape of the circle, while the middle fingers form the ‘needle,’ this is the mudrā of Jayoṣṇīṣa. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ Jayoṣṇīṣa! Blaze, blaze! Bind, bind! Tame, tame! Ṅraṁ ṅraṁ ṅraṁ, haḥ! Strike! Hūṁ![2271] This is the mantra of Jayoṣṇīṣa.[2272]{37.13}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are brought in contact with the ‘needle’ of the middle fingers above the nail[2273] and cling to them at the third phalanx, this is the mudrā of [the uṣṇīṣa king] Cakravartin. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, homage to Cakravartin, the invincible uṣṇīṣa of the tathāgatas, invisible at the top of their head, hūṁ! Blaze, blaze! Burn, burn! Make [them] tremble, make! Drive [them] away! Frighten [them]! Kill [them]! Uproot [them]! Strike, strike! Aṁ aṁ aḥ aḥ kaḥ kaḥ! O Proṅkhinī,[2274] Proṅkhinī! The unconquerable bearer of arms, adorned with earrings! Hūṁ phaṭ![2275]
“[This is the mantra of] Cakravartin.[2276]{37.14}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are brought into contact with the ‘needle’ of the middle fingers under the fingernail and cling to them along the third phalanx, this is the mudrā of Cakravartin, the lord of mantras. If the index fingers are brought into contact with the ‘needle,’ touching it under the fingernail, this is the mudrā of the lord of mantras.[2277]{37.15}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are brought together F.260.aF.277.a[2278] and remain in contact in the space between the fingernail phalanges of the needle-shaped middle fingers, this is the mudrā of Mahācakravartin. If the tips of the same index fingers are brought together and mutually touch below the third phalanx of the needle-shaped middle fingers, forming thus the shape of a circle, this is [another] mudrā of Mahācakravartin. If the tips of the same index fingers are brought together and mutually touch in the space between the third phalanges of the needle-shaped middle fingers, this is [another] mudrā of Mahācakravartin, the lord of mantras.[2279]{37.16}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are made into the shape of an anklet with each tip touching the third joint [of the opposite finger(?)] and are positioned below the middle joint of the needle-shaped middle fingers,[2280] this is the heart mudrā of the cakravartin Aparājitoṣṇīṣa.[2281] The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ Aparājita,[2282]dhik![2283]
“Using the root and other mudrās of the uṣṇīṣa kings as an auxiliary practice one will accomplish all activities. {37.17}
“If one extends the tips of the thumbs up to the [base of] the ring fingers and raises [the hands], this is the mudrā of summoning. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Come, come, O blessed Dharma lord! Take this welcome offering of water, fragrances, flowers, incense, refreshments, and lamps, and protect me! Svāhā to you, one of invincible strength and power![2284]
“When one has performed the summoning, using flowers that are naturally white, water for the feet, water for rinsing the mouth, and a seat to sit on, one should bind the cardinal directions, the intermediate directions, and the ones above and below, using the same.[2285]{37.18}
“One should touch, as before, the ring fingers with the tips of the thumbs and then bend[2286] the ring fingers at the middle joint. When they have touched [the thumbs?], one should stretch them upward. One should rotate [this mudrā] from the right to the left with the offering of dismissal for one’s deity. The mudrās for binding the directions should [also] be displayed.[2287] The corresponding mantra for dismissing is:
“Homage to the invincible uṣṇīṣa! Go, go, O blessed Dharma lord! Take from me this dismissal offering of water, fragrances, flowers, and incense, and protect me! Svāhā[2288] to you, invincibly strong and powerful![2289]
“These were the mudrā and the mantra of F.261.aF.278.a dismissing with the respective offerings. {37.19}
“The same index fingers should touch below at the third joint of the needle-shaped middle fingers. The opposite thumbs, together with the small fingers, should form a tight fist. The middle fingers should form a ‘needle.’[2290] The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Oṁ oṁ, hrauṁ! Bind, hūṁ phaṭ![2291]
“This mudrā and mantra of the invincible uṣṇīṣa Tejorāśi can be employed in all the rites of binding, and so forth. It will accomplish all of them. {37.20}
“If the tips of the same index fingers are folded in and lightly touch at the third joint of the needle-shaped middle fingers,[2292] this is the mudrā of Vikaraṇoṣṇīṣa. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! O Vikaraṇa, shake [them], shake! Hūṁ![2293]
“The great vidyārāja Vikaraṇoṣṇīṣa can be employed in all the rites belonging to the uṣṇīṣa system of the blessed vidyārāja, such as destroying all the vighnas and vināyakas, conferring empowerments, self-protection, binding the directions, binding the maṇḍala, and so forth. {37.21}
“If the same index fingers are extended outward with the tips folded in and are moved in a pulling motion,[2294] [this is the mudrā] for summoning [the god of] fire for the purpose of homa. The same mudrā [is used also] for dismissing, if the index fingers are stretched forth. This is the mudrā of Jvālāmālinoṣṇīṣa. It is invincible in every rite. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Come, come! Svāhā to Agni, one who is garlanded with flames![2295]{37.22}
“If the same index fingers are folded[2296] at the tips and are joined together in the space between the needle-shaped middle fingers at the third joint, this is the mudrā of Balotkaṭoṣṇīṣa. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Accept these fragrances, flowers, incense, refreshments, and lamps! Take [them], take. Svāhā to you, invincible Dharma king![2297]
“This is the mantra for offering fragrances, and so forth. {37.23}
“If the ring fingers are in reverse position, the thumbs joined at the third joint, and the index fingers form the shape of a needle, this is the mudrā of Vajratejoṣṇīṣa. Unassailable by any vināyakas, it should be used to restrain them and, also, for making the time and the place salutary.[2298] One can thus use this mudrā and its mantra[2299] to afford protection at the time of recitation, formal practice, or the maṇḍala [ritual]. They can be used in all activities. The mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa who destroys all the vighnas! Destroy [them]! Svāhā![2300]{37.24}
“If the ring fingers [each] form a circle [touching] the base of the thumb, and the index fingers form the shape of a needle,[2301] this is the mudrā of Aparājitoṣṇīṣa, F.261.bF.278.b invincible in every way. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, Aparājitoṣṇīṣa that can never be defeated! O great vidyā! You are the samaya, peaceful and restrained, taught by the Dharma king! You fulfill all aims, svāhā![2302]
“One should perform, [using this mudrā and mantra], the rites of pacifying and nourishing, while offering homas of ghee, and so forth. {37.25}
“If the same ring fingers are folded into a circular shape, and the folded tips of the index fingers press against each other, this is the mudrā of Śaṅkaroṣṇīṣa. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed invincible uṣṇīṣa! Oṁ, svāhā to Śaṅkara!
“[This mantra and mudrā] afford protection in every rite. {37.26}
“If the tips of the thumbs are placed upon the third joint of the ring fingers, and the index fingers form the shape of a needle, this is the mudrā of Samayoṣṇīṣa, invincible as a vajra and applicable to every type of samaya.[2303] The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Oṁ, the samaya for prosperity! Svāhā![2304]{37.27}
“If the tips of the thumbs are placed upon the middle joint of the ring fingers, and the index fingers, with their tips folded in, cling to the middle joint of the needle-shaped middle fingers, this is the mudrā of the invincible Mahāsamayoṣṇīṣa. When employed against the gods and the asuras, this [mudrā] establishes them in the samaya. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to the blessed, invincible uṣṇīṣa! Oṁ, the great samaya for prosperity! Svāhā![2305]{37.28}
“Having bound the maṇḍala with this mudrā, one may recite, ‘Abide in the samaya, abide!’ addressing even the emperor; one may subdue other emperors, too. While mantras are being recited at that very place, whether worldly or supramundane, none will interfere with another or neutralize its power. [This is true] for all the reciters in a particular place. Starting with those just mentioned, there are innumerable uṣṇīṣa kings—one should practice the entire Tathāgata family at length. {37.29}
“Further, Mañjuśrī, there are, in this king of manuals, mantras that are infinitely profound and mudrās of many different kinds. I will now teach them in brief. If I were F.262.aF.279.a to explain them in detail, no human or nonhuman being, not even in a thousand eons, would be able to grasp or remember them. I will therefore, Mañjuśrī, teach them in brief. Keep all of this in your memory. {37.30}
“Now the descriptions of these and other such great mudrās will be given. First come the descriptions F.262.bF.279.b of the heart mudrās of the blessed buddhas. {37.43}
“One should hold the fingers of both hands together, with the thumbs exposed to view. This is the heart mudrā of the tathāgatas. The same mudrā, but with only the right thumb showing, is the mudrā of Padmadhara. If one first makes the left and right hands into fists, and then relaxes and extends both the middle fingers to form the single form of a vajra, this is the mudrā of Vajradhara. {37.44}
“If one inclines the pointed tip [of the vajra] down, this is the mudrā of the bodhisattva Gandhahastin. If one subsequently raises [the hands] up and forms the shape of a circle, this is the mudrā of Gajagandha.[2319] If one then folds in one phalanx of each [middle finger], this is the mudrā of the Jewel family.[2320] It may be employed, in combination with the mantras of Jalendra and so forth, [to invoke] Jambhala and all the spirits of the Jewel family. {37.45}
“If the index fingers are each folded at two joints and touch each other at the fingernails, this is the mudrā of the five very powerful yakṣas and so forth, which belongs to the Yakṣa family. If [the index fingers] are joined at the fingernails and held above the fingernails of the thumbs, with the hands positioned as before and the middle fingers raised up to form the shape of a needle, this is the mudrā of all the gods who inhabit the celestial realms of Akaniṣṭha and so forth; it belongs to the Celestial family.[2321]{37.46}
“If one brings the hands together and makes them into fists with the thumbs exposed to view, this is the mudrā of the pratyekabuddhas and noble śrāvakas. {37.47}
“If one raises [the hands] and cups them, this is the mudrā of the wish-fulfilling gem. If one makes [one’s hands] into fists and holds them, while sitting in a cross-legged position, at the left and right shoulders, this is the mudrā of the mendicant’s staff. If the hands face each other with a space in between, this is the mudrā of the monk’s shirt.[2325]{37.54}
“If the hollowed [hands are held] down below, this is the mudrā of the bowl.[2326] The mudrā of the robe is formed with the left hand. The mudrā of the fangs is formed out of the heart mudrā by raising the thumb of the left hand. In the mudrā of fearlessness, the [right] hand displays the gesture of granting fearlessness, while the left is supporting the robe.[2327]{37.55}
“If there is a hollow space between the middle fingers, the index fingers are folded outside and the thumbs placed inside, this is the mudrā of the Buddha’s eye.[2328] The same mudrā, but with the middle fingers folded at the joints and the index fingers at the side of them,[2329] is [the mudrā] of the Buddha’s loving kindness.[2330] If one forms the añjali gesture with the fingers splayed, and then forms a triple ‘needle’ by hiding away the index and ring fingers, this is the mudrā of Māmakī.[2331]{37.56}
“If one forms the añjali gesture, bends the index and middle fingers outward at the third joint, and joins the thumbs but keeps them apart from other fingers, this is the mudrā of Bhogavatī.[2332] The mudrā of Vijayā is formed with the index and middle finger of the left hand.[2333] With the three fingers of the right hand, one should display a vajra at the waist.[2334]{37.57}
“Similarly, one can accomplish all activities by forming,F.263.bF.280.b above one’s head, the mudrā of the vidyārāja,[2335] which has the nature of the eight great mudrās.[2336] If one casts flowers onto the maṇḍala at the right time following the procedure as previously described, one will accomplish any activity according to one’s wish.[2337] Samayas are expressed by vidyās or mantras; when properly sealed with a mudrā, they become as powerful as the mudrā.[2338] Should one display a mudrā carelessly or at the wrong time and place, one would break one’s samaya.
[2339]{37.58}
“As with the vajra, so with the trident[2340]—there is no difference between them[2341]—if it is raised, the [mudrā] is associated with Vajradhara; if lowered, with Maheśvara. If it is formed in the center, it is associated with the venerable masters and teachers as well as all humankind.[2342]{37.59}
If a single finger is raised up, this is the mudrā of all human beings and other two-legged, four-legged, multilegged, and legless creatures in the threefold universe. If two fingers are raised, this is the mudrā of all the yakṣas and yakṣiṇīs. If three are raised, this is the mudrā of all the vidyādharas and vidyādharīs. If four fingers are raised, evenly leveled with the palm, this is the mudrā of the male and female lower gods[2343] and asuras.[2344]{37.60}
“If the hands display a gracefully formed añjali gesture, this is the mudrā of all the gods inhabiting the realm of form. The same gesture is also the mudrā of the gods inhabiting the formless realm.[2345]{37.61}
“If the hands, positioned as before, are made into hollow fists, this is the mudrā of all worldly beings, starting from the lords of the realm of desire and all the beings dwelling there, including men, animals, pretas, and yāmas.[2346]{37.62}
“If one extends a single finger[2347] while forming the above mudrā, this is the mudrā of the piśācas and piśācīs. If one extends two[2348] fingers, this is the mudrā of the rākṣasas and rākṣasīs. If one extends three[2349] fingers, this is the mudrā of all the kravyādas and other carrion-eating spirits, the grahas, the mātṛs, F.264.aF.281.a the kuṣmāṇḍas and so forth, the piśitāśas, all the ḍākinīs,[2350] the vyantaras, the kaśmalas, and others. If one forms four fingers into hooks, this is the mudrā of all the kaśmalas. {37.63}
“One performs summoning with the mudrās of summoning, and dismissing with the mudrās of dismissing.[2351] If one employs one’s own mind, one will accomplish all activities. Using only these mudrās according to need, one can combine them only with the mantras assigned to them. One must not use other [mudrās], or perform activities other than [those assigned to these mudrās]. One can only employ a mantra with whatever mudrās they are designated to. {37.64}
“Those who use the mudrās transgressively will perish. By violating a mudrā one breaks one’s samaya and transgresses against all the vidyās. The violator will certainly fall into the Raurava or Avīci hell. Creators of obstacles will fall deep down into one of the great hells. Those, on the other hand, who keep their samayas regarding the mudrās will experience long-lasting great happiness, will be reborn in the gods’ realms, and will certainly progress toward the final goal of awakening. {37.66}
“In short, many different types of mudrās have been taught by the primordial buddhas and the bodhisattvas of great power. It is impossible for any being to fathom, enumerate, or learn them. {37.67}
“Briefly, there is in the family of the Victorious One a single-syllable mantra, the vidyārāja, the cakravartin.[2353] Its corresponding mudrā, used for protection,[2354] is formed as follows: First one should make the left and right hands into fists, except for the middle fingers, which should be extended forth together, each bent at the first joint.[2355] As for the index fingers, each should be bent at both joints and touch the other at the fingernail. [Their tips] should be above the fingernails of the thumbs. F.264.bF.281.b This mudrā of the cakravartin [One Syllable] is suitable for all activities. It was declared by the protectors of the world to be the best of all mudrās. {37.68}
“When this mudrā is employed with the previously described cakravartin One Syllable, it can accomplish all activities. When [One Syllable] is accomplished, the entire Tathāgata family is accomplished, and all the worldly and supramundane mantras are accomplished. When One Syllable is recited, all the mantras are recited. {37.69}
“As for the other eminent mantra [deities] invoked in this king of manuals, the practitioner should always recite [their] mantras one thousand and eight times to start with.[2356] In this way, all these vidyā deities will be experienced directly and will soon grant accomplishments and boons. One will steadily progress toward awakening. {37.70}
“One will accomplish all activities by combining the one-syllable heart mantra of Avalokiteśvara with the mudrā of Padmadhara, or by combining the vidyā of Pāṇḍaravāsinī with her mudrā—so also, by combining the mudrā of Vajradhara with his one-syllable heart mantra, or by combining the mudrā of Māmakī with her great vidyā. {37.71}
“Similarly, in the Royal[2357] family, [one will accomplish all activities by combining] the one-syllable heart mantra of the bodhisattva Gajagandha[2358] with his mudrā. Also, regarding the Jewel, the Yakṣa, the Celestial, and the Noble families,[2359] one will accomplish all activities by combining the one-syllable heart mantras of these families with their respective mudrās. In this way, one will always be able to accomplish all activities using any of these mudrās and mantras. The power of the vidyā mantras will be directed according to how they are employed. Activities will not be accomplished any other way.[2360]{37.72}
“Similarly, the right hand raised in a svasti gesture[2361] [should be combined with the mantra] of Brahmā Sahāmpati; the single liṅga mudrā, [with the mantra] of Maheśvara; the discus mudrā, [with the mantra] of Viṣṇu; the añjali gesture with the fingers splayed, [with the mantra] of Garutman;[2362] a hand raised in a cursing gesture, [with the mantra] of the ṛṣis. The same applies to the mudrā of the gandharvas, the lower gods, and the asuras, which is formed by placing the tip of the left thumb inside a fist. The mudrā of the four virgins, again, can be combined only with the corresponding mantra.[2363]{37.73}F.265.aF.282.a
“Similarly, the spear mudrā [should be combined with the mantra] of Kārttikeya. The same applies to the mudrās of Yama, Varuṇa, Kubera, and the yakṣas, rākṣasas, piśācas, and mahoragas—all the beings inhabiting the threefold universe, following the course of whatever destiny, and reborn in whatever realm—the grahas, mātṛs, kravyādas, kaśmalas, and so forth. All these beings have mudrās and mantras designated to them, which must be employed observing the right correspondence. Everything must follow the right order, not otherwise. {37.74}
“First of all, the practitioner should rely on the auspicious mudrās and their corresponding mantras,[2364] as taught in this king of manuals, that represent the way of the tathāgatas.[2365] Also, Mañjuśrī, there are the mudrās of the noble bodhisattvas Samantabhadra, Mahāsthānaprāpta,[2366] and Vimalagati,[2367] as well as your utpala[2368] mudrā. These mudrās, of both the tathāgatas and the bodhisattvas, should always be displayed by the practitioner facing the east. Having gotten up early, he should stand facing the sun in a clean place and, himself clean, should display any one of these mudrās, raising it upward, above his head. {37.75}
“Any of the corresponding mantras should be recited one hundred and eight times. He will be free from all disease, will live long, and will not be overcome by the vighnas. He will become unassailable by any living being. He will meet, face to face, all the mantra [deities][2369] who will promptly grant him accomplishment. He will receive blessings from all the buddhas and will steadily progress toward awakening. The divine youth Mañjuśrī will himself become his spiritual friend until the attainment of full realization. What, then, are these mudrās and mantras?[2370]{37.76}
“First, I will teach the mudrā of the great hero. One should join the cupped hands folding the fingers in and raising up the thumbs bent where they meet the wrist. This is the mudrā of the great hero, taught by all the tathāgatas. F.265.bF.282.b The corresponding mantra is:
“Āḥ hero! Hūṁ khaṁ![2371]
“If combined with this mantra, the mudrā of the great hero will accomplish all activities. {37.77}
“Having joined the cupped hands as before, one should open them with the fingers expanded all around into the shape of a blooming lotus.[2372] This excellent mudrā, introduced by the primordial buddhas, is called blooming. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, you who originate from the sky! Be bright, be! Spread light, spread! You are blessed by the buddhas! Illuminate all the buddhas! Hūṁ hūṁ, Vikāsinī! Phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā![2373]{37.78}
“This mantra,[2374] when employed in combination with its namesake mudrā, is suitable for all activities. It points out those who are possessed by grahas. It causes those possessed, whether it is by grahas, kravyādas, or kaśmalas, or those knocked out by poison, to speak. Following the manner of its employment, it will fulfill all the required activities accordingly.[2375] In short, this vidyā, when employed along with the blooming mudrā, will fulfill all aims; it will swiftly bring the desired result even if it is not fully mastered. {37.79}
“If one joins the cupped hands together with the fingers evenly folded, this is the heart mudrā [of the tathāgatas]. This heart [mudrā] should be incanted seven times with the [corresponding] heart mantra, and then ‘released.’[2376] The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, brave Godari, svāhā![2377]
“This is the heart mantra of the tathāgatas. {37.80}
“If one joins the cupped hands as before, with the fingers set apart so that there is free space between the fingertips, this is the uṣṇīṣa mudrā.[2378] The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ droṁ! Bind! Svāhā![2379]
“This mantra is suitable for all activities. {37.81}
“If one makes the right hand into a fist with the thumb free, this is the mudrā of the mendicant’s staff. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, shake [them]! You are invincible in battle, hūṁ![2380]
“This mantra of the mendicant’s staff is suitable for all activities. {37.82}
“If the same mudrā is formed with the left hand touching the robe, this is the mudrā of the robe. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, protect [me], protect! O my robe, blessed by all the buddhas, svāhā![2381]
“With this mudrā of the robe of the Tathāgata one can accomplish all activities. F.266.aF.283.a If one wears a robe incanted with the corresponding mantra, one will enjoy good fortune[2382] and powerful protection. All the grahas, mātṛs, piśitāśas, kravyādas, kaśmalas, and vighnas will flee upon merely seeing [such a robe]. {37.83}
“If the thumb of the left hand and the small finger of the right mutually touch,[2383] and the hands are lowered down with a hollow space between them, this is the mudrā of the bowl. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, O buddha bowl of great power, you are blessed by the protectors of the world! Hold, hold, and cause [the contents] to be held! Svāhā![2384]
“This mantra, when combined with the mudrā, is suitable for all activities. If one recollects [this mantra] at the time of eating, one will not be affected by any poison that one might swallow. {37.84}
“If one makes the hands into fists, with the index fingers bent at the middle joint,[2385] this is the mudrā of the wish-fulfilling gem. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ splendor, blaze! You who fulfill all aims. Bring success, bring! O wish-fulfilling gem, huṁ![2386]
“This mantra of the wish-fulfilling gem, when combined with its namesake mudrā, will accomplish all activities splendidly.[2387]{37.85}
“By incanting with this mantra all one’s ornaments and decorations and putting them on, one ensures a powerful protection for one’s body, and one attains supreme good fortune. If one enters a battle, having donned the ornaments and incanted the armor, no weapon will be able to strike one’s body and one will be unassailable by one’s enemies. One will protect one’s own army and defeat the enemy army. One will accomplish these and innumerable other feats, even if one has not mastered them previously. {37.86}
“If one takes a ruby, an emerald, or other type of precious stone, incants it one hundred and eight times and places it at the tip of a banner, on one’s head, or on an elephant’s back, one will not be taken prisoner[2388] when one enters the front lines of a battle. Seeing [the incanted gem], the enemy army will certainly be crushed without any fight or will fall into a heavy stupor. The defeated troops will flee, and so will their leader. {37.87}
“If one forms the hands into mutually touching[2389] fists with the index fingers[2390] bent at the middle joint, on the level with the third joint on the middle fingers,[2391]F.266.bF.283.b this is the mudrā of the Dharma wheel. The corresponding mantra, the mantra of the Dharma wheel, is:
“Oṁ blazing circle! Chop up, break, strike, burn, burn! Huṁ![2392]{37.88}
“If one is firmly set[2393] with the left foot outstretched, the right knee touching the ground, the left [hand] extended backward, and the right poised to deliver a blow,[2394] this is the mudrā of Aparājitā. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, hulu hulu! O caṇḍālī, O mātaṅgī![2395]Svāhā![2396]
“The mantra of Aparājitā and the mantra the Dharma wheel are suitable for all activities if used in combination with their corresponding mudrās. In short, they will remove all suffering. Whatever activities they are employed for, they will accomplish all of them. {37.89}
“One should place the left[2397] hand in the lap[2398] and display with the right [the gesture] of teaching the Dharma. This is the spear mudrā of the tathāgatas. The corresponding mantra is:
“OṁVijayā of great power, difficult to resist! Hūṁ phaṭ! O Victorious One, phaṭ! O auspicious one, phaṭ![2399]
“[This mantra of] the spear of the tathāgatas, when employed with its [namesake] mudrā, can accomplish all activities. It can paralyze all the vighnas, evil beings, and enemies, as well as all the gods. Its qualities are infinite. Whatever activities it is employed for, it will accomplish all of them. {37.90}
“One should interlace the fingers of the hands with the palms facing upward and the index fingers touching at the tips to form the shape of a needle.[2400] This mudrā, turned around so that the palms face downward, should be displayed at the forehead. This is the ūrṇā mudrā of the blessed buddhas, taught by the primordial buddhas. The corresponding mantra is, ‘Homage to all the worthy tathāgatas, the fully realized buddhas.’ [The portion to be recited is]:
“He he! Bind, bind! Remain, remain! Support, support! Suppress, suppress! O jewel of the ūrṇā, svāhā![2401]
“This mantra of the ūrṇā of the tathāgatas, when employed along with its [namesake] mudrā, can accomplish all activities. {37.91}
“If one steps into the midst of one’s enemies wearing a bindi on one’s forehead made with bovine bezoar [incanted with the ūrṇā mantra] and reciting [the same], one will be unassailable by any F.267.aF.284.a wicked beings and will not be harmed by them. Or, if one enters the middle of a battlefield, one will cause, merely by one’s gaze, the destruction of the enemy army. If one does not fail to display [the bindi], one can accomplish feats without limit. This [ūrṇā] has been taught by innumerable blessed buddhas. {37.92}
“One should form the añjali gesture with the hands joined together without any gaps. The two index fingers should be bent at the middle joint.[2402] The thumbs should also be bent.[2403] This is the mudrā of the eye of the tathāgatas. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ, ru ru! Flash, blaze, and stay on! O Siddhalocanā who accomplishes all purposes, svāhā![2404]
“This mantra of the eye of the tathāgatas, when employed along with its namesake mudrā, can accomplish all activities. {37.93}
“If one enters among one’s enemies, having incanted one’s eyes [with the eye mantra of the tathāgatas], they will lose their anger[2405] upon merely being looked at. Filled with loving kindness, they will harbor good wishes and will become friends. Or, if one gazes at one’s enemies when in the vanguard of the battle after incanting one’s eyes, they will become kindly disposed. Unable to raise their weapons in assault, they will turn back without any fight and subsequently turn into allies. {37.94}
“If the hands are positioned horizontally and form the shape of a book with the opposite fingertips touching,[2406] this is the mudrā of Prajñāpāramitā. The corresponding mantra is:
“Homage to you, blessed goddess beautiful to look at! Oṁ tha![2407]
“This [mantra of] Blessed Prajñāpāramitā, when employed along with its namesake mudrā, can accomplish all activities. {37.95}
“If one touches one’s heart while reciting [the mantra just described], one will increase one’s powers of recollection. If, while reciting, one enters into the midst of wicked enemies, one will deprive them of the ability to think. In the heat of a battle, one will be able to stupefy one’s adversaries, whether they are two-legged or four-legged, or make them lose their minds. In short, whatever activities the blessed goddess is employed for, she will accomplish all of them. F.267.bF.284.b The qualities of this [mantra] are infinite, and so are its ritual applications. {37.96}
“The mudrās and mantras of the tathāgatas are infinite. One should employ [primarily] all the mudrās and mantras of the [deities] listed in the ‘Assembly’ chapter[2408] as the retinue deities of the tathāgatas, as the rites of other [deities] are innumerable. These mudrās and mantras should be employed according to the ritual of this king of manuals. {37.97}
“Thus, the mantra of the Lotus family should be used together with the padma[2409] mudrā. This mantra is:
“Oṁ jiḥ jiḥ! Svāhā to the dispeller of fear, one with the body of a victorious one![2410]
“This is the mantra of the bodhisattva Avalokiteśvara. When employed together with the padma mudrā, it will accomplish all activities. When it is recited, all the mantras of the Lotus family are being recited. When it is accomplished, all the mantras of the Lotus family are accomplished. {37.98}
“The mantra to be used with [the mudrā] of the great vidyā Pāṇḍaravāsinī is:
“Oṁ kaṭe vikaṭe nikaṭe kaṭaṅkaṭe kaṭavikaṭakaṭaṅkaṭe svāhā![2411]
“[This mantra], when combined with the mudrā of Pāṇḍaravāsinī or the padma[2412] mudrā, can accomplish all activities. It also affords protection to those visiting any of the charnel grounds. {37.99}
“Similarly, Tārā, Bhṛkuṭī, Candrā, any deities said to be from the retinue of the lord of vidyās Hayagrīva, as well as the entire Lotus family in its infinity, may be invoked by the means of the mantras and mudrās along with their extensive rituals.[2413]{37.100}
“The same applies to the Vajra family where the mantra is used together with the double vajra mudrā.[2414] This mantra is:[2415]
“Hūṁ!
“When this mantra of Vajrapāṇi is accomplished, all the mantras of the Vajra family are accomplished. When this mantra is recited, all of them are recited. When employed along with previously described double vajra mudrā, this mantra will accomplish all the activities the practitioner desires, even those forbidden by the most eminent of victors, if they are required to guide sentient beings. This mantra of the great yakṣa is extremely fierce. {37.101}
“Similarly, [the mudrā] of Māmakī, the great vidyā who is the mainstay of the [Vajra] family, can accomplish all activities. The corresponding mantra is:
“Oṁ maintainer of the family! Bind, bind! Huṁ phaṭ![2416]
“This great vidyā called Māmakī, taught by all the buddhas, is suitable for all activities. When employed together with the mudrā of Māmakī formed in advance, it can accomplish any activity according to the practitioner’s wish. One can also employ the mudrās of the retinue [deities] of Vajrapāṇi as listed in the introductory chapter,[2417] as well as the entire vajra holder’s family[2418] without exception, in combination with their respective mantras. {37.102}
“Similarly, in the Elephant[2419] family, there is, the mantra of the bodhisattva Gajagandha:
“Oṁ, you with an elephant’s name, hūṁ! You who walk in the sky, svāhā![2420]F.268.aF.285.a
“When [this mantra] is employed along with the previously described mudrā, it will accomplish all activities. Just as before, when this mantra is accomplished, the whole family is accomplished. {37.103}
“So also [is the case with] the mantras of Samantabhadra, Mahāsthānaprāpta,[2421] and Vimalagati, which are, [respectively:]
“Oṁ, son of the victors! The same and not the same! Do not delay! Hūṁ phaṭ!;[2422]
“Remain, remain in the exalted place! Having attained awakening, remember your samaya! Hūṁ, phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā!;[2423]
“and
“Oṁ, stainless, stainless! With stainless form! Burn, burn! Remember your samaya, svāhā![2424]{37.104}
“The mantra of Gaganagañja can accomplish all activities if employed with the mudrā of any bodhisattva.[2425] This applies also to all the innumerable great bodhisattvas who have attained the tenth bodhisattva level, starting with Apāyajaha, Sadāprarudita, Kṣitigarbha, Ratnapāṇi, and Maitreya. Their mudrās and mantras are, likewise, innumerable. They ought to be employed [as instructed] in this king of manuals. {37.105}
“The detailed section on all the mantras and mudrās covers a vast range of the worldly ones and the different levels of the supramundane. All the rites and their variants taught in this [manual] entail a samaya of the great assembly and require accomplishing all the relevant mantras.[2426]{37.106}
“These mudrās and mantras should thus be employed according to their family association, whether the Jewel, the Yakṣa, the Celestial, or the Noble family. However, all these mantras and mudrās in all the tantras in the three times constitute but one family, which is none other than the Tathāgata family. And you too, Mañjuśrī, divine youth, may be regarded as belonging to the Tathāgata family. {37.107}
“You should remember, Mañjuśrī, that all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, noble śrāvakas, and pratyekabuddhas; all the worldly and supramundane mantra [deities],[2427] whether subject to karmic influences or not; and all the different mudrās—all of them belong to the families[2428] of the tathāgatas. F.268.bF.285.b There is no such mudrā,[2429] Mañjuśrī, or esoteric mantra system, that would not belong to a tathāgata family or have no samaya bond with a tathāgata. Know, divine youth, that they are connected. {37.108}
“Just as the Tathāgata is said to be at the forefront, so is the Tathāgata family said to be at the forefront. Therefore, Mañjuśrī, this king of manuals is the jewel of the most eminent of families. It was taught, elucidated, established, and propagated by the past buddhas since time immemorial. {37.109}
“This king of manuals was taught by Blessed Saṃkusumita Rāja, Blessed Śālarājendra, Blessed Saṃkusumitagandhottama Rāja, Blessed Ratnaketu, Blessed Amitābha, Blessed Puṇyābha, [Blessed] Kusumottama, [Blessed] Saṃkusuma, [Blessed] Supuṣpa, [Blessed] Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, [Blessed] Kanakamuni, [Blessed] Kāśyapa, [Blessed] Krakucchanda, [Blessed] Śikhin, [Blessed] Viśvabhū, Blessed Konākamuni,[2430] and also by me, Śākyamuni. It was taught before and will be taught again. {37.110}
“In this way, O divine youth Mañjuśrī, this sovereign manual of your rites has been passed down by the succession of buddhas. It is the prime jewel of the Tathāgata family that brings great benefits. It is necessarily rooted in the sphere of phenomena. It is not possible to describe its benefits even in a thousand eons, or to fully describe its great qualities. Not even the likes of you could describe or communicate the experiences to be had in this world, or those related to the future state of awakening, its ultimate goal.[2431]{37.111}
“The extent of the great qualities of this manual and the ensuing results are immeasurable. They relate to both this existence and the hereafter. If any persons, full of trust and free from doubt, should memorize and propagate [this manual], apply themselves to its diverse practices, accomplish [its] mantras or [just] recite them, display [its] mudrās, applying themselves continually, such persons would exhibit the following eight qualities:[2432]{37.112}
“(1) They would obtain special qualities and benefits.[2433] (2) They would be unfazed by their adversaries and have no fear therefrom. (3) Their bodies would be immune to poison and invulnerable to weapons. (4) They would be blessed by the buddhas F.269.aF.286.a and bodhisattvas and have long life, comforts, and intelligence. (5) The divine youth Mañjuśrī would become their spiritual friend and would appear to them in their dreams at night. (6) All the mantra [deities] would protect them and reveal to them their mudrās in their dreams. 7) No evil kings, wicked beings, or other ill-wishers would be able to harm them. (8) They would certainly be destined for awakening.[2434]{37.113}
“These eight benefits will manifest for those with faith and no doubts, who earnestly apply themselves to the practice—householders or renunciants, women or men—if they follow the instructions. They will not manifest for others. For those engaging in evil actions the opposite will happen; they will proceed downward into the Raurava and other hells. {37.114}
“As has been said, displaying the mudrās in the forenoon is conducive to long life. One should respectfully display the mudrās of the uṣṇīṣa [kings], and of Locanā[2435] and the others, while reciting the heart mantras of the deities from the retinue of the Tathāgata. They are of the same efficacy and power as your mudrās and mantras, O divine youth Mañjuśrī. {37.115}
“As has been said, one should be clean and be in a clean place. The intermediate area[2436] should be free from thorns, smeared with cow dung that has not fallen,[2437] and strewn with sweet-smelling white flowers. Standing there, one should recite the mantra and display the mudrā—not anywhere else, and not [the mantras and mudrās] of other [deities], but a single mantra out of those [specified], accompanied by [its respective] mudrā. {37.116}
“As said before, one should be clean. When the sun has set, one should wash oneself in pure water, free of living organisms, and put on fresh clothes. One should perform the uṣṇīṣa protection,[2438] and one should avoid sexual activity, be morally upright, and joyfully guard one’s purity and virtue. {37.117}
“One should obtain a thread spun by a virgin girl, or a brahmin girl who has never experienced sexual pleasure,[2440] and incant it one hundred and eight times with the mantra:
“Oṁ, seize, seize! Bind, bind! Arrester of semen and fulfiller[2441] of aims, svāhā![2442]F.269.bF.286.b
“One should recite this mantra while displaying the mudrā of Māmakī and then tie the thread around one’s hips. If one wraps it around three times, the semen will be arrested.[2443]{37.119}
“Not even the lord of the realm of desire will be able to disturb one’s mind during sleep, so how could the dream-framing vināyakas do it? Through this method, and not without it, neither the daughters of the ṛṣis nor the daughters of the lord of the realm of desire, who assume various forms to excite passions, will be able to disturb one’s mind, even if normally one has passions and is not free from them, so how could other women, whether human or nonhuman, disturb it? {37.120}
“Applying this procedure, one should rise early, go to the toilet, brush one’s teeth, rinse one’s mouth, and wash oneself, as before, in clean water free of living organisms. Facing the east, one should display the mudrā and recite the mantra. {37.121}
“As a consequence, one will enjoy a long life and proficiency in all types of activity. One will be free from all major diseases and will be loved by everybody. One’s enemies will become one’s friends. Through merely seeing [the mudrā], all the grahas, kravyādas, kaśmalas, and so forth will flee. The enemy army will become paralyzed. Through merely displaying [the mudrā], one will accomplish any activity. One thus has a choice between the procedure that is pure, or the impure lack of it.[2444]{37.122}
“This king of manuals is filled with infinite sets of mudrās and mantras,[2445] which have been and will be taught by innumerable blessed buddhas. I too—Tathāgata[2446] Śākyamuni, a worthy, fully realized buddha—have just now taught them in the midst of this great assembly. {37.123}
“You also, Mañjuśrī, divine youth, will engage in the task of safeguarding these instructions and safeguarding the domain of the teachings over the long period of time when I have passed into nirvāṇa, dissolved into the ultimate reality, and attained the complete peace of the final state. {37.124}
“As the end of an eon is now setting in, at this terrible time I taught this with my mind overcome by great compassion, F.270.aF.287.a for the benefit of beings. I taught this king of manuals in order to restrain and guide those who offend against the Three Jewels—the evil kings and the wicked beings.[2447] I taught this king of manuals with its detailed sections for the sake of all beings.” {37.125}
This concludes the detailed chapter on the ritual procedures that prescribe the mantras and the mudrās, thirty-seventh[2448] in “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.Chapter 38
At that time the blessed Śākyamuni again directed his gaze at the realm of the Pure Abode and spoke to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth:
“Listen, Mañjuśrī!
“Briefly, there are detailed [teachings on] the characteristics of the mudrās and the mantras, the procedures of the maṇḍalas and the association-based[2449] distribution of mudrās therein, and the secret maṇḍala of all the mantra [deities] in all the tantras.[2450]{38.1}
Chapter 50
[2478]At that time Blessed Vajrapāṇi, the general of the yakṣas who was in the assembly, got up from his seat, draped his upper robe over the left shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, bowed[2479] to the Blessed One with his palms pressed together, and made the following request: {50.1}
“O Blessed One! You have not fully explained[2480] the ritual of the lord of wrath called Yamāntaka that was taught by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth. Nor has Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, explained it. I request you, Blessed One, to teach this ritual, out of regard for human beings during the final age, so that, at the time when you are in the state of complete nirvāṇa, when the teachings have disappeared, during the dreadful time of the worst age when the buddhafield is completely devoid of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas, the teachings of the tathāgatas may be preserved, the domain of the Dharma may remain for a long time, all wicked kings may be subdued, those who harm the Three Jewels may be suppressed, the inconceivable bodhisattva conduct may bring the virtues of beings who require guidance to completion, and innumerable sentient beings may be brought to complete maturity. {50.2}
“During the final eon, Blessed One, when the final age has arrived in which the Sugata’s instructions perish, F.272.bF.289.b should one practice this rite of the wrathful lord Yamāntaka correctly, one will attain accomplishment. And this lord of wrath should always be used against none other than those evil kings and sentient beings who harm the teachings,[2481] such as the great yakṣas who are extremely powerful and engage in acts of oppression or assistance but lack great compassion.” {50.3}
The Blessed One, remaining silent, entered the samādhi called the buddha’s blessing through miraculous transformation. The divine youth Mañjuśrī, too, remained silent. The entire assembly and its surroundings began to shake in six different ways. {50.4}
Chapter 51
At that time Vajrapāṇi, the lord of guhyakas, looked at the entire great assembly and addressed all the hosts of beings seated [in the space] above the realm of the Pure Abode: {51.1}
“Listen, honorable friends! For a start I will teach the painting procedure of Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka—one of infinite power and courage, the tamer of those difficult to tame, one who terminates the life of Vaivasvata,[2533] a great bodhisattva devoted to restraining wicked beings—the procedure that was taught by Mañjuśrī.[2534]{51.2}
Chapter 52
At that time the great being, Bodhisattva Śāntamati, who was sitting in the midst of that great gathering, got up from his seat, bowed to each of the buddhas, and stood in the middle of the assembly. Having circumambulated the blessed Śākyamuni three times clockwise, he bowed at his feet and, looking in the direction of Vajrapāṇi, the great general of the yakṣa army, said: {52.1}
“You are exceedingly cruel,[2598] Vajrapāṇi, in that you teach mantra methods that are harmful to all sentient beings, or serve to obtain sensual pleasures. It is not proper, O son of the victorious ones, for the bodhisattvas, the great beings, to act like this because bodhisattvas, great beings, are endowed with great compassion and practice bodhisattva conduct. Practicing benevolence for the sake of all beings, they do not cast off the fetters of existence.[2599]{52.2}
“Moreover, O son of the victorious ones, the venerable tathāgatas, the fully realized buddhas, having all sentient beings in mind, do not[2600] give Dharma instructions on how to harm beings.[2601] Since they possess great compassion, they adopt the attitude of benevolence toward all beings.” {52.3}
The great being Bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi replied to Bodhisattva Śāntamati, “Śāntamati! A bodhisattva should indeed train to be this way and should adopt such an attitude. What you now say and teach, all the buddhas and the bodhisattvas of great power teach. I will explain it, too, speaking from the perspective of the absolute truth. {52.4}
“Śāntamati, the conduct of the bodhisattvas, the great beings, which manifests throughout the entire domain of sentient beings, is inconceivable. Accordingly, Śāntamati, a bodhisattva who recites the mantra should think, ‘Supposing the aims of the target [were fulfilled], he would accumulate a lot of negativity and would fall into one of the great hells. But this being should not make his store of negativity even greater. May he never be separated from the three realizations.’[2604]{52.9}
“Only after forming this wish, Śāntamati, can a bodhisattva who recites the mantra perform a violent rite of assault, applying the skillful means. In all [such] rites, he must be aware of his motive and avoid any unwholesome motives. When undertaking to guide beings, he must strive to do this with a mind full of compassion. {52.10}
“Moreover, son of the victors, because of the greatness of their comprehension of Dharma and non-Dharma, virtue and nonvirtue, and good and bad, the blessed buddhas mastered the ability to skillfully guide beings. They have attained the realization of the sphere of phenomena, F.279.aF.296.a and all of them without exception bring beings to maturity by the skillful means of Dharma instructions.[2605]{52.11}
“We should strive, son of the victors, to be the same [as them], so that we can guide, mature, and instruct beings. Therefore, venerable sons of the victors, each and all of you present in this assembly, who have taken the great samaya, should study and develop trust, seeking to establish what is skillful and what is not, so that you can take joy in teaching the Dharma of the tathāgatas.”[2606]{52.12}
Bodhisattva Śāntamati, the great being, looked at the yakṣa general Vajrapāṇi in silence and remained in his seat. Looking then at Lord Buddha, he thought, “The Buddha’s teachings are inconceivable.” {52.13}
Vajrapāṇi, the master of guhyakas, directing his gaze at the entire assembly, continued to teach the ritual of Lord of Wrath: “Listen, respectable hosts of gods and all the hordes of bhūtas who dwell in the inhabited worlds! {52.14}
“To start, one should perform the protection ritual, take the painting of Lord of Wrath, and go to a secluded place where there is a single śivaliṅga, the abode of Maheśvara. One should anoint this liṅga with poison, blood, brown mustard oil, and kāñjika, and worship it with the petals of neem tree [flowers]. One should put on a sacred thread made of human entrails of tubular shape,[2607] take a human skull with the right hand, and make a gesture as if delivering a blow. Filled with utmost wrath, one should threaten the liṅga with the index finger of the left hand, while focusing the mind on humiliating the haughty and wicked kings or other corrupt men with powerful acquaintances,[2608] very wealthy, very fierce, and very influential.[2609]F.279.bF.296.b One should then shut the door [of the temple] and stand naked with loose hair, with one’s left foot atop the Maheśvara liṅga.[2610] One should recite the mantra of Lord [of Wrath] until the liṅga splits open. {52.15}
“The liṅga will be in two separate parts and the great syllable hūṁ will be heard. One must not be afraid at that time. On the very same day,[2611] the wicked kings, or other enemies with powerful acquaintances, will suddenly be seized with fever, or seized by nonhuman beings, such as rākṣasas and so forth. If, at that time, one keeps reciting the mantra[2612] for a while, the enemy’s life will suddenly be terminated. If one recites at night, the enemy’s entire family[2613] will perish. {52.16}
“There is also another rite. One should go at midday, as before, to a temple of Maheśvara and worship the liṅga with neem leaves, burn the incense of human flesh, and recite the mantra until the house of the enemy is set on fire, or the enemy starts shivering from a great fever. If one does not stop reciting and remains, really angry, near to Dakṣiṇamūrti,[2614] the enemy will die and his family line will be terminated. To bring [the enemy] back to life, one should repeatedly wash the liṅga in water and rinse it with the cool milk of a cow. [The enemy] will become well again. {52.17}
“There is also another rite. One should light a fire opposite the southern face of the Maheśvara liṅga, using sticks of the thorn apple,[2615] and offer into it one thousand and eight oblations of sticks of vaikaṅkata[2616] smeared with poison, blood, and brown mustard [oil]. All the enemies will succumb to a serious illness and will be unable to perform any actions. On the second day, they will be seized with a great fever, a sharp pain, and various diseases. They may also become seized by nonhuman beings who will eventually bring about their death. On the third day, [if the rite is performed] at the three junctions, all of them will, without exception, lose their lives. To bring them back to life, one should offer oblations of milk. This will pacify the suffering. F.280.aF.297.a All the people in the area and all the enemies will become well again. {52.18}
“Similarly, one can perform this rite for any target by stepping upon the deity or spirit that the target is a devotee of. This deity should be represented by its mantra or nakṣatra,[2617] upon which one should step with one’s left foot and perform the rite. The exceptions are the vidyās who are tathāgatas, over whom one should never step or stand astride but perform the rite, for all of them, holding them between one’s big toes. It is only the worldly mantra deities that one can step upon. {52.19}
“Even if the mantra of Lord of Wrath has not been fully mastered, it can still accomplish the [intended] activities by merely being recited. With it, one can obliterate all [other] mantras, slay all one’s enemies, and destroy all the magical diagrams and devices.[2618] In short, whatever this mantra is employed to do, it will accomplish all of it regardless of whether it is a mundane or supramundane mantra ritual. The mantra will accomplish it all.[2619] Through merely reciting it, all hopes will be fulfilled. Accomplished through recitation, Lord of Wrath will subsequently grant the supreme accomplishment. The practitioner will destroy his enemies by merely wishing to do so. If employed in combination with the great spear mudrā, the mantra will accomplish all activities. {52.20}
“There is also another rite. One should go at midday to a charnel ground, fast for one night—the fourteenth of the dark fortnight—at a cremation spot, light a fire there using charnel ground wood, and offer into the fire oblations of brown mustard smeared with poison and blood. Subsequently, all the pretas will arrive, making the sound hā hā. One must not be afraid, but say, ‘Please kill my enemies!’ They will reply, ‘So be it!’ and disappear. Then, traveling one thousand leagues in a mere instant, they will kill the enemies and ruin their families. They will carry out these and similar acts. {52.21}
“There is also another rite. In a secluded and clean area, wearing clean clothes, F.280.bF.297.b one should enter an abandoned house and offer one thousand and eight oblations of cotton[2620] seeds.[2621] One should then scoop the [sacrificial] ashes with both hands, wrap them in clean cloth in two separate bundles, and seal them in a double clay bowl. Ritually protected, one should then take the [sealed] contents out of the house[2622] and go at night—either the fourteenth or the eighth of the dark fortnight—to a big charnel ground. Standing at a cremation spot with one’s face toward the south, naked and with loose hair, one should hold the sealed vessel and recite the mantra, angry and fearless, ten thousand times. The ashes will thus become empowered. {52.22}
“Should any nonhuman being then request a power substance, one should not give it, but apply force, recollecting Lord of Wrath and employing his syllable hūṁ. [The spirit] will die that very instant.[2623] This method is in particular for all the vighnas. One should make an ash mark with the ashes held in the left or the right hand.[2624]{52.23}
“Having performed the protection [rite] with care, one should return [to the abandoned house] before dawn. At sunrise, one should wash oneself and, when clean, put on clean clothes and go to one’s own house or a place of one’s choice. {52.24}
“Then, if one takes the ashes with one’s right hand and throws them at the head of any male being, whether two-legged or four-legged—a man, a god, a nāga, or a yakṣa—he will become enthralled. If one takes the ashes with one’s left hand and throws them at the head of any female being, whether human or nonhuman,[2625] she will become enthralled. {52.25}
“If one takes the ashes with one’s right hand and strikes with them a man around the navel, he will become a eunuch. Or, if one sprinkles the ashes onto his private parts, he will not be able to have sex. {52.26}
“If one sprinkles some ash onto the private part of the woman that one is fond of, she will not be able to have sex with another man. F.281.aF.298.a She will be free from lesions, but whenever she returns to the other man again, the lesions will clearly manifest.[2626] She will thus be unable to indulge in her inappropriate passion. {52.27}
“Likewise, if one sprinkles the ash onto a man’s penis with one’s right hand, he will be not be able to have sex when frequenting the wives of others. His penis will be as if completely withered.[2627] The erection, however, will return when he submits to the will of whoever administered the ashes.[2628] Whoever administers the ashes, whether it is a woman to a man or the other way around, the recipient will come under his or her power. According to their wish, the recipient will either remain or not remain under their control. {52.28}
“If the ashes are administered to men who rape their partner, their private parts will become infested with worms, eaten by which they will lose their lives. Within one month their bodies will fester, smelling foul and looking like corpses. They will contract male diseases, such as the ‘great discharge’[2629] and so forth. They will develop cancer, and when they do, the torment of it will kill them. Or, if this is the wish of the person who administers the ashes, they will just be unable to enjoy anything.[2630] One can make all this happen with a mere touch, if one wants to.[2631]{52.29}
“If one cannot physically touch the target, one should stand within the range of sight, [and if this is not possible], outside the range of sight, and cast the ashes with the wind, so that some of it settles on the target. The dispenser should thus cast the ashes making a wish. Whatever acts he thinks of, he will realize all of them, whether by his own or somebody else’s hand. All of them will come to pass according to his wish, and not otherwise.[2632]{52.30}
“One can also sprinkle the ashes onto beds, seats, and so on; spreads, covers, and so on; different types of adornments, different clothes, riding animals, vehicles, shoes, parasols, and so on; any types of tools; F.281.bF.298.b all the things necessary for the body; cooked and uncooked food and drink; crockery and cutlery;[2633] or flowers, betel, fruit, perfume, incense, and so on. If one besprinkles any of these, the body of the enemy will become infested with and bitten by lice, fleas, and worms all over.[2634] He will be smitten by suffering of different kinds and will die within seven nights.[2635] Neither physicians nor gods will be able to stop it. No mantras will be able to protect him and nobody will be able to help, except for the one who administered the ashes. {52.31}
“The following is the remedial procedure. One should blend together licorice root, blue lotus, and white sandalwood. One should mash these ingredients together with cool water and smear [the paste on the target’s body], starting from the head and ending with the soles of the feet, while reciting the mantra of Noble Mañjuśrī. The target will become well again. {52.32}
“There is also another rite.[2636] One should employ it only against all the wicked witches, swollen with pride, and no other women. Having gone upwind from the woman intended as the target, one should cast the ashes toward her with the wind. If one does the corresponding visualization,[2637] her vagina and breasts will completely disappear. If the same is done to a man, he will lose his male organ and his facial and bodily hair and develop breasts.[2638] In this way, one may perform, or have someone else perform, many different and unusual[2639] acts. One may engage for this purpose someone whom one likes, either a woman or a man. {52.33}
“Alternatively, one may pass on the ashes to and engage in the desired [task] an accomplice that one does not like.[2640] If one duly instructs him in the procedure, the target will be seized, accordingly, by a serious illness or other disorder. Touching[2641] the head in combination with the appropriate visualization[2642] causes [the target] to develop a severe headache. F.282.aF.299.a Touching the mouth will cause an inflammation of the mouth. Following in this order, the target may develop an acute chest pain or stomachache. Similarly, touching the legs and the feet will result in [the legs and feet of the target] developing blood-related diseases, when the blood goes bad. {52.34}
“In short, one can cause death, loss of vitality, or inflammation with suppuration. One can also summon or enthrall the target.[2643] Whatever [the ashes] are employed for, all of that will be accomplished. One can bring harm upon, summon, or enthrall the target, even if one is far away. {52.35}
“One should go next to a wall that is difficult to breach and, standing upwind, cast the ashes held in both hands. The wall, the main gateway, and the watchtower will crumble. The residence that will subsequently come into view will go up in flames, and the defending army will be routed.[2644] Plagued by great calamities, the target will either flee, leaving everything behind, or will give himself up as prisoner. {52.36}
“Similarly, if one throws the ashes with the wind at the enemy forces, even a powerful army will be defeated. It will be seized with a great febrility or fever and its elephants, horses, chariots, banners, and so forth, including the general, will be destroyed or taken prisoner. {52.37}
“One can thus perform many different rites as necessary, whether they are to destroy the enemy or afford protection for oneself, one’s own army, and one’s allies. To completely undo the harm ever inflicted on any target,[2645] one should offer one thousand oblations of milk in front of the painting. They will again become strong and well. {52.38}
“The mantra of Naṭikā[2647] is:
“OṁNaṭī, great Naṭī! Come, come in your divine form! Svāhā!’[2648]
“One should draw this vidyā on a slab or a tablet and recite her mantra one thousand and eight times while living on a diet of meat or milk. She should be drawn adorned with all the ornaments, of pure dark complexion, next to a tree.[2649] She wears a single garment,[2650] has loose hair and red eyes, and is smiling a little. She displays the threatening mudrā toward the practitioner with her right hand and holds on to a branch of the tree with the left. All her limbs are adorned, and she is wearing a brightly colored, silken sash. {52.40}
“One should position oneself before the painting of the same Lord of Wrath, alert in mind and facing north, and light a fire of dhak sticks. One should offer into it, at the three junctions of the day for seven days, one thousand and eight bdellium pills smeared with curds, honey, and ghee. One the seventh day, one should make an extensive bali offering, lighting butter lamps and reciting the mantra until midnight. The yakṣiṇī will then arrive in person in her own form, effulgent with great light. {52.41}
“When she arrives, she will say, ‘What can I do for you?’ The practitioner should reply, ‘Be my wife.’ She will then say, ‘So be it!’ and will disappear. From then on, she will be the practitioner’s wife. She will grant his every wish and take him to her abode. He will obtain there an elixir of long life, and upon drinking it he will obtain a divine form, equal to the great yakṣa.[2651] If she does not arrive, the second time one should include in the recitation [the mantra of] Lord of Wrath, and she will certainly come. If not, she will wither and die.[2652]{52.42}
“The mantra of Naṭṭā is:
“Oṁ Naṭṭā! F.283.aF.300.a Wearing white garments and garlands, and fond of sex! Svāhā![2653]
“Her ritual procedure is the same as the previous. {52.43}
“The mantra of Bhaṭṭā is:
“Oṁ Bhaṭṭā, Bhaṭṭā! Splendorous one, why do you tarry? Come, come! Arrive, arrive! Do my bidding! Svāhā![2654]
“Her rite can be accomplished even without the painting. One should draw a maṇḍala in a prominent spot[2655] and recite her mantra one thousand and eight times while burning an incense of bdellium. If one does this without engaging in talk, alone, pure, and behind closed doors, she will certainly arrive within one month, at nighttime. {52.44}
“When she arrives, the practitioner should make love to her, and she will become his wife who grants every wish. If he enters her house, he will live five thousand years. If not, he will stay in Jambūdvīpa and live five hundred years, playing with her. She will carry out his every command. She will go with him, wherever he wishes. She will procure for him the elixir of longevity, and, just as a beloved wife does, will act with the best of intentions. {52.45}
“The mantra of Revatī is, ‘Homage to all the yakṣiṇīs!’ [The mantra to recite is]:
“Oṁ, red one with a red glow and wearing red unguents! Svāhā![2656]
“Her painting should be done as before, except that Revatī is wearing garments of red silk, including an upper garment of the same material. Her complexion has a reddish glow. {52.48}
“The mantra of Mekhalā is:
“Oṁ Mekhalā! Great yakṣiṇī! Please do my bidding! Svāha![2657]{52.49}
“The mantra of Sumekhalā is:
“Oṁ Mekhalā, Sumekhalā! Great yakṣiṇī who fulfills every purpose, hūṁ! Remember your samaya! Svāha![2658]{52.50}
“The mantra of Ālokinī is:
“Oṁ Lokinī! Lokavatī![2659]Svāhā![2660]F.283.bF.300.b
“The ritual procedure of the [last three] yakṣiṇīs is the same as before. {52.51}
“The mantra of Tamasundarī is:
“Oṁ ghuṇu![2661]Ghuṇu, ghuṇu, O secret one! Come, come, O guhyakī! Svāhā![2662]
“As for her practice, no painting of her is prescribed. One should start during a full moon, wearing clean clothes and being clean oneself, in a secluded place….[2663] One should firmly shut the door and recite her vidyā ten thousand times in complete and utter darkness. This constitutes the preliminary practice. {52.52}
“Afterward, one should begin the formal practice. One should start during a full moon and perform the rite until the next full moon, doing it alone at night in an isolated and hidden place, when it is time to sleep and one is in bed with the door closed, in complete and utter darkness. One should blend closed lotus buds and vānapuṣpa[2664] with white mustard oil and rub it onto one’s hands and feet. One should incant the right arm[2665] one hundred and eight times and go to sleep in silence.[2666] If one does this every day until the next full moon, then Tamasundarī will arrive for certain at midnight. {52.53}
“When she arrives, one should not engage her in conversation but make love to her in silence. If, within six months, she starts conversing, one should join in. From then on she will be an accomplished object of the practice, becoming one’s wife who grants every desire and whose soft touch gives divine pleasure. She will perform all tasks even when she is out of sight and will also procure the essential elixir of longevity. {52.54}
“Taking the practitioner upon her back, she will carry him even to the top of Mount Sumeru. At night, she will take him all the way around Jambūdvīpa. She will crush one’s enemies, even at a distance of one hundred leagues. Whatever she is ordered to do will turn out well, except for sexual advances on other women. This rule applies to all the yakṣiṇīs. One must not approach other women but cohabit only with them. If one goes to other women, they will cause death or insanity.[2667]{52.55}F.284.aF.301.a
“This yakṣiṇī,[2668] [also] called Andhārasundarī,[2669] is surrounded by many hundreds[2670] of thousands of yakṣiṇīs. When accomplished as an object of practice by any practitioner, she dispatches, every single day, one yakṣiṇī-servant for each of them. She has a retinue of many ministers, all of them yakṣiṇīs, among whom she is distinguished by her great miraculous power and her cover of darkness. As the ritual procedure is the same for all of them,[2671] could one see any of them? It is not possible to see her. {52.56}
“The mantra of Guhāvāsinī is:
“OṁGuhilā, Guhāmati,[2674] Guhāvāsinī! Please come, O blessed one, close to me! Remember your samaya! Svāhā![2675]
“One should light a fire with sticks of cutch wood and offer into it, at the three junctions of the day for one month, one thousand and eight oblations of beautyberry flowers smeared with ghee. This constitutes the preliminary practice. {52.62}
“Afterward, one should begin the formal practice. Using uncontaminated paints, a new brush, and a new paint container, one should first draw the king of mountains, Mount Sumeru, either on a tablet, or a piece of cloth, or a wall. It has four slopes and four lofty peaks and is surrounded by a range of seven mountains. At the outer edge of these mountains, one should draw a cave that is situated in a mountainside. {52.63}F.284.bF.301.b
“In there, one should draw a single, divinely beautiful yakṣiṇī called Guhāvāsinī,[2676] adorned with all the ornaments and wearing lower and upper garments of fine silk. She has a golden complexion and a strikingly beautiful form. One should draw the painting like that and recite the vidyā [of Guhāvāsinī] ten thousand times, staying in a clean place, oneself clean and living off a diet of milk. One should offer a large pūjā, or one according to one’s means. Then, at the end of recitation, the yakṣiṇī will arrive in person, in her divinely beautiful form, effulgent with great light. {52.64}
“When she has arrived, one should give her a welcome offering of water mixed with white sandalwood and jasmine flowers. She will say, ‘Child, what can I do for you?’ One should say, ‘Please be my mother.’ She will reply, ‘So be it!’ and will disappear. One must not hurt her feelings and not request anything that is tainted with sensuality. She is noble and very dignified, so if one requests sensual pleasures one will not succeed.[2677] From then on, she will perform all the duties like a mother. {52.65}
“She will also provide food and clothes to one hundred and eight people from one’s retinue. She will protect one in difficult situations. She will carry out all her duties, even if one were staying in a deep forest or on the top of a mountain. She will provide one’s favorite food and all other things, such as the essential elixir of life and so forth. Complying with one’s wishes, whatever they are, she will magically create a monk’s hut, a family house, or another shelter. Every single day she will give one thousand pieces of gold, which must all be spent that very day. If one does not spend it all, it will be cut back. If one keeps it all, none will remain.[2678]{52.66}
“There is also another rite of Guhāvāsinī. One should light a fire in front of the same painting with sticks of cutch wood [and bring it to the stage where] the embers emit no flames or smoke. Using red arsenic, one should draw on the palm of one’s right hand F.285.aF.302.a the image and the name of a man or, if it is a woman, on the palm of one’s left hand, and heat it over the same heap of embers while reciting the mantra. Guhāvāsinī will summon them even from the distance of one hundred leagues and will compel them to do everything that was asked. This rite should be performed at night, not during the day. {52.67}
“The mantra of Naravīrā is:
“Oṁ Naravīrā! Svāhā![2679]
“Her painting should be executed exactly the same as [the painting of Guhāvāsinī], except for the cave dwelling. Instead, Naravīrā should be drawn next to an aśoka tree. The entire ritual is just like that of Guhāvāsinī, except that Naravīrā should be addressed, ‘Please be my sister!’ {52.68}
“There is also another rite of Naravīrā. During a lunar eclipse, one should wrap some red ocher in a piece of birch bark, put it in one’s mouth, and recite the mantra until the moon comes out of eclipse.[2680] Then, whichever woman’s[2681] name one writes with this ocher, Naravīrā will summon her even from a distance of one hundred leagues, and in the morning she will take her back to her original place. She will do everything just as a sister would. In the event of disasters, she will offer great protection. One can enthrall any woman by merely reciting the mantra. This is the rite of Naravīrā. {52.69}
“The mantra of Yakṣakumārī is:
“Oṁ Yakṣakumārī![2682]Svāhā![2683]
“Her practice is as follows. She should be drawn on a piece of birch bark, using bovine bezoar, as a young girl with slightly curly hair, adorned with all the ornaments, and wearing a single piece of clothing.[2684] In her right hand she is holding a fruit filled with seeds, and with the other she is holding onto a branch of an aśoka tree. {52.70}
“One should place this piece of birch bark above the place where one’s head is going to be and sleep alone in a hidden place. One should draw a maṇḍala with white sandalwood paste and, at the three junctions of the day, bestrew it with jasmine flowers, burn an incense of bdellium, and recite the vidyā one thousand and eight times. F.285.bF.302.b One should do this for a period of one month. {52.71}
“Then, during the full moon, one should prepare a large pūjā with jasmine flowers and offer butter lamps and food articles. At nighttime, sitting on a bundle of kuśa grass, one should recite the mantra until Kumārī,[2685] the daughter of Vaiśravaṇa, arrives in her usual form along with a retinue of five hundred. Drawing one’s attention to the entire region [of the sky], she will remain naturally suspended in midair. She will ask, ‘What can I do for you?’ The practitioner should then request from her one of the three boons—that she either be his mother, sister, or wife. {52.72}
“If she becomes one’s mother, one must not hurt her feelings. If one does, ruin will follow. One must treat her like a mother,[2686] and she, the mother, will fully provide an assortment of foodstuffs, clothes, and adornments for oneself and a retinue of five hundred, if these things are merely wished for. Every day, she will give one thousand dinars. She will provide everything for as long as one is living here in Jambūdvīpa. {52.73}
“If she becomes one’s sister, she will summon a woman [for the practitioner], even from a distance of one hundred leagues, and then take her back[2687] to her original place. She will perform all the duties like a sister. If she becomes a wife, she will take the practitioner to her own house, where one will live for one thousand celestial years. After one dies, one will be reborn in a wealthy family. Like a wife, she will carry out every order. {52.74}
“The mantra of Vadhūyakṣiṇī is:
“Oṁ niḥ.
“She is a wife-yakṣiṇī, and her rite is as follows. One should anoint one’s right arm with white sandalwood and the left one with saffron, and incant them with the mantra one thousand times. At nighttime, in a hidden place, alone and silent, one should firmly shut the door, throw into sesame oil five or F.286.aF.303.a eight beleric myrobalan fruits, and cook them. {52.75}
“Discarding the myrobalan fruits, one should take the oil and put it in a new vessel made of gold, silver, copper, or clay, and place it on the bed where the feet are. One should incant the oil one thousand times with the one-syllable yakṣiṇī mantra and go to sleep in the same bed, placed in a dark, secluded place and strewn with flowers. {52.76}
“When the nonhuman lady arrives, she will anoint one’s feet [with the incanted oil]. Upon being touched with the palm of her lotus-like hand whose touch gives divine pleasure, one will experience, through this pleasurable touch, a divinely blissful sleep. When the sun rises at the end of the night, one will wake up with unease, and even when awake, one will keep thinking about her. However, one should not make love to her or engage her in conversation. Within six months, she will be accomplished as an object of practice. {52.77}
“After the six months have passed, she will arrive in her beautiful form, excited like a newly wedded wife, surrounded by a retinue of servants, with a lamp in her hand and splendid with her own radiance.[2688] She will snuggle in the bed or a seat, her colorful adornments blazing forth, and will start a conversation. She will approach holding the implements of sexual enjoyment and will embrace the practitioner around the neck. {52.78}
“From then on, she will follow him like a beloved wife. When she arrives, one should make love to her. She will keep one’s company through the night and disappear in the morning, leaving behind on the bed a pearl necklace worth one thousand pieces of gold. Every day, she will leave it behind and then depart. One must spend absolutely all of it. If one keeps any of it, no more will come. One must not tell anyone. If one does, one will get no more, F.286.bF.303.b or else one will incur some adversity that will end in one’s death. This is because these yakṣiṇīs are exceedingly secretive[2689] and discreet, and they will not tolerate another person being told about them. {52.79}
“One must not tell even one’s mother, father, friend, supervisor, or relative, not even a pet or another animal, as this is most secret. This rule[2690] applies to all the guhyakas and all the yakṣiṇīs. Even if they have been accomplished as an object of practice, they will cease to be so if one divulges the secret. Also, one must never approach other women for sex, not even one’s wife. {52.80}
“The mantra of Manojñā is:
“Oṁ, you captivate the mind! You intoxicate and drive one insane! You are stunningly beautiful and fond of sex. Svāhā![2691]
“Her practice is as follows. One should build a secluded hut within a garden enclosure, below an aśoka tree. It should be well hidden and have a high wall with a paneled, bolted door. Maintaining purity, one should recite the mantra one hundred thousand times. {52.81}
“Afterward, one should perform the ritual. One should procure human fat, make a wick out of a textile from a charnel ground, firmly shut the door, and light a lamp. One should place a cloth that is hemmed, is brand new, and does not have any loose fibers on the outside of the door. At night, when Manojñā arrives naked, she will dress in this cloth and enter the hut, assuming the form of a female human. The practitioner will then enjoy sex with her for as long as the lamp is burning. {52.82}
“When the lamp burns out, Manojñā will disappear. She will leave the bed, leaving behind the cloth [that she wore] with a piece of gold tied in it. At that time one should grasp her by the hand. She will walk away, letting the rings slip off her fingers one by one. If one grasps [her] by the neck, she will relinquish her pearl necklace; if by the arm, she will let her arm bracelet slip off; if by the hips, her girdle; if by the feet, her anklets; and if by the head, her diadem. In this way, wherever one grasps her, from that place she will give a divine ornament, one after another.[2692]{52.83}
“Her departures and her arrivals are thus not without gain. F.287.aF.304.a As before, one must spend it all each day, so that there is nothing left. When six months have passed in this way, she will start talking. One should then join the conversation and she will become one’s wife. Ever present, she will procure the elixir of longevity, drinking which one will live long. If one drives a stake of cutch wood into the ground while performing the relevant visualization, a divine palace will appear. When the stake is pulled out, it will disappear. {52.84}
“The second mantra of Manojñā is:
“Oṁ, O great naked one! You were born naked! Svāhā![2693]
“One should light a lamp made of exactly the same components as before and incant the lamp one hundred and eight times, thus compelling [Manojñā] to act. She will certainly arrive. Alternatively, one can incant a stake and drive it into the ground. When the stake is then pulled out, or when the lamp has burnt out, she will disappear. One may also take [the accessories]—the stake; the human fat in a horn of a cow, a gaur, or a buffalo; and the wick made of a charnel-ground rag—somewhere else, where one can do the rite oneself or give [the accessories] to a person of one’s choice. However, one must not pass on the mantra. If one does, one will nullify its magical power. {52.85}
“Whoever one gives [this paraphernalia] to, everything will turn out for them exactly the same way. Whatever the desired outcome, whatever the hidden location where the rite is performed, the accomplishment will not be in vain. Moreover, one can have other men experience the joy of sex, but should not discuss it with them. Because of the power of the practitioner, the compliant [Manojñā] will approach a new partner to her liking, who is longing to see other women.[2694]{52.86}
“The mantra of Surasundarī is:
“Oṁ Surasundarī! Svāhā![2695]
“Her practice is as follows. One should light a fire with sticks of cutch wood and offer into it one thousand and eight oblations of ghee at the three junctions of the day, for a period of one month. Then, during the full moon, one should sit on a bundle of kuśa grass in a clean, secluded place, and, oneself pure, recite the mantra until midnight, and she will certainly come. F.287.bF.304.b Then, one should carry out everything exactly as before, choosing her as one’s mother, sister, or wife, and saying everything just as before. {52.87}
“The mantra of Padmoccā is:
“Oṁ Padmoccā! Svāhā![2712]
“Her practice is as follows. One should build a hut on the banks of the Gaṅgā, in the ocean shore, or in a flower garden. The hut and oneself should be clean. Using clay, one should make a form shaped like a stone slab[2713] and firmly shut the door. One should collect all the requisites for making love and prepare a bed for the yakṣiṇī next to one’s own. One should then recite her vidyā ten thousand times. {52.107}F.288.bF.305.b
“If one continues in this manner, she will certainly arrive within one month. When she does, one should make love to her and she will become one’s wife.[2714] She will leave in the morning, leaving behind a celestial pearl necklace. And so it will be every day, until, within six months, she will remain permanently. One must not hold on to that pearl necklace. If one does, this will be the only thing one will ever get.[2715] This necklace, adorned with jewels and gems, is worth one hundred thousand dinars. {52.108}
“After six months have passed, Padmoccā will remain permanently as a wife who fulfills all desires. Whatever form one wants her to assume, she will attend upon one in that form. She will magically transform herself into the form that is pleasing to the practitioner, according to his wish. This procedure applies to all the yakṣiṇīs. The instructions given for the yakṣiṇīs here apply also to other yakṣiṇīs. {52.109}
“The mantra of Jayā is:
“OṁJayā, auspicious Jayā, one who is victorious! Perform all the tasks for me! Svāhā![2716]
“Her practice is as follows. First, one should recite her mantra one hundred thousand times; this constitutes the preliminary service. Then, one should go to a large forest and, living on fruits, recite her mantra until Jayā arrives in person. When she does, she will ask, ‘What can I do for you?’ If she becomes one’s mother, she will, like a mother, fulfill one’s every wish. She will grant a kingdom, make one the owner of great wealth, and ensure that one lives a long life. {52.112}
“If she becomes one’s sister, F.289.aF.306.a she will summon a woman as desired even from a distance of one thousand leagues. Every single day she will give one hundred thousand dinars. One must spend all of this. If she becomes one’s wife, she will take one to her own abode. Living in a celestial palace, one will engage in a delightful play with her for a long time. For thirty thousand years, one will do whatever one likes, equal to the great yakṣa.[2719]{52.113}
“The mantra of Pramodā is:
“Oṁ ṣṭhrīḥ hrīḥ! O great nude! Hūṁ, phaṭ, svāhā![2720]
“Her practice is as follows. One should recite her mantra at midnight without counting. If one does not go back to sleep, Pramodā will certainly arrive within one month. She will become a wife who fulfills every desire. Every single day she will provide twenty-five dinars and offer sexual delights personally. In addition, she will ensure long life for the practitioner. {52.114}
“There are uncountable hundreds of thousands of yakṣiṇīs. So, too, there are innumerable piśācīs of great power,[2721]nāga girls, asura girls, apsarases, girls of the lower celestial (sura) orders, and daitya girls. The same is true for the vidyādharīs and all the human and nonhuman females. All of them without exception have their respective mantras, which are likewise innumerable. In the same way there are mantras of the male yakṣas, gods, nāgas, ṛṣis, gandharvas, asuras, pretas, and rākṣasas; of Mahābrahmā, Maheśvara, and Viṣṇu; and also of the mātṛs, headed by Indrāṇī, Cāmuṇḍā, and Vārāhī. All these beings have been individually summoned here on this occasion. They have been brought here by Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka, seized[2722] by him, established in the samaya, and thus made subordinate to Mañjughoṣa. They stand here in the right order as his retinue and attendants. {52.115}
“[The rite] for each of them, F.289.bF.306.b in short, is as follows. One should recite the Lord of Wrath[2723] Yamāntaka—either in a place where there is an image or having made such an image oneself[2724]—until the image shakes and then moves or starts perspiring. Then [the being portrayed in the image] will arrive in its own form and will do everything it is asked to. {52.116}
“In the same way, one can [practice] also the ‘four virgins.’ These great yakṣiṇīs, who have Tumburu as their brother, live, in their celestial forms,[2725] upon the ocean aboard a boat. They practice kindness to beings and are worshiped by the whole world. The same procedure[2726] may be used also for them, namely, {52.117}
“Homage to all the buddhas who arise out of the absence of the independent existence of entities! Homage to the pratyekabuddhas and the noble śrāvakas! Homage to the bodhisattvas, the lords established on the ten levels, the great beings! This is the mantra proper: {52.145}
“Oṁ, kha kha! Devour, devour! O tamer of evil beings, with a sword, a club, a noose, and an axe in your hands! One with four arms, four faces, and six feet, go, go! O great destroyer of obstacles with a contorted face, inspiring fear in all nonhuman beings! You who roar with wild laughter and wear a tiger skin, perform, perform all tasks! Cut, cut all the mantras [of non-believers]! Break, break the mudrās of non-believers! Draw here, draw all nonhuman beings! Grind, grind all the wicked ones! Cause them to enter into the center of the maṇḍala! O terminator of the life of Vaivasvata, perform, perform tasks for me! Burn, burn! Cook, cook! Do not delay, do not delay! Remember your samaya pledge! Hūṁ hūṁ! Phaṭ phaṭ! Split, split! Fulfiller of all wishes! O blessed one, why do you tarry? Please accomplish all my aims! Svāhā![2749]{52.146} [S578]
“Friends, and you, all the hosts of gods! This [mantra] called Yamāntaka, Great Lord of Wrath, will summon, crush, dry up, cook, and tame even the king Yama. It will likewise summon all the mantra deities and all the gods, not to mention human beings afflicted with suffering. It will summon even the bodhisattvas established on the ten levels, let alone [the deities of] worldly mantras. {52.147}
“The power and strength of the Lord of Wrath is thus immeasurable. He can perform all the activities of all the mantras, whatever are taught in all the mantra systems. Once he is mastered by reciting, he will accomplish whatever he is employed to do.”
This completes [the section on] the lord of wrath named Yamāntaka. {52.148}
This concludes the fifty-second[2750] chapter, which is the detailed third chapter with the ritual prescriptions pertaining to Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka, from “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings. This also concludes [the section on] the ritual of Lord of Wrath Yamāntaka. Homage to the Buddha!Chapter 53
Blessed Śākyamuni, having now emerged from his samādhi,[2751] continued to teach the Dharma to the assembly that resembled a great ocean. There, sitting in front of all the [assembled] beings and hosts of spirits, were uncountable thousands of bodhisattvas, headed by Vajrapāṇi; uncountable thousands of arhats, headed by Śāriputra; innumerable gods devoted to the four great kings, headed by Vaiśravaṇa; innumerable gods from the realm of the Thirty-Three, headed by Śakra; as well as innumerable gods from the realms of Suyāma, Tuṣita, Nirmāṇarati, Paranirmita, Vaśavartin, Brahmakāyika, Brahmapurohita, Mahābrahmā, Parīttābha, Apramāṇa, Ābhāsvara, and so forth, until Puṇyaprasava, Bṛhatphala, Avṛha, Atapas, and Akaniṣṭha. The Blessed One addressed them as follows: {53.1}
“Listen, venerable hosts of gods, and all of you bodhisattvas and noble śrāvakas!
… And so forth, repeating in full the deeds of all the kings.[3300]{53.920}
“The supreme sage taught to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, the stories of his former births, the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtrahttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh119.htmlhttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh120.htmlhttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh121.html,[3301]
Chapter 54
Directing his gaze again at the realm of the Pure Abode, the blessed Śākyamuni said this to Mañjuśrī, the divine youth: {54.1}
“Wherever, Mañjuśrī, this Dharma discourse is disseminated, you should know that I am present there myself, surrounded by the hosts of all the bodhisattvas, taking the place of honor among the congregation of śrāvakas, and attended upon by a retinue of all the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, garuḍas, gandharvas, kinnaras, mahoragas, siddhas, vidyādharas, and other nonhuman and human beings. The Tathāgata resides there for the sake of protecting, sheltering, and defending. {54.2}
“One should know, Mañjuśrī, divine youth, about the ten advantages obtained in any place where this Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas is written down in the form of a book, read aloud,F.327.bF.344.b memorized, or respectfully and sincerely worshiped with various implements such as yak-tail whisks, streamers, parasols, banners, flags, bells, music, garlands, scented oils, incense, or pleasant fragrances. These ten advantages are obtained in any place where this Dharma treasury is revered, reflected upon, or focused upon with an undivided mind. What are these ten?{54.3}[3304]
“There will be (1) no danger in that [place] of military invasions or hunger; (2) no pestilence caused by Mahāmārī or other dangers from nonhuman beings; (3) no danger of fire or anything untoward; (4) no danger of drought or excessive rains; (5) no danger of hurricanes, tornadoes, or kravyādas; (6) no danger from Śakra or any rogues or robbers; (7) no danger of untimely death or fear caused by King Yama; (8) no danger from asuras or any gods,nāgas,yakṣas, or gandharvas; (9) no danger from mantras, venoms, or poisons; and (10) no danger of disease, fever, dysentery, indigestion, or other danger to body or limb.[3305] One should know that these ten benefits occur wherever this Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas,
contained in this great extensive manual, is kept in the form of a book.F.328.aF.345.a Let us therefore write it down, read it aloud, worship it, memorize it, and rehearse it.[3306]{54.4}
“This Dharma treasury of the tathāgatas is extremely occult, as it depends in every respect on the mantras.[3307] It must not be taught to those who have not received the samaya from the master[3308] or those who do not understand the samaya. Why is this? This is because it is secret; it is an occult teaching. It is a teaching [arising from] omniscience. No beings should ever reject or take it lightly.[3309]{54.5}
“If [those who received it] do not worship [this Dharma treasury] and treat it with respect, they will incur a lot of negativity. One must not disclose it to others, as they could commit negative acts, such as suppressing the secret [practices], killing sentient beings, reporting [you] to the king, shortening lives, or causing other misfortunes.[3310] It can only be disclosed to beings who have taken up the secret practice of mantras and keep their samaya secret—to beings who are well established and trained in the study and practice of the Tathāgata’s instructions, who have good knowledge of the meaning of the Dharma, who keep their samaya concerning the sense bases and psychophysical elements,[3311] and who live by the Dharma and are thus true to their promises, firm in their observances, have entered the path of good conduct, and are compassionate.
It can be disclosed only to them and not to others.”{54.6}
The bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, rose from his seat, draped his robe over one shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, and asked the Blessed One with folded hands, “What is this Dharma discourse really,[3312] O Blessed One? What should I remember it as?”
The Blessed One replied: {54.7}
“You should remember it as a basket of bodhisattva teachings, the thundering roar of all the buddhas and bodhisattvas.
“You should remember it as a text that contains the marvelous and wondrous Dharma instructions. F.328.bF.345.b
“You should remember it as the bodhisattvas’ instructions for taking up all the practices of the ‘mantra basket.’[3313]
“You should remember it as an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra with marvelous instructions.[3314]
“You should remember it as the root manual of Noble Mañjuśrī.
“You should remember it as the instructions that fulfill all the aims of the Dharma. {54.8}
“ ‘Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisattvas who are perfect teachers!
“ ‘Oṁ, kill, kill all those that pose danger! Destroy and annihilate them! Make them afraid! Crush, chop, and break them! Burn them, burn! Huṁ huṁ, phaṭ phaṭ, svāhā!’[3340]{54.64}
“As soon as this mantra was pronounced by the great being, the divine youth Mañjuśrī, the earth with its mountains and oceans, up to its farthest reaches, shook in six different ways, and so did all the infinite buddhafields and world spheres up to their farthest limits. All the blessed buddhas empowered the words of the mantra. {54.65}
“Śakra, the lord of gods, his fear gone and body hair bristling, struck with amazement and wonder, his eyes wide open, rose from his seat, bowed down to the feet of the Blessed One, and circumambulated him clockwise three times. Then, turning to and looking at the divine youth Mañjuśrī, he grasped and kept in his mind the words of the mantra. He mounted his chariot and rode to where all the asuras were. Confronted by him in their subterranean paradise, in their capital city that the ocean rests upon, they all attacked. However, seeing the lord of gods blazing like fire, the asuras became smitten and dazed in their minds,F.331.aF.348.a and their armies were struck with fear. They now grew weak and despondent, their haughty expressions changed, and they lost their weapons. They turned back and retreated to their own abodes.[3341]{54.66}
“Śakra, the lord of gods, then addressed the gods in the realm of the Thirty-Three:
“ ‘Do not be afraid, friends, do not be afraid! We have defeated the asuras through the power of the Buddha. Now let us go home. Come, gentlemen! Having returned to your fine houses and abodes, each of you to his own, you can play, rejoice, and move around freely.’
“And so the gods, uplifted in their minds, turned around and went to their own abodes. {54.67}
“Śakra, the lord of gods, thought, ‘If I make an effigy in the form of the divine youth and mount it atop a banner, there will be no danger for me from the asuras.’ The lord of gods, with his great might, procured then a precious gem called Shining with the Inner Light,[3342] fashioned from it a figure in the form of the divine youth, firmly fixed it on top of a banner, and placed it in Sudharmā, the assembly hall of the gods, at the top of the palace in the middle of his great city Sudarśana. {54.68}
“From then on, the asuras, headed by Prahlāda and Vemacitri, stayed in their subterranean paradise. They did not travel upward, nor did they attack the gods. They were unable to work miracles or confront anyone in battle. This will last, in human reckoning,[3343] many hundreds of thousands of billions of years. Thus, there will now be no danger from the asuras. {54.69}
“This celebrated [Dharma treatise] is thus a boon of infinite qualities;[3344]F.331.bF.348.b it promotes long life and good health, as taught by the blessed buddhas and the great beings, the bodhisattvas in the past. It is full of excellent qualities and brings infinite benefits, without beginning and without end.[3345]{54.70}
“Anyone who contradicts this Dharma treatise, doubts it, or thoughtlessly steps over it will accumulate boundless nonvirtue. They will fall into one of the great hells or suffer the tribulations of birth in the animal realm or the Yama realm of the pretas. Those who claim that this Dharma treatise is not the word of the Buddha and that the mantras and the remedies in it do not come from the bodhisattvas, who deny the greatness of the bodhisattvas and their power to work miracles, who throw away or abandon this Dharma treatise claiming that it was originally taught by dishonorable people, they will proceed to the lower states of existence where they will be unable to understand this Dharma treatise or even hear it. When they depart from that state, they will have accumulated a great deal of nonvirtue, so it is said. {54.71}
The divine youth Mañjuśrī, the bodhisattva great being, now rose from his seat, draped his upper robe over his shoulder, placed his right knee on the ground, folded his hands,[3370] and, with wide open and unblinking eyes, knowing that all the gods who inhabit the Pure Abode and many orders of beings had assembled in order to hear the Dharma, said to Blessed Śākyamuni: {54.97}
“It is wonderful, O Blessed One, that you have presented this Dharma treatise so eloquently. In the future time, O Blessed One, it will come to pass that beings will be overcome by dangerous greed, their minds will be dominated by the five degenerations, they will lack faith, and they will be deceitful, unruly, and undisciplined.[3371] They will not believe in the greatness of the of the art of mantras, F.333.aF.350.a nor will they appreciate the necessity to observe the restrictions regarding the time and the place of worship. Nor will they believe in the elaborate rituals with their injunctions pertaining to the mantra conduct,[3372] homa offerings, or mantra recitation. Thinking that this is not the Buddha’s teaching, they will reject it. They will develop mental anguish and die. They will thus experience intense suffering and feel sharp and acute pain. They will end up in the great hells. When beings suffer like this, O Blessed One, how can this be remedied? The lord buddhas are very compassionate, after all.” {54.98}
The blessed Śākyamuni touched Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, on the head, and said, “Good it is, good indeed, that you, Mañjuśrī, are concerned about the welfare and the interests of all beings, and it is also good that you, Mañjuśrī, ask the Tathāgata about it. Listen well, then, and duly reflect upon what I will now tell you for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of all beings and to act kindly toward the world. There is, O divine youth, in your root manual with its detailed chapters, a most secret vidyārāja that should be remembered at the time of death by men and gods who strongly desire to take the final refuge in the supreme body of the dharmadhātu,[3373] thus taking the path to awakening that subsumes all mantra practices. So what is this vidyā? {54.99}
“Homage to all the worthy tathāgatas, the fully realized buddhas!
“Oṁ, the omnifarious form[3374] of the divine youth, come, come! Quick, quick! F.333.bF.350.bBhrūṃ bhrūṃ, hūṁ hūṁ![3375] O victorious Victor! Splendorous Mañjuśrī![3376] Deliver me from all suffering! Phaṭ phaṭ! Pacify, pacify! You who arise from and are the source of immortality,[3377] destroy my negativity, svāhā![3378]{54.100}
“This, Mañjuśrī, is your ultimate heart essence that makes everything peaceful, removes all negativity, and releases from all suffering. It brings long life, good health, vigor, supreme well-being, and increases the powers of speech. It also stirs up the goodness in all the vidyā kings.”[3379]
As soon as the blessed Buddha Śākyamuni pronounced this mantra, this great earth with all its mountains, oceans, and animate and inanimate things, up to its farthest reaches, shook in six different ways, and the sufferings of all the beings of the different classes—the pretas, the animals, and all the beings in the worlds of Yama[3380] —completely ceased.[3381]{54.101}
“This king of mantras, Mañjuśrī, should be kept in mind, so that, at that time,[3382] there will be no thought of giving up the sacred Dharma, the evil māras will not have any opportunity to cause harm, and all the vighnas and vināyakas will run away.
“The blessed buddhas will know my thoughts, if I should reflect, ‘What am I capable of? Will I accept or reject the inconceivable Dharma of the realization of the blessed buddhas?’ ”[3383]{54.102}
This concludes the detailed chapter about the consequences of praising or blaming [this Dharma manual], fifty-fourth[3384] in “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.[3385]When the Blessed One had finished teaching,F.334.aF.351.a the monks, the bodhisattvas, their retinues, and billions of other beings present above the Pure Abode[3386] such as gods,nāgas,yakṣas, gandharvas, asuras, garuḍas, kinnaras, mahoragas,siddhas, and vidyādharas; as well as many prominent ṛṣis and the great bodhisattva beings including the divine youth Mañjuśrī, Avalokiteśvara, Maitreya, Mahāsthānaprāpta,[3387] Vajrapāṇi, and so forth; the blessed buddhas with the retinues of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas who dwell in innumerable world systems and in the infinite sphere of phenomena; and the inconceivable buddhas dwelling in the sky-like nature and the bodhisattva great beings, were all very pleased and praised the Blessed One’s teaching.[3388]
This concludes “The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī,” presented as it was passed down.[3389]Colophon
By order of the glorious ruler and renunciant king Jangchub O, this text was translated, edited, and finalized by the great Indian preceptor and spiritual teacher Kumārakalaśa and the translator Lotsawa and monk Śākya Lodrö.[3390]
Notes
Two sets of folio references have been included in this translation due to a discrepancy in volume 88 (rgyud ’bum, na) of the Degé Kangyur between the 1737 par phud printings and the late (post par phud) printings. In the latter case, an extra work, Bodhimaṇḍasyālaṃkāralakṣadhāraṇī (Toh 508, byang chub snying po’i rgyan ’bum gyi gzungs), was added as the second text in the volume, thereby displacing the pagination of all the following texts in the same volume by 17 folios. Since the eKangyur follows the later printing, both references have been provided, with the highlighted one linking to the eKangyur viewer.
backbyang chub sems dpa’ ’dus pa’i ’khor gyi tshogs Tib. The word “pavilion” is missing from the Tibetan. The Sanskrit word maṇḍala, taken here to describe “pavilion” (cf. Edgerton 1970, maṇḍalamāḍa, p. 416), is translated in the Tibetan as tshogs (“assembly”) and refers to the “congregation of bodhisattvas.”
backde nas gnas gtsan ma’i ris kyi lha’i bu de dag gis thal mo sbyar ba btud nas/ bcom ldan ’das la legs so zhes gsol te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Thereupon, the divine sons of the Pure Abode, folding their hands and bowing, said, ‘Excellent!’ to the Blessed One.” This variant is also reflected in TMK.
backThe last clause starting from “thus makes the speech” belongs with the next sentence in TMK.
backThe translation of the name of this samādhi is unclear in both the Skt. and the Tib. It could also be translated as, one that destroys impairments/bad influences (vikaraṇa) with the light of the pure sphere.
backme tog kun tu skyed pa zhes bya ba dang / byang chub sems dpa’ yang dag par bskul ba zhes bya ba’i ’od phyung ste/ D. The Tibetan interprets this as two lights, one called me tog kun tu skyes pa zhes bya ba (saṃkusumita nāma) and one called byang chub sems dpa’ yang dag par bskul ba zhes bya ba (bodhisattvasaṃcodanī nāma). TMK is closer to the Skt.
backThe Tibetan contains a passage beginning here at D.106a.4 and continuing to D.106b.6 that occurs later in the Skt.
backThe page number 106.b comes later on, as this translation follows the Sanskrit text, where the order of passages differs from the Tibetan.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvatathāgatānām acintyāpratihataśāsanānāṃ oṁ ra ra smara | apratihataśāsana kumārarūpadhāriṇa hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backde bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyis gsungs la/ /gsung shing gsung bar ’gyur la/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It was, is, and will be recited by all of the tathāgatas.”
backSkt.: oṁ vākyedaṃ namaḥ.
backSkt.: vākye hūṁ.
back“One Syllable” possibly refers to the syllable maṁ in the mantra that will presently be given. It is capitalized as it refers equally to the mantra and the deity.
backsngags kyi spyod pa khyad par can bzang po yang dag par sgrub par byed pa D. The translation here is influenced by the Tibetan, which does not use the instrumental case for the phrase “special mantra practice.”
backTMK seems to equate sangs rgyas kyi dgongs pa (buddānām āśaya for buddhān bhagavataḥ samanvāhṛtavān) with rig sngags (“mantra”): “He uttered the mantra, the intent of the buddhas, with a mind of love.”
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhānām oṁ maṁ |.
backMantracaryā (mantra conduct) is a recurrent phrase in this text, used about eighty-nine times. Even if “mantra” is not mentioned explicitly, the “conduct” (caryā) implies “mantra conduct” (mantracaryā), especially when talking about its purpose (artha).
backtshangs par spyod pa Tib. This tanslates as ”chaste conduct.”
backThe phrase “bodhisattva basket” (bodhisattvapiṭaka), which refers to the text and teachings of the MMK, is clearly intended to indicate that the MMK belongs to the Bodhisattva Basket, as opposed to the Śrāvaka Basket (in the binary classification of Buddhist literature by Asaṅga).
back“Complete … with nothing missing” (anūnapadavyañjanaṃ) om. Tib.
backbcom ldan ’das bsam gyi mi khyab bo Tib. The Tibetan adds this line here which translates as, “The Blessed One is inconceivable.”
backrnam par ’phrul pa shes par ram/ ’tshal bar ram/ D. The Tibetan translation in D translates as “How could I understand or know the magical feats.”
backthugs kyi spyad pa spyod pa’i rjes su ’jug pa’i sgrub pa dang / spyod pa ’tshal bar ram D. The translation of this sentence is uncertain.
backThe path of seeing is the third of the five paths of a bodhisattva; it also marks the first of the ten levels of a realized bodhisattva, the Joyous. It leads to the elimination of certain afflictions (kleśa) that include both negative emotions and erroneous views of reality.
backThe name of this samādhi could also be translated as the array of light rays of the blessing power of all the buddhas, the arouser.
backOm. Tib.
backphyag na gtsug gi rin chen Tib. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *Cūḍāmaṇipāṇi.
backOm. Tib.
backgnod pa thams cad rnams par ’jigs pa’i rgyal po Tib. The Tibetan translation corresponds to B. Sarvavikiraṇavidhvaṃsanarāja.
backspyod pa thams cad kyi yul shes pa’i rgyal po Tib. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *Sarvacaryāviṣayajñānarāja.
backIn place of Atiśayendrarāja, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Abhigamendrarāja.
backSvabhāvasamudgatarāja om. Tib.
backThe Skt. has Mitābha after Amitābha, which could be a case of dittography.
backIn place of Susambhavābha, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Asambhavābha.
backIn place of Pati, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Buddhi.
backlha dang lha yul na yod pa Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backgdul bar dka’ ba dang / bsnyen par dka’ ba dang D. The Tibetan translation includes these two names after Durālabha (rnyed par dka’ ba).
backmtshan bzang Tib. The Tibetan translation preserves a name that reflects the Sanskrit *Sucihnaḥ and may be a combination of the two names Suci and Cihnaḥ that are attested in the Skt.
backDhvajaketu seems to be listed twice.
backSuketu seems to be listed twice.
backthos ris byed Tib. The Tibetan translation includes this additional name after the name Divaṃkara (lha byed).
backngan spong gi bu Tib. The name recorded in the Tibetan does not match the Skt. name Bhūtamuni. Negi notes that elsewhere in the Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa the Tibetan ngan spong gi bu/ngan spong bu translates the Sanskrit Bhārgava.
backbzang brtsegs Tib. The Tibetan translation supports the variant in B.
backgrags pa dang / drags pa ’dren pa dang / Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backbyams pa bzang po’i bu dang / byams pa’i bu ma yin pa dang / Tib. In place of the Skt. Sunetreya, Namantreya, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit names *Sumaitreya and *Amaitreya. TMK supports the Skt.
backOm. Tib.
backrnga chen dbang phyug Tib. His name is, more likely, *Dundubhisvara (“Sound of a Drum”), rather than *Dundubhīśvara (”Lord of Drums”). The Tibetan supports the latter.
backOm. Tib.
backkhyab ’jug bdag po Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Prabhuviṣṇu.
backbdag po’i ngang tshul Tib. The Tibetan might correspond to the Sanskrit *Śīleśvara.
backThe Tib. is missing all the names from Soma to Sunala.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backphyir mi ldog pa Tib. The Tibetan combines the Skt. Avivartita and Avaivarttika into one name.
backchos ma yin pa gcod par byed pa Tib. The Tibetan translation may correspond to the Sanskrit *Adharmopaccheda.
backThe Skt. of this sentence is not clear. The translation is based on the Tibetan, inasmuch as it follows the word order as reflected in the Tibetan translation, namely *anantalokacaryārthanirhāra in place of anantacaryārthalokanirhāra.
backThe phrase “The Lord dwelt there with uṣṇīṣa kings who” has been added to introduce the next group, the uṣṇīṣa kings, which the text fails to introduce.
back“Instructions pertaining to vidyārāja” could mean “instructions given by the vidyārāja (the deity),” or “instructions pertaining to [the mantra that is] the vidyārāja.”
backpad+ma’i ’od dang / me tog pad+ma’i ’od dang Tib. The Tibetan appears to have listed the name Kamalaraśmi twice here.
backme tog ka ta ka’i ’od Tib.
backgtsug tor kyi rgyal mo Tib. The Tibetan translates this as “uṣṇīṣa queens” or *uṣṇīṣrājñayaḥ.
backsgrib pa dang / mchog sbyin thams cad Tib. Instead of the name Dhavalā, the Tibetan has two names that correspond to the Sanskrit *Avaraṇā and *Aarvavaradā. TMK has Cīvarā.
backIn place of “form,” TMK reflects ūrṇā (the tuft of hair between the eyebrows).
backmgul bzang Tib.
backmgul dkar D.
backlta ba Tib. The Tibetan adds this name, which may translate the Sanskrit variant *Lokita, after Vilokita (rnam par lta ba).
backbskal pa bzang po Tib.
backbyang chub kyi yan lag gi gnas ma D; byang chub kyi lag gi gnas ma Y, K, N, H; This name is added in the Tibetan translations of the text. The name is also included in B.
backIn place of Alūkā, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Anūlūkā, and TMK has (in transliteration) Ṣalūkā.
backFor Vimalāntakarī, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Vimalānanta or its equivalent.
backFor Stupaśriyā, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Pūjāśriyā or its equivalent.
backchu bo ma Tib. The Tibetan most likely reflects a variant and not a translation of the Skt. Bhāginī.
backshing rta bzang mo Tib. The Tibetan only contains one name here, and it could reflect a translation of either *Bhāgīrathī or *Surathī.
backglang po’i ’dul byed ma Tib.
backdpal byed ma Tib.
backSuravatī seems to be listed twice.
backOm. Tib. The Negi dictionary lists me chen ma as the equivalent of Bṛhannalā when me chen ma is in fact the translation for Arciṣmatī. The Tibetan does include a translation for the next name, Bṛhantā (chen mo nyid). It is also possible that the Tibetan has recorded both Bṛhannalā and Bṛhantā as a single name.
backKrodharāja, a term applied to wrathful vidyārājas, has been left here in Sanskrit as it appears to be used as a generic term. Otherwise, in much of the text, it is used as an epithet-name of Yamāntaka or applies specifically to Yamāntaka, and in such cases it was translated as “Lord of Wrath.”
backrdo rje rtse mo Tib. The Tibetan records the name of a single krodharāja here instead of translations for the Skt. names of the two krodharājas Vajraśikhara and Vajraśikha. The Tibetan rdo rje rtse mo could translate either of these two Skt. names.
backrdo rje sa mtshon pa D; rdo rje mtshon pa J, K, C. The Tibetan translation adds this name after Vajranārāca (rdo rje lcags mda’).
backOm. Tib.
backne tso D; ne tsho Y.
backTMK combines Śumbha and Bhramara into one, translating it as “Killer of the Well-Arisen.”
backGhora appears to be listed twice.
backTMK takes Grasana, Saṃhāra, and Arka to be one name, with Arka somehow interpreted as “Hero” (reflecting the reading araha from manuscript B?).
backma rungs pa dang / sbrul dang / Tib. The Tibetan breaks the Skt. Duṣṭasarpa into two separate names.
backThe last several names seem rather strange. The Tibetan has “Victorious Chariot” for Upadrava, and “Fearsome Chariot” for Vidrava. TMK interprets Visarpa, Kuṣṭha, and Upadrava as one entry meaning “Victorious over All Leprosy.”
backMahākrodha, “great wrath,” seems to be a synonym of krodharāja or a wrathful vidyārāja.
backbcom ldan ’das shAkya thub pa dang ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa la nges par sems shing bdag nyid kyi rig pa’i rgyal po phyag na rdo rje la phyag ’tshal zhing bka’ rab tu sdod cing ’dug ste Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “fixed their minds upon Blessed Śākyamuni and Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, bowed to their own vidyārāja Vajrapāṇi, and sat and waited for a command.”
backFor Vajrārṇā, the Tib. reflects the Sanskrit Vajrābhā or its equivalent.
backrdo rje sbyin ma Tib. This is likely an error for rdo rje smin ma.
backrdo rje ral gri ma Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Vajraśastrī or *Vajraśakti.
backrdo rje thog ’bab Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Vajrāśani.
backgnas dang ldan ma dang / Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Śālavatī.
backrnam par brjod ma Tib. The Tibetan adds this name after Śālā (gnas ma).
backstug po ma Tib.
backOm. Tib. Kāmavajriṇī appears to be listed twice in the Skt. She is only listed once in the Tibetan.
backTMK combines Pūrā and Keśinī into Pūrakeśinī.
backtheg chen ma Tib. For Mahānarthā, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Mahānayā or *Mahāyāninī. TMK reflects the Sanskrit *Mahārthavatī.
backral gri ma dang paT+Ti sa Tib. The Tibetan breaks the Skt. Khaḍgapaṭṭiśā into two names.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backsgra med ma dang / ’dud ma dang / Tib. The Tibetan includes these two name between Jayantī and Guhyakī.
backgtum ma Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backTMK combines Bodhyaṅgā and Balavatī into one, *Bodhyaṅgabalavatī.
backTMK has *Ajitavatī for Ajiravatī.
backsgra snyan ma Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Susvarā.
backTMK combines Asvarā and Sunirmalā into one, with asvara meaning “clothes.” This variant could be supported by the (revised) reading ambaranirmalā in ms. B.
backThe text just says “buddhas,” but the context requires “tathāgatas” to distinguish them from pratyekabuddhas.
backdga’ bo Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Nanda for Candana. TMK matches the Skt.
backOm. Tib.
back’dod pa Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Iṣṭa.
backnye ba’i ’dod pa Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Upeṣṭa.
backOm. TMK.
back’jig rten rnam par ’jigs par byed pa D. This name does not appear in the Skt. but is included in the Tibetan between Upadundubhi and Areṇu.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backTMK combines Sukara and Prabhāvanta into one, *Sukaraprabhāvanta.
backthos med Tib.
backdbyangs mdzes Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Susvara.
backpad+ma Tib.
backru rta Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Kuṣṭha.
backnye dbang nor lha Tib. The Tibetan appears to treat these last two names as a single name that reflects the Sanskrit *Vasudeva. TMK reflects the Skt.
back“Middling vehicle” (madhyayāna) refers here to the vehicle of pratyekabuddhas, which is between the śrāvaka and bodhisattva vehicles.
back“Free of aim” (apraṇihita) is one of the “three doors of liberation,” the other two being signlessness (animitta) and emptiness (śūnyatā).
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backba ra dwa dza’i bu Tib. The Tibetan includes this name after Urubilvākāśyapa (lteng rgyas ’od srung gi bu).
backba ra dwa dza bsod snyoms len Tib. The Tibetan treats Bharadvāja and Piṇḍola as a single name. It is not clear in the Skt. if Bharadvāja and Piṇḍola are meant to be two persons or one, as these two names reversed (Piṇḍolabharadvāja) usually refers to one person.
backOm. Tib. Here the Tibetan reads mdzes dga’ bo (Skt. sundarananda), the name that appears two positions later in the sequence given in the Sanskrit edition.
backTMK has *Koṭikarṇa.
backmtha’ yas ’jig rten gyur pa Tib.
backru ru Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backnye rgyal Tib. The Tibetan adds this name, which reflects the Sanskrit *Upatiṣya, between Tiṣya and Mahātiṣya.
backOm. Tib.
backpi lin da la Tib. The Tibetan also adds the name ’dun pa before Pippala.
backTMK reflects *Pippalaka and *Phala for Pippala and Kimphala.
backchos sbyin Tib.
backbcu drug sde pa’i dga’ byed Tib. Tibetan appears to combine Ṣoḍaśavargika and Nandana into a single name.
backOm. Tib.
backrgyun gyi pha rol mthar byed Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit variant *Śrotaparāntaka.
backbye ba’i ze ba Tib.
backgzi brjid ldan Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Tejasvin.
backgzi brjid bzang po Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Sutejas.
backso gol nyi shu pa Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Skt. Viṃśachoṭika (“Twenty Finger Snaps”). TMK, however, reflects the reading °koṭika.
backme tog ka dam li Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backmnyam bcas Tib.
back’khor ba las ’jigs pa dag Tib.
backtheg pa chung ngu Tib. TMK takes sunaya to mean the “right conduct,” whereas the Tibetan interprets it as the “small vehicle,” perhaps reading *kunaya.
backOm. Tib.
backsa ga ma D.
backgtsug phud ma Tib.
backnye ba’i gtsug phud ma Tib.
backOm. D.
backdon ’byung ma Tib.
back’od ma Tib.
backnor bdag ma Tib.
backsdug bsngal ston par byed ma Tib.
backdka’ zlog rkang spyod ldan ma Tib. The Tibetan appears to combine the Skt. names Padumā and Padumāvatī into this single name.
backmthong bar ’dod Tib. TMK.
backchos kyi dbyings Tib.
backsarba kArya ma D.
backSkt.: oṁ kha kha khāhi khāhi duṣṭasattvadamaka asimusalaparaśupāśahasta caturbhuja caturmukha ṣaṭcaraṇa gaccha gaccha mahāvighnaghātaka vikṛtānana sarvabhūtabhayaṅkara aṭṭahāsanādine vyāghracarmanivasana kuru kuru sarvakarmāṃ | chinda chinda sarvamantrān | bhinda bhinda paramudrām | ākarṣaya ākarṣaya sarvabhūtānām | nirmatha nirmatha sarvaduṣṭān | praveśaya praveśaya maṇḍalamadhye | vaivasvatajīvitāntakara kuru kuru mama kāryam | daha daha paca paca mā vilamba mā vilamba samayam anusmara hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ | sphoṭaya sphoṭaya sarvāśāpāripūraka he he bhagavan kiṃ cirāyasi mama sarvārthān sādhaya svāhā ||.
backrnam par ’phel bar bya ba Tib. The translation here follows the Tibetan. In place of “increase,” the Skt. has “overpower” (abhibhavana).
backyang dag par sdom pa la gnas pa Tib.
backma mo dang ma mo chen mo Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backgcong chen po Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
back’phags skyes po Tib. Both the Tibetan and TMK insert this name, which reflects the Sanskrit *Virūḍhaka (the fourth guardian king of the directions) between Dhṛtarāṣṭra and Virūpākṣa.
backkum b+ha la Tib. TMK transliterates kuṣma, followed by the Tibetan word ’dzin=*grāhaka or *dhara.
backOm. Tib.
backsdig ldan Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backTMK reflects the Sanskrit *Sumanoratha for Amanoratha.
backgzi brjid bzang po Tib.
back’dus pa skyong Tib. The Tibetan adds this name between Mahāpadma and Śaṅkha.
backa ma ti D.; a ma sti Y, K.
backri byi D. D adds this name, which corresponds to the Sanskrit *Agastya, between Pulasti and Vyāsa.
backOm. Tib.
backmo mtshan gnyis las skyes Tib. The Tibetan adds this name between Parāśara and Paraśu.
backe raN+Da Tib.
backte raN+Da Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backTMK has Bheraṇḍa, Bhuruṇḍa, Muruṇḍa/Maruṇḍa, Dīpa, and Pradīpa.
back’od bzang Tib.
backOm. Tib., TMK.
backThe Tib. has Pakṣigaṇa or its equivalent for Pakṣirāja.
backbzi brjid chen po Tib. The Tibetan lists this one name for both Mahojaska and Mahoja. The Tibetan name could translate either of these two Sanskrit names.
backyid du ’ong ba’i sems skyed par byed pa Tib. Both the Tibetan and TMK appear to combine Manojña and Cittonmādakara into a single name.
backrigs mtho ba Tib.
backmtho sgra Tib.
backchu lha Tib. The Tibetan reflects Sanskrit *Varuṇa. TMK reflects the Sanskrit *Akaruṇa.
backThe names of these heavens usually occur in the plural, as they also denote the classes of gods dwelling there.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backrig byed bkra D; rigs byed bkra Y, K. The name *Vedacitri, which only appears in the Tibetan translation of the MMK, might reflect a case of scribal dislexia in the Sanskrit source for the Tibetan translation (or on the part of the Tibetan translator) that reverses the first two syllables of the name Devacitri.
backRāhu appears twice in the Skt.
backTMK has *Ṛṣi for Ṛkṣa.
backnor ’dzin D.
backrting bar ldan Tib.
back’dod pa Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Iṣṭi for Ṛṣṭi.
backOm. Tib.
backkun du ltung byed Tib.
backsha drag ldan Tib. The Tib combines Piśita and Raudra into one, translating it as “one with fierce flesh.”
backgseng phrom Tib.
back’chi ltas min Tib.
backsems par byed pa Tib.
backOm. Tib. The Tib. omits the second and third line in this section.
backnab so Tib.
backgre dang / dbo dang / Tib.
backchu stod dang / chu smad dang / Tib.
backkhrums stod dang / khrums smad dang / Tib.
backTMK has Punarbhavā for Punarnavā.
backBoth Tib. and TMK have Lokanātha for Lokamātā.
backchang ldan Tib.
backrgya byed Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backmi’u thung Tib. *Vāmana.
backg.yung drung rgyal D. *svastijita.
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backTMK combines Mokṣa and Bodhi into Mokṣabodhi.
backdmyal ba’i rig pa ’dzin pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan reflects a combination of the Skt. names Naraka and Vidyādhara.
backphyogs kyi glang po Tib., TMK.
backrnal ’byor ’gro dang / rab tu gnas dang / Tib. TMK is missing yoga[ga] (rnal ’byor ’gro).
backbzang po ma Tib.
backOm. Tib.
back’jigs byed ma Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backphyogs mtshams ma Tib.
backstug ma D.; sdug ma J, C.
backdu ba la gnas ma Tib.
backOm. Tib.
back“Adorned with miraculous displays” is missing from the Tibetan. This reading seems plausible, as it avoids the repetition found in the Skt. of the phrase vyūhālaṅkāraṃ.
backkhro bo chen po’i gzugs kyis Tib.
backgzhan gyi sngags rjes su spyod pa med pa nyid dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “not following the mantra practices of others.”
backThe actual number in this list seems to be not six but eight. Some of the items could perhaps be combined together to get the correct number, for example numbers 1 and 2, and 6 and 7. The Tib. has seven items on the list by combining numbers 5 and 6 into one. TMK lists only four items.
backdus dang / phyogs dang / nges par sdom pa dang / bzlas pa dang / sbyin sreg dang / mi smra ba dang / dka’ thub la gzhol ba nyid dang / rtogs pa dang blo dang dran pa dang / shes rab dang / bstan pa la gsnyen pa nyid dang / D; brtan pa la gsnyen pa nyid dang / Y, J, K, N, C. The translation of this “quality” is based on the interpretation found in TMK. The Tibetan splits this “quality” into two. The reading from D, with the last “quality” (brtan pa la bsnyen nyid dag) taken from the variants in Y, J, K, N, and C translates as, “complete reliance on the time, place, ritual injunctions, mantra recitation, offering of oblations, vows of silence, and the practice of austerities” and “applying oneself toward the stabilization of realization, intellect, mindfulness, and wisdom.” In the Skt. this item is rendered in the form of a long compound that can be interpreted in many different ways.
backThe Skt. svatantra can mean “one’s lineage/school/tradition,” but it can also mean “sovereign/independent” or be translated adverbially as “of one’s own free will.” It is not clear which of these applies here.
backrakṣaṇasādhanaom. Tib., TMK.
backpāramitāom. Tib.
backAgain, the numbers do not tally. We have nine items on the list instead of the expected seven. Possibly numbers 8 and 9 were originally a single item as they are logically connected, and the same could also be true for other pairs of numbers. The Tibetan falls even further away from the mark, with ten items listed.
backchos brgyad dang ldan na rig pa dang sngags kyi spyod pa’i don ’grub cing lam du ’gro bar ’gyur te/ Tib. “There are eight qualities they possess that accomplish the goal of vidyā and mantra practice and bring progress on the path.”
backmthong ba dang ma mthong ba’i ’bras bu dag la blta ba dang sems par ’dod pa nyid dang / Tib. The Tibetan and TMK combine the first two items into one, rendering them as “the desire to observe and imagine both visible and invisible karmic results.”
backbyang chub sems dpa’i ’bras bu dang bcas pa’i rdzu ’phrul dang rnam par ’phrul pa nyid la the tshom med cing dang ba nyid dang / D. The Tibetan following D translates as, “not doubting and having clarity regarding the magical abilities and powers that accompany the result of being a bodhisattva.”
backphyin ci ma log pa’i sngags gzung ba dang bla ma la gus pa nyid dang / D. The Tibetan following D translates as, “devotion to a guru who maintains an authentic mantra practice.” TMK seems to treat this as two items and translates as, “upholding the true mantras and respecting the gurus.”
backsangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ nyid kyi sngags dang / rgyud dang spyod pa bstan pa mi slu ba bzung zhing / D. The Tibetan and TMK combine the last two items into one, and also seem to reflect a slightly different reading of the Sanskrit that translates as, “upholding the mantras, tantras, conduct, and the undeceiving teachings of the buddhas and bodhisattvas.”
backsangs rgyas kyi zhing Tib. In place of “places for gaining accomplishment,” the Tibetan has “buddhafields.” TMK supports the Skt.
backThe number is again different from the expected, which is largely due to corruptions and the resulting ambiguities as to how to separate individual items.
backsems dpa’ chen po Tib.
backrig pa’i rgyal po Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backchu la mi nub par ’gro ba Tib. The Tibetan translates as “not drowning.”
backkhro bo’i rgyal po’i sngags smras pa de gang zhe na Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One pronounces the mantra of the Lord of Wrath as follows.”
backSkt.: namaḥ samantabuddhānām | oṁ ra ra smara apratihataśāsana kumārarūpadhāriṇa hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backSkt.: oṁ vākye da namaḥ.
backSkt.: vākye hūṁ.
backmaM Tib.
backsarvabuddhānaṃ hṛdayaṃom. Tib.
backgzhan yang phyag rgya thams cad kyi snying po dpa’ bo chen po zhes bya ba yi ge brgyas yod de Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There is another eight-syllable mantra called, The Great Hero that is the Heart Mantra for all Mudrās.”
backsrid pa gsum gyi chos nye bar gcod par byed pa Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backbyang chub sems dpa’ ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa nyid bzhin du nye bar gnas pa Tib. This line, which appears only in the Tibetan, translates as “It is as if the bodhisattva Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, himself is present.”
backmchog tu gsang ba’i ngo bos Tib.
backbI ra Tib. The Tibetan transliteration of the Skt. here translates as “hero.”
backSkt.: oṁ āḥ dhīra hūṁ khecaraḥ.
backsangs rgyas nyid bzhin du rab tu nye bar gnas pa yin no Tib. The Tibetan includes the Skt. term pratyupasthitaṃ from the next line here and translates as, “and it is as if the Buddha himself were present before you.”
backe hye hi ku maA ra Tib. The Tibetan transliteration of the Skt. pairs the second occurrence of the Skt. invocation ehy ehi in this line with the vocative for the Skt. term kumāra and translates as “Approach, approach divine youth.”
backSkt.: oṁ he he kumāra viśvarūpiṇe sarvabālabhāṣitaprabodhane | āyāhi bhagavann āyāhi | kumārakrīḍotpaladhāriṇe maṇḍalamadhye tiṣṭha tiṣṭha | samayam anusmara | apratihataśāsana hūṁ | mā vilamba | kuru | phaṭ svāhā ||.
back’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad dang / sngags dang Tib. The Tibetan treats sarvalaukikalokottarāḥ and mantrāḥ as two different referents and then continues the list bhūtagaṇāḥ, etc.
backSkt.: oṁ dhu dhura dhura dhūpavāsini dhūpārciṣi hūṁ tiṣṭha samayam anusmara svāhā ||.
backbzhugs par ’gyur Tib.
backbya ba’i phyag rgya ’di nyid do Tib. The translation “This is the mudrā of ritual activity” is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “The mantras of summoning and this mudrā.”
backSkt.: he he mahākāruṇika viśvarūpadhāriṇe arghaṃ pratīccha pratīcchāpaya samayam anusmara tiṣṭha tiṣṭha maṇḍalamadhye praveśaya praviśa sarvabhūtānukampaka gṛhṇa gṛhṇa hūṁ | ambaravicāriṇe svāhā ||.
back“Take this perfume” is perhaps addressed not to Gandhā, but to the tathāgata that was just mentioned.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhānāṃ namaḥ samantagandhāvabhāsaśriyāya tathāgatāya | tadyathā | gandhe gandhe gandhāḍhye gandhamanorame pratīccha pratīccheyaṃ gandhaṃ samatānucāriṇe svāhā ||.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhānām apratihataśāsanānām | namaḥ saṃkusumitarājasya tathāgatasya | tadyathā | kusume kusume kusumāḍhye kusumapuravāsini kusumāvati svāhā ||.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhabodhisattvānām apratihataśāsanānāṃ | tadyathā | he he bhagavan mahāsattva buddhāvalokita mā vilamba | idaṃ baliṃ gṛhṇāpaya gṛhṇa hūṁ hūṁ sarvaviśva ra ra ṭa ṭa phaṭ svāhā ||.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhānām apratihataśāsanānāṃ sarvatamo'ndhakāravidhvaṃsināṃ | namaḥ samantajyotigandhāvabhāsaśriyāya tathāgatāya | tadyathā | he he bhagavan jyotiraśmiśatasahasrapratimaṇḍitaśarīra vikurva vikurva | mahābodhisattvasamantajvāloddyotitamūrti khurda khurda | avalokaya avalokaya sarvasattvānāṃ svāhā ||.
backSkt.: namaḥ samantabuddhānām apratihataśāsanānām | tadyathā | jvala jvala jvālaya jvālaya | huṁ | vibodhaka harikṛṣṇapiṅgala svāhā ||.
backIn the Tib., the passage from “The mudrā” to “Dhīmat” is rendered in verse. “Dhīmat” is an epithet of Mañjuśrī.
backkhyod bu ’jig rten rnams grags pa’i/ D.
backda ha da ha sarba badz+ra bi nA ya kaM D. There seems to be some textual or redactional corruption here, as vajravināyakas are normally Buddhist deities. The Tibetan, however, confirms this reading.
backSkt.: namaḥ sarvabuddhabodhisattvānām apratihataśāsanānām | oṁ kara kara | kuru kuru mama kāryam | bhañja bhañja sarvavighnāṃ | daha daha sarvavajravināyakān | mūrdhaṭaka jīvitāntakara mahāvikṛtarūpiṇe paca paca sarvaduṣṭān | mahāgaṇapati jīvitāntakara bandha bandha sarvagrahān | ṣaṇmukha ṣaḍbhuja ṣaṭcaraṇa | rudram ānaya | viṣṇum ānaya | brahmādyān devān ānaya | mā vilamba mā vilamba | rakṣa rakṣa | maṇḍalamadhye praveśaya | samayam anusmara | hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backsngags pa chen po Tib.
backnag po chen po Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ hrīṁḥ jñīḥ vikṛtānana huṁ | sarvaśatrūn nāśaya stambhaya phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backgra thams cad zug gzer chen po dang / nad chen po dang nyin bzhi pa’i rims kyis Tib.
backIt is unclear whether the loving kindness and compassion arise in the practitioner or the target. The Skt. grammar indicates that it is the practitioner rather than the target.
backrtag tu dga’ ba med pa dang / byams pa med pa dang / snying rje’i sems thob par mi ’gyur te/ bzlas pa zin gyi bar du grol bar mi ’gyur zhing ’chi bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The meaning and interpretation of this sentence is not very clear in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “They will not know happiness, they will not be loved, they will not have a compassionate thought; for as long as one recites it they will not attain liberation, and they will die.”
backrtse gsum chen po Tib. The Tibetan translates as “the great trident.” The Skt. term śūla can mean “severe pain,” and also “spear,” suggesting a sharp, stabbing pain.
backSkt.: oṁ hrīṁḥ kālarūpa huṁ khaṁ svāhā ||.
backSkt.: jayaṃ jaya sujaya mahākāruṇika viśvarūpiṇe gaccha gaccha svabhavanaṃ sarvabuddhāṃś ca visarjaya saparivārān svabhavanaṃ cānupraveśaya | samayam anusmara | sarvārthāś ca me siddhyantu mantrapadāḥ | manorathaṃ ca me paripūraya svāhā ||.
backIt seems strange that a seat should be provided at the time of dismissing, unless, perhaps, the seat is meant to be a vehicle to ride on.
back’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi dkyil ’khor dang sngags dang sngags grub pa dag dang / dam tshig dang/ bzlas pa dang / dus dang nges par sdom pa dag la yang sbyar bar bya’o/ D. The meaning of this sentence is unclear in the Skt. The Tibetan reflects a different syntax and translates as, “It can be used for all mundane and supramundane maṇḍalas, mantras, mantra accomplishments, samayas, mantra recitations, times, and vows.”
backIt is unclear if these rites are meant to exorcise demons, or cause demonic possession, or both.
backlaM ni D.
backoM Sh+Tai Sh+Tai swA hA D; oM Sh+Trai Sh+Trai swA hA N.
backthams cad bzugs can Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ varade svāhā ||.
backoM b+hu ru swA hA D; oM b+hU ri swA hA Y, K; oM b+hu ri swA hA N.
backphug ron Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ vilokini svāhā ||.
backSkt.: oṁ viśve viśvasambhave viśvarūpiṇi kaha kaha āviśāviśa | samayam anusmara | ru ru tiṣṭha svāhā ||.
backOm. Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ śvete śrīvapuḥ svāhā ||.
backSkt.: oṁ khi khiri khi riri bhaṅguri sarvaśatruṃ stambhaya jambhaya mohaya vaśam ānaya svāhā ||.
backgdong gsum Tib. The Tibetan translates as “three faces.”
backSkt.: oṁ śrīḥ ||.
backSkt.: oṁ ajite kumārarūpiṇi ehi āgaccha. mama kāryaṃ kuru svāhā ||.
backSkt.: oṁ jaye svāhā | vijaye svāhā | ajite svāhā | aparājite svāhā ||.
backIt is not clear which of the fist mudrās the text is referring to. There is a mudrā called fist described in chapter 36, and another one in chapter 45. Neither of these chapters is included in the translation here.
backThe iconography of the deity described in this mantra indicates that it is Kārttikeya, this name being used further down, where he is also, on one occasion, equated with Mañjuśrī.
backSkt.: oṁ kumāra mahākumāra krīḍa krīḍa | ṣaṇmukha bodhisattvānujñāta mayūrāsana saṅghodyatapāṇi raktāṅga raktagandhānulepanapriya kha kha khāhi khāhi khāhi huṁ | nṛtya nṛtya | raktāpuṣpārcitamūrti samayam anusmara | bhrama bhrama bhrāmaya bhrāmaya bhrāmaya | lahu lahu mā vilamba | sarvakāryāṇi me kuru kuru | vicitrarūpadhāriṇe tiṣṭha tiṣṭha huṁ | sarvabuddhānujñāta svāhā ||.
backIt is not clear where exactly the direct speech by Mañjuśrī resumes. It may resume here.
backgzhon nu’i sems su mtha dag ni / bsdus nas yongs su bzhad par bya Tib. The first two lines of the Tibetan verse differ markedly from the extant Skt. and translate as, “In short, everything is explained to be / The mind of the youthful one.”
backSkt.: oṁ vikṛtagraha huṁ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backskrag par byed pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan adds this phrase, which translates as, “make it panic.”
backSkt.: oṁ brahma subrahma brahmavarcase śāntiṃ kuru svāhā ||.
backSkt.: oṁ garuḍavāhana cakrapāṇi caturbhuja huṁ huṁ samayam anusmara | bodhisattva ājñāpayati svāhā ||.
backzhi ba’i don ni myur byed yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will promptly accomplish peaceful aims.”
back’byung po rnams ni rnam ’jig cing / /khyab ’jug gzugs kyi lus can yin/ Tib. The precise meaning of this line is unclear in both the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “He frightens off all spirits and / Takes the embodied form of Viṣṇu.”
backSkt.: oṁ mahāmaheśvara bhūtādhipati vṛṣadhvaja pralambajaṭāmakuṭadhāriṇe sitabhasmadhūsaritamūrti huṁ phaṭ phaṭ | bodhisattva ājñāpayati svāhā ||.
backmdung rtse gsum Tib.
backSkt., oṁ śakuna mahāśakuna padmavitatapakṣa sarvapannaganāśaka kha kha khāhi khāhi | samayam anusmara huṁ | tiṣṭha | bodhisattva ājñāpayati svāhā ||.
backIt is not clear if this is a mudrā called the great, or perhaps the “great five-crested mudrā” that can also be called, as the text specifies later, the “great mudrā.”
backThere is a play on words in the Skt., as the name of this garuḍa, Vainateya, is derived from the word which means “to guide” (vi + nī). This play on words is lost in the Tibetan translation, which uses the common translation for garuḍa, nam mkha’ lding.
backnga yis chos ga rab ’byam pa dang / mdo dag kyang ni bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan following D translates as, “I have taught these in the extensive manuals / As well as in the sūtras.”
backsrung ba Tib.
backbshad Tib.
backThose “of the ten powers” are the buddhas.
backsarvasattvāḥom. Tib.
back’phags pa’i dkyil ’khor bzang po de grub pa’i gnas skabs la gnas pa ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pas gzigs nas Tib. In the Tibetan, Mañjuśrī is the subject who beholds the gathered assembly. The Tibetan translates as, “After being surveyed by Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, who was present on the occasion for practicing this noble, excellent maṇḍala.” The word “samaya” seems to be translated as “occasion.”
backsamayamom. Tib.
backsamayaḥom. Tib.
backdkyil ’khor dam pa Tib.
backdkyil ’khor Tib.
backmi rnam kyi dkyil ’khor bstan par bya ste / de bzhin gshegs pa rnams yongs su mya ngan las ’das na’ang / sems can rnams gang du yang dag par zhugs na / ’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa’i sngags thams cad ’grub par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan differs significantly from the Sanskrit and translates as, “I will teach a maṇḍala suitable for humans. Even though the tathāgatas are liberated, it is that [maṇḍala] wherein beings enter and become accomplished in all worldly and transcendent mantras.”
backmgon po Tib.
backsa steng khyod kyi dkyil ’khor byed/ Tib. The word “created” (byed) was supplied from the Tibetan.
backsngags la dad pa med par ni/ Tib.
backThis line is omitted in the Tib.
backma rungs dam tshig mi bstan to/ Tib. Immediately following this line the Tibetan includes a line not present in the Skt. that translates as, “Thus the samaya should not be taught to those who are unsuitable.”
backrab ’byam D.
backmi rnams smos kyang ci zhig dgos/ Tib.
backIt is not clear whether the subject here is the hypothetical practitioner or the “maṇḍala master” mentioned in the next paragraph. Some actions in the maṇḍala procedure described here are clearly attributed to the master, and some, later on, to his assistant (anusādhaka) or other people. The text also mentions the master’s helpers (sahāyaka) as recipients of protection ensuing from the performance of the ritual.
backrgya mtsho’i ngogs dang nye ba’i gring khyer chen po’i byang shar phyogs du D. Here the Tibetan translators seem to have read or interpreted a slightly different syntax than is apparent in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “or to the northeast of a city that lies close to the shore of the sea.”
backTib. omits this reference to the measurements of the ritual ground.
backOm. Tib.
backThe five products of the cow are cow dung, urine, milk, curd, and ghee.
backThe word “safeguards” (srung) has been supplied from D.
backIt is not completely clear whether this should be one of the three types of maṇḍala described earlier, or a maṇḍala that is a combination of all three. However, the context further on seems to indicate that we are dealing here with the latter.
backAs above, Lord of Wrath is Yamāntaka, here equated with his mantra.
backde bzhin du dbus kyi gnas su nang du yang zung bzhir bya’o / Tib. The Skt. suggests that one draws two concentric squares, one larger than the other, to delimit the intermediate and inner parts of the maṇḍala. The Tibetan translates as, “In this way one should create a square within the central space.”
backrang gi rig pa rtsa ba’i sngags Tib. The translation “the root mantra of his own vidyā” is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. grammar is unclear.
backThe details and sequence of this procedure are unclear. The Skt. seems to say that he sits on a bundle of kuśa grass, but the context would rather suggest that he takes this bundle and surrounds the maṇḍala with the grass.
backku shas Tib. The phrase “with kuśa grass” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backThe last sentence hardly makes any sense; however, the reading gār (accusative plural of go (“cow”)) is corroborated by the Tibetan ba rnams.
backPossibly the six-syllable heart mantra of Mañjuśrī (oṁ vākye da namaḥ) is meant.
backThe translation follows the Tibetan here because the Skt. grammar is unclear and could be corrupt. The Skt. grammar suggests that the powder is incanted twice, first with the “six-syllable mantra” (whichever one is meant), and then with the heart mantra (again, without specifying which heart mantra).
back“In the four quarters” possibly suggests that each group of the fourfold assembly has its own quarter.
backAlso known as the Samādhirājasūtra. See Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The King of Samādhis Sūtra (Toh 127), 2018.
backSee Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The Stem Array (Toh 44-45), 2021a.
backSee Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (1) (Toh 555), 2023.
back“In order to listen to the Dharma” om. Tib.
backzangs Tib. The Tibetan adds “copper” (zangs) to this list of materials.
backThe maṇḍala is not exactly “drawn,” but rather traced on the ground with lines of colored powders.
back“One which has awakening as its goal and invariably leads to such,” om. Tib.
backnyung zhing dkyil bsdud dkyil ’khor ni / /mdor bsdus nas ni bstan pa yin D. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *alpa (“minor”) in place of kalpa (“ritual”).
backThis passage, versified in Skt., is rendered as prose in the Tibetan.
backThe word “seal” (verb) is being used, as the word mudrā itself means “seal” (noun).
back’khor bar pad+ma’i ze ba ’dra ba/ Tib. The translation of the last clause (“its rim…”) was informed by the Tibetan where puṣkara seems to be translated as “anther.”
backmtho gang tsam Tib. The Tibetan mtho gang tsam refers to the length from the tip of the index finger to the tip of the thumb.
backme lha Tib. “The fire deity” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backIn place of “the root mantra or the six-syllable heart mantra,” the Tibetan has “the six-syllable root mantra or the heart mantra.”
backrtsa ba’i sngags ’bru drug pa’am snying pos Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “root mantra or the single-syllable heart mantra.”
backbdag nyid dang ri mo mkhan yang rtse gcig par byas nas sbyin sreg byed du gzhug go/ Tib. In the Tibetan the maṇḍala master and the skilled painters “one-pointedly perform ritual oblations.”
backsngar bstan pa’i bdug pas bdugs nas Tib. The Tibetan does not mention any mantra and instead translates as, “make an incense offering as described above.”
backOm. Tib.
backtshon gyi phye ma blangs nas sku’i gzugs kyis bcad pa la/ ri mo mkhan gyis yongs su rdzogs par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan for this passage translates as, “He should pick up the colored powders, outline the image, and have the painters complete it.”
backOne probably places the seeds in a bowl and covers them with another bowl. The phrase used here, śarāvasampuṭa (“the space between [two] bowls”), seems to be used interchangeably with śarāvadvaya (“two bowls”), or śarāvadvayena sampuṭīkṛtya (“enclosing [it] with two bowls”).
backkhros pas yungs kar kham phor nas phyung la chang par bcangs te lan bdun spyin sreg byas pa D. The Tibetan adds an additional detail that translates as, “[he] should wrathfully take the mustard seed from the earthen vessel, place it in alcohol, and perform seven oblations.”
backlan lnga chang pa nas sbyin sreg byas Tib. Here again the Tibetan adds that this is an oblation of alcohol.
backbgegs tha mal pa Tib. The Tibetan calls them “ordinary obstacle makers.”
backston ka’i ’dam bu Tib. The Tibetan variant for the Skt. śaratkāṇḍa translates as, “autumn reeds.”
backgser gyi cod pan Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “golden crest.”
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backThis detail is obscure.
backgtsug tor gyi rgyal mo Tib. “Uṣṇīṣarājñī” is confirmed by the Tibetan. The Skt. reads uṣṇīṣarājā, which seems to be a feminine BHS derivation from uṣṇīṣarāja. A derivation of this kind is attested also in the Amoghapāśakalparāja, where we have the form vidyārājā (feminine), derived from vidyārāja (masculine). The feminine form is required by the context and is made plausible by #UT22084-088-038-4925, where the female form uṣṇīṣā (“uṣṇīṣa [queen/goddess]”) is used as an epithet for Locanā and other goddesses.
backnor bzang dang / Tib. The Tibetan here seems to be translating *Maṇibhadra, which could simply be a translation choice, as maṇibhadra is close in meaning to sudhana.
backblo bzang po Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Sumati.
back“Passed down by the tradition” om. Tib.
backde bzhin du lho phyogs su bcom ldan ’das shAkya thub pa dang rang sangs rgyas gnyis ni/ ri spos kyi ngad ldang ba la bzhugs pa bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed Śākyamuni and two pratekabuddhas should also be depicted in the southern quarter seated on Gandhamādana mountain.” This is likely a misreading of the Skt. source for the Tibetan translation.
backbzla ba Tib. In place of “forms” (rūpa), the Tibetan reflects the reading “recitations” (japa) found in one of the two Skt. manuscripts.
backDepending on which manuscript is followed, this invocation could also be translated as, “Whatever hosts of vidyā beings are known to [belong] in this [area of the maṇḍala], may they all be gathered here.”
backbcom ldan ’das yum mA ma kI Tib.
back“Image” om. Tib.
backUsually known as Cakravartin, here he is called Cakravartyuṣṇīṣa for the sake of consistency with the other names ending in -uṣṇīṣa in this list.
backral pa’i cod pan ’chang ba Tib. The Tibetan interprets the compound jaṭāmakuṭadhārī not as “wearing a diadem on his topknotted hair,” but as “wearing a crown of matted hair,” which is also grammatically possible in the Skt.
backThe five locks of hair are a distinguishing feature of Mañjuśrī.
backThis refers to the lotus on which Mañjuśrī sits.
backFour of the colors are probably assigned to the four directions respectively, with the fifth shining in the center.
backIt is not clear what an “earth vajra” (bhūvajra) is.
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the lotus mudrā (padmamudrā).
backdkyil ’khor kun nas sgo bri bar bya’o/ /sgo dag ni rgyab kyis lta na dang / ’jug na ni mdun gyis blta bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Depict gates on each side of the maṇḍala. Depict the gates as if viewed from behind but / Depict the gate at the entrance as if viewed from the front.”
backThe Skt. translates literally as, “slightly broken.” The meaning is not clear.
backde bzhin du mthar gyis gnod sbyin ma chen mo ’phrog ma yang bri’o/ Tib. The Tibetan omits the majority of detail that we get in this line in the Skt. and simply translates as, “Next in the sequence, draw the great yakṣiṇī Hārītī.”
backdka’ zlog ma kha dog D. The Tibetan omits the specific color of Umā’s complexion.
backIn this context, Viṣṇu should perhaps be taken to be one of the eight vasus, as he is regarded as the chief among them.
backThe text doesn’t make it clear which deities in particular should be represented by their mudrās—possibly the ones from the previous list, starting from the grahas.
backslob dpon bdag nyid phyi rol du byung nas dkyil ’khor de la g.yas phyogs su bskor ba byas te/ D. The Tibetan adds this line that translates as, “Then the master, who is outside of the maṇḍala, gets up and circles the maṇḍala to the right.”
backThis paragraph is very unclear both in the Skt. and Tibetan. It is not clear whether the Skt. saṃkṣepatas, translated here as “in short,” means that the previous section about the three maṇḍalas is now being summed up (this is made implausible by the fact that the pantheon of deities described next differs somewhat in composition), or whether saṃkṣepatas is meant to introduce a shorter variant of the same maṇḍala rite (it doesn’t really seem to be shorter), or perhaps two different maṇḍala rites are mixed together because of redactional confusion.
back“To the right” om. Tib.
back“To the left” om. Tib.
back’jam dpal gyi sgo gnyis pa’i sgo’i drung du ni smin drug gi bu D. The Tibetan reduces the name Kārttikeya-Mañjuśrī to just Kārttikeya, and says that Kārttikeya stands “near the second gate, Mañjuśrī’s gate.”
backThe Tibetan locates Vibhīṣaṇa in the neem tree, though that association makes little sense, both in terms of the Skt. syntax and because it is yakṣas, rather than rākṣasas, that traditionally dwell in trees.
back“Arranged in the proper order” om. Tib.
backg.yas dang g.yon gyi phyogs su D. It is unclear whether this is meant to be from right to left, or perhaps alternating between right and left. The Tibetan translates as “to the left and the right,” which suggests that each mudrā is painted on both sides of each gate.
backspyi blugs dang / D.
backAll these symbols have their corresponding hand gestures; here, however, they are the symbols drawn in the maṇḍala.
backWhile the maṇḍalas described so far were concentric, with each successive one extending beyond the preceding one and forming a new maṇḍala zone, this maṇḍala and the seven that follow seem to be depicted outside of the central series of concentric maṇḍalas.
backshar phyogs su ni dkyil ’khor gzhu’i dbyibs can byas te bzhag la kun nas ’bar ba’i pad+ma’i phyag rgyas mtshan pa’o/ /lho phyogs su ni dkyil ’khor zur gsum pa byas te kun nas ’bar ba’i lhung bzed kyis mtshan pa’o/ D. The Tibetan reverses the mudrās in these two directions and translates, “Draw a bow-shaped maṇḍala in the east that is marked with the symbol of a lotus radiating a blazing light. Draw a triangular-shaped maṇḍala in the south that is marked with a bowl radiating a blazing light.”
backnub phyogs su ni dkyil ’khor kun nas zlum por byas te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “Draw a circular maṇḍala in the west,” with no mention of it being “made entirely of light.”
backlho nub mtshams su ni dkyil ’khor gzhu ’dra ba bya ste Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Draw a maṇḍala shaped like a bow in the southeast.”
backIt is not clear what kind of kingship is meant.
backtshul khrims dang ldan pa’i dge slong dang dge slong ma dang / D. The Tibetan associates the modifier “disciplined” (śīlavantaḥ, tshul khrims dang ldan pa) with the next group and translates as, “disciplined monks or nuns.”
backga pur dang gur gum dang li shi la wang ga’i dri zhim pos dri zhim par byas pa/ D. The Tibetan makes no reference to the mouth or face and translates as, “they should perfume themselves with the sweet fragrance of camphor, safron, and clove.”
backdus mtshams las rgyal ba’i dkyil ’khor gyi phyi rol de nyid du ha cang yang mi nye ha cang mi ring bar gzhag par bya’o/ D. The line that translates as, “outside the maṇḍala Victorious over the Divisions of Time, not too far…” was reconstructed partially based on the Tibetan and remains very unclear.
backrgyab kyis phyogs pa ma yin pas D. The Tibetan translates as “so that his back does not face them.”
backchu legs par gtsang sbra byas pa dang / srog chags med pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “with water that is exceedingly clean and free of living creatures.”
backThis passage is rendered in prose in the Tibetan.
backde bas na sngar bshad pa’i cho gas spyan drang bar bya’o/ Tib. The entire passage from “Then” until “divine youth” is omitted in the Tibetan, which translates as “Then he should summon [the deities] using the previously described rite.”
back’bras sA lu’i chan zho dang bcas pa dang sbrang rtsi dang ldan pa’i ’o thug khyad par can gyis nye bar sbyar ba’i mar la btsos pa’i snum khur gyi ’breng bu la sogs pa dang / kaN+Da la sogs pa’i bza’ ba thams cad ni de bzhin gshegs pa rnams la dbul bar bya’o/. Some of the Skt. terms in this list of articles, such as aśoka (“free from sorrow,” omitted in the translation here), are problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “He should offer all kinds of foods such as rice porridge with yogurt, braided cakes fried in butter that have been prepared with a special milk porridge containing honey and the like, as well as candied sugar and the like to the tathāgatas.”
backmar gyis gang ba dang tsan+dana gyi thang chu sbrang rtsi’i snying po dang ’o mar btsos pa’ bza’ ba ni Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “dishes that are filled with butter as well as sandalwood resin and concentrated honey cooked in milk.”
back“The gods” om. Tib.
backThe Skt. term garbhoktāraka in this list could not be identified. The Tibetan transliterates the term, which does not help to identify it.
back’phags pa dang ’phags pa ma yin pa’i lha thams cad la Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “to all the noble and ordinary gods.”
backThe Skt. translates as, “mantras,” and the Tibetan translates as, “deities.” Both seem doctrinally correct, as a deity is equated and identified with its mantra.
backThe Skt. translates as, “mantras,” and the Tibetan translates as, “deities.” A deity is normally equated and identified with its mantra.
backAgain, the Skt. translates as, “mantras,” and the Tibetan translates as, “deities.”
backIt is not clear which procedure this verse refers to.
backspyan ras gzigs la gang gsungs dang / /gang gsungs phyag na rdo rje la/ /rang rang gi ni sngags dag gis/ /sngags spyod don du bsgrub pa’o/ /cho ga gcig pu blta bya ste/ /rtag tu rjes su mthun par bya/ D. The Tibetan translation of this verse translates as, “One can accomplish the goal of mantra practice / That was taught for Avalokiteśvara / And that was taught for Vajrapāṇi / Using their respective mantras. / This ritual is considered unique, / So one should always follow it.”
backgtsor mthun pa’i bya ba byas te Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “performing the rite with the best.” The Tibetan does not include an equivalent of the Skt. term for “food” (nivedya) and it appears to read the Skt. term “best” (*pramukha) here in place of the extant Skt. pradāna.
back’byung po thams cad pa’i gtor ma rgya cher gtong bar bya’o/ Tib. “Extensive” is recovered from the Tibetan because of the Skt. lacunae.
backIt is not clear whether it is their own accomplishments, or those of ordinary beings.
backdge ba’i rtsa ba bla na med pa’i byang chub kyi snying po gnon par bya ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as “who possess the root of virtue and will ascend the seat of unsurpassed awakening.”
backIt seems that the initiands spoken of here are not the same as the ones in the previous paragraph. It is also possible that the order of contents has been altered because of redactional corruptions.
back“Wish to enter the maṇḍala” om. Tib.
backSkt. tantra. It is unclear what kind of threads. Tantra basically means “warp,” but if all the warp was pulled out, the cloth would disintegrate.
back“Hairs removed” probably refers to the shearing off of the fine fibers from the surface of the cloth, which would have been the regular practice with handloomed cloth.
backrtsa ba’i sngags kyis lan gzum bzlas te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “incanted with the root mantra three times.”
backlo gsum gnas lo bcu drug pa’i bar Tib. In the Tibetan this sequence is reversed. It states that the procedure should begin with those three years of age and conclude with those who are sixteen.
backThe five locks of hair worn at the forehead are a distinguishing feature of Mañjuśrī.
backgtsug phud gcog gis nye bar mdzes pa’am/ gtsug phud gsum gyis nye bar mdzes pa skra dang ldan pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “adorned with either a fivefold topknot of hair, a single topknot, or a threefold topknot.”
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the lotus mudrā (padmamudrā).
backlhag ma ni spang bar bya’o/ Tib. The phrase “the remaining ones should be omitted” is a translation of the Skt. that has been emended based on the Tibetan. The Skt. variant, “should be served and discarded,” doesn’t seem to fit into the context of the passage. The Skt. sevyā varjyā was therefore emended to śeṣā varjyā.
back“Bow their heads to the master” om. Tib.
backThe lacunae in the Skt. indicate that there should be another term or group of terms before the word “master.”
backdkyil ’khor la blta zhing / dang por re zhig rig pa’i dbang bskur ba byin te phyag rgya chen po gtsug phud lnga ’ching du gzhug par bya’o/ D. Because of the lacunae in the Skt., this line has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backOne of the two bowls is used as the lid.
backdkyil ’khor gyi nang du Tib. Because of the lacunae in the Skt., the phrase “inside the maṇḍala” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backIt was earlier mentioned that this vase was placed in the second maṇḍala, i.e., “outside the [inner] maṇḍala.”
backHe should presumably sprinkle upon him some of the contents of the jar, which include, as described before, precious substances, grains, and rice.
backBoth the Skt. and the Tibetan (which is missing the word “mantra”) are ambiguous. It is not clear what mantra is being referred to as “the same.” Possibly the mantra stored in the earthenware container.
backgal te de nyid yin na ni rim gyis ’bad pas ’grub par ’gyur ro/ /yang na ci ste gzhan na ni sngags bzlas pa kho nas ’grub par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The translation of the last two sentences follows TMK, which reflects a syntax different from the extant Skt. and probably makes more sense. The extant Skt., which is also supported by the Tibetan, translates as, “If it is the same mantra, they will succeed gradually, after applying effort. If it is another mantra, they will be successful after merely reciting it.”
backsangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das thams cad kyis gnang zhing / sangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad kyis ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi dam tshig dang / dkyil ’khor dang sngags dang phyag rgya thams cad sgrub pa la byin gyis brlabs par ’gyur zhing Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be authorized by all the blessed buddhas and empowered by all buddhas and bodhisattvas into the practices of the worldly and transcendent samayas, maṇḍalas, mantras, and mudrās.”
backThe ācārya empowerment is an empowerment to the position of a spiritual master (ācārya).
backsangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ rdzu ’phrul chen po dang ldan pa thams cad kyis ’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi sngags rgyud dag ’don pa dang / dkyil ’khor bri ba dang ston pa dang phyag rgya dang spyod pa ston pa dang rang nyid spyod cing ston par khyod la rjes su gnang zhing brjod par bya ba yang tshe nyid la yin la/ phyi nas skye ba brgyud pa dag la ni sangs rgyas nyid thob par ’gyur ba yin no/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the extremely powerful buddhas and bodhisattvas have now authorized you as a teacher who can recite the mantra systems of all mundane and supramundane deities, draw their maṇḍalas, display them, teach their mudrās and conduct, and perform them yourself. You shall attain buddhahood in this lifetime and throughout the succession of your future births.”
backThis verse and the next are rendered in prose in the Tib.
backlha thams cad yid la byas Tib. The Tibetan translates as “focus on all of the gods.”
backIn the Skt., “yakṣas” is repeated for the second time at this location.
backme tog gtor te/ tsan+da na dang kur kum gyis bsangs la sngar bstan pa’i cho gas slar gshegs su gsol bar bya ste/ sems kyi thams cad btang ba yin no/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Strew flowers over them, perform an incense offering of sandalwood and saffron, dismiss them following the aforementioned procedure, and imagine that they have departed.”
backSince in this case it is listed as one of the three items, the “bali” could be a sacrificial cake similar to a Tibetan gtor ma.
backThese offerings are probably placed upon a float of cupped leaves and allowed to float downstream.
backsa phyogs de legs par byugs shing ’jam par byas te/ legs par phyag pa byas nas ba lang gi lci bas byug tu gzhug pa’am/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He should sweep that patch of ground, smooth it over, clean it well, and smear it with cow dung.”
back’o ma dang / ’bras chan Tib. The Tibetan translates this as two items.
back“Garland-like” om. Tib.
backoM dza Tib.
backgrogs po dag ’di ni ’byung po thams cad nyon cig /sngags ’di nyid ni yi ge gcig gi dkyil ’khor gnyis pa’i cho ga thams cad du dgos pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “My friends, all you beings, listen up! This single syllable mantra is required for all of the rituals related to its maṇḍala.”
backdkyil ’khor gru bzhi mnyam pos nye bar mdzes pa/ Tib. The Tib. translates as “The maṇḍala should be adorned with four sides of equal length.” The reference to a “triple maṇḍala” in the Skt. probably refers to a square maṇḍala with three concentric zones. Reference to this triple maṇḍala is omitted in the Tibetan.
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the lotus mudrā (padmamudrā).
backIt is not clear which door is meant (possibly the eastern, which is where one would start and finish drawing the symbols, drawing them in lines surrounding the maṇḍala). The Skt. grammar also allows for interpreting the location “outside the door base” as referring only to the “man of youthful appearance.”
backstong rtsa brgyad Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one thousand and eight.”
backBecause it is listed here as one of three items, this “bali” could be a sacrificial cake similar to a Tibetan gtor ma.
backyi ge gcig pa’i sngags kyis ci ltar ’dod par gtor ma dang lha bshos dang mar me dang bdug pa dang spyan drang ba dang gshegs su gsol ba rnams bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One can use the one-syllable mantra for whatever one likes, such as offering bali, cakes, lamps, or incense and invoking and dismissing the deities.”
backOm. Tib.
backshing a mra Tib. The Tibetan indicates this rite should take place near a mango tree.
backBoth the Skt. and Tibetan texts may have read the term “wife” along with “horses, or elephants” due to a lacuna in the text.
backchu ’dod pas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one who desires water.”
backyang srin pos zin pa la Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “if he is possessed by rākṣasas again.”
backtshangs pa’i srin pos N, H; tshangs pa’am srin pos D.
backlan gsum Tib. The Tibetan says that the water should be incanted three times.
backIt is not clear what “brahmins’ land/place” (brahmasthala) is.
backThe “three diseases” could refer to diseases caused by any of the three humors.
backIt is not clear what kind of crossing is meant, possibly across a body of water, or a crevice, etc.
back“That destroys rākṣasas” om. Tib.
backnad thams cad kyis thams cad du btab pa la ni ri’i rtse mor bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Draw it on a mountaintop when beset on all sides by all manner of diseases.”
backbram ze’i ldum ra Tib. The reading “brahmin’s garden,” adopted here from the Tibetan, reflects the Sanskrit *brahmavāṭikāyām. The extant Skt. brahmapālikāyām could be a corruption of this term.
back“Midday” om. Tib.
backIn the Tibetan this line is included in the prose section and not in the verse.
backThis line of verse is omitted in the Tib.
backskyes pa’am yang na bud med kyang / /thos nas the tshom med byas na/ ci ’dod rnam pa sna tshogs ni/ /thob ’gyur rtag tu phun sum tshogs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If a man or woman learns this / And performs it without doubt, / They will get whatever they want / And they will always prosper.”
backOm. Tib.
back“It also brings complete omniscience” om. Tib.
backkhyod kyi ras ris kyi cho ga rab ’byam sngags thams cad sgrub par byed pa la rab tu ’jug pa mthar gyis ngas bshad par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “I will give a thorough introduction to the extensive ritual procedure for your painting that renders all mantras effective.”
backdkyil ’khor gyis Tib. The Tibetan omits the term master.
backSkt.: oṁ śodhaya śodhaya sarvavighnaghātaka mahākāruṇika kumārarūpadhāriṇe | vikurva vikurva | samayam anusmara | tiṣṭha tiṣṭha | huṁ huṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backrigs ngan pa’i skyes gnas yongs su spangs pa/ Tib. The translation of this sentence is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. seems corrupt. The latter seems to be saying, “Those from a womb [of a woman who is] too dark should not be avoided.” The Tibetan, where the “dark womb” is interpreted as “low caste,” seems to reflect the reading without the negative particle (“should be avoided,” in place of “should not be avoided”). It is also possible that the Skt. could be describing the physical qualities of the girl’s vulva (yonican mean “vulva” as well as “origin”).
backdbang po ma mtshang ba med pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Her faculties should be unimpaired.”
backkhug rna med cing sprin dang bral ba Tib. The phrase “fog, and clouds” is taken from the Tibetan. This seems to be a translation of the Sanskrit *nirhāra and *vadala respectively.
backIt is not clear whether this is the “great five-crested mudrā” (cf. #UT22084-088-038-4580), or another mudrā.
backras bal de dang bu mo de Tib. The Tibetan indicates that the maṇḍala master should sprinkle both the girl and the cotton with the incanted water.
backTib. omits the reference to the four intermediate directions.
backtsan+dana dkar po dang gur gum dang ga pur gcig tu byas pa’i bdug pas bdug par bya ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He should perform the incense offering with incense that contains a mixture of white sandalwood, saffron, and camphor.”
backsgrub pa’i grogs mchog gi slob dpon gyis sbyin par bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or he should have the most advanced master who is his practice assistant offer it.”
backbud med dang khye’u’am/ bu mo’am skyes pa rnams bcos ma’am bcos ma ma yin pa Tib. The phrase “Women, boys, girls, and men—both real and imagined” has been supplied from the Tibetan, filling in the lacunae in the Skt.
backrgyal ba dang grub pa dang sbyin pa dang byin pa dang khyer cig ces pa dang / dpal dang ’bras bu dang / ’bras bu yod pa dang / cho ga dang brgya byin dang / Tib. The Skt. of this passage is corrupt, and the Tibetan is also unclear.
backHere this title refers to the person who performs the ritual.
back“And that his present life will be short” om. Tib.
backshar ram byang phyogs su phyogs par bzhag la bdag nyid srung ba dang lha la dbul ba’i kha zas zas su sbyin no/ D. The Tibetan translates, “He should place her facing east or north, perform the protection rite on himself, and then offer her food that is fit to be offered to a deity.”
backkar sha’i grangs Tib. The Tibetan just has “sixteen karṣas,” without any mention of palas.
backThe Tibetan translation starts rendering this material in verse here.
backde la rab ni bcu drug bya/ Tib. The line that translates as, “The best would be of sixteen units” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backphran tshegs las la sgrub pa ni/ /gcig dang lnga ni tha ma’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates, “For the performance of a minor rite, / It may be the smallest size of five or one units.”
backThe details of the procedure described here are far from clear. It is not even clear whether the select numbers ranging from one to sixteen refer to the units of weight (karṣas or palas), or the number of strands in the thread.
backThe translation of this line is based on the Tibetan.
backThe translation of this line is based on the Tibetan.
backsrog chags yan lag byung ba’am/ D; srog chags yan lag min byung/ Y, K, N, H; The translation of this line follows the Tibetan where prāṇya (in the Skt. phrase āprāṇyāṅga) refers to a living being, but it remains problematic. In D, the phrase āprāṇyāṅgasamutthaṃ is interpreted in the affirmative and translates as, “derived from the bodies of living beings.” The readings from Y, K, N, and H, try to account for the negative verb in Skt. and translate as, “derived from something that is not the body of a living being.”
backThe Tib. indicates that the thread should be “infused” with the substances, not “censed” as attested in the Skt.
backyongs su bsgo/ Tib. The Tibetan indicates that the thread should be “saturated” with these substances.
backma ni smad pa ma yin dang / /’phye bo ma yin skra dkar spangs/ J, C; ma ning smad pa ma yin dang / /’phye bo ma yin skra dkar spangs/ D. The third and fourth pādas of this verse in J and C translate as, “His mother should not be reviled, / He should not be crippled, / And he should not have grey hair.” The third and fourth pādas of this verse in D translate as, “He should not be a eunuch, be reviled / Or be crippled, and he should not have grey hair.” The third pāda of the Skt. appears to be a dittography of the second pāda (“free from coughing and asthma”).
back#UT22084-088-038-9270om. Tib.
backkun gyis bkur ba’i mtshan nyid ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “His qualities should be praised by all.”
backgrogs po Tib. “His assistants” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backgrogs po rigs bzang rab bsngags shing/ /blo ldan bzo ni mkhas pa dang / /shin tu khyad par mchog gyur pa’i/ ras thag bzang la bskul bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “His assistants should be praiseworthy and of excellent caste, / Intelligent and skilled in weaving. / Request [them to weave] excellent cloth / That is of particularly high quality.”
backzur bzhir Tib. The Tibetan also notes that the cloth should have four corners.
backtha ma ni zheng du bde bar gshegs pa’i mtho gang chur ni khru brgyad kyi phyed do/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The smallest should measure the span between the Sugata’s thumb and index finger in width and be four cubits long.” The ratio of length to width preserved in the Tibetan is highly unlikely, and the Skt. is unclear and possibly corrupt.
backThe “central region” refers here roughly to the area between the Himalayas and the Vindhya Mountains, including the Gangetic plain.
backThe last line of this verse is a bit of a mystery, as it doesn’t seem to fit the context. The Tibetan, however, corroborates this reading, interpreting it as the period following the Buddha’s parinirvāṇa.
backras ris ’grub par gsungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “taught the accomplishment of the painting.”
backThe translation of this verse is uncertain. Both the Skt. and the Tibetan are unclear.
backde la sngags ni gzhug par bya/ Tib. The reading “mantra” is taken from the Tibetan. The Skt. has “tantra.”
backdpa’ bo chen po ’jam dpal gyis/ /sngags kyi bzlas pa gsungs pa dang / /’das pa’i sangs rgyas mang po dang / /ngas kyang da ltar gzungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Now I too have taught / The mantra recitation that was taught / By the great hero Mañjuśrī / And by many past buddhas.”
backde nas grub pa pos bzo bo legs par bslab pa’i ri mo mkhan nam/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Only a skilled painter well trained in his craft by the practitioner.”
backde nyid kyi sngags kyis lan brgya rtsa brgyad ’khor dang bcas pa la yang bzla ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “incant them with the very same mantra, and its associated [mantras], one hundred and eight times.”
backkha dog pad+ma’i ge sar bzhin du Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “His color is either tawny like the color of lotus filaments.”
backThe interpretation of this mark is uncertain, as such lines painted on the forehead indicate either a follower of Śiva (if the lines are horizontal), or of Viṣṇu (if they are vertical).
back’dam bu’i mdog ’dra ba Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “autumn reed.”
backlag pa g.yon na Tib. The extant Skt. witness translates as, cāmara, or “a yak-tail whisk” here, but the Tibetan lag pa g.yon na, which reflects the Sanskrit *vāmahasta (“[in] the left [hand]”), fits the context better.
backIt is uncertain whether the Skt. calana / calanikā actually means “short trousers” (cf. Edgerton). In the Tibetan it is translated with etymological literalness as g.yo ba or “wavering.”
backThe Skt. is very vague here, as it uses the term ākāra, which means “form/appearance,” or sometimes “countenance.” The Tibetan understands this term to refer here to Vajrapāṇi’s apparel.
backcha byad zhi ba’i bdag nyid Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “with a peaceful appearance.”
backbrag gi tshogs kyis shin tu nye bar mdzes par byas pa/ Tib. The “king of mountains” is Mount Sumeru. The Tibetan translates as, “adorned with a mountain range.”
backrin po che’i ut+pa las Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “lotuses made of precious stones,” reflecting the Skt. compound ratnotpala°.
backThe Tib. omits everything from “richly bestrewn with flowers” to “sparkling with the colors of precious jewels.”
backpad+ma’i gtsug gtor Tib. The Tibetan identifies this tathāgata as *Padmoṣṇīṣa.
backsdug bsngal thams cad zhi bar byed pa’i spyan gyi rgyal po Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Skt. Sarvaduḥkhapraśamanaṃ *Locendraṃ.
backrang sangs rgyas thams cad kyi ’og du Tib. The Tibetan reading, “beneath,” has been adopted here. The Skt. translates as, “above.” Possibly there is some mix-up, as the maṇḍala becomes asymmetrical at this point—an extra row of figures is now being added to the right of Śākyamuni.
backdman pa Tib. The variant for thie pratyekabuddha’s name in the Tibetan may reflect the Sanskrit *Mandana.
backdkar po’i tog Tib. The Tibetan reads Sita and Ketu as one figure, *Sitaketu, which introduces an error in the Tibetan, where we find only seven names in the list of eight pratyekabuddhas.
backgzhu Tib. The Tibetan translates as “bow.”
backSo called because of a wolf’s great appetite; here it implies a bulging belly.
backkha spu ser ba sen mo ring ba mig dmar ba/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He has a yellow beard, long nails, and red eyes,” or perhaps, “He has a beard, long yellow nails, and red eyes.” The Tibetan omits the phrase “prominent fangs.”
backI.e., Mount Sumeru.
backThe Skt. has the word “tathāgata” after “described,” which doesn’t make sense.
backri de yang ’phags pa spyan ras gzigs dbang phyug gi ’og tu bri’o/ Tib. “Below the noble Avalokiteśvara” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. has “the noble Avalokiteśvara should be,” which seems to be a corruption.
backri de yang shin tu mtho ba rin po che pad+ma rA ga’i them skas ’dra ba/ bai DUr+ya’i rang bzhin rtse mo myu gu ’dra ba bri bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This lofty mountain should be drawn like a staircase of precious ruby with a summit made of beryl that resembles a sprout.”
backha cang yang mi sbom ha cang yang mi rgan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “She is neither too fat nor too old.”
backcung zad lta zhing ’dug pa/ Tib. This translation follows the Tibetan. The Skt. suggests “away from.”
back’jam pa’i dbyangs can ’od chen ni/ /gzhon nu’ang lha mo ’di la dgyes/ /bgegs rnams thams cad bsal ba’i phyir/ /sgrub pa pos kyang yang dag bkur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The great splendorous Mañjughoṣa, / The divine youth, delights this goddess. / The practitioner should venerate her / In order to dispel all obstacles.”
backThe Skt. of this half-stanza could also be translated as, “The queen of men should be installed on the canvas / For the sake of protection and prosperity.”
backHis mountain, described a few paragraphs above, is situated below the lotus seat of Śākyamuni and at the feet of Mañjuśrī.
back’khyil ba che Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “very crooked.”
backmi bzad khro bo’i ngang tshul can/ /sngags kyi lha dag ’gugs par byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “Violent and with a wrathful disposition, / He summons all of the mantra beings.”
back“Is referred to as ‘great lord’ ” om. Tib.
backder ni ras ris gzhag mi bya/ Tib. The Tibetan states that the painting should not be shown to the people described below.
backyid dag lus ni dag ’jug dang / /rjes su bzlas pa byed pa dang / /sngags rten nyid la rtag brtson pa’i/ /mi rnams grub ’dod smos ci dgos/ D. The translation of this verse follows the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to be repetitive and less sound: “What need to speak of those of pure conduct, / Whose nature is to follow pure conduct? / Those who strive for the mantra accomplishment continually / Will definitely gain the mantra accomplishment.”
backbskal pa bye bar sangs rgyas la/ /mchod pa’i bsod nams gang yin pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The merit one gains by making offerings / To the buddhas for millions of eons.”
backshin tu bkrus pa D. The phrase “Tightly woven, thoroughly clean” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. has in this position “keeping the vow well.”
backkha tshar dang bcas pa dang / Tib. The phrase “fringe tassels” in the Tibetan or “fringe” (sadaśa) in the Skt. probably refers to the threads extending beyond the rectangle of the woven cloth on each of the four sides.
back’jam pa’i dbyangs kyi ras ris ni/ /’bring po mthong bar mi byed pa’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translators appear to have read the BHS paṭasyā darśanā (“seeing the painting”) as paṭasyaadarśanā (“not seeing the painting”).
backmyur du rtogs pa’ang ’grub pa ni/ /bzlas pas thob par byed pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Realization and accomplishment / Are swiftly attained through recitation.”
backbud med rnams kyang bu ’thob ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Women will have sons.”
backskye ba gzhan du nges par ni/ /sangs rgyas nyid ni nges thob ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan indicates that buddhahood will be attained “in the next life.”
backde bzhin mchod dang phyag ’tshal dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Likewise through offering and venerating it.” The Skt. of this pāda may be corrupt.
backrab tu gsang ba Y, K, N, H; rab tu gsungs pa D. Y, K, N, and H agree with the Sanskrit ºrahasya.
backkhyod kyi N, H; khyod kyis D; N and H indicate that the “cloth-painting procedure” pertains specifically to Mañjuśrī.
back“Smallest” om. Tib.
backrin po che’i ri la gnas pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Standing on a jewel mountain.”
backThe Skt. aravinda suggests a pink or white variety of lotus.
backde’i ’og tu sgrub pa po Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The practitioner should be painted below that.”
backri’i stod kyi cha khang pa brtsegs pa ’dra ba bri bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The upper portion of the mountain should be drawn to resemble a palace.”
backras ris kyi kho ra khor yug tu ri’i rnam pas yongs su ’khor ba bri bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Depict the edge of the painting as surrounded by images of mountains.”
backThe statement implies that similar gods were described before, but it is not clear where in the text.
backThe Skt. kanyasa can mean “smallest,” but also “lesser/inferior.” This term is used to describe paṭa, which can mean both “cloth/canvas” and “painting,” so either of the two translations of kanyasa is correct. To avoid switching between “smallest” and “lesser,” the former translation has here been used throughout this chapter. The Tib. has tha ma (“lesser”) throughout the chapter but chung gu (“smallest”) in the colophon.
backbskal pa bye bar mi bzad las/ /ras ris mthong ba tsam gyis grol/ D. The Tibetan omits the phrase “whatever evil has been committed or caused to be committed” and translates as, “The terrible karma accumulated over a thousand eons / Will be relinquished merely upon seeing this painting.”
backsangs rgyas bye ba stong phrag ni/ /mthong ba tsam gyis grol ’gyur te/ /ras ris mthong ba tsam gyis kyang / /de yi mod la grol bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thousands of millions of buddhas / Have become liberated merely by seeing it.” The Tibetan then inserts two lines that are not found in the extant Skt. that translate as, “The very moment one sees the painting/ One is instantly liberated.” These two lines are followed by the text corresponding to Skt. 6.8c–f.
backphung po lhag ma dang bcas pa’i mya ngan las ’das pa’i grong khyer du ’gro bar byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that takes [them] to the citadel of nirvāṇa in which the aggregates remain.”
backbyang chub sems dpa’ rnams kyi rgyud nges par byang chub sgrub par byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “that continuously causes them to always accomplish the awakening of all bodhisattvas.”
backbdag gi gsang sngags ’di Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This secret mantra of mine.”
backde bzhin gshegs pa’i nyi ma’i rigs nub pa dang / sangs rgyas kyi zhing thams cad spangs pa dang / sangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad dang / ’phags pa nyan thos dang rang sangs rgyas rnams kyis mun par gyur pa dang / snod kyi ’jig rten rnam par ’jig pa dang ’phags pa’i lam dang / rig pa thams cad dang sngags dang sman dang / nor bu rin po che med pa dang / skye bo dam pa rnams kyis ’jig rten na yongs su ma zin pa dang / sems can gyi khams thams cad ’byung bar ’gyur te/ D. In this passage the Tibetan establishes a different set of verb–subject correspondences than is given in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “when the sun of the line of tatāhagatas has set; when all the buddhafields have been abandoned; when all the buddhas and bodhisattvas and the noble śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas have descended into darkness; when the vessel of the world has been broken; when the noble path, all vidyās, mantras, medicines, and precious gems are lost; and when one can no longer find holy people in the world and this comes to pass in all realms of beings.”
backle lo can dang dran pa nyams pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “beings will be lazy, they will have poor memory.”
backThe Skt. khaṇḍaka is rather problematic and suggests the translation “prone to cause destruction.” Two different readings are available in the Tibetan translation. D translates as, mi srun pa (“malicious”) while the K and Y read mi srung ba (“unprotected”).
backlog pa’i lta ba skye shing Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They will generate wrong views.”
backmtshams med par gzhol zhing shin tu mi bzad pa’i yang shin tu mi bzad pa ’thob pa D. The Tibetan in D translates as, “they will immediately fall into the lower realms and go from one unbearable state to the next unbearable state.” There is no explicit mention of rejecting the Dharma teachings or of going specifically to the Avīci hell.
backoM bAkye nyar+tha dza ya D. D transliterates the Sanskrit as oṃ vakye 'rtha jaya.
backoM bAkye she sha swA D. D transliterates the Sanskrit as oṃ vākyeśeśa svā.
backoM bAkye baM dza ya D. D transliterates the Sanskrit as oṃ vākye vaṃ jaya.
backoM bAkye niS+The ya D. D transliterates the Sanskrit as oṃ vākye niṣṭheya.
backoM bAkye daM namaH D. D transliterates the Sanskrit as oṃ vākyedaṃ namaḥ.
backdam tshig nyams pa dang dam tshig g.yos pa rnams kyi las thams cad byed pa Tib. The translation “involve and activate the samaya” (Skt.: samayagrastāḥ sampracalitāḥ) is problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “They are effective for all activities for those whose samaya is corrupted or whose samaya is shaken.”
backlas kyi tshul dang bcas pa la yang dag par gzhol ba la/ Tib. The Tibetan for this line is far shorter than the Skt. and the translates as, “For those who possess a ritual method and have a particular aim in mind.”
back“In brief” om. Tib.
backgrags pa chung ba Tib. The Skt. alpeśākhya (“insignificant,” “petty”) is rendered as “of little renown” in the Tib.
backchos spyod pa chung ba D. The Tibetan translates as, “weak in religious practice.”
back“Fringe” probably refers to the loose threads extending beyond the edges of the cloth that form a tasseled fringe, which could have been a regular feature of handloomed cloth.
back“Free from hairs” probably refers to the shearing off of the fine fibers from the surface of the cloth, which would have been the regular practice with handloomed cloth.
backIt is not clear how these measurements relate to one another, for example whether this should be “two cubits or four cubits,” or perhaps “two cubits by four cubits”; the translation of this entire paragraph is rather unreliable.
back“Very white” om. Tib.
backzla ba yar ngo’i tshes bcwa lnga la D. The Tibetan translates as, “On the fifteenth day of the bright lunar fortnight.”
backSkt.: oṁ he he bhagavan bahurūpadhara divyacakṣuṣe • avalokaya • avalokaya māṃ samayamanusmara kumārarūpadhāriṇe mahābodhisattva kiṃ cirāyasi | hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backras mi dge ba yang ’grub par ’gyur ro/ Tib. In place of “swiftly” the Tibetan has mi dge ba, which translates as, “nonvirtuous.”
back“On a night augured as favorable by the cries of auspicious birds, at midnight, one should have the painter do the painting. This should be done in a clean place, by a painter who is observing the ritual fast and burning an incense of camphor” om. Tib.
back“First” om. Tib.
backg.yon pa seng ge’i gsan la bzhugs pa/ Tib. The words “his left” are absent from the Skt., but the Tibetan makes it clear that it is his left foot (g.yon pa) that rests on the lion seat (seng ge’i gdan).
back“Charming appearance” om. Tib.
backde bzhin du ’phags pa kun tu bzang po pad+ma dkar po la gnas pa/ gnyi ga yang de ltar bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Like Samantabhadra, he should be standing on a white lotus. This is how both are to be painted.”
back“White” om. Tib.
backcha byad dang kha dog snga ma ci lta ba bzhin bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “their respective complexion and style of dress, as before.”
back“Wearing garlands” om. Tib.
backThe three forms are those of Mañjuśrī, Samantabhadra, and Avalokiteśvara.
backci ltar ’dod pa’i gzugs de bzhin du bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Their figures can be drawn however one desires.”
backdbus su ’phags pa ’jam dpal g.yas du ’phags pa ’jig rten dbang phyug dang / kun du bzang po ci ltar ’dod par nges par bri bar bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Noble Mañjuśrī should be painted in the middle with Noble Avalokiteśvara and Samantabhadra on either side, in the manner one desires.” There is no mention of “other [forms].”
back“Mantra deities” om. Tib.
backIn the Tib., this passage is in prose, not verse.
backIn the Tib., this line is also in prose. The versified section begins with the next line of text.
backdad dang ldan pa’i mi dag la/ /sangs rgyas las ni ’grub ’gyur te/ /sngags rnams thams cad khyad par du/ /dad pa med la mi ’grub bo/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Ritual activities directed toward the Buddhas will work / For those people who have faith, / But mantras in particular / Are not effective for those who lack faith.” The translation of the last two lines is based on the Tibetan because there are lacunae in the Skt.
backgang yang ’jig rten lha dag dang / /de bzhin ’jig rten ’das pa dag /dad ldan kun la ’grub ’gyur te/ /sdig pa dag dang bral phyir ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the worldly deities and / The Supramundane deities / Will be effective for all who have faith / Because they are free of misdeeds.” The Skt. syntax is not clear.
back’jam dpal gzhon nu gang khyod kyis bstan pa’i sems can de dag gi phyir/ le’u’i cho ga rab ’byam ’di thabs sla bas ’grub par ’gyur ba ngas kyang bstan te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, I have taught the extensive chapter on the rite, a method that is easy to master, for the sake of those beings whom you foretold.”
back“I will speak for the benefit of all beings” om. Tib.
backbdag gi tshig gi nus pa gsal bar mdzad cing / sngags kyi spyod pa’i yon tan grub par mdzad pa ni legs so legs so Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Good! Good! Please clarify my potent words and bring about the accomplishment of the qualities of mantra practice.”
backThe Tibetan adds “green” to the list of colors.
backrings pa’i tshul gyis Tib. The phrase “in his beautiful form pleasing to beings” is omitted in the Tibetan. Instead it translates as, “swiftly.”
back“Blessed” om. Tib.
backbcom ldan ’das ni rgyu med pa dang / rkyen med par ’dzum pa mi mdzad de/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A Blessed One does not smile without there being a reason and without there being a cause.”
backtshig gi bye brag Tib. In the Tibetan the Skt. vādya is understood to mean not “music” but “speech” (tshig).
backI.e., the first one of the four paintings described above.
backpad+ma dkar po la tsaN+Dana dang gur gum gyis btags te/ D. This translation of the Skt. is informed by the Tibetan.
back“According to one’s means” om. Tib.
backsgrub pa pos gur gum dang / tsan+dana gyis btags pa’i tsan+dana dkar po’i me tog mchod yon dbul lo/ Tib. The Tibetan adds a line of text here that translates as, “The practitioner presents a welcome offering of white sandalwood flowers combined with saffron and sandalwood.”
backrings pa’i tshul gyis Tib. The phrase “in a form pleasing to beings” is omitted in the Tibetan. The phrase that is used in the Tibetan translates as “swiftly.”
back“And take the painting [into his hands]” om. Tib.
backsgrub pa pos bris pa’i ras ris kyi mtha’ ma’i phyogs nas ’jigs pa med pas ras ris gzung bar bya’o/ /de nas bzung ba tsam gyis ’phur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Without fear, the practitioner should grasp the edge of the painting on which they are depicted and they will immediately take flight.”
back“Hundreds of thousands” om. Tib.
back“Enjoying” om. Tib.
backbyang chub sems dpa’ gzhan lta smos kyang ci dgos/ ’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa’i sngags thams cad dang / bgegs thams cad kyang ’jig par byed de/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Bodhisattvas, why say more? It can destroy all worldly and transcendent mantras and all obstacles.”
backBecause of the double meaning of the word akṣara, this statement could also be translated as, “only this one is called imperishable.”
backyi ge gcig gis don thams cad sgrub par byed pa/ bya ba thams cad byed pa/ sngags thams cad gcod par byed pa/ ma rungs pa’i las rnams kyi sdig pa thams cad rab tu ’jig par byed pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This single syllable accomplishes every goal, carries out all ritual actions, nullifies all mantras, and removes all manner of sins related to the actions of wicked beings.”
backoM n+thI Tib.
backgrogs po dag ’di nyid ni mchog tu gsang ba dam pa las thams cad byed pa/ yi ge gcig pa zhes bya ba rig pa’i rgyal po ’da’ bar bya ba ma yin pa/ sems can kyis thub par dka’ ba ’byung po thams cad kyi bkra shis pa/ sangs rgyas thams cad sgrub par byed pa/ sngags thams cad kyi mnga’ bdag ’jig rten thams cad kyi dbang phyug D. The Tibetan translation in D parses the passage differently and translates as, “Friends, this king of vidyās called One Syllable that is supremely secret and can be employed in all rites cannot be overpowered and is difficult for any being to acquire. It brings good fortune to all beings, accomplishes all buddhas, is the master of all mantras, and is the lord of all worlds.” The equivalent of the phrase “All the lords of wealth” does not appear in the Tibetan.
backThe Skt. grammar of this clause could suggest a slightly different sense: “Whomever [the mantra] touches through [the agency of] the reciter.”
backka ra bI ra dkar po’i so shing la/ lan bdun bsngags te Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one bites a tooth stick from the white oleander tree that has been incanted seven times.”
backskyes pa’i rtswa tsha tri ka D. The Tibetan transliteration of the Skt. chatrikā appears to be classified as a type of grass and not a mushroom.
backrna ba’i nad la ’brug sgrogs pa las skyes pa’i rtswa tsha tri ka zhes bya ba/ glang po che’i rgyab tu reg par byas la/ rang gi lo ma’i nang du btums nas me chung ba la bsregs te shin tu ’jam par byas la/ rgyam tshwa’i phye ma chu dro ’jam tsam dang sprus te lan bdun bsngags pas rna ba bkang ba dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one has ear pain, take a type of grass called chatrika that grows after a thunderstorm and that has been in contact with an elephant’s backside and wrap it in its own leaves. Then, cook it over a low fire until it is extremely soft. Stir in warm water that has been mixed with sea salt, incant it seven times, and fill the ear with it.”
backUnlike in other recipes in this part, there is no mention here, possibly due to textual omission, that the ingredients should be incanted with the mantra.
backThe Skt. naṣṭaśalyaḥ puruṣaḥ literally means “lost-splinter person.” A “lost” splinter possibly means a splinter that is completely hidden in the flesh.
backThe Skt. adds at this point “in the roots,” which doesn’t seem to make sense in the context.
backldan pa’i nad kyi tshad pas ’khru ba’am/ ’khru ba la D. The Tibetan translates as, “In the case of dysentery or a feverish dysentery resulting from a disease of the two humors.”
backrtsa ba D.
backdang ’thungs D. The Tibetan translation in D adds this phrase which translates as, “and drink it.”
backlan gcig gam gnyis Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “once or twice.”
backmar bzang po Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “pure ghee.”
backlo gsum mam lo lnga’i bar du bu btsa’ ba’i dus su khrag ’byung ba’am/ lo du ma’i bar du bu ma chags pa’am/ D The translation of these lines is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. is not clear.
backThis suggests non-Buddhist mantras.
backThe English name is “sensitive water plant.”
backshing a la ma bu sa’i rtsa ba’i lo ma dang lhan cig btags nas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one should mix the root of the ālambuṣa plant with its own leaves.” However, it is possible that the Tibetan term for “leaf” (lo ma) is a corruption of ’o ma, the Tibetan term for “milk.” This emendation would bring the Tibetan in line with the Skt.
backmkha’ ’gro ma’i gdon gyis Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “ḍākinī demon.”
backci ste sgrub pat ’dod na ni las phran tshegs rnams bya ba ma yin te/ D. The translation of this sentence is based on the Tibetan, which makes better sense in the context. The beginning of this sentence in the Skt. translates as, “If one wants to accomplish minor tasks.”
backlo ma’i spyil po D. The Tibetan translation in D translates as, “a thatched hut of leaves.”
backI.e., the best of the three previously described types of painting.
backdri zhim po’i ’bru mar D. The Tibetan includes a phrase that translates as, “nicely scented oil” between “olibanum oil” and “ghee.”
back’bum phrag gcig Tib.
back’bum Tib.
back’khor de dag dang yang ’di lhan cig tu spyad par ’gyur ro D. The Tibetan includes an additional phrase here that translates as, “and will travel together with of the circle [of vidyādharas].”
backOm. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backThe part “and will be placed on the pinnacle of their victory banners” has been supplied from the Tibetan, as the Sanskrit here is corrupt.
back’jam dpal yang ’di’i dge ba’i bshes gnyen du ’gyur ro D. The phrase “will become one’s spiritual friend” has been supplied from the Tibetan to fill in the lacunae in the Skt.
backgzhan yang las kyi sgrub pa po yod de/ Tib. The phrase “There are, however, those practitioners,” has been supplied from the Tibetan, filling in the lacunae in the Skt.
backdgon pa chen por zhugs te/ gnas gang du pad+ma chen po yod pa’i mtsho dang ldan pa’i ri’i rtse mo gcig tu brten nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should enter a vast forest and take shelter in a place where there is a mountain peak with a lake in which there are large lotuses.”
backgnyis pa sgrub pa’i thabs Tib.
backklu rnams mthong ba yang don yod pa yin te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “this is effective in making the nāgas appear.”
backde la zhon nas gang gA’i klung chen por zhugs te D. The Tibetan translates as, “one should board it and enter the great Gaṅgā River.”
backgang gA’i klung chen po mi dor bar yongs su thad ka’am/ chur phyag par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan states only that the boat should be piloted horizontally across the river.
back’khor gyi sngags bzung nas/ D. In place of “or yet another mantra,” the Tibetan translates as, “or a mantra of the retinue.”
backrig pa Tib. The Tibetan identifies this as the “vidyā.”
backrgya mtsho chen po der phyin pa na sgrub pa pos bsgrub pa’i las brtsam par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When he has reached the great ocean, the practitioner should begin the practice ritual.”
back’bros par byed do/ D. The Skt. naśyante could mean either “they perish,” or “are lost/gone.” The Tibetan reflects the latter meaning.
backbyang chub sems dpa’i sems dang mthu mnyam par ’gyur/ Tib. The translation “One will become equal in mental power to a bodhisattva” is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. is unclear, but suggests the translation, “One will become a bodhisattva who knows the minds [of beings].”
backsangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ dang / rang sangs rgyas dang ’phags pa nyan thos ma gtogs pa/ klu’i rgyal po thams cad dang srin po thams cad dang gnod sbyin thams cad dang / lha thams cad dang lha ma yin thams cad dang / sems can thams cad kyang ’di’i bka’ bzhin byed cing dbang du ’gyur ro/ ’di’i sngags grub pa de dag la yang byams pa’i bdag nyid du ’gyur zhing rjes su dga’ bar ’gyur ro/ /sems can thams cad kyis kyang mi thub pa’i bar du ’gyur ro/ D. The Skt. syntax is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “Not only will the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śravakas act on one’s command and come under one’s control, but so too will all the nāga kings and all the rākṣasas, yakṣas, gods, asuras, and all other beings. They will be loving toward and delight in those who have accomplished this mantra so that no being can assail him.”
backcho ga snga mas yang dag par bzhag pa’i ras ris mdun du gzhag par bya ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They should place them in front of the painting, which should be set up following the aforementioned procedure.”
backsangs rgya bcom ldan ’das rnams la mchod pa dang bsnyen bkur byed par mngon par dga’ bar ’gyur zhing / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One will delight in worshiping and serving the blessed buddhas.”
backThe “twice born” are the members of the three higher castes in the four caste system.
backchu bo gang gA’i ’gram dan ni/ D. The Bhāgīrāthī, which is one of the headstreams of the Gaṅgā, is simply rendered into Tibetan as the Gaṅgā.
backsin+du nar ma dA nang dang/ D. The Tibetan appears to omit the “Oxus” river.
backSitā is another name for the Gaṅgā.
backI.e., the bodhisattvas.
backThe phrase “those with the ten powers” is an epithet for the buddhas.
backrgya yul che dang li yul dag Tib. Here the Tibetan adds Khotan (li yul) to the list.
backnai ka sha dang cho ’phrul bstan/ D; ne ka sha dang cho ’phrul bstan/ N. The Tibetan identifies the place as *Naikaśa or *Nekaśa.
backsngags bzlas mngon par ’dod pas bya/ Tib. “With great yearning” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “all around” (samantataḥ).
backtshul khrims spyod cing shin tu dben/ Tib. The Tibetan omits “be truthful,” and instead translates as, “remain in seclusion.”
backsngags spyod pa la dga’ ba yi/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Taking delight in the mantra practice.”
backsems can sdig sbrul la sogs pa/ ’spangs pa’i sa phyogs ’dod pa yis/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One desiring a place that is free / From crawling creatures and the like.”
backsngags rig sngags ni brten byas na/ sbyor ba thams cad rab tu ’grub/ N, H; sngags rig sngags ni rten byas na/ sbyor ba thams cad rab tu ’grub/ Y, K; sngags rigs sngags ni brten byas na/ sbyor ba thams cad rab tu ’grub/ D. Following the reading in N, H, Y, and K, the Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-9684 translates as, “The mantra adept should rely on the mantra / And accomplish every application.” The Tibetan translation omits the next seven and a half verses (Skt. 10.34cd–41) and begins to correspond to the Skt. once again at #UT22084-088-038-9692 (mahāśmāśānāny etāni), where the Tibetan for this line (gzhan yang dur khrod chen po ni) reflects the possible variant *mahāśmasāne punarapi.
backThe Skt. text of this line is lost.
backThe Skt. text of the remaining part of this line is lost.
backThis is an epithet for the Gaṅgā.
backOne word (suvigāṃ) in this line could not be identified.
backbsten pa Y, J, K, N, C, H; bstan pa D.
back’on kyang sngags ni bstan pa yis/ /cung zad dus ni bstan pa’o/ /dam tshig tshogs pa’i rgyu ldan na/ /de las gzhan du’ang ’gro bya ste/ D. The Tibetan phrase dam tshig tshogs pa’i rgyu ldan(*samayagaṇahetunā?) is obscure, and appears to be a variant reading of #UT22084-088-038-9694samaye somagrahe 'travat. The Tibetan might translate as, “However, one may remain for a short time/ In order to teach the mantra. / If one is impelled by a set of samayas, / Then one should go elsewhere.” Alternately, the lines dam tshig tshogs pa’i rgyu ldan na/ de las gzhan du’ang ’gro bya ste/ might be translated as, “If one has a reason (such as accumulating samayas), / Then one should go elsewhere.”
backbde gshegs mchod rten bzhugs pa yi/ /sa steng dag la rtag tu bsten/ /’jig rten mu stegs thams cad ni/ /lta ba log par ltung ba dang / /gzhan yang stegs su gyur pa rnams/ sngags rig pas ni rtag tu spang / D. The Tibetan for #UT22084-088-038-9700 translates as, “One should always stay close to places / Where there are caityas of the Sugata. / The mantra master should always avoid / All manner of worldly heretics/ Who have fallen into false views and / Reside at other holy sites.”
backdad cing mos pas sgrub pa’i thabs kyis lam dam pa brtsam par bya ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should embark on the supreme path of the practice method with faith and resolve.”
backras chen po Tib. In place of “superior,” the Tibetan has “large.”
backThe Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-9710 suggests that the Tibetan should be read as “peahen” even though no gender is indicated here.
backga pur dang tsan+dana gyi dud pa bsregs la/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “camphor and sandalwood.”
backde nas nyi ma shar ba’i dus su lha’i rang bzhin gyi rma bya ni rma bya chen po’i rgyal mor ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, at sunrise, the peahen with the nature of a deity will become the great queen of peahens.”
backbar gyi bskal pa drug cur ’tsho bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. One eon of Manu equals seventy-one “great eons.” The Tibetan translates as, “One will live for sixty intermediate eons.”
back“Clay from a riverbank” om. Tib.
back“Rudrākṣa beads” om. Tib.
backOm. Tib.
backde dag thams cad pa’i rnam lngas bkrus pa’am/ chus gtor ba tsam byas la D. The Tibetan translates as, “smear them all with the five products or sprinkle them with water.”
backcho ga’i rgyal po sgrub pa’i thabs kyi sngags ma gtogs pas/ D. The part “with the exception of the mantras employed in subsidiary practices” could be corrupt. The Tibetan translates as, “with the exception of the mantras of the sādhana of the king of rites,” which seems to be even less plausible.
backmtshon dang yo byad dang sems can Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “weapons, implements, or beings.”
back“Venerable” om. Tib.
back“Lightning” om. Tib.
backThe phrase “live in a divine palace made of precious jewels and gems” is partially informed by the Tibetan. The Skt. is unclear, but it could translate as, “wear divinely splendid jewels and gems.”
backlha’i nor bu rin po che’i gzhal med khang la spyod pa dang gzhon pa gang sngar yongs su brtags pa sa’i rang bzhin grub na/ de nyid ’dir mthu chen po dang ldan par ’gyur te/ Tib. The meaning of this sentence in the Skt. is unclear. Possibly the abilities of the particular bird or animal previously crafted as a conveyance will be magically enhanced. The Tibetan treats the final line of #UT22084-088-038-9714 and the opening line of Skt. 10.56 as a single, continuous sentence.
backgzhan gyi sngags ’gugs par byed pa grub pa rnams kyi brten pa’i gnas su gyur pa/ D. The meaning in the Skt. is again not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “it will become a place that provides a basis for all of the siddhis and attracts the mantra beings of others.” Alternately, the Tibetan might translate as, “it will become a place of refuge to all of the siddhas and will attract the mantra beings of others.”
backsems can thams cad zil gyis gnon cing mchod par yang ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One will overpower all beings and be venerated by them.”
backstobs bcu dang / byang chub sems dpa’i sa nges par thob par ’gyur te/ Tib. In this line the Tibetan repeats the content of previous lines and translates as, “[One will] certainly attain the ten powers and the bodhisattva levels.”
backmdor na las dam pa thams cad gnas dam pa dag tu gnas nas/ ras ris dam pa dag gi mdun du mchod pa dam pa la mngon par dga’ bas las dam pa gzhan dag kho na bya’o/ Tib. The meaning of the last two sentences in the Skt. is not clear. The Tibetan translates as, “In short, having maintained all the supreme rites at the supreme places, one delights in the supreme worship in front of the superior painting. Only then should one engage in the other supreme rites.”
backchos kyi sprin las byung ba’i sngags bzang po la ’jug pa nyid kyi phyir dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “to engage the excellent mantra produced from The Cloud of Dharma.”
backsngags kyi thabs sgrub pa’i cho ga rab tu gsang ba nyid kyi phyir dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “for the sake of the secret rite used to accomplish the mantra.”
backsangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad dang rang sangs rgyas dang ’phags pa nyan thos kyi bdag nyid chen po ’byung ba nyid kyi phyir/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “and to produce those with the greatness of all the buddhas, bodhisattvas, pratyekabuddhas, and noble śrāvakas.”
backAt this point, the Skt. inserts a sentence nearly identical to the preceding one, possibly due to a scribal error.
back“Swiftly” om. Tib.
backsngar bshad pa la rjes su ’jug par bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “according to the instructions previously explained.”
backkhyod kyis bstan pa’i cho ga shes pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “knows the rites you have taught.”
backyid gzhungs pa dang ldan pa/ Tib. Here the Tibetan adds “intelligent.”
backsems can thams cad la sems mnyam pa dang / snying rje dang ldan pa dang tshul khrims dang ldan pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “be equanimous toward all beings, compassionate, and disciplined.”
backsnga ma nyid du rig pa goms par byas pa dang / Tib. The Skt. of the last clause is rather obscure. In place of “[he should have completed] the preliminary practice and be knowledgeable,” the Tibetan translates as, “he should cultivate the vidyā[-mantra] as before.”
backgzugs mdzes pa dang ’dod pa med pa dang / chags med pa dang dpa’ ba dang brtson ’grus brtan pa dang nad med pa ste/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “[He should be] handsome, free of desire, and lacking attachment, heroic, persistent, and free from illness.” The phrase “free from hesitation or vacillation” is omitted.
back“Should be disciplined” om. Tib.
backsgrub pa po yang de dang mnyam pa ste/ yan lag lhag pa’am ma tshang ba cung zad kyang med pa’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The practitioner should be the same as him, having neither additional attributes nor even the slightest lacking.”
backslob dpon dang lhan cig byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po ’phags pa ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa’i dam tshig la rjes su ’jug par ’tshal na/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “I wish to enter into the samaya of the bodhisattva great being, the divine youth Noble Mañjuśrī, with you, master.”
backThe respectful third person is used.
back“Mantra” om. Tib.
backgo rims ci lta ba bzhin du dam tshig bstan te/ gsang ba’i phyag rgya dang rgyud dang sngags dang las kyang dus ring po nyid nas nges par brtags te/ bsam pa shes nas bstan par bya ste/ sngags la sogs pa’i las rnams kyang thams cad du gzhan du ma yin no zhes cho ga ’di ltar bstan yin no/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Following the proper order, he should teach the samayas. After he has examined him for a long time and knows his intentions, he should teach the secret mudrās, tantras, mantas, and rituals. Then he should say, ‘These are the ritual actions of mantra and the like in their entirety. They are not for others.’ This is how he should teach the ritual procedure.”
backFour angular cubits (or one angular yoke), as an astronomical angular distance between celestial objects, is the distance of eight degrees (if the Indian angular measures of cubit and yoke corresponded to those used in ancient Babylon).
backzhib cing mkhas la chog shes dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He should be refined and have expert knowledge of ritual procedure.”
back’jig rten na ni yongs su bsngags/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And be widely praised in the world.”
backsngags grub de bzhin shes nyen can/ Tib. In place of “be protected by it,” the Tibetan translates as, “be skilled in it,” reflecting the Sanskrit *tathādakṣa instead of the extant Skt. tathārakṣa.
backIt is not clear if the Skt. iṅgitajña (Tib. zur tsam gyis go ba) implies ordinary bodily gestures or a secret sign language.
backThe Skt. could also be interpreted as, “He should have performed the recitation [of the mantra] employed at death.”
backnyung ba’ang yang na mang ba’ang rung / /gang gis dga’ ba thob ’gyur ba/ /lus dang srog gi don phyir na/ /nor ni ci ltar sbyin pa bzhin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should give whatever amount of riches, / To support his body and life, / Be it a small amount, large amount, / Or whatever he pleases.”
backde la bsten dang bsnyen bkur byas/ /ri mo byas dang mchod pas ni/ /sangs rgyas rnams dang de bzhin du/ rgyal ba’i sras rnams mnyes par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The buddhas and likewise / The sons of the victor are all pleased / When one serves him, venerates him, / Produces the painting, and makes offerings.”
backrmongs pa’am lhag pa yin yang rung / /rtag tu bla ma brnyas mi bya/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan as the Skt. is unclear.
back#UT22084-088-038-9772om. Tib.
backbu ni chos dang rjes mthun la/ /’bad pas rtag tu bsrung bar bya/ /de dag la ni sangs rgyas chos/ /rtag tu rgyun mi chad par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will always diligently protect / The son who follows the Dharma. / The teachings of the Buddha they possess / Will continue on forever.” The meaning of #UT22084-088-038-9779 is not clear.
backrtag tu sems can kun la ni/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *sattveṣu in place of the extant Skt. dharmeṣu.
back’gro ba’am skye gnas rnam brtags nas/ /’dod pa dag la sbyin par bya/ /de ni ci ltar ’dod pa’i sngags/ /slob mas de la blang bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “After determining their state and origin, / He should give them what they want. / The disciple should take up / Whatever mantra they wish.” The translation of #UT22084-088-038-9784 is partly based on the Tibetan.
backba lang gnas dang mtsho chen dang / Tib. In place of “forts,” the Tibetan translates as, “large lakes” or “oceans.”
backzur gyi rnam pa de nyid shes/ Tib. Just as above in #UT22084-088-038-9754, it is not clear what kind of gestures or signs the term iṅgitākāra (zur gyi rnam pa) signifies.
backsngags kyi las rnams Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “mantra activities.”
back“The Teacher” seems to refer here to the main figure in the painting.
backras ris bar ma’i mdun du ni/ / bdag nyid dag kyang dbul bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “And offer themselves / Before the painting of the middling type.” The Skt. of this pāda is not completely clear.
backdes ni phreng ba thogs nas su/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, with a rosary in hand.”
backsdom chen Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “great vow [holder].”
backsangs rgyas snga ma kun gyis ni/ /tshig ni legs ldan yin zhes gsungs/ Tib. The Tibetan reads yuktaḥ in #UT22084-088-038-9813 as *uktaḥ (zhes gsungs) and translates as, “All previous buddhas have said, / ‘This is the best pronunciation.’ ” Skt. 11.61f is not completely clear.
backde ltar sngags bzlas rab sbyar na/ /sngags ni gang yang myur du ’grub/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one recites the mantra in this way / One will swiftly accomplish any mantra,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *°sudrutaḥ (“very swift”) in place of the extant Skt. °suśrutaḥ (“well learned”).
backdben zhing gdung ba med par ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “In a secluded place free of difficulties.”
backde bas bzlas pa rnam bral dang / /sngags kyi de nyid don legs thos/ Tib. The Tib. translates as, “[A place] completely free of recitation, / [But] where the essential meaning of mantra is clearly heard,” reflecting the Sanskrit *japavigate in place of the extant Skt. jantuvigate.
backThe period described here as the “second half of the second half of the fourth division (bhāga) of the night” must be the last three quarters of an hour before sunrise, when the dawn is already breaking. This seems to be what in the next verse is called the “first junction (sandhyā),” the “junction” implying the meeting of the night and day. It seems the recitation should continue until the risen sun is one angular yoke above the horizon.
backFour angular cubits (or one angular yoke), as an astronomical distance between celestial objects, is the angular distance of eight degrees (if the Indian astronomical angular measures of cubit and yoke corresponded to those used in ancient Babylon).
backde tshe btang ba’i lhag dus la/ /thub pa’i bstan la dge ba bya/ /dam chos bklag la sogs pa ni/ /shes rab pha rol phyin la sogs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “For the rest of the time after [their] dismissal, / One should practice virtue according to the Sage’s teachings / such as reciting sacred Dharma texts / Like the Prajñāpāramitā and the rest.”
backdus dang spyod dang de bzhin ldan/ N, H; dus gsum spyod dang de bzhin ldan D. The Tibetan translation in N and H matches the available Skt. witnesses.
backmi smra grong gi nang du ’dug Tib. The Tibetan translates as “One should sit in the village in silence.” The Tibetan translators and editors have read the Skt. term grāmāntaraṃ (“another village”) as if it reads antaragrāmam (“the interior of a village”).
backzas ni gtsang bar grags pa dang / Tib. In place of “food” (supplied from the Tibetan), the Skt. has vāke which translates as “speech.”
backbyis pa sngags rmongs pa yis/ Tib. The reading “ignorant of mantra” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backIn the older system there are only five destinies, rather than six. Further on, however, in verse 11.85, six destinies are enumerated.
backrnam pa sna tshogs las gar gyi/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Dancing the various modes of karma.”
backBecause of the frequent reversal in the BHS of the neuter and masculine endings, the “beings” (sattvāni) here should perhaps be understood as referring to male beings, rather than excluding women from the status of a being.
backbud med chags pas Tib. In place of “powerless,” the Tibetan translates as, “attached to women,” reflecting the Sanskrit *āsaktāḥ rather than the extant Skt. aśaktāḥ.
backrul ba’i ro Tib. “Rotten flesh” seems to be the Tibetan translation of the Skt. kuṇama, which couldn’t be found in any dictionary.
backdkar po’i chos ni des nyams byed/ /sangs rgyas bstan la zhugs pas ni/ /sdug bsngal ’khor ba’i rgya mtsho nyid/ /thams cad yongs su zlog byed cing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “They corrupt the virtuous doctrine, / But by taking up the Buddha’s teachings, / The ocean of saṃsāra’s suffering / Is entirely undone.”
backgrags pa che zhing chags dang bral/ Tib. This pāda has been translated from the Tibetan as the Skt., which translates as, “Have the eyes of a great lord (maheśa) and are intelligent,” could be partially corrupt.
backgzi brjid ldan zhing kun dang mdza’/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “majestic and a friend to all.”
backde dag la ni sdug bsngal med/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “And they have no suffering.”
backde bzhin sbyig dug zug rngu bzhin/ /zlos pas bud med lus bsam bya/ D. David Gray notes in his study on the Cakrasaṃvara (2007: 41, note 128) that the term gaṇḍaśalya can refer to a goiter.
backblo ngan phung po’i lcags kyus zin/ /’khor ba las ni ’byung mi nus/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Those of little intelligence, caught by the hook of the aggregates, / Are unable to escape saṃsāra.”
backzlos pa ’di la tshul khrims nyams/ /de la grub pa mchog med cing / /grub pa ’bring yang yod med de/ /grub pa tha ma’ang yod ma yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra reciter whose discipline is corrupted / Will not gain the supreme attainment, / Nor will he gain a middling attainment, / Nor even the lowest attainment.”
backgtsang zhing ma chags shes nyen can/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Who are pure, free of craving, and have a spiritual friend.”
backIn the Skt. manuscript, this pāda ends with lacunae. #UT22084-088-038-9870om. Tib.
backblo ldan dag pas bslang ba’i snod/ /gtsang ba’i phyogs su yang dag gzhag D. The lines that correspond to #UT22084-088-038-9870 in the Tibetan translate as, “The wise one [should take] his bowl of alms, / And remain in a clean place.”
backIt is not clear whether he washes his feet or smears them with something.
backphyi rol song nas rkang gnyis bkru/ /de nas yang ni yan lag ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He should wash his feet after having gone out. / Then he should also wash his limbs in the following manner.”
backlag pa g.yas pas byin pa g.yas/ Tib. “His right hand” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backlag pa g.yon pas byin pa g.yon/ /yang na gnyi ga dus gcig bkru/ /sa ni lag g.yon yang bzhag nas/ D. #UT22084-088-038-9872om. Tib. The Tibetan only preserves three of the four lines in the extant Skt. These three lines translate as, “Then his left calf with his left hand, / And again wash both at the same time. / Then he should place some clay in his left hand and.”
backsngar ni yang dag bzhag pa yi/ /bdug pa gtsang ma’i sa dag gis/ /lag pa gnyis ni rab tu bkru/ D. The third verse in the Tibetan is not in the Skt. and appears between #UT22084-088-038-9874 and 11.106c. The Tibetan translates as, “Thoroughly wash his two hands / With the purified and incensed clay / That he previously placed in his left hand.” The phrase “Thoroughly wash his two hands” does not appear in the Skt.
backde nas sngags kyi dag byas pa’i/ /dri med gtsang sbra dag snod la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, in a clean, pure vessel / That has been purified using the mantra.”
backIn the Tib., it is the pot that has been purified by the mantra.
backba ni ser skyas bor ba yi/ /lci ba sar pa blang bar bya/ /srog chags med pa’i chur sbyar bas/ /ston pa la ni dkyil ’khor bya/ D. “He should take some fresh dung / That has been eliminated by a tawny cow, / Mix it with water that is free of living organisms, / And prepare the maṇḍala for the Teacher.” “The Teacher” (śāstur, ston pa) refers here to Śākyamuni Buddha, who is described as the central figure of this maṇḍala in Chapter 2.
backrang sngags Tib. This translation reflects the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *svamantra instead of the extant Skt. sumantra.
backyang ni sems can thams cad kyi/ /longs spyod phyir ni bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This has been taught, moreover, / For the enjoyment of all sentient beings.” The Tibetan omits any mention of a “fourth maṇḍala,” but it is necessary to count a fourth maṇḍala here in order to arrive at the total of seven maṇḍalas mentioned in #UT22084-088-038-9883 and the corresponding Tibetan translation.
back“The sons of those endowed with the ten powers” is an epithet for the bodhisattvas.
backThe Skt. karoddhṛte (lag blangs) translates literally as “hand drawn,” referring to water that is drawn from a well by hand.
backde nas chus reg gdong dang ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then he should wash his face with the water.”
backOne pāda of text appears to be missing in both the Skt. and the Tib.
backdge ba spyod pas lan snga’am bdun/ /cho ga ji bzhin thams cad bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The pious one should do everything / Five or seven times following the proper procedure.” The phrase “the pious one” (dge ba spyod pas) in the Tibetan corresponds to a variant reading of the extant Skt. śubhavāriṇā in #UT22084-088-038-9890 as the Sanskrit *śubhacāriṇā.
backlhung bzed sa ’am lo ma ’am/ Tib. Parṇa can mean “leave(s)” or “dhak wood.” The Tibetan translators opted for the former.
back’gron gcig sdug bsngal gyur ’ongs nas/ /ci nus par ni sbyin pa bya/ D. The Tibetan lines corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-9898 translate as, “After a lone traveler in dire straits arrives, / One should give them as much as one can.”
backde nyid phyir na thub dbang gis/ /sems can zas kyis gnas pa’i zhes/ D. The Tibetan lines that correspond to #UT22084-088-038-9902 translate as “Thus the Lord of Sages said, / ‘Beings rely upon food.’ ” This is the end of the quoted material in the Tibetan translation.
backskar ma Tib.
back“Deities” om. Tib.
backThe intermediate state between death and subsequent rebirth.
backsrid pa bar ma’i sems can rnams/ /dri yi zas su rab tu bsgrags/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Beings in the intermediate state / Are known to be scent eaters.”
back#UT22084-088-038-9909om. Tib.
backmig ni yongs su bskus pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translators seem to have mistranslated the Skt. term akṣa as “eye” (mig).
backde bzhin du ni sngags bzla ba/ /mi yi ’jog rten bsrung bya ba’o/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-9918 translates as, “In this way, the mantra reciter / Should protect the beings of this world.”
back/’byung po rnams la legs don dang / /de bzhin gnas par ’dod pa yang / /’byung po rnams la zas don du/ /sngags mchog ’di ni gsungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan verses corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-9921 translate as, “He taught this supreme mantra / For the prosperity of beings and / For feeding those beings / Who desire a dwelling place.” The specific meaning of the Tibetan gnas par ’dod pa is obscure.
back’byor ba ’dod rnamsd rab nyon cig Tib. The reading “prosperity” is taken from the Tibetan. The extant Skt. reading (bhūmi) suggests either bodhisattva levels, or landed property.
back“Thunderclap” om. Tib.
backtshangs shes rgyal ba sngon ’dren pas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This previous guide, a victor with the knowledge of Brahmā.”
backSkt.: oṁ gagane gaganagañje • ānaya sarvaṃ lahu lahu | samayam anusmara | ākarṣaṇi mā vilamba mā vilamba | yathepsitaṃ me sampādaya svāhā ||.
backbcom ldan ’das de bzhin gshegs pa ’od srung yang de bzhin gshegs pa’i gnas su rnam par bzhugs so/ /bcom ldan ’das shAkya thub pa ngas kyang de’i tshe de ltar bshad cing rjes su yi rang bar byas so/ D. The two lines in the Tibetan that correspond to the last two lines in #UT22084-088-038-9939 translates as, “The blessed tathāgata Kāsyapa remained in the Tathāgata’s abode and said, / ‘Blessed Śākyamuni, I spoke just then and delighted all beings.’ ” The phrase “all beings” is infered as the object of the verb rjes su yi rang bar byas pa.
backsngags kyi rgyal po’i mchog ’di D. The Tibetan translates as, “This supreme king of mantras.”
back’bum phrag bdun Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “seven hundred thousand times.”
backIt is not clear what these three are.
back“Curds” om. Tib.
back’jigs par mi bya/ langs te gzhan du ’gro bar mi bya zhing / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one should not be afraid. One should rise and not flee.”
back“Just as before” om. Tib.
backkye sems can chen po longs shig /khyod ni grub pa yin no zhes so/ D. The translation “You have reached accomplishment” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The extant Skt. siddāsmi translates as, “I am an accomplished person.”
back“Three times” om. Tib.
backme tog pad+ma dkar po Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “white lotuses.”
back“The five superknowledges” om. Tib.
backchu bo’am chu gling gi sngogs su Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “on an island or riverbank.”
backdus gsum du yi ge drug pa bzla bat bya ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The six-syllable mantra should be recited at the three junctions of the day,” reflecting the Sanskrit *akṣarāṇi in place of the extant Skt. lakṣāṇi.
backras ris las me stag byung na/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If the painting emits sparks,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vākni° in place of the extant Skt. vāgni°.
back“And one will certainly succeed” om. Tib.
backde tshe gtsang ba’i pha zas bza’/ Tib. The Skt. of this pāda is unclear; the Tibetan translates as, “At that point one should eat pure foods.”
backsnum med zas ni med pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as “without any grease or food.”
backEach of the three names listed here can be the name of more than one plant.
backsngags pa dam tshig nyams ’gyur bas/ /lo ma de dag la mi bza’/ /lo ma gzhan la bza’ bya ste/ /sngags pas der ni bza’ bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Since it ruins the mantrin’s samaya, / These leaves should not be eaten. / Other leaves that can be eaten / Should be eaten by the mantrin.”
backstobs bcu ldan dang de yi sras/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “The possessors of the ten powers and their sons.”
backzas snod rnam pa sna tshogs dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The various kinds of food vessels, and.”
backsems can gzhan la sbyin pa’i zas/ /zlos pas de ni bza’ mi bya/ /gzhan gyis rab tu ma bstabs pa’i/ /zas gzhan bza’ bar mi bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10001 translates as, “A mantra reciter should not eat / Food that has been offered to other beings, / Nor should he eat other food / That has not been offered by others.” The Skt. of the second half-stanza is not completely clear.
backsngags kyis ma lus dbang du byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “a mantra that governs all things.”
backSkt.: oṁ sarvakilbiṣanāśani nāśaya nāśaya sarvaduṣṭaprayuktān samayamanusmara hūṁ jaḥ svāhā.
backkha zas la lan bdun du bsngags te yongs su spyad par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “incant the food with the mantra seven times and then consume it.”
backngal sos nas yud tsam gyi phyed dam thun gcig ste/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “After resting for twenty-four minutes or a single watch of the night.” The Tibetan yud tsam is the translation of the Skt. muhūrta, which equals 1/30th of a day or a 48-minute period. The Tibetan yud tsam kyi phyed or “half of a muhūrta” thus equals 24 minutes. The Tibetan thun translates the Skt. yāma, which is the term for a single three-hour watch of the night.
backOr perhaps have them recited (vācayet can have a simplex as well as a causative meaning).
backde nas ras ris dang sangs rgyas thams cad la phyag tshal nas dam pa’i chos glegs bam bklag par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should salute the painting and all the buddhas and then have the texts of the sublime doctrine recited.”
backAlso known as the Samādhirājasūtra. See Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The King of Samādhis Sūtra (Toh 127), 2018.
backSee Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The Ten Bhūmis (Toh 44-31), 2021b.
backSee Peter Alan Roberts, trans., The Sūtra of the Sublime Golden Light (Toh 555), 2023.
backDharmachakra Translation Committee, trans., The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen, Toh 559 (84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023).
backSee Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans., The Ratnaketu Dhāraṇī (Toh 138), 2020.
back’di dag las gang yang rung ba bklag par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One can have any of these recited.”
backSkt.: oṁ sarvaduṣṭān stambhaya hūṁ indīvaradhāriṇe kumārakrīḍarūpadhāriṇe bandha bandha samayam anusmara sphaṭ sphaṭ svāhā.
backthab khung Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *kuṇḍa instead of the extant Skt. tuṇḍa.
backOm. Tib.
backThe “great fivefold seal” is here a headband with five strips of cloth of five different colors, representing Mañjuśrī’s five locks of hair, his distinguishing sign.
back“When performing any ritual” to “it can’t be otherwise” om. Tib.
backde nas sa dang lci ba’am gzhan yang dri zhim po dang ldan pa’i yo byad kyi khyad par gyis byugs te de’i ’og tu khrus bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then one should smear oneself with clay mixed with cow dung or with specific requisite perfumed substances and then bathe afterward.”
back“Phlegm” om. Tib.
backsdug bsngal gyis khyab pa/ tshog bas mngon par gnod pa dang / sdug bsngal thob pa bzhin du ’gro ba dang ’ong ba’i sbyor bas sdug bsngal ba/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “being pervaded by suffering, the pain that results from feeling, suffering that is incurred, and likewise suffering due to the practice of coming and going.” The last part of this sentence is not clear in the Skt.
backsdong po rin po che bai DUr+ya’i rang bzhin las byung ba/ pad+ma’i ge sar rin po che margada las grub pa/ ’dab ma stong zhel las byas pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Its stalk is made of beryl, its pericarp of emerald, and its thousand leaves of crystal.”
backThe phrase tadā na jāta°, which is part of this sentence, has not been translated as it doesn’t seem to make sense in the context; it also seems to be omitted in the Tib.
back“Not sitting but standing” is missing from the Tibetan translation, where he is described as sitting. If he is fanning the Blessed One, though, he is more likely to be standing, in line with iconographic conventions.
backThe spatial arrangement of these eight is not clear; “similarly” (evam) could indicate that they are also to the left, i.e., to the left of Avalokiteśvara.
backI.e., the eight just listed plus Mañjuśrī and Avalokiteśvara.
backde dag gi g.yas logs su Tib. It is not clear whether it is “to the right” of the Blessed One or to the right of the bodhisattvas just listed. The Tibetan reflects the second option and translates as, “to their right.”
backAgain, it is not clear what kind of spatial arrangement the phrase “in the same place” indicates.
backd+ha nu ska ri dang bar shi ka dang ut+pa la sngon po dang / D. The Tibetan adds dhanuṣkari and varṣika to this list.
backThe MMK seems to be following the system of the Pali nikāyas, where seven buddhas are enumerated, Śākyamuni being the seventh.
backdkyil ’khor rnam pa de nyid ni/ /gang yin dang po thub pas gsungs/ /gnyis pa yi ni dkyil ’khor yang / /gsum par yang ni de las gzhan/ D. In the Tibetan translation, this verse translates as, “The features of the maṇḍala / Are what the Sage taught first, / Second was the maṇḍala, / And third something else.” The final verse of the Tibetan translation is problematic because it omits the Skt. mantraṃ and translates the Skt. antaḥ param as de las gzhan instead of de las mchog.
backIn this text, dhyāna can mean “meditation” as well as “visualization.”
backmchog dang ber ma tha ma ni/ /de bzhin ras ris bar ma bsgom/ /mdor na rnam gsum sgom pa ni/ /sdig pa’i rnyog pa ma lus ’jig/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Supreme, middling, and inferior / Are the ways to meditate on the middling painting. / These three meditations, in brief, / Will remove the stains of every fault.”
backsngags pas sngags ni de tshe bzla/ /ci bzhin las ni sngar bstan pa’o/ /rang gi lha ni spyan drang pa/ /der ni sngags kyis gshegs su gsol/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the mantra adept should recite the mantra / Just as in the aforementioned rite. / He should invoke and dismiss / His own deity using the mantra.”
back“Skilled practitioner” om. Tib.
backdge ba’i las kyi de nyid Tib. In the Tibetan karmatattva° is translated not as “the true nature of the ritual,” but as “the ways of virtuous action,” which is also a possible translation.
backbshang dang gci ba’ang de bzhin te/ D. In the Tibetan this pāda translates as, “And his feces and urine.”
backlas bcas tigs kyang bshad ma yin/ Tib. The translation of this pāda is based on the Tibetan. It requires a rather loose grammatical interpretation of the Skt. phrase svakarmakulabhāṣitam.
backgtsang phyir god mtha’ chur gzhug bya/ /chu gtsang gis ni nye reg bya/ /’bad pas rkang gnyis bkru bya ste/ /sa ni khyor ba bdun blangs nas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “To purify himself, he should wade in the water up to the hem of his robe / And splash himself with the purified water. / He should thoroughly wash his feet. / Then he should take seven handfuls of clay, and.”
backThere is another line in the Skt. after this pāda, which is not accounted for in the Tib.
backlan bdun sa de nyid kyis so/ /bzhang ba la ni sum cus bya/ /mchil ma dor dang de bzhin du/ /snabs dor ba la re re’o/. The Tibertan translates as, “Incant the clay with it seven times. / Use it thirty times for passing stool / And for urinating, / As well as each time one eliminates mucus.” The Tibetan omits 11.216c and preserves Skt. 11.216 as a four-line verse. The obscure instrumental pronoun “with it” (de nyid kyis) in the first line of the Tibetan is translated into English here as a reference to using the mantra to incant the clay seven times (lan bdun sa). The equally obscure phrase “with thirty times” (sum bcus bya) is thus also translated into English as a reference to the number of times that one uses the mantra to incant the clay that one uses to wipe oneself (one’s private parts, hands, etc.) after passing stool, urinating, or eliminating mucus.
backThis line om. Tib.
backsgra med de bzhin song nas ni/ /lam la sogs pa spangs pa’o/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan.
backPerhaps the southern boundary of the residence area.
backg.yang sa zhing dang tshwa sgo dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “In a chasm or a salt deposit.”
back’bad pas rkang g.yon bkru bya ste/ /de nas g.yas pa bkru bar bya/ /phan tshun nyid du bshigs nas ni/ /zlos pas rkang pa bkru bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Carefully wash the left foot, / Then the right. / Then the mantra reciter should place them / Together and wash their feet.”
backde nas zlos pas nye reg bya /sdom can gyis grub las kyang bya/ Tib. The Tibetan that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-10051 translates as, “Thus the mantra reciter should wipe himself / And then the vow holder should perform the rite for accomplishment.” The Skt. for 11.228b is not very clear.
backlnga yi cho ga Tib.
backlus kyi dag dang ngag dag dang / /yid kyi dag pa yin par bstan/ /bzhi pa bden pa’i dag pa ste/ /chu yi dag pa lnga par bshad/ D. The translation of #UT22084-088-038-10052 is based on the Tibetan, because of the lacunae (where the word for “speech” should be) in the Skt. The extant Skt. reading seems to differ in some details; e.g., it says “meditation” in place of “mind.”
backphyi dang nang la mkhas pa dang / Tib. “Outer” has been supplied from the Tibetan as the corresponding Skt. reading seems corrupt.
backkhro ba log par ’byung ba yi/ /’jig rten pha rol ’jigs rnams la/ /sangs rgyas byang chub sems dpa’ dang/ /blo ldan rnams kyis yongs su smad/ Tib. The translation of the verse is based on the Tibetan.
back“Makes one’s living” om. Tib.
backzhes sdang mun pas bsgribs pa’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “blinded by the darkness of anger.”
backIt is not clear what “vidyārāja,” or perhaps “king of the vidyā [goddesses],” refers to; it could be an epithet of Vajrapāṇi, or a particular form of Mañjuśrī, or perhaps refers to a particular vidyā mantra, such as, e.g., the syllable kḷlhīṁ described in chapter 9.
backchos shes bden par smra ba dang / /sems can rnams la phan par dga’/ /sngags dang sngags shes bsten gyur pa/ /nges par de la grub pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One versed in the Dharma should speak the truth / And take joy in benefiting beings. / They should rely on the mantra and knowledge of the mantra, / And they will undoubtedly accomplish it.”
backThis and the next seven verses lay down the kriyā doctrine by defining the technical distinction and the mutual relationship between kriyā (mere action or performance, whether ritual or not) and karman (aim-oriented activity); this doctrine seems to apply to the MMK and the kriyā tantras in general. Because of the double meaning of the Skt. word karman (“activity” and “karma = karmic accumulation”), what is a single statement in the Skt. needs to be translated into English twice—in two different ways. The second translation, in this and some verses below, has been added in parentheses.
backmchog dang bar ma tha ma las/ /rnam pa sna tshogs las byed de/ /las ni bya bas byed pa ste/ /bya ba mi byed rtag tu ni/ /bya ba las ni ldan pa las/ /rtag tu de las grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The ritual (bya ba) makes the [intended] activity happen, / As [such] activities do not happen without [their] rituals. / One thus performs various activities / Of the sublime, medium, and lower [types]. / One who [thus] engages in ritual activity (bya ba las) / Will always obtain accomplishment.”
back“Retributive” in the sense that it entails karmic retribution.
backbya phyir las rnams thams cad phyir/ /las phyir rtag tu bya ba yin/ /bya ba’i don du bya ba min/ /bya ba las la sbyar ba yin/ /don bcas nyid kyi bya ba la/ /bya ba nyid kyis rtag tu bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Because all actions serve the purpose of ritual, / Ritual is always directed toward actions. / Rituals are not for the sake of rituals; / Ritual is applied to action. / Rituals that bear fruit / Are the rituals to always be performed.”
backbya ba las dang ’bras bu nyid/ /bya ba las ’bras rtag tu bya/ /’bras med pa las ’bras ’byung zhing / /’bras bu nyid kyang rtag ’bras ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “There is ritual, activity, and the result; / Always enact ritual, activity, and its result. / A result is born where there was no result; / That very result will always result.”
backldan pas rnam par bral ba ni/ /mi ldan ldan pa grub pa min/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10081 translates as, “When union is absent, / There is no union, and union is not accomplished.”
backbsgrub bya bsgrub pa med pa ni/ /de la grub pa mi ’grub bo/ /grub pa’i rdzas ni thams cad kyang / /grub pa’i rgyu dang ’gal ba yin/ D. The precise meaning of this verse is elusive. The Tibetan translates as, “Without a target and a practice, / One will not accomplish attainment / And the cause and material result of attainment / Will always be incompatible.” Note here that the Tibetan translation reads the Skt. sādhyasādhanabhāvaḥ as *sādhyasādhanābhāvaḥ.
back’bras bcas Tib. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *saphalam instead of the extant Skt. sakalam.
backsems can kun la thugs brtse bas/ /thub pa mchog gis sngon gsungs pa/ /sngags ni rgyu yi sgo dag nas/ /rgyal ba’i sras la dam tshig bshad/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The samaya that the supreme Sage taught / Long ago out of love for all beings / Has now been taught to the Victor’s sons / According to the causal methods of mantra.” The final phrase in the Tibetan sngags ni rgyu yi sgo dag nas is obscure.
backsngags kyi rgyal po Tib.
backmkhas pas D. In place of “one,” the Tibetan has “the wise,” reflecting the Sanskrit *manīṣī tām instead of the extant Skt. manīṣitām.
back’byung po rnams la zhi don du/ /rdzogs sangs rgyas kyis rab tu bstan/ /lam yang sngags kyi tshul gyis ni/ /mya ngan ’das grong ’gro ba yin/ Tib. The translation of this verse is based in part on the Tibetan because of two lacunae in the Skt.
back’di las ’bras bcas thob pa yin/ /sna tshogs las dang las shes yin/ Tib. The Tibetan that correlates to #UT22084-088-038-10096 translates as, “This is obtaining the action with its result. / It is knowledge of the action and various types of action.” The translation “various karmic predispositions” (vicitrakarmadharma°) from the Skt. is uncertain.
backlha mi’i rgyal srid byed par ’gyur/ D. The line “The sovereign of gods and men” has been translated from the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to be saying “The lowest attainment would be that of a kingdom.”
backmi lha lha min ’jig rten gyi/ /de bzhin bdag po thob ’gyur te/ /bdag po ma lus de dag gi/ /sngags pas thams cad ’thob pa dang / /’bras bcas bya ba byed par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan renders this verse in five lines instead of four and translates as, “One will likewise become lord / Of all of the reals of men, gods, and demigods. / The mantra adepts of all / Of those lords will obtain everything / And perform rites that bear fruit.” The grammar of the Skt. for this verse is not completely clear.
backsngags pa ’byor pa ’dod pa yis/ /las rnams sna tshogs bya ba ste/ /de bzhin mchog dang bar ma dang / /tha ma nyid kyang bya ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra practitioner who desires riches / Should perform the various types of rites. / He can thus perform those that are highest / Or those that are middling and the lowest.”
backThis passage and the remainder of the chapter are in prose in the Tibetan.
backlas rnam pa sna tshogs skye ba brgyud pa dag du gang du gang byas pa de dag la grub pa gnas par nam zhig ’gyur zhe na/ skyes bus ji srid tshogs pa rnyed pa na/ sngags pa’i ngo bos sngags bzlas pa na sdig pa zad pa’i don dang las bsrabs pas sngags ’grub par ’gyur te/ D. In a prose passage that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-10106, the Tibetan translates as, “One may wonder if he accomplishes all at once what normally is gained through a variety of successive acts. When he acquires all that is possible for beings to gather, and once he recites mantra using the essence mantra, with the aim of exhausting evil and through diminishing his karma, the mantra will be accomplished.”
backde bzhin du mchog dang bar ma dang tha ma dang ’jig rten gyis mchod pa dang / bzlas pas sdig pa mtha’ dag zad par byed cing / lus can thams cad kyi skye ba brgyud pa dag tu gang byas pa’i sdig pa de dag thams cad ’jig par byed de/ Tib. This passage, composed in prose in the Tibetan, translates as, “Thus the mantras that are supreme, middling, inferior, and revered by the world bring about the final exhaustion of evil and effect the destruction of all evil that has been successively produced by all beings.”
back“Mantras” om. Tib.
backbdag la Tib.
backThe second occurance of “accomplish” (sādhaya) is omitted in the Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ kuru kuru sarvārthān sādhaya sādhaya sarvaduṣṭavimohani gaganābalambe viśodhaya svāhā.
backsbyang ba dang dgug pa dang blang ba dang rgyu ba la sogs pa’i las bya’o/ D. It is not clear what the individual terms after “cleaning” mean. The Tibetan reads these as a list of ritual activities and translates as, “purifying, summoning, receiving, traveling, and so forth.”
backlan grangs nyi shu bdun/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “twenty-seven.”
backmtshan gcig der ni nyal byas na/ /rmi lam nang du des mthong ba/ /mi ma yin gzugs grub pa ni/ /mi sdug mche ba gtsigs pa’o/ /sngags pa la ni des smras pa/ /nor ni ci ’dod khyer cig/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should sleep there for one night / And in one’s dreams one will see/ A being with a nonhuman form / Who is ugly and bears its teeth. / It will then speak to the mantra practitioner, / Saying, ‘Bring me whatever wealth I desire!’ ” The last two lines of the Skt. are unclear and possibly corrupt.
backsgrub byed nand par langs nas ni/ /shing de las ni ’gro bar byed/ /sngas pas shing de bor nas ni/ /gzhan dag tu ni ’gro bar byed/ /sngags pas shing de bor nas ni/ /gzhan dag tu ni ’gro byed na/ Tib. The Skt. here is not completely clear. The Tibetan reorders the last six pādas and translates as, “The practitioner, waking up early, / Will be compelled to move away from that tree. / If the mantra practitioner rejects that tree, / And then moves on to another, / He will not have a dream-vision / Of [anything] terrifying and hideous.”
back“Mantra reciter” om. Tib.
backsteng gi yal ga’i ’bras gnas su/ /sdom brtson brtul zhugs can ’dzegs te/ D. The translation is based on the Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10137 because of the lacunae in Skt. 12.10d.
backThe “best of men” is an epithet for the buddhas.
backIt is not clear what “them” refers to (possibly the upper branches).
backrtag tu srog chags ma zos pa’i/ /’bras bu yang dag blang bar bya/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10146 translates as, “One should also always take fruit / That has not been eaten by any creature.”
backskad bcig ’gug par byed bstan pa’i/ /’byung po thams cad zhi phyir dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “It is said they should be summoned immediately / In order to pacify all beings.”
back“On earth” om. Tib. The Skt. is a bit dubious.
backlhor bsten pa yi yal ga dang / /’bras bu gang dag skyed pa ni/ /blang na gdung byed dgra rnams kyi/ /srog ni ’jig par byed pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one takes a branch that leans to the south / And the seeds that are growing on it / And burns them, it will destroy / The life force of one’s enemies.”
backlha min bu mo gnas pa yi/ /sa yi ’og tu ’gro bar ’gyur/ /de yi ’bras bu’i phreng ba ni/ /blangs nas ’og tu ’gro bstan pa/ N. The Tibetan translation from N tracks closest to the #UT22084-088-038-10167 and translates as, “Will enable one to travel underground / Where the dānava women live. / It is said that one takes up a rosary / Made from those seeds and travels underground.” The Tibetan variant blangs nas ’og tu ’gro brten pa in D for Skt. 12.21d appears to align with Skt. 12.22a. This means that different fragments of Skt. 12.21 and 12.22 are omitted in the Tibetan translation depending on whether or not one consults D or N.
backme tog phreng ba kun blangs nas/ /de nas zlos pa slar log bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Holding a rosary made of flowers / He will be able to return from there.”
backde bzhin gtsang phyogs cho ga bzhin/ Tib. The last pāda in the Tibetan translates as, “According to the rite of the pure directions.”
backgzhan yang ’bras bu ’dod pa dag Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or some other desirable seeds.”
backnor bu Tib.
backbyi ru rnam pa sna tshogs kyi/ /phreng ba dag kyang bya ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One can make rosaries / Using various kinds of coral.”
backIn the absence of steel needles, a pointed blade of strong grass was possibly used.
backnyi shu’am Tib.
backIt is not clear whether this passage is about tying the knot, or threading again the already strung beads so that in the end the string that holds them together is double or triple, or perhaps folding the rosary in such a way that it forms a double or triple loop.
backThe meaning is not completely clear, but perhaps one strings the metal rings onto the ends of the string below the knot to keep the knot from untying or loosening up.
backAgain, the meaning is not quite clear, but possibly one plaits the loose ends of the string to keep the rings in place.
backIt is not clear whether the Skt. refers to washing the rosary or the practitioner performing ablutions. The Tibetan seems to indicate the former.
backgnyi ga ’gro Tib. In place of the extant Skt. uḍaya (“hut”), the Tibetan here reflects the Sanskrit *ubhaya (“both”).
backde bzhin khrus byas song nas ni/. The Tibetan translates as, “After washing it and departing.”
back“The Teacher” (śāstṛ, sdon pa) refers here to the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backIt is not clear how a painted image can contain relics.
backstong phrag gcig dang brgyad dang ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one thousand and eight.”
backtshag kyang de dang mnyam par bya/ Tib. Both the Skt. and the Tibetan say “of the same measure,” which probably refers to the number of recitations.
backhUM spha Ta spha Ta Tib.
backSkt.: oṁ uttiṣṭha haripiṅgala lāhitākṣa dehi dadāpaya hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ sarvavighnāṃ vināśaya svāhā.
backbu ga yod pa’ang rnam par bzlog Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Remove those that have holes.”
backI.e., other than “parrot hue.” Depending on which reading is adopted, the Skt. could also be translated as, “sticks of other colors, however, are fine.” If the latter reading were followed, “other” ought to be interpreted as other than “yellow, white, or black.”
backlan kan Tib. For “altar” (vedi), the Tibetan uses a term that translates as, “railing,” or “enclosure.”
backrtse mo gnyis su’ang rtse gsum bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That have either two or three prongs.”
backsbyin sreg legs par yang dag brtsam/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A homa should be well prepared.”
backchu klung de bzhin chu dbus dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “At a river, or likewise in the middle of water.”
backshing gcig gi ni phyogs dag dang / D. In the Tibetan ekasthāvaradeśe (“in a lonely spot on dry land”) is translated as, “In places where there is a single tree,” which is also a possible translation. However, as a river has just been mentioned, “dry land” could be more plausible in the context.
backsngags kyi ngo bo yang dag brtsam/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should begin with the essence mantra.”
backdkar dang tswa dang skyur dang rno/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “white, salty, sour, and bitter.” The Tibetan may reflect the Sanskrit *śukla (Tib. dkar; “white”) instead of the extant Skt. śuṣka (“dry”).
backyam shing de dag med na ni/ /tha mal shing dag kun du brtag/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If none of those sticks are present, / Ordinary wood can be used.”
backsdom brtson gyis ni me sbar bya/. The Tib. translates as, “The vow holder should light the fire.”
backrlung gis khyad du mi gsod pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “With those particular types of wind without blowing it out.”
backlag pa de ni g.yon pa yis/ Tib. The Skt. apasavyaka can mean both left and right. In the Tibetan it is taken to mean left.
backsdom brtson Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the vow holder.”
backde tshe me yi snying po yis/ /sngags kyis lan bdun rtag bzlas pa’i/ /dri zhim me tog dag gis ni/ /sdom brtson me ni spyan drang bya/ Tib. The translation of this verse is partly based on the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *saptajaptena (or perhaps *japte saptena) in place of the extant Skt. japte japtena.
back“Three” om. Tib. Another, less likely, interpretation of the number three is that one offers three kinds of oblatory sticks, namely those smeared with either curds, honey, or ghee.
backzho dang mar gyis sbags pa dang / /sbrang rtsis sbags pa’i yam shing gis/ /rgyas pa’i las ni bya ba’i phyir/ /sngags kyis kun du sbyin sreg bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “With a fire stick smeared with curd, / And also with ghee and honey, / Perform oblations together with the mantra / In order to effect the activities of enhancement.” The grammar in the Skt. verse is not completely clear.
backThe Skt. compound dadhyamiśre, possibly corrupt, actually suggests not mixing in the curds. This reading, however, is not supported by the Tibetan.
backTechnically speaking, glowing embers are meant, without smoke or flames.
backgal te sngags ni grub ’dod na/ /phyi rol me ni sbar bar bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one desires the mantra to succeed / One should kindle an external fire.”
backsdig pa dag ni khyad par du/ /gang yang rgyal bas smad pa dang / /’jig rten ’gro bas smad pa dag /gzhan gyis smad pa’ang bya ba min/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should not perform particularly / Evil rights that are reviled by the victors, / Reviled by worldly beings, / And reviled by others.”
backA play on words could be intended in the Skt., as bhūmipa can mean both “earth protector” and “regent over the [bodhisattva] levels.”
backsbyin sreg las la ’jigs med dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Without being afraid of the homa rite.”
backThe Skt. sarvabhūta (’byung po kun) is ambiguous here, and may refer to spirits, beings in general, or the elements.
backSkt.: oṁ jvala tiṣṭha hūṁ ru ru viśvasambhava sambhave svāhā.
backsnga ma’i gtsug pud lnga bcings te/ /phyag rgya chen po grags ldan ma/ /snga ma’i gtsug pud lnga bcings bya/ D. In what is probably a case of scribal error, this line is repeated twice in the Tibetan with only minor variation.
backskra can ma nyid rab bzlas pas/ /des na srung ba byed par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One will thus be protected / By reciting the Keśinī mantra.”
backbrtson byas grub pa ma lus ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All accomplishments come about through effort.”
back“Meanings” om. Tib.
backThe translation of this paragraph is partially based on the Tibetan and partially based on the Skt.
back“By all the mantras”; i.e., by all the mantra deities.
backThe passage from “eulogized by all the mantras” to “emanating hundreds of thousands of millions of magical creations in various forms” om. Tib.
backde bzhin gshegs pa thams cad bcom ldan ’das rin chen tog gis yang dag par thob pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It is intimately connected with the blessed Ratnaketu, among all the tathāgatas.”
backoM b+h+ruM D.
backIn the Skt., this sentence is followed by the phrase asarvaguṇāṃ, which is not reflected in the Tibetan and is difficult to make sense of as it is.
back’di yang dag par bsgrubs na sngags thams cad ’grub par ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When practiced correctly, all mantras will be accomplished.”
backgzhon nu gang yang khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po’i mchog la sngags thams cad dang rjes su mthun pa/ mchog tu gsang ba’i mchog yang dag par rjes su gnang ba las kyi sgrib pa thams cad yang dag par sbyong bar byed pa/ dang po re zhig sgrub pa pos nges par ’bum phrag gsum bzlas brjod bya’o/ /de nas las rnams sngags dang bcas pa ’dir gzhon nu khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po la ’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa’i sngags dang rgyud rnams bsgrub par bya’o/ D. The passage, starting from “He is, O divine youth, recommended” up to this point has been reconstructed based in part on the Skt. and in part on the Tibetan because of some lacunae in the Skt. text. However, one point of conflict still remains—the Tibetan says that one must first do three hundred thousand recitations of “any [mantras] that accord,” whereas the grammar of the extant Skt. part indicates that it is rather the One Syllable that one must recite, as it is this mantra that is described as the one “that accords…,” etc. The Tibetan translates as, “Divine youth, a practitioner must first utter three hundred thousand recitations of any [mantras] that accord with all the mantras in your king of manuals, [mantras] that are the authorized, supreme among supreme secrets that purify all the obscurations of the activities. Then, divine youth, within your king of manuals [containing] the activities and their mantras will the worldly and transcendent mantras and tantras be accomplished.”
backIn the Tibetan, the term translated here as “enthralled” is understood to describe the beings that are mentioned in the next sentence.
backcho ga zhib mo thams cad yongs su rgyas pa Tib. “For all the profusion of rites” is a guess translation of sarvakalpavistare. The Tibetan translates as, “He increases all small rituals.”
backbdud zil gyis gnon par byed pa/ Tib. Here the Tibetan adds “he overcomes all māras.”
backIn the Tibetan the first two lines of this verse are written in prose and conclude the previous prose passage. Thus this verse beings with “He is the god of gods” in the Tibetan.
backgnyen gyur pa Tib. “Kinsman” is the Tibetan translation of the Skt. baddha (possibly a corruption of the original bandhu).
backchos kun rang gi ngo bo mkhyen/ Tib. “Dharmas” is the Tibetan reading, which fits the context a little better. The Skt. has °karma° (“activities/rites”).
backbcos bu dkar po de bzhin du/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Of white, high-quality cotton.”
backphra dang legs bkrus ras bal spangs/ D. The translation of the last pāda is based on the Tibetan because Skt. is unclear.
backchu ngan las ni bkrus min dang / /skye bos zhal mthong phul ba’ang min/ /ma bgos pa dang de bzhin du/ /gzhan yang cung zad dam pas bsngags/ D. This verse is rather problematic and the translation from the Skt. given here is uncertain. The Tibetan departs from the Skt. significantly and translates as, “It should not be washed in bad water / Nor be presented within sight of ordinary people. / Neither should it be torn, / Nor said to be anything other than perfect.”
back“Sage-like” om. Tib.
backri bo la gnas grags pa che/ Tib. The Skt. mahāyaśam (“of great renown”) has been translated as “in all his splendor,” as the quality of renown is not something that can be expressed in a painting.
backme tog dag ni ’di dag nyid/ /gang yang rung ba rtag blangs nas/ Tib. The translation of #UT22084-088-038-10407 is based on the Tibetan because of the Skt. lacunae. It is not clear if all the flowers listed here are meant to be only drawn, or perhaps also presented as an offering. The mention of “fragrant species” could suggest the latter.
backston pa la ni mchod don du/ /yid du ’ong ba’i mchod yon dbul/ Tib. The term “offerings” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
back’di la sems can thams cad kyis/ /sngar bstan bzhin du yang dag spyad/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This should be perfectly carried out / By all beings as previously explained.”
backchags pa chen po Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “of great passion,” which suggests the Sanskrit *mahārāgaṃ for the extant Skt. mahābhāgaṃ.
backdkyil ’khor de yi lha dag kyang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the deities of the maṇḍala.”
backde tshe sngags pas rig pa’i sngags/ /de tshe sngags ni rig pa des/ /sngags la rtag tu bsnyen byas dang / /bzlas pa phun sum tshogs mngon shes/ Tib. The meaning of this verse is not completely clear. In the Tibetan there appears to be a redundant line, which possibly indicates a case of dittography. The Tibetan translates as, “At that time the mantrin, with the vidyā mantra, / A mantra that at that time he knows, / Should, having performed the preliminaries, / Recite that mantra [with] excellent, clear knowledge.”
backThere is a play on words in the Skt., as mañju (in mañjubhāṇite) is also part of Mañjuśrī’s name. Mañjubhāṇita, in other contexts, could be regarded synonymous with mañjughoṣa, used further on as an epithet of Mañjuśrī.
back’jam dbyangs cho ga ’di la ni/ /de tshe sngags pa dbang bskur ba/ /dkyil ’khor rnam pa la mkgas shing / /rtag tu gtsang spra byed pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, the mantra master who has been initiated/ /According to this beautifully taught manual, / Who is learned in the maṇḍala features / And maintains purity.”
backIt is not completely clear at which point exactly the description shifts from the practitioner to the master. It is possible that the description of the master starts in this verse.
backsngags rnams kun la dbang bskur dang / dkyil ’khor ’di la ’jigs pa med/ /rig pa’i sngags dang sngags bcas dang / bdag nyid bsrung dang phan ’dod dang / D. The Skt. for this verse is again problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “Who has been initiated in all of the mantras, / Is not afraid of this maṇḍala, / Possesses the vidyāmantra and mantra, / And who wishes to protect and benefit himself.”
backgrogs kyang de bzhin bsrung shes dang / yongs su legs brtags ’od chen ldan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Who likewise knows how to protect his companions, / Investigates carefully, and possesses splendor.”
backsngar bstan cho ga ji lta bar/ /dkyil ’khor ’di la’ang yang dag spyad/ /stobs bcu ldan pas dang por ni/ /dkyil ’khor gang dag rab bstan pa/ /’jam pa’i dbyangs las gzhan min dang / /rgyu gzhan dag gis bri mi bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Perform it in this maṇḍala / Following the aforementioned procedure. / The maṇḍala that was taught first / By the ones with the ten powers / Was none other than Mañjugoṣa’s, / And one should not draw it for any other reason.” The final pāda of the Tibetan translation appears to have read #UT22084-088-038-10431ālikhet nānyakarmaṇā as *ālikhet nānyakāraṇaṃ.
backAs the Skt. says “observing … the eight,” we can’t be sure what “eight” refers to, but most likely to the eight precepts of moral conduct: refraining from killing, refraining from stealing, etc.
backsdig med las dang yongs srung byed/ /de bzhin zhi dang rgyas pa shes/ /de nas dkyil ’khor dbus zhugs nas/ /bstan bcos las gsungs bzhin du bri/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One who is free from misdeeds and thoroughly protected/ Who is likewise skilled in the rites of pacifying and enriching/ Should enter the middle of the maṇḍala/ And draw it just as it was described in the treatises.” The Tibetan reflects the Skt. *apāpakarmasamārakṣaḥ instead of the extant #UT22084-088-038-10439apāpakarmasamārabdhaḥ and (perhaps) the Sanskrit *alikhet śāstravādibhiḥ instead of the extant Skt. 14.47d alikhet śāstuvarṇibhiḥ.
backrin chen lha tshogs kyis brgyan pa’i/ /ri mo dang por bri bar bya/ /der bzhugs gzi brjid chen po ni/ /de bzhin gshegs pa rin chen tog D. The Tibetan translates as, “The painting that should first be drawn, / Adorned with a host of jeweled deities, / Seated there in great splendor, / Is the tathāgata Ratnaketu.”
backras ris la ni ji lta bar/ /bstan bcos la sngags thams cad bri/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Draw everything in the canvas / Just as described in the treatises.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śāstra (bstan bcos) instead of the extant Skt. śāstu.
backThe Skt. is obscure. It is not certain whether this is actually about the items that are offered.
backri mo’i phreng ni gsum dag dang / /phyag rgyas rab tu brgyan pa dang / /gser mdog rim pas khor yug tu/ yongs su bri bar bya ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It should be perfectly drawn / With three encircling lines / That are ornamented with seals / Surrounded by a series of golden borders.”
backgsal dang yongs su rdzogs pa dang / /drang po de yi rnam pa’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Clear and solid, / [The lines] should be perfectly straight.”
backnyi ma ’char ka ’dra ba dang / /gur gum rnam pa ’dra mdog can/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He has a complexion like the rising sun / And like the color of saffron.”
backrgyal po chen po mnyam ’dra ba/ /gzhal med khang bcas rgyan gyis brgyan/ /sems dpa’ chen po’i cod pan can/ /rgyan rnams kun gyis rab tu brgyan/ The Tibetan translates as, “He is like a great king / Residing in a palace that is bedecked with ornaments / Wearing the crown of a great being / And Adorned with all of his ornaments.”
backme tog phreng ba bak+ku la/ /lag pa g.yas pas snoms par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He holds a garland of bulletwood / Blossoms in his right hand.”
backThe Skt. doesn’t make the position of hands/arms very clear; possibly his hands are folded together in the center (ardhena).
backde ni yong su bskor ba dang / /skyil krung phyad kyis gnas pa bri/ /gzugs bzang gzugs la bsten nas ni/ /lha yi gzugs ’dra bri bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Draw him surrounded on all sides and / With one leg crossed and the other extended. / His form should be regarded as handsome / And should be drawn like the body of a god.”
backri bo ’od chen ldan pa’i steng / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Upon a mountain of blazing light.” The Skt. is uncertain, but no mountain is mentioned.
back’od kyi skyil ’khor gyis mdzes pa/ Tib. “Light” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backde bzhin sngags kyi sbyor ba yis/ /khyab bdag me yis ’bar bar byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Practicing the mantra sets one / Ablaze with the Lord’s fire as well.” Alternately, the Tibetan might translate as, “So too does practicing the mantra / Cause the Lord to blaze with fire.”
backsngags pas rtag tu khyab bdag gi / /de nas shar sgo yang dag sbyar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Next the mantra practitioner / Should continually apply it to the Lord’s eastern gate.”
backba dan dag gis nyer mdzes bya/ D. In place of “Adorned with plantain trees,” the Tibetan translates as, “Decorated with flags.”
back“Lamps” om. Tib.
backThe text doesn’t specify what part of the plant is offered, but in the case of devil’s horsewhip, it is usually the sticks smeared with curds, honey, and ghee.
backzho la sbrang rtsis bsres pa yis/ D. Gandha can be the name of a number of substances, the most common being sulphur or myrrh. In place of “burnt gandha,” the Tibetan translates as, “curd mixed with honey.”
backThe last pāda of this verse and the first of the next have been switched.
backIt is not clear what the three “white foods” are.
backThe particle vā seems to be here a BHS form of iva.
backsngags dang yang dag ldan pas sam/ /’khor los sgyur ba’i rigs kyis bya/ /las rnams dag ni kun la yang/ /yi ge gcig pa’i sngags kyis bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It should be performed by one perfectly endowed with the mantra or / One who is in the cakravartin’s clan. / All of the ritual activities should be performed / Using the single syllable mantra.”
backdpa’ bo gcig pu rtag pa mchog Tib. The Skt. literally says “Sole hero without another.” The technical term “sole hero” denotes a deity who appears in the maṇḍala without a retinue. This has, however, been rendered into the Tibetan as “This sole hero endures and is supreme.”
backAscetic heat (tapas) is a type of energy, described as “heat,” generated through meditation and austerities.
backsngags kun ’grub par ’gyur ba ni/ /cho ga ’di las gzhan pas min/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All such mantras will be successful. / Apart from this rite, there are no others.”
backrlung lha Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Vāyu,” or possibly “the mārutas,” (rlung lha) in place of “mātṛs.”
backThis half-stanza is omitted in the Tib. In the Skt., it could well be a case of dittography.
back’byung po kun gyi sngags rgyud ni/ /rgyas dang bcas pa dbang du byed/ Tib. The meaning of the last pāda is uncertain. The Skt. vistarāṃ is probably a metrically modified form of vistaratā (“full extent”), an interpretation also found in the Tibetan, which translates as, “He brings the full extent of the mantra systems / Of all beings under his control.”
back’jig rten ’jig rten ’das pa’i sngags/ Tib. The translation here is based on the Tibetan which reflects the Sanskrit *lokottaramantrān instead of the extant Skt. lokamantrā.
backsgra ni drag min ngal bas min/ /gzhan la ngan sems med gyur na/ /sangs rgyas ma lus kun gyi yang / /’di la myur du ’grub pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Not too loudly and not too softly. / If one harbors no enmity toward others, / One will quickly accomplish in this life / What all the buddhas have accomplished.”
backdngos su ’byor dang yid kyis sprul/ /bzang po sems las byung ba dang / /rgyal dbang gzugs kyi ri mo ni/ /bsam pa’am yang na bya ba yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should imagine or make / The actual and mentally manifested offerings / And the divine offering that arises from the heart / To the painting of the Victorious Lord’s form.”
backde tshe sngags ni ’grub ’gyur zhing / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, the mantras will be accomplished, and.”
backlha yi rgyal po ’dod pas ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If he desires to be the king of the gods.”
back“The Teacher” (BHS, śāstu) refers here to the Buddha Ratnaketu. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śāstra here instead of the extant Skt. śāstu, as it has elsewhere in the text.
backrgyal bas bsngags pa’i ras ris mchog /der ni kun nas yongs su ’bar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The supreme painting, praised by the victorious ones, / Will be engulfed in blazing light.”
backstobs chen brten zhing pha rol gnon/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mighty, steadfast, and overpowering.”
backrtogs pa’i bdag nyid cher rgyas yin/ Tib. The meaning of this pāda is unclear. The Tibetan could be translated as “His status as a great being will increase.”
backde la reg pa tsam gyis ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “touching” in place of “seeing,” reflecting the Sanskrit *spṛṣṭa° in place of the extant Skt. dṛṣṭa°.
backrtag tu bdag dang gzhan bdag nyid/ /rnam pa sna tshogs byed par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One can always change one’s own / and others’ identities into a variety of different forms.”
backrgyal ba ’khor los sgyur gsungs pa’i/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Taught by the victorious wheel turner.”
backmar me yon du dbul ba ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should present a lamp offering.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *pradīpadakṣiṇāṃ dadyāt instead of the extant #UT22084-088-038-10524pradīpalakṣaṇaṃ dadyāt. The Skt. translates as, “a lakṣaṇa of lamps” which doesn’t make sense in the context, unless lakṣaṇaṃ is a metric adaptation of lakṣaṃ (“one hundred thousand”). Nevertheless, the context indicates that the number is one hundred thousand, as it is said in the next verse that the lamps should be offered by one hundred thousand men and placed on the same number of floats.
backmar bcas snying po gtsang ba ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “With ghee that is of pure essence.”
backbrgya phrag stong las lhag pa min/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There [should be] no more than one hundred thousand,” perhaps reflecting the Sanskrit *śatasāhasrānādhikaiḥ instead of the extant Skt. śatasāhasranāvikaiḥ.
backIt is not clear how the worshipers hold the lamps that were earlier “placed on floats.” Perhaps they offer them to the painting before letting them float on water?
backsngags rnams re re’ang ’don bzhin du/ /thams cad mnyam par rab zhugs nas/ /ston pa la ni ’bul byed na/ /de yi mod la grub par ston/ N, H. The meaning of this verse is not completely clear in the Skt. The Tibetan translation in N and H contains a notable variant in its first verse that brings the Tibetan a bit more in line with the extant Skt., although there is still some variation between the two. The Tibetan in N and H translates as, “If all of them enter together / While chanting each of the mantras / And present the offering to the Teacher, / It will instantly manifest the attainment.” The Tibetan translation in D reads ’dod bzhin du, which is likely a scribal error for the reading ’don bzhin du in N and H.
backlam ni dge dang dri ma med/ /yan lag brgyad la legs par spyod/ /yi ge gcig pa mnyed byas nas/ /sngags kyi ngo bo’i mgon po mnyes/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Practice the virtuous, stainless, / Eightfold path well. / Please the Lord who is the essence of mantra / By having delighted in the One Syllable.”
backdbus kyi phyogs su bya ba ni/ /rdo rje rigs te mi bskyod pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The middle part should be made / Into Akṣobhya of the Vajra family.”
backde nas rdo rje de blangs nas/ Tib. “Vajra” is adopted from the Tibetan. The Skt. has “inconceivable.”
backgzhan yang lha gnas gang ’dod ’gro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or any other celestial realm one desires.”
backgrub pa’i dbang phyug ’gyur ba ste/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One will become a lord among siddhas.”
backlas ni gang dag ’di gsungs pa/ Tib. This pāda has been supplied, with some modifications, from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backmtshan mo skyil mo krung bcas te/ /sdom can don yod bzlas byas na/ Tib. “Uninterruptedly” is based on a conjectured reading, acchindyaṃ, as the extant Skt. word, acindyaṃ, is incomprehensible. The Tibetan translates as, “If the vow holder has sat with his legs crossed/ And successfully performed the recitation at night.”
backnor bu’i lham Tib. In the Tibetan maṇipāduka° is translated as a single item, “jeweled pair of shoes,” possibly to differentiate it from the pair of shoes listed further down.
back“Banner” om. Tib.
backgdu bu Tib. “Bracelet” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backIt is not clear what is meant by “rise”; possibly “rise in the air.”
backrang tshul spyod dam bcos ma dang / Tib. This pāda is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. seems a little vague.
backsngags pa mchod pas grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Are accomplished when worshiped by the mantrin,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *mantripūjitā instead of the extant Skt. mantrapūjitā.
backNeither the Skt. nor the Tib. makes it clear whether this half-stanza is about minerals and elements or living beings composed of such. If it were the former, the next verse should perhaps be retranslated to say that these substances will acquire the power to purify the courses of births.
backIt is not quite clear what the practitioner is touching, whether the things/beings placed in front of the painting or the painting itself.
backlan ni drug gam bdun dag gis/ D. “One hundred thousand” is missing from the Tibetan.
backlas rnams dus ni yun ring ba/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Rituals that take a long time.”
backbu mo’am nor ni mang po dag /yang dag spyod pas byed par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “By performing it properly, it will yield / Many women and great wealth.” Otherwise the translation of this half-stanza is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. is rather obscure.
backgos la lan gnyis mngon bsngags na/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If he incants his clothes with the mantra twice.”
backsngags gi mthu yis ’jig par byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will be killed by the power of the mantra.”
backsngags kyi rgyal po Tib. The Tibetan calls it “the king of mantras.”
backzho dang mar gyis thams cad bsre/ Tib. In the Skt., “honey” is repeated twice, and “curds” is omitted. “Honey” is is omitted in the Tibetan.
backzhi zing ’byung po rnam song nas/ /’gro ba rnams ni bde gnas thob/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The spirits will be pacified and depart, / And beings will have a happy existence.” The D reading ’byung po rnam should read ’byung po rnams as it does in Y, K, N, H.
backbzlas nas sngags pa mchog sbyin zhing / /rtag tu ’bras bcas byed par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “After it is recited the mantra adept will be granted a boon and / Will ensure that they always have a result.”
back“Time” om. Tib.
back“You act” (pratipannaḥ) om. Tib.
back“Crossroad” om. Tib.
backIt is not clear very clear what this size or distance refers to. Perhaps this could also be the safe distance between the fire and the painting.
backde nas yang sbyin sreg gi mthar pad+ma’i me tog tsan+dana dkar po’i chus bsang gtor byas pa stong rtsa brgyad sbyin sreg bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, at the end of this fire offering, one should perform one thousand and eight fire offerings that cast smoke using water containing lotus flowers and white sandalwood.”
backsbyin sreg gi mthar yang bzang po’i gdan dang gdong bkab la rang gi lha la rang gi sngags kyis spyan drang bar bya zhing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “At the end of the homa, one should use mantra to invite one’s personal deity onto an excellent cushioned seat.”
backSkt.: oṁ kumārarūpiṇa darśaya darśaya • ātmano bhūtisamudbhāvāya svapnaṃ me niveda yathābhūtam | hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backAs the following sentence indicates, this could still be during the first watch.
backnor bu zhel gyi khang pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “jeweled crystal houses.”
backa mra’i shing tshogs rab mang po/ D. The Tibetan includes this line that is not attested in the Skt. following #UT22084-088-038-10624. It translates as, “Or a great many groves of mango trees.”
backgang du bdag gi lus gnas pa/ /de nyid du ni mthong bar byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It will bring about a vision / Of the state that one’s body is in.” The Skt. of this half-stanza appears to be corrupt.
backgru dang chu ni ’thung ba dang / /btung ba’i khang pa khang pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Boats and water, / Taverns and houses.”
backban glang dag D; ba glang dag Y, K, C. The Tibetan translation ban glang in D translates the Sanskrit term *nāgī, which can mean “belonging to an elephant.” The Tibetan translation ba glang in Y, K, and C translates as “cow” or “bull.”
backlan tshwa la sogs reg pa ni/ /kun tu gsal te mthong ba ni/ N, H; lan tshwa la sogs reg pa ni/ /kun du gal te mthong ba ni/ D. The Tibetan translation in N and H seems preferable to D, and translates as, “If one touches salt and the like / And sees light all around.” Here the Tibetan appears to have translated the Skt. lavaṇa using its alternate meaning, “lustre.”
backsnum khur rnam pa du ma ni/ /bza’ dang spyad par rjes ’dod dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Many different types of fried cakes, / That one is allowed to eat and enjoy.”
backrnam pa sna tshogs bza’ la spyod/ /mthong na bad kan can du brjod/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10648 translates as, “If one consumes or sees these various types / Of food, it is an indication of having phlegm.” The Tibetan bad gan can might also be translated as “having a phlegm disorder.”
backrmi lam ma lus du ma ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All the various kinds of dreams.”
backsna tshogs rin chen mthong ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or a variety of jewels may be seen.”
backri dang phyogs ni rab ’bar ba/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or mountains and the directions ablaze.”
back“Debilitated” (sammūrchita) om. Tib.
backgzhan yang rin chen gang yin pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or some other kind of jewel.”
backme dang tsha ba sten pa dang / /reg dang za bar byed pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one makes use of, touches, or / Ingests hot and spicy [foods].”
backshing chen de bzhin theg pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A great tree, or a vehicle,” reflecting the Sanskrit *mahānaga instead of the extant Skt. mahānāga.
backde bzhin rnam pa sna tshogs pa/ /gang gzhan rmi lam dag tu brjod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Various types of things such as these / And others are expressed in dreams.”
backThe Tibetan seems to indicate that the things listed here and later in this section are experienced in one’s dreams, rather then done while awake. The Skt., however, is vague and could be interpreted either way. This ambiguity could be intentional, as the activities listed here, if dreamed of, could be caused by the humor of wind, or, if they done during the waking state, could increase this humor because of their nature.
backgtsor yang rlung ni yang dag ’byung/ /shing thog rlung ni rab bskyed pa/ D. The meaning of #UT22084-088-038-10672 is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Primarily [anything] produced by wind / [Such as] fruit brought forth by wind.”
backdngos rnams rlung ni skyed pa yi/ /bza’ dang bca’ ba khyad par ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “These things are the particular types/ Of food and drink that produce wind.”
back’byung po rnams ni gar byed dang / /bdag nyid kyang ni gar byed pa/ /gang gis rmi lam mthong na ni/ /de ’dra rlung nad can du shes/ Tib. The Tibetan that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-10675 and 15.47ab translates as, “If in a dream one sees / A number of beings dancing, / Or even oneself dancing, / Know that one has a wind disorder.”
backmi bzad gzugs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “hideous forms” in place of “harsh expressions.”
backgrong gi chos ni mthong ba las/ /rmi lam chags pas sa bon byung/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Attachment in a dream sows the seed / For having a vision of a sexual act.”
backrnam ’dres rnam par ’dres pa ni/ /rmi lam na ni rtag tu mthong / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mixed [humors] produce mixed [effects]; / This will always be seen in dreams.”
backPossibly, the Skt. sattva should be emended to tattva (“reality,” “truth”), as the meaning would then be that dreams are “devoid of reality,” which would tie in better with the next half-stanza which mentions “those who show reality (tattvadarśibhiḥ).”
backde bas rnam pa thams cad kyis/ /rmi lam zhes bya yod pa spangs/ /bya ba dus kyi rim pa nyid/ /de nyid gzigs pas bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Since what is called a dream, / Is based on mental images, it is devoid of existence. / The sequence of activities and lifespans / Were taught by those who see the truth.”
backyid ni gzhungs pa Tib. The reading “are intelligent” is adopted from the Tibetan. The Skt. has durmedhā which translates as, “not intelligent.”
backbtung ba mang la rtag tu dga’/ Tib. The Skt. could also be translated as “always delight in receiving respect.” The Tibetan translates as, “And always enjoy much drinking,” reflecting the Sanskrit *bahupānā° instead of the extant Skt. bahumānā°. Either reading seems equally plausible.
backrgyal rigs su ni bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who are said to be born in the warrior caste.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *kṣatriye jātinirdiṣṭaḥ instead of the extant Skt. nakṣatre jātinirdiṣṭaḥ.
backser sna ldan zhing mtshon pa med/ Tib. The Skt. of this pāda has been translated to correspond in meaning to the Tibetan.
backlongs spyod chen po skye ’gyur zhing / /rang gi las kyis nye bar ’tshe/ /rang gi las ’bras bstan pa ni/ /las kyi sngags ni spang ba min/ /las min sngags ni gtso bo zhes/ /’jig rten ’dren pas gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10688 translates as, “Some are born into great prosperity and / Some make their living by their own activity. / It is said that the results of their actions / Are not independent of ritual mantras, / But as the guides of the world have said, / ‘Mantra is best, not ritual.’ ” The translation of the last four lines of Skt. 15.57c–f is largely a guess.
backde bas sems can bad kan can/ /sa steng grub pa byed pa ni/ /sa bdag ’dod pa byed pa la/ /de la grub pa thob par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus beings of the phlegm type / Who reach accomplishment upon the earth / Will, if they form the desire to be a lord of the earth, / Attain that very accomplishment.”
backThe Skt. phrase śūradveṣī ca (or śūra dveṣī ca) could also be translated as “heroic and hateful.”
backspros chen brten dang blon po dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A very powerful and steadfast minister.” The Tibetan translation of the Skt. compound dṛḍhamantrī translates the Skt. mantrin according to the classical meaning of the term in the Sanskrit epic literature (and elsewhere) as a king’s minister.
backshes bzhin las kyis nyer spyod pa’i/ /sems can zil gyis mnan nas spyod/ D. The first line of the Tibetan, which corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-10703, should be emended to read de bzhin instead of shes bzhin. The first half-stanza will then read, “Acting in accordance with this mode, / He engages beings by assualting them.”
backthub pas spangs pa’i don/ Tib. The translation “rejected,” which seems to be supported by the Tibetan, is based on reading the Skt. ūrjita as an irregular past passive participle of √vṛj.
backcho ga sbyar ba’i chos rnams gang / /sngags pas thams cad rab sbyar na/ /spyod pa des ni ’grub ’gyur te/ /gzhan las sems can de la min/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If a mantrin should employ / Any system that uses rituals / That activity will be successful, / Which is not the case for other individuals.”
backsngo bsangs Tib. Śyāma (“dark”) is translated into the Tib. as “greenish blue.”
backdpa’ dang de bzhin drag pa dang / /chags ldan sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ N, H; dpa’ dang de bzhin drag po dang / /chags ldan sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ Y, K; dpa’ dang de bzhin drag pa dang / /’dab chags sdig pa’i khyim las skyes/ D. The recensions of the Tibetan translation in N, H, Y, and K correspond to the Sanskrit text and are preferable to the variant ’dab chags found in D.
backde dag gang phyir nad mang ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And for that reason is often ill.”
backsems can rlung nad ’khrug pa la/ /gti mug nye bar zhi ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Beings who are agitated by a wind disorder, / Who are dull and tranquil.”
backThe Skt. can also be translated as “And can be controlled with stupefying mantras.”
backrgyu skar khyim ni chu skyes dang / /gza’ ni bdag po spen par blta/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10722 translates as, “They should ascertain the asterisms of the water signs / And of Saturn as the governing planet.” There is no mention of Saturn, however, in the Skt., and it is also not clear whether this statement refers to what has been said above or what will be said below.
backThis probably refers to the activities of pacifying (śāntika) and enriching (pauṣṭika).
backrlung nad skyes pa’i sems can ni/ D. The Skt. doesn’t specify whether it is the performer or the target for whom these activities/rites are contra-indicated. Possibly both are meant at the same time, but the Tibetan suggests the former. It omits “and confused,” and only says “Beings born with wind disorders.”
backlas las gol ba med par ni/ lus can yon tan mi smin te/ /yon tan kho na las ldan pas/ /skye bar yang ni byed pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translation of this verse is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “A living being does not develop qualities / They don’t possess that contradict their karma. / It is only the qualities and karma one possesses / That affect the next rebirth. ”
backzlos pa sems can yon tan shes/ /yon tan yon tan min las ’ching / D. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra reciter knows the qualities of beings. / Good qualities and faults are bound by karma.”
backyon tan med la bya min gang / /de yi las ni bya ba min/ /gang phyir bya ba las byed de/ /bya ba yon tan med ma yin/ D. The Tibetan is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “In the absence of qualities, that which is not a ritual / Has no karma—it is not a ritual; / Because a ritual creates karma, / There is no ritual that lacks qualities.”
backbya ba las dang yon tan nyid/ /yang dag ldan pa sgrub par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One who has the right ritual, karma, / And qualities will be successful.”
backrdzas dang sems can spyod pa gzhan/ /bya ba las dang yon tan yin/ Tib. The Tibetan is obscure. One possible translation of the Tibetan is, “Other substances and the other behaviors of beings / Are rituals, karma, and qualities.”
backVighna can mean an obstacle as well as the demon that creates it.
backdrag cing ma rungs las rnams ni/ /rmi lam rtag tu ’phral du smin/ D. It is not completely clear whether this is about the “activites that are violent and cruel,” or dreams about such activities.
back’jig rten ’jig rten ’das rnams kyi/ /yon tan skye bar yang dag ’byung / N, H; ’jig rten ’jig rten ’das rnams kyis/ /yon tan skye bar yang dag ’byung / D. The meaning of #UT22084-088-038-10740 is unclear. The Tibetan is also obscure. One possible translation for the Tibetan in N and H is, “Worldly and transcendent / Qualities arise at birth.”
backdrag po’i gzugs ni gzugs chen po/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He has a fierce form and tremendous size.”
backdus mtsha Tib. The Skt. kālarātra can be understood literally (“black as night”), or taken as a proper name (Kālarātra), or perhaps interpreted as “the husband of Kālarātrī.” The Tibetan supports the second option.
backmi bzad sngags ni bshad par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “I will now explain the fierce mantra.”
backcho ’phrul chen po bgegs rnams kun/ /ma rungs sems can ’jig par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It destroys all powerful sorcery and obstructing beings, / And all wicked beings.”
backhe he mahākrodha ṣaṇmukha ṣaṭcaraṇa sarvavighnaghātaka hūṁ hūṁ | kiṃ cirāyasi vināyakajīvitāntakara duḥsvapnaṃ me nāśaya laṅgha laṅgha [D. la hu la hu] samayam anusmara phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backIn line with the teachings of this tantra, the mantra is not differentiated from the deity.
back’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi sngags rnams ’don par byed pa na gang zhig ma rungs pa’i sems can gyi gzugs can gyis rnam par ’tshe bar byed pa de la/ khro bo’i rgyal po ’dis ni rigs rgyud thams cad ’dul bar byed cing / srog kyang ’dzin par mi byed de/ D. The Tibetan seem confused: “When any worldly or transcendent mantra is recited, / This Lord of Wrath will tame the one who makes the embodied form of a wicked being cause problems and the entire class of beings, / But he will not take their lives.”
backIn the Tibetan this is the last line of the prose section. The verse section begins with “Having spoken thus.”
backzlos pas rtag tu ’di dag ni/ /mtshan mo rtag tu don byas na/ Y, K; zlos pas rtag tu ’di dag ni/ /mtshan mo rtag tu don byas na/ N, H; zlos pas rtag tu gdon byas na/ D. D appears to skip some material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10759 and combines these two lines into a single line that translates as, “If a reciter recites it consistently.” The Tibetan recensions in N, H, Y, and K track closely with the Skt.
back’dod pa chung zhing cung zad dge/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who has little desire and a little virtue.”
backphra ba’i gos la rtag tu dga’/ Tib. “Fine” has been supplied from the Tibetan, filling the lacunae in the Skt.
backzas tshod rig dag rtag gtsang ldan/ Tib. The Skt. of this pāda is unclear; the Tibetan, which translates the term śucinaḥ (gtsang ldan) in #UT22084-088-038-10768 in this line, translates as, “Knows proper portions and is always clean.”
back“Guests” om. Tib.
backgtsang ba’i spyod pas mngon par ’gro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Has sex with one whose conduct is pure.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śucicārābhigāminaḥ instead of the extant Skt. śucidārābhigāminaḥ.
backsku ni Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “body” in place of “hair.”
backde tshe ’jig rten ’das pa grub/ /de la ’bras bcas grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then they will attain the transcendent/ Accomplishment together with the result.”
backlongs spyod che zhing sngags rnams shes/ /sngags rnams kun la de nyid rig/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who is endowed with good fortune, is skilled in mantra/ And understands all mantras.”
backbud med ming ldan Y, N, H; bud med mig ldan D. “Has a woman’s name” (based on emended Skt.) is supported by Y, N, and H. D translate as, “Has the eyes of a woman.”
backThe Tibetan translates as, “worships gods.”
backthul bar dka’ Tib. “Difficult to subdue” is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. reading suggests “difficult/dangerous to approach.”
backbyin par phra/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “is slight in his giving.”
backrgyal ba la ni srog kyang gtong / Tib. The translation of the last pāda is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “He is the sun among the victorious lords.”
backI.e., the kṣatriya caste.
backma rungs rtag tu bab col byed/ D. “Cruel and rash” doesn’t seem to fit the context, but the Tibetan supports this reading.
backSpiny bitter gourd (Momordica monadelpha).
back#UT22084-088-038-10797om. Tib.
backmgrin pa bum pa ’dra ba dang / D. “Resembling a conch” probably implies that the neck has three lines indicative of good fortune. The Tibetan translates as, “resembling a vase,” reflecting the Sanskrit *kumbha° instead of the extant Skt. kambu°.
backthal gong rgyas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Broad, elegant back.”
backkun nas dkar med ba spu dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “No gray body hair anywhere.”
back“Hips” om. Tib.
backnyams med Tib. The Skt. kharta, which could not be identified, is translated into the Tibetan as “blemish.”
backsor mo rnams kyi ring ba dang /. The Tibetan translates as, “With toes that are long, and.”
backnang stong ma yin mthil mnyam gnas/ Tib. This pāda is unintelligible in the extant Skt. The Tibetan is also obscure.
backIt is not certain whether the reading here is “ears” (which could only be obtained after emending varṇau (or arṇau) to karṇau, or some other body part that forms a pair, to account for the dual ending. The Tib. is of no help.
backIn the Tib., “nice to behold” and the entire next verse constitute the description of the person and not of the pair of body parts just mentioned. The Skt., however, consistently uses the dual ending, clearly indicating that a pair is meant.
back’jam Tib. “Smooth” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “not clinging.”
backri mo zab cing D. The Tibetan translates as, “a deep line.”
backmchig pa rab sngags shin tu chud/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Whose fine testicles are withdrawn.” The Tibetan shin tu chud may be a scribal error for shin tu chung, which would match the extant Skt. svalpatarau.
backgang tshe skyes dbang gtsang ba dang / /rtse mo dmar la yang dag gnas/ Tib. This half-stanza, again, is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as “Whose penis is clean / And has a red tip.”
back“During sleep” could euphemistically refer to going to bed for sex.
backmang po ma yin snum pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Not abundant and smooth.”
backIt is not clear what period of time is meant, but it is most likely one day.
backlan gsum bshang zhing sngags drug dran/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One who defecates three times and recalls the mantra six,” or, alteratively, “One who defecates three times and recalls the six-syllable mantra.” The Tibetan may reflect the Sanskrit *ṣaṇmantrī instead of the extant Skt. ṣaṇmūtrī.
backNeither the Skt. nor the Tib. specifies which watch of the night this is meant to be.
backde yi grub pa rtag tu mchog /las kun byed par snang ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will manifest the best accomplishment / That performs all the activities.”
back’bras bu rnam pa sna tshogs dang / /phun tshogs rnam pa mang po la/ /mi rnams rjes su ’dod pa yang / /mtshan nyid kyis ni mngon mtshan pa’o/ D. ’bras bu rnam pa sna tshogs dang / /phun tshogs rnam pa mang po la/ /mi rnams rjes su ’dod pa yang / /mtshan nyid kyis ni sngon mtshan pa’o/ Y, K, N. The Tibetan that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-10812 translates as, “People who pursue / Various types of results / And various kinds of good conditions / Are marked with signs.” The variant sngon mtshan or “previous marks” in Y, K, and N reflects the Sanskrit *pūrvalakṣitaḥ in place of the extant Skt. abhilaḳsitaḥ, which might translate as “Have been previously indicated by marks.”
backnus pa’i gza’ rnams kyis mtshan pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Are marked by these planets that indicate capability.”
backnyi ma’i dkyil ’khor mchar kha ni/ /tho rangs dus su gang skyes dang / /gang tshe de yi dus su skyes/ /de la grub po rab tu snang / D. Skt. 15.153ef is expanded into four lines in the Tibetan that contain additional material and translate as, “If they are born at dawn/ When the sun is rising, / The time at which they are born/ Will manifest accomplishment for them.” Only the first and second verses in this set of four in the Tibetan correspond to #UT22084-088-038-10813.
backIn the Buddhist and Hindu astrology, the moon and the sun are regarded as “planets” (graha).
backlus can rnams kyi rtag de la/ /ma rungs gza’ mthong gang yin pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “For such beings it is always the case / That inauspicious planets are seen.”
backlas ni ngan ’joms skar mda’ can/ D; The Tibetan translates as, “Meteors that destroy negative karma,” while the Narthang and Peking read “Meteors that destroy karma.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *karmanirghātolkinaḥ instead of the extant Skt. kampanirghāta•ulkinaḥ.
back“Looks at” is a technical expression indicating that the astrological aspect of the planet that “looks” is exercising influence on the planet it looks at, and, indirectly, on the affected person.
backOne yoke (or four cubits), as an astronomical distance between celestial objects, is the radial distance of eight degrees (if the Indian astronomical measures of cubit and yoke corresponded to those used in ancient Babylon).
backphur bus sa de mthong bar ’gyur/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan. The Skt. could also be read as “Jupiter is looked at.”
backde bzhin nyin phyed nyi ma ni/ /nyi ma phyed du mnyam par mthong / Tib. The Skt. of this half-stanza is not clear, as it could be translated in more than one way. The Tibetan could be translated as “Likewise when the sun is at midday / [Accomplishments?] equal to the sun manifest.”
backKetu is here the descending node of the moon. Like Rāhu, it is an imaginary planet that takes 18.6 years to complete one revolution. It is however not clear whether Ketu and Rāhu mantioned in this verse refer to the nodes of the moon, as the Rāhu two lines below seems to refer to an ordinary eclipse.
backthung ’gyur nyi ma gnya’ shing tsam/ /byed pa nyid du bstan pa ni/ D. This sentence is incomprehensible in both the Skt. and the Tibetan. The Tibetan might translate as, “For a short moment it is a yoke’s distance from the sun. / When this happens, it is said.”
backThe translation of this pāda is a guess. The Skt. yugāntaka could be translated as “noon,” but also as “the end of the eon.”
backsgra gcan spen pa nyid dag yin/ /mun pa dus dang dus mthar byed/ /de nas phar ni thung ba na/ /’chi ltas skar mda’ sa ’gul byed/ D. The last four lines in the Tibetan for this obscure verse translate as, “This is Rāhu and Saturn. / At the time of darkness, when the end times have come, / If seen far in the distance / Meteors, omens of death, cause earthquakes.”
backnyi ma nub kar zangs ma’ mdog Tib. In the Tibetan, it seems that it is the one who is governed by this planetary influence that is “the color of the setting sun, with a strong tint of vermillion.”
backThe “chief planet,” i.e. the sun, since the sun, in Indic astrology, is referred to be the generic name of a planet.
backdbul zhing nad btab glen pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Poor, prone to illness, and dull.”
back’gul byed sgra drag dmar ba’i mdog /mnam lcags nyid kyang rab rdung byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “When the earth shakes, there are terrifying noises, and [all] is the color red, / Meteors strike,”
backde bzhin rdo rje mchi ltas dang / /gzhan yang khyim sogs rab tu mthong / /skye bo kun kyis sgra gcan ni/ /mi bzad rab tu mthong gyur na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When there is ominous lightning / And the Pleiades and the like are visible, / When all beings behold / The terrifying Rāhu.”
backdbul zhing mgon med tshul khrims ’chal/ /mi ni rtag tu sdig pa spyod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “People who are poor and vulnerable, / Who lack discipline and always engage in evil acts.”
backbud med mtshan ni ngan pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Women are ugly.”
backde ltar skyes gyur skyes pa dang / /’jig rten mang po skye ba yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus they take birth again and again, / Born into many different worlds.”
backlo ni kun la ’dod pa’ang zhes/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Every year, whatever is desired,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarvasaṃvat instead of the extant Skt. sarvasampat.
backde nyid ’jig rten gnas pa yin/ Tib. The translation of this pāda is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “The mantra, singularly, always,” and is difficult to makes sense of in the context.
backThe fourth pāda appears to be missing in the Skt. and the Tib.
backgza’ rnams las la spyod pa zhes/ /des na ’di ni mthong zhes gsungs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is said the planets are inciters of karma, / And that one can thus observe them.”
backIn the Skt., this verse includes two additional lines (one of them with lacunae) between the two half-stanzas. They have been omitted in the translation here, as they don’t seem to add anything in terms of content.
backde nas gzhan yang rab bshad pa/ /nges par zlos pas rtag tu bya/ /yud tsam dag ni bcu gnyis dang / /dus dang dus min ’gro ba’i rgyu/ /grub pa’i rgyu ’am ma yin pa/ /’gro ba min pa’ang bshad par bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Next I will explain / How a mantra reciter can always act with certainty. / I will explain the cause in terms of / The twelve moments and proper and improper times, / And what is neither a cause/ Of accomplishment nor progress.” The final line of the Tibetan term ’gro ba min pa reflects the Sanskrit *ayātaṃ instead of the extant Skt. apātraṃ.
backlo legs Tib. “There are bountiful harvests” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backnyi ma gsal mthong dge/ Tib. In place of “kings enjoy prosperity,” the Tibetan translates as, “the sun shines bright, and there is goodness.”
backdus dang de bzhin dbang po’i gzhu/ /skye bo rnams la rtag zhi byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “At times when there is rainbow/ It always brings peace to all beings.”
backsha za dang ni ma mo dang / /drag po ma rungs nyer ’joms byed/ /sha za rnams kyi spyod pa ni/ /de bzhin ma rungs sems can brjod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Now I will describe the wicked ways / And behaviors of flesh eaters / Such as the kravyādas and mātṛs / Who are fierce, wicked, and bring harm.” The Tibetan sha za rnams kyi spyod pa may reflect the Sanskrit *ācaritaṃ piśācānām instead of the extant Skt. caritaṃ piśitāśinām. The Tibetan sha za appears in the first verse as a translation of kravyāda, so in this second instance it has been translated literally as “flesh eater” and not as piśāca.
backgzhan gyi sdug bsngal dag la sems/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who consider the suffering of others.”
backsngags dang rig pa rnams kyis drangs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Can summon using this mantra and vidyā.” It is however not clear which mantra is meant. It could be the vidyārāja One Syllable taught in the previous chapter (14.5).
backgang du mtshan nyid la brten pas/ /spyod pa rgya cher bstan pa yin/ /gzhan gyi lus la gnas nas ni/ /mi lus brten nas gnas pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When the indicated target is possessed, / They display a vast number of behaviors. / They inhabit the bodies of others, / Possess the person’s body, and then remain.”
back“Gods and asuras” (surāsura), with its alliteration and the sense derived from the grammar that they represent two opposing parties, is a Skt. stock phrase that has no equivalent in English.
backlha ni mchod pa zhes bshed de/ /lha min nga rgyal can gyi rgyus/ /gnas der gnas pa’ang rnam pa gnyis/ /rim bzhin lha dang lha ma yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The gods are said to be venerable. / The asuras are rooted in pride. / They reside in their two places, / Known respectively as gods and asuras.”
backde yang der ni rnam gnyis te/ /drag pa dang ni thun mong yin/ /de yang der ni rnam gnyis ’gro/ dge dang mi dge ’gro ba lnga/ Tib. It is not clear how “the five destinies” fits in into this division, as the Skt. is rather vague. The Tibetan translates as, “They each are of two further types: / Those that are cruel and those that are ordinary. / Those fall into two further types: / The virtuous and nonvirtuous among the five destinies.”
backder gnas rnam gsum ’gro ba ste/ /nyi shu cu grangs med pa’o/ /lha dbang dang ni ’og min par/ /go rims ji bzhin sa med pa’o/ D. This verse is very unclear and could be translated a number of different ways. It is, however, for the most part supported by the Tibetan apart from the last pāda, which translates as, “Such is the sequence of the non-terrestrial.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *yathāsaṅkhyam abhūmakāḥ instead of the extant Skt. yāmāsaṅkhyamabhūpakāḥ.
backThis line is omitted in the Tib. The preceding line, “All the noble buddhas,” begins the next verse.
backsngags dang rgyud ni rig bcas pas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “By the mantras and tantras together with the vidyā.”
backbag yod rigs ni bzang ba dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Who are careful and of good character.”
backmi rnams kyi ni mdor bsdu na/ /de dag gi ni lus bzung nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “In brief, human beings / Should maintain their bodies, and.”
backrtag tu shin tu chos don dang / /thar pa’i don du rnam par brtag D. The Tibetan translates as, “Always orient themselves toward liberation / And toward the highest Dharma.”
backIn this passage the terms sattva (sems can) and asattva (sems can ma yin) are medical terms. Sattva refers to the psycho-physical state of purity, balance, and health, and asattva refers to its opposite. This important terminology would be missed if one were to translate the Tibetan sems can and sems can ma yin according to the meaning these terms so often bear outside of the medical literature as “a being” and “not a being.”
backgang gzhan rnam pa sna tshogs byas/ Tib. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backPart of this pāda is missing in the Skt. The Tibetan however, doesn’t indicate any missing content.
backThis passage is not clear, but it is possibly saying that earth and water are asattvaelements, and the remaining two or three are sattva. They are associated with nonhuman and human beings respectively.
backrgyud ’di yongs su bshad pa yin/ Tib. In place of “sūtra,” the Tibetan translates as, “tantra.” While both are correct, the former accords with the chapter colophons that refer to the Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa as a vaipulyasūtra.
backde nyid chos ni btsal bya’i phyir/ /rgyud ’di yongs su bshad pa yin/ /rgyud dang sngags dang sman bzang po/ /bka’ ni yang dag gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It has been taught in this tantra / For those who might seek that teaching. / This scripture perfectly explains / The tantra, mantra, and good medicine.”
backnad med Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “no illness.”
backgang ’di bstan pa dag la ni/ /sngags kun ’don par byed pa na/ /kun mkhyen shes dang shes bya yi/ /las kyi rgyud ni ’brel pa dang / /sngags zlos pa yi ched du ni/ /rgyud rnams mtha’ dag sa steng gsungs/ /sngags rgyud ma lus don dag ni/ /byang chub rnam gsum gzhol ba ste/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10895 arranges the lines of these verses in a different order. The Tibetan for these two verses reads, “If all the mantras are recited / That are [found] in these teachings, / One connects with the karmic causes / For omniscience of what is knowable. // That which is contained within the mantras to be recited / Has been taught, on earth, in all the tantras; / The entire meaning of tantra and mantra / Is directed toward the three aspects of awakening.”
backgzhan la cho ga rab snang ba/ /cho ga’i rgyal po ’di la’ang yod/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That which is found in other manuals / Is also found in this king of manuals.”
backgang du cho ga’i rgyal po ’dis/ /dbang ’gyur min dang bkug min pa/ /sa steng rten gsum ’di na/ /rig pa’i sngags rgyal de yod min/ D. The Tibetan adds content to this verse in its last line and translates as, “There is no king of vidyāmantras / On earth or in this threefold world / That is not controlled or attracted / By this king of ritual manuals.” The Tibetan translators seem to have read *vidyārājaḥ (“king of vidyā mantras”) in place of a four-letter lacunae in the Skt. This reading is metrically impossible. The reading conjectured here is vidyate (“exists”), which fits the meter.
backsangs rgyas kun gyi gsung dag ni/ /rtag tu dge ba don yod ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This teaching of all the buddhas / Is always virtuous and productive,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarvabuddhānāṃ instead of the extant Skt. sarvabhūtānāṃ.
backsngags rnams kun la sngags pa ni/ /bzlas dang sbyin sreg rtag dad pa’o/ Y, L, K, C; sngags rnams kun la sngags pa ni/ /bzlas dang sbyin sreg rtag ’dod pa’o/ D. The Tibetan in Y, L, K, and C is closer to the extant Skt. and translates as, “Those who recite all the mantras / Will always have confidence in their recitations and fire sacrifice.”
backsangs rgyas rnams kyi bstan pa ni/ /sngags su rab gnas de ’dir gsungs/ /sngags de rnam par mi rtog par/ /cho ga de ’dir gsungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The teachings of the buddhas / Have been taught here in terms of mantra. / In this manual those mantras / Have been taught in a nonconceptual way.”
back/de tshe ’gro ba blo bzhin du/ /’jig rten kun gyi dge mi dge/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is partly based on the Tibetan as the Skt. is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The virtue and nonvirtue present in all the worlds / Accords with the minds of beings at that time.”
back“He” probably refers to the king of mantras—Mañjughoṣa—mentioned two verses below.
backde nyid cho ga ’dir spros pa/ /de bzhin gshegs pa spros pa med/ /’jig rten ’das pa rdzogs sangs rgyas/ /’jig rten phyir ni ’dir gsungs so/ D. The grammar of this verse was interpreted to accord with the Tibetan. This required reading the BHS nominative plural (tathāgatā) as an instrumental plural (tathāgataiḥ). The Tibetan translates as, “That which is elaborated on in this manual / Was taught here for the sake of the world / By the tathāgatas who lack mental elaborations, / The perfect buddhas who transcend the world.”
backlas rnams kun la shin tu lhag/ /’jig rten las las rab tu ’das/ /chos rnams rnam pa sna tshogs byed/ /’jig rten kun gyis rab tu bsngags/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It far surpasses all [other] activities, / And is an activity that transcends worldly activities. / It engages the great variety of dharmas, / And is highly praised in all the worlds.”
backde don yon tan nges grub dang / /’jig rten khams kyi dge mi dge/ /bag med ma bskul ma yin te/ /bskul nas ngas ni chos bshad do/ D. #UT22084-088-038-10918 is probably corrupt, and the translation here is merely a conjecture. The Tibetan is also obscure. One possible translation is, “For that purpose there is virtue and nonvirtue / In the qualities accomplished in the world. / Do not be careless and not request [teachings]; / Request them and I will explain the doctrine.”
backngas kyang bshad pa yin/ Tib. “By me” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backkun mkhyen ye shes rab ’jug la/ /las rnams gcig tu bsngags pa yin/ /’jig rten sngon las bdag yin te/ /de ni da ltar yongs su spyod/ D. The Tibetan seems to reflect the extant Skt. but interprets it differently and translates as, “Among ways to generate omniscient knowledge, / These activities alone are praiseworthy; / I [performed] this activity in previous worlds, / And [perform] them now in this one.”
backlas ni ’di la’ang snang ’gyur na/ /skye ba ’di la ’grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When these activties do manifest, / They will succeed in this birth.”
backsgrub pa pos ni bsgrub par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the practitioner will be successful.”
backshin tu yun ring dag gis ’grub/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will succeed after a long time.”
backThe reference is made here to the immediately preceding chapter.
backblo dang ldan pa gnod sbyin gyi bdag po lag na rdo rjes nga la dris nas/ ’jam dpal khyod kyi don thams cad bya ba’i las kyi le’u rab ’byam ’khor gyi dkyil ’khor gyi nang du rgya cher sngar bstan pa yin no/ D. This paragraph has been translated mainly from the Tibetan. In the Skt. it begins with “Listen, Mañjuśrī!” The clause “Requested by … in his hand” comes at the end of the paragraph and possibly serves to introduce the verse that follows. The Skt. also includes the phrase “I will [now] teach…” (future tense) which seems to clash with the past tense (“I taught”) of the immediately following section that sums up the previous chapter.
backsngags kyi zlos pa bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to the Skt. kathitaṃ mantrajāpinām (“[all this] was taught for/with reference to the mantra reciters”) translates as, “the recitation of mantras has been taught.”
backblo chog rnams Tib. The Tibetan uses the plural number here, possibly honorific, and translates as, “those of supreme intellect.”
backbzang po’i ’gro ba’i skye gnas dang / /rgyu dang shes pa’i rnam pa spyod/ Tib. The meaning of the last clause is unclear in both the Skt. and the Tibetan.
backlas dang las ’bras sems can gyi/ Tib. In place of “complete” (sarvaṃ), the Tibetan translates as, “of beings.”
backThis pāda refers to the rites of spirit possession, or possessing another person’s body. The “vessel” is the person who is being possessed. The term used for the act of possession is āveṣa, literally “entry.”
backThis section, from verse 16.4 up to this point, refers to the teachings given in the previous chapter. The phrase “requested in the context of dreams” possibly refers to the fact that the knowledge of dream signs was one of the teachings requested and then the teachings commence with the signs received in dreams (cf. #UT22084-088-038-2457).
backgnod sbyin bdag po Tib. In place of “the yakṣa,” the Tibetan translates as, “the lord of the yakṣas.”
backThe simple past of “requested” was chosen here to fit the narrative. The Skt. translates as, “[Vajrapāṇi] requests,” or “May [Vajrapāṇi] request”; the Tibetan, however, uses the perfect tense, possibly to make it fit into the narrative of the remainder of this section. The teachings that Vajrapāṇi is requesting here were already given in the previous chapter. Due to the switching around of chapters and sections in the MMK during the redactional process, some sections, including most of this chapter, seem to have ended up where they do not belong. A large part of this chapter belongs, narrative-wise, near the beginning of the previous chapter. It is, however, impossible to restore this section to its original position without undoing also the changes to the grammatical tense and mode made by the readactors to make this section fit in its new position.
backbcas pa’i gza’ ni gtso bo ste/ /dge dang mi dge legs tshul bzhad/ D. This half-stanza has been reconstructed based on the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backmchog dang tha ma’i spyod pa dang / /dge ba’i don dang ldan pa dang / /zlos pa grub pa’i mtshan ma dang / /bsgrub bya sgrub min rnam par brtags/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The distinction of highest and lowest conduct, / Having a viruous aim, / The characteristics of what a mantra reciter accomplishes, / And what should and should not be accomplished. /”
backrig pa ’dzin pa grub ’dod dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “And those who desire the accomplishment of a vidyādhara.”
backrgyal ba’i sras kyis gsol btab nas/ /thub pa mchog gis gsungs pa ni/ Tib. There again seems to be a confusion in the narrative here, possibly due to the switching around of passages. This half-stanza seems to belong at the end of the Buddha Śākyamuni’s teachings that Vajrapāṇi had requested. The Tibetan translators, it seems, tried to resolve the inconsistency by turning this half-stanza around. The Tibetan translates as, “After the son of the conqueror supplicated him, / The Supreme Sage spoke.”
backgzhon nu ’di ni dngos don khyab gyur cing/ /ma byung ’jig rten phan pa sgrub byed la/ /’gro ba kun la phan pa dge phyir ston/ /thar pa shes shing dag pa’i gnas su ’dug Y, K. Following the variant khyab gyur in Y and K, the Tibetan translates as, “This divine youth permeates all things, / Is unborn, accomplishes the benefit of the world, / And is a teacher because his virtue benefits all beings. / He understands liberation and abides in a pure state.”
back“The wheel holder” is probably a reference to the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backI.e., the Dharma wheel.
back“Mañju,” as in “Mañjughoṣa.”
back“Knowledge” om. Tib.
backgang gi mthu ni mkhyen par mi spyod de/ N, H. The translation of the last pāda is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. is unclear. The grammatical gender of “speech,” called Mañju, now changes to masculine, as this speech is equated with Mañju/Mañjughoṣa.
backIt is unclear who is here being addressed as the “lord of gods.”
backkhyod kyang lha yi dbang phyug ’jig rten khyad par gyis/ /thub bzang shes par nus pa ma yin no/ Tib. The translation of the last #UT22084-088-038-10968 is partially informed by the Tibetan, as the Skt. is unclear. The Tibetan reads the Skt. te as a shortened form of the genitive second person pronoun tava and translates as, “Even the lord of the gods and his entire world / Cannot comprehend your divine power. /”
backUnfortunately, the play on words in this verse is impossible to replicate in English. “Gentle Splendor” is the name of Mañjuśrī (mañju = “gentle/lovely” and śrī = “splendor/glory”).
backda ltar Tib. “Present” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “celestial”; the syntax, however, is not clear.
backThe Skt. bhavi (BHS bhavi = classical bhave = “in saṃsāra”) could also be translated as “future,” i.e., that one will obtain peace now and awakening in the future, which seems to be the way the Tibetan translators understood it.
backBecause of the word mañju (“pleasant,” “gentle”) being used here to describe the awakening, this entire phrase could also be translated—as a figure of speech—as “the awakening of Mañjuśrī.”
backbyang chub shing dbang drung du myur du ’gro/ /song nas byang chub mchog ni thob par byed/ /song nas sems can phan phyir der ’dug ste/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-10980 translates as, “And swiftly proceed to the vicinity of the Bodhi tree. / Having arrived there, one will obtain the supreme awakening / And remain there for the benefit of beings.”
backnga yi bstan la khyod ni mi mchog bstan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “I taught in my teachings that you are the supreme human,” reflecting the Sanskrit *narottama instead of the extant Skt. ratottama.
back’dir ni ma lus mtha’ dag zhi bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śantāḥ for the extant Skt. sattā.
backdag pa’i gnas la gnas pa’i skye bo rnams/ /’dir ni ma lus mtha’ dag zhi bar ’gyur/ /khyod kyi sngags ni nam yang ’da’ ma gyur/ /khyod kyi sngags ni nam yang nyams ma gyur/ D. The translation of this verse from the Skt. is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “Beings who dwell in the Pure Abode / Will all, without exception, become peaceful. / Your mantra is never violated. / Your mantra never fails.”
backlhag ma Tib. In place of the extant Skt. śleṣmāṇām (“stick/coalesce together”), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *śeṣāṇām (“the rest/remainder”).
backphung po gzhan dag tu Tib. The Skt. antara is translated into the Tibetan not as “within,” but as “other/separate.”
backIt is unclear whether the attainment meant here is the “regal state of a śrāvaka” or two separate attainments, that of a śrāvaka and that of a kingdom.
back“Their intelligence will grow” om. Tib.
backThis half-stanza is missing from the Tib. The meaning of #UT22084-088-038-11000 is not completely clear.
backrnam bzlog Y, L, K, C; rnam zlos D. Inverted activity is an activity that goes against the generally accepted norms. In the context of Buddhist tantra, it must not, nevertheless, transgress the bodhisattva principles. In place of “inverted activity,” D translates as, “recitation.” Y, L, K, and C, however, support the Skt.
backrigs kyang rnam gsum gsungs pa ni/ /sngags rnams kun gyi gzhi yang yin/ /rigs gsum rnam pa brgyad du yang / /rgyud dag la ni rab tu snang / D. The Tibetan contains lines at this point that translate as, “The families are said to be threefold, / And are the basis of all mantras. / The three families also have eight types, / As is evident in the tantras.” The first and last lines in the Tibetan correspond (with some variation) to #UT22084-088-038-11001.
backrnam pa gcig tu’ang rigs snang ste/ D. The Skt. (after emending eva vidhaṃ to evaṃvidhaṃ) implies that the religious community (gotra) is also of three types, as corroborated by #UT22084-088-038-6136-7. The Tibetan translation of this line translates as, “of one type/aspect,” reflecting the Sanskrit *ekavidhaṃ for the extant Skt. eva vidhaṃ/evaṃvidhaṃ. The additional material in the Tibetan translation of #UT22084-088-038-11001 also mentions that there are three types of religious community (gotra).
back“So” and “also” have been supplied from the Tib.
backsngags rnams kun gyi gnas kyang yin/ Tib. “Entire” has been supplied from the Tibetan text. The Skt. here reads śāntam, which translates as, “peaceful.” The threefold seat of the mantras (if “threefold” is implied in this statement) could be a reference to the threefold categorization of mantras into those of the Tathāgata, Vajra, or Lotus family.
backI.e. the karma spoken of below. This term combines here the meaning of “activity” and of “karma” (as we use it in English), as, in part at least, it seems to be used in the sense of the (type of) activity that is most suitable for a particular person that is karmically determined.
backThe Skt. term pratyaya (literally “interdependence,” but conventionally “conditions/causes”) here seems to take on a new meaning, namely of determining or ascertaining the person’s karma.
backThis pāda could also be translated as, “It is not karma that possesses a body.”
backkun nas skye bo rgas pa na/ Tib. In place of “fever,” the Tibetan text translates as, “old age.”
backrnam pa sna tshogs la nye bzang / /las rnams sna tshogs dag las byung / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Various types of good omens / Arise due to various types of activities.”
backdus tshod de bzhin ’gro ba dang / Tib. Before “time,” the Skt. has the term bala (“strength”), which is unaccounted for in the Tibetan.
backThe meaning is this verse is unclear because of the missing text. The Skt. appears to be missing one pāda of text and the Tibetan is missing the entire half-stanza.
backThe meaning of this half-stanza is uncertain as the Skt. could be corrupt. The first pāda could read (as suggested by the Tibetan) karmapratyayaḥ svakānyaḥ (“karmic causes, those of oneself and others”), which would also correct the meter. The avyaṅgāni (“not separate”) in the second pāda could be emended to adhyaṅgāni (“the main divisions”).
back’di dag rkyen gyi yan lag ni/ /las ni bdag gir byed pas mtshon/ /mi mtshon sngags rnams thams cad ni/ /bgegs las shin tu mi bzad ’gyur/ Tib. The meaning of the first four pādas is very unclear. The Tibetan varies significantly and translates as, “[Among] these divisions of ascertainment, / One should identify karmas that belong to oneself. / If one fails to identify (“them”?), all the mantras / Will become extremely terrible, obstructing karma.”
backbyang chub snying por ting ’dzin thob/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Attained samādhi at the seat of awakening.”
back“[Sitting at] the root of the tree” om. Tib.
backde tshe bdud ni bcom par ’gyur/ Tib. The Skt. text of this half-stanza, which was corrupt and hypermetrical, was reconstructed partly based on the Tibetan text. Before the reconstruction, instead of “the power of the mantra,” the Skt. read “the letters of the mantra.”
backrmi lam ngan pa nyer ’jig pa/ Tib. In place of “omens,” the Tibetan translates as, “dreams.”
backgang dag sa la spyod pa yi/ /’byung po’i tshogs kun rab nyon cig/ Tib. The Tibetan inserts two pādas at this point that translate as, “Listen well, you hosts of beings / Who reside on the earth.”
back“Present in the three worlds” is a conjectural expansion of the Skt. triṣu (“in the three”), which the Tibetan doesn’t account for.
backSkt.: oṁ kha kha khāhi khāhi huṁ huṁ | jvala jvala prajvala prajvala | tiṣṭha tiṣṭha | ṣṇīḥ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
backsngags ’di sngags rnams kun gyi mchog/ Tib. The meaning of this pāda is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “This mantra is supreme among all mantras.” The Skt. version, however, ties in with the name of this mantra, Jvāloṣṇīṣa, which means “blazing uṣṇīṣa.”
backdgu bcu rtsa bzhi dag dang ni/ Tib. It is not clear what these numbers refer to. The Tibetan gives just one number, “ninety-four thousand.”
backThe exact meaning of this verse is far from clear.
backsngags rnams ma lus rab tu sems/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All the mantras will be called to mind,” reflecting a different Skt. reading.
backgtsug tor sngags kyi byin rlabs kyis/ D. “Uṣṇīṣa” seems to be a metrical abbreviation of Jayoṣṇīṣa. The Tibetan translates as, “Through the blessing of the Uṣṇīṣa mantra.”
backde bzhin bdun nam brgyad dang dgu/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “nine” instead of “ninety.”
backgnyis dang drug dang lnga dang bdun/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Two and six and five and seven.” The Skt. is very likely corrupt and the numbers themselves difficult to interpret. They seem to refer to different groups of the uṣṇīṣa deities, depending on the categorization. One group that occupies a prominent position in the MMK is that of the eight “uṣṇīṣa kings.”
backsngon gyi rgyal ba rnams kyis bshad/ D. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. repeats that the uṣṇīṣa kings “are born from the head of the Victorious One.”
backFrom this chapter onward, the chapter numbers are out of step with those in the Tibetan translation. Chapters 18 to 23 in the Sanskrit text are not included in the Tibetan translation of the text and are not translated here.
back“Action” refers here to their astrological influences.
backThe technical Skt. term for “ruled” is cihnita, which literally means “marked [by the planet…].”
backIt is not clear whether “cruel planet” refers to Mars (“the…”), or any inauspicious graha (“a…”).
backPunarvasu is a dual nakṣatra, hence the plural ending.
backThese are the 20th and 21st nakṣatras.
backnye rgyal dang ni tha chung dang / /’dod pa dag ni nyid yin no/ H. The Tibetan translates as, “Tiṣya should be considered / As secondary in importance.”
backyang dag bden dang ’jig rten dang / /snang bar yang ni brjod pa yin/ D. The meaning of the first two pādas is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The authentic truth and the world / Are said to exist as light.”
backde bzhin rgyal po ’jig rten dang / Tib. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan, as some text appears to be missing in the Skt.
back’di dag gi ni nus pa yod/ Tib. The Tibetan omits “not” and translates as, “They possess these powers.”
backIt is not clear what power is meant by “this power” (ayaṃ prabhāvaḥ), possibly the power to spread happiness and virtue with their light.
back’di dag nad med dag pa ste/ /rtag tu sems can rnam mang po/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They were pure and healthy and / There were always many beings.”
backde nas dus ni bri ba na/ /’jig rten snod min rab tu ’jug D. The meaning of this half-stanza is a bit unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, the time started to deteriorate / And beings entered a more unsuitable world.”
backgnod sbyin srin po dri za dang / Tib. “Gandharvas” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. cāriṇa translates as, “wanderers.”
backkhyab ’jug gis byas gzo spyad dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Crafts manufactured by Viṣṇu.”
backrtsis dang sgyu rtsal ’dod pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as “Astrology, and what is considered the fine arts,” which reflects the Sanskrit *kalāsammatam instead of the extant Skt. kalpasammatam.
backlog shes de bzin shes pa dang / D. The meaning “ignorance” was derived by reading the Skt. tathājñānam as tathā-ajñānam. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *jñānam instead of ajñānam, i.e., “knowledge” in place of “ignorance.”
backrnam rgyal Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “victorious,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vijayam instead of the extant Skt. virajam.
backtshegs chung bya bas thob pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “By engaging in activities with little difficulty.”
backrang byung ye shes Tib. In the Tibetan translation, this is “self-arisen [knowledge].” The Skt. form svayambhū, however, does not imply the perfective aspect.
backde ’dra’i gnas ni rab mthong ba/ /phyi rol lam gyis thob ma yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Experiences of such states / Cannot be attained through the external paths.” Here “external” probably means “non-Buddhist.”
backrigs pa bzang po’i las dga’ bas/ Y, K; rig pa bzang po’i las dga’ bas/ D. Both readings in the Tibetan are obscure. The reading in Y and K might translate as, “By pursuing logic and the correct ritual action,” reflecting the Sanskrit *yukti instead of the extant Skt. yuktā. The reading in D, which most likely reflects a scribal error that renders the term rigs pa as rig pa, might translate as, “By pursuing knowledge and the correct ritual action. /”
backlas las grol ba med par ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Without being liberated from karma.”
backme Tib.
back’jig rten skyong ba bzhi dag dang / /khams ni bzhi po dag dang ni/ /chu dang sa dang rlung dang me/ /nam mkha’i yongs su bstan pa yin/ /’byung ba yang dag bsdu ba’i phyir/ /’di dag ’byung ba chen po yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The four guardians of the world / And the four elements are / Water, earth, wind, and fire. / Space is referred to as such / Because it contains the elements. / These are the primary elements.”
backbag med las kyis byas pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When produced by the karma of negligence.”
backThe meaning of this half-stanza is unclear. The form ajāyate (ajāyatas in manuscript R) seems defective because of the short a at the beginning (this a is not reflected in the Tibetan translation). If, however, the form ajāyatas (in manuscript R) were emended to ajāpataḥ, it could be translated as “without recitation,” which would alter the meaning of the entire statement.
backthams cad so sor gyur pa ni/ /’jam dpal gyis ni so sor mdzad/ Tib. This half-stanza is very obscure in the Skt. It is not clear in the Skt. who “they” are, but the neuter gender seems to indicate the nakṣatras. The Tibetan varies significantly and translates as, “Mañjugoṣa can effect all of them, / Each and every one, individually.”
backkhyab ’gyur D. The Skt. viparīta (“wrong,” ”inverted,” ”contrary”) seems to be translated into the Tibetan as “spread.”
backPart of the constellation of Taurus is in the nakṣatra of Mṛgaśirā. Being “traversed” probably means being traversed by the moon at the time of one’s birth.
backIn the Indian zodiac, the house of Taurus is shared between the three nakṣatras of Kṛttikā, Rohiṇī, and Mṛgaśirā. This verse treats the Kṛttikā part of Taurus. It should be noted that, although the Indian system has the corresponding twelve zodiac signs, they do not correspond exactly in terms of their position in the sky.
back“King” is another name for the moon.
back“Looks upon” is a technical expression indicating that the astrological aspect of the planet that “looks” is exercising influence on the planet it looks at and, indirectly, on the affected person.
backThis passage is very unclear. The translation of the last three pādas may be incorrect.
backskye ba rnam par ’dres gyur pa’o/ /sems can rnam pa sna tshogs skye/ Y, K, N, H; skye ba rnam par ’dris gyur pa’i/ /sems can rnam pa sna tshogs skye/ D, Y, K, N, and H seem to support this translation.
backIn the Indian context, a prominent belly could be an indication of well-being and prosperity.
backchu tshod zung tsam nyi ma dang / /zla ba’i lha ni rab bshad pa/ Tib. The Skt. yugamātre is interpreted in the Tib. as “two o’clock,” and udita (“risen”) is mistranslated as “explained” (udita is the past passive participle of both ud + √i (“to rise”) and √vad (“to speak”), thus leading to the confusion).
backgza’ ni mi dge mthong ba dang / /mi dge’i skye ba dge mi dge/ D. The exact meaning of this verse is unclear. The Tibetan translation of Skt. 24.62cd might translate as, “Will be influenced by inauspicious planets and / Good and bad factors of such an inauspicious birth.”
backsbyin byed sems dpa’ che ba ste/ Tib. In place of “noble and pure,” the Tib. translates as, “generous and courageous.”
backThere seems to be some confusion here, as the Indian sign of Gemini possibly implied here spans only the first two of the three nakṣatras mentioned.
backIt is not clear what kind of connection is meant—possibly that the planet is traversing the sign at the time of birth.
backThere is no mention of a “connection with Jupiter” in the Tibetan.
backThe Skt. maharddhika, apart from its standard interpretation of “great magical powers,” could simply mean “great presence” or “great majesty.”
backThis pāda is omitted in the Tib.
backPhalgunī is divided into two nakṣatras.
backgal te der skyes thob gyur na/ /zhing la gnas shing des sdom rten/ /de bzhin nyi ma mchar ba na/ /skyes pa ’di la brjod pa yin/ D. The translation of this verse, even though it seems to be supported by the Tibetan text, is far from certain.
backmi ni yongs su dpa’ bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan text does not account for the Skt. caura (“thief”) and translates as, “One may become a very heroic person.”
backI.e., the stars of the three nakṣatras mentioned above. Every nakṣatra has its “senior” (śreṣṭha) star or stars; in this case these stars are Denebola (in the second Phalgunī), α, β, γ, δ, and ε Corvi (in Hastā), and Spica (in Citrā).
back“Another planet” could be Mars, who rules the nakṣatra of Citrā. “Depending on the location” probably means if one is born in the Citrā part of Virgo.
backI.e., the “senior” stars of the three nakṣatras mentioned next that are distributed through the Indian sign of Libra.
backThe “cruel” planet is Mars. He is the regent of the Citrā part of Libra.
backThe “gentle” planet is the moon, which is also corroborated by the Tib. This probably refers to the northern lunar node (Rāhu), who is the regent of the Svāti part of Libra.
backyang na zla ba’i bu bdag yin/ Tib. The “ever joyful and auspicious lord” is probably Jupiter, who rules the Viśākhā part of Libra. The Tibetan doesn’t seem to make any reference to Jupiter and translates as, “Or the Lord who is the moon’s son.”
backThese three nakṣatras (though only a part of the last one) are distributed through the Indian sign of Libra.
backsrang gi khyim ste zang po’i don/ /zla ba la spyod sems can gyi/ /’di ni mi bzad zhing yin te/ /skal med ma yin nor gyi gnas/ D. The meaning of this verse is very unclear, and the translation was informed by the Tibetan. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan entirely, as the Skt., which mentions Bhārgava (Venus?) and Saturn, is corrupt and difficult to interpret. It seems to be saying that Saturn and Venus have their abode (ālaya) in Libra, which is true about Venus, as Libra is its house. Saturn too has a connection with Libra, in which it is “exalted.”
backPossibly, the reading bahupānaratāḥ (“fond of drinking”) should be emended to bahumānaratāḥ (“taking pleasure in showing respect/being respectable”), which would fit the context better.
backspyi mtshan ma yin ngo tsha med/ Tib. The Tibetan has a negation after “modesty,” perhaps reading the Skt. tathā hrījyā as tathāhrījyā (= tathā-ahrījyā).
backAnurādha is the first nakṣatra of the Indian sign of Scorpio.
backbzo yi las ni sgrub pa dang / Tib. It is unclear if ordinary activities are meant, or perhaps the rituals. The Tibetan translates as, “activities of craftsmanship.”
backmi ni rab gtum brtan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “fierce and steadfast.”
backbyis pa gzhon nu’i gzugs yod pa’i/ /de yi skad cig gzas mthong ’gyur/ /sa yi lha mo’i bur gyur pa/ /gang yin de ni mig dmar gsungs/ D. The meaning of the last pāda is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “One who has the youthful body of a child / Will be immediately influenced by the planet, / Becoming a son of the earth deity. / That [planet] is called Mars.”
backrang bu nyid kyis gsod par byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Killed by his own son.”
back“When the nakṣatra … sets in,” i.e., when the sun enters the nakṣatra.
backThis Indian sign is divided between Capricorn and Aquarius.
backsngo bzangs mdog tu de dag ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translation suggests a pale-bluish complexion.
backIt is not clear if “karma” here means ritual activity (where cruel rites are allowed under certain circumstances), or ordinary activity. The latter would contradict the previous line.
backAgain, it is the Indian sign of Pisces, whose position in the sky does not correspond exactly to the Pisces in the Western zodiac.
backBecause of the missing text, it is not clear what “it” refers to; it could be the sun, or perhaps the setting planet Venus, as the following lines seem to indicate.
backThis is not clear, as Venus is normally regarded as “exalted” in Pisces, rather than having its house there.
backrtag tu skye bar mi ’gyur te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They will never reach old age.”
backdrang srong rnams kyi chu gnas dang / Tib. The reading “of fish” was obtained by emending the Skt. ṛṣīṇām (“of the sages”) to jhaṣāṇām (“of the fish”). The Skt. letters ṛ and jha being almost identical, the reading ṛṣīṇām was likely a corruption of jhaṣāṇām. The Tibetan supports the incorrect reading ṛṣīṇām, but as ṛṣi can also mean a species of fish, one could perhaps obtain the same meaning even without the emendation.
backI.e., the nakṣatras of Pisces.
backrnam pa sna tshogs gza’ mchog kyang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There are many significant planets.”
backThis is “the” eon, rather than “an” eon, as probably the current eon is meant.
backlha mtshams la ni sa ’gul na/ /mi rmans ’dir ni tshe ring ’gyur/ /de dag mi yi ’jig rten ’dir/ /phan tshun du ni ’byer bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “People born under Anurādhā when there is / An earthquake will have a long lifespan. / They are born in the human world / And also thrive in it.” The printed edition of the Sanskrit text includes two additional pādas after this verse that translate as, “Accordingly, the life of humans / Is said to be one hundred years.”
back’jug rings las dang skar mda’ dang / D. “Earthquakes” is omitted in the Tibetan.
backKabandha can be the name of a class of comets or of Rāhu. It can also mean “a cloud.”
backzla ba nyi ma’i dkyil ’khor la/ /mun nag gis ni khebs par gnas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The orbs of the moon and the sun / Will be obscured by darkness.”
backlho phyogs la gnas pa yi/ /rgyal po chen po rnam par ’jig D. The translation of this half-stanza is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “The great king who resides in the south / Will be destroyed.”
backIn the Tib., this pāda translates as, “And they will plunder each other’s lands.”
backkha sha’i lung par gnas pa yi/ Tib. “The Droṇis” is omitted in the Tibetan.
backmi mchog sa ni mang spyod pa/ Tib. In place of “the most … wealthy” (bhūtibhūyiṣṭhāḥ), the Tibetan translates as, “who greatly enjoy the earth,” which reflects the Sanskrit *bhūmi instead of the extant Skt. bhūti.
backIt is not clear if this is “another” temblor, but the timing of it (“when the sun has moved a short distance”) suggests that it is an aftershock.
back“Or tormented by diseases” om. Tib.
backdran ldan thos dang de nyid shes/ D. If transplanted into the Buddhist context, the śruti would perhaps correspond to the revealed (“heard”) part of the canon that is authorless, and the smṛti (“remembered”) would correspond to the authored part.
backde nas nyi ma nub pa na/ /de nas yang ni song ba na/ /phyi dro dus kyi mtha’ la ni/ /gal te sa ni rab tu ’gal/ Tib. This verse is tentatively translated here based on the Tibetan. The Skt. verse remains obscure.
backAt this point the Tibetan repeats the first three pādas of the previous verse.
backcung zad thun de bri gyur la/ Tib. The Skt. translates literally as, “short watch” (hrāsiyāma), which seems to be a technical term. The term could also imply a watch that is getting shorter or is running out. The position of this phrase in the text indicates that this is a period between the first and the second watch, possibly at the end of the first watch.
backde nas thun de zad pa’i mthar/ Tib. The Skt. translates literally as “at the end of the short watch (hrāsiyāma).”
backAnger is related to or caused by a bile disorder.
backbar ma’i thun ni bri gyur nas/ Tib. It is not clear in what sense the word hrāsi (“short”) is used here. The Tibetan translates as, “When the middle watch is decreasing.”
backdes ni sngar bstan sel bar byed/ Tib. Tibetan translates as, “It will destroy the aforementioned.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *pūrvoktaṃ instead of the extant Skt. yad vakraṃ. The Tibetan renders this verse in only three lines and does not contain any equivalent of #UT22084-088-038-11446.
backtha skar snar ma nyid dang ni/ Tib. In place of “Aśvinī, Bharaṇī,” the Tibetan translates as, “Rohiṇī.”
backskar ma dag ni ’di dag la/ /dkyil ’khor nyid kyang bri bar bya/ D. The phrase “with [the same] stars” (tārakaiḥ) is absent in the Tibetan. Its meaning is unclear.
backyul gzhan dag tu ’gro byed dang / D. “Not” is missing from the Tibetan. The Skt. version is probably correct, as the fifteenth day is not included in the list of days that are auspicious for travel/pilgrimage given in the next verse.
backdkyil ’khor gyi ni sngags rgyud dag /sngags rnams thams cad mi bri’o/ D. The translation of this half-stanza is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “Do not draw any of the mantra deities / Or maṇḍala mantra systems.”
backThe Skt. of this half-stanza could also be translated as “The mantras pronounced on these [days] / For the sake of removing obstacles will not succeed.”
backThe next verse suggests that “joined” (śliṣṭa) means “dwelling in,” i.e., traversing through.
backThe translation of the second half-stanza (pādas b and c in the Skt.) has been half guessed, as the Sanskrit is very obscure. These lines are omitted in the Tibetan translation.
backbya bzhin nyid dang legs mdzes dang / Tib. The Tibetan interprets the word for “beautiful” (suśobhana) as the name of another muhūrta.
backNumbers 9 and 10 are repeated in the Skt. for the second time (with Saumya changed to Soma), which probably was an attempt, on the part of one of the redactors, to get the number 12. The Tib. omits pādas b and c altogether.
backyud tsam dag tu bstan pa ni/ /nyin zhag sum cu nyid la’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Referred to as the muhūrtas, / There are said to be thirty in a single day.”
backbcu pa char ni ’bab ’gyur te/ /bcu bzhi pa ni yul ’khor ’jig D. The Tibetan translates as, “A rain that falls on the tenth / Means the kingdom will be destroyed on the fourteenth. /” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit variant *rāṣṭra (“kingdom”) instead of the extant Skt. rātrau (“at night”).
backIt is not clear what kind of counting is meant. Possibly one is supposed to go over, as part of a sādhana, the time units listed below.
backUnmeṣanimeṣa means opening and closing the eyes, i.e. the time it takes to blink.
back#UT22084-088-038-11512, which seems to define one kṣaṇa for the second time, is omitted in the Tib.
back’di tsam dus kyi tshad la ni/ /gsum gyi grangs su yongs su brtags/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This time measure / Is designated as the three saṁkhyās,” which reflects the Sanskrit *saṁkhya instead of the extant the Skt. sandhye.
backde bzhin zla ba zla drug gis/ /sgra gcan gyis kyang ’dzin pa yin/ D. These two pādas refer to a lunar eclipse. The meaning is not clear, as one would perhaps expect these lines to delineate half of a year as a six-month time unit in this position on the list. The reading in the Skt., however, is confirmed by the Tibetan.
backgal te nyi ma nyin par ni/ /nub bzhin du ni ’dzin ’gyur dang / D. The last pāda is unclear, but the translation here is supported by the Tibetan.
backThe “lord of dānavas” is Rāhu.
backshar phyogs gnas pa’i rgyal po ni/ /sdang bas gsod par the tshom med/ D. The Tibetn translates as, “The king who lives in the east / Will be killed with animosity, without a doubt.”
backde tshe rdo rhe zhes bdag kyang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “And then the lord named Vajra.”
backVaṅga om. Tib.
back’ching dag gzhan gyi dmag tshogs ni/ /skye bo’i gtso la de dag skye/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Bondage and external military invasions / Will occur for the prominent people.”
backnyi ma’i dkyil ’khor dbus gnas dang / Tib. It is not clear what vyasta (literally “cut off/divided”) actually means here, possibly it is “obscured” as this seems to be about a solar eclipse. The Tibetan translates as “stays in the center.”
backThe “redness” of the moon indicates a total lunar eclipse; it is called a “blood moon.”
backrgyal po rkun ma’i ’jigs chen ’byung/ Tib. It is not clear who the “king’s thieves” are; perhaps they are tax collectors. The Tibetan translates as, “There will be a great emergency concerning the king and thieves.”
back“Swallowed … from the east,” because the lunar eclipse always starts on the left (eastern) side of the moon’s disk.
backThe solar eclipse always begins on the right (western) side of the sun’s disk.
backma ga d+hAr ni mi yi bdag /sems can rgyal po’i thabs nyams par/ Tib. The meaning of this half-stanza is not clear, because of the variant readings sarvaḥ/satvaḥ/satva. The Tibetan, which seems to reflect the reading sattva, translates as, “The rulers in Magadhā / Will lose their dominion over beings.”
backIt is not clear whether the compound grahoparāga means the “color (uparāga) of the eclipse (graha)” or is meant to be a repetition of two synonyms (“eclipse-eclipse”), as uparāga can mean both “color” and “eclipse.” The next verse suggests that it could be “color.”
backkhug rna ser ba mjug rings ni/ /nyi ma lnga yi bar du yod/ /de ’og ’jig rten sems las ’byung/ /ngogs la spyod cing gnas pa yi/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The haze, hail, and comets / Will persist for five days. / Thereafter the people living in Tīrabhukti / Will become concerned.”
backskye bo’i bdag po de ’ching ’gyur/ In place of “will die,” the Tibetan translates as, “will be imprisoned.”
back#UT22084-088-038-11621om. Tib.
back’od ni spangs pa Tib. In place of “rain,” the Tib. translates as, “light.”
backphan tshun chos ni mi mthong dang / /mi yi spyod yul mthong ba min/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Humans will not see each other’s qualities. / They will not be perceptible to them.”
backgang dag las kyis byung gyur pa/ D. The translation of this pāda has been informed by the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *karma instead of the extant Skt. kampaḥ (“shaking”).
backbcwa brgyad pa D. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 18.
backkye kye gza’ dang rgyu skar kyi tshogs rnams khyed cag thams cad nyon cig Tib. “The planets and the nakṣatras” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backsngags dang / rgyud dang / dbang bskur ba dang / dkyil ’khor dang / D. The Tibetan reads the compound mantratantrābhiṣekamaṇḍala as a dvandva that translates as, “the mantra, the tantra, the empowerment, and the maṇḍala.”
back“Homa” om. Tib.
backThe grammar of this part, starting from “This sovereign,” is not very clear.
backsems can ma rungs pa thams cad kyang dgag par gyis shig /bstan par gyis shig D. “Restrained/stopped” (roddhavyāni) is omitted in the Tibetan.
backsngags rnams kun la rab ’jug phyir/ Tib. In the Tibetan the Skt. pravṛtte (here translated as “can be used instead of”) is translated as “can be applied to.”
back“He” is the mantra, as the mantra here is a male deity.
backThe last sentence of this paragraph is missing from the Tib.
backyi ge gcig po ’di la D. In place of “the preserver,” the Tibetan translates as, “the single syllable,” reflecting the Sanskrit *ekākṣaro 'yaṃ instead of the extant Skt. ārakṣako 'yaṃ.
backgtsug tor las byung bstan pa yin/ In the Tib., this pāda translates as, “Teachings that emerge from Uṣṇīṣa,” which reflects the Sanskrit *uṣṇīṣasambhavaḥ instead of the extant Skt. uṣṇīsasammataḥ.
backsnying rje dbang la brten nas ni/ D. The syntax of this pāda is ambiguous. The Tibetan translates as, “Based on the power of compassion.”
backchos kyi dbyings la brten nas ni/. The Tibetan translates as, “Based in the sphere of phenomena,” reflecting the Sanskrit *niśritya instead of the extant Skt. niḥsṛtya.
backThis pāda is missing from the Tib.
backThere is a play on words in the Skt., as dharmadhātu can mean “the sphere of phenomena” and also “Dharma relic(s).” The verse seems to be about the one-syllable mantra (the “lord of the world”) recited above, as an example of an immaterial relic.
backWhen this mantra was first introduced in #UT22084-088-038-2165-5, the epithet ekākṣara was used as a proper name, One Syllable. In this chapter the epithet uṣṇīṣa appears to be used as its proper name instead.
backThe epithet ajita (“unconquered”) could also refer to Viṣṇu or to Śiva.
back“Nailing” (kīlana) or “nailing down,” alludes to the ritual act of driving a stake (kīla) through the heart of a spirit in the form of an effigy.
backgzhan gyi rig sngags gcod par ’dod na/ D. “Of others” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backThe use of the term “effigy” (pratikṛti) indicates that the vidyā is a spirit or a deity and a spell at the same time.
backI.e., with kuśa grass. “With the same” (anena) om. Tib.
backseng ldeng gi phur pas Tib. The Tibetan translates as “with a dagger made of cutch wood.”
backPossibly one “makes a knot” to tie the thread around the effigy.
backBrown mustard (Brassica juncea, Skt. rājikā).
back’chi bar ’gyur ro Tib. In place of “will be chastised” (śiṣṭita bhavati), the Tibetan translates as, “will die.”
backThe wording, to “carry out the order,” again indicates that the mantra is the deity.
backAgain, the mantra who “dies” is the deity.
backbrgya rtsa brgyad Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one hundred and eight.”
backThe three sweet substances are sugar, honey, and ghee.
backThe last two sentences, starting from “If one wants to enthrall yakṣas,” are missing from the Tib.
back“Nāgas” om. Tib.
backIn the Tibetan this verse translates as, “The seventh supreme sage taught / This mantra to the hosts of deities. / Then, versed in the conditions of the world, liberated, / And free from passion, he recited the mantra.”
back“Wheel holder” is a reference to the One Syllable mantra taught in this chapter, whose ritual will be taught in the next chapter.
backmdor bsdus nas ni bshad pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “I have taught” instead of the future “I will teach” that introduces the rites taught in the next chapter.
backbcu dgu pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 19.
back“Again” om. Tib.
back“But now only briefly” om. Tib.
backras ris kyi tshad rgya che ba’i sbyor ba sgrub pa nyams par ’gyur bas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The practice of executing the painting in its extended version has degenerated.”
backI.e., involving perhaps the “supreme” of the three types of painting mentioned before.
back“Supreme” om. Tib.
back“Jewel of” om. Tib.
backde bzhin gshegs pa rin chen tog ces bya ba D. The Tibetan translates as, “The supreme victor, the tathāgata named Ratnaketu.”
back“White” om. D; dkar po Y, L, K, C.
backka shi ka’i gos Tib. In the Tibetan the Skt. kauśeya (“silk”) is translated as “Benares cloth” (ka shi ka). Possibly the translator assumed that kauśeya was derived from kāśī, i.e., the Skt. name for Benares.
backsangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad mngon par dgyes pa dang / sangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad kyis rjes su bsngags pa ’grub par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All the buddhas and bodhisattvas will be delighted and one will become a siddha praised by all the buddhas and bodhisattvas.”
backde blang na nam mkha’ la ’gro ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When one holds it, one will soar in the sky.”
backPrātihāra is a special type of bright fortnight, but it is not clear at what intervals they come; it is thus not clear how long the practice will take before it is accomplished.
backIt is far from clear how exactly this object is fashioned. The daṇḍa (literally “stick/rod”) could be a handle, or perhaps a leg or support of some kind.
backlha’i lus thob cing Tib. “The body” is missing in the Skt.
backmar gyi mar me brgya Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one hundred butter lamps.”
backThis last sentence is missing from the Tib.
back“Mantra” is missing from the Skt.
backTejorāśi and Sitātapatra are another two in the group of eight uṣṇīṣa kings.
backphyag na rdo rje dang ’dra bar mgyogs pa’i mtshan nyid du ’gyur ro/ Tib. Instead of “power” (bala), the Tibetan has “swift nature.”
backskra rna cha gdub kor dang ’dra bar ’khyil ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “With hair that is curled in tight ringlets.”
backrang gi gnas su rab tu zhigs te/ D. Instead of “commence the sādhana,” the Tibetan translates as, “enter one’s own place.”
backsngar gang bsams pa nyid du grub par ’gyur te/ D. “Will be accomplished” is missing from the Skt.
backrig pa ’dzin pa thams cad me tog gi char ’bebs dang lha thams cad kyang me tog gi char rab tu ’bebs par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the vidyādharas will rain flowers and all of the gods will rain flowers as well.”
backrig pa ’dzin pa’i rgyal po mig gsum par ’gyur te/ dbang phyug chen po gnyis pa dang ’dra ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One will become a king of the vidyādharas who has three eyes and be like a second Maheśvara.”
backseng ldeng gi phur bu Tib. Acacia catechu.
backyan lag rma med pa’i skyes bu’i ro blangs te/ seng ldeng gi phur bu bzhis btab la brang gi steng du rin po che’i phye mas gtor cing mchod na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Take an uninjured human corpse, pin it down with four stakes made of khadira wood, cast a powder of precious jewels on top of its chest, and perform the offering.” The Tibetan omits details found in the Skt. such as the fact that the practitioner should be seated on the corpse and the fact that this is a fire offering. Both the Skt. and the Tibetan indicate that the corpse should be male.
backthab mo ba mdog nag po’i lag pa’i mthil gyis ba’i rnam lngas bkrus te/ D. The original sentence includes a few words at this point that have been omitted in the translation here because they do not make sense in the Skt. (which seems either corrupt, or incomplete, or both) or in the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to be saying, “rinse it with the five products of a cow with one/either of the two black †mayu†.” The Tibetan translates as, “rinse it with the five products of a cow using the palm of the hand of a soldier with a black complexion.”
backrdo rje lcags kyu dang bdag nyid la gdungs dkar pos bsrung bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The vajra-goad and oneself will be protected by Sitātapatra.”
back“The gods” om. Tib.
backgang gi tshe ’chi ba de’i tshe phyag na rdo rje’i gnas su ’gro zing phyag na rdo rje mthong bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “When one dies, one will proceed to Vajrapāṇi’s realm and see Vajrapāṇi.”
backIt is not specified what painting; possibly the painting of Ratnaketu, central to this chapter.
backde’i sngags kyi ming bzung la ’bum bzla zhing / Tib. Neither the Tibetan nor the Skt. (which are an exact match) explicitly mention a “target” here, but that is most likely the intended meaning of this line.
back“Honey” om. Tib.
backphyug chen po dbang du byed par ’dod na/ Tib. “Enthrall” is missing from the Skt.
backlho phyogs su yud tsam gyis D. The Tibetan translates as, “light a fire a little bit to the southern direction.”
backklu mo dbang du byed par ’dod na/ Tib. Instead of “summon” the Tibetan translates as, “bring under one’s command.”
backThe Skt. name is, fittingly for a nāginī sādhana, “nāga flowers” (nāgapuṣpa).
backThis sentence about the elixir is missing from the Tib.
back’phags pa rdo rje ’dzin Tib. Vajradhara (“vajra holder”) is here an epithet for Vajrapāṇi.
backde nas bcom ldan ’das kyi yul bskyod par ’gyur zhing / D. Because it deviates from the Sanskrit, it is not clear exactly which connotation the Tibetan term yul bares in this instance. One possible translation might be “Then the Blessed One’s realm will tremble.”
back“Other vidyādharas,” because Vajrapāṇi is a vidyādhara (as well as a yakṣa).
backThe Skt. pavitra (Tib. dag byed) can mean “sacrificial grass,” but also myrobalan and other things.
backskye bo thams cad dbang du ’gyur la de’i tshe ’di thams cad dbang du byed par ’gyur te/ Tib. The meaning is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “One will bring all people under one’s control, and then all of this will be brought under one’s control.”
back“Seven” om. Tib.
back“Cloth” om. Tib.
backpda ma’i rnam pa ’dra ba’i thab khung byas la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should make a fire pit in the shape of a lotus.”
backzhag bdun gyis ni grong ngam grong khyer gyi ’chi ba mang po’i nye bar ’tshe ba zhi bar ’gyur ro/ /shing sha ma’i yam shing la zho dang sbrang rtsi dang mar gyis btags pa’i sbyin sreg stong rtsa brgyad kyang bya’o/ /yang na shing u dum bA ra’i yam shing la zho dang sbrang rtsi dang mar gyis btags pa’i sbyin sreg stong rtsa brgyad kyang bya’o/ /char mi ’bab pa la ni mngar gsum gyi sbyin sreg byas na thams cad du mchog tu zhi ba chen por ’gyur ro/ D. In the Tibetan, the section that begins with the phrase “Within seven nights” up to this point translates as, “Within seven days, pestilence with high mortality will be pacified for the entire village or town. One should offer oblations of sticks of the śamī tree smeared with curds, honey, and ghee one thousand and eight times. Alternatively, one should offer oblations of sticks of the udumbara tree smeared with curds, honey, and ghee one thousand and eight times. In the event of drought, if one offers the three sweet things everything will be completely pacified.”
backThis last sentence is missing from the Tib.
backnad thams cad Tib. The term used in the Tibetan commonly translates as “disease” but is also used at times to translate the Sankrit jvara or “fever.”
backphyag rgya dang ldan pa’i ji skad gsungs pa’i sngags kyis seng ldeng gi yam shing la zho dang sbrang rtsi dang mar gyis btags pa’i sbyin sreg stong rtsa brgyad byas na lha ma yin gi sngags ’joms par byed do/ D. The last sentence in the Tibetan translates as, “If one performs one thousand and eight homas with sandalwood sticks, incanted with the mantra and mudra, smeared with curd, honey and ghee, one will smash the mantras of the asuras.”
backThis paragraph is missing from the Tib.
backdus gsum du nyin mtshan nyi shu rtsa gcig la ’bras thub po che la zho dang sbrang rtsi dang mar gyis btags pa’i sbyin sreg stong rtsa brgyad byas na/ longs spyod thob par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one offers one thousand and eight homas at the three junctions of the day and night for twenty-one days and nights, using winnowed rice grains smeared with curds, honey, and ghee, one will obtain enjoyments.”
backsbyin sreg stong rtsa brgyad bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one should offer one thousand and eight oblations.”
backbo son cha’i shing Tib. Damanaka is usually the Skt. name for “mugwort.” The Tibetan, however, suggests that in this case it may refer to Sesbania grandiflora.
backbil ba’i shing gi yam shing gis so/. The Tibetan translates as, “one should offer branches of the bilva tree.”
backPossibly Vatica robusta.
backlog ’dren thams cad la ni zhag bdun du sbyin sreg brgya rtsa brgyad pa’o/ D. The Tibetan combines this clause with the contents of the next sentence and translates as, “for all vināyakas, one should offer one hundred and eight oblations for seven days.”
backrgyal po’i bu la ni. The Tib. translates as, “the son of a king,” or “a prince.”
backyungs kar D. For “royal mustard,” the Tibetan translates as, “white mustard.”
backThe mantra in question, like in most of this section, must be the uṣṇīṣa king bhrūṁ, also referred to as the cakravartin Uṣṇīṣa, or One Syllable.
backtshim zhing rgyas par byas par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “will be pleased and cause one to thrive.”
backdug gis reg pa D. Instead of “destroyed,” the Tibetan translates as, “was in contact with poison.”
backI.e., the one described above.
backyungs kar gyi rgyal po D. The Tibetan again suggests “white mustard.”
backji srid du bzlas kyang rig pa ’bras bu med par shes na Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one knows the vidyā has been fruitless despite the number of recitations.”
back“Blessed One” probably refers to Uṣṇīṣarāja.
backI.e., together with his mantra, as the mantra and the deity are one and the same.
back’bras bu med pa’i rgyu ston par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “and the reason that it has been fruitless will be revealed.”
backlam ’gog par byed Tib. The Tibetan seems to be saying the opposite and translates literally as, “blocking a path.”
backmyur du bzlas pa ’bum bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “quickly recite one hundred thousand times.”
backThe Skt. adds here, “during a lunar eclipse.” This reading seems less plausible, as it would imply that the practitioner has the foreknowledge of the eclipse (which is possible, but unlikely), and that the rite can be performed only on rare occasions when an aclipse occurs.
backklu’i shing yang skem par byed cing D. The Tibetan translates as, “dessicating a nāga’s tree.”
back“Turning them to dust” om. Tib.
backgtsug spyod kyis kyang mngon sum du bgegs byed par mi nus so/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Even the practice of the crown is unable to directly obstruct one.”
backThe second part of this sentence, starting from “as one becomes Mūrdhaṭaka,” is missing fom the Tib.
backyi ge gcig pas pad+ma ’bum dor na/ Tib. The Tibetan specifies One Syllable as the mantra to be used while offering the lotuses.
backci ste ’bru gcig pa dang bcas pa’i pad+ma ’bum phrag gsum dor na Tib. The Tibetan again specifies One Syllable as the mantra to be used.
backci ste ’bru gcig pa dang bcas pa’i pad+ma ’bum phrag gsum dor na sa kin la dbang ba’i rgyal por ’gyur ro/ /lnga ’bum bzlas na ’dzam bu’i gling gi bdag por ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one offers three hundred thousand lotuses while reciting the One Syllable, one will become king of all the land. / If one recites the mantra five hundred thousand times, one will become the lord of Jambudvīpa.”
backsa ’og tu ’jug pa’i sgor rkang pa bzhag ste/ ’bum phrag gsum bzlas na ’khrul ’khor thams cad bcom nas dog pa med par ’gyur zhing / D. In the Tibetan these last two sentences translate as, “If one places a foot upon an entranceway that leads underground and recites the mantra three hundred thousand times, all the magical devices will be destroyed and one will not be afraid.”
backkhyab ’jug gi ’khor lo’i ’jigs pa med par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The negation “no” is reflected in the Tibetan but is missing from the Skt.
backViṣṇu’s discus is his magical weapon.
backdus gsum du sna ma’i me tog la lan gcig bzlas nas/ /bcom ldan ’das kyi zhabs kyi mthe bo’i drung du bzhag pa byas nas/ ci tsam na zhab kyi mtho bo nas ’od zer byung nas/ sgrub pa po de’i lus la zhugs par ’gyur gyi bar du byas na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Place jasmine flowers that have been incanted with the mantra once before the Blessed One’s big toe three times a day, and / until light radiates from the toe/ and enters the practitioner’s body.”
back’khor dang ldan par yang ’gyur ro/ Tib. Instead of “surrounded by a retinue,” the Tibetan translates as, “one will obtain a retinue.”
backji srid rgya mtsho las bram ze’i gzugs kyis ’ong bar ’gyur ro/. The Tibetan translates as, “until the form of a brahmin appears out of the ocean.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *samudrāt instead of the extant Skt. samudraḥ.
backlam gcod par byed par yang mi nus so/ D. Here the Tibetan seems to be translating the standard BHS term aparipatthadāyin (“not posing a threat,” “not causing alarm”) literally as “not being able to cut off/forsake the path.”
backcho ’phrul chen po’i zla ba phyed la sna ma’i me tog dang ldan pas re re zhing bzlas shing / bcom ldan ’das kyi gtsug tor gyi steng du ’bum phrag gcig phul na/ D. The translation here is based on the Tibetan. Instead of “above the uṣṇīṣa of the Blessed One,” the Skt. translates as, “above Blessed Uṣṇīṣarāja.”
backgtsug tor gyi rgyal po thams cad kyis kyang bsgrub par bya ba yin te/ cho ga thams cad ’di nyid la sbyar bar bya zhing / gtsug tor gyi rgyal po thams cad kyis kyang ’di bsgrub par bya’o/ /cho ga thams cad kyis kyang ’di bsgrub par bya’o/. The Tibetan translates these last two sentences (with parts seemingly repeated twice) as, “It should be attained through the practice of all the uṣṇīṣa kings. All the rites should be joined to this one. It should be attained through the practice of all the uṣṇīṣa kings. It should realized through all the rites.”
back“And deposit it where the trove [is supposed to be]” om. Tib.
back’khor lnga bcu Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “retinue of fifty.”
back“Horses” om. Tib.
backpad+ma’i mtshor phyin nas pad+ma ’bum gyis mchod na sa kun gyi rgyal thabs thob par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The translation here follows the Tibetan, which translates as, “obtain a kingdom of all the land.” The Skt. sāmantarājya rather suggests a borderland or bordering kingdom.
backsna ma’i me tog ’bum gyis rgya mtshor ’gro ba’i chu bo la sngags dang bcas pas gtor na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “incanted jasmine flowers.”
backlha’i rgyal po thams cad kyis kyang ring po nas mthong na ’jigs pas dga’ bar ’gyur ro/ /lha rnams kyi rgyal po thamns cad du yang ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan appears to be corrupt and translates as, “When the kings of the gods see you from a distance, they will be enraptured by fear. / So shall it be for all of the kings of the gods.”
back#UT22084-088-038-11788om. Tib.
backnyi shu pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 20.
back’jam dpal bstan pa ’di ni de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi nor du gyur pa/ chos kyi mdzod ’jig rten pa rnams kyi bsam pa ’bras bu dang bcas pa byed pa’i phyir nor bu rin po che lta bur gyur pa’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This teaching, Mañjuśrī, is the jewel of all the tathāgatas. This treasure chest of Dharma is like a wish fulfilling jewel because it brings the wishes of worldly beings to fruition.”
backsems can thams cad kyi bsams pa yongs su rdzogs par bya ba’i phyir cho ga bzhin du bzas pa byas na thob pa yin no/ D. The phrase, “will fulfill the wishes of all beings” is based on the Tibetan, which translates as, “Since it can fulfill the wishes of all beings, if one has recited the mantra following the proper procedure, one will attain the result.” Sections of this line are not found in the Skt.
back“Tathāgata-vidyārājas” must refer to other uṣṇīṣa kings—Sitātapatra, Tejorāśi, and so forth.
backsngags zlos pa thams cad kyis kyang nges par tshe dang ye shes dpag tu med pa rnams par nges pa’i dbang po’i rgyal po bcom ldan ’das de bzhin gshegs pa ’di la dang por ngag gis kyang phyag byas te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mantra reciters, first, worship this blessed tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra by saying, ‘Homage to the blessed tathāgata Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra, the arhat, the perfectly realized buddha!’ ”
backde bzhin gshegs pa gsum gyi mtshan Tib. “The three tathāgatas,” which clearly refers to the three tathāgatas mentioned in the previous paragraph, is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as “mantra-tathāgatas,” which would still refer to the same three.
back“Was taught” is missing from the Skt.
backsngasgs thams cad kyi don sgrub par byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “accomplishes the goal of all mantras.”
back’jam pa’i dbyangs khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po’i mchog tu gtsang ba dang gtsang ba dam pa dang ’jig rten rnams la phan pa’i phyir rab tu sbyar bar bya’o/ C; ’jam pa’i dbyangs khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po mchog tu gtsang ba dang gtsang ba dam pa dang ’jig rten rnams la phan pa’i phyir rab tu sbyar bar bya’o/ D. Following the variant in C, the Tibetan translates as, “Mañjughoṣa, it is the supreme and purest of your king of ritual manuals and can be employed for the benefit of worldly beings.” The variant in the Tibetan translation may be the result of a scribal error related to the homonymic affinity between the Tibetan terms gtsang ba (*śuddha) and gsang ba (*rahasya, *guhya).
backThe material in #UT22084-088-038-11800 is rendered in prose in the Tibetan translation.
back“Propagated/spoken by the victorious ones” om. Tib.
backgzhan gyis pham pa Tib. The Tibetan adds this category of individuals who are prohibited from being taught this mantra. The Tibetan gzhan gyis pham pa is likely a translation of the Sanskrit *parājaya, which literally translates as “conquest by another,” can refer to a “loss” or “defeat,” but can also refer to “desertion” or “turning away from” something. It is thus very likely that the term gzhan gyis pham pa refers to some category of “apostate,” and, given the context, in this case it appears to refer to a category of Buddhist apostate.
backBy Mañjughoṣa.
backLiterally, “sang.”
backyi ge u dang rtag ’gro zhes/ /’jig rten na ni rtag ’jug ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan offers a more ontological interpretation of this half-stanza that translates as, “The letter u refers to wind. / It constantly moves in the world.” The Tibetan rtag ’gro zhes appears to be a corrupted rendering of the extant Skt. gatinityajñaḥ that employs the wrong sibilant (zhes instead of shes).
back“Amitāyus” is usually the name of a buddha, not a buddhafield. Here it is probably a metrical substitute for “Amitavyūhavatī.”
back“Amitāyurjñānaviniścaya” is here an abbreviated form of Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra.
back“The king of kings” (rājendra) is the latter part of the name of Amitāyurjñānaviniścayarājendra.
backWe learn from #UT22084-088-038-3697 below that this “Buddha’s son” was Mahāsthāmaprāpta.
backde nas sangs rgyas sras rnams la/ /de ni de bzhin gshegs dag gis/ /sngags rnams kyi ni mchog gyur pa/ D. This verse consists of only three lines in the Tibetan and translates as, “Then the tathāgatas/ Taught the most supreme of mantras / To those buddha sons. /”
back“The Dharma king” seems to be here an epithet of Śākyamuni, who is about to pronounce the mantra.
backtshe dpag tu med pa dang ’od dpag tu med pa Tib. The translation follows the Tibetan here. In place of Amitābha, the Skt. repeats Amitāyus for a second time.
backmUM Y, K, N, C; mu D.
backde bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi thugs kyi sras kyi gtso bo mthu chen po thob pa’i byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po la sbyin pa’i phyir Tib. The Skt. grammar could indicate that “the eldest and closest son of all the tathāgatas” is the description of the mantra; this, however, is not supported by the Tibetan.
backde bzhin gshegs pa’i tha ma bdag gis kyang bstan te/ Tib. The Tibetan might also translate as, “I will also teach the last tathāgata.”
backMañjusvara is a name-variant, synonymous in meaning, of Mañjughoṣa.
back’bum phrag sum cu D. The Tibetan translates as, “three million.”
backsngags gzhan la mi rten pa dang / gzhan la mi sems pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “without relying on another mantra and without focusing on anything else.”
backbyang chub tu sems bskyed pa dang / khrims lnga’i sdom pa yang dag par blangs pa dang / byang chub sems dpa’i sdom pa yang dag par blangs pas D. The Tibetan translates as, “generating bodhicitta, taking the vows of the five precepts, receiving the bodhisattva vow.”
backIt is unclear what the “three white foods” are.
backgos dkar po Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “white clothes.”
back“Jeweled” om. Tib.
backmthing shing gi rdo la bshugs pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “seated on a monolith turquoise stone.”
backIt is not clear whether he is sitting or standing.
backrin po che’i ri la bzhugs pa/ Tib. The translates as, “sitting on a jewel mountain.”
backme tog gi phreng ba ’dzin cing / Tib. The Tibetan adds a phrase that translates as, “holding a flower garland.”
backg.yas phyogs su de bzhin gshegs pa gnyis bri bar bya ba la/ sA la’i dbang po’i rgyal po dang rin chen tog khor yug tu kun nas ’bar ba’i ’od dang ldan pa/ g.yon phyogs su gser thub dang ’od srung rnam pa thams cad kyi mchog dang ldan pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “To the right are the two tathāgatas Śālendrarāja and Ratnaketu, who are surrounded by halos of blazing light. On the left are Kanakamuni and Kāśyapa with all of their supreme features.”
backme tog thams cad kyis gcal bkram pa/ pad+ma’i gdan gnyis la bzhugs pa/ ha cang mi ring ba na chos ’chad cing skyil mo krung gis bzhugs pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Bestrewn with all manner of flowers, / they are seated atop two lotus seats. / They teach the Dharma to those nearby and are seated with their legs crossed.”
back“Above” possibly means that Sunetra is directly above, whereas the other four tathāgatas were (“are”?) to the right and left of Amitāyurviniścayarājendra.
back’dod pa thams cad dang bza’ ba dang spyod pa gtsor byed pa’i sgrub pa po la ni las stong rtsa brgyad kyi las phran tshegs la rab tu sbyar ’grub par ’gyur ro/ D. This sentence is not completely clear. The Tibetan seems to translate as, “A practitioner who emphasizes conduct related to food and all manner of desires will have accomplishment by performing the lesser activities of the one thousand and eight rites.”
backlha’i gnas su ma hyas pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is not performed in a temple.”
backgal te dbang du ma gyur pa de’i tshe/ Tib. The Skt. yadā na paśyate (“if he does not see”) suggests granting an audience. The Tib., however, translates as, “if the king is not enthralled,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vaśyate instead of the extant Skt. paśyate.
backgal te zhi bar ma gyur na phung khrol chen po dang ldan par ’gyur te/ srog gi lhag ma tsam lus par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If they are not pacified, great misfortune will befall them and only a fraction of their life force will remain in their bodies.”
backtho rangs yul gyi bdag po’i rgyal po spyan drangs par ’gyur ro/ /de dang lhan cig tu gros byas na bsam pa bden pa nye bar ston par ’gyur te/ D. The grammar of the last two sentences in the Skt. is confused and the meaning is not clear. The Tibetan translates as, “In the morning, one will be summoned by the king who is the local ruler. When one has consulted with him, one can teach him the truth.”
backbram ze’i dgra Y, K; bram ze’i skra D; bram se skra zer sgra J, C.
backtho rangs bram ze’i dgra zho bar ’gyur ro/ /gal te rgyal po sdang bar ’gyur na las gzhan yang yod de/ D. The meaning here is uncertain, as the Skt. vidviṣṭa can be translated in more than one way. The Tibetan translates as, “In the morning, one’s brahmin enemies will be pacified. / The following is another rite for when a king is angry.”
backgrong nyung ba’am mang po rab tu ster bar ’gyur te/ nges par zla ba drug gis don yos par ’grub par yang ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will donate a few or many villages, and within six months one will certainly attain unfailing accomplishment.”
back/de nas rigs bzhi las gang yang rung ba rtags gtso bo dang ldan pa’am lha gzhan nam ’jig rten pa la dad pa dag sems ’khrugs par gyur na/ phyogs gang na gnas pa der thal ba de gtor na yul gzhan du ’gro bar ’gyur ba’am skyo bar ’gyur ba’am mtshan mo glal bar ’gyur ba’am nye du la gnod par ’gyur ro/ /de phyir gso ba ni ’o ma’i sreg blugs stong rtsa brgyad kyis sbyin sreg byas na sos par ’gyur ro/ D. The grammar of the first sentence of this paragraph seems corrupt and the meaning unclear. The Tibetan for this entire paragraph translates as, “When someone from any of the four castes who has an elevated status or has faith in other gods or worldly beings becomes mentally disturbed, if one throws the ashes in the direction of where they live, they will move to another country, they will become distressed, they will yawn at night, or those close to them will be harmed. To undo this, when one has performed a fire offering with one thousand and eight oblations of milk, they will become well.”
back“There is also another rite” om. Tib.
backyang na gza’ bzhi po nyid kyi cho gas D. It is unclear what is meant by “the same procedure,” as the procedure described next differs from the one described above. In place of “It should be performed during a lunar eclipse following the same procedure,” the Tibetan translates as, “Following the procedure of the fourth planet,” reflecting the Sanskrit *caturgrahe instead of the extant Skt. candragrahe.
backme tog dkar po dri zhim po Tib. In place of “dried,” the Tibetan translates as, “white.”
backI.e., the different types of sticks just mentioned should be smeared with ghee.
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the lotus mudrā (padmamudrā).
backIt is not clear whether “these rites” refers to the rites above or below in the text. The passage, however, seems to be about cruel rites.
backmgon med par gyur pa dang / bkren pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “The vulnerable, / The destitute.”
backAlthough the Tibetan translation has rendered some lines in proper meter, the Tibetan translation of #UT22084-088-038-11866 is rendered primarily in prose.
backbab chol med D. The Tibetan translates as, “not impetuous.”
backsngags rnams kun dang sman rnams dang / /rnal ’byor ldan la ma dad dang / D. Although the Tibetan supports “yogins” (yoginām), the original readings might have been “yogas” (yogānām) in the sense of “methods,” as this would fit the context better.
backblo yis Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “intelligent ones,” reflecting the Sanskrit *budhaiḥ instead of the extant Skt. buddhaiḥ.
backProbably “the ashes” as described in #UT22084-088-038-3755 above.
backlas rnams brtsams nas sngon du ni/ /bdun phrag gnyis la yang dag brtul/ Tib. The meaning here is not very clear. The Tib. translates as, “The rites should be terminated/ Two weeks after they were previously initiated. /” The Tibetan grammar for the phrase brtsams nas sngon du implies the reading “prior to initiating,” but it would make little sense to terminate a ritual two weeks before it has even begun.
backStarting from this pāda and throughout the following section, a double translation is required in places to account for the two meanings of the word karman, which can mean “rite/activity” or “karma/karmic accumulation.” An alternative translation is provided in parenthesis whenever appropriate.
backdkar nag ’bras bu ’byung byed pa/ Tib. Both the Skt. and the Tibetan contain terms that translate as “black and white.” This is both unmetrical (in the Skt.) and doesn’t fit the context very well.
backdkar las dkar ba byung / /nag las nag pa rab tu smin/ D. The meaning of the last half-stanza is unclear in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “The white deeds always produce white [results], / And the black deeds fully ripen into black [results].”
back’dres las ’dres pa’i las rnams ni/ /’dres pa dag tu rnam par smin/ /de bzhin las ’di sna tshogs su/ /de nyid sangs rgyas gzigs pa yi/ thugs rje can gyis gsungs pa’o/ D. This verse is rendered in five pādas in the Tibetan. It translates as, “Mixed actions from mixed rites / Fully ripen into mixed results. / In this way, the compassionate ones / Who see the nature of reality / Taught the rites (karma) as being so diverse.”
backsngags kyis dge ba ’grub ’gyur zhes/ /de bzhin gshegs pas rab tu gsungs/ /las rnams sna tshogs gsungs pa ni/ /sgrug pa rnams la bsdus don yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The tathāgatas said that / One should use mantra to accomplish virtuous actions. / The various rites that they taught/ Are summarized in the sādhanas.”
backsgrub pa po ni mi ’grub ste/ Tib. The Tibetan contains an additional line here that translates as, “One will not become a practitioner.”
backdus dang tshod dang bzlas pa dang / /sbyin sreg mthong bas de bzhin ’grub/ D. “Synchronized” (Skt. kālapramāṇa) is also a term used in music in the sense of the tempo. In the context of the homa, this probably implies the correct speed and/or the synchronization of the mantra recitation with the oblatory cycle. The mantra is repeated once for each individual homa, with the oblation cast into the fire at the last word of the mantra, svāhā. The Tibetan deviates a bit from the Skt. and translates as, “By observing the right recitation tempo, / The fire offering will be a success.”
back“That include the painting” om. Tib.
backle’u nyi shu rtsa gcig pa D. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 21.
backras ris dang po Tib. In place of “in front of this painting,” the Tibetan has “this first painting.”
back’di nyid kyi yi ge gcig pa’i snying po’i sngags sam yi ge drug po ma’i mtha’ can khyod kyi sngar bstan pa’i yi ge drug pa’i snying po’am dang po na oM yod pa’i yi ge gcig pa’i ras ris dang po ’di nyid kyi cho gar ’gyur ba ni phyi ma’i dus phyi ma’i tshe na D. It is not clear in the Skt. why the “one-syllable mantra” is mentioned twice and whether it is the same one-syllable mantra or not. The Tibetan translates as, “It will be the ritual of this first painting—whether it be this one’s single-syllable heart mantra, the six-syllable mantra ending with ma, your aforementioned six-syllable heart mantra, or the single-syllable mantra with oṃ first—that, at a later time in the future … /”
backzhag bdun nam zhag bdun gsum gyi bar du Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “for seven days or three weeks.”
backSubhūmi om. Tib.
backlegs skyes Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Sujāta instead of the extant Skt. Suśobhana.
backro stod sa las byung ba Tib. “The earth” is missing from the Skt.
backchar gtong rig pa dang bcas pa bri bar bya’o/ Tib. In place of “lightning,” the Tibetan translates as, “knowledge,” reflacting the Sanskrit *vidyā instead of the extant Skt. °vidyutā.
backbyang chub sems dpa’ thams cad kyang lag na me tog thogs pa/ bcom ldan ’das kyi zhal la rnam par lta ba dang Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All the bodhisattvas hold flowers in their hands [while] they look at the Blessed One’s face.”
backro stod bcom ldan ’das kyi zhabs la ’dud pa dang bcas pa D. The Skt. is slightly corrupt here. The Tibetan translates as, “with the upper part of their bodies bowing to the feet of the Blessed One.” This is likely not meant to be taken literally because these figures couldn’t all be bowing to the Blessed One’s feet, given the way that they are arranged on the canvas.
backgos lan gsum brje ba D. The Tibetan translates as, “change clothes three times [a day].”
backtshod rngad dang nas chan khyor gang tsam dang ’o ma dang slong mo’i zas kyis ’tsho ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “sustaining oneself on vegetables, a handful of barley, milk, and alms.”
backgtor ma dang mar me Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “bali and lamps.”
backsprul dang rnga mo dang bong bu dang glang po che dang log ’dren Tib. The Tibetan includes “snakes” in this list, but omits “dogs.”
backgu gul gyi tshigs ma D. The Tibetan inserts here “cakes made of pounded indian bdellium.”
backThe “retention of semen” (śukrabandha) in this text seems to refer to nocturnal emissions in particular. This also seems to be the case here, because of the context of sleeping and dreams.
backha cang mi myur bar Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “not very fast.”
back“One” is missing in the Skt.
backThe Skt. could be saying “the face of Blessed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth.”
backma du lung ga’i ’bras bu Tib. The Skt. does not specify what kind of fruit. The Tibetan translates as, “pomelo” or a kind of lemon (lit. “a mātuluṅga fruit”).
back’og tu ’bru thams cad gzhug par bya’o/ /de nas de’i steng du bya ba ni cho ga ’dis me sar pa bskyed de/ D. The procedure is not clear at this point. The Skt. suggests that one places the fragrances and some grain at the bottom of the fire pit and starts the fire above it. The Tibetan translates as, “One should place all of the grain below, construct [the fire pit] on top of it, and start a new fire using the following procedure.”
backstong rtsa brgyad yongs su bzlas shing blugs gzar gyis sbyin par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Having incanted it one thousand and eight times, one should offer it with the sacrificial spoon.”
backSkt.: āgaccha haripiṅgala dīptajihva lohitākṣa haripiṅgala dehi dadāpaya svāhā ||.
backde nas bcom ldan ’das ’jam dpal gzhin nur gyur pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed Mañjuśrī, the divine youth.” The Skt. just translates as, “Blessed One.”
backSkt.: āgaccha āgaccha kumārabhūta | sarvasattvārtham udyato 'ham | sāhāyyaṃ me kalpaya gandhapuṣpadhūpaṃ ca pratigṛhṇa svāhā ||.
backmar dang ’bras thug po che’i chan gyis D. “Sesame and barley” om. Tib.
backrgyal po dbang du ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one will enthrall a king.”
backThis sentence is missing from the Tib.
backstong rtsa brgyad Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one thousand and eight.”
backnor rnyed par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates dravya not as “[power] substances,” but as “wealth.” In other contexts in the MMK, however, dravya refers to the power of medicinal substances.
back“One hundred thousand” om. Tib.
backnang gi sbyin sreg D. The Tibetan translates as, “houses” in place of “barley,” but this seems to be a one-letter typo—“house” is nang and “barley” is nad.
backgu gul dang me tog pri yang ku mar dang lhan cig sbyin sreg bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should offer oblations of bdellium and beautyberry together.”
backshing arka dang sna ma’i me tog gis chu la sbyin pa byas na/ D. The Skt. being corrupt, it is not clear how the crown flower plant fits in here. The Tibetan translates as, “If one offers sticks of the crown flower plant and royal jasmine flowers into the water,” possibly reflecting the reading arkakāṣṭhānāṃ.
backlhag ma dkyil ’khor la bzhag na Tib. The Tibetan inserts here “having placed the remainder on a maṇḍala.”
backNeither the Skt. nor the Tib. specifies what it is that one brings to mind, but it perhaps is the mantra or the deity, which, in the context of the MMK, are one and the same.
backsra rtsi Tib. Possibly Vatica robusta.
backmig sman Tib. In place of “bowl,” the Tibetan translates as, “eye medicine.”
backrmi lam ngan pa mthong nas lang te bdag nyid kyis bzlas pa byas nas D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one wakes up after having a bad dream and incants oneself.”
backtil gyi tshigs sam mar Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one offers sesame cakes or an oblation of ghee.”
backthams cad bcig tu byas te sbyin sreg byas nas bzhi mdo’am khang stong ngam shing gcig pa dag tu gtor ma btang na/ D. The Tibetan omits “all [the castes] will become enthralled” and combines this sentence with the first sentence of the next paragraph: “If one mixes all of them together and offers an oblation at a crossroads, an empty house, or a solitary tree.”
backgdong la bltas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “looking at someone’s face.”
backskud pa la mdud pa byas zhing Tib. “Knot on a thread” seems to be the Tibetan translation of the Skt. mūśraka, which could not be identified.
backbzlas pa byas na Tib. Instead of “go to sleep,” the Tibetan translates as, “incant.” This reflects the Sanskrit *japtavyam instead of the extant Skt. svaptavyam.
backzar ma’i me tog Tib. The Skt. nīlīkalika is translated into the Tibetan as zar ma, which can mean either “sesame” or “flax.”
backThis sentence is missing from the Tib. The Skt. sentence includes one more word, artari or ārtari, which could not be identified; it seems to qualify “rites.”
backThis sentence is omitted in the Tib.
backEach time one casts an oblatory lotus into the fire, one repeats the mantra once.
backgu gul gyi yam shing stong rtsa brgyad kyis sbyin sreg byas na nor dang ’bru rnams thob par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one performs the fire offering using one thousand and eight bdellium sticks, one will obtain wealth and grain.”
backba glang gi lci ba las byung ba’i ’bras thug po che D. It is not clear what “cow’s rice” is. The Tibetan translates as, “rice grown in cow dung.”
backzar ma’i me tog Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit. *atasīpuṣpāṇi (“flax flowers”) instead of the extant Skt. agastipuṣpāṇi. The Skt. agasti or agati refers to Sesbania grandiflora.
backshing ka ra bI ra’i me tog la shing ’o ma can ’o ma med pas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “oleander flowers and desiccated [sticks from?] a sappy tree.”
back’di nyid kyi cho gas me tog dri zhim pa la lan ’bum bzlas te/ zhabs kyi drung du bzhag na rtag tu bde bar ’gyur ro/ D. It is unspecified whose feet. Possibly one should make a figurine of Mañjuśrī as described in #UT22084-088-038-3894 below, and make the offering at its feet. The Tibetan translates as, “Following this same procedure, one should incant fragrant flowers one hundred thousand times and place them before the feet.”
backThis seems to be a description of Kārttikeya-Mañjuśrī.
backsna ma’i me tog la lan ’bum bzlas te zhabs drung du bzhag la Tib. It is not specified whose feet. The Tibetan translates as, “One should incant flowers of royal jasmine one hundred thousand times and place them at the feet.”
backrmi lam du ’di la ji ltar ’dod pa ston par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The meaning of this sentence is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “As one is dreaming, [he?] will teach whatever one wishes.”
back“Suchlike” probably means that the basket is also made of gold or silver.
backyi ge gcig pa Tib. “One” is missing from the Skt.
backzhabs g.yon pa’i mdun du bu mo kha zas sbyin par bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “and provide food for the young girls in front of the left foot.”
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the lotus mudrā (padmamudrā).
backbkra shis ldan gyi phyag rgya Tib. The Tibetan translates svastikamudrā as “the mudrā of auspiciousness.”
backg.yo ba’i phyag rgya Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “moving mudrā.”
back“And no one else” om. Tib.
backde dang lhan cig smra ba Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one will speak with him.” The Sanskrit word ullāpayati, guess-translated here as “brings … up,” has a range of meanings associated with speaking, but none of them fit the context very well. Possibly the entire sentence is corrupt. One of the known meanings is to “call out” [to somebody]. Here, because of the instrumental case of “with someone,” it seems more likely that this is about bringing up Mañjuśrī’s name in conversation, rather than calling him.
backrgya shug gi ’bras bus sbyin sreg byas na gang gi ming bzung de dbang du ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan preserves and additional line here that translates as, “If one offers oblations using jujube berries, whoever’s name one [recites] while offering, that person will be enthralled.”
back“Śṛṅgāṭaka” can be the name of several plants.
backPossibly Scirpus kysoor. The Tibetan translation does not include instructions for enthralling members of the vaiśya caste.
backut+pa la’i rtsa ba Tib. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *śālukāni (“lotus root”) instead of the extant Skt. śālūkāni.
backka lany+dzA ri ka Tib. Unidentified.
back“Pāṭala” could also be the name of other plant species.
back“Śrīparṇī” could be the name of more than one plant species.
backPossibly Indian pennywort.
backShorn to remove loose fibers.
backIt is not clear whether the two nāgas each hold a stalk of a lotus flower, or they hold and support the stalk of the lotus that Mañjuśrī is sitting on.
backme ’bar bar mngon par ’byin pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “She sends forth a blaze of fire.”
backmar me’i mchod pa chen po bya zhing / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “a large pūjā of lamps.”
backlha’i mig Tib. “Divine” is missing from the Skt.
back“And will laugh” om. Tib.
back“Śrīparṇī” could be the name of more than one plant species.
backmi snang bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *adṛśyaḥ (“invisible”) instead of the extant Skt. adhṛṣyaḥ (“invincible”).
backThe three metals, according to the Monier-Williams dictionary, are copper, brass, and bellmetal.
backdgra thams cad ’joms par byed par ’gyur ro/. The Tibetan adds a phrase that translates as, “all one’s enemies will be defeated.”
backBodhi trees begin their lives as epiphytes growing on other trees.
backmi snang bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. In place of “invincible” (adhṛṣyo) the Tibetan translates as, “invisible,” reflecting the Sanskrit *adṛśyo.
backAn “asura opening” is a fissure in the ground leading to any of the subterranean paradises.
backji snyed sgrub pa’i grogs mchog dang lhan cig ’dod pa de snyed dang lhan cig Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “with whatever mystic partner one desires.”
backIt seems a bit strange that Maitreya would dwell in the asura realm underground, but the Tibetan makes this even more explicit and translates as, “Maitreya also dwells [there] and one will be able to behold him.”
back“Unsullied” is supplied from the Tibetan. It seems to be the translation of the Skt. akākolīne, which form could be corrupt, or could perhaps suggest “free from the kākola poison.”
backblon po skye bo mang pos bkur bar ’gyur to/ Tib. In place of “many people,” the Tibetan translates as, “all ministers.”
back“In the same locality” om. Tib.
backzla ba gnyis so/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “two months.”
backThose that are “in a river” are probably the nāgas. This last line is not included in the Tibetan translation.
backgzhon nu’i bdag po’i cho gas yin gyi/ sngags gzhan gyi cho gas ma yin na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “using the rite of the divine youth’s lord and not rites of any other mantras.”
backcho ga’i rgyal po bde byed pa/ Tib. This pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae), where it appears as the las line of the verse corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-11981.
backThe accumulations of merit and insight.
backsred pa mthar ni gtug bya’i phyir/ Y, K; sred pa mthar ni gtugs bya’i phyir/ N; srid pa mthar ni gtug bya’i phyir/ D, H. Following the variants in Y, K, and N, this line translates as, “So that they will reach the end of craving.”
backsngags dang rgyud ni nga yis bstan/ Tib. In place of “arise based on the mantra methods,” the Tibetan translates as, “mantra and tantra are taught by me,” apparently translating the Skt. samodita as “taught.” In the MMK, though, samodita seems to be used in the sense of “arisen (udita) in unison with (sama).”
backgrub dang sgrub dang de bzhin rdzas/ /sngags dang rgyud ni nga yis bstan/ /sgrub pa zlos pa rnams la ’dir/ /cho ga’i rgyal po bdag nyid che/ /sems can rnams ni gdul don du/ /’jig rten ’dren pa rnams kyis gsungs/ D. The Tibetan for this verse might be translated as, “The accomplishments and practice, and likewise substances, / Mantra, and tantra, are taught by me / For the practitioners and mantra reciters here. / This great king of manuals / Is taught by the guides of this world / In order to tame sentient beings.”
backThe accomplishment [method] referred to here seems to be the seventh ritual procedure taught in the next chapter.
backnga yis Tib. The Tibetan adds “by me.”
backle’u nyi shu rtsa gnyis pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 22.
back’jig rten thams cad kyis ma gos pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is unstained by any of the worlds,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarvalokair aliptakam instead of the extant Skt. sarvalokānuliptakam.
backbla gos phrag par gzar ba Tib. “With his upper robe over one shoulder” is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to be saying “with his upper robe loose.”
back“Yak-tail whisk” om. Tib.
backThe lotus is in his left hand, and the whisk in his right.
backThe last sentence could be corrupt; it would perhaps make more sense to say, “If one succeeds in this, one will also become proficient.”
backbyang chub sems dpa’i sa rjes su thob par ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan adds a line here that translates as, “One will subsequently obtain the bodhisattva levels.”
backlan stong bsngags shing dgang gzar gyis lan stong blug pa byas la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should incant it one thousand times and pour it one thousand times with the two ladles.”
backpad+ma’i snod Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “lotus vessel,” reflecting the Sanskrit *padmapātra instead of the extant Skt. padmapattra.
backdro ba byung bas ni D. “If it gets hot, one will be able” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backsman de phyung nas lcags gsum gyis yongs su dkri ba byas la yang khar rab tu bcug na mi snang bar ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Remove the medicinal seeds, wrap them them the three metals, and place them in your mouth, and you will be invisible.”
backbzlas pa ’bum byas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “one hundred thousand.”
backbzlas pa ’bum phrag bcu gnyis byas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If you perform one hundred thousand and twelve mantra recitations.”
backBadara can be the name of the jujube, but also of other plants. The Tib. word could mean “jujube” or “juniper.”
backrgyal po dbang du ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “you can enthrall a king.”
backtil la zho dang mar gyis btags pas sbyin sreg ’bum phrag stong byas na thams cad kyi dam pa’i khyim gyi bdag po chen por ’gyur ro/ D. In place of this whole paragraph, the Tib. has only one sentence: “If one offers one hundred thousand oblations of sesame seeds smeared with curds and ghee, one will become a great householder who is superior to all.”
backsbyin sreg ’bum byas na Tib. In place of “ten thousand,” the Tib. has “one hundred thousand.”
backme tog gi ri ma las sbyin sreg D. Unidentified.
back“Seventh” om. Tib.
backnyi shu rtsa bsum Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 23.
back’jam dpal khyod kyi sngags dang rgyud dang rig pa’i rgyal po dang ’khor los sgyur ba la sogs pa dang de bzhin gshegs pa thams cad kyi gtsug tor la sogs pa dang sngags thams cad kyi grub pa’i gnas yod de/ Tib. “Tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas,” here and elsewhere in the MMK, refers to the deities called uṣṇīṣa kings. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, there are places where one can accomplish your mantra system, the vidyādhara and cakravartin and the like, all of the tathāgata-uṣṇīṣas and the like, and all mantras.”
backThe word tathāgata has a feminine ending in the Skt. This could be either a corruption or could reflect the gender of vidyā (feminine).
backskye bo skal ldan bzang po ni/ Tib. The subject of this sentence in the Tibetan translates as, “The fortunate and sublime beings.”
backmdzod dang nor bu’i rigs dag kyang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the Treasure and Jewel families.”
backde nas rtag tu ku sha’i grong/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “in the city of “Kuśi” (i.e., Kuśinagara), reflecting the Sanskrit *kuśipuryāṃ instead of the extant Skt. kāśipuryāṃ.
backIt is unclear whether the Skt. prācyām should be taken in the literal sense of “in the east,” or as the locative singular of a proper name, Prācī.
back30.10cd om. Tib.
backsgrol ma khro gnyer can dag dang / Tib. “Tārā” has been supplied from the Tibetan to fill the lacunae in the Skt.
backgdugs dkar rnams kyi sngags rnams dang / Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Sitātapatrā instead of the extant Skt. Sitā, which is likely, as the longer name could have been shortened for metrical reasons.
backzla ba’i grong khyer rgya mtsho dang / /shar gyi yul ni kho ra yug Tib. It is unclear who the four kumārīs are. Also “in/on the great ocean” could refer to the general location where all these mantra deities can be accomplished. The Tibetan translates as, “The lunar city, ocean, / And the eastern regions.”
backyul ni mchog dbang khor yug tu/ Tib. The reading “Himalayas” was arrived at after emending agrendre (locative case) to agendre. Agendra (Mountain Lord) could be a metrical paraphrase of Śailapati, or another name of the Himalayas. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *agrendra and translates as “Everywhere in the country of the supreme lord.”
backri rtse tshang tshing nang dang ni/ Tib. In place of “lovers’ hideouts” (śṛṅgāragahvara), the Tibetan translates as “mountaintops and wilderness,” reflecting perhaps the Sanskrit *śikharagahvara.
backlog ’dren bgegs ni byed pa yi/ /bzlas pa dag ni ’grub par ’gyur/ /glang po’i cha byed yang dag ldan/ /mche ba gtsigs pa gzi brjid che/. The Tibetan translates as, “One can accomplish the mantra recitations / Of the vināyakas who create obstacles / And who assume the appearance of an elephant, / Bare their fangs, and are magnificent.”
backThis part is unclear. Pretas are normally associated with Yama and the southern direction, whereas the southwest is the quarter of rākṣasas. Possibly this half-stanza actually speaks of rākṣasas, describing them as “human-eating” (a frequent description of rākṣasas) beings of preta birth or origin.
backThe “preta king” is normally Yama, but here he could be, as mentioned below, one of the chief rākṣasas, Vajrakrauñca.
backrdo rje khro bo Tib. In place of Vajrakrauñca, the Tibetan reflects *Vajrakrodha, which could be the correct reading.
backzhi ba khyab ’jug gis bstan pa’i sngags bzhan dag kyang ’grub par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Other mantras that were taught by Śiva / And Viṣnụ can be accomplished as well.”
backgdug cing gdug pa’i las dag ni/ /kha yi gnas su bstan pa yin/ /sngags rnams gdug pa’i las rnams ni/ /lag na rdo rjes bstan pa dag/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The performance of cruel mantras and cruel rites / That was taught in the god realms, / The mantras and cruel rites / That were taught by Vajrapāṇi.”
backmyur du yang dag ’grub par snang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Will appear to be accomplished swiftly and perfectly.”
backnyi mas bshad pa’i sngags rnams ni/ /nyi ma’i sngags zhes rab tu bsgrags/ /nub phyogs na ni gang yod pa/ /sngags dang rgyud ni rab tu ’grub/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The mantras that Aditya taught / Are known as ‘Surya’s mantras.’ / Those who live in the west / Will accomplish that mantra system.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mantrāḥ sauryāś (or saurāś) caiva prakīrtitāḥ for the extant Skt. mantrāḥ saumyāś caiva prakīrtitāḥ.
backThe “lord of yakṣas” is Kubera. He is called here by one of his epithets, Dhanada.
backrgyal ba’i rigs kyi sngags dag ni/ Tib. “Victorious one” here stands for the Tathāgata family. The Tibetan translates as, “The mantras of the Victor’s family.”
backThe meaning of the last pāda is not clear.
back“Their” probably refers to the just-mentioned Elephant and Jewel families.
backThe meaning of this verse is unclear in both the Skt. and the Tib.
backbyang shar dag gi cha dag tu/ /rang rgyal rnams su yang dag ’byung / Tib. The translation of the verses corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-12096 is based on the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to be saying, “[The mantras] of the pratyekabuddhas that originate from the victorious ones.”
backrgyal ba ’khor lo sgyur bas gsungs/ Tib. In the Tibetan, the Skt. udita is translated not as “originating/arisen from,” but as “taught by.”
backthad kar kun nas khor yug tu/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Everywhere, in all of the lateral directions.”
back“Victorious ones,” as before, possibly refers to the Tathāgata family.
backrgyal ba’i rigs kyi sngags grub pa/ /sangs rgyas la sngon byung ba’o/. The Tibetan translates as, “The mantra accomplishments of the victors’ family / Have arisen in the past for all of the buddhas.”
backThe seventh chief buddha is the Buddha Śākyamuni, who seems here to refer to himself.
backgang tshe sangs rgyas rtag tu ni/ Tib. The translation of this line is based on the assumption that gatiniṣṭhā means “final/highest destiny” (cf. #UT22084-088-038-5323). The Tibetan, however, translates the derivative form gatinaiṣṭhika as “consummate” (“the consummate [power of the mantras]”).
backPossibly a play on words is intended in the Skt. The “wheel turner” (cakravartin) is the name of the abovementioned uṣṇīṣa king (one of the eight great uṣṇīṣa kings) and, in the context of this verse, is an epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni (the turner of the Dharma wheel).
backnyi shu rtsa bzhi pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 24.
backrgyal ba’i mchog ’jig rten gyi ’dren pa gau ta ma bdun pa la sogs pa btab nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Having made his request to the supreme Victor, the guide of the world, Gatuama, the seventh.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *saptama (“seventh”) instead of the extant Skt. sattama (“supreme”).
backgzhan dag khro ldan sems kyis ni/ /sa steng dag tu mi bzad pas/ D. In the Tibetan, this verse has only two lines that translate as, “Others [do this] because of their cruel disposition; / Very fearsome, [they seize beings] on the surface of the earth.”
backAs the context later shows, the descent (avatāra) of the powerful beings who will possess the body of a medium is not synonymous with the actual possession (āveśa). Thus, the time of the descent and the possession are not necessarily the same.
backnam mkha’ la ni gnas par snang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “sitting in space.”
backtshig kyang bzang po mtshungs med dang / Tib. “Words” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backgang du ’dod chags bral de gnas/ /sems dpa’ chen po de dag smra/ Tib. The translation of this line is uncertain. The Skt. (after emending pīdadhiyo to pīḍadhiyo) could translate as, “About what they remain troubled in mind about.” The Tibetan translates as, “They describe those great beings / Who abide in a state free from attachment.”
backsa steng de la ’dug pa na/ D. The translation of this line is problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “When they are seated on the ground.”
backchu gtsang ni D. In the Tibetan, pādya (“water for the feet”) is translated as “clean water.”
backsngags shes cho ga ’jigs med pas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One who is versed in mantra and not afraid of the ritual.”
backchags bral des zin rab tu lta/ Tib. In place of “hatred,” the Tibetan has “attachment.”
backde bzhin byang chub sems rigs dang / Tib. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backsems can skal ldan brjod pa’ang yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “And all other fortunate beings.”
backsems can lus ni ’gyel ba yang / Tib. This line suggests, as do the following verses, that it was a medium that the great being communicated through. The Skt. could be slightly corrupt here, so the precise translation of this line is uncertain; the Tibetan translates as, “The collapsed body of the being.”
backsngags ni cho gar gsungs pa dag/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The mantras that were taught in the ritual,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *kalpoditam instead of the extant Skt. jinocitam (here emended to jinoditam).
backsa yi steng las ldang bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “will rise up from the ground,” reflecting the Sanskrit *utthiṣṭhena mahītale instead of the extant Skt. ucchiṣṭena mahītale.
backde yi tshig ni bar mar gnas/ /dbus kyi yul gyir rab tu bsgrags/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The words of the medium remain in midair / And resound in Madhyadeśa.”
backde dag shar phyogs tshig tu ’gyur/ Tib. In the Tibetan the name Pūrvī is translated not as a proper name, but literally, as “eastern.” The context, however, seems to indicate that this is a particular country, since it has its own language.
backrtag tu poN+Da’i tshig gyur pa/ D. In place of Oḍra (surmised after emending the extant yauddhrī to yauḍrī (yā + oḍrī)), the Tibetan has Piṇḍa.
backThis line of text is missing in both the Skt. and the Tib.
backgang yang yul tshig ma ga d+hA/ D. In place of Samataṭa, the Tibetan has Magadha.
backmi gsal Tib. “Unclear” (BHS asphuṭāṃ) is based on the Tibetan reading. The Skt. translates as, “clear” (BHS sphuṭāṃ). The extant Skt. reading is unmetrical and makes less sense than the reading reflected in the Tibetan.
backgling ni rtsub par byed nyid dang / Tib. Tentatively identified by some (see Agrawala 1959, p. 3) as the island of Baros in the Maldives.
backgcer bu stobs ldan bu gnas kyang / Tib. The translation of this line is problematic. The Skt. nagnavālisamudbhave, as the description of an island, could suggest a place that is “produced” from sand (nagnavāli could be a metrical shortening of the BHS nagnavālikā (“bare sands”)). If the identification of Vāruṣaka as Baros is correct, this could be a fitting description of the tiny, flat islands in the Baros group, which seem to be sand dunes covered in palms. Most Indian scholars though, e.g., Agrawala (Agrawala 1959, p. 3), interpret nagnavāli as two separate entities and identify Nagna as the Nicobar islands and Vāli as Bali (the island off Java).
backyi ge la Tib. In place of r, the Tibetan has l, but the l sound has already been dealt with above.
back’brog gnas dang / Tib. The Negi dictionary notes that the Tibetan ’brog gnas is translates the Sanskrit *Aṭavika, which is the name of a yakṣa lord in the Suvarṇaprabhāsa. Yakṣas are very often associated with specific towns and locations, so in this case the Tibetan ’brog gnas likely refers to the town of Aṭavī (Pāli Āḷavī) noted in Edgerton 8.2.
backti ge ga Tib. In place of ḍ, the Tib. has g.
backde dag gling la gnas pa de’i/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Inhabiting those islands.”
backma mo rnams ni gzi brjid che/ de yi thig ’dir gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The words of the illustrious mātṛs / Are spoken here.”
backThe city of Vidiśa and the country of Mālava are “western” in relation to the place where the MMK was probably written.
backbe’u nya dang rgya mtsho’i tshig/ D. Vatsamatsārṇava, rather than a proper name, could simply be a description of a place (“the place of the lakes Vatsa and Matsa” or “…of the lake Vatsamatsa”). The Tibetan renders this compound by its component parts literally as “calf” (vatsa), “fish” (matsa), and “ocean” (arṇava).
backrgya mtsho bcu ’dus cho bo ’dus/ Tib. The Tibetan is obscure and translates as, “Daśārnava, the convergence point where the rivers converge.”
backde las gzhan gdon gtso bo ni/ /yul ni ba ri ya tra’i tshig D. The translation of this half-stanza (just as is the case with this entire section) is a bit shaky. The Tibetan translates as, “If it is another chief evil spirit, / Then the languages will be of the Pāriyātra land.”
backlang ba’i yul du D. The name Khaṣadroṇi could be corrupt, or it could be two names. It has been rendered into the Tibetan as Langwa (the island of Langkawi?).
backgnod sbyin rgyal po’i rigs las byung / /phyag na rdo rje’i rigs su bstan/ /de dag lnga yi gtso bo ni/ /kun gyi tshig tu ’dod pa yin/ Tib. This verse is unclear. The Tibetan is also obscure and might translates as, “Those who are born in the family of the yakṣa king / Who are designated as Vajrapāṇi’s family / Have five principle ones / That are accepted as the language of all of them.”
backrgyal ba’i sras kyis rnam brtags pa/ /snga ma nyid du bstan pa yin/ D. The translation of this half-stanza follows the Tib., which reflects the reading jinaputrā (“sons of the victors”) in place if the extant jinamantrā. “Sons of the victors” possibly refers to the beings described in verse 25.6 above as “free from desire / And bound by the pledge of compassion.” The same passage up to verse 25.26 describes the signs by which they are recognized and the procedure to be followed.
backkha ba can gyi nang gnas pa/ /dri za drang srong skye bo’i tshig /gang gA’i ngogs kyi byang phyogs pa/ /gnod sbyin tshig tu rab tu snang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “In the foothills of the Himalayas / They speak the language of gandharvas and ṛṣis. / North of the river Gaṅgā/ The language is that of yakṣas.”
backde ltar gdon ’jug mtshan ma ni/ mtshan nyid ’gros dang spyod pa yin/ In the Tib. this half-stanza translates as, “The symptoms observed in the possessed [medium] / Are their character, comportment, and behavior.”
backgzhon nu sna tshogs yang dag ’byung / /bsrung ba’i don du rab sbyar bya/ /yi ge drug pas bya ba ni/ /phyag rgya chen po dang ldan pa’i/ /sngags nyid kho na bzlas byas na/ /bsrung ba chen por ’gyur ba yin/ D. One pāda could be missing in the Skt., but the Tibetan doesn’t account for it and, in fact, reduces this and the preceding verse to only six pādas: “[The mantras] used for protection / Are those of the divine youth who is the origin of everything. / If to recite only this mantra, / Endowed with the great mudrā / And of the six syllables, / The great protection will be employed.”
backnyi shu rtsa lnga pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 25.
backrig pa thams cad la ’os pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they are applicable to all vidyās.”
backrtse gcig bdag gir byed pas ’grub/ Tib. “One who lacks benefits” is the translation of the Skt. ahitāvahito (ahita-avahitaḥ, i.e., “fallen into disadvantage”), which, very likely, is a corrupt reading. The Tibetan renders this phrase as “focused one-pointedly.”
backrtse gcig bdag gir byed pas ’grub/ /grub pa rigs pa rnam dpyod pa’o/ /rigs pa gzhon nu kgyod bsten na/ /lus can kun la rab tu snang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Making oneself singularly focused leads to accomplishment. / Accomplishment is discerned based on the means. / When the means takes you, divine youth, as its basis, / It manifests for all embodied beings.”
backBecause of the double meaning of the word karman, this phrase could also be translated as “the karma accumulated in advance.”
backgrub med bsgrub bya’i las rnams med/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There are no ritual activities to be accomplished without accomplishment.”
backsngags pa sngags ni mi sgrogs na/ /sngags min pa yang sngags par ’gyur/ D. The translation of this half-stanza is based on the Tibetan.
backrigs kyi sa bon la brten na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “By retaining the family seed,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *jātibījasamāhāra for the extant Skt. jāpī bījasamāhāra.
backThe “first destiny” is probably the first of the five destinies, i.e., rebirth as a god.
backgnas mchog dam par des sdom na/ /dang po’i bgrod pa thob par ’gyur/ /blo dang bsam pa legs gnas na/ /nad med go ’phang ’thob par ’gyur/ D. The exact meaning of this verse is not clear. The Tibetan translates as, “If one is disciplined in the highest supreme state, / One will achieve the first destiny. / If one’s intelligence and intentions are excellent, / One will attain the state free of sickness.”
backgsang sngags ’bras bu ldan pa ni/ /tshe ’di nyid la grub par gsungs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The secret mantra that possesses the result / Is said to be accomplished in this very life.”
backgrub byed ’bras bu las ma yin/ /las med par yang ’bras mi ’dod/ D. The exact meaning of this half-stanza is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The rite is not what accomplishes the result, / But without the rite, no result can be achieved.”
backBecause of the two meanings of karman, this half-stanza requires a dual interpretation, one where a rite (karman) produces results, and the other when an activity (karman) produces karmic results.
backde bas skye dang rgan spangs pa/ /de ltar yang dag byung gyur pa/ D. The translation of this half-stanza is problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “Through that, birth and aging are abandoned, / And thus [the result] has perfectly arisen.”
back’jig rten zhi bar gsungs pa ste/ /zhi ba srid las rnam grol yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The world is said to be pacified, and / Peace is a liberation from rebirth.”
backrang rig so so’i rgyal ba yis/ /sngags ’di bstan pa ma yin te/ /thub zla rdzu ’phrul chen po yis/ /’jig rten dag la sngags bstan to/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Every victor who possesses self-reflexive awareness / Has not taught this mantra. / The powerful, moon-like sages / Taught the mantras in the world.”
backAs the next verse makes clear, the “knower of reality” is the Buddha.
backde yi dus su sbyor ba ni/ /cho ga mthong ba’i las dag gis/ /sngags rgyud shes pas sgrub po zhes/ /bstan pa ’di la thub pas gsungs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “At that time, someone who employs / The rites following proper procedure and / Is versed in the mantra system is called a practitioner / According to this teaching taught the Sage.”
backI.e., the Tathāgata family.
backThe “king of yakṣas” could be either Vajrapāṇi or Kubera. Here, because of the order in which he is mentioned in this list, it is likely to be the latter.
backlha rnams kun gyi sngags gzhan ni/ /gang yang chags can gyis rab sbyar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The mantras of all these deities and others / Can be employed by someone who has attachment.”
backThe translation of this line is dubious, as it is based on a reading that is likely corrupt.
backnyi shu rtsa drug pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 26.
backA nirdeśa is a type of an explanatory text, usually on religious or philosophical matters.
back’jam dpal khyod kyi cho ga’i rgyal po chos kyi dbyings kyi mdzod/ de bzhin gshegs pa’i snying po/ chos kyi dbyings kyi rgyu mthun pa’i rjes su spyod pa/ mdo chen po’i mchog /rin po che’i le’u de bzhin gshegs pa’i gsang ba’i mchog rjes su gnang ba/ sngags kyi mchog sgrub pa la rgyu mtshan shes pa dang rtags dang dus gzhan shes pa’i sgrub pa’i thabs rnams nges par bstan cing yang dag par bstan no/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, your king of manuals is a treasury of the sphere of phenomena, the essence of the tathāgatas that proceeds in harmony with the sphere of phenomena and is supreme among the great sūtras. This precious chapter definitively and accurately teaches the authorization that is the supreme secret of the tathāgatas, understanding the reason for accomplishing the supreme mantra, and other methods for accomplishing knowledge of signs and times.”
backsgra las byung ba’i ming du shes pa dang sgra las byung ba ma yin par bstan pa dang de bzhin du ’dren ma dang ldan pa’i sngags rnams ni rnam pa gsum du bya ba yin te/ Tib. This verse is rendered in prose in the Tibetan. The Tibetan is somewhat obscure, but might translate as, “Mantras are organized into three types: (1) those in which one understands the term that originates from the sound; (2) those that indicate that there is no origin of sound; (3) and those that likewise have a mixture of the two.”
back“Divine” is here possibly used in the sense of “relating to worldly gods.”
backsgra bzang yang dag ldan pa dang / /rtag tu don dang rab tu ’brel/ /zur chag tshig dang rtag tu bral/ /legs par sbyar don gyis brgyan pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “[Mantras] are endowed with divine sound, / Always sensible and coherent, / Free of any corrupted words, / And adorned with well-affixed meaning.”
backSiddhānta may refer here to the totality of the canonical literature, or to the four different ways (catuḥsiddhānta) of propagating the Dharma.
backrtag tu tshig don ldan pa ste/ Tib. In place of “devoid of,” the Tibetan translates as, “endowed with.”
backci ste don dang don med min/ /don ldan tshig dang don med tshig Tib. The Tibetan has two verses here that appear to correlate to the content in #UT22084-088-038-12276 and is missing the content in Skt. 33.7c. The latter of these two verses is a direct translation of 33.7b, and the former of these two Tibetan verses does not correlate to any of the verses in the extant Skt. for 33.7.
backThe meaning of this half-stanza is very unclear. “Accented” is missing from the Tib.
backyi ge bcu dang yang dag ldan/ /yi ge rnams kyi gnas pa mnyan/ /ji srid ’di dag bcu ’gyur ni/ /sa steng ’di la yi ge mthong / D. The translation of this verse is unreliable. The Tibetan is also obscure and might translate as, “One listens to the source of letters / Endowed with ten syllables. / And sees the letters in this world / For as long as these ten are present.” Possibly, the numbers given here refer not to the actual number of syllables in the mantra but to the number of the types of syllables.
backyi ge drug Tib. In place of “one hundred,” the Tibetan translates as, “six,” reflecting the Sanskrit *ṣaḍakṣaraṃ instead of the extant Skt. śatākṣaraṃ.
backBecause of the ambiguity of the Skt. reading (padaiś emended to pādaiś), the text could be saying “four words” instead of “four pādas.”
back#UT22084-088-038-12284om. Tib.
backbrgya dang lnga bcu dag gi bar/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Up to one hundred and fifty,” reflecting the Sanskrit *abhyardhikaṃ instead of the extant Skt. abhyadhikaṃ.
back“Mudrās” om. Tib.
back“Hot” sounds include the three sibilants (sa, śa, ṣa), visarga, and a few other Skt. sounds.
backThe Tibetan translation of this verse is a mistranslation of the Sanskrit (more so in the Degé than in the other recensions), strongly suggesting that the Tibetan translators didn’t understand the Sanskrit.
backde la grub pa don med min/ /log par yang ni de mi byed/ Y, J, K; de la grub pa yong med min/ /log par yang ni de mi byed/ D. Following Y, J, and K, the Tibetan translates as, “The accomplishment will not be in vain / And also it will not be done in a wrong way.”
backThe phrase “mantra adepts” (mantravidaḥ) is missing from the Tib. The Skt. of this pāda is likely to be corrupt, as the pāda is hypermetrical.
backmi ma yin pa’i ’jig rten pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The worldly [mantras] of nonhuman beings.”
backThe phrase “cerebralized letters” (after emending the unmetrical nyakṣarā to natyakṣarā) is missing from the Tib. and could be wrong. Arguably, there is an observable tendency in the case of the mantras of spirit magic to contain a higher proportion of retroflex sounds, often in little-known/-used verbal commands (such as haṭa haṭa), not to mention the mantric syllable phaṭ.
backyi ge dang dag des bstan pa/ /gcig dang gnyis kyi grangs dag dang / D. The last two pādas, perhaps, could also be interpreted as “They are said to include words containing cerebralized sounds and repeated once, twice, or thrice.” The Tibetan translates as, “Some of the letters they teach / Are counted once or twice.”
backyul gyi skad du bstan pa ste/ D. This pāda in the Skt., before emending the reading deva to deśa, read, “Famed as the languages of the gods.” The Tibetan reflects the reading deśa.
backde dag yi ge gcig pa nas/ /rtsa brgyad stong gi bar du’o/ Tib. It is not clear what this verse is about. The Tibetan for the last two lines translates as, “They can have be between one / And one thousand and eight letters.”
backAccording to Monier-Williams, “a class of metres the stanzas of which may extend from 4 times 27 to 4 times 999 syllables.”
backA mātra is a prosodical unit below the unit of a syllable; a “light” syllable is counted as a single mātra, and a “heavy” syllable as two mātras.
backyang dang yang ni brjod don ldan/ /gsal ba’i don gyis brgyan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Again and again endowed with the meaning of terms, / Adorned with the clear meaning.”
backzur chag legs sbyar sgra nyams kyang / /don ni rab tu brtag pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Though the words of Apabhraṃśa and Sanskrit are corrupted, / The meaning is perfectly designated.”
backThe meaning of the last half-stanza is unclear. The Tibetan is of no help.
backde ltar sngags rnams kun la ni/ /rtag tu phan pas rigs par gsungs/ /zag med zag bcas thams cad kyi/ /sngags rnams ’di yi mtshan ’di yin/ D. The Tibetan expands these two pādas into four lines that translate as, “The following applies to all mantras; / Because they always benefit, they are said to be logical. / These are the characteristics of the mantras, / Either defiled or undefiled.”
backoM ni ta yis brgyan pa ni/ /de las de yi mod la ni/ /de dag la ni nges ’grub ’gyur/ D. The last three pādas in the Tibetan translate as, “The syllable oṁ is adorned with ta./ From that, immediately, / Those [mantras] are definitely accomplished.”
backThe meaning of the Skt. is far from clear. The Tibetan, however, supports this translation.
backCaturasrākāra (“square/quadrangular in form”) seems to be a technical term, but it is not clear what it means when referring to mantras.
backThis verse is arguably the most obscure in this chapter, and the translation proposed might not convey the original meaning. The Tibetan is of little help.
backyi ge tsa ni Tib.
backAgain, it is not clear what is meant by the “square.”
backyi ge b+ha ni Tib.
backyig mthar ma dang yi ge gnas/ Tib. The Skt. of this sentence is unclear. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mātraśritam (in place of the unmetrical mātramiśritam) adopted for the sake of the translation here.
backyi ge na Tib.
backyi ge ba ni Tib.
backyi ge e mang ba Tib.
backdbang chen Tib. Apart from Indra, Māhendra could also refer to Śiva or Viṣṇu.
backsngags dang rgyud la rang gi sngags/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “In the mantra system, one’s own mantra.”
backyi ge ra mang ba Tib.
backmtha’ na yi ge phaT hUM bcas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And ends with the syllablephaṭ with hūṁ.” The final Skt. phrase, hūṁkṛtaḥ, is unclear; it could in fact mean “four syllables hūṁ,” as kṛta can sometimes mean “four.”
backkhyad par du ni sdig yod pas/ /de bas las de mi bya’o/ D. The translation of the last half-stanza is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. could be corrupt. The Skt. could be translated as, “When skillfully employed by cruel beings, / They instantly block [the target’s] life force. / One should therefore not perform [such] acts, / Especially if they are evil.”
back“Taught by the victorious ones” implies, in the context, the mantras of the Tathāgata family.
backrin chen rigs kyi bya ba ni/ D. “Jewel” is supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “lotus,” but the Tibetan is likely to be correct, as the activity of nourishing is normally associated with the Jewel family.
back’jig rten mgon gyis bkag na yang / /gnod sbyin dbang la rab tu bstan/ Tib. The “lord of the yakṣas” is here the yakṣa Vajrapāṇi. The Tibetan translates as, “Even though the lords of the world forbid them, / They taught them to the lord of the yakṣas.”
backsngags kyi che ba’i bdag nyid gsungs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The greatness of mantras was taught.”
backde phyed bsnan na drug cu ste/ Tib. The Skt. is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “If you add half of that, you get sixty.”
backUnlike the English, the Skt. has a discrete term for “ten thousand.”
backThe Skt. actually reads padmas (in place of the expected mahāpadmas), probably because of metrical requirements.
backgrangs mes bcur ni bsgyur byas na/ /de nas gzhan du dpag med yin/ Tib. The translation of the last half-stanza is based on the Tibetan because of the lacunae in the Skt.
backde ’og mun pa zhes su brjod/ /mun pa las ni snang bar brjod/ /snang ba chen po de dag bcu/ /de bcu la ni phung por brjod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Below that is a place called darkness; / Beyond darkness [there is another world] called light. / Ten of those is a great light. / When multiplied by ten, that is known as a multitude.”
backphung po chen po de bcu la/ Tib. “Great multitude,” which fits the pattern of the list, is translated from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “multitude.”
backphung po chen po de bcu bsgres na ni/ /phung po chen por de brjod do/ /phung po chen po de bcu la/ /’di ni zab pa zhes brjod do/ Tib. The Tibetan renders these two pādas in the Skt. in four pādas and translates as, “When a multitude is multiplied by ten / It becomes known as a great multitude. / A great multitude multiplied by ten / Is known as deep.”
backde nas gong du mang ldan yin/ D. In line with the Tibetan, the Skt. bahumata (or bahumati) has been translated here rather unconventionally as if it were bahumat (literally “possessing many”).
backde nas gong du mang ldan yin/ /mang por ’dod pa gnas su brjod/ D. This translation is derived by reading bahumataṃ bahumatyāḥ in place of the extant bahumatyā bahumataṃ. The Tibetan translates as, “Above all of them, there is abundance (literally, possessing many). / Considering this abundance, it is called a place.”
back“Basis” or “foundation” is one of the BHS meanings of the Skt. sthāna.
backThis translation reflects the reading mitasamaṃ (“fixed evenly”), which hardly makes any sense, emended by way of conjecture to mitataraṃ (“more fixed”), which fits the pattern of the list.
backde nas gnas ni chen por ’gro/ / chen po’i gnas zhes ’dod pa yin/ /dpag dang dpag med mnyam byas nas/ /de don chen por yongs su bsgrags/ D. The cosmic units listed here and the exact meaning of this verse are far from clear. The Tibetan translates as, “Next, one proceeds to a great basis. / That is proclaimed as a great basis. / When the measurable and immeasurable are rendered equal, / It is proclaimed as a great thing.”
backrab ’byor gnas Tib. In place of “famous basis” (suśrutasthāna), the Tibetan translates as, “the place of well-being,” reflecting Sanskrit *subhūtisthāna.
backbsam mi khyab las mi bzad gzugs/ Tib. The translation of this pāda is based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. is unmetrical and seems corrupt.
backrgyal thabs las gzhan gter yin te/ D. In place of “home of the treasure,” the Tibetan translates as, “foreign treasure.”
backde yi ’og Tib. In place of “beyond,” the Tibetan translates as, “below that.”
backdge ba’i pha rol sems las byung / /de las gzhan la sems byung che/ /sems las sems ni rnam par g.yeng / D. It is unclear what these particular categories refer to (this entire section, which ends at verse 77 below, seems to be about the ever-greater divisions of the world). The Tibetan translates as, “Beyond virtuous is mental. / Beyond that is great mental. / Beyond mind there is confused mind.”
backIn the BHS lexicon, the word anabhilāpya, translated here as “inexpressible,” suggests a very large number.
backbsnyad yas su yang brjod pa yin/ Tib. The Skt. is unclear. The Tibetan bsnyad yas appears in the Gaṇḍavyūhasūtra as a translation of the Sanskrit mama or mamama signifying “a particularly high number” (see Roberts 2021a, #UT22084-037-007-1773). The Mahāvyutpatti suggests that the term translates the Sanskrit vivaram also signifying “a particularly high number.”
backphyar phyur Tib. Again, the meaning is unclear. The Skt. literally says, “This is called asvara (“without sound”?).” The Tibetan translation phyar phyur suggests the Sanskrit *tavara or the BHS form *tapara meaning “a particularly large number,” which would make more sense in the context, as the passage seems to be about the increasingly higher numbers.
backshu rdog de bzhin shu rdog che/ Tib. According to Monier-Williams, kharva is either ten billion or (more likely in this context) ten to the power of thirty-seven. The Skt. of this pāda is unclear.
backde nas bgegs chen mthong ba ste/ Tib. The order seems the reverse of the expected (one would expect “after the courageous is the very courageous.” The Tibetan differs and translates as, “After great obstacle is sight.” The Tibetan translation mthong ba reflects the Sanskrit *dṛṣṭaḥ instead of the extant Skt. dhṛṣṭaḥ, but the Tibetan translation bgegs chen (*mahavighnaḥ?) does not suggest a Sanskrit term that shares any orthographic or homonymic similarity to the extant Skt. mahādhṛṣṭaḥ, and it breaks with the pattern of enumeration established throughout this passage.
backsems ’phrul Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “miraculous mind.”
backde las pha rol sangs rgyas yul/ /de las gzhan ni ’phel byed sa/ D. The meaning of this pāda is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Beyond that is sphere of the buddhas, / And after that increasing ground. /” The Tibetan ’phel byed sa reflects the Sanskrit *vardhanabhūmikām instead of the extant Skt. nādharabhūmikām.
backde las gzhan du sangs rgyas kyi/ /go ’phang dang ni spyod yul yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “After that is the state / And sphere of the buddhas.”
backbdus nas rdul gyi tshogs dag ni/ Tib. The Tibetan bsdus nas reflects the Sanskrit *saṁgrahya instead of the extant Skt. sambhidya.
backtshad ma shes pa’i spyod yul min/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is not the domain of analytical investigation.”
backrtsis kyi pha rol phyin mi nus/ Tib. The meaning of the last pāda is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Cannot go beyond the enumeration.”
backdpag med bskal pa dag tu ni/ /de dag la ni mnyes byas nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “I worshiped them / For countless eons.”
back“To me” om. Tib.
backHere and elsewhere, “king of manuals” is actually “king of kalpas,” where kalpa may refer to the text of the MMK or, collectively, to all the rites and rituals taught therein.
back’jam pa’i ngag ni ’grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates literally as, “One will attain a sweet voice.” This is a direct translation of the Sanskrit siddhim āyāti mañjumān, which is clearly a play on Mañjuśrī’s name.
back’jam pa’i dbyangs kyi cho ga ni/ /’di nyid kyi ni zhib mo zhes/ /de dag ’grub par gsungs pa ste/ /thams cad kun pas mthu ldan ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It is said they will accomplish / Mañjugoṣa’s rituals / With all of their subtleties / And become powerful by using all of them.”
backThe Skt. translates as, “mantra deities,” but this refers to the mantras, reflecting the notion that the mantra and the deity are one and the same.
backcho ga’i rgyal po bla med ’di/ /gang du ’jam dpal gyis rab bzhed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī praised them / In this unsurpassed king of manuals.”
backThe sentence that starts here concludes at the end of verse #UT22084-088-038-4447 below.
backThis pāda (lacunae in the Skt.) cannot be reconstructed based on the Tib., where this entire half-stanza is omitted.
backsna tshogs las kyis bsgyur ba yi/ /sems can ’gro ba’i skye gnas dag /’di dag bya ba sna tshogs byas/ /sna tshogs skye gnas rab tu bstan/ Tib. The meaning of this verse is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “[I] taught [how] different types of karma transform into / The abodes of birth of sentient beings, / Who perform various acts / [That lead] to their various types of birth.”
backsna tshogs ’gro ba’i skye gnas su/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Take birth as various beings.” The Tibetan may reflect the Sanskrit *yonyām for the metrically altered extant Skt. compound nijānijām (“one’s own and not one’s own”?).
backsems can bsam pa’i spyod yul can/ Tib. The Tibetan translates the Skt. āśaya as “thought” (bsam pa), which is one of a number of possible translations of this term.
back’khor bar phan tshun ’gro ba na/ /yun ring dus su thogs pa ni/ /sems can rnams kyi don bsgrub phyir/ /sngags kyi tshul gyis bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “I wandered about in saṃsāra / As a great deal of time passed / And taught using the mantra system / So that beings might attain the goal.”
backAs the word kalpa (“rite(s)/ritual(s)”) can also refer to the MMK as a whole, this statement could also be interpreted as “I propagate … [this] manual of rites.”
backnad med Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “free from sickness.”
backzang zing bcas par mig sman ’grub/ D. The meaning of this pāda is unclear. The emended Skt. phrase sāmiṣaṃ locanaṃ could be a metri causa paraphrase of māṃsalocanaṃ (“the physical eye”). The Tibetan translates as, “Or medicines for the physical eye will succeed.”
backgzhan gyi rgyud la mkhas pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Knowing other systems of tantra.”
backsangs rgyas dgongs shing phan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “That the Buddha intended and that are beneficial.”
backrab zhugs rgyal ba’i sras rnams kyang / /zhugs par rab tu shes pa yi/ /thub zla’i dkyil ’khor dag la ni/ /’di ni dam tshig shes par gsungs/ Tib. The exact meaning of this verse is far from clear. The Tibetan is also obscure, but may translate as, “When the Victor’s sons have entered / And are understood to have entered / The maṇḍalas of the moon-like sage, / This is called understanding the proper time.”
backrtag tu sngags rnams don yod de/ /yang dag bsams pa thob pa yin/ D. The Skt. could be corrupt here. The Tibetan translates as, “Mantras that are always effective / Achieve one’s good wishes.”
back’jig rten ji srid sngags rnams sam/ /yang na gzugs su byung ba’ang rung / D. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the worldly mantra beings there are, / Even those that take on a form.”
backmi ’dod gus pa med pa yi/ /las ni mi bya ’bras bu med/ D. In the Tib., the last two pādas read, “One should not indulge in unacceptable, rude acts / That will not bear any fruit.”
backThis half-stanza and the second half-stanza of the previous verse appear, in the Tib., in reverse order.
backlas dang bya ba dang cho ga dang rgyu mtshan shes pa/ Tib. The Tibetan interprets the compound karmakriyāvidhinimittajñāna (“the knowledge of signs [necessary for] the ritual activity procedure”) as a dvandva: “the knowledge of signs, the activities, and the ritual procedures.”
backnyi shu rtsa bdun pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 27.
back“Methods” (tantra) om. Tib.
backrgyal ba’i sras po dag dang ni/ de bzhin nyan thos rang rgyal dang / /mthong ba’i chos kyi ’bras thob gang / /de la phyag rgya rab tu bstan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One may teach the mudrās to / The sons of the Victor, / Śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, / And those who have visibly attained the fruit of the Dharma.”
backIt is not very clear in what sense exactly the word saṃskṛta (“refined/cultivated”) is being used here. The context necessitates a term that would set the human world apart from the worlds of gods and asuras as regards the ease of accomplishing ritual activities. Perhaps a sense similar to tractability or malleability is required.
backphyag rgya ldan pa’i zlos pa pos/ /sngags rnams ma lus ’grub par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra reciter who possesses the mudrās / Can accomplish any mantras.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *japināṃ instead of the extant Skt. *rūpināṃ.
backsngags dang phyag rgya kun byas na/ Tib. The word “mudrā” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backsems can skye gnas las skyes dang / /byang chub sems dpa’ mi snang ba’ang / /cho gas bskul nas mi ’gugs pa/ /de ni gang yang yod ma yin/ /srung ba’i cho ga’i rgyud dag gam/ /las ’grub bzlog par bya ba la/ /sa bcu la ni gnas pa yi/ /byang chub sems dpas kyang mi nus/ /sngags dang phyag rgya la gnas la/ /’byung po kun gyis mi tshugs so/ D. The passage from the beginning of verse 25 up to this point is arranged differently in the Tibetan and includes at least one extra half-stanza. It translates as, “There is no being that cannot be / Invoked and summoned following the proper procedure, / Even beings born from a womb / And invisible bodhisattvas. / Even bodhisattvas who abide / On the tenth level are not able / To thwart the protection ritual procedures / Or the accomplishment of a ritual action. / Those who rely on mantras and mudrās / Are unassailable by any beings.”
backThese two pādas are omitted in the Tib. and incomplete in the Skt.; they seem to paraphrase the preceding two pādas.
backThe last two pādas and the next verse are omitted in the Tib.
backdka’ thub zlas pa cho ga’i lam/ D. Presumably the form of the displayed mudrā. In place of “form,” the Tibetan translates as, “austerity,” reflecting the Sanskrit *tapojāpavidhir instead of the extant Skt. *rūpajāpavidhir.
backgan zhig rtag tu mi ’jug pa’o/ Tib. This pāda is missing in the Skt. because of lacunae and the reconstruction here is based on the Tib., which translates as, “Such a person will never apply.”
backsngags dang phyag rgya mtha’ dag ni/ /gang zhig cho ga ldan byed pa’o/ D. Because of the missing text in the previous verse, the translation of the last two pādas is a matter of guesswork. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who follow the proper procedure / Use all of the mantras and mudrās.”
backde srid las la cho ga’i rgyal/ /’dis ni ’bras bu rgya chen ’byung / /’jig rten gsang mchog phan pa dang / /sngags dang phyag rgyas dam bcas pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This king of manuals can bring / Great and vast results for traversing existence. / The most secret benefit in the world / Is guaranteed through mantra and mudrā.”
back“Friend of the Sun” is one of the names of Śākyamuni.
backHis full name is Saṃkusumita Rājendra, first mentioned in #UT22084-088-038-37.
backI.e., Jambūdvīpa.
backcho ga’i rgyal po rgya chen la/ /de bzhin ’di ni yang dag ’jug Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus you set this forth / In a king of manuals, so vast in scope.”
backI.e., during the dark eon.
backrtag tu lugs la mi gnas shing / Y, K; rtag tu lus la mi gnas shing / D. The Tibetan translation in Y and K reflects the extant Skt.
backbskal pa bsam mi khyab par sngon/ /gzhon nu khyod kyi smon lam ’di/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Divine youth, this your aspiration / That you made an inconceivable number of eons ago.”
backgzhon nu khyod kyi smon lam ’di/ /sngon chad du ni byas pa yin/ /nga ni byis pa’i gzugs thob gyur/ /des na khyod la bshad par bya/ D. Some of the Skt. in this half-stanza is corrupt, and the translation proposed here could be wrong. The Tibetan translates as, “Divine youth, this is your aspiration / That was made so long ago. / I have taken on a youthful body, / So now I will give you the following instruction.”
backnyi shu rtsa brgyad pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of of the text record this as chapter 28.
backde nas ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pas sangs rgyas thams cad kyi zhabs la btud de phyag ’tshal nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, the divine youth, bowed and prostrated at the feet of all of the buddhas.”
backphyag rgya thams cad la gzigs shing sangs rgyas thams cad la mkhyen par byas nas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He gazed at all the mudrās and directed his attention to all the buddhas.”
back’phags pa’i sngags rnams la yid brtson par byed pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “occupied with the noble mantras,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *mantrāryo instead of the extant Skt. mantrārtho°.
back“Great mudrā” seems to be a category that applies only to a limited number in the list of one hundred and eight given here.
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the padma mudrā (padma is a pink lotus).
backsngags shes dag la legs mdzes shing / Tib. The Tibetan repeats the content in #UT22084-088-038-12517 and translates as, “Those perfectly adorned by the knowledge of mantras.”
backThis and the mudrā listed as 89th are both called “hollow space” (sampuṭa); their shape, however, is different.
backrtags kun dag tu rab tu bstan/ D. In place of “even-pointed,” the Tibetan has “many-pointed.”
backsum cu pa ni mda’ bo che/ D. It is not certain whether tomara (mda’ bo che) is a hatchet or another weapon. The Tibetan mda’ bo che (lit. “large arow”) suggests a javelin.
backlnga pa ma mo zhes bshad pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The forty-fifth is the mother,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *mātaraṃ instead of the extant Skt. pātram.
backdgu pa rgyal ba’i sgra yang yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “victor’s sound,” reflecting the Sanskrit *jinaśabda instead of the extant Skt. japaśabda. The reading japaśabda, however, is corroborated in the explanatory section below.
backlnga bcu bzhi par shes bya ba/ /phyag rgya de ni ’khrul med yin/ D. “Movement in the direction of that” is a literal translation of the Skt. tadgatacāriṇī, a reading corroborated in the explanatory section below. The Tibetan for this mudrā, however, translates as, “flawless.”
backlnga bcu drug pa mda’ yin te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The fifty-sixth, the arrow.”
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the utpala mudrā (utpala is a blue lotus).
backthag pa’i phyag rgyar sangs rgyas gsungs/ H; theg pa’i phyag rgyar sangs rgyas gsungs/ D. This half-stanza has been translated following H, as the Skt. doesn’t agree with the explanatory section below. In place of the extant Skt. reading vadhvā vajramudrā, the H reflects the Sanskrit *buddhair rajjumudrā.
backThere was a mudrā called “spear” above. While the Skt. uses different words to differentiate between them, the English language doesn’t have enough words to use a different one every time (all of them—spear, lance, javelin, etc.—have been used in this list).
backdgra ’joms byed par rab tu bstan/ D. “Killer of hundreds” is a particular weapon that has the form of a nail-studded missile. The Tibetan translates as, “foe destroyer,” which reflects the reading śatrughnā in place of the extant śataghnā. The latter, however, is corroborated in the explanatory section below.
backmdor na klu yi phyag rgya yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *nāga instead of the extant Skt. nāvā (emended from nādā), which could be a misreading of the Skt. nāva or nāvā (“boat”). The explanatory section below confirms that the mudrā in this position is the “boat.”
backtshes brgyad zla ba pi bang dag D. The Tibetan translates as, “the moon of the eighth day,” which roughly means the same thing.
backAs the Skt. breaks off at this point (to resume again in verse 35.35), the next two verses have been supplied from the Tib.
backIt is not clear how this seat mudrā differs from the seat mudrā #UT22084-088-038-4590 as the nineteenth.
backThe Sanskrit text resumes here.
backgnyis pa gtor ma’i phyag rgya ste/ Tib. The Tibetan for this mudrā translates as “bali.” This might be a misreading of the Skt. valaya (“bracelet”) as *balaya[ḥ] (the plural of bali).
backbdun pa skyil krung phyed kyi gnas/ D. The Tibetan for this mudrā translates as, “half cross-legged posture.”
backbrgyad pa dag ni bong ba ste/ D. In place of “summoning,” the Tibetan translates as, “clod.”
backphyag rgya rnams kyi grangs bstan pa/ /rgyud ’di las ni rab ’byung ba/ Tib. The exact meaning of this final pāda is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The teachings on the count of the mudrās / Come from this tantra.”
backThis pāda is omitted in the Tib.
back“Starting again at the beginning” means that here starts the explanatory section with the description of the one hundred and eight mudrās listed above, starting with the first on the list, the five-crested.
backthub pa’i bkas ni bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The Sage’s instructions taught that.”
backrab tu phyung ste drang por bya/ Tib. The Skt. śūnyākāram (literally, “shape of emptiness”) has been emended to sūcyākāram (“pointed shape”). “Shape of emptiness” can’t be ruled out, however, used in the meaning of a circle or a sphere. The Tibetan translates as, “Are extended and straightened.”
back“Plait” om. Tib.
backsor mo’i rtse mo dgug cing dgod/ D. It is unclear how the fingertips are positioned. The Tibetan translates as, “placed and bent.”
backsor mo gzhan ni rang bzhag la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The remaining fingers are left as they are.”
backmthe mo gnyis ni rab gshib nas/ D. The Tibetan translation (rab gshib) of the Skt. vinyasta implies that the Sanskrit term here means “crossed over.”
backsrin lag gnyis ni rtse sprad bkug D. The Tibetan translates as, “The tips of the ring fingers touch and bend in.”
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the padma mudrā (padma is a pink lotus).
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the padma mudrā (padma is a pink lotus).
backmyur du nor ni byed par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translation of the Skr. kṣipram arthakaro bhavet translates as, “will swiftly bring wealth,” which is also a possible interpretation.
backIt is not clear whether vinyasta (rnam sbyar ba) here means “crossed over” or just “joined together.”
backI.e., the syllables of the heart mantra, presumably of Mañjuśrī.
backThere seems to be some confusion here, as the immediately preceding mudrā is different from this, and yet both are referred to as the “complete.” Also, this mudrā (the “complete”) and the next one (the “banner”) were given in the enumerative list above in the reverse order.
backlag gnyis de bzhin byas nas ni/ /g.yon pa phab cing de la brten/ D. It is unclear what and how the left index finger is touching (possibly meeting the extended index and middle fingers of the other hand). The Tibetan, which does not mention the index finger, translates as, “One should hold both hands as before / With the left one brought down and rested on it.”
backlag pa g.yas pas bya ba ni/ /de yi sor mo dgug cing gzhag D. The Skt. of this pāda is very unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “With one’s right hand one should / Bend and position the fingers.”
backsgra ni zlog par byed/ D. This line has been translated based on the Tibetan, which seems to reflect the Sanskrit *śatruvāraṇī instead of the extant Skt. śakradhāraṇī (“supporting Śakra”).
backThis pāda is omitted in the Tib.
backAgain, this mudrā and the mudrās that follow are not exactly in the same order as in the list above.
backdgra rnams kun ni zlog byed cing / D. This line has been translated based on the Tibetan, which seems to reflect the Sanskrit *śatrunivāraṇī, in place of the extant śakranivāraṇī (“warding off Śakra”).
backsngags zlos pa yis bstan pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan interprets the genitive case of mantrajāpinām not as “to,” but as “by.”
backdgra rnams kyi ni gdong ’gegs shing / /mi ’dod pa dag rengs bar byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One may also cover the face of the enemies / And paralyze undesirables.”
backmi ma yin pa dang ma rungs pa/ D. In place of “humans,” the Tibetan translates as, “nonhumans.”
backthe bo mdzub mo rtse sprad ldan/ /gung mo gnyis ni rab brkyang zhing / Tib. The position of the fingers is far from clear as the Skt. is vague. The Tibetan translates as, “The tips of the thumbs and the index fingers should touch / And both the middle fingers should be stretched out.” The Skt., however, doesn’t mention the index fingers at all.
backThere seems to be a play of words in the Skt., as the word śakti is used in this verse in its two different meanings of “javelin” and “ability.”
backbyis pa’i gdon dang mi sdug gzugs/ Tib. The Tibetan reads the Skt. bālāgrahavirūpākṣa as a dvandva compound and translates as, “The bālagrahas and virūpākṣas.”
backde bzhin lag ni sbyar byas nas/ /thal mo’i rnam par byas pa dag /de nyid rnam par bzlog bya ste/ /sor mo phan tshun ’byar ba ni/ D. It is difficult to visualize what one is actually doing with one’s hands. The Tibetan translates as, “When the hands are positioned as before, / One should use one’s palms / By placing them in a reverse position, / With the opposite fingers joined.”
backIt is unclear what the “reverse position” means—possibly that the tips of the fingers of one hand touch the wrist of the other, and vice versa.
backrgyal ba mchog gis mchog sbyin gsungs/ D. In place of “shield,” the Tibetan translates as “boon-granting.”
backyi ge gcig gnyis gsum dag gi Tib. “One, two, or three” has been supplied from the Tibetan because of the lacunae in the Skt. However, the translation of this entire half-stanza is uncertain.
backRather than one-syllable, the Tibetan grammar indicates that it is either the one-, two-, or three-syllable mentioned in the previous verse.
backThe Skt. śūnyākāram (literally, “shape of emptiness”) has been emended to sūcyākāram (“pointed shape”). “Shape of emptiness” can’t be ruled out, however, used in the meaning of a circle or a sphere.
backphyag rgya brjod na ’jig par ’gyur/ /da pus phyag rgya legs mchod pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And they will perish when one expresses the mudrā. / That is the highly esteemed mace mudrā.”
backsrin lag mdzub mo Tib. In place of “tips,” the Tibetan translates as, “index fingers.” It seems to consistently translate the Skt. agra (“tip/end/edge”) as “index finger.”
backThis mudrā was listed in a different order in the original list (starting at #UT22084-088-038-4580), where the bell was followed by the noose.
backThe translation of these two pādas is uncertain.
backgang yang ma rungs bdug pa’i gza’/ /gang yang gnod sbyin srin po rnams/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Any evil grahas / And any yakṣas and rākṣasas.”
backlag gnyis de bzhin rab sbyar nas/ /bzlog pa’i rnam pas nang bcings la/ /g.yon pa’i lag pa’i sor mo ni/ /gung mo srin lag dgug par bya/ /g.yas pa’i lag pa’i sor mo ni/ /gung mo srin lag rnam par dgug/ /mdzub mo mthe’u chung dag kyang ni/ /gnyi ga sdigs mdzub bya ba ni/ D. The Skt. is not completely clear. The Tibetan for the last two verses translates as, “Using both hands as before, one should put them together / In a reverse position, binding [the space] inside. / One should bend the middle and ring fingers / Of the left hand. / The middle and the ring fingers / Of the right hand should also be bent. / Both the index and small fingers / Should form a threatening gesture.”
backkhro ldan sems can zlog pa yin/ D. “Beings” (sems can) is derived from the Tibetan translation. The Skt. has Śakra here.
backsangs rgyas byang chub sems dpa’ kun/ /rdzu ’phrul chen po ’joms byed cing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “It causes all of the buddhas and bodhisattvas/ To destroy extremely powerful beings.”
backIt is not clear how the mudrā “rests” on the middle fingers.
backgung mo srin lag rab brkyang ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The middle and ring fingers should be extended.”
backde nas yal ga ’dra bar ni/ /’og tu mthe’u chung rtse mor sbyar/ D. The meaning of this verse is far from clear. “Like a braid” possibly means that the fingers are not joined pad to pad, but side to side (they are entwined, as it were). In the Tibetan text, the second half-stanza translates as, “Then one should entwine the tips / Of the little fingers below like a vine.”
backThe Skt. adds here “swiftly.”
backAgain, it is far from clear what this mudrā actually looks like.
backThe “peacock seat” was the twentieth mudrā in the enumerative list above, even though the order differed from the order in which the mudrās were presented earlier in this chapter.
backnyi shu de bzin tshang bar ni/ /de dag phyag rgyar ’dod pa ste/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Those are considered to be / The twenty mudrās in their entirety.” The Tibetan seems to have read the Skt. tu-m-ataḥ (the medial m inserted to avoid unmetrical sandhi) as if it reads tu mataḥ, and translates mataḥ as “considered.”
backbyugs shing me la bskams pa yi/ D. The Tibetan translates as “dried over a fire.”
backma smad shu ba med pa yis/ D. “Perfect and free of blisters” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. seems corrupt and is incomprehensible.
backslob dpon la ni yang dag dris/ Tib. In place of “having examined,” the Tibetan translates as, “having asked,” reflecting the Sanskrit *pṛṣṭvā instead of the extant Skt. dṛṣṭvā.
backgzhan dag gis ni sems g.yeng min/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Or have one’s mind distracted by others.”
backdkyil ’khor bdag po’i sngags dran nas/ Tib. “The lord of the maṇḍala” is the Tibetan interpretation of the Skt. cakrin (literally, the “possessor of the circle”).
backsor mo rnams ni sbyar bar bya/ /de nas sor mo gung mo ni/ /rtse mo sbyar bar bya ba yin/ Tib. The Tibetan for the last three pādas translates as, “And join the fingers. / Then, join the tips / Of the middle fingers.”
backmdzub mo dang ni mthe’u chung gi/ /rtse mo tshigs ni bar mar gzhag D. These two pādas have been translated based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. is unclear. This translation is problematic, as it would be difficult to place the tip of the small finger on the joint of the index finger. The Skt. does not mention index fingers, but only small fingers.
backIn place of “mantra,” the Tibetan translates as, “mudrā.”
backBecause of its association here with Śiva-Rudra, the “liṅga” in this passage refers rather to the liṅga of Śiva, even though it is the same mudrā as the “one-pointed lance” in the enumerative list near the beginning of this chapter. Given its position in the enumerative list (it is listed between the paṭṭiśa (the “three-pointed lance”) and the dviliṅga (the “two-pointed lance”), with the samaliṅga (the “even-pointed lance”) following soon after), it is clear that the mudrā referred to here as “liṅga” is the same as the “one-pointed lance.”
backcho ga mchog ’dir dam tshig dang / /bdag nyid sngags ni ma lus dag D. The Tibetan inserts “samayas” before “personal mantras.”
backAgain, this mudrā is the same as the “one-pointed lance.”
backBecause of the lacunae in the Skt., we don’t know who or what it is that is brought into the maṇḍala; we can only guess it is the “lord of the mudrās.” The Tibetan doesn’t specify who or what it is.
backdrag pos bgegs ni byas pa dag D. “Obstacles created by Rudra” is the Tibetan translation, and it reflects the Sanskrit *rudrakṛtavighneṣu in place of the extant Skt. rudravighnakṛteṣu.
backde bzhin de ni rnam gnyis byas/ Tib. The phrase “but with two points” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backde bzhin sor mo byas nas ni/ /g.yas pa’i bdzub mo nges par brkyang / /g.yon pa’i mdzub mo’ang brkyang byas te/ /mthe bo’i tshigs ni chang pas gnan/ D. The translation of these four pādas is from the Tibetan. The Skt. is vague and seems to be saying, “One should position the fingers the same way, / And extend the right hand. / The left index finger should be / Squeezed in a fist at the joint.”
back#UT22084-088-038-12682om. Tib.
backPossibly the “hammer” refers here to the two thumbs.
backphyag rgya dgra ni ’jig byed pa’o/ Tib. This translation follows the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *śatru° (“enemy”) instead of the extant śakra° (“Śakra”).
backde bzhin mthe’u chung sor mo gnyis/ Tib. In place of “ring fingers,” the Tibetan translates as, “small fingers.”
backdgod cing mdzub mo bstan par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “So that the index fingers are displayed.”
backThe position of the fingers is unclear.
backg.yas pa’i lag pa’i dkyil dag tu/ /g.yon pa’i lag bzhag ba dan brjod/ Tib. Again, the meaning is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “And when the left hand is placed / In the center of the right hand, it is called the banner.”
backNeither the Skt. nor the Tib. makes it clear what it is that is placed above.
backg.yas pas g.yon pa bcing bar bya/ Tib. The translation of the last pāda is far from certain. In place of “below,” the Tibetan translates as, “Holding the left hand with the right,” reflecting the Sanskrit *dakṣiṇāvāma° instead of the extant Skt. dakṣiṇāvāya°.
backsor mo mdzub mo mthe’u chung dag /phan tshun du ni yang dag sbyar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should join together / The index and the small fingers.”
backgung mo mdzub mo gnyis po ni/ /gyen du bsgreng ba dag tu bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The middle and index fingers / Should be raised upward.”
backmthe bo gnyis kyang smad par bya/ /gung mo sbyar la rab gzhug gzhag/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The thumbs should be placed below, / Touching the middle fingers.” The Tibetan again seems to interpret the word madhya (“center/central”) as the “middle finger.”
backrig pa’i rgyal po rdzu ’phrul che/ /phyag rgya dung ni ’bud bzhin bzlas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Incant this mudrā with the extremely powerful / vidyārāja as if one were blowing a conch.”
backIndeed, the “Dharma conch” is the fortieth in the enumerative list above.
backg.yon min lag pa’i nang du ni/ /’bad pas lag g.yon gzhug par bya/ /thams cad ’og tu byas pa yi/ /lu gu rgyud du bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Gently place the left hand / Inside the right hand / With [the right] positioned entirely below it. / This mudrā is called the chain.”
backbkrol zhing rim par yang dag bsgreng / D. The Skt. veṇi (“in succession,” “in line,” “one after the other”) is translated into the Tibetan as “gradually.” The exact meaning, however, is not clear.
backlag gnyis de bzhin kun bsdus nas/ /bkrol zhing rim par yang dag bsgreng / /gung mo’i tshigs sum the bo ni/ /’di nyid cho gas gzhag par bya/ the bo gnyis kyi rtse mo yang / /gung mo’i bar tshigs yang dag sbyar/ D. The shape and the procedure of this mudrā are far from clear. The Tibetan translates as, “Bringing the two hands together like that / One should loosen them and gradually raise them up. / One should place the thumbs at the joints of the middle fingers. / By means of the technique like this / One should join the tips of the thumbs / With the middle joints of the middle fingers.”
backre ba rdzogs byad pa’i/ D. The translation follows the Tibetan here. The Skt. reads manoratha, which translates as “wish.”
backyid la re ba rdzogs zhes brjod/ Tib. The translation follows the Tibetan here. The Skt. reads manoratha, which translates as “wish.”
backthub pa’i zla ba de yis ni/ /zla ba’i ’od la rab tu bstan/ /zla bas pad+ma’i rigs dag la/ /des ni phyag rgya ’di la sbyar/ /sngags mkhan ji ltar ’dod pa bzhin/ /rnam pa sna tshogs las rnams byed/ D. The meaning of this verse is unclear. It seems that the moon is somehow associated here with the white ambrosia. The Tibetan is also obscure, but might translate as, “The moon-like sage / Taught it to Candraprabha, / And Candra used this mudrā / For the Lotus family. / It carries out any of the various ritual actions / That someone skilled in mantra might desire.”
backThe six fingers are the index, middle and ring fingers of both hands. This mudrā seems to be identical with or similar to the Japanese Buddhist mudrā jō renge-in (cf. Bunce 2005, figure 211).
back#UT22084-088-038-12724om. Tib.
backThe mudrā mother is the one described two verses above as “the mother of all the buddhas.”
backlag gnyis de bzhin bsdu byas nas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should join both hands as before.”
backIt is unclear what “both” refers to; possibly to the index and middle fingers.
backIt is unclear what “they” refers to; possibly to the index and middle fingers once again.
backmkhas pas rgyal ba’i sgra ru shes/ Tib. In place of “sound of recitation,” the Tibetan translates as, “victor’s sound,” reflecting the Sanskrit *jinaśabda instead of the extant Skt. japaśabda. The reading japaśabda, however, is corroborated in the enumerative list above.
backlag gnyis de bzhin yang dag sbyar/ /mdzub mo’i rtse mo yang dag dgug /sor mo thams cad sbyar byas la/ /cung zad yangs par ’byung ba ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Join the two hands together as before, / Draw in the tips of the index fingers, / Interlace all of the fingers, / And expand them a bit.”
backBoth the Skt. and the Tib. read “buddhas” (buddha) in place of “wise ones” (budha). The translation here is based on the reading budhā[ḥ], (the plural of budha) emended from buddhā[ḥ] to make it consistent with the previous verse.
backlag g.yas brkyang zhing rab bsgreng ba/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Extending and raising up the right hand.”
backgung mo gnyis ni bsgreng bar bya/ Tib. It is unclear what is “joined with the middle joint,” and which middle joint is meant. The Tibetan translates as, “One should raise up the two middle fingers.”
back’khrul pa med pa’i rgya de yin/ D. In place of “supreme hand,” the Tibetan translates as, “unconfused.” However, the enumerative list near the beginning of this chapter corroborates “supreme hand.”
back#UT22084-088-038-12739om. Tib.
backtshigs kyi ’og tu rab bzhag pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “And places them below the joints.”
backmdzub rtse Tib. The Tibetan specifies that these are the tips of the index fingers, but the Skt. rather suggests middle fingers (as they were mentioned above).
backmda’ yi phyag rgyar bstan pa yin/ Tib. “Bow and arrow” has been supplied from the enumerative list above, where this mudrā is listed as the 56th. The Skt. phrase (kaṃ śubho) that in this verse stands for the name doesn’t make much sense. The Tibetan translates as, “arrow.”
backde gnyis tshigs su mtheb gnyis sbyar/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Join the two thumbs to the joints of those two.”
backde bzhin ’khor lo mda’ chen gshol/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Likewise, the circle, great arrow, and plow.” The Tibetan translators seem to have misunderstood the Skt. grammar.
backIn the Tib., the first half-stanza of this verse is subsumed in the previous verse, and the second is omitted altogether.
back’di dag ma lus mtshon cha’i rgya/ sngags dang yang dag ldan par gsungs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “All of these are weapon mudrās / That were taught together with mantras.”
backbyis pa’i sems can Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And childish beings.”
backsor mo thams cad kyis bsgrubs pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Forming this with all of the fingers.”
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the utpala mudrā (utpala is a blue lotus).
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the utpala mudrā (utpala is a blue lotus).
backpad+ma rnams kyi phyag rgya ’di/ /phyag rgya’i pad+ma zhes su brjod/ D. It is uncertain that the Skt. madhyame (“with reference to the middling”) refers to the rites. The word “middling” is absent in the Tibetan, which translates as, “This mudrā of the lotuses / Is called the lotus mudrā.”
backrdo rje rtse gsum yang dag ’byung/ D. It is unclear what shape or form this is. Edgerton (Edgerton 1970, p. 490) mentions a position of the hands called vinyastikā but doesn’t specify what it is. The Tibetan understands this to be a three-pointed vajra.
backgung mo’i sor mo’i tshigs dbus su/ D. In place of “the joints of the middle fingers,” the Tibetan translates as, “At the center of the joints.”
backphyag rgya dam pa tha ma yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This is the last supreme mudrā.”
back“The seventh moon-like sage” is the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backdus gsum rgyun mi chad mzlas na/ D. The meaning of the last pāda is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “Are recited uninterruptedly in the three times,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *trikālāvicchedajāpena instead of the extant Skt. trimalāṃ vicchedajāpena.
back#UT22084-088-038-12761om. Tib.
backThe statement that the mantras will be annihilated through merely seeing this mudrā clearly implies that the mantra are the deities who can see.
backma zhi ba yi phyag rgya kun/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Among all the mudrās that are not peaceful.”
backsngags pas rtag tu mgo bor ni/ /’khor lo’i phyag rgya brtag par bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A mantra practitioner should always designate / This chief [mudrā] as the wheel mudrā.”
backsor mo lhod cing yangs par bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “loosening and widening up,” which seems right in the context.
backlag gnyis sor mo’i rtse dgug pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should bend the tips of the fingers on both hands.”
backkun nas sor mo rnams kyis ni/ /phreng ba bzhin du gshib byas pa/ /rgyal ba’i phyag rgyar ’di brjod do/ D. The Tibetan clearly reflects a different Sanskrit reading. The last three pādas of the Tibetan translate as, “With all the fingers / Lined up like of a rosary. / This is called the Victor’s mudrā.”
backde bzhin lag gnyis sbyar nas ni/ /gung mo mdzub mo gnyis dag ni/ /khab kyi rnam par bya ba yin/ D. The translation of this verse is very uncertain. The Skt. of the first pāda is hypermetrical and probably corrupt. The Tibetan preserves only three lines of this verse and differs from the extant Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “One should join the two hands as before, / With middle and index fingers / Forming the shape of a needle.”
backde las gzhan pa’i sor mo ni/ /cung zad dgug par bya ba yin/ Tib. “Other” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The corresponding Skt. natottamam (“bent-supreme”) is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “The other fingers / Should be slightly bent.”
backde yang yang dag sbyar byas te/ /srin lag gi ni tshigs su brten/ D. The “two [fingers] that touch alongside” (literally, “the two that cling together”) must be referring to the middle and index fingers. The Tibetan is obscure and translates as, “Join them together again so that, / They rest on the joint of the ring finger.”
backIn place of “spear,” the Tibetan translates as, “turtle,” reflecting the Sanskrit *kūrma, instead of the extant Skt. kunta. The reading kunta (“spear”), however, is corroborated in the enumerative list above.
backmdzub mo gnyis ni sbyar bya ba/ Tib. In place of “forming a needle,” the Tibetan translates as, “joined,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *yojitau instead of the extant Skt. sūcitau.
backdgra ’jig phyag rgyar mrjod pa yin/ D. “Killer of hundreds” is a particular weapon that has the form of a nail-studded missile. The Tibetan translates as, “foe destroyer,” which reflects the Sanskrit *śatrughnā in place of the extant Skt. śataghnā. The latter, however, is corroborated in the enumerative list above.
backgru yi phyag rgyar ’di rab bstan/ Tib. “Boat” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “drum” (bheri), which reading is unlikely to be correct, as the “drum” appears in a different place in the list. The “boat” fits the context much better as it is a vessel that “delivers beings from … saṃsāra.” The “boat” is also the mudrā listed (after emending nādā° to nāvā°) at the corresponding position in the enumerative list above.
backsor mo de nyid bsgreng nas ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should raise the fingers.”
backThe Monier-Williams dictionary only says that citrahasta is a “particular movement of the hands in fighting.”
backskyob pa rnams kyis shing rtar gsung / D. The Skt. reading rato has been emended to ratho to match the Tibetan. Before the emendation, the Skt. could be translated as, “It is the supreme threefold vehicle, / Said to be delighted in by the world protectors.”
backIt is unclear what this gesture looks like, but the name (citratala) and the attendant description suggest that it displays a flat surface.
backde nyid lag gnyis rab bsgreng nas/ /gnyi ga yang ni kha sbyar bya/ /lag mthil gnyis ni mnyam byas brkyang / /lan kan ’dra bar yang dag ’byung / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, one should raise both hands / Forming an empty space with both of them, / Extend them so that the two palms are level, / And form the shape of a bench.”
backthub pa’i zla bas yang dag gsungs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Was taught by the moon-like sage.”
backIn the enumerative list above and in the next verse, this mudrā is simply called the “resting place.”
backgang du ’das pa’i sangs rgyas dang / /ma ’ongs da ltar bzhugs pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “The buddhas of the past, / Those in the future, those who are present now, and.”
backg.yas pa’i mdzub mo gcig gis ni/ /g.yon pa’i rtse mor gtug bya ba/ D. “The one index finger on the right hand/ Should touch the tip of the left one.”
backThis mudrā and the next (the “lute”) were mentioned in the enumerative list above in the reverse order.
backlag gnyis de bzhin byas nas ni/ /g.yas pa’i sor mos khu tshur bya/ /lag pa g.yon la yod pa yi/ /sor mo kun ni mnyam bsgreng ste/ /sor mo’i rtse mos khu tshur bcing / D. The Tibetan renders the material in #UT22084-088-038-12788 in five lines and diverges from the reading in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “Take both hands as before and / Make a fist with the fingers on the right hand. / Extend the fingers on the left hand / So that they are level, / And then embrace the fist with the fingertips.”
backg.yas dang g.yon pa ldan pa yi/ /sor mo rnams ni sbyar byas nas/ /mthe’u chung gnyis ni brkyang byas pa/ pi bang phyag rgyar nye bar bstan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Clasp the fingers of the / Right and left hands together / And extend the two little fingers. / That is called the lute mudrā.”
backlag gnyis de bzhin byas nas ni/ /sor mo cung zad kha bye yang / /mthe bo gnyis kyi bar du ni/ /mdzub mo gnyis ni brten par bya/ /’di ni pad mtsho’i phyag rgya ste/ /rdzogs sangs rgyas kyis ’gro la gsungs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Take both hands as before, / Open the fingers slightly, / And rest the index fingers / In the middle of the two thumbs. / This is the lotus lake mudrā / That the perfect buddhas taught to beings.”
backrtag tu mthe bo gnyis brkyang ba/ /ut+pa la yi phyag rgya zhes/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When the two thumbs are extended / It is called the utpala mudrā.” The translation of the Skt. kuvalayodbhava or “birthplace of water lilies,” however, is corroborated by the enumerative list above.
backThis mudrā and the next mudrā, the “hollow space,” appeared in the enumerative list near the beginning of this chapter in the reverse order.
backcung zad mthe bo rtsar bzhag ste/ /mtheb rtsar phan tshun legs gnon pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Lower the thumbs slightly / So that each presses down on the base of the other thumb.”
backgang dag mtshon cha las byung rnams/ /phyag rgya ’di dag gsungs pa yin/ /me tog gdan dang bzhon pa dang / /gzhan yang gdon ni ’jigs byed pa/ /thams cad las kun byed ldan pa/ /skyob pa’i sngags kun thams cad yin/ D. The Tibetan diverges significantly from the Skt. here and translates as, “All of the mudrās that have been described here / That manifest as weapons, / Flowers, seats, and vehicles, / And the others that frighten evil spirits / Can all carry out any activity / And can all be combined with any protector’s mantra.” The Tibetan term bzhon pa that translates as, “vehicles,” reflects the Sanskrit *vāhya instead of the extant Skt. vādya. The Tibetan term gdon ni ’jigs byed pa that translates as, “that frighten evil spirits,” reflects the Sanskrit *grahabhayakā instead of the extant Skt. grahanāmakā.
backThe last pāda is omitted in the Tib.
backVerses 35.248–35.251 are supplied from the Tibetan, as they are missing from the Skt. version.
backgtor ma spyi yi phyag rgya ru/ D. This mudrā is not included in the enumerative list of mudrās above.
backji ltar cho ga bzhin du ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Following the proper ritual procedure,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vidhinā instead of the extant Skt. vividhaiḥ.
backg.yas g.yon dag ni bsnol bar bya/ Tib. The Tibetan includes another pāda after this one that translates as, “The right and left hands should be crossed.”
backlag g.yas khu tshur bcings nas ni/ /mthe bo dang ni gung mo gnyis/ /de nas rab tu sbyar bar bya/ /mar me’i phyag rgyar brjod pa yin/ D. This seems to be the mudrā used when offering light, i.e., the upward pointing thumb, pressing against the middle finger of the fist, is meant to resemble the flame of a lamp. The Tibetan translates as, “One should clench the right hand into a fist, / And then interlace / The thumbs and middle fingers. / This is called the lamp mudrā.”
backsrin lag dang ni mthe bo nyid/ /bgrang phreng dag tu yang dag gnas/ /rtag tu mthe’u chung rnam par brkyang / /de ’og gung mo’ang brkyang bar bya/ /mdzub mo bskums te bzhag pa la/ /bgrang phreng gi ni phyag rgyar brjod/ D. This mudrā seems to be absent from the enumerative list above. The Tibetan translates as, “Position the thumb and ring finger / On a bead rosary. / The little finger should always be extended, / The middle finger should be extended below it, / And the index finger should be curled in and put in position. / That is known as the bead rosary mudrā.” It is not clear why the Tibetan phrase bgrang phreng dag tu, translated here as “On a bead rosary,” uses the dual/plural particle dag.
backmyur du grub pa’i mchog rab ster. Tib. The Tibetan seems to interpret the Skt. siddhivaraprada (“accomplishment [consisting in] fulfilling the wishes”) as “supreme accomplishment.”
backme ni yongs su spyan drang ba’i/ /phyag rgyar ’di no bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This was taught as the mudrā / That summons fire.”
backmdzub mo yi ni rtse mo dang / /mthe bo gcig tu sbyar bya ba/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “When the tips of the index fingers / And the thumbs are joined as one.”
backIt is unclear how one does this “in reverse.”
backmchod par bya Tib. In place of “use,” the Tibetan translates as, “perform the offering,” reflecting the Sanskrit *pūjayet in place of the extant Skt. yojayet.
backmchod yon phyag rgya byas pas ni/ /mchod pa bzang po byas par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one uses this mudrā during the welcome offering / One will perform the best offering.”
backThe order is a bit confusing, but this seems to be the mudrā described above, starting in verse #UT22084-088-038-5013 and listed in the enumerative list near the beginning of this chapter as the 100th.
backgnas dang mal dang bzhon pa dang / Tib. After “lying down,” the Tibetan inserts “riding.”
backThis verse is not very clear; the Tib. offers little help.
backphyag rgya rnams kyi nges byung ba/ /yongs rdzogs brgyar ni gsungs pa yin/ D. The translation of this pāda is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “From among the mudrās, / This is said to be the full set of one hundred.”
backde dag nyid las mdzub mo dang / /gung mo gnyis ni sbyar bar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Join both index fingers and / Middle fingers from both hands.”
backmthe bo gnyis kyi sen mo ni/ /gsum pa’i tshigs char sbyar bar bya/ /cung zad nang du bkug nas ni/ /rab tu sbyar ba dag tu bya/ D. It is unclear what the shape of this mudrā is. It could be the same as the “cakravartin mudra” in Bunce 2005, figure 101. The description in the Tib. departs from the Skt. quite a lot and translates as, “The nails of the two thumbs / Should touch the third section of the joint. / They should bend slightly inward / And should be joined together.”
backThe name Cakravartin was derived after emending the Skt. reading śakriṇasya to cakriṇasya (the latter probably being a metri causa for cakravartiṇaḥ), as Śakrin doesn’t make sense in the context or on its own.
back’di nyid las ni mdzib mo dgug /gung mo dag ni mnyam par sbyar/ /srin lag gnyis kyi sen mo ni/ /sbyar ba’i rnam par dgod par bya/ It is unclear what the shape of this mudrā is. It could be similar to the “ushnisha mudra” in Bunce 2005, figure 615. The Tibetan seems to be mistranslating the Skt. and translates as, “After this, if one draws the index finger in / Joins the two middle fingers together, / And arranges fingernails of the ring fingers / So that they are touching each other.”
backgung mo’i sor mo bcings byas pa/ D. It is unclear how the middle fingers are entwined (possibly hooked up at the tips). The Tibetan translates as, “With the middle fingers clenched.”
backgung mo mnyam par byas nas ni/ /sor mo gnyis ni yang dag sbyar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Align the middle fingers / And join both fingers together.”
backThe name “great mudrā” (mahāmudrā) seems somewhat dubious, as this epithet is used elsewhere in this list to denote a category of mudrās rather than a particular mudrā. It is unclear whether it is this mudrā or the one described next—probably the next—that corresponds to the “root mudrā” (mūlamudrā) in the enumerative list above.
backThe Skt. of this part is corrupt beyond recognition. The Tib. is of no help. The text is possibly saying that the tip of each index finger is placed above or below the third joint of the opposite index finger.
backde nyid las ni mdzub mo yi/ /tshigs ni skam kha lta bur bya/ /de nas gung mo sbyar te dgod/ /lag pa’i ’og gi char sbyar nas/. The Tibetan translates as, “After that, the joints of the index fingers / Are arranged to look like a goat’s hoof. / Then, one should interlace the middle fingers / And place them under the hands.”
backmthe bo’i sen mos Y, N, C; mthe bo’i sor mos D.
backThis mudrā was called the “root” in the original list above. It is difficult to figure out its exact shape.
backDepending on whether the Skt. nāmitaḥ is compounded with the preceding sūcyagrā or not, the Skt. could be saying either “bent” or “straight.”
back#UT22084-088-038-12835 and 35.280 om. Tib.
backThe mudrā described in the list above as one that “constitutes the treasury of the Dharma” (at #UT22084-088-038-4636) was the “Dharma mudrā.” It would be fair to guess that this is the same mudrā.
backlag sor brgyad ni rab tu brkyang / Tib. In place of the extant Skt. °āvṛtāḥ (“surrounding/forming an enclosure”), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *āsṛtāḥ (“extended”).
backphyag rgya ma lus rab tu sgrub/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As it accomplishes all the mudrās.”
backsor mo gsum gnyis bsgreng nas ni/ /me tog kha bye’i rnam par bya/ D. The description of this mudrā is far from clear. The last two pādas of the Tibetan translate as, “With the two or three fingers raised up, / Forming the shape of a blooming flower.”
backIn place of “abode of the Thirty[-Three],” the Tib. translates as, “abode of the triple world.” The name and the description of this (the 108th) mudrā is different from the corresponding mudrā in the enumerative list above, which was called the “boon-granting.”
backphyag rgya ’di ni phyag rgya che/ /las kun byed kyi phyag rgya brgyad/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “These are the great mudrās, / The eight mudrās that can perform all rites.” In place of “peaceful” (śama), the Tibetan translates as, “all,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sarva.
back#UT22084-088-038-12851om. Tib.
backsangs rgyas rdzu ’phrul che kun gyi/ /phyag rgya ’di ni bzhed cing gsungs/ D. The reading mudrāśatam (“one hundred mudrās”) has been emended from mudrāmatam, which appears to be a corruption. The Tibetan reflects the reading before the emendation.
backde la myur du zhus pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And asked him promptly.”
backbcom ldan ’jig rten ’das pa na/ /sngags kyi mdzod ’di sa steng du/ /bdag nyid chen po’i sems can la/ /de tshe ji ltar ’byung bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translation reproduces the Sanskrit (with one exception), but when it is read according to the rules of Tibetan grammar it translates as “When the blessed one has left this world / How is it that, at that time, / The mantra basket will appear on this earth / For the great beings?” The notable variant in the Tibetan is the phrase bdag nyid chen po’i sems can la, which appears to be a variant for the extant Skt. sattvānām gatimāhātmyam.
backgzugs brnyan mchod rten dag kyang bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Images and stūpas.”
backThe Skt. seems to be contradictory here, as it is saying that it is the “best among two-legged beings” himself who should make an image of the Teacher, i.e., of himself.
backblo ldan de nas cang mi smra/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The sagacious one did not say a word.”
backchos kyi ’khor lo skor byed pa’i/ /sangs rgyas ’dus par sangs rgyas kyi/ /gtsang ba’i gnas kyi steng gnas nas/ /’di dag sangs rgyas snga mas gsungs/ /de tshe chos kyi ’khor lo bskor/ /yun ring dus su ’das pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The Buddha and the gathering of buddhas / Who turn the wheel of the Dharma / Remained above the realm of the Pure Abode / And turned the wheel of Dharma then, / Teaching these mudrās that the previous buddhas had taught. / They will be passed along for a long time.”
backnyi shu rtsa dgu pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 29.
backkhyod kyi phyag rgya D. “Root” is omitted in the Tibetan.
backdang por re zhig thal mo rab tu brkyang la mdzub mo dang the’u chung gnyis rtse sprad de tshigs bar ma btud nas so so so sor rjes su bcug pa yin te/ D. The translation proposed here is far from certain. The Tibetan translates as, “First, extend the palms of the hands and touch the tips of both index and little fingers so that they bend at the middle joints and all four touch each other.”
backmthe’u chung gnyis kyi ri mo gong ma la mthe bo’i rtse mo bzhag pa ste/ Tib. Again, the shape of this mudrā is far from clear. In place of “the small fingers positioned along an upward line toward the tips of the thumbs,” the Tibetan translates as, “the tips of thumbs are placed on the upper line of the small fingers.”
backbsnol ba D. In place of “touch,” the Tibetan translates as, “are crossed.”
backmche ba’i phyag rgya’i ’gram du Tib. The Tibetan includes an additional phrase that translates as, “on either side of the fangs mudrā.”
backmthe bo gnyis gung mo’i nang du chung bar byas pa D. In place of “in the space in between,” the Tibetan translates as, “in the space between the middle fingers.”
backthal mo’i tshigs rnams brkyang ba byas la srin lag dang / mdzub mo gnyis kyi rtse mo gung mo’i nang du rtse sprad de bzhag pa D. The description in the Tibetan text is very similar and translates as, “One should place the touching tips of the ring and index fingers inside the middle fingers while extending the hands in the añjali gesture.”
back’di ni ’jam dpal mngon sum kyod nyid kyi rtsa ba’i sngags su bstan pa yin no/ Tib. In the Tibetan text, the final part of this sentence translates as, “this, Mañjuśrī, is the mudrā that displays your root mantra before one’s very eyes.”
backkhyod kyi phyag rgya ’gyur ro/ Tib. “Eye” is omitted in the Tibetan.
backgung mo’i phyi rol tu mdzub mo’i rtse mo yongs su bkug pa la/ Tib. As for the position of the index and middle fingers, the Tib. translates as, “the tips of the index fingers should be drawn in on the outside the middle fingers.”
backThe text doesn’t specify what it is that is “curled”—possibly the right thumb or the right hand.
backThe part from “and then extend them” in the previous paragraph up to this point is missing from the Tib.
backIt is unclear what is meant by “releasing” the grahas, but as they are astrological entities personified, the mudrā possibly “releases” them from their position of influence.
backThe Skt. of this paragraph is very unclear. The phrase nimbarakodyāni is unintelligible. It resembles nimbarakodyānāni (“nimbaraka gardens”), but that reading is not reflected in the Tibetan. It also resembles the compound nimbarajakoṭyaḥ (“myriads of koṭis”), which seems to be reflected in the Tibetan.
backgang du gtams pa phrag bye ba sum cu rtsa gsum mam brgyad cu’am dgu bcu rtsa lnga’am khri phrag drug cu’i grangs la sogs pa ’jig rten las ’das pa’i yang ’das pas phyag rgya bcings so/ D. It is not clear how these numbers relate to one another, and what groups or classes of bodhisattvas or advanced beings they refer to. The Tibetan translates as, “They employ the mudrās that transcend the myriads of worlds, such as three hundred thirty million, eight hundred million, nine hundred fifty million, or six hundred thousand supramundane worlds.”
backsum cu pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 30.
backsems can thams cad kyi lam du gyur pa yin no/ D. The Tibetan includes an additional line here that translates as, “It has become the path of all beings.” The Tibetan and Skt. diverge at this point (#UT22084-088-038-12908, D. 276.b.1). The following is a list of the correspondences in material between the Tibetan and Skt. texts following the folio enumeration in the Rockwell Degé Kangyur:
back
D. 276.b.1–277.a.2 = Skt. 37.10–37.16.
D. 277.a.2–277.a.7 = Skt. 37.2.2–37.4.3 (Skt. 37.4.4–37.5.2 om. Tib.).
D. 277.a.7–277.b.2 = Skt. 37.5.3.4–37.9 (Skt. 37.8 om. Tib.).
The Tibetan text then begins to align again with the Skt. at D. 277.b.2, which corresponds to the material in #UT22084-088-038-12933.dang po re zhig gtsug tor gyi mtshan nyid du gyur pa ni/ lag pa gnyis mnyam por bkan cing brkyang bar bya’o/ /mthe bo dang srin lag gnyis lag pa’i dkyil du sen mos bzung zhing mthe bo’i rtse mo sbyar bar bya’o/ /mthe’u chung gnyis kyi rtse mo gtug cing sbyar bar bya’o/ /de bzhin du gung mo gnyis kyi sen mo dang rtse mo gnyis sbyar bar bya zhing mdzub mo dang mdzub mo yang sbyar bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “First, there is the sign of uṣṇīṣa. Both hands should point upwards and be stretched out so that they are parallel. The fingernails of the thumbs and the ring fingers should be placed between the hands, and the tips of the thumbs should touch each other. The tips of the small fingers should be touching and joined together. In the same way, the fingernails and the tips of the middle fingers should be joined, and the index fingers should be interlaced.”
back“Great” is missing from the Tib.
backmdzub mo de nyid yang dag par bkug ste/ Tib. In place of “brings … together,” the Tibetan translates as “bends,” which probably means the same thing in terms of the position of the fingers.
backsel ba Tib. In place of “incinerating,” the Tibetan translates as, “clearing away/dispelling.”
backAt this point, the Tib. jumps to “Vajrānanī! Hūṁ phaṭ!” at the end of the next paragraph, omitting everything in between, possibly because the corrupt Skt. of the omitted part made it impossible to translate.
backSkt.: oṁ dhuna pātaya chinda cakre vajriṇi hūṁ.
backThe Skt. of the two phrases omitted here is too corrupt to be even guess-translated (the Tibetan translators left this part out of their translation too). This mudrā seems to be a variation of the preceding one; one just changes the position of the index fingers in a certain way.
backThe translation here of the name of this mudrā is unreliable because of the corrupt Skt.
backoM badz+rA sha ni hUM phaT D. In place of Vajrānanī (Vajra Faced), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Vajrāśanī (Vajra Devourer). “Vajrāśanī” could also be a variant spelling of “Vajrāsanī” (Vajra Seat).
backSkt.: oṁ vajrānani hūṁ phaṭ.
back’di ni skyi krung gi phyag rgya ste/ D. The Tibetan inserts a line before this verse that translates as, “The following is the cross-legged mudrā.” The Tibetan also renders the material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-12917 entirely in prose.
backThe number F.277.b comes before F.277.a because the sections of text are shifted around in the Tib., as indicated in #UT22084-088-038-5133.
backskyil krung gi phyag rgya dam pa D. The Tibetan translates as, “This supreme cross-legged mudrā,” possibly interpreting the Skt. paryam as a metri causa for paryaṅkam.
backThis entire verse is missing from the Tibetan translation. The description of the mudrā is unclear, but the text is either describing the mudrā called tathāgatī (a female tathāgata), or the feminine ending is used to correspond with the gender of the Skt. muṣṭi (“fist”). The former interpretation is made more plausible by the fact that the mudrā mentioned next is the “fist mudrā of the (male) tathāgata.”
backSkt.: oṁ vijaye haḥ.
back’og ma gnyis kyang rtse mo mnyam par gshibs na khu tshur gyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ro/ D. The section of this line starting from “[where] the two hands…” has been conjecturally reconstructed from the Tibetan, but remains unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Also the two [hands] below should be evenly aligned, forming the fist mudrā.” The word “fist,” rather than referring to the fist mudrā, probably indicates that this is the same “fist” that is formed in the tathāgatī mudrā described above.
backsngags kyang ’di dag gang yang rung ba dang phyag rgya lag pa gnyis kyis bcings te sgrub pa’i dus su sam sngon du bsnyen pa’i dus su ’dug pa’am langs te/ lan cig gam ji srid ’dod kyi bar du bzlas par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Use any mantra, forming the mudrā with both hands. During formal or preliminary practice, seated or standing, one should recite the mantra once or as many times as one likes.”
backUdgatoṣṇīṣa (Raised Uṣṇīṣa) is probably the same as Abhyudgatoṣṇīṣa, i.e., one of the uṣṇīṣa kings #UT22084-088-038-135.
backSkt.: oṁ jvalojjvala dīptodgatoṣṇīṣa dhuna dhuna hūṁ.
backmdzub mo gnyis kyi rtse mo dang gung mo gnyis kyi rtse mo dag yongs su sbyar ba ni gtsug tor ’phags pa zhes bya ba’i phyag rgya te/ ’dir sngags ni/ oM dzwA la dzwA la dIp+tod gatoSh+NI Sha dU ra dU ra hUM haM/ D. The Tibetan, which reflects the material on D 276.b.1, translates as, “When the tips of the index fingers touch the tips of the middle fingers, this mudrā is known as the Raised Uṣṇīṣa. Its mantra is: “oṁ jvāla jvāla dīptodgatoṣṇīṣa dūra dūra hūṁ haṃ.”
backsrin lag de nyid bkug pa dang gung mo sbyar ba de gnyis kyi sor mo’i rtse mo’i sen mo gshibs la/ rna cha gdub kor zlum po ltar bya ba ni gtsug tor gdugs dkar po’i phyag rgya yin te/ ’dir yang sngags su ’gyur ba ni/ oM ma ma ma ma hUM ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The ring fingers should be bent and the middle fingers joined together, with the fingernails aligned. They should form the shape of a circle, like a bracelet. Such a mudrā is known as the White Umbrella Uṣṇīṣa. Its mantra is: “oṁ ma ma ma ma hum.”
backSkt.: oṁ tathāgatoṣṇīṣa • anavalokitamūrdhni tejorāśi hūṁ jvala jvala eka eka dara vidara cchinda bhinda hūṁ hūṁ sphaṭ sphaṭ svāhā.
backmdzub mo de nyid phan tshun mnyam par sbyar la gung mo gnyis sbyar ba ni gzi brjid phung po’i phyag rgya’o/ /’dir sngags ni/ oM ta thA ga toSh+NI ShA ba lo ki te/ mUrt+ti te dzo rA shi hUM dzwA la dzwA la/ d+ha ka d+ha ka /da ra bi da ra/ ts+tshin+da ts+tshin+da/ hUM hUM phaT phaT swA hA/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, interlace the index fingers and join them with the middle fingers. This forms the mudrā of Majestic Heap (Tejorāśi). Its mantra is oṁ tathāgatoṣṇīṣāvalokite mūrtti tejorāśi hūṁ jvāla jvāla dhaka dhaka dara vidara cchinda cchinda hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā.”
backSkt.: oṁ jayoṣṇīṣa jvala jvala bandha bandha dama dama ṅraṁ ṅraṁ ṅraṁ haḥ hana hūṁ.
backmdzub mo de nyid yang dag par sbyar ba dkyil ’khor lta bur bya ba ni rgyal ba’i gtsug tor gyi phyag rgya’o/ /’dir sngags su ’gyur ba ni/ oM dza ya dza yo Sh+NI Sha dzwA la dzwA la ban+d+ha ban+d+ha da ma da ma/ hUM hUM hUM ho ha na hUM/ rgyal ba’i gtsug tor gyi sngags so/ D. The description of this mudrā, like most of the others, is vague and unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “One should join the index fingers, forming the shape of a circle. This mudrā is known as the Victor’s Uṣṇīṣa (Jayoṣṇīṣa). The mantra that accompanies it is oṁ jayajayoṣṇīṣa jvāla jvāla bandha bandha dama dama hūṁ hūṁ hūṁ ho hana hūṁ. That is the mantra of the Victor’s Uṣṇīṣa (Jayoṣṇīṣa).”
back“Above the nail” possibly means the back of the nail.
backFrom this point on, the mantra seems to be addressing a female deity. The name or epithet Proṅkhinī (“one who moves forward”?) could be corrupt.
backSkt.: oṁ namo • apratihatatathāgatoṣṇīṣāya • anavalokitamūrdhni cakravarti hūṁ jvala jvala dhaka dhaka dhuna dhuna vidhuna trāsaya mārayotsādaya hana hana aṁ aṁ aḥ aḥ kaḥ kaḥ proṃkhini proṃkhini kuṇḍalini • aparājitāstradhāriṇi hūṁ phaṭ.
backmdzub mo de gnyis kyi rtse mo btud pa byas pa gung mo sbyar ba la/ mdzub mo’i sen mo gung mo’i tshigs gsum pa’i char sbyar ba ni ’khor los sgyur ba’i phyag rgya’o/ /oM na mo a pra ti ha ta ta thA ga toSh+NI ShA ya/ a na ba lo ki te mUrd+ha na tsa kra barti hUM dzwA la dzwA la/ d+ha ka d+ha ka/ d+hu na d+hu na/ bi d+hu na trA sa ya mA ra yo ta sA d+ha ya/ ha na ha na/ AM AM A/ ka ka /dro khi Ni dro khi Ni/ kuN+Da li ni/ a pa rA dzi tA tra pa ri Ni hUM phaT/ ’khor los sgyur ba’i sngags so/ D. The description of the mudrā is, again, unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “One should fold in the two tips of the index fingers and join them with the middle fingers. Then, place the fingernails of the index fingers at the third [segment] joint of the middle fingers. This becomes the Cakravartin mudrā. Its mantra is oṁ namo apratihatatathāgatoṣṇīṣāya anavalokite murdhanacakravarti hūṁ jvāla jvāla dhaka dhaka dhuna dhuna vidhuna trāsaya mārayotsādhaya hana hana āṁ āṁ ā kaka drokhiṇi drokhiṇi kuṇḍalini aparājitā trapariṇi hūṁ phaṭ.”
backmdzub mo de nyid kyi rtse mo mdud pa byas la/ gung mo sbyar ba byas pa la mdzub mo sen mo’i ’og gi gsum pa’i cha la sbyar ba ni sngags kyi bdag po ’khor los sgyur ba’i phyag rgya’o/ /mdzub mo de nyid kyi rtse mo yang dag par bkug pa gung mor sbyar ba’i ’og tu yang dag par bcar ba ni sngags kyi bdag po’i phyag rgya’o/ D. The Skt. is very likely corrupt, as the two descriptions in this paragraph seem to be of the same mudrā. The Tibetan translates as, “One should tie together the tips of the index fingers and then join the third segment below the fingernails of the index fingers with the middle fingers. This forms the mudrā of the mantra lord Cakravartin. One should bend the tips of the index fingers and press them below the joined middle fingers. This forms the mudrā of the mantra lord.”
backThe number F.277.a comes after F.277.b because the sections of text are shifted around in the Tibetan, as indicated in #UT22084-088-038-5133 above.
backmdzub mo de nyid kyi rtse mo yang dag par bkug la gung mo sbyar ba’i sen mo dang tshigs nand du yang dag par sbyar ba ni ’khor los sgyur ba chen po’i phyag rgya’o/ /mdzub mo de nyid kyi rtse mo gnyis yang dag par bkug la gung mo sbyar zhing ’og tu yang dag par sbyar te/ gdub kor ltar byas pa ni ’khor los sgyur ba chen po’i phyag rgya’o/ /mdzub mo de nyid kyi rtse mo yang dag par bkug la gung mo’i tshigs gsum pa’i nang du yang dag par sbyar ba ni sngags kyi bdag po ’khor los sgyur ba chen po’i phyag rgya ste/. The Tibetan translates as, “When one bends the tips of the index fingers and joins the inner joint to the fingernails of the joined middle fingers, this forms the Mahācakravartin mudrā. When one bends the tips of the index fingers and places them below the middle fingers, forming the shape of a bracelet, this mudrā is [also] known as Mahācakravartin. When one bends the tips of the index fingers and places them inside the third [segment] of the joint of the middle fingers, this is the mudrā of the mantra lord, Mahācakravartin.”
backThe Tibetan describes this mudrā as follows: “The tips of the index fingers should be joined to form a circle and then joined below the third part of the middle fingers’ joints while the two middle fingers are also touching each other.”
backIn the Tibetan the name Aparājitoṣṇīṣa (which occurs again in paragraph #UT22084-088-038-5233 below) is treated not as a proper name, but rather as a description of a deity, “invincible uṣṇīṣa emperor.”
backThe Skt. aparājitā has been emended to aparājita, as the contents of this paragraph indicate that the deity addressed in this mantra is male.
backSkt.: oṁ aparājita dhik.
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya | ehi ehi bhagavan dharmarāja | pratīccheyam arghyaṃ gandhaṃ puṣpaṃ dhūpaṃ balyaṃ dīpaṃ ca | māṃ cābhirakṣa | apratihatabalaparākramāya svāhā ||.
backde la ’di nyid kyi phyag rgya sngags kyis phyogs dang phyogs mtshams dang steng ’og bcing bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, bind the cardinal and ordinal directions as well as the zenith and nadir using this same mudrā and mantra.”
backsmad pa byas la/ Tib. In place of “bend,” the Tibetan translates as, “lower.”
backmchod yon phul na rang gi lha gshegs su gsol bar ’gyur ro/ /phyag rgya g.yon phyogs su bskor na phyogs bcings pa las grol bar ’gyur ro/ Y, K; Following Y and K, the last two sentences translate as, “Perform the welcome offering and then dismiss the tutelary deity. Rotate the mudrā from the right to the left and release the binding of the directions.” The Tibetan las grol bar ’gyur or “release” corresponds to the extant Skt. muktā bhavanti but reflects the reading of mukta + ablative, which translates literally as “release from.”
backSvāhā occurs neither in the Sanskrit nor in the Tibetan texts; however, it seems justified to conjecture it, because of the dative case of the preceding balaparākramāya.
backSkt.: namo 'pratihatoṣṇīṣāya gaccha gaccha bhagavan dharmarāja pratīccha mayārghyaṃ gandhaṃ puṣpaṃ dhūpaṃ māṃ ca rakṣa | apratihatabalaparākramāya svāhā ||.
backmdzub mo de nyid gung mo’i tshigs gsum pa’i ’og tu bzhag ste/ gung mo yang dag par sbyar la mthe bo gnyis dang mthe’u chung gnyis phan tshun mnan cing kha tshur du bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Place the index finger below the third joint of the middle finger, join the middle fingers, and squeeze the two thumbs and little fingers together, forming a fist.” The statement “The middle fingers should form a ‘needle’ ” is omitted in the Tibetan.
backAt this point, the Tib. jumps to the second part of the mantra of Vikaraṇoṣṇīṣa in the next paragraph (starting from vikaraṇa), with everything in between omitted.
backThe uṣṇīṣa mudrās described in this section seem to barely differ from one another.
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya vikaraṇa dhuna dhuna hūṁ. In the Tibetan, the second part of this mantra has been rendered as bi ki ri Ni/ bi ki ri Ni/ d+hu na d+hu na d+hu/ rnam par ’jig par byed pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Vikiriṇi Vikiriṇi shake them shake them dhu, O Destroyer!”
back“Are moved in a pulling motion” (calitākṛṣṭau) om. Tib.
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya ehy ehi tejomāline • agnaye svāhā.
backcung zad bkug par bya zhing Tib. The Tibetan translates ākuñcita (“contracted,” “folded in”) as “slightly folded.”
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya • imaṃ gandhaṃ puṣpaṃ dhūpaṃ baliṃ dīpaṃ ca pratīccha hara hara sarvabuddhādhiṣṭhite dharmarājāpratihatāya svāhā.
backThe last part of this sentence, starting from “it should be used to restrain them,” is omitted in the Tib.
back“Mantra” om. Tib.
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya sarvavighnavidhvaṃsanakarāya troṭaya svāhā.
backsrin lag gnyis kyi rtsa bar mthe bong gnyis gtugs te/ de bzhin du gdub kor ltar bya zhing mdzub mo gnyis kyis nang stong pa’i rnam par bya’o/ N, H. The Tibetan translates as, “Touch the two thumbs to the base of the two ring fingers so that it looks like a bracelet and make a hollow shape with the two index fingers.”
backSkt.: namo bhagavate apratihatoṣṇīṣāya sarvatrāparājitāya samaye śānte dānte dharmarājabhāṣite mahāvidye sarvārthasādhani svāhā.
backmthe bo gnyis kyi rtse mos srin lag gnyis kyi gsum pa’i tshigs la mnan la/ de bzhin du mdzub mo gnyis kyi rtse mo yang rdo rje’i rtse mo dang ’dra bar bya’o/ /’di ni dam tshig thogs pa med pa’i bde byed kyi spyi gtsug gi phyag rgya ste/ dam tshig thams cad kyi thun mong ngo / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Press down on the third joint of the ring fingers with the tips of both thumbs and use the tips of the two index fingers to make the shape of the tip of a vajra. This is Samayoṣṇīṣa’s mudrā, and it is applicable to every type of samaya.”
backSkt.: oṁ śaṅkare samayaṃ svāhā.
backSkt.: namo bhagavate • apratihatoṣṇīṣāya | oṁ śaṅkare mahāsamayaṃ svāhā.
backdang po thub pa’i phyag rgya mchog / ’dir ni rab tu gsungs pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The Sage’s supreme mudrās / Were the first that were taught in this manual.”
backrdzu ’phrul chen po sha za mo/ Tib. In place of “piśācas and piśācīs,” the Tibetan translates as, “powerful piśācīs.”
back“Powerful” om. Tib.
backlha dang lha min bu mo dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “divine and not divine.”
back“The wives of daityas” om. Tib.
back“Nonhuman” om. Tib.
backskye bo thams cad dag gi ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “And all living beings.”
backlas dang ting ’dzin sna tshogs dang / Tib. In the Tibetan the compound nānākarmasamādhikā (“accomplishing various activities”) is translated as “accomplishing various activities and samādhis,” which is also possible.
backglang po Tib. In place of “Royal,” the Tibetan translates as, “Elephant.”
backThe family of the divine yakṣa (Vajrapāṇi) is the Vajra family.
backphyag rgya dri zas bstan pa dang / /bdun pa’i rigs kyis gsungs pa dang / /de bzhin brgyad pa’i phyag rgya ni/ /gnod sbyin rigs su yongs su bstan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There are mudrās that were taught by the gandharvas, / Those that were taught by the seventh family, / And the mudrās of the eighth family / That were taught for the yakṣa family.”
backphyag rgya thams cad yang dag bstan/ /gzhan yang bder gshegs bka’ dag gis/ /rgyud rnams dag ni so so dang / /’jig rten pa yi yang ’dir gzung / D. The meaning of pādas 3 and 4 is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The words of the Sugata taught / All of these mudrās and more. / All of the tantras, each and every one, / Even those of worldly beings, are contained in this manual.”
backlog ’dren dag gis gnod mi ’gyur/ Tib. In place of “will stay away” (literally, “will not follow” (nānuyānti)), the Tibetan translates as, “will not harm.”
backyang de nyid brkyang nas gung mo gnyis gdub kor ltar byas pa ’di ni byang chub sems dpa’ glang po’i spos kyi phyag rgya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, if one extends the two middle fingers and makes the shape of a bracelet, this is the bodhisattva Gajagandha’s mudrā.”
backlag pa gnyis po thams cad bsdus te/ khu tshur du byas pa ’di ni rin po che’i rigs kyi phyag rgya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one bends both hands, forming fists, it becomes the Jewel family mudrā.”
backmdzub mo gnyis kyi tshigs gnyis bkug nas sen mo gnyis phan tshun du sprad pa ’di ni gnod sbyin gyi rigs lngas rtsen la sogs pa’i gnod sbyin rdzu ’phrul chen po’i phyag rgya’o/ /lag pa gnyis snga ma bzhin du khu tshur bcing ba byas la mthe bo’i sen mo gnyis phan tshun sprad cing steng du bzhag la gong mo gnyi ga’i rtse mo rdo rje’i rtse mo dang ’dra bar byas pa ’di ni lha thams cad de lha’i rigs ’og min la sogs pa’i phyag rgya yin no/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Bend the second joint of the two index fingers and have the two ring fingers touch each other. This is the mudrā of the Yakṣa family, which includes powerful yakṣas such as Pañcika and the like. Make a fist as before with both hands with the little fingers touching each other and resting on top. Make the shape of the tip of a vajra with the tips of the two middle fingers. This is the Celestial family mudrā of all of the gods of Akaniṣṭha and the like.”
backkhu tshur bcang bar byas pa ’di dag ni ’phags pa’i gang zag brgyad kyi phyag rgya’o/ /rgyal ba’i sras thams cad kyi phyag rgya ni gcig tu brjod par bya ste/ D. In the Tibetan this and the next verses are in prose. This verse translates as, “These [mudrās] in which a fist is made are the mudrās of the eight noble persons. Now I will teach a single mudrā that can be used for all the sons of the victors.”
backcung zad rtse mo bskum par byas pa D. The Tibetan translates as, “And then the tips are slightly contracted.”
backspyan dang byams pa dang ’od kyi dra ba dang chos ston pa dang mdzod spu’i nor bu dang gnas pa dang phyag rgya bdun po ’di dag kyang rgyal ba’i sku nyid las skyed pa’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The eye, loving kindness, luminous aura, teaching the Dharma, the urṇa jewel, and stability are the seven mudrās that arise from the Victor’s own body.” The Tibetan is likely corrupt, given that there are only six items in this list of seven.
backthal mo sbyar ba byas nas gdub kor ltar byas pa ni nor bu rin po che’i phyag rgya’o/ /skyil mo krung gi g.yas g.yon brla’i nya’i phyogs su khu tshur rgyal mtshan du ’dzin pa ni ’khar gsil gyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ro/ lag pa thal mo sbyar la phan tshun du mngon par phyogs pa ni snam sbyar gyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ro/ /lag pa thal mo sbyar ba las bzed pa ltar byas pa ni lhung bzed kyi phyag rgya’o/ chos gos ni lag pa g.yon pas so/. The Tibetan translates as, “Place the palms together and cup them. This is the wish-fulfilling jewel mudrā. Sit with the right and left legs crossed holding a victory banner in one’s fist on one’s shoulder. This is the mendicant’s staff mudrā. Place the palms of the hands facing each other with a space in between. This is the monk’s shirt mudrā.”
backlag pa thal mo sbyar ba las bzed pa ltar byas pa ni/ lhung bzed kyi phyag rgya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Make the shape of a bowl out of the two hands with the palms together. This is the bowl mudrā.”
backThe Skt. of the last sentence seems corrupt in more than one way. It suggests that the hand displaying the gesture of fearlessness should be “bent down.” The reading abhayāvanataḥ should probably be emended to *abhayadānataḥ, which is reflected in the Tibetan mi ’jigs pa’i lag pa’o.
backthal mo sbyar ba las gung mo gnyis rdo rje’i rtse mo ltar byas la/ de’i rgyal tu mdzub mo gnyis cung zad bkug cing bzhag la/ mthe bo gnyis nang du bcug pa ’di ni sangs rgyas spyan gyi phyag rgya ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “With the palms joined together, the middle fingers forming the shape of a vajra tip, the index fingers placed slightly bent behind the [middle fingers], and the thumbs placed inside, this is the mudrā of the Buddha’s eye.” It is not clear whether “Buddha’s eye” is to be taken literally or as the name of Buddhalocanā, one of the female buddhas (the mudrā of Māmakī comes after the next mudrā).
back’di nyid kyi gung mo’i tshigs bkug la mdzub mo gnyis gcig tu byas pa D. The description of this mudrā is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “Bend this same joint of the middle finger and form the two index fingers into one.” The phrase “form … into one” is a different translation of the Skt. ekatas, which can mean “to one side,” “standing alone,” or “being one,” in addition meaning “all together.”
backThe mudrās that are referred to in this paragraph as “Buddha’s eye” and “Buddha’s loving kindness” are called in the list above (at #UT22084-088-038-5283), “vision” (dṛṣṭi) and “loving kindness” respectively.
backthal mo sbyar ba yangs par byas la mdzub mo dang srin lag gnyis bkug la rdo rje rtse gsum du byas pa ’di ni mA ma kI’i phyag rgyar ’gyur ro/ D. The description of this mudrā is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “Join the palms, bend both of the index fingers and the ring fingers, and make the shape of a three-pronged vajra. This is Māmakī’s mudrā.”
backthal mo sbyar ba byas nas mdzub mo gnyis gung mo gnyis kyi tshigs gsum pa la bkug nas bzhag la mthe bo gnyis so sor bskyed nas thal mo’i rnam par bya ba ’di ni longs spyod ldan pa zhes bya ba’i phyag rgya yin no/ D. The description of this mudrā is problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “Join the palms, bend the two index fingers and the two middle fingers at the third joint and let them rest, and expand each of the two thumbs to make the palms appear, this is the mudrā of Bhogavatī.”
backlag pa gnyis thal mo sbyar nas mdzub mo gnyis dang gung mo gnyis sbyar ba ni rnam par rgyal ba’i phyag rgya’i/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Join the palms of both hands and join the index and middle fingers. This is the Vijāya mudrā.”
backg.yas pa’i sor mo gsum rdo rje’i rtse mo ltar byas la rked pa’i phyogs su brten pa ’di ni gnas pa’i phyag rgya’o/. In the Tibetan the vajra formed with the three fingers is taken to be a new mudrā. The Tibetan translates as, “Form a three-pointed vajra with the three fingers of the right hand and rest it at the level of the waist. This is the seat mudrā.”
backThe “mudrā of the vidyārāja” is probably the mudrā of the vidyārāja One Syllable described in paragraph #UT22084-088-038-5329 below.
backIt is unclear which of the “eight great mudrās” are meant.
backde ltar bdag nyid kyi mgo bor rig pa’i rgyal po’i phyag rgya dang phyag rgya chen po brgyad bcings la las thams cad bya zhing dam tshig gzung pa’am dkyil ’khor bya ba dag la’ang me tog gtor bar bya’o/ yang na bstan pa’i cho ga ji lta ba bzhin du byas na ci ’dod pa’i las thams cad byed par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translation takes a different approach to organizing the last few sentences. The Tibetan translates as, “Similarly, if one forms the eight great mudrās and the mudrā of vidyārāja on one’s head one can accomplish any activity, and one can make a cast offering of flowers during the samaya or maṇḍala rites. Moreover, if one has followed the aforementioned procedure, one can perform any activity one desires.”
backsngags dang phyag rgya dang rig pa brjod pas ni dam tshig thams cad du ’gyur ro/ /legs par phyag rgya bcing na ni phyag rgya’i mthu ’byung bar ’gyur gyi/ D. The Tibetan is obscure, and may translate as, “Samayas are always based on expressing the mantra, mudrā, and vidyā. If one forms the mudrā correctly, the mudrā’s power will arise.”
backgang phyag rgya bab col du byas pa dang gnas ma yin par bcas pa des ni ’di’i dam tshig nyams par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Someone who forms a mudrā carelessly or in the wrong place will break this samaya.”
backThis probably refers to the mudrās of the vajra and the trident.
backgang rdo rje’i phyag rgya de nyid ni mdud rtse’i phyag rgya yin mod kyi/ rtse gsum dang rdo rje ni khyad par yod de/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Although the vajra mudrā is the spearpoint mudrā, there is a difference between the trident and the vajra.” The first clause in the Tibetan contains the scribal error mdud rtse, which should be corrected to mdung rtse.
back“As well as all humankind” om. Tib.
backThe Skt. word sura indicates that these are gods of the lower orders who engage in warfare with the asuras.
backmi thams cad la ni sor mo gcig gdeg par bya’o/ /mi ma yin pa thams cad dang rkang gnyis dang rkang bzhi dang rkang mang dang srid pa gsum la gnas pa’i sems can rnams kyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ba ni sor mo gnyis bsgreng ba’o/ /gnod sbyin dang gnod sbyin mo thams cad kyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ba ni gsum bsgreng ba’o/ /rig pa ’dzin pa dang rig pa ’dzin ma thams cad kyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ba ni sor mo bzhi bsgreng ba’o/ /lha dang lha ma yin thams cad kyi bu mo’i phyag rgyar ’gyur ba ni lag pa’i mthil mnyam por bzhag pa’o/. The Tibetan translates as, “For all human beings, one should raise a single finger. When two fingers are raised, this is the mudrā of all nonhuman beings who dwell in the threefold world—whether they have two legs, four legs, or many legs. When three fingers are raised, this is the mudrā of all the yakṣas and yakṣiṇīs. When four are raised, this is the mudrā of all the vidyādharas and vidyādharīs. When the palm of the hand is laid flat, this is the mudrā of the god and demigod maidens.” It is also possible to translate the last sentence in the Tibetan as, “When they [i.e. the four fingers] are placed on the flat palm of the hand, this is the mudrā of the god and asura maidens.”
backThe last sentence is omitted in the Tib.
backthal mo de nyid legs par byas pa las khu tshur bcing ba byas pa ni ’dod pa’i khams kyi dbang phyug la sogs pa ’dod pa’i khams na gnas pa thams cad kyi yin no/ /dmyal ba dang dud ’gro dang yi dags dang gzhin rje’i ’jig rten gyi sems can thams cad kyi phyag rgyar ’gyur ba ni de nyid las sor mo gcig yang dag par bsgreng ba’o/. The Tibetan translates as, “When the palms are positioned as before and made into fists, this is the for all who dwell in the desire realm such as the lords of the desire realm and the rest. The mudrā of all of the beings of the hell realms, animal realms, preta realms, and Yama’s realm is when a single finger is extended from that position.”
backsor mo gnyis bsgreng ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “two fingers.”
backgsum sgreng ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “three.”
backsor mo bzhi bsgreng ba’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “four.”
backGrouping the ḍākinīs with the flesh-eating spirits would be characteristic for tantras such as the MMK, which were written before the apotheosis of ḍākinīs as found in the higher tantras.
backlag sor bsdus pa’i phyag rgya ni dgug pa’o/ /lag sor brkyang ba ni slar gtang ba’i phyag rgya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The mudrā in which the fingers and hands are hooked is for attracting. When the hands and fingers are extended, this is the mudrā for dismissing.”
backIn the Tib., this verse is rendered in prose.
backIt is unclear which one-syllable mantra is meant—possibly bhrūṁ, the One Syllable introduced in chapters #UT22084-088-038-2165, #UT22084-088-038-3415, and in another chapter not included in our translation, but appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition.
back“Used for protection” om. Tib.
backgung mo gnyis phyir phyung la brkyang ste gcig tu rtse sprad la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The two middle fingers should come forth and extend so that the tips touch together.”
backsgrub pa pos nges par sngon du cho ga’i rgyal po ’dir gsungs pa’i sngags kyi mchog brgyad stong bzlas pa bya’o/ D. The grammar of this sentence is vague and the meaning unclear. The Tibetan interprets the grammar differently and translates as, “The practitioner should recite the supreme mantras that were previously taught in this king of manuals one thousand and eight times.”
backglang po’i rigs Tib. In place of “Royal family,” the Tibetan translates as, “Elephant family.”
backglang po’i spos Tib. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Gajagandha instead of the extant Skt. Rājagandha.
backThe “celestial” family is associated mainly with the Akaniṣṭha gods, and the “noble” with the noble śrāvakas.
backThe last sentence is omitted in the Tib.
backThe svasti (“benediction”) gesture is the mudrā of Brahmā.
backThe material from the beginning of the paragraph up to this point is omitted in the Tib.
backde bzhin du dri za dang lha dang lha ma yin dang bcas pa rnams la ni lag pa g.yon pa’i mthe bo nang du bcug pa byas pa’o/ grub pa bstan pa’i khu tshur du gnas pa’i rgya ni gzhon nu ma bzhi’i phyag rgya dang de nyid kyi sngags kyis so/ D. The Tibetan for the last two sentences translates as, “Likewise, for the gandharvas along with the gods, and the asuras, the thumb of the left hand is placed inside. The mudrā in which it is situated in the fist that exhibits attainment is the mudrā of the four virgins and should be performed with that mantra.” The meaning of the phrase “situated in the fist that exhibits attainment” (grub pa bstan pa’i khu tshur gnas pa) is not clear.
back“Mantras” om. Tib.
backde bzhin gshegs pa las byung ba’i phyag rgya chen po dang phyag rgya de’i yan lag tu gyur pa las byung ba D. The Tibetan translates as, “the great mudrā that arises from tathāgatas and those that arise as the auxiliaries of that mudrā.”
backThe name Mahāsthānaprāpta alternates in this text between Mahāsthānaprāpta and Mahāsthāmaprāpta.
backdri ma med par grags pa Tib. In place of “Vimalagati,” the Tibetan translates as, “Vimalakīrti.”
backThe Skt. name for a blue lotus (utpala) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the padma mudrā (padma is a pink lotus).
back“He will meet, face to face, all the mantra [deities]” om. Tib.
backsnying po dang phyag rgyar ’gyur ba de yang gang zhe na/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “What are these heart mantras and mudrās?”
backSkt.: āḥ vīra hūṁ khaṁ. a bI ra hUM khaM J; a ba bI ra hUM baM D.
backpad+ma kha bye ba ltar byas pa D. “The shape of a blooming lotus” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “the shape of a vajra.”
backSkt.: oṁ gaganasambhave dīptadīpta jvālaya jvālaya buddhādhiṣṭhite vikāsaya vikāsaya sarvabuddhān | hūṁ hūṁ vikāsini phaṭ phaṭ svāhā ||.
back’di ni pad+ma kha bye’i sngags te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “This blooming lotus mantra.”
backThe sentence starting with “Following the manner is omitted in the Tib.
backThe meaning is unclear, but “released” possibly means that the previously folded fingers should be extended.
backSkt.: oṁ godare vīra svāhā.
backlag pa de nyid khu tshur du bya ste sor mo rnams brkyang la sor mo’i rtse mo phan tshun sprad cing nang du syong pa ni gtsug tor gyi phyag rgya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If one makes fists and then extends the fingers where their tips touch each other and there is an empty space inside, this is the uṣṇīṣa mudrā.”
backSkt.: oṁ droṁ bandha svāhā.
backSkt.: oṁ dhuna ajitaraṇa hūṁ. It is unclear whether ajitaraṇa is the deity’s proper name (Ajitaraṇa) or should be translated as “one who is invincible (ajita) in battle (raṇa).”
backSkt.: oṁ rakṣa rakṣa sarvabuddhādhiṣṭhitātmacīvara svāhā.
back“Good fortune” om. Tib.
backmthe bo g.yas g.yon dang the’u chung gnyis phan tshun sprad pa byas la D. The Tibetan translates as, “If the thumbs of the right and left hands and both small fingers touch each other.”
backSkt.: oṁ lokapālādhiṣṭhita dhara dhāraya mahānubhāva buddhapātra svāhā.
backmdzub mo gnyis dang gung mo bkug pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “bending the two index fingers and the middle finger.” The Tibetan translates the Skt. madhya or “middle” as the “middle finger.”
backSkt.: oṁ tejo jvala sarvārthasādhaka sidhya sidhya cintāmaṇiratna hūṁ.
backlas thams cad byed cing dge ba yin no/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “will accomplish all activities and is auspicious.”
back“One will not be taken prisoner” om. Tib.
backpha tshun bsdus nas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “contracted.”
backmdzub mo’i rtse mo bkug pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the tips of the index fingers.”
backThe Skt. in this section is corrupt, but still, the description of this mudrā, just like several other mudrās in this section, differs from the same mudrā given in the corresponding section of another chapter not included in our translation, but appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition.
backSkt.: oṁ chinda bhinda hana daha dīptacakra hūṁ. This mantra, just like some other mantras in this section, differs slightly from the same mantra given in another chapter not included in our translation, but appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition.
backIt is not clear if one is sitting or standing, but it is more likely that the instructions refer to a seated position.
backrkang pa g.yon pa bteg la rkang pa g.yas pa sa la bzhag ste/ g.yon pa’i rkang pa’i bol gyis g.yas pa brkyang ba’i brla la bzhag la/ lag pa g.yas pas brdeg pa’i tshul du nga rgyal gyis brtan par byas pa D. The description of this mudrā is, again, problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “If the left foot is lifted up, the right knee touches the ground, the upper part of the left foot is placed on the outstretched right thigh, and the right hand is supported proudly in a manner of striking out.”
backCaṇḍāla and mātaṅga are names of “untouchable” social groups, both outside the caste system. Here, with their vocative feminine endings, they are used to address the goddess Aparājitā.
backSkt.: oṁ hulu hulu caṇḍāli mātaṅgi svāhā.
backThe Skt. seems corrupt at this point: the reading veṇyotsaṅge should perhaps be emended to vāmam utsaṅge or śroṇyutsaṅge.
backbrla’i steng du dkur brten la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “on the waist above the thigh.”
backSkt.: oṁ vijaye mahāśakti durdhari hūṁ phaṭ vijayini phaṭ maṅgale phaṭ.
back“Form the shape of a needle” om. Tib.
backSkt.: he he bandha bandha tiṣṭha tiṣṭha dhāraya dhāraya nirundha nirundha • ūrṇāmaṇi svāhā.
backmdzub mo gnyis phan tshun rtse sprad la/ tshigs bar ma bkug cing D. The Tibetan translates as, “the index fingers should touch at the tips and be bent at the middle joint.”
backmthe bo gnyis kyang bkug pa D. “The thumbs should also be bent” has been supplied from the Tibetan, as the Skt. is corrupt.
backSkt.: oṁ ru ru sphuru jvala tiṣṭha siddhalocane sarvārthasādhani svāhā.
back“Lose their anger” om. Tib.
backThe same mudrā is also described in #UT22084-088-038-4861 and in another chapter not included in our translation, but appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition.
backSkt.: namo bhagavati cārudarśane oṁ tha.
back“ ‘Assembly’ chapter” refers to the #UT22084-088-038-786 of the MMK.
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the utpala mudrā (utpala is a blue lotus).
backSkt.: oṁ jiḥ jiḥ jināṅgabhṛdbhayabhedine svāhā.
backIn this mantra, Pāṇḍaravāsinī is addressed by a series of epithets difficult to translate—these are kaṭā and its derivations. Kaṭā possibly suggests a woman with broad hips.
backThe Skt. name for a pink lotus (padma) has been kept here in order to distinguish this mudrā from the other “lotus” mudrā, the utpala mudrā (utpala is a blue lotus).
backde bzhin du sgrol ma dang khro gnyer can dang skul byed ma dang rta mgrin la’ang sbyar bar bya’o/ /rig pa ’dus pa’i le’ur gang gsungs pa’i pad+ma’i rigs grangs med pa thams cad kyang ’dir sbyar bar bya’o/ /phyag rgya dang sngags kyi cho ga rgya cher pad+ma dag kyang sbyar bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Similarly, one can use it for Tārā, Bhṛkuṭī, Candā, or Hayagrīva. One can use it for all of the countless vidyās of the Lotus family that were mentioned in the Assembly chapter (#UT22084-088-038-7862). The lotus mudrās can be used for a vast number of mantra and mudrā rites.”
backde bzhin du rdo rje’i rigs gnyis kyi rdo rje’i phyag rgya dang bcas pa yin no/ Y, J, K, C; de bzhin du rdo rje’i rigs kyi rdo rje’i phyag rgya dang bcas pa yin no/ D. Following Y, J, K, and C, the Tibetan translates as, “The same goes for the Vajra family along with the double vajra mudrā.” The Skt. reading of dhvaja (“banner”) has been emended to vajra to make it correspond with the Tibetan and agree with the second occurrence of “Vajra family” in the same paragraph.
backAt this point, the Tibetan jumps ahead to the mantra of Māmakī in the next paragraph.
backSkt.: oṁ kulandhari bandha bandha huṁ phaṭ.
backThe “introductory chapter” is the #UT22084-088-038-7862, the “Assembly” chapter.
back“Vajra holder’s (i.e., Vajrapāṇi’s) family” is the Vajra family.
backde bzhin du glang po’i rigs Tib. Here rājakule (“in the Royal family”) is read as gajakule (“in the Elephant family”) based on the Tibetan, as the mantra that follows is clearly associated with the Elephant family.
backSkt.: oṁ gajāhvaye hūṁ khacare svāhā.
backThe Tibetan translation reflects the name Mahāsthāmaprāpta, which is the other version of this name. Here, however, the name Mahāsthānaprāpta seems more appropriate because of the phrase mahāsthāne used in his mantra.
backSkt.: oṁ samāsama jinasuta mā vilamba hūṁ phaṭ.
backSkt.: tiṣṭha tiṣṭha mahāsthāne gatabodhaḥ samayam anusmara hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā.
backSkt.: oṁ vimale vimale vimala muhūrtaṃ dhaka dhaka samayam anusmara svāhā.
backnam mkha’ mdzod kyi sngags ni/ byang chub sems dpa’ thams cad kyi phyag rgya dang yang dag par ldan na las thams cad par ’gyur ro/ D. The translation of this sentence is supported by the Tibetan which translates as, “When the mantra of Gaganagañja is combined with the mudrās of any of the bodhisattvas, it can accomplish all activities.” The Skt., however, could also be interpreted as, “The mantra of Gaganagañja or any bodhisattva can accomplish all activities if employed with the [corresponding] mudrā.”
back’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa thams cad kyi shin tu rgya che ba dang bcas pa’i sngags dang phyag rgya thams cad kyi cho ga rgya che ba dang dam tshig chen po dang dam tshig la rab tu zhugs pa cho ga dang cho ga’i rnam pa thams cad kyi bye brag cho ga’i rgyal po ’dir gsungs te/ sngags thams cad kyang ’di la sgrub par byar rungs ba yin no/ D. The syntax and the meaning of this paragraph are unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “The detailed rites of all the mudrās and mantras pertaining to the all the extremely vast mundane and supramundane; the great samayas and those who have entered the samayas; and all the rites and their variants have been taught in this king of manuals. All of the mantras that are appropriate for accomplishing them are here as well.”
back“Mantra [deities]” om. Tib.
backThe Sanskrit uses the plural number for “families,” as the Tathāgata, Lotus, Vajra and Jewel families are all “tathāgata” families in the Kriyā parlance.
back“Mudrā” om. Tib.
back“Blessed Konākamuni” om. Tib.
backThe last sentence is omitted in the Tib.
backdad pa can gang zhig gis the tshom med par ’chang ba dang klog pa dang / the tshom med par rgyud ’di la brtson pa byed cing sngags sgrub pa dang zlos pa dang phyag rgya ’ching ba dang rtag tu mngon par brtson par byed pa de la ni mthong ba’i chos kho na la yon tan gyi phan yon brgyad rab tu ’thob ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Someone who is faithful and who bears it without any doubt, reads it, applies themselves to this tantra without any doubt, and accomplishes the mantra, recites it, forms the mudrā, and always applies themselves will attain the following eight advantages of having good qualities even in this life.”
backThe Tibetan translation reads this phrase as a part of the previous paragraph and treats the Skt. compound guṇānuśaṃsāṃ as a tatpuruṣa (yon tan gyi phan yon) instead of a dvandva compound. The reading of this line in the Tibetan translation has been rendered into English in the note above.
back’khrul pa med par ’gyur ba dang phyir rgol ba thams cad dang dgra’i ’jigs pa ’di la mi ’byung ba dang / ’di’i lus la dug mi ’byung ba dang / sangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpas kyang ’di la byin gyis brlabs par ’gyur ba dang tshe ring ba dang / bde ba la brten par ’gyur ba dang / ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa’ang ’di’i dge ba’i bshes gnyen du ’gyur ba dang mtshan mo’ang ’di la nyin re zhing rmi lam du mthong ba stsol ba dang sngags thams cad kyang ’di la bsrung bar ’gyur ro/ /phyag rgya’ang ’di la rmi lam du ston par ’gyur ro/ /rgyal po ma rungs pa dang sems can ma rungs pa dang mi phan pa ’dod pa rnams kyis kyang gnod pa med par ’gyur ro/ /nges par byang chub la gzhol bar ’gyur ro/ D. As is often the case with these types of lists, the way the individual items here have been separated is somewhat arbitrary. The Tibetan translation differs somewhat from the extant Skt. both in its content and in its organization of this list of eight qualities. The Tibetan translates as, “(1) They will be unphased and will not be afraid of hostile forces and enemies. (2) Their bodies will not be affected by poison. (3) They will be blessed by the buddhas and bodhisattvas and have long lifespans. (4) They will experience lasting happiness. (5) The divine youth Mañjuśrī will become their spiritual teacher and grant them visions in their dreams, whether it be day or night, and all of the mantra beings will protect them. (6) They will reveal the mudrā to them in a dream. (7) They will not be harmed by wicked kings, beings, and people who seek to impede them. (8) They will be destined for awakening.”
backLocanā probably refers to Tathāgatalocanā, the “eye of the tathāgatas” personified. Earlier on tathāgatalocanā was translated as the “[the mudrā of] the eye of the tathāgatas.” Here, however, as we speak of the deities from the retinue of the Tathāgata, it is more appropriate to use the proper name, Locanā, which is short for Tathāgatalocanā.
back“The intermediate area,” in contradistinction to the “inner area” (cf. #UT22084-088-038-714). This phrase is omitted in the Tib.
backba’i lci ba sa la ma lhung bar byugs la D. The Tibetan translates as, “cow dung that has not fallen to the ground.”
backgtsug tor gyi sngags kyis srung ba byas la/ D. It is not clear what the “uṣṇīṣa protection” is. The Tibetan translates as, “perform the protection rite using the uṣṇīṣa mantra.” If interpreted in more worldly terms, though, the Skt. phrase uṣṇīṣakṛtarakṣa could even mean “wearing a protective turban.”
backska rags dkar pos bcings pa D. The “uṣṇīṣa,” as above, probably refers to one of the uṣṇīṣa mantras (Cakravartin?). In the Tibetan translation, which is in prose, this half-stanza omits the first pāda altogether . The Tibetan for the second pāda translates as, “One should bind oneself with a white belt.”
backbram ze mo’i bu mo gtsang mas D. The Tibetan translates as, “a pure brahmin girl.”
back“Arrester” and “fulfiller” have a feminine ending in the Skt. as they here address a female deity.
backSkt.: oṁ hara hara bandha bandha śukradhāraṇi siddhārthe svāhā.
backThe arresting of semen referred to here is about stopping nocturnal emissions rather then the advanced tantric practice of experiencing orgasm without ejaculating.
backmthong ba tsam gyis gtsang ba’am mi gtsang ba’i cho gas las thams cad byed par ’gyur ro/ D. The last sentence is unclear. It is also unclear where the paragraph break falls. In the Tib., the last two sentences read, “One will accomplish any activity, whether by pure or impure procedure, by merely displaying it.”
backThis clause is omitted in the Tib.
back“Tathāgata” om. Tib.
back“The evil kings and the wicked beings” is omitted in the Tib.
backsum cu rtsa gcig pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 31.
backAs becomes clear later in this chapter, the association of the mudrā with whatever deity determines its position in the maṇḍala.
back’jam dpal mdor na nyon cig phyag rgya’i mtshan nyid dang sngags rnams kyi rgya che ba dang dkyil ’khor gyi cho ga’i mdor bsdus pa dang dam tshig la rjes su ’jug cing phyag rgya’i gnas dang sngags thams cad dang rgyud de dag thams cad la gsang ba dang bcas pa’i dkyil ’khor ni/. The syntax and clause divisions in this paragraph are difficult to ascertain in the Skt., which makes the translation proposed here unreliable. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, listen to this brief explanation. The following is a summary of the features of the mudrās, the extensive mantras, and the maṇḍala procedure, acting in accord with the samaya and the arrangement of the mudrās, all of the mantras, and the maṇḍala that contains what is concealed in all of the tantras.”
backsngags shes bdag nyid chen po dang / /yon tan kun kyang bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan syntax is obscure. One possible translation might be, “They also taught about great beings / Who are versed in mantra and all the good qualities.”
back’jam dpal blo ldan khyod la bstan/ Y, K; ’jam pa’i blo ldan khyod la bstan/ D. The translation of the last pāda is based on the assumption that the form śradhīḥ is a metrical adaptation of śraddhīḥ (“trusting/having faith [in you]”). Following Y and K, the Tibetan translates as, “I shall teach them to you, wise Mañjuśrī.” All of the Tibetan translations reflect the Sanskrit *sudhīḥ (blo ldan) instead of the extant Skt. śradhīḥ.
backsmra ba’i mchog gis yong su zhus/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “And the best of speakers addressed him.” The use of the “humilitive” verb of address yongs su zhu indicates that the all of the Tibetan translations read the title “best of speakers” as an epithet for Mañjuśrī. It is quite clear in the Skt., however, that “best of speakers” is the object of the verb and thus refers the Śākyamuni.
backAgain, there is a figure of speech here, as the Buddha, described here as having a sweet voice, is referred to with an epithet of “great lord” (brahmeśvara) which conjures up an association with Brahmā, famed for his sweet voice.
backThe Skt. praharaṇa can mean a weapon, or any handheld implement.
backCakravartin is the first of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings (cf. #UT22084-088-038-4635).
back“White parasol” is also the meaning of the name Sitātapatra.
back“The buddhas” probably refers to the Tathāgata family.
backlha gzhan gyi ni rigs dag la/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the other Celestial family,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *divyānyau instead of the extant Skt. divyāryau.
backThe last stanza is omitted in the Tib. The fruit spoken of could be citron, as it is associated with the king of yakṣas Kubera. It is not clear what phalaja (“fruit born”) refers to.
backdbang phyug che la bri ba ni/ rtse gsum khyu mchog yang dag bya/ Tib. The Skt. chūlaṃ (“spear”) is probably a metrical adaptation of triśūlaṃ (“trident”). The latter interpretation, adopted here, is supported by the Tibetan.
back“His bull,” i.e., Nandi.
backrnam pa sna tshogs brgya phrag ni/ /lha yi mtshon cha sna tshogs dang / /de dag gzhan yang bzhon pa ni/ /rnam pa sna tshogs de tshe bri/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then one should draw / The hundred various kinds / Of various weapons of the deities, / And likewise their various vehicles.”
backlan kan phreng ni de dang mnyam/ Tib. The Tibetan translation of the Sanskrit vedikā as lan kan follows the use of the term vedikā in BHS to signify a railing.
backmthar gyis ji ltar gnas pa yi/ /mu stegs rnams kyang de nas bri/ cho ga bzhin du thams cad kyang / /phyogs skyong de bzhin bri bar bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then draw the tīrthikas / In their positions following the proper sequence, / And draw all of the guardians of the directions / According to the proper procedure.”
backmdor na gzugs brnyan gcig dang ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “In short, there can be a single image,” reflecting the Sanskrit *bimbaṃ instead of the extant Skt. bindus.
backma mo’i dkyil ’khor nyid dag ni/ /tshad med de tshe bri bar bya/ /gzugs brnyan gcig la sogs pa ni/ /mtha’ yas sa yi steng dag tu/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The one should draw the immeasurable/ Maṇḍalas of the mātṛs / [Starting] from one image / And filling the entire earth.” However, it is unlikely that this verse is about the maṇḍalas of the mātṛs.
backgus pa med pas nyan thos nyid/ /tha mas nges par thob par byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Since they lack devotion, those who are of the lowest capacity / Will attain the state of a śrāvaka.”
backbdag nyid chen po don bcas ’bras/ /zhi ba’i ’gro bar nye bar bstan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The great beings teach / How to proceed to peace, a meaningful result.”
back#UT22084-088-038-13132om. Tib.
backrnam pa gnyis dang grangs med pa’o/ Tib. “Twofold” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “threefold.”
backmi yi rigs Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “human families.”
back’di la byung / Tib. Both the Skt. and the Tibetan read “arise from this,” without specifying what exactly “this” refers to. It is likely to refer to the mind, though, as it was mentioned in verse #UT22084-088-038-5553 above that mantras are contained in or coextensive with the mind.
backgang zhig rgyal dang rgyal sras sngags/ /sems can phyir ni gsungs pa rnams/ /gang zhig de zlos mngon brtson pa’ang / /de nas nges par sangs rgyas ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Someone who studiously recites any mantra / Of the Victor or the victors’ sons that was taught / For the sake of beings / Will certainly become a buddha.”
backnyan thos dgra bcom gyi bshad dang / Tib. The translation follows the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *śrāvakārhabhāṣitaiḥ instead of the extant Skt. pratyekārhabhāṣitaiḥ.
backphran tshegs las kyis ni/ D. In place of “mantras,” the Tibetan translates as, “rites/activities.”
backsum cu rtsa gnyis pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 32.
backThe chapter number jumps from 38 to 50 here because the chapters from 39 to 49 have been left out as they are missing from the Tibetan translation.
back“Bowed” om. Tib.
backde’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ ma stsal la/ J, K; de’i cho ga rgya che ba bcom ldan ’das kyi bka’ stsal pa/ D. Following J and K, the Tibetan translates as, “the Blessed One has not explained the extensive ritual.”
backsems can phyogs chen po dang ldan pa dang spro ba chen po dang ldan pa rnams Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “beings who occupy the cardinal directions and possess great power.”
backlha tshogs dag kyang ’jigs par gyur/ /byis pa kun kyang rab tu dngangs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The hosts of gods were frightened, / And all the childish beings panicked.”
backIt is unclear whether the compound grahamukhyā° should be translated as “the grahas and the mukhyas,” or “the chief (mukhya) grahas.” The Tibetan translators opted for the latter.
backgca’ rnams kun gyi gtso bo dang / /lha tshogs mi dang bcas pa dang / /ma rungs sems ldan srul po dag /rab ’gul yid ni mi brtan gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The chief among all of the grahas, / The hosts of divine beings along with the humans, / And evil-minded pūtanas / Were all mentally disturbed and unsettled.”
back“Dharma king” is a frequent epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backThis process of “forging the samaya” ends more than twenty verses below, when they have heard Mañjughoṣa’s explanation of the actual samaya and its boons.
backThe address “venerable boy” suggests that it is Mañjughoṣa who is now being addressed, and not Vajrapāṇi.
backIn the Skt., literally, “spoken by me.”
backmi dan mi ma yin pa dang / /’byung po ma lus lha rnams kun/ /khyod kyi dam tshig ngas bshad bsrung / D. The Tibetan renders this verse in three pādas that translate as, “Humans and nonhumans, / All the spirits and gods, / Will maintain your vow that I have spoken.”
backThe uṣṇīṣas are the uṣṇīṣa kings (as the list below indicates) and the Locanā is the mantra of the buddhas’ eye, personified as Tathāgatalocanā, or simply Locanā.
backThe Skt. has the form cakrī (Cakrin), which is probably a metri causa for cakravartī (Cakravartin).
backdam pa rgyal/ D. In place of Jayoṣṇīṣa the Skt. has Jayodbhava, which is probably a metrical adaptation. The Tibetan reflects the reading jayottama (“highest victory”) and takes it to be an epithet qualifying Tejorāśi.
backphyag na pad+ma rnam gzigs dang / Tib. “Lokita” seems to be a metrically adapted form of another name, possibly Lokanātha, as this clause lists the bodhisattva emanations of Avalokiteśvara.
backThe context indicates that Sitavāsinī (“Clad in White”) is just another name for Pāṇḍaravāsinī.
backIt is unclear which One Syllable is meant. It could be hūṁ, described earlier on as the mantra of the “Lord of Wrath.”
backThe Skt. translates as, “Yamānta,” which is probably a metri causa for Yamāntaka.
backde dag pad+ma’i rig sngags dang / /gtsor ni rgyal bas gsungs ba dang/ /yi ge gcig dang ’khor los sgyur/ /’od chen sngags kyi mgon po ni/ /’di dag de bzhin dran par gyis/ /gzhin rje gshed ces bya ba yi/ /khro bo’i gtso bo de yang dran/ D. The Tibetan reads the material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-13164 together and translates as, “These are what the Victor says are / The principle mantras of the Lotus family, and/ The One Syllable, cakravartin, / The sovereign of the lord of mantras and / The great luminous lord of mantra. / One should recollect these as well. / One should also recollect the chief of the wrathful ones, / Whose name is Yamāntaka.”
backmgon po spyan ras gzigs pa yi/ /thugs ni thugs rje byung ba dang / /thugs rje chen pos thugs brlan par/ /sangs rgyas snga mas gsungs pa’ang dran/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As Avalokiteśvara’s / Mind gave rise to compassion, / And his mind overflowed with great compassion, / He remembered what the buddhas of the past had taught.”
backsgrol ma skye bo sgrol bar ni/ /spyan ras gzigs kyis gsungs pa dang / /rtag dang ting ’dzin skyes ’phags ma/ /ming gi gzugs ni bstan pa’ang yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Avalokiteśvara called upon / Tārā to liberate living beings, and / The noble lady, born out of perpetual samādhi, / Is said to have taken the form of that name.”
back“Companion” has a feminine ending, indicating that Tārā is meant.
backbyang chub sems bzin spyod pa ste/ /byang chub spyod byed dam pa’ang yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As he performs the conduct befitting a bodhisattva, / She is a supreme companion in awakening.”
backKrodhendra is a metri causa for Krodharāja (Lord of Wrath), probably referring to Yamāntaka.
backkhro dbang thig le dkar mo dang / D. The names Tilaka and Śatru are rather mysterious. Tilaka is translated into the Tibetan as thig le (“drop/bindu”), and in place of Śatru (“Enemy”), the Tibetan translates as, dkar mo (“White”), which could be an epithet of Mārīcī or Durgā.
backBhairava is probably a metri causa for Vajrabhairava, who, like Nīladaṇḍa, is a deity from the retinue of Vajrapāṇi.
back’di dag khro mo pho nya’i tshogs/ /rigs ma’i spyan du rab tu bstan/ D. The “overseers of vidyās” (vidyādhyakṣāḥ) in the above list must be the deities classed as vidyārājas. Judging from the Tibetan alone it is possible that the three distinct pantheon groups are identified as one and the same. However, reading the Tibetan against the Skt. clarifies that this is a list of three nominative plural subjects.
backgang zhig dran na phan zhing srung / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “When one recollects [them], one is assisted and protected.”
back“Buddha” om. Tib.
backkun nas de dag mchod byas na/ Tib. The Tibetan kun nas reflects the Sanskrit *sarvatas (“in every way”) instead of the extant Skt. smaraṇāt (“through recollecting”).
backbsod rnams skyes D. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Puṇyaprasavāṃ instead of the extant Skt. Puṇyābhāṃ. Both are the names of a class of gods and their realm.
backThe Skt. strīrūpadhāriṇām (“of/as for those who possess the female form”) could be corrupt, making the meaning of this half-stanza uncertain.
backgzugs med gzugs can lha dag dang / /rdzu ’phrul chen po ’dod chags bral/ /dkon mchog gsum la mchod byed dang / /rgyal ba’i bstan la rab dang ba/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The gods of the form and formless realms / Who are very powerful and free from desire / Make offerings to the Three Jewels and / Trust in the Victor’s teaching.”
backsngags dang dgra la rtag ’jigs pa/ /de dag la ni cung zad med/ /de ltar dam tshig rgyud gsungs pa/ /sngags pa kun gyis sgom min te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They are not perpetually afraid / Of mantras and enemies in the least. / Every mantra adept does not cultivate / The samaya that is taught in this tantra.”
back’di ni khro rgyal mchog ces pa/ /gzhin rje gshed kyis brjod pa yin/ /sems can dam tshig la gnas na/ /mi ni ma lus gnod mi nus/ D. This verse could be about the reciprocity of the samaya—if people keep the samaya of Yamāntaka, so, too, will the spirits under Yamāntaka’s control keep their commitments and refrain from devouring (or just harming) the people. The Skt. of last pāda (abhakṣāḥ sarvamānuṣāḥ) is likely to be corrupt, however. The Tibetan preserves a different reading that translates as, “This is what Yamāntaka called / The Supreme Lord of Wrath. / If beings maintain the samaya, / No human beings can do them harm.”
backlha dang lha min thams cad dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the gods and demigods.”
backrgyal ba’i sras kyis rab bskul nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Having been motivated by the Victor’s son.” This reflects that the Tibetan translators either had a different interpretation of the extant Skt. jinaputrānubuddhinā or that the source for the Tibetan translation may have contained the Sanskrit variant *jinaputrapracodanā.
backI.e., Vajrapāṇi.
backkhro bo’i rgyal po’i nus pa ni/ /sngon chad bstan pa ma yin nam/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Wasn’t the power of the / Lord of Wrath taught long ago?”
backYamāntaka’s mantra is the same as Vajrapāṇi’s because Yamāntaka is the heart essence of Vajrapāṇi, as explained in the next verse. It is not clear, though, which one of the mantras is meant; possibly hūṁ, as it is shared by both these deities.
backde bzhin rjes su sbyin par bya/ /ji ltar ’dod bzhin rab tu ston/ /khyod kyis khro bo’i mthu dag ni/ /yongs su bstan par mi nus te/ D. The Tibetan is obscure, but may translate as, “So I will offer it as a gift. / I may teach whatever I wish. / You are unable to teach / The powers of the wrathful one.”
back’di ni khyod nyid la gnas te/ /lus ’dir gnas shing snang ba yin/ /de nyid khyod kyis drangs pa ste/ /khyod nyid kyi ni snying la dris/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This abides in you yourself. / It abides and is manifested in this body. / You have summoned it, and / You inquire about your own heart mantra.”
backkhro bo mthu ni khugs pa dag /’dir ni bzlog par nus pa min/ /ji ltar ’dod bzhin khyod la bstan/ /gzhan du dam tshig btang ba yin/ D. The teaching on Yamāntaka’s “own samaya” starts in the next verse. The Tibetan translates as, “The wrathful one’s powers have been summoned, / And now it is not possible to turn them back. / It was taught to you, as you wished, / And the samaya will be passed on to others.”
backThe “dharma of commoners” is a euphemism for sexual pursuits.
backbstan pa la ni ma zhugs dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Does not follow the teachings.”
backdad pa med cing ’gyod par gnas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Does not have faith and wallows in sorrow.”
backdam chos the tshom thob pa dang / /de spong mnyam par ma bzhag dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Has doubts regarding the sacred Dharma, / Abandons it, and is distracted.”
backmi brtson Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Not diligent.”
backcung zad shes pa ’khrul pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan includes an extra line here that translates as, “Whose understanding is a bit shaky.”
backbag med shin du ’dod chags can/ /dam tshig nyams shing skyon ldan pa/ /sngags rnams legs par sbyar ba yis/ /khro bo’i rgyal pos ’joms par byed/ D. The meaning of the last pāda is unclear. The Tibetan, which unlike the Skt. does not indicate any gender for the subject of 50.48a, translates as, “One who uses the mantras correctly / Causes the Lord of Wrath to destroy / Those who are heedless and possess extreme attachment, / Who break the samaya and incur a fault.”
backde skad smras nas ’jam dpal ni/ /snying rje yi ni brlan sems kyis/ /sangs rgyas byang chub sems dpa’ D. The Tibetan translation that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-13207 gives the impression that Mañjuśrī is the speaker and translates as, “After he said that, Mañjuśrī, / His mind overflowing with compassion, / Exclaimed, “The powers and activities / Of the buddhas and bodhisattvas are inconceivable.”
backVajradhara (“vajra holder”) is here an epithet for Vajrapāṇi.
backde nas dpal ldan rdo rje ’chang / /phyir yang rdo rje rab tu blangs/ /de tshe rdo rje blangs nas kyang / /khro rgyal mthu ni shes nas dga’/ Tib. This final line introduces Vajrapāṇi’s instructions, which follow in the next chapter. In the Tibetan however, this final verse translates as, “Then the glorious Vajradhara / Took up his vajra once again. / And after he took up his vajra, / He understood the power of the Lord of Wrath and was pleased.”
backsum cu rtsa gsum pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 33.
backgshin rje’i ’tsho ba mthar byed pa/ Tib. Here the Tibetan translates Vaivasvata following the standard Tibetan translation for Yama.
backgtsor byed pa byang chub sems dpa’ ’jam dpal gyis smras pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “That was taught by the preeminent bodhisattva Mañjuśrī.”
backtshes grangs dang ni rgyu skar dang / /smyung ba dag kyang mi bya ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should not observe the lunar days, / Asterisms, and fasting injunctions.”
backbram ze dam pa mchog dag gi /dur khrod shi ba’i ro rnyed na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should obtain a dead body of one of the / Highest holy brahmins from a charnel ground.”
backras ni chu yis lan gsum bkru/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Rinse the cloth with water three times.”
backzhag ni gsum mam bdun du bri/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “within three or seven days.”
backdgra rnams lus la tsha ba ’byung / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A fever will rise in their enemies’ bodies.”
backzhal drug zhabs drug phyag drug bri/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “should be depicted with six faces, six feet, and six arms.”
backkha dog sngo Tib. In the Tibetan kṛṣṇa is translated as “blue.” Dark blue is certainly semantically possible.
backgsus pa ’byang / Tib. “Wolf’s belly” means a protruding or prominent belly. The Tibetan translation of the term translates as, “a belly that hangs down.”
backPossibly there is a connection here between his terminating the lives of all beings and “striking fear into fear itself,” as he is also the one who can help at the time of death to overcome fear.
backThe Tibetan translates as, “Draw him using a mixture of / Human fat and a bright red pigment. / Use a skull as the paint vessel. / Use human bone for the brush handles.”
backshi ba’i skra las byas pa yis/ /pir dang pir ni bcing ba’ang bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Affix each brush / With [a tip] made out of a corpse’s hair.”
backlas kyang ’jigs pa chen po bas/ /de yi don med mi bya’o D. The Tibetan translates as, “Since this work is very dangerous, / Do not make it fruitless for them.”
backgang yang zlos pa smod byed dang / /de bzhin mchod rten khyad du gsod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who insult mantra reciters and / Likewise those who destroy caityas,” possibly reflecting some form of the Sanskrit *caitya in place of the extant Skt. caiva.
backsems can kun dang skyob pa la/ Tib. In place of “oppress,” the Tibetan translates as, “protect,” reflecting the variant °ānutāyinām instead of what is adopted here, °ānutāpinām.
backlung tang ’bras bu sngags bzlas blangs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “While reciting the mantra, pick a soapberry fruit.”
back“Leaves” om. Tib.
backAriṣṭa (lung tang) can be the name of several plants, but most likely the soapberry tree.
back’bras bu’i rang skyur yang dag ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And combine them with kāñjika fruit.” The Tibetan suggests the Sanskrit variant *phalam in place of the extant Skt. āmla.
back“Tamarind” (āmla) om. Tib. Apart from “tamarind,” āmla could also mean vinegar and perhaps other sour substances.
backKaṭu (“sharp,” “pungent”) could also mean intense heat, or the kaṭu plant (used as fuel).
backme thab ji ’dod byas nas ni/ /tsha zhing skam pa’i shing dag gis/ /me thab de la mnyam bzhag nas/ /dur khrod me yi sbar bar bya/ /thams cad ldan pas bsreg byas na/ /cho gar bstan pa’i sbyin sreg yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Prepare whichever fire pit you like, / Stack branches that are dry and produce intense heat / Evenly in the fire pit, and / Ignite it with the fire from a cremation ground. / When one makes the fire offering with all these things, / That is a homa that follows the correct procedure.”
backme lha dag ni spyan drang bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One should summon the fire deities.”
backdang por bu dag ’chi ba ni/ /sems can zhugs nas de bzhin ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “His sons will die during the first watch of the night, / As will a being who has just entered [his wife’s womb].”
backgang du khros nas zlos byed pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “When one recites the mantra wrathfully.”
backgrong khyer de dang nye ba dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Or in the vicinity of a town.”
backThese two pādas are missing from the Tib.
backbrgya dag Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “hundreds.”
backThese two pādas are missing from the Tib.
backgzhan gyis nus par mi ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Others cannot overpower him.”
backIt is not specified what part of the neem tree is used.
backrang skyur dug dang ldan pa ni/ D. It is not specified what the “five poisons” are. The Tibetan translates as, “kāñjika mixed with poison.”
backkrag dang mi yi sha dang ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Blood and human flesh.”
backThe “three pungent substances” could be black and long pepper and dry ginger (Monier-Williams).
backske tshe dug gi phye ma dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Brown mustard and poisonous powder.”
backAmlavetasa, apart from vinegar, could also be the plant species Garcinia pedunculata.
backstar bu dang ni sram gyi sha/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Vinegar and the flesh of an otter,” reflecting the Sanskrit *udrakam instead of the extant Skt. ādrakam. Although it may reflect a genuine variant in the source text, the way that this line is rendered in the Tibetan translation is likely incorrect given that we have already seen the ingredients “Vinegar and fresh ginger” (amlavetasam ārdrakam) appear as a pair in #UT22084-088-038-13278.
backDhatura metel.
backLuffa acuntagula.
backKaṇṭaka can mean devil’s thorn and a few other plants.
backMadana most likely means thorn-apple here.
backke’u Tib. Gṛñjanaka most likely means “red onion” here, but it can also mean turnip or the tops of Indian hemp. The Tibetan term that is used to translate gṛñjanaka suggests that the Tibetan translators understood this to refer to a type of wild garlic (ri sgog).
backThe Skt. offers two readings for this ingredient: palāśa and palala, dhak tree and ground sesamum respectively.
backTrophis aspera.
backgzhan gyi zhag dang chu dang ni/ /kun dong chang ni btung bar bcas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Other oils, water, / Onion, and an alcoholic beverage.”
backzla ba phyed kyi nang du ni/ Tib. The Tibetan adds an additional pāda after this one that translates as, “Within a fortnight.”
backIt is not specified whether the junction is of the night or day.
backAs indicated in the next verse, the target is the king.
backdpal min mang po rab ston pa/ /rnam poa sna tshogs ’byung bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There will be various things / That indicate great misfortune.”
backde la rims nad ’byung bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “There will be a plague there.”
backKaṭuka can be a name of several plants. The name itself implies pungency, so possibly any hot and spicy substance is meant.
backAtyamla (“very sour”) can mean citron, or any sour plant product or substance.
backphyogs che nor dang ldan pa dang / /gcug cing dpung chen yang dag gnas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “[His] vast land with its riches / Will be miserable and occupied by a great army.”
backVajradhara (“vajra holder”) is here an epithet for Vajrapāṇi.
backyang spras pa/ Tib. There is no reference to mantras in the Tibetan, which just translates as, “He spoke again.”
backAlthough the meaning is not quite clear, this verse seems to be referring to the next chapter, where some rites involving yakṣas are described.
backThis again seems to refer to the next chapter, which contains several yakṣiṇī rites, notably the ritual of the eight great yakṣiṇīs that starts from #UT22084-088-038-5906. It is possible that the next five verses and the initial part of the next chapter (this part separates the introduction made here from the actual yakṣiṇī section) are an interpolation. The initial part of the next chapter is also omitted in manuscript A, one of the two extant manuscripts where this chapter is included.
backde tshe gnod sbyin bdag po ste/ /byang chub sems dpa’ smras pa ni/ /gnod sbyin rnams kyis ras ris smras/ /’dod pa kun dang nye bar ldan/ /’gugs par byed dang dbang byed kun/ /zug rngu ma lus yang dag ’byin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the lord of yakṣas, / The bodhisattva, spoke. / He spoke about the yakṣas’ painting, / All of the desirable qualities they possess, /Attracting and controlling them, / And their removal of any kind of pain.”
backbder gshegs bkas kyang bzlog pa dang / /gnyen pos kyang ni mi nus so/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He has contradicted the Sugata’s teaching, and / No antidote can help him.”
backthog ma med pa’i ’khor ba nas/ /shin tu sdug bsngal rgyu sngon byas/ /de dag sdug bsngal sdug bsngal bar/ /snying rje chen pos ’gro ba gdungs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They have generated the cause for intense suffering previously / Over the course of endless cyclic existence, / Experiencing one form of suffering after another. / One should burn with great compassion toward those beings.”
backtheg pa gsum la brten nas ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Relying upon the three vehicles.”
backAgain, the meaning is not quite clear, but this probably refers to the yakṣiṇī rites, #UT22084-088-038-5908, that lead to sensual enjoyment.
backde dag sdug bsngal ldan don du/ /’dod pa’i longs spyod rjod par byed/ /khro bo ’di ni mnyes byas na/ /sdig pa kun las ldog par ’gyur/. This verse only consists of four pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “The enjoyment of desire is taught / For those who have such suffering. / If one has pleased the wrathful one, / All of one’s misdeeds will be undone.”
backsum cu rtsa bzhi pa Tib. The Tibetan translations of the text record this as chapter 34.
back“You are exceedingly cruel” om. Tib.
back’khor ba’i ’ching ba las grol bar ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they liberate them from the bonds of cyclic existence.”
back“Not” has been supplied from the Tib.
backkye rgyal ba’i sras gzhan yang sems can la gnod par byed pa’i chos ston pa ni/ de bzhin gshegs pa dgra bcom pa yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas dang byang chub sems dpa’ rnams kyis ni sems can thams cad kyi ched du gsungs pa ma yin te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Moreover, son of the Victor, this dharma teaching about harming beings is not something that the thus-gone, worthy, perfect and completely awakened ones and the bodhisattvas taught to benefit all beings.”
backrgyud rnams kun la rgyud ’di yi/ /mthu ni bsam gyis mi khyab yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Among all of the tantras, the power / Of this tantra is inconceivable.”
backkhro bo’i rgyal po’i sngags dag dang / /yul gsum dag kyang bsam mi khyab/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “The Lord of Wrath’s mantras / And the three realms are inconceivable,” reflecting the Sanskrit *triviṣayaṃ instead of the extant Skt. ṛddhiviṣayaṃ.
backThe three realizations (literally, “awakenings”) are the realizations of the śrāvakas, of the pratyekabuddhas, and of the fully realized buddhas.
backkye rgyal ba’i sras gzhan yang chos dang chos ma yin pa dang / dkar po dang / nag po dang / dge ba dang / mi dge ba dang / ’gro ba’i bdag nyid chen po sems can ’dul ba’i thabs sgrub pa dang / chos kyi dbyings sgrub pa sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das kyis rab tu rtogs par ’gyur te/ de nyid chos ston pas sems can smin pa’i thabs kyang rab tu sgrub par byed do/ The Tibetan translates as, “Moreover, son of the victors, the blessed buddhas perfectly understand what is Dharma and is not Dharma, white and black deeds, virtue and nonvirtue, accomplishing the methods by which a lord of the path tames beings, and accomplishing the realm of phenomena. Thus the Dharma that they teach causes one to accomplish the method that ripens beings.”
backkye rgyal ba’i sras de bzhin du bdag cag gis bslab par bya zhing / ’di lta ste/ sems can gdul ba dang sems can smin pa dang bstan par bya ba’i phyir dang de la rgyal ba’i sras khyed cag gang ’khor gyi dkyil ’khor ’dir dam tshig chen po la zhugs pa de thams cad kyis mnyan par bya/ dad par bya de nyid dge ba dang mi dge ba tshol ba nyid du bya ste/ ’di lta ste/ de bzhin gshegs pa chos ston pa la mngon par dga’ bar bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus, son of the Victor, we should train in the same way. So you may train, mature, and teach sentient beings, all of you sons of the Victor in the surrounding maṇḍala who have taken the great samaya should listen. You should act faithfully and examine virtuous and nonvirtuous action for yourself. Thus, you should take joy in teaching the Dharma of the Tathāgata.”
backmi’i rgyu ma rlon pa dag Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “fresh human entrails.”
backphyogs chen po dang ldan pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as “with a lot of territory,” reflecting a different interpretation of the Skt. mahāpakṣaiḥ.
backgtso bo chen po dag Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “who are great leaders.” “Very influential” is a loose translation of mahānāyaka.
back“With one’s left foot atop the Maheśvara liṅga” om. Tib.
backde thos pa’i dbang gis Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “By hearing that.”
backPresumably, the mantra is that of Yamāntaka.
backgza’ ’khor dang bcas pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “his lady and her retinue.” It is also possible to translate the Tibetan as, “the grahas and their retinue.”
backIn this context the name Dakṣiṇamūrti probably refers to the southern face of the śivaliṅga and implies that the practitioner is sitting facing north.
backpo son cha’i shing dang tsher ma can gyi shing D. The Tibetan translation treats madanakaṇṭaka (“thorn apple”) as two different types of wood, “datura wood” and “thorn wood.”
backFlacourtia sapida.
backPresumably one writes the mantra or draws the nakṣatra on the ground, before stepping on it.
backsngags thams cad nus pa med par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “all mantra beings will be powerless.”
backmdo na ’jig rten dang ’jig rten las ’das pa’i sngags kyi cho gas kyang ji ltar ji ltar rab tu sbyar ba de lta de ltar thams cad sgrub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “In short, whether it be used with a mundane or supramundane mantra ritual, it will accomplish them all.”
backGossypium herbaceum.
backmi’i rus pa’i sreg blugs kyis D. The Tibetan translates as, “oblations of human bone.”
backkhyim du slar zhugs nas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “enter the house again,” which doesn’t seem to make sense, as one is already in the house where one performed the homa.
backmi gang su dag rjes de slong bar gyur na sbyin par mi bya’o/ /gal te tshan khar slong bar byed na ni khro bo’i rgyal po dran nas yi ge yi ge hUM rab tu sbyar ba byas na de’i mod la ’byer bar ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If any human being asks for that substance, do not give it to them. If they ask forcefully, recollect the Lord of Wrath while employing the syllable hūṁ and they will leave immediately.”
backThe last sentence possibly indicates that the manner in which one uses the ashes in the case if vighnas is not gender specific (in contradistinction to the rites described in the following few paragraphs), and so one can hold the ashes in one’s left or right hand, or both. The meaning, however, is not very clear.
back“Nonhuman” om. Tib.
backskyes bu gzhan brten pa na rma med par yang ’gyur ro/ /ji srid rang gi skyes pa nyid thob na ni phyir yang de’i rma’i sgo de rab tu ’byung bar ’gyur ro/ D. The meaning of this sentence is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “When she has sex with another man she will not have any sores / until she encounters her own man, at which point her mouth sores will appear once again.”
backyongs su rnying pa bzhun du D. The Tibetan translates as, “like that of a very old man.”
backji srid du rang gi chung ma de nyid dang yang phrad na phyir yang rnying pa med par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “until his own wife touches it, at which point it will again be as if he were not an old man.”
backIt is not clear what the “great discharge” is, but it may refer to gonorrhea.
backyang na gzhan gyi bud med la bsten par ’dod na yang nus pa med par ’gyur ro/ /ji lta ji lta mngon par ’dod la de dag thams cad byed par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Or, even if he wanted to have sex with another man’s woman, he will not be able to. / It can do whichever of those things one wishes.”
backgal te gtor ba tsam gyis thal ba dang phrad par ma gyur na/ Tib. In the Tibetan the phrase spṛṣṭamātraḥ (“merely touched”), probably referring to the target, is taken to belong to the next paragraph and translated as “merely throwing.” The opening clause of the next section in the Tibetan translates as, “If one does not hit them with ash just by throwing it.”
backThe literal Skt. phrasing is “and not otherwise be fruitless.”
back“Crockery and cutlery” om. Tib.
backshing ji lta ba bzhin du za bar ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan elaborates here that the body of the enemy, “will be eaten (by worms) like a piece of wood.
backrmi lam ngan pa yang mthong bar ’gyur ro/ zhag bdun gyis kyang ’chi bar ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will have nightmares and will die within seven days.”
backgzhan yang bud med rnams la las su bya ba ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There is another rite that one can perform on women.”
backbcom ldan ’das yid la bsams te Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “If one visualizes the Blessed One.”
backmo mtshan dang nu ma Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “a vagina and breasts.”
back“Unusual” om. Tib.
backbud med dam skyes pa gang la sems dga’ ba skye ba de la thal ba de byin na ji ltar ’dod pa’i las byed du gzhug par ’gyur ro/ D. The literal Skt. expression is “someone that [one’s] mind turns away from.” As one is now selecting an accomplice for an act of assault (abhicāra), one chooses for this purpose someone that one doesn’t like. The Tibetan contains a different reading that translates as, “If one gives the ashes to a person that one trusts, whether they are a man or woman, one can enlist them to perform whatever action one wishes.”
backThe touching may be done by the accomplice, but it is not clear whether the accomplice is touching himself while visualizing the target or is actually touching the target. It could be the latter, as the next paragraph explains that these activities can be performed from a distance.
backbcom ldan ’das yid la bsams nas/ D. The Tibetan again specifies that the object of visualization is the “Blessed One” but in the context it seems more likely that one visualizes the target.
backmdor na ’chi bar byed pa dang dbang du byed par yang ’gyur te/ Tib. The Tibetan for these two sentences is much shorter and translates as, “In short, one can kill them or enthrall them.”
backmkhar srung ba yang ltung bar ’gyur zhing mes tshig pa chen po yang ’byung bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The stronghold will fall, a fire will ignite a massive blaze, and the defending forces will be destroyed.”
backthams cad du ’o ma’i zas kyis ’tsho zhing / D. The Tibetan contains an additional statement that translates as, “one should nourish all of them with dairy products,” which seems strange and impractical (how would one nourish every soldier of a defeated army?) unless this implies the use of these substances for some unspecified ritual.
backThe word used in Skt., kāma, can mean “desire” as well as “sexual pleasure,” and even in the sense of “desire” it has a strong sexual connotation.
backNaṭikā is a diminutive form of Naṭī.
backSkt.: oṁ naṭi mahānaṭi • āgaccha • āgaccha divyarūpiṇi svāhā.
backa mra’i shing gi rtsa bar gnas Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “standing at the base of a mango tree.”
backro smad gos gcig pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “a single garment on her lower body” (iconographically, yakṣiṇīs are represented wearing just a girdle around their hips).
back“Equal to the great yakṣa” probably means that he will be as wealthy as Kubera.
backgal te ma ’ongs na ni khro bo ’chol ba’i rgyal pos ’chi bar ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If she does not come, she will be killed by the Lord of Furious Wrath.”
backSkt.: oṁ naṭṭe śuklāmbaramālyadhāriṇi maithunapriye svāhā.
backSkt.: oṁ bhaṭṭe bhaṭṭe • ālokini kiṃ cirāyasi | ehy ehi | āgaccha • āgaccha | mama kāryaṃ kuru svāhā.
backri’i rtse mor dkyil ’khor byas la Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Construct the maṇḍala on a mountain peak.”
backSkt.: oṁ rakte raktāvabhāse raktānulepane svāhā.
backSkt.: oṁ mekhale mahāyakṣiṇi mama kāryaṃ sampādaya svāhā.
backSkt.: oṁ mekhale sumekhale mahāyakṣiṇi sarvārthasādhani hūṁ | samayam anusmara svāhā.
backThe forms Lokinī and Lokavatī are probably shortened versions of Ālokinī and Ālokavati respectively, with both of them meaning “Splendorous.”
backSkt.: oṁ lokini lokavati svāhā.
backshrI Nu Tib. Ghuṇu is a verbal form, second person imperative, but the meaning is unclear. Possibly this is an encouragement to make a move, or perhaps to make a buzzing sound that heralds the arrival of a spirit (cf. Edgerton, p. 220, the entry for ghuṇaghuṇāyate). In the Tib., this word appears as shrI Nu, which seems to be a transliteration of *śrīṇu (“cling on”?).
backSkt.: oṁ ghuṇu guhyake ghuṇu ghuṇu guhye • ehy ehi guhyake svāhā. In the Tibetan this mantra is shorter and a little different: oM shrI Nu gu hya ke shrI Nu gu hya ke e hya hi gu hyai hi gu hya ke svA hA.
backdang por re zhig gtsang zhing gos gtsang ma bgos te/ zla ba nya ba la gnas dben par ’dug nas D. The Tibetan translates as, “First, one should clean oneself and put on clean clothes. Then on the full moon, in a secluded place.”
backThese ingredients are difficult to verify. Karṇikā, apart from a lotus bud, could also mean Premna spinosa. As for vānapuṣpa, this could be one of the Skt. names of fennel, or it could just mean “fragrant flowers,” or “forest flowers.”
backAn alternative Skt. variant, vandhayet or bandhayet, suggests that one should “bind” the arm.
backmi smra ba’i dka’ thub kyis bzlas pa bya’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And recite the mantra while remaining silent.” This implies that one should recite the mantra mentally instead of verbally.
back’chi ba skyed par yang ’gyur ro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “they will cause the arising of death,” reflecting the Sanskrit *maraṇotpattim instead of the extant Skt. maraṇonmattim.
back“Yakṣiṇī” om. Tib.
backThe names Tamasundarī and Andhārasundarī are synonymous, both meaning “Sundarī of Darkness.” The latter name was mentioned in the list of yakṣiṇīs in #UT22084-088-038-380.
back“Hundreds” om. Tib.
backI.e., the ritual procedure as described above for Tamasundarī. It was stressed in this procedure that the ritual must be performed in complete and utter darkness.
backFor metrical reasons, Yakṣakumārī is called in the Skt. verse Kumārī. Later, however, in her mantra and her sādhana, the full name is used. The Tibetan renders this verse and the next in prose.
backlha’i gnas su yang ’gro bar byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They convey one to the realm of the gods.”
backgu ha pa ti Tib. Guhilā and Guhāmati seem to be epithets of Guhāvāsinī (“Cave Dweller”). They each indicate an association with caves or hidden places, and could be loosely translated as “Cave Woman.” The Tib. reflects the reading guhapati, which is unlikely, given the female gender of this yakṣiṇī.
backSkt.: oṁ guhile guhāmati guhāvāsini • ānaya bhagavati mayāntikaṃ samayam anusmara svāhā.
backThe name Guhāvāsinī means, appropriately, “Cave Dweller.”
backde la ’dod pa dang ldan pa yang don du gnyer bar yang mi bya’o/ /de la ’phags ma rdzu ’phrul che ba don du gnyer na ’grub par ’gyur te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One who has sexual desire for her should not seek her out for that purpose. If one seeks her out because she is noble and powerful, one will have success.”
backThe Skt. offers two different readings for the last sentence, one (supported by the Tibetan and adopted here) with and the other without the negative particle. The reading without the negative particle could be interpreted as, “If one spends it all, all will be restored.”
backSkt.: oṁ naravīre svāhā.
backLiterally, “until the moon is released” (during an eclipse, the moon is said to be “seized”).
backbud med dam skyes pa gang gi ming bris pa de D. The Skt. seems corrupt at this point and could be specifying “of a woman or a man” or just a woman. The Tibetan clearly translates as,“the name of the woman or man that one has written,” but it is more likely that this is about a woman being summoned for a male practitioner, as indicated further on in this paragraph.
backThe Skt. uses the form Yakṣakumārikā, which is a diminutive of Yakṣakumārī.
backSkt.: oṁ yakṣakumārike svāhā.
back“A single piece of clothing” probably implies a lower garment, possibly a piece of cloth around the hips or just an ornamental girdle.
backKumārī, i.e., Yakṣakumārī.
back’gyod na ni rnam par ’jig pa ’byung bar ’gyur bas ma bzhin du bsgrub par bya’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Since one will be completely ruined if one does hurt her feelings, treat her like a mother and one will succeed.”
backAs specified in other rites, she takes her back the following morning.
back’jig rten rnams ’od bzang po dag gis gsal bar byas pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “illuminating the worlds with her radiance,” perhaps reflecting the Sanskrit *svaprabhodyotitalokā instead of the extant Skt. svaprabhodyotitālokā.
backThere is a play on words here in the Skt., as paramaguhyaka can mean “exceedingly secretive” or “supreme guhyaka” (guhyaka and yakṣa being synonymous).
backcho ga ’di nyid do/ N, H; mchog ’di nyid do/ D.
backSkt.: oṁ manohare madonmādakari vicitrarūpiṇi maithunāpriye svāhā.
backmar me zad nas ni mi snang bar ’gyur ro/ /de la gos gcig bcings te gos yongs su bzhag nas mal stan nas ’gro bar byed do/ /yang na sgrub pa pos lag pa’i sor gdub bzhag pa las sor gdub gnyis pa yang bzhag nas ’gro bar byed do/ yang na gdu bu dang rked pa’i ’og pag dang rkang pa gnyis kyi rkang gdub dang mgo’i nor bu dang de bzhin du gzhan dang / gzhan lha’i rgyan gcig cig gang de khyer ba de dang de rjes su ster bar byed do/ D. The Tibetan is missing several important sections that clarify exactly what is happening in this paragraph. One such lacuna is marked in the translation because it has created an unresolvable grammatical issue and skewed the context of the passage. The Tibetan translates as, “After the lamp burns out, she will disappear. She wears a single piece of cloth, and she will leave the cloth behind and get up from bed. Then the adept should … She will drop the ring on her hand, drop two more rings, and then depart. Then, one by one, she will give up all the divine ornaments that she wears—her bracelets, girdle, anklets, the jewel on her head, and others as well.”
backSkt.: oṁ mahānagni nagnije svāhā.
backyang na gzhan dang rtse bar ni byed de/ ’on kyang de dang lhan cig smra bar ni mi byed do/ /bud med gzhan dang phrad par mngon par ’dod pa’am yid la sems na yang de’i tshe zlos pa de’i gan du ’ong bar mi ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One can have her have sex with other men, but do not allow her to converse with them. She will not approach someone who obviously wants to have sex with another woman or even someone who just thinks about it and then recites the mantra.”
backSkt.: oṁ surasundari svāhā.
backThe ablative case of kṛpālubhyaḥ has been interpreted as an instrumental (“[they associate] with”), (cf. Edgerton 1970, p. 46, paragraph 7.46).
backmi yul dag na sbyor bar dga’/ /snying rjer ldan zhing rnam par rgyu/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They love to have sex with mortals. / They are compassionate and wander about.”
backThis statement seems to be about yakṣiṇīs in general rather than the above seven.
backgzhan dag phan byed ’tshe ba yang / /de bzhin mtshan mo yongs su rgyu/ /byis pa’i ’tsho ba ’phrog pa’i phyir/ /bskam zhing sha ni za byed gzhan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “There are others who are helpful and playful, but / There are also those who wander at night / To take the lives of children, / And others who make beings wither and who eat flesh.”
backsrung byed Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “protected.”
backde dag tshar bcad bsgrub don du/ /dam tshig ’di ni rab tu bstan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “This is the samaya that was taught / To accomplish their destruction.”
backji ltar ’dod chags ’ching ba la/ /byis pa rnams ni bsdus pa’i don/ /sems can rnams la phan pa’i phyir/ /de ltar ’di kun gsungs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan grammar is a bit ambiguous, but it does appear to offer a different reading than the Skt. that may translate as, “All of these rites were taught / To those bound by passion, / To gather childish beings, / And to benefit beings.”
backBecause of the double meaning of the Skt. √vas (“to dwell/live”), this line could also be interpreted as “he will enjoy sex for one eon.”
backde tshe de ni dam chos thos/ / thos nas rab tu grol bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then they will hear the sacred Dharma, / And after hearing it he will be liberated.”
backThis line is actually the last pāda of the next verse.
backbral ba’i rnam par yang dag ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “She has a figure that will be lost.” “Sex” (rati) is absent in the Tibetan, which instead reflects the reading ākāra (“form,” “figure,” “shape”).
backde dag chags bral zhes gsungs te/ /rnam grol de dag grub pa nyid/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They are said to be free from attachment / And for them that attainment is liberation.”
backgang zhig ’dod la chags btal ba/ /’di yi sngags i ’grub par ’gyur/ /bshang gci khrag gis brlan pa dang / /rul bas kun tu khyab pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “This mantra will work / For someone who is free from desire. / Dripping with feces, urine, and blood, / Pervaded by putrid decay.”
backsngags shes sngags kyi gzugs can dang / D. In place of the extant Skt. mantrajāpī (“mantra reciter”) the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mantrarūpī (“one whose nature is the mantra”).
backsngags shes sngags kyi gzugs can dang / /shes ldan dbang po thul ba dang / /dpa’ bo gtsang ba’i spyod la dga’/ /rtag tu de yi sngags kyang ’grub/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “But for a mantra adept who embodies the mantra, / Who has insight, who has conquered the senses, / Who is brave and delights in pure conduct, / His mantra will always work.”
backrtag rgyal Tib. In the Tibetan, the adverb sadā (“always/invariably”) is incorporated into the name Jayā (“Victory”), making it Eternal Victory.
backSkt.: oṁ padmocce svāhā.
backrdo’am sa’i sgo glegs byas D. It is unclear what purpose this clay structure has. The Tibetan translates as, “Make the door out of stone or clay.”
back“She will become one’s wife” om. Tib.
backgal te mu tig gi phreng ba de len na ni de tsam kho nar yod par ’gyur la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “If you take that pearl necklace, that will be the only one there is.”
backSkt.: oṁ jaye sujaye jayamati sarvakāryāṇi kuru me svāhā.
backmu tig ’od ldan mthong na mdzes/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “She glows like pearl and is beautiful to behold.”
backrab sngags gzugs ldan smin ma mdzes/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “With a form that is praised and a beautiful brow,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *subhruḥ (“with a beautiful brow”) instead of the extant Skt. śukraḥ (“[bright as] the evening star”).
back“Great yakṣa” probably refers to Kubera.
backSkt.: oṁ ṣṭhrīḥ hrīḥ mahānagni hūṁ phaṭ svāhā.
backde bzhin du sha za mo dang sha za mo rdzu ’phrul che ba dang / D. The Tibetan interprets “piśācīs of great power” as two categories, “piśācīs and very powerful piśācīs.”
backThe Skt. grastā (i.e., grastāḥ), which means “devoured” or “seized,” is also a technical term used in the context of spirit possession. By being “seized” they enter the samaya with Lord of Wrath.
backkhro bo’i rgyal po gshin rje gshed kyi rig pa Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “the vidyā of Lord of Wrath.”
back’khrul ’khor gyi gzugs sam de nyid kyi gzugs brnan byas nas Tib. The image spoken of here is of the deity or spirit that one is trying to summon. The Skt. yatrapratimā (“where an image is”) seems to be describing the location where one recites the mantra. The Tibetan translates as, “having made her diagram image or her actual image,” reflects the Sanskrit *yantrapratimā (“a diagram representation”).
back“In their celestial forms” om. Tib.
backThe procedure is the same inasmuch as it relies on an image, otherwise the details will vary for different ritual targets.
backThe material that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-13762 is rendered in prose in the Tibetan translation.
backI.e., the ones in the images.
backAs before, “accomplished” as an object of practice.
backskad gcig gis ni zlos pa yis/ /don rnams thams cad sgrub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The reciter will instantly / Accomplish all of his goals.”
backkhro bos bkug cing rgyas byas nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Summoned and increased by the Lord of Wrath.”
back“They” probably refers to Maheśvara and other emanations of Śiva in particular, as many of the rites taught in the MMK, such as the rites of the eight yakṣiṇīs, are shared by the Buddhists and Śaivites, and some, such as those of Tumburu and his sisters, are of Śaiva origin.
backThe exact meaning of this pāda is unclear, but it appears to be about the mantra deities of the most cruel and vile type.
backgang dag sngags ni ci yod pa/ /khro bo ’chol ba rnyog ’byung ba/ /de kun khro bo’i rgyal po yi/ /de dag bsgo ba mnyan par bstan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Whatever mantra beings they are / That are wrathful, crazed, and causing trouble, / All of them are commanded by and listen to / The Lord of Wrath.”
backmchog dang rab mchog drag po dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The foremost and the fiercest.”
backde bzhin pad+ma ’dzin sngags dang / /bdag nyid kyis kyang rab bshad dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Likewise I also taught / The Mantra of the Lotus Bearer.” In place of mantradhare (“in [the capacity of] the mantra holder”), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *padmadhare (“lotus bearer”).
back“This teaching” probably refers to the MMK, and specifically to its Yamāntaka sections.
backThe word “mantras” has been taken from verse #UT22084-088-038-6103 below, as it applies to this list of mantra deities (the deities being identical with their mantras).
back“Uṣṇīṣa emanation” implies the Tathāgata family, as these deities emanate from the Tathāgata’s uṣṇīṣa.
backMañjughoṣa begins the list of male mantra deities in the Skt. but is omitted in the Tib.
backpad+ma ’dzin pa’i mnga’ bdag dang / Tib. As this is a list of bodhisattvas, the name Padmadhara probably refers to the bodhisattva Padmapāṇi, rather than the tathāgata Padmadhara.
backThe context suggests that the “lord of the yakṣas” is Vajrapāṇi.
backrgyal sras rmad du byung ba dang / /dpung bzang ’jig rten rnam par grags/ /rdo rje’i sde dang sde bzang dang / /blo ldan chos kyis ’phags pa dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “A miraculous son of the victor, and / The world renowned Subahu, / Vajrasena and Suṣeṇa, / Dhīmān and Dharmodgata.”
back“All of them,” i.e., all the respective mantra deities (the mantra and deity being one and the same).
backIt is not clear whether tatra (“there”) actually means “against them” or just implies that the wrathful mantra of Yamāntaka should not be used when the peaceful mantras of the deities from the above list are used.
back“Vidyā” in this context means the magical power of the mantra (as in the bahuvrīhi compound chinnavidya, referring either to a mantra whose vidyā is lost or a person whose mantra has lost its vidyā).
back“Mantras,” i.e., mantra deities.
back’phags pa ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i cho ga byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod phal po che theg pa chen po shin tu rgyas pa’i mdo las/ gnod sbyin mo sgrub pa’i cho ga rab ’byam las le’u sum cu rtsa lnga pa rdzogs so// // D. This is the last verse in chapter 35 in the Tibetan translation of the text. The colophon at the end of this chapter translates as, “Thus concludes chapter 35, ‘The Rite that Brings the Yakṣiṇīs under One’s Control,’ from The Root Manual of Noble Mañjuśrī, an extensive Mahāyāna sūtra that forms a garland-like basket of bodhisattva teachings.’ The second pāda in the opening verse of the next chapter in the Tibetan (where it is recorded as chapter 36) corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-13837, and the correspondence between #UT22084-088-038-6132. The omission of the material from #UT22084-088-038-13814 may be justified by the fact that the paragraphs 52.145–46 are a verbatim repetition of #UT22084-088-038-8261. These two paragraphs contain the long Yamāntaka mantra and have been included in this translation along with the entire omitted section for the reader’s convenience, as the repeated part is separated from the original by more than one thousand pages of text.
backSkt.: oṁ kha kha khāhi khāhi duṣṭasattvadamaka asimusalaparaśupāśahasta caturbhuja caturmukha ṣaṭcaraṇa gaccha gaccha mahāvighnaghātaka vikṛtānana sarvabhūtabhayaṅkara aṭṭahāsanādine vyāghracarmanivasana kuru kuru sarvakarmāṃ | chinda chinda sarvamantrān | bhinda bhinda paramudrām | ākarṣaya ākarṣaya sarvabhūtānām | nirmatha nirmatha sarvaduṣṭān | praveśaya praveśaya maṇḍalamadhye | vaivasva tajīvitāntakara kuru kuru mama kāryam | daha daha paca paca mā vilamba mā vilamba samayam anusmara hūṁ hūṁ phaṭ phaṭ | sphoṭaya sphoṭaya sarvāśāpāripūraka he he bhagavan kiṃ cirāyasi mama sarvārthān sādhaya svāhā ||.
backle’u sum cu rtsa lnga pa Tib. The Tibetan translation of the text records this as chapter 35.
back“From his samādhi” (literally, “from that samādhi”) is probably a reference to the samādhi called the buddha’s blessing through miraculous transformation that the Buddha had entered in #UT22084-088-038-5577 above, i.e., at the beginning of the Yamāntaka section. This section ended at the conclusion of the previous chapter.
backThe correspondence with the Tib. resumes at this point (the section of text starting from #UT22084-088-038-13814 until #UT22084-088-038-13835 is missing from the Tib.).
backde nas gzhan yang bshad bya ba/ /sdug bsngal spang zhing bde bya ba/ /sdug bsngal spang zhes bstan pa ni/ /mdor bsdus na ni bzlog pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translation opens chapter 36 (Skt. 53) with this verse, which translates as, “I shall explain further. / The teaching that states, ‘Abandoning suffering / And pursuing happiness is the abandonment / Of suffering’ is, in short, wrong.”
back“Those who attain awakening on their own,” i.e., the pratyekabuddhas.
backThe Skt. uses the past tense form here, when this obviously ought to be the future.
back#UT22084-088-038-13857om. Tib.
backde tshe nub phyogs bltas pa’i mal/ /de yi gnas su ’byung bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then I will come to rest / On a bed facing west.” Based on the parallel passage in #UT22084-088-038-6162 below, the reading apaścime has been emended to apaścimā (“final”). The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *paścime.
back“Described as golden” alludes to the name of the river Hiraṇyavatī (“Rich in Gold”).
back“Celebration” translates the Skt. maha or mahas, which can also mean “sacrificial oblation” or a religious event that involves such oblation. Possibly a double meaning is intended here, alluding to the cremation of Buddha’s remains.
back#UT22084-088-038-13869om. Tib.
backIt is not quite clear at which point in his life the Buddha is believed to have taught the Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa. It appears, though, that the entire discourse was delivered by the Buddha during his incarnation on Earth as Śākyamuni after he temporarily ascended to the realm of the Pure Abode sometime after turning the wheel of Dharma at Sarnath. The Buddha thus uses the future tense when predicting, just now, his own parinirvāṇa on Earth, but is changing at this point to the past (although it is difficult to tell because of the ambiguous grammar), as he now starts describing his life on Earth that already happened. He will continue to use the past tense until his narrative catches up with the “present” moment. He will then switch to the future once again when referring (in verse #UT22084-088-038-6213 below) to his forthcoming parinirvāṇa.
backlus kyi gdung ba’ang yun ring ba/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Mortifying my body for a long time,” reflecting the Sanskrit *cīraṃ (“for a long time”) instead of the extant Skt. cīrṇaṃ (“I practiced”).
backshes dang shes bya gsal ba ni/ /ngas ni cung zad thob pa med/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “I did not attain the slightest / Clarity regarding knowledge and its object.”
backThe holy fig tree has huge root spurs that can provide a cozy shelter.
backWe have a play on words here, as aśvattha is the name of the tree under which the Buddha attained awakening, and it is also the name of the astrological juncture (the full moon in the month of Āśvina) during which this happened. We also have a figure of speech here, as aśvattha is the name of the tree synonymous with bodhi (the Bodhi tree), and so, by poetic extrapolation, “aśvattha-hood” (which is the expression used in the Sanskrit text) means the state of awakening (bodhi).
backshing rtsa a shwat+thar ’dug nas/ /sems ni shin tu dang bar gyur/ /bsam gtan dang ni ting ’dzin dang / /der ni brtan pa’ang mngon par ’thob/ /mtshan mo’i mthar ni skye mthar byed/ /der ni snang ba med pa’ang ’thob/ D The Tibetan translate as, “I sat at the base of that aśvattha tree, / And my mind became exceedingly clear. / Then I attained absorption, / Concentration, and stability, / And by the end of the night I brought birth to an end. / At that point I attained the absence of appearances.”
backGrammatically, tad can refer to him (Māra), or the vighnas, or both.
backThis refers to those that follow the path of either the śrāvakas, the pratyekabuddhas, or the buddha/bodhisattvas.
backThe Skt. narrative switches between the first and the third persons. Here it is all translated in the first person for the sake of consistency.
back’gro ba lnga la yang dag brten/ D. The Skt. gatiṃ pañcāsunisṛtām (“mode of life,” “existence that depends on the five airs”) is translated into the Tibetan as if it were *pañcagatiṣu niśritānām (“of those who follow the five destinies”). The five vital airs are prāṇa, apāna, vyāna, samāna, and udāna.
back“The faults” probably refers to the three faults, also called “the three poisons”—anger, greed, and ignorance.
backtshangs pa’i ’khor lo rab tu bskor/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “I turned Brahmā’s wheel,” which is another possible interpretation of the Skt. cakraṃ brāhmyam (“the great wheel”). In fact, a double meaning may be intended here.
back“The four abodes of Brahmā,” or the four immeasurable states, are immeasurable loving kindness, compassion, sympathetic joy, and equanimity.
back“Forward and backward movements” refers to the method of analyzing (vyavalokana) the chain of interdependent origination, namely how the arising of each link in the chain leads to the arising of the next link but the non-arising of the first link (ignorance) leads to the non-arising of all the subsequent links.
back“Having thus turned the wheel” is, in the original text, in verse #UT22084-088-038-6189 above.
backThis is probably a reference to the “twin miracle” performed at Śrāvastī, followed by the Buddha’s ascent to the realm of the gods.
backmi yul dag tu rdzu ’phrul ni/ /de tshe yang dag bstan par byas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then I perfectly displayed / A miracle in that district.” According to the standard version of the Buddha’s life, the miracle performed at Sāṅkāśya was his descent from heaven. The Tibetan seems to mistranslate saṅkaśye (probably meaning “in Sāṅkāśya”) as a form of *saṃ+kāś or perhaps *sam+pra+kāś, meaning “perfect display.”
backThere seems to be some confusion here about the sequence of events. Possibly the MMK presents here a different version of events in the Buddha’s life, according to which the Buddha descended from heaven not at Sāṅkāśya but “among the people of Agnibhāṇḍa” (unless he descended from heaven twice). It also seems odd that, “having descended from among the gods,” he is again, in the immediately following passage, in the realm of the gods, where he seems to ascend through the different levels, until he arrives (in verse #UT22084-088-038-6211 below) “above the realm of the Pure Abode,” where he is now speaking to the assembled beings.
backtshangs sogs brgya byin bcas pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as “Brahmā and the rest including Śakra.” However, in this case “Destroyer of Cities” could be an epithet of Śiva, as Indra has already been mentioned.
backstong chen po yi ’jig rten gyi/ /khams dang ’dra bar bsams mi khyab/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Just as a great thousandfold / World system is inconceivable.”
backThe plural of “victorious lords” could be honorific and refer to Śākyamuni alone.
backrdzogs longs spyod pa longs spyod spangs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Utterly devoid of sense pleasure and enjoyment,” reflecting the Sanskrit *sambhogabhogavarjite instead of the extant Skt. sambhoge bhogavarjite.
backyang dag mtha’ ni rtogs nas kyang / /chos kyi mtha’ la yang dag gnas/ /sems can kun la snying brtse bar/ /kun gyis yongs su bskor nas gnas/ /lha yi tshogs ni thams cad dang / /’phags dang so so’i skye bo dang / D. This verse is rendered in six lines in the Tibetan and translates as, “Who realize ultimate reality and / Perfectly abide in the ultimate nature of phenomena / Will exhibit compassion and love toward all beings / And be present there surrounded by all of them. / All of the hosts of gods and / Noble and ordinary beings…”
backsdug bsngal mi rtag stong pa yi/ /bcom ldan de ’di gzims pa yi/ /mthong ba yi ni tha ma ’am/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The Blessed One lying here / Teaches about suffering and impermanence. / Is this the last time we will see him?”
backrdzu ’phrul chen po lha yi bu/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Divine sons with great miraculous power,” reflecting the Sanskrit *devaputrā instead of the extant Skt. buddhaputrā.
backthub pas de ’drar mi ’da’ mdzod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “May the Sage not pass away like that.”
backyun ring dus nas brten mdzad pa’i/ /sems can mang po’i don mdzad stsol/ /zhi ba mya ngan ’das lam mam/ /bsam gtan rnam thar bstan du gsol/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Please remain for a long time and / Carry out the benefit of many beings. / Please teach the path to peace or nirvāṇa, / Concentration, and liberation.” In the Skt., the spirits’ plea includes another line of unmetrical text which is, however, unintelligible and is missing from the Tibetan.
backIn this part in the Skt. the grammatical tenses alternate between the perfect, the future, and others. However, they have been converted in this translation to the future, as the Buddha is talking about his “future” nirvāṇa.
backmi dang mi yi bdag po kun/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “All of the human beings and kings.”
backgzhan yang shAkya’i rigs skyed pa/ /rdzu ’phrul chen po ’dod chags bral/ /bdag nyid chen po sangs rgyas ni/ /lha yi gnyen gyur pa/ D. The syntax of #UT22084-088-038-13973 is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “Moreover, scion of the Śākya clan, / You are extremely powerful, devoid of desire, / A great being, a buddha, / And the divine friend of the gods.”
backchags bral lugs la mkhas pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Free from passion and knowledgeable of customs.”
backskye dang byang chub de bzhin du/ /dam chos ’khor lo sge ba spyod/ /zhi ba yang dag kun gshegs par/ /de bzhin rang rgyal dgra bcom pa/ /mi yi lus la brten nas ni/ /bla med zhi bar gshegs pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Just as I was born, attained awakening, / Set the virtuous wheel of the holy Dharma in motion, / And will proceed entirely and completely to peace, / So too will the pratyekabuddhas and arhats / Take on a human body and then / Proceed on to unsurpassed peace.”
backbsil bar gyur cing ’gog par gyur/ Tib. “Cool and not subject to arising” is the description of final nirvāṇa and, by way of a figure of speech, also of the funeral pyre that has cooled and will not burn again. The Tibetan translates as “Cool and ceased,” which reflects the Sanskrit *nirodhaye instead of the extant Skt. nirodaye.
backmi dang gnod sbyin mkha’ lding bdag D. In place of “ṛṣis,” the Tibetan translates as, “humans.”
backThe meaning of hṛtārtha (“stripped/deprived of wealth/purpose”) is unclear. This bahuvrīhi compound possibly refers to the fact that the grieving beings, having lost the Buddha, lost their most valued thing and/or their purpose.
backyon tan ldan pa rdzu ’phrul ches/ /phyogs nas thams cad bdag gir byas/ /rang gi gnas su khyer nas ni/ /de tshe mchod pa byed ’gyur zhing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “These great powerful beings with good qualities / From every direction will all claim them as their own. / They will take them to their own realms and / Then make offerings to them.”
backmchog dang tha mar gnas pa’i / /sems ni dad pa rnam gsum gyis/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Since there are three types of thoughts / Categorized as superior, lesser, or middling.”
back’jig rten rnam gsum ’gyur ba ni/ /sangs rgyas bse ru dgra bcom thob/ /theg pa rnam gsum ’jig rten gsum/ /rnam gsum yang dag bstan pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There are three types of attainment in this world, / That of a Buddha, pratyekabuddha, and arhat. / And three vehicles have been taught / For these three types in this threefold world.” The Tibetan translation of the material in #UT22084-088-038-14009 reflects the Sanskrit *samudita instead of the extant the Skt. samoditam.
backrang rgyal byang chub la brten pa/ /de bzhin ’jig rten ’gyur ba yin/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “There will likewise be those in the world / Who rely upon the awakening of a solitary victor.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *niśrita (“relying upon”).
backsnying ni mya ngan bcas gyur nas/ D. om. Skt.
backThe wording suggests that it is the Bodhi tree that provides shelter (literally, a “hiding place”). This “hiding place” could be a hollow inside the tree, or a place between the huge root spurs that grow from this tree, or, less likely, a natural cave next to the tree.
back’og min de bzhin ’jig rten mtha’/ /srid rtse’i ’jig rten khams kyi bar/ /’jig rten ma lus thams cad dang / /stong chen srid pa las byung ba/ Y, K, N, H. The Tibetan translates as, “From the edge of this world in Akaniṣṭha / Up to the world system of the peak of existence, / And all worlds without exception / That arise out of the thousandfold world.”
backmi dang mi yi bdag po dang / Tib. In the Tibetan, the phrase manujair narādhipaiś cāpi is interpreted not as “human kings,” but as “human beings and kings,” which is grammatically possible, but the hierarchical order in which these beings are listed (from the “powerful gods” to the spirits) makes it unlikely that human beings would be mentioned before kings, here or in other similar passages throughout the text.
backsangs rgyas nyi ma’i rigs las byung / Tib. “A relative of the sun” is a reference to the solar dynasty of Ikṣvāku, of which the Buddha was a descendant.
back’chi mas brnangs shing smre sngags ’don/ /sa rnams sgra ni chen pos gang / /ha ha zhes bya’i sgra nyid dang / /rnga bo che yi sgra yang thos/ D. The Tibetan ’chi mas brnangs shing preserves a scribal error that should be emended to mchi mas brnangs shing.
backthub mchog gzims mal dam pa ni/ /kun nas yongs su bskor bar mthong/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will see the Supreme Sage’s / Fine bed surrounded on all sides,” to remind us that this is still part of Kāśyapa’s vision.
backde tshe bram ze ’od srung ni/ Tib. In place of “monk,” the Tibetan translates as, “great brahmin.”
backskye gzhan gyi rjes ’gro ba/ /bdag gis ston pa’i sku mi mthong / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “As I proceed on to the next rebirth, / I shall no longer see the teacher’s body.”
backAjātaśatru murdered his own father.
backde tshe deyi phug ’ongs nas/ Tib. In place of “house,” the Tibetan translates as, “cave,” reflecting the Sanskrit *guhāṃ instead of the extant Skt. gṛhaṃ.
backnyan thos chen po gzi brjid che/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “O great splendorous śrāvaka.”
backder ni sems med brgyal gyur pa/ Tib. The Tibetan is missing the material in #UT22084-088-038-14056 and translates as “Then he will fall down unconscious.”
backde yi tshe na gzon nu ni/ /rdzu ’phrul chen po ’jam pa’i dbyangs/ /dbugs ’byin pa ni byed par ’gyur/ /sems can rjes su gzung ’dod pas/ /’jig rten kun tu rgyu bar gyis/ D. The Tibetan renders this verse in five lines that translate as, “Then, Divine Youth / Extremely powerful Mañjuśrī, / You will offer them comfort. / You will wander the entire world / Out of a desire to care for beings.”
backde tshe khyod ni ’dug par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “At that time you will be there.” #UT22084-088-038-14058 reads mantra tvam, which translates as, “You, the mantra deity,” but the word “mantra” is not reflected in the Tibetan. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit correlative *tadā (or perhaps *tatra or *atra) instead of the extant Skt. mantra.
back’jig rten kun tu bltas nas ni/ /su zhig sdub bsngal gang las drang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “You will survey the entire world thinking / ‘Who can I deliver from suffering?’ ”
backgzhon nu zab pa’i blo ldan pa/ /de ltar sa la ’gyel bar gyur/ /’jam dpal gyis ni de yi tshe/ /sa bdag de ni sdug bsngal ba/ D. The Tibetan is missing the first person pronoun from #UT22084-088-038-14060, which is critical to generating a proper translation of this line. The Tibetan also omits the verb (in the form of a future participle) vaśyam or paśyam. If we supply the verb paśyam here instead of vaśyam, then the Tibetan corresponding to Skt. 53.141cd translates as, “At that point Mañjuśrī, you will see / The King in a state of acute suffering.”
back’jam pa’i dbyangs kyis mi bdag ni/ /rmi lam gnas pa bzhin du mthong / /khyod kyi rdzu ’phrul byin brlabs kyis/ /rgyal pos mya ngan gyis brgyal des/ /de tshe de ni rmi lam du/ /mngon sum byis pa lta bur mthong / D; ’jam pa’i dbyangs kyi mi bdag ni/ /rmi lam gnas pa bzhin du mthong / /khyod kyi rdzu ’phrul byin brlabs kyis/ /rgyal pos mya ngan gyis brgyal des/ /de tshe de ni rmi lam du/ /mngon sum byis pa lta bur mthong / N. The Tibetan translates as, “Mañjuśrī, you will see the king / In a dream-like state, / And, due to the blessing of your miraculous powers, / The king, who is overcome with grief, / Will then have a vision / Of a child appear before him in a dream.” The majority of Tibetan translations of the material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-14063 indicate that it is Mañjuśrī who sees the king, but in the Skt, it is clear that it is the king who sees Mañjuśrī. Only N preserves a variant that might account for the syntax in Skt. 53.143ab. Still, the Tibetan translators seem to have accounted for their reading in the next verse of the Tibetan translation, in which it is clear that the king sees Mañjuśrī in a dream. Thus, following all of the Tibetan translations of the material corresponding to Skt. 53.143–144ab aside from N, the Tibetan reading suggests that Mañjuśrī first sees the king in a dream state and then is seen by the king in the next verse.
backde bzhin chos ni rnam par ’phrul/ /byang chub sems dpa’ byis pa’i gzugs/ /sna tshogs rdzu ’phrul bsam mi khyab/ /’jam dpal gyis bstan sems dang byas/ Tib. “As is the special quality of their emanations, / Taking the form of a bodhisattva child, / You, Mañjuśrī, with your various inconceivable magical powers, / Will cause him to reflect upon the teachings.”
backmdo sde ’gyos pa sel ba ste/ Tib. The meaning of the Skt. sūtra, literally “thread” or “string,” is not clear in this context but possibly suggests that the crimes were committed in an uninterrupted succession. The Tibetan term mdo sde would interpret the term sūtra to refer to the genre of Buddhist literature of the same name, and it suggests the tentative translation, “As in the sūtras, his wicked deeds will be cleared away.”
backIt is not clear how the phrase “in the beginning, in the middle, and at the end” fits with the remainder of the verse. The genitive plural ending suggests that it refers to the buddhas, i.e., “the buddhas [who authored this teaching in] the beginning, the middle, and the end.”
backsangs rgyas dpa’ bos de gsungs nas/ /’od chen ldan pa ’jam dbyangs la/ /gnas gtsang steng bzhugs de tshe gzigs/ / D. The Tibetan is again a bit obscure and renders this material in three lines that translate as, “After the Buddha, the Hero, said that, / He gazed upon the great radiant one Mañjuśrī, / Who was dwelling above Pure Abode.”
backrkang gnyis skyil krung bcas nas ’dug D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will take a seat with his legs crossed.”
back“The late king” is Ajātaśatru’s father, Bimbisāra.
backrgyal po’i bu ni ’dug par gyur/ /de nas ’od srung ches smras pa/ /nga ni spur sbyong gnas su ’gro/ /mi rnams la ni phan phyir dang / /mchod rten gzugs gnas mchod don du’o/ D. The translation of Ajātaśatru’s speech is uncertain. The Tibetan (where it is Mahākāśyapa speaking to Ajātaśatru) translates as, “The prince took his seat / And Mahākāśyapa addressed him saying, / ‘I will go to the cremation site / In order to benefit people [there] and / To worship the place where his body is interred in a reliquary.’ ” The Skt. bimba (“disk/sphere/orb/dome”) can also mean “image/figure,” which meaning appears to be reflected in the Tibetan. However, the stha (“located”) that follows after caityabimba (“caitya dome/globe”) suggests that bimba here is a locum rather than the image.
back#UT22084-088-038-14091om. Tib. The translation of these two pādas is uncertain.
backde nas lam gyi bar ’dug nas/ /’khor ba’i stegs ni rab tu brtan/ J, C. The Tibetan translates as, “He will come to the halfway point on the road / And take shelter at a resting place for travelers.” The Tibetan ’khor ba’i stegs translated here as a “a resting place for travelers” might reflect the Sanskrit *saṃsārasthaḥ (as is conjectured in Jayaswal’s edition of this chapter) meaning literally a “place” (*sthaḥ) for “travelers” (*saṁsāra/saṁcāra).
backThe Skt. mahalla/mahallaka is often used as a term of contempt or ridicule to describe an aging but unruly monk.
backji tsam de nas ’ongs gyur pa/ /dge ’dun kun dga’ rar gnas pa’i/ /dge slong rgan zhugs gsar bu ni/ /sdig pa nyid kyis rnam rmongs pas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “A deluded and sinful / Elderly ordained monk / Living at the monastery / Will see him approaching in the distance.” The verb “see” (mthong nas) is distributed to this verse from the beginning of the next verse.
backmthong nas rgan zhugs rnam ’khrugs te/ /gang phyir de dang nye bar ’ongs/ /grags pa che zhing skal ba che/ /sems can bdag pa rims nad med/ /bram ze de yi drung lhags nas/ /de tshe rkang gnyis phyag byas nas/ /de la smras pa skal ba che/ /legs ’ongs khyod ni vi phyir byin/ Tib. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-14095 is slightly different and translates as, “Seeing him, the elderly monk will get nervous / [And wonder] why should I approach him? / He will come closer to the brahmin / Who is so very famous and fortunate, / A pure being free of disease and illness, / And then, after prostrating at his feet / He will say to him, ‘Fortunate One, / Welcome! Why have you come?’ ”
back“Of great wisdom” om. Tib.
backbslab dang bslab min rjes su ston/ Tib. The translation of the last pāda is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “Who teaches the learned and the unlearned.”
backsa rnams dang ni ri rab kyang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The entire earth and even Mount Meru.”
backskar mda’ dag kyang sa la ltung / D. The Tibetan translates as, “And meteors will fall to earth.”
backde nas de ni sngags zhes brjod/ /nyan thos rnams kyi rigs las byung / /yi ge hUM de yi yi ge gcig /las rnams ma lus byed cing dge/ Tib. The “family” refers to the Buddha/Tathāgata family. The Tibetan offers a different reading that translates as, “Then he will pronounce the mantra / That comes from the family of the śravakas, / The syllable hūṃ, the One Syllable / That is auspicious and accomplishes all activities.”
back“He,” as the mantra, is the deity, presumably Lord of Wrath.
back#UT22084-088-038-14120om. Tib.
back’od srung chen po rmad ’byung ba/ /skal ba chen po de mthong nas/ /rdzu ’phrul chen po dge slong rnams/ /thams cad smre sngags ’don du byed/ Y, J, K, C. Following the reading in Y, J, K, and C, the Tibetan translates as, “When they see the miraculous Mahākāśyapa, / The great fortunate one, / The very powerful monks / Will all wail with grief.”
back“The Magadhan king” refers to Ajātaśatru.
backsa steng zhi ba’i gzims mal du/ /bas mtha’ dgon par mya ngan ’das/ Tib. “Passed into nirvāṇa” has been supplied from the Tib., filling the lacunae in the Skt.
backThe Skt. dhātu (“element/elemental component”) also means “relic,” or relics that will remain after the cremation. Possibly this meaning is also implied here.
backthub pa’i sku sbyangs las byung ba’i/ /der ni sku gdung mchod rten byas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A body relic caitya will be built there / At the source, the Sage’s funeral pyre.”
backdge slong kun dga’ bo zhes bya/ /slob pa nga yi bsnyen bkur ba/ /mi yi dam pa mnyes gshin pa/ nga la rtag tu yongs su dad/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The monk named Ānanda, / A disciple and my attendant, / A dear and distinguished person / Who always has utmost faith in me.”
back#UT22084-088-038-14150om. Tib.
backrdzu ’phrul chen po snying rjes non/ /rna; ’byor chen po ’dod chags bral/ /rdzu ’phrul chen po thub pa’i sras/ /thams cad de bzhin smre bar byed/ D. The Tibetan differs quite a bit from the Skt. here and translates as, “The great powerful one will be overcome with compassion. / The great yogi who is free from desire, / The great powerful one, the Sage’s heir / Will wail just like everyone else.”
backma ga d+hA yi grong mchog tu/ /grong khyer bzang po rgyal po khab/ D. The city “referred to as royal” is Rājagṛha. The Tibetan translates as, “To the capital city of Magadhā, / The beautiful city of Rājagṛha.”
backThe reading “lamenting” was obtained by emending palāyinaḥ (“fleeing”) to pralāpinaḥ (“lamenting”).
backde bzhin rnam pa du ma’i gnas/ /bstan pa bsdu ba’i ched dag tu/ /’dus nas smra ba kun smra ba/ rdzu ’phrul chen po byed par ’gyur/ D. The translation of this Skt. verse is problematic. The Tibetan differs significantly and seems to be a continuation of Mahākāśyapa’s speech. The Tibetan translates as, “ ‘Let us gather in these many various places / To collect the teachings, / And then recite all that can be recited / Great powerful ones.’ ”
backde bzhin dge bsnyen dge bsnyen ma/ /dus kyi mtha’ la ma zhir ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Male and female lay practitioners will have no peace,” probably reflecting the Sanskrit *aśāntā instead of the extant Skt. aśrāddhā.
backphan tshun skyon ni ’tshol byed cing / D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will seek each other’s faults.”
backrma ldan skyon ni ma rungs ltar/ /skyon la rtag tu rtog par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will bear weapons and inflict harm like wicked people, / And they will obsess about doing harm.”
back“Free from … karmic traits”; literally, “without karmic influences” (nirāsrava).
backde nas mkha’ lding klu dang ni/ Tib. “Nāgas” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. has “gandharvas” in this position, repeated for the second time.
backgzi brjid chen po gza’ rnams dang / D. The term “planets,” reflecting the Sanskrit *graha, has been supplied from the Tibetan due to the lacunae in the Skt.
backsku gdung Tib. In place of “body,” the Tibetan translates as, “body relics.”
backThe verb used for blessing, adhi + √ṣṭhā, could also imply that Mahākāśyapa is restoring Ajātaśatru’s legitimacy (in the moral sense) as a king.
backcha gcig khyod kyis blang bar gyis/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “You will pick up a portion,” where “you” must refer to Mahākāśyapa.
backrgyal po gzhan ni stogs ldang gyis/ /gzhan dag rab tu khyer bar gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The other powerful kings / Will take away the rest.” The Tibetan translates the Skt. bhogibhiḥ as rgyal po, which translates as “kings” rather than “snake-like beings.”
backphan tshun bab col ’khrugs nas ni/ /gcig la gcig gi ’khon byas nas/ /de tshe nam mkhar sku gdung khyer/ rang gi gnas su’ang bzhag par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “They will become agitated and rash toward each other, / And while they are fighting one another / They will transport the relics through the sky / And inter them in their own location.”
backde tshe thub pa’i nyan thos mchog /dge slong ’od srung chen po de/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the monk Mahākāśapa, / The Sage’s preeminent śrāvaka will say.”
backsems can ’jigs par sngang ba ste/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Appear to terrify beings,” meaning (by the Tibetan reading) that beings appear to now be terrified of the buddhas, pratyekabuddhas, and śrāvakas.
backde tshe sa las ma phye bar/ /de yi sku gdung blangs nas ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then he will pick up some of the relics / That had not been removed from the ground.”
backkun la’ang mi rtag ’du shes kyis/ /de na yang ni gnas par gyur/ /snying rjes brlan pa’i sems kyis ni/ /sems can rnams la mya ngan byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Even though everything is impermanent because it is compounded, / There is something that yet remains. / His mind overflowing with compassion, / He will grieve for all sentient beings.”
backshAkya’i skyes mchog bstan pa ni/ /’jig rten dam chos nub pa na/ /bskal pa rnam pa mang por ni/ /yun ring sems can ngu bar ’gyur/ /’di dag dud bzhin mi ’gyur bar/ /’di dag gsung ni bsdu bar bya/ Y. Following the variant in Y, the Tibetan translates as, “When the teaching of the supreme being of the Śākyas, / The holy Dharma, is gone from the world, / Over the course of many eons, / Beings will cry for a long time. / These teachings must not be like smoke. / These words should be collected.” The word for “smoke” (dhūma), synonymous with “destruction,” is also used in the Skt. in place of “chanted” (saṅgātavyam). The Tibetan translates as, “collected,” reflecting the Sanskrit *saṅghātavyam.
backdpa’ bo de las langs nas ni/ /sems kyi stobs ni nyams pa med/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then the hero will get up and, / With an unmatched willpower.”
back“Silks, music, riches” has been supplied from the Tib. (the Skt. lists instead “parasols” for the second time).
back“Garlands” are listed twice in both the Skt. and the Tib. texts. Banners, bells, and unguents are missing from the Tib. list.
back’jig rten mchog la mchod pa yis/ /bdag gi dge ba mang po gang / /de bzhin gshegs la mchod pa ’dis/ /bsam gyis mi khyab mchog thog zhog D. The meaning of this verse is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “By this offering to the most eminent being in the world, / And my virtue, however great, / Due to this offering to the Tathāgata, / May I attain the inconceivable supreme state.”
backkhyod ni bdag gi dbang ’gyur mdzod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “You must act under my power,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vaśībhūtaḥ instead of the extant Skt. sākṣibhūtaḥ. The Tibetan variant makes little sense given the context.
backI.e., King Bimbisāra.
backde tshe shing rta zhon nas byung / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He climbed onto a chariot and left.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *ratha (“chariot”) instead of the extant Skt. *rathyā (“road”).
backsems ni yang dag dad gyur nas/ H; sems ni yang dag dang gyur nas/ D. The BHS grammar of this verse has been interpreted based on the Tibetan translation in H. The rules of classical Skt. wouldn’t allow this interpretation, but the BHS rules do.
backbse ru lta bur skye ba med/ D. In the Tibetan, the Skt. khaḍgakalpamasambhavaḥ (“appearing exactly as [a rhinoceros]”) is translated as “rhinoceros-like and unarisen.” Among other possibilities, the Tibetan translators may have divided the compound not as kalpama + sambhavaḥ, but as kalpam + asambhavaḥ. For the BHS form kalpama see Edgerton 1970, paragraph 22.13.
backzhabs bkrus nas ni bshos gsol te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “We will wash your feet and offer you food.”
backThe “three stains” are ignorance, hatred, and greed.
backme tog spos sogs sngon ’gro bas/ Tib. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backkhyor bcas chos la dad pa yis/ /de yi rkang pa gnyis la gtugs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, holding the vessel and with faith in the Dharma, / She fell down at his feet.”
backLiterally “player in the dirt” (pāṃsukrīḍanaka), which implies playing in the sand or in direct contact with earth.
backnyan thos rgyal ba skyob pa la/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Toward a śrāvaka, a victorious protector,” reflecting the Sanskrit *śrāvakajinatāyine instead of the extant Skt. pratyekajinatāyine.
backA reference to the first Buddhist council at Rājagṛha.
backsdud par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “collected.”
backdpa’ bo Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “hero.”
backgzhon nu khyod ni ’dul byed cing / /zhi ba dam pa ston par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “You, youthful prince, will train / And instruct him in the ultimate peace.”
backU is the first letter of this king’s name. Possibly he is identified here only by this first letter, because this letter is always the same in all the different version of his name: Udayin, Udayabhadra, Udayana, etc.
backThe time sequence is unclear, but probably the time spent among the pitṛs is an interim period before being reborn as a god.
backgrong khyer stobs ldan mtshan phyed du/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “At midnight, in Balanagara.”
backrang rgyal skyob pa dag la ni/ Tib. “Victorious” om. Tib.
backStarting with Nahuṣa, and ending with Aśvatthāman three verses below, is the list of the kings who lived prior to the Buddha Śākyamuni. This section is therefore written in the past tense.
backrgyal po na hu sha la sogs/ D. It is unclear whether pārthiva is a qualifier of Nahuṣa (as the Tibetan takes it to be) in the meaning of “prince,” or whether it is a proper name (as it is translated here). The alternative translation of this pāda as found in the Tibetan would be, “Are Nahuṣa and the other kings and rulers.” The two names (if pārthiva is also a proper name) are followed by ādayaḥ (“and so forth”), which suggests lines of kings.
back#UT22084-088-038-14321om. Tib.
back“Twice-born” are members of the three higher castes, brahmin, kṣatriya, and vaiśya.
backThe translation of this verse is uncertain, but there is no way to verify it, as this section is omitted in the Tib.
backIt is unclear whether the Skt. pārthiva should be translated as “king” (as it has been here) or taken to be the name Pārthiva, in which case the compound pārthivādayaḥ ought to be translated as “Pārthiva and the others,” meaning perhaps other kings from his lineage or his successors. See #UT22084-088-038-6576.
backThe Skt. of this half-stanza is incomplete and could not be translated. It also marks the end of the passage that is omitted in the Tib., which picks up again at #UT22084-088-038-14327.
backkha cig nyan thos theg pa la/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Some are on the śrāvaka path.”
backThis pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backrgyal po rtsod pa la dga bas/ /gzhan ni tha mar bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan syntax is a bit obscure, but these lines likely translate as, “It is said that rival kings who delight / In fighting will have the shortest [lifespans].” It is not possible to confirm the intended syntax for the term gzhan here because this pāda is missing in the Skt. Here gzhan is taken as a translation of the Sanskrit parāḥ, which can mean “rival, opponent, enemy” and read as a modifier for the extant Skt. pārthivā.
backmtshon reg pas ’chi bar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They will die by the sword.”
back“Present,” i.e., contemporary with the Buddha Śākyamuni himself.
backde bzhin li ts+cha bIr skyes pa’i/ /shAkya’i rigs skyes seng ge dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Likewise Siṃha who was born among the Licchāvis / And who was born into the Śākya clan.”
backThe Sanskrit syntax could also be interpreted as “There is the powerful king Śuddhodana, / Also known as Vairāṭa.”
backnges par byang chub ’dod nas kyang / shi nas zhi ba ’thob par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Be steadfast in their desire for awakening / And attain the peace of nirvāṇa after they die.”
backnad med ser sna bral ba dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “Who is free from illness and not stingy.”
back“Gift of dust” (Skt. pāṃsudāna) refers to an event, described in the Aśokāvadāna, when Āśoka offered in one of his former births a bowl of dust to Śākyamuni, wishing that it was food.
backrigs ni nges par ’gyur ba dang / /rgyal po nor chen ldan par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “His family line will be secure and / The king will come to possess great wealth.”
backlha yi ’jig rten shi ’phos nas/ /sa yi ’jig rten ’dir ’ongs gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, when you passed away and left the celestial realm, / You came to this earthly realm.”
backde nas gnod sbyin shing rta grub/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will obtain a yakṣa chariot.”
backIt is unclear whether the plural of “victorious ones” is honorific or actually refers to Śākyamuni and the previous buddhas. It could be the latter, as #UT22084-088-038-6633 below again uses the plural number for the “lord protectors” to whom the new reliquary stūpas will be dedicated.
backWe have a play on words in the Skt., as dhātu can mean both “relic” and “mineral/element,” and so dhātugarbha, as a description of the earth, can mean at once “receptacle for relics” and “composed of minerals/elements.”
backde nas gnod sbyin shing rta dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as “The yakṣa chariot.”
backSkt. gives Dharmāśoka, a frequent epithet of Aśoka.
backde bzhin des kyang rig nas ni/ /rgyal po chos ni ston par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will remember this and / Teach the dharma of kings.”
backThe group of cakravartin mantra deities seems to be coterminous with or include the uṣṇīṣa deities, such as the eight uṣṇīṣa kings, all of them fully realized buddhas (in contradistinction to mantra deities who are spirits).
back“The supreme,” as in the threefold division into the supreme, the middling, and the inferior that recurs throughout the MMK. “Supreme” refers to practices aiming at buddhahood.
backIn this passage, the Buddha again refers to kings that came before him.
backThe list of the mantra deities starting here includes several of the eight uṣṇīṣa kings.
backrgyal po chen po dug chen pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The great king Sagara.”
backThe One Syllable meant here is possibly bhrūṁ, i.e., the mantra of the uṣṇīṣa king simply called Rājoṣṇīṣa or Uṣṇīṣa.
backnga las nu ni ’jig rten dang / /de bzhin gtsug tor dam pa grub/ D. “Māndhātṛ accomplished the worldly [mantras] / As well as the supreme uṣṇīṣa [mantras].”
backThis could be the Great Hero (an eight-syllable mantra) introduced in #UT22084-088-038-461-18.
backThe term “vidyārāja” (“vidyā king”) here refers equally to the deity and its mantra, with an emphasis on the vidyā, i.e., the magical power.
backde nas stong phrag brgyad cu’i sngags/ /de bzhin yang dag bsgrubs nas ni/ Tib. Eighty thousand or one hundred thousand years was an average lifespan in the first, i.e., the Satya eon. The Tibetan takes these numbers to be the number of times that the kings recited the mantra and translates as, “And they likewise accomplished / Eighty thousand mantra recitations.”
backThis “middle period” still refers to the time before Śākyamuni, when Vārāṇasī was ruled by the dynasty that included Brahmadatta and so forth.
backThe “lotus holder” is presumably Avalokiteśvara, and the family is the Lotus family.
backde tshe bar ma’i dus dag tu/ /lha mo rdzu ’phrul chen mo dang / /lha rnams kyi ni sngags dang ni/ /pad+ma’i rigs kyi sngags dang ni/ /blon po mi yi gtso bo dang / /sa bdag sa kun bdag po’o/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, during the middle period, / There were the mantras of the / Powerful goddesses and gods, / The mantras of the Lotus family, / The ministers who were the highest among the people, / And the kings who were lords of the entire earth.”
backIt is unclear whether this verse is about King Brahmadatta or the deity Lokeśa.
backThe Skt. actually says, “When I attained the state of a buddha,” which, in this context, must refer to the final nirvāṇa.
backsha za lto ’phye gnod sbyin dang / /rdzu ’phrul chen mo klu rnams kyi dus ngan de tshe tha ma la/ /sngags ni rab tu grub par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan treats this verse as a list of various mantras and translates as, “During the final debased eon, / The mantras of the piśācas, / Uragas, yakṣas, and / Powerful female nāgas will be effective.”
backIt is not clear whether kumāras and kumārīs are a class of nonhuman beings (cf. MMK 36.26 in another chapter not included in our translation, but appended to chapter 36 in Śāstrī’s edition), or the term refers here to another class that has such forms, e.g. grahas.
backThe Skt. word mukhya suggests that he was either the first Aśoka or the main one of the “Aśoka” kings.
backAnother name of Pāṭaliputra, the ancient capital of Magadha.
backrgya yi gtso bo zhes bya ba/ D. The Skt. translates as, nīcamukhya (“chief rogue”). The Tibetan, however, translates as, “Chief of Seals,” which suggests the Sanskrit *mudrāmukhya.
backde dag la ni des nor byin/ D. This pāda has been supplied from the Tib. (Skt.: lacunae).
backnor ni mang po de dag gis/ /dge ba’i bshes la rab mchod nas/ /de yi nor ni zad par byed/ D. The Tibetan renders these last four lines in three lines that translate as “With their great wealth, they / Will make offerings to a spiritual teacher, / And his wealth will be exhausted.”
back“The city named after flowers” is Pāṭaliputra.
backThe minister’s name, Vararuci, is mentioned at this point probably because this name (“one eminently fond of pleasure/passion”) ties in with his description here as atirāgin (“one possessed of strong passion or addicted to pleasure/love”).
backmchog sred ces ni rnam grags pa’i/ /de tshe ’dod chags shas che ’byung / /bud med byas pa’i skyon gyis ni/ /bram ze’i khye’us ’chi ba thob/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, the one known as Vararuci / Will experience acute passion. / Due to a crime committed against a woman, / [A number of] brahmin youths will receive a death sentence.”
backme tog ces bya’i grong khyer gyi/ /mi rnams ’chad pas gnod par byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Killing these youths / Of the city by the name Flower will cause problems.”
backde bzhin lnga bcu rtsa drug go/ Tib. The Tibetan has “fifty-six.”
backde ni mtshan phyed sad nas ni/ /rgyal srid la ni bu bzhag pa/ /snying po thig le zhes bya ba/ /blon po la sdang byis pa de/ D. This minister, mentioned below, is Cāṇakya. The Tibetan translates as, “Awakening at midnight, he / Will install as king a son / Named Bindusāra, / And as minister a wicked fool.”
backIt is unclear whether this verse and the next are about Candragupta or Bindusāra. The Skt. grammar indicates that it could be the latter, while the Tib. indicates the former. However, as the following verses (starting from #UT22084-088-038-6736) describe Bindusāra’s birth in the family of Candragupta and his subsequent life on Earth, these two verses could be about Candragupta.
backnyan thos kyi ni byang chub ’gro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will progress to the awakening of a śrāvaka.”
backbye ma las byas srid gzhan du/ Tib. In place of “Siṃhadatta,” the Tibetan translates as, “out of sand” (i.e., “[he built a caitya] out of sand”).
backsnying po thig le rgyal po yis/ Tib. The name Bindusāra is derived from the Tibetan. The Skt. reads bimbasāra.
backblo ldan zla ba spas pa yi/ /rgyal po dga’ ba’i rigs su skyes/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be born into the royal line / Of King Nanda and Candragupta the wise.”
backbyis pa nyid nas rgyal por ’gyur/ /yun mi thung bar bde ba myong / /’jigs med bstan dang yang dag rig /spyi brtsan pa dang snyan par smra/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “After childhood he will become king. / He will demonstrate fearlessness and perfect understanding. / In general, he will be bold and smooth spoken.”
backkhyod nyid kyi ni sngags nyid kyang / /de tshe grub par byed par ’gyur/ Tib. The Skt. grammar of this half-stanza is ambiguous. The Tibetan translates as, “Then he will also accomplish / Your mantra as well.”
backbyis pa’i tshul can sna tshogs gzugs/ /byis pa rnams la mthu dang ldan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They will have power over various types / Of foolish beings who practice foolish systems.”
backgang zhig khyod kyis bstan pa’i sngags/ Tib. This pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backThe three reigns are those of Candragupta, Bindusāra, and Aśoka.
backmnar med dmyal bar yang dag ’gro/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will proceed to the Avīci hell.”
backlas gcig sdug bsngal des zad nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “After that suffering has exhausted a one of his actions.”
back“Krodha” probably refers here to the krodha Yamāntaka.
backThe Tibetan does not provide any material for the lacunae in #UT22084-088-038-14521 and omits the material in Skt. 53.426d.
backji ltar ’dod par nyes bral rnams/ D. The material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-14532 is missing from the Tibetan, rendering this line relatively unintelligible. On its own this final verse of the Tibetan translates as, “As they please, free from fault.”
backdge ba’i rtsa ba de yi mthus/ /rang rgyal byang chub smon lam btab/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Due to the power of that root of virtue, / He will proclaim his aspiration for the awakening of a pratyekabuddha.”
backblo ngan Tib. In place of “unhappy rebirths,” the Tibetan translates as, “ill intentions,” reflecting the Sanskrit *durmatiḥ instead of the extant durgatiḥ.
backnyan thos de ni byang chub thob/ Tib. Here, as elsewhere throughout this chapter, the Tibetan translates as “Attain the awakening of a śrāvaka,” instead of the awakening of a pratyekabuddha.
back“From this,” i.e., from Cāṇakya’s example.
backde nas rgyal po dam pa dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “[The mantras] are the supreme monarch.”
backdbang phyir D. In place of “wealth,” the Tibetan has “power.”
backji bzhin yon tan bzang po ni/ /ji lta bzhin du brjod par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “For as long as there are good people / With good qualities, it will be recited.”
backsgrub dka’i sngags ni rab bsgrub cing / /’jam pa’i dbyangs kyi de bzhin no/ D. The translation of the last two pādas is uncertain. The Tibetan translates as, “He will accomplish a mantra that is difficult to accomplish and / Will be just like Mañjughoṣa.”
backThis is a reference to Rājagṛha, literally “the king’s home.”
backThis seems to be a reference to the Bamboo Grove. The Sanskrit word for grove, ṣaṇḍa, appears in its alternate spelling of khaṇḍa.
backrab byung bdag nyis chen po de/ /ji bzhin de tshe ’byung bar ’gyur/ /ma khol zhes bya’i brtul zhugs can/ /de ni de tshe ’byung bar ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As a renunciant / He will truly be a great being, / And he will then be known as / The vow holder Mātṛceṭa.”
backji bzhin don ni bstod pas mchod/ /rnam pa sna tshogs dpe dag gis/ /’byung po kun la phan pa’i phyir/ /legs par spyod pa rab byed pa’o/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will make offerings with genuine verses of praise. / Using various types of examples, / He will compose them in well-crafted language / For the benefit of all beings.”
backThe “Joyful” is the first bodhisattva level.
backrig pa rma bya chen mo ni/ Tib. Māyūrī is identified in the Tibetan as Mahāmāyūrī.
back“Down to every word” (dhātvartham, literally “the meaning of the roots [of speech]”) om. Tib.
back’jig rten rig pa ston bdag nyid/ /gzhung byed ngang tshul can du ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will educate the world / And will be naturally adept at composing texts.”
backde yi rig pa grub pa ’di/ D. “Vidyā” has been supplied from the Tibetan.
backdge slong dgra bcom zhes bya ba/ Tib. The name given in the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Arhadbhikṣu, which seems unlikely as a proper name.
backThe “yakṣa” here is Kubera, the god of wealth.
backde ni sngags don bdag nyid ldan/ /rgyud shes de bzhin mang du thos/ /gnod sbyin sngags ni rab brjod pas/ /de la bum pa bzang po ’grub/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Endowed with the nature and meaning of mantra, / He will be versed in the tantra and very learned. / He will accomplish the pot of fortune / By reciting the yakṣa mantra.”
backsngon ni ngas ni gang bshad pa’i/ /theg pa chen po’i mdo sde yang / /de yi tshe na bum pa las/ /dka’ thub chen po ’dren par byed/ Tib. The Skt. syntax of “Mahāyāna sūtra” suggests that, rather than this sūtra being drawn from the pot, the story itself was told in this sūtra. However, as the overall grammar of this Skt. verse seems defective, and because the Tibetan version fits the context better, the Tibetan has been adopted here.
backglegs bam de la des bltas nas/ /de la sngags ni zlos pa na/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As he looks at that volume / And recites the mantra that it contains,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *mantrajāpine instead of the extant Skt. mantrarūpiṇe.
backtshangs pa ka ba’i mthar gyur par/ /brgya byin sogs bcas dbang phyug che/ /sngags kyis ma bkug ma ’ongs na/ /sngags pa bdag min sngags rgyal min/ Y, J, K, C. The Tibetan translates as, “If this mantra does not summon Brahmā / Down to the lowest being, and / Śakra and the rest along with Maheśvara do not come, / Then I am neither a mantra adept nor a lord of mantra.” Alternately, the last line might be translated as, “Then I am not a mantra adept and this is not the Lord of Mantras.”
backde nas sngags pa chen po langs/ /brtul zhugs brtan zhing las rnams grub/ /ji ltar sngags ni byas pa yi/ /sbyor ba mthong ba’ rgyu dag kyang / /rkun ma dgug pa de don gtsor/ /sbyor ba rab tu byas par ’gyur/ N. The Tibetan differs significantly from the Skt. here. Following the reading in N, which reflects the Sanskrit *prayogadṛṣṭahetavaḥ instead of the extant prayogākṛṣṭahetavaḥ in #UT22084-088-038-14587, the Tibetan translates as, “Then he will take up the great mantra, / Maintain the observances, and accomplish all of the rites. / Whatever mantra he uses will possess / The manifest causes of that practice, / And he will apply the practice to / His primary goal, summoning the thief.”
back#UT22084-088-038-14594om. Tib.
backkun tu yang ni ma mthong gyur/ D. The Skt. form dāsyante is a bit of a mystery. Here it has been translated as “will [not] find” based on the Tibetan translation. Possibly, it should be emended to drakṣyante.
backThis seems to refer to Vajrapāṇi, the father of Mūrdhaṭaka (cf. #UT22084-088-038-516-39).
backbgegs kyi gzugs kyis sngags pa la/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As a mantra being in the form of a vighna.”
back’dis ni bdag la ma mchod pas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He does not make offerings to me.” However, the Sanskrit *apūjita that is reflected in the Tibetan would be unmetrical.
backshin tu legs par yang dag bkug Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will perform the summoning rite perfectly,” possibly referring to the next verse.
backde nas de ni bgegs de yis/ /yi dags rnams la bum pa byin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then he will have the vighna / Give the pot to the pretas.”
backIn the Skt., the honorific plural “we.”
backOn this occasion the diminutive form Nandaka is used.
backbdag nyid chen po byang chub ni/ /bgegs med myur du rnyed dka’ thob/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Free from vighnas, that great being / Will quickly attain that realization so difficult to attain.”
backrgyl po btsun pa zhes bya ba/ Tib. The Skt. gomimukhya (literally, “the most important of the Gomins”) is unclear. The epithet seems to refer to Puṣyamitra Śuṅga, the founder of the Śuṅga empire. He is called, a few verses down, gomiṣaṇḍa (“the bull of the Gomins”), suggesting, again, a prominent or the most important Gomin. In place of gomimukhya, the Tibetan reflects the reading *gomyākhyā (“by the name of Gomin”).
backThe expression gomiṣaṇḍa (“the bull of the Gomins”), just like gomimukhya above in note at #UT22084-088-038-6851, is rather unclear.
backJayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 19) suggests that the name of this king is Buddhayakṣa, and identifies him with the Kushana king Kadphises I.
backbdag nyid chen po sems dpa’ la/ /sa yi bdag por don du gnyer/ D. The meaning of this half-stanza is not completely clear. The Tibetan translates as, “He will ask this bodhisattva / Great being to be lord of the earth.”
backgrong khyer sa ni lnga len ’byung / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will take five cities and lands.”
backĀvasatha can mean lodgings for pupils or ascetics in particular.
backlha ldan yul zhes bya ba yi/ Tib. It is not clear whether or not the Tibetan lha ldan yul is actually meant to translate the extant Skt. nepālamaṇḍale here (which is more commonly translated as bal yul, as witnessed in this very work) or if another location was intended. The Tibetan lha ldan yul is also an alternate name for Lhasa (lha sa), the primary city in the central Tibetan province of Ü (dbus).
backHere, as well as in other places throughout the text, the Skt. bhoga is translated in the Tibetan not as “pleasures,” “enjoyments,” or “comforts,” but as “prosperity” or “wealth.”
back#UT22084-088-038-14644om. Tib.
backThe term mleccha here, which normally means a foreigner or a tribesman, seems to refer here to the Nepali subjects, as the kings themselves that are listed next are still Licchavi, i.e., not mleccha.
backkha ba can gnas kla klo’i rgyal/ Tib. “In the snowy land” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backIn place of Vṛṣa, the Skt. has Vaviṣa, which could be a metrical adaptation.
back#UT22084-088-038-14652om. Tib.
backphyi ma yin Tib. In the Tibetan the Skt. paścima is translated not as “western,” but as “later.” However, the kings listed next are of the “western” Ṭhākurī dynasty, as they ruled out of Nepāla (the Kathmandu Valley) over the western provinces. The Licchavi and Ṭhākurī dynasties ruled together, at that period, from the same place (cf. Jayaswal 1934, p. 21).
backde ’og lugs ni rnam zhig cing / /phyi rol skye dgus nye bar spyod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “After that the dynasty will collapse and / [That land] will be served by foreigners.”
backIt is not clear whether mleccha here refers to foreigners, i.e. non-Nepalese, or to the indigenous population.
backsna tshogs lha dang bram ze dag D. The Tibetan translates as, “Brahmins and various gods.”
backrgya yul kun la brten pa yi/ D. It appears that in the usage of the MMK, the Skt. cīna refers to Tibet, whereas mahācīna refers to China. The mention of brahmins, though, if Tibet is meant, is puzzling. The phrase cīnaṃ samantataḥ is also ambiguous, as it could mean “over the entire territory of Tibet” or “in the countries surrounding Tibet.” Also, the Skt. cīna is here translated into Tibetan as rgya yul, which is rather vague as it can mean India or China.
back“The divine youth of great splendor” seems to refer here to Mañjuśrī.
backThe mantra meant here must be the eight-syllable Mañjuśrī mantra given in #UT22084-088-038-467, oṁ āḥ dhīra hūṁ khecaraḥ.
backmi bdag rgyal thabs nyid kyi phyir/ /de ni skal ba mi nyung ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “There will be a great deal of good fortune / That will benefit that king and the kingdom” might reflect the Sanskrit *analpabhāga instead of the extant Skt. alpakārya.
backmchog gi sbyin pa bla na med/ /bsam pa tsam gyis thob pa nyid/ D. Some Skt. readings in the last two verses could be corrupt and the meaning is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “His supreme generosity will be unsurpassed. / He will obtain things just by wishing for them.”
backlha ngan phal pa dag dang ni/ /mi yi ’jig rten smos ci dgos/. In the Tib., this half-stanza translates as, “Let alone wicked and mundane deities / And the world of human beings.”
backshing shun gyon yul ma gtogs pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translation seems to misread the phrase baṣkalodyaṃ sakāpiśam (Baṣkala, Udyāna, and Kāviśa) as *valkalavāsī (“one who is wearing clothes of tree bark”).
backde ni dpag tshad bsun brgya dang / D. It is not clear whether śatasapta here means “one hundred and seven” or “seven hundred.” In the Tibetan it is translated as the latter.
backThe text does not specify what the number two hundred and seventy-seven thousand refers to; it could be the number of subjects in Turuṣka’s realm, or perhaps his revenue.
backstong phrag brgyad cu rtsa gcig gi/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “eighty-one thousand.”
backdes kyang sngags ni rab bsgrubs pa/ /sa steng rgyal po’i ched du’o/ /phyogs che dpung ni chen po dang / /rgyal po grags pa chen po ste/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will have accomplished the mantra, / To benefit the king on earth. / There will be a great many vassals and a great army, / And the king will have great fame.”
backgnyen dang rigs dang rgyal pos kyang / /de ni bkur ba nyid du ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be revered by his / Friends, family, and other kings.”
back“Eight thousand” or, possibly, “one thousand and eight.”
backThe Skt. nāga can indicate both a nāga or an elephant. “Elephant” is often the name given to the followers of the Buddha, especially in the context of conflicts arising between the Buddhist and the brahmanical religions. A pun may be intended here with both these meanings implied, that of a nāga and of a (human) Buddhist.
backA pun may be intended here, as yakṣa can indicate both a yakṣa or a person from the north.
backde yi tshe na ’byung bar ’gyur/ /de ltar rnam pa mang po bstan/ /sa dag ’jig rten rnam grags pa/ /bstan dang ston par ’gyur ba yin/ D. The Tibetan syntax is obscure, but the Tibetan for this verse might translate as, “Thus it is said that at that time / There will be many types / Of kings who will be known throughout the world, / And they will teach the teachings.”
backThe country of the Lāḍas corresponds to modern Gujarat.
back#UT22084-088-038-14712om. Tib.
backgrong khyer phyin nas yang dag zhugs/ Tib. The name Vallabhī appears to correspond to the Tibetan grong khyer phyin here.
backrig pa’i bdag nyid Tib. In place of “will apply himself,” the Tibetan. translates as, “learned in the vidyā,” reflecting the Sanskrit *vidyātmā instead of the extant Skt. yuktātmā.
backdes na de ni sngags kyang grub/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will accomplish the mantra.”
backde nas de ni yid byung nas/ /rgyal po’i mi la rab khros te/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “After that, as he thought about it, / He became very angry at the king’s servants.”
back“Supremely happy” is a play on words that involves the realm’s name—Tuṣita—meaning “happy.”
backlo ni lnga bcu rtsa lnga dang / /de bzin zla ba lnga ru ’tsho/ /de srid rgyal srig des byas nas/ D. The last three verses of the Tibetan translate as, “He will live for fifty-five years / And five months. / After he has ruled the kingdom for some time.”
backde yi nu bo brtan zhes bya/ D. Anuja can mean a younger brother (as in the Tibetan), or just anybody younger. If Jayaswal’s identifications of these kings are correct, Dhruva was Capala’s nephew (Jayaswal 1934, p. 24).
backbrtan pa chos ni brtan par ’gyur/ D. There seems to be a figure of speech intended here, as the name Dhruva can mean “firmly holding on.” The Tibetan translates as, “Dhruva will support the Dharma,” and possibly reflects the Sanskrit *dharmasthāvaratāṃ gataḥ (“he became established in the Dharma”). The Tibetan variant doesn’t agree with the next verse, however, where Dhruva is described as “servile, miserable, and foolish.”
backThe Skt. sevaka seems to stand for strīsevaka (“womanizer”). The first pāda, sevakaḥ kṛpaṇo mūrkhaḥ, is similar to the first pāda of the verse #UT22084-088-038-7094 below, strīvaśaḥ kṛpaṇo mūrkhaḥ (“heartsick fool controlled by women”).
backsngon ni bkren pa zham ring gyur/ /yul ni la da’i bdag por gyur/ /lhag ma rgyal po thams cad dang / /skye dgu kun kyang zham ring po/ D. To bring the translation closer in meaning to the Tibetan, the Skt. mūrdhāntās (which makes no sense in the context) has been emended to pūrvāntās (“formerly ended”), as the letter p is often confused with m, and so is v with dh. The Tibetan possibly reflects the reading *prajānām tu sevakāḥ (“the servants of the people”). Given this confusion, the translation here is only tentative. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who were previously poor servants / Will become the rulers of the Lāḍa country, / And all of the kings who are left / Will become servants to all the people.”
backtshul khrims zhes bya rab ’das nas/ /de ni de dag kun gyi sngar/ /sa bdag thams cad ’byung ’gyur ba/ /dpa’ bo rgya mtsho’i pha rol ’gro/ D. The translation of this verse is slightly problematic. The Tibetan translates as, “After Śīla dies, he and / All of the kings that / Came before all of them / Will cross the hero’s ocean.”
backme tog gzhu dang rgyal po’i bu/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as “And Prince Puṣpadhanus.”
backdang po’i dang po snga ma dag /ba la’i grong du ’byung ba yin/ /’od ces bya ba stod rnams dang / /de bzhin khyab ’jug ces bya ba/ D. This probably means that the element “prabha” or “viṣṇu” will be part of their names. The term stod rnams in the Tibetan is most likely a scribal error for stong rnams (sahasrāṇi). The Tibetan translates as, “These very first forefathers / Will be born in the city of Vallabhī. / There will be thousands of them / Named either Prabha or Viṣṇu.”
backya de ba yi rigs su byung/ Y, K, C; ya nga ba yi rigs su ’byung/ D. The reading ya nga ba in D reflects a common scribal error for ya da ba given the similarities between the Tibetan characters for da and nga. All of the Tibetan witnesses here preserved a proximate rendering of the Skt. Yādava used to indicate the descendants of Yadu..
backgrong dang skye bo gnyen dang bcas/ /drang srong dmod pas gnod gyur pas/ /blo ldan rgyal po med par ’gyur/ /grong khyer chu yis rab tu gang / /de tshe de yi res ldan grong / /rgya mtsho chen pos rab tu gang/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The town with its citizens and his kin / Will be harmed by a ṛṣi’s curse. / When the wise king is gone / The city will be flooded, and / Then his Vāravatī / Will be flooded by the ocean.”
backThe first dynasty mentioned here is the Scythian Śaka dynasty, which established itself in northwestern India, including Kashmir.
backnyi shu gcig dang sum cu yi/ /mi yi rgyal por shes byar bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Twenty one and thirty / Will be called kings.”
back“The middle country” is probably part of the “northern area” mentioned above and refers to Madhyadeśa, i.e., roughly to the Gangetic plain.
backmtha’ yas Tib. Instead of ante (“in the end”) the Tibetan reflects the reading anante, which could have been an attempt to correct the meter.
backJayaswal identifies this dynasty as the “Nāga dynasty of the Bhāraśivas,” which ruled Madhyadeśa fom 150 to 348 ce (Jayaswal 1934, p. 26).
backbdung zhes bya ba ’phrod byed gzhan Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Another Hara named Kunta.”
backphreng kun Tib. According to Jayaswal, Paṅkti is a corruption of Avanti, which seems to be backed by historical evidence (Jayaswal 1934, p. 27). In the Tibetan Śarva (emended from “Sarva”) and Paṅkti are a single name *Sarvapaṅkti.
backThese eight kings have been identified by Jayaswal as “the Maukharis,” who ruled Madhyadeśa from 550 to 600 ce (Jayaswal 1934, p. 27).
backdus kun chos lugs rnam par nyams/ /rgyal po de dag dus las ’das/ /des ni bram ze rigs byung ba/ /de tshe longs spyod che nor dang / Tib. It is unclear if viṣṇuprabhavau means “[the two] descended from [the king] Viṣṇu,” or is a dvandva compound with the meaning “Viṣṇu and Prabhava.” The Tibetan differs from the Skt. and translates as, “When they lose control for all time, / Those kings’ time will pass. / One who is born in a brahmin family / At that time will be wealthy and prosperous.” Here the Tibetan term chos lugs translates the Skt. maryāda.
backbar mthar yi ge dang po b+ha/ /de tshe blon po gnyi ga gtso/ /gnyi ga nor ldan dpal ldan grags/ /bstan pa la ni phan par dga’/ D. In the Tib., this verse translates as, “The middle and the last will begin with Bh. / There will be two chief ministers at that time, and / Both will be known to be wealthy and glorious. / They will delight in benefiting the teachings.”
backThis makes the number of the district’s inhabitants 16,800. Jayaswal, however (Jayaswal 1934, p. 29), isolates the word “three” from this sentence and interprets it as the three kings: (1) Ādityavardhana, (2) either Prabhākaravardhana or Rājyavardhana, and (3) Harṣavardhana, all three of the Śrīkaṇṭḥa-Sthāṇvīśvara dynasty.
backJayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 29), again, isolates the name Āditya and takes it to be the name of the king Ādityavardhana.
backbdun dang brgyad dang de bzhin gsum/ /te tshe dpal mgrin gnas na ’dug /ston pa nyi ma zhes bya ba’i/ /gnas na dbang phyug rab tu gnas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “There will be seven, eight, and likewise three / Who will reside in Śrīkaṇṭha then. / The teacher known as Āditya / Will live in Sthāneśvara.”
backAccording to Jayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 29), the third king whose name begins with H is Harṣavardhana.
back“Dharma King” most likely refers here to the buddha Śākyamuni.
backrgyal po dkar dang zla mdzes dang / D. The Skt. phrase śvetasucandraś ca suggests that these are two kings, Śveta and Sucandra. Jayaswal, however, interprets śvetasucandra as a single name on the assumption that śveta is a corruption of svāti; this phrase thus refers to Svātisucandra. In the Tibetan, śvetasucandra is taken to be two different kings, Śveta (rgyal po dkar) and Sucandra (zla mdzes).
backlongs spyod skra bzang skra zhes su/ Tib. The Tibetan suggests that these names could be *Bhogakeśin (longs spyod skra) and *Sukeśin (bzang skra), which would restore the eight-syllable meter.
backThe translation of this verse follows the interpretation found in Jayaswal 1934, p. 30.
backsangs rgyas dag pa Tib. The Tibetan reflects the variant *Buddha instead of the extant Skt. Budha.
backThe list of kings in this and other verses in this passage is very confusing, without a clear indication of which is the proper name and which is a moniker.
backmnyam dang legs par ’jam pa dang / Tib. There is no name in the Tibetan matching Mathita. Jayaswal appears to have reconstructed these names from the Tibetan as *Sahita and *Sumañju.
backJayaswal was unable to identify Bala; he is also omitted in the Tib.
backThe epithet keśin relates to hair, and thus refers to the two kings mentioned next, whose names relate to hair: “Pulina” suggests horripilating hair and “Sukeśin” fine hair.
backde ltar ’di dag rgyal po rnams/ /kan tsi pu rar gnas par bstan/ /de bzhin stong phrag rnam grags pa/ /de tshe ’byung bar ’gyur ba yin/ Tib. The Skt. is confused at this point, as it seems to have an extra pāda. The Tibetan translates as, “It is said that these kings / Will reside in the city of Kāñci. / Likewise it was said that there will be / One thousand [kings] at that time.”
backFor metrical reasons, the Skt. uses in place of Mañjughoṣa the synonymous form Mañjubhāṇin.
backkho ra ’khor yug ko sa la/ D. A part of this pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt. lacunae).
backo Da yul gyi mtshams kun na/ / D. The geographic references in this verse are confusing. Jayaswal suggests that the Kāmarūpa line of kings ruled in upper Burma (Jayaswal 1934, p. 32). “Maritime provinces” could refer to countries in southeast Asia and the Indonesian archipelago ruled, at that time, by Indian kings. In the Tibetan, the Skt. phrase udrasandhiṣu (“in the maritime provinces”) is translated as “on the border of the land of Od[r]a,” probably referring to Oḍra.
backThe designation mleccha denotes people outside of brahmanical social order and therefore strongly suggests that they were Buddhists, as is the case here.
backde nas skyes pa thams cad ni/ Tib. “All the beings” has been supplied from the Tibetan, as some words appear to be missing in the Skt.
backThe Skt. gauḍavardhana could be interpreted as a proper name or, literally, “one who brings prosperity to Gauḍa.”
backsa bdag mang po rnams mnan nas/ /zho shas ’tsho ba dag tu byas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will overcome many kings and / Turn them into laborers.”
backThe “middle period” seems to refer here to the middle part of the period covered by the prophecy (the prophecy ends in the eighth century ce).
back“Provide comfort” om. Tib.
backThe king with the initial S is identified by Jayaswal as king Skanda (Jayaswal 1934, p. 33).
backde yi nu bo byis zhes bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translation of anuja (nu bo) is commonly understood to signify a “younger brother,” which is also a viable interpretation of the Skt. anuja, but might be historically inaccurate in this case.
backbstan pa ’di la phan zhing dga’/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will propagate and rejoice in this teaching.”
backlo ni sum brgya dag tu’ang ’tsho/ /zhag ni sum cur rab byung nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will live for three hundred years. / He will take a thirty-day ordination, and.”
backpha rol rgol bas pham byas te/ /de nas rgyal pos rang srog bcad/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be defeated by a false teacher, / And the king will take his own life.” It is possible to bring the meaning close to the Tibetan by emending the second pāda to °ādhyāpakasampramūrcchitaḥ (“made confused by the teacher, [the king will kill himself]”). It is also possible that the Skt. is corrupt, and the original version was that it was his son who would commit suicide, which would fit perfectly with the second half-stanza.
backThis half-stanza is missing from the Tib.
backzhag gsum dang ni gcig dag tu/ Tib. The Skt. and the Tibetan translate as, “For three days and one,” which is probably a metri causa.
backder ni lha rgyal zhes byar ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be known as Devarāja.” Devarāja means “king of gods.”
backgrong khyer ’phags rgyal zhes bya ba/ /de tshe ma la bar skye’o/ Tib. The Skt. translates literally as, “among the nation of Kālavas.” The Tibetan translates as, “Then he will be born among the Malavas / In the city named Ujjayinī.”
backVargacārin (“one who mixes with the crowd”) is one of the two types of pratyekabuddhas, the other being khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa, i.e., the “rhinoceros”-like, solitary type.
backyid la ni rdzu ’phrul la dad nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “His mind convinced of their power.”
backgzhan gyi dbang gis ’dir yang phyin/ D. The last pāda seems a little strange, but the Tibetan confirms it.
backde ltar rnam mang sems can dang / /de bzhin phun tshogs rgya che ba/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus all manner of beings / Will greatly benefit as well.”
backgo DA nus pa’i ngang tshul can/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “A Gauḍa with strong ethics.”
back“The king with the initial U was identified by Jayaswal as Budhagupta, who ruled toward the end of the fifth century ce (Jayaswal 1934, p. 39).
backrgyal po lam ni byed par shes/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Known as one who carries out the path of a king,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *mārgadharaḥ instead of the extant Skt. māgadhakaḥ.
backJayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p.43) takes the Skt. word for “twelve,” dvādaśa, to be the name of Candra’s son, Dvādaśāditya. It is difficult to tell if Jayaswal is right or not; the word gaṇanāṃ that follows after dvādaśa suggests that dvādaśa is not a proper name but just a number. However, the word gaṇanāṃ (the meter indicates that it doesn’t belong to this verse) could have been added erroneously by a scribe or a redactor to make sense of dvādaśa as a number.
backlo rgyad bcas pa dag tu ’tsho/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Will live for eight years.” The Skt. phrase māsaparampara suggests that his remaining life will be counted in months.
backThis king has not been identified by Jayaswal.
backThis king has not been identified by Jayaswal.
backThis king has not been identified by Jayaswal.
backde dag mang po ston byed cing / /grags dang snyan pa’i don la brtson/ Tib. The meaning of this half-stanza in the Skt. is uncertain as the grammar is unclear. The Tibetan translates as, “He will demonstrate many of these things / And will expend his efforts for the sake of fame and notoriety.”
backrtag tu cho gar yang dag ldan/ /ka ba nye bar gnas gyur tshe/ Tib. The Tibetan may be corrupt here and translates as, “He will always be engaged in ritual / And his life will be recorded on a pillar.” The translation “recorded on” is only a conjecture for the term nye bar gnas (*upasthita?) here.
backlo ni sum cu dag dang bdun/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “thirty-seven.”
backlha rnams dag tu nye bar skyes/ D. “God realms” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “animal realm.”
backDespite the Skt. tataḥ (“then/next”), we are now, according to Jayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 47), jumping back in time, as the Nāga kings ruled Bengal from the second to the fourth centuries ce. Notwithstanding Jayaswal’s argument, the Skt. could also be interpreted that King Gopālaka will be reborn in the animal realm as the king of the nāgas (cf. verse #UT22084-088-038-7318 below, where a king is reborn as the king of the nāgas).
back“Nāga” here suggests the Nāga dynasty of Bengal, rather than a personal name. The word nāga (“elephant”) is also used when referring to Buddhists in the context of struggles between Buddhists and brahmins. Thus the “Nāga king” could simply mean a Buddhist king. The same king and other kings from the same dynasty are treated again in #UT22084-088-038-7194 and the following verses.
backbrtul zhugs can ni mthur ldan pa/ /sbyin gnas zhes pas dbang yang bskur/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza has been informed by Jayaswal’s analysis. The Tibetan differs and translates as, “He will be consecrated by a vow holder / With the authority to do so named *Dakṣiṇīya.”
backma zhu pas ni rab btab nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Being uninvited, he will be attacked.”
backJayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 48) identifies Samudra with Samudragupta who ruled Gauḍa and Magadha in the third quarter of the fourth century. If the Sanskrit and the Tibetan texts are correct, though, Jayaswal’s interpretation cannot be right.
backblo ngan lo ni gsum gyi bar/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “three years.”
backbab col chen po rab tu byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Will do a lot of foolish things.”
backJayaswal takes the description in this and the following verses to apply not to Bhasma, but to Samudra.
backbyis par gyur pas ’di nyid sems/ /pha rol din ni de mi sems/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be a fool who only cares about this life / And does not care about the next life.”
backkha che’i sgo yi mthar thug bar/ /byang gi phyogs la brten nas ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Occupying the northern territory / Up to the gate of Kaśmīra.”
backbcu gnyis lo dang zla ba lngar/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “For twelve years and five months.”
back“Onto the ground” om. Tib.
backmtshan ma tsam zhig de byas nas/ /phyir yang de ni ’byung bar ’gyur/ /bran ze’i gtso bo gnyis kyis ni/ /de dag phan tshun phye nas ni/ D. The Tibetan is obscure and might translate as, “They will make him [ruler] in name only, / And they will be [in power?] again. / The two chief brahmins / Shall then divide [the kingdom?] between themselves.”
backbdag nyid ngan pa’i rtsod rgyal gyis/ /byis pa’i gtso bo de gnyis pos/ /mi dge’i bshes gnyen la brten nas/ /srog chags mang po rab tu bsad/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Naturally contentious, wicked kings, / Both of those child leaders / Will take unvirtuous spiritual advisors and / Kill many living beings.”
backgang zhig sngon gyi rgyal pos bkur/ /dpa’ bas nga rgyal byed pa gang / /go Dar skye bo gnas pa dag /thams cad dag ni gsod par rtsom/ D. The exact meaning of this verse is uncertain. The Tibetan is also obscure but might translate as, “Someone will be honored by the former king / Who will act proud due to his valor / And begin killing all of / The people who live in Gauḍa.”
backston pa’i gzugs brnyan nyams dga’ ba/ /blo ngan gyis ni ’jig par ’gyur/ /chos kyi stegs ni mi nyung ba/ /rgyal ba rnams kyis sngon bstan pa/ /blo ngan dag gis bsreg ’gyur zhing / /mu stegs rnams ni gsod par dga’/ /de nas de ni khro dang chags/ /mi sdom log pa’i nga rgyal can/ D. The Tibetan for #UT22084-088-038-14941 translates as, “The fool will destroy / Beloved images of the Buddha. / The many bridges of Dharma / That the victors foretold / Will be burnt by fools, and / He will delight in killing tīrthikas. / Thus he will be a wrathful and lustful person / Who is disloyal and takes pride in wrongdoing.”
backThe king with the initial R is Rājyavardhana.
backrigs bdag nyid/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “knowledgeable.”
back“This teaching,” i.e., the Dharma teachings.
backston pa’i bstan pa ’di la dad/ /zla ba zhes bya’i rgyal mchog des/ /gcer bu’i rigs gyur rgyal po ni/ /de yang rab tu bsad par gyur/ Y, J, K, C, U, H. The Skt. grammar of this verse seems to indicate that the “king of the Nagna caste” was the just-mentioned Soma (Śaśāṅka?). Soma is later described as a brahmin, and it is not clear what nagnajāti refers to (if Soma is even the referent!); possibly it is used here as a term of contempt. The Skt. yāti tavān has been emended to pātita eva (p is often confused with y in manuscripts). The translation proposed here is far from definitive. The Tibetan translates as, “He will have faith in this teacher’s teaching. / The supreme ruler by the name of Soma / Will kill / The king of the Nagna caste.” The “Nagna caste” could refer to naked (nagna) ascetics, or perhaps to Digambara Jains.
backThe new king with the initial H is Harṣavardhana.
backbsod nams che ba’i grong mchog song / Tib. The Tibetan translation of Puṇḍra reflects the reading puṇya.
backrgyal rigs chos la gnas nas ni/ /chos kyi don shes brtser ldan pas/ /de ni nga rgyal khro tshul gyis/ /srog chags mang po gsod byed cing / /sems can gnod pa byed pa dang / /chad pa byed la rab dka’ zhing / D. In the Tibetan the last six pādas appear in a different order and translate as, “He will maintain the duties of a kṣatriya and / Will understand the meaning of the Dharma and be merciful, // Then, out of pride and anger, / He will kill many living beings and / Delight in harming beings / And causing destruction.”
backkla klo’i rgyal pos rab tu mchod/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Honored by the mleccha king.”
backThis pāda seems to contain a figure of speech. The phrase rājyaharṣa (“joy of kingship”) consists of the short forms of the names of Rājyavardhana and Harṣavardhana, i.e., the R-initialed and H-initialed kings, thus providing the basis for the other interpretation, namely that the task will be accomplished by Rājyavardhana and Harṣavardhana.
backThe narrative of the following verses seems to indicate that the prophecy switches now back to Soma.
backde yi las kyi mthu yis ni/ D. “Karma” is the Tibetan reading; the Skt., which appears to be corrupt, translates as, “Dharma.”
backlha mi’i rgyal srid chen po thob/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will obtain a vast dominion over gods and humans.”
backlo ni bcu dang bdun dag dang / Tib. The meaning of this verse is unclear, as it appears to be missing one pāda in both the Skt. and the Tibetan.
backmi ma yin pas nyen pa yi/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be afflicted by nonhuman beings,” reflecting the (hypermetrical) Sanskrit *amāṇuṣeṇaiva instead of the extant Skt. māṇuṣeṇaiva.
backtheg pa la ni chags med ’gyur/ Tib. The Skt. of the last two pādas is hypermetrical and corrupt, and the meaning is not completely clear. Of the three (sūtra) vehicles of the hearers, the pratyekabuddhas, and the bodhisattvas, it is probably the last two that imply complete freedom from attachment. In the Tibetan, the last pāda translates as, “They do not have attachment to the vehicles.”
back#UT22084-088-038-14996om. Tib.
backde thse thsogs kyi rgyal srid rgyud/ Tib. The Skt. term gaṇarājya (“popular rule”) suggests some form of a republic, or perhaps a king’s rule that enjoys wide popular support.
backThe unedited Skt. reading could suggest that “Mānava” is an epithet or another name of Soma.
backzla ba brgyad dang zhag lnga dang / /phyed dang gnyis zhag ’das nas ’chi/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “For eight months and five days / And then die over the course of one and a half days.”
backThis and other kings from the same Nāga dynasty have already been mentioned in #UT22084-088-038-7103 and the following verses.
backde’i mthar rgyal po ’dug pa ni/ /klu yi rgyal po zhes bya ba/ /go DA’i yul gyi rgyal po ’byung/ Tib. Both the Tibetan and the Sanskrit are missing one pāda, but the Tibetan may provide the material missing in #UT22084-088-038-15006, while the Skt. 53.683b may provide the material missing from the Tibetan translation of the verse. When we combine the two, we can reconstruct the following four-line verse: “The last king of that line / Will be a young boy of the vaiśya caste / Named Nāgarāja / Who will become the king of Gauḍa.”
backThis pāda is very obscure. The caste of the boy’s advisers could be brahmin (dvija)—if we emend the reading viśau to dvijau—or vaiśya (viś), and the dual ending suggests that there are two of them. The Tibetan seems to corroborate the former.
backdang por dza ma’i rigs bram ze/ /kun nas rje’u rigs kyis bskor ba’i/ /klu zhes bya ba de yang ’byung / D. This verse appears to be reduced in the Tibetan to just three pādas that translate as, “At first the one called Nāga / Will be completely surrounded by / Brahmins (such as Jama) and vaiśyas.”
backder ni lo ni lnga dang gcig /rgyal srid kun nas ’khrugs bzhin spyod/ /srog gcod mang po byas nas ni/ /de tshe srog la gnod par byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Then, for six years / There will be unrest everywhere in the kingdom. / Many will lose their lives, / And the living will be traumatized.”
backbud med gtso bo’i byis pa ni/ D. Jayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 47) takes śiśu to be the name of a Vākāṭaka king. The Tibetan, which does not reflect this interpretation, translates as, “The child of the chief woman.”
backyid ni skrag par gyur pa yis /shar phyogs yul mi nyams par gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “They will be terrified, and as a result / The people of the east will be defeated.”
backThe king with the initial Bh has been identified by Jayaswal as Bhānugupta (Jayaswal 1934, p. 63).
backde bu yi ge pra zhes bya/ D. In place of P, the Tib. has Pr.
backrgyal rigs mchog tu skyes par bstan/ Tib. The Tibetan translates the Skt. agraṇī (“prominent”) as mchog tu skyed pa or “high born.”
backlegs par spyod pas byis par bcing/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “As a child, he will be imprisoned for his behavior.”
backyi ge ha zhes rgyal chen ni/ D. The translation follows the Tibetan here. In the Skt., his initial is A, but since the king in question is probably Hūṇa (Toramana), H seems more plausible.
backgo DA’i skye bo zhes grags grong / /mu stegs zhes kyang rnam par grags/ /rgyal pos de ni rnam mnan nas/ /stobs chen de ni ’dug par gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The king named Tīrtha / Will attack the city / Named Gauḍajana, / And his great army will occupy the city.”
backde tshe bu ni dbang yang bskur/ /byis pa khye’u phug ces pa/ Tib. The boy’s name is Soma (as indicated in the #UT22084-088-038-7240 below), which means “moon,” so the boy has the name of a planet. Jayaswal identifies this boy as Mihira (mihira can refer to the sun or the moon). The Tibetan, however, reflects the Sanskrit *guha instead of the extant Skt. graha, which it takes to be the proper name Guha.
backskye ba bye ba phrag dgur ni/ lha yi ’jig rten dag du gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will spend ninety million / Lives in the god realms.”
back“This king,” i.e., the king with the initial H, first mentioned in #UT22084-088-038-7217 above, is identified by Jayaswal as Hūṇa (Toramana).
backchabs ’og rgyal phran gyis bcom pa’i/ /rgyal thabs rnam ’jig ’byung bar ’gyur/ U; chags ’og rgyal phran gyis bcom pa’i/ /rgyal thabs rnam ’jig ’byung bar ’gyur/ D. Following the variant in U, the Tibetan translates as, “Conquered by a vassal kingdom, / The kingdom will be completely destroyed.”
backrgyal po de ni gdon gyis ’dzin/ Tib. There is a play on words here as the phrase rājā grahacihnitaḥ (“the king designated as a ‘planet’ ”) can also mean “the king showing the symptoms (cihnita) of possession (graha).” Possibly both these meaning are intended at the same time.
backyi ge pra zhes rgyal rigs ni/ Tib. This kṣatriya, mentioned earlier in #UT22084-088-038-7222, has been identified by Jayaswal as Prakaṭāditya (Jayaswal 1934, p. 65). In the Tibetan, his initial is given as Pr.
backyi ge ha yis yongs su mchod/ D. In the Skt., the initial is A. The Tibetan reading H could be correct, though, if Jayaswal is right in identifying this king as Hūṇa (Toramana).
backsngon gyi las kyis yongs bskul nas/ /rgyal rigs rgyal por ’byung bar ’gyur/ /de nyid las byas byed bcug dang / /rjes su yang ni yi rang byas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Propelled by karma from a previous life, / That kṣatriya will become king. / That will make him enact his previous karma, / And he will be pleased.”
back“Kanaka” probably refers to Kanakamuni, one of the past tathāgatas.
backskyon bral bdag nyid grol ba dang / Tib. Instead of yuktātmā (“wholly engaged/focused”), the Tibetan seems to reflect the Sanskrit *muktātmā (“liberated”).
backder gnas rnams la yang dag dgongs/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He surveyed the entire area,” which is also possible.
backbyis pa’i spyi bor lag byugs nas/ D. The meaning of the Skt. mūrdhni-m-āsṛjya is unclear. It could perhaps have a figurative meaning of “placing at the head,” i.e., “allowing to be a leader.” The Tibetan translates as, “He rubbed the boy’s head with his hand.”
backthong shig D. In place of “Let us go,” the Tibetan translates as, “Let us look.”
backskye bo’i mchog gyur phan ’dod pa/ /de yi lhung bzed blangs nas ni/ D. The translation proposed here presumes that the Skt. agrajite is a shortened form of agrajitendriye. The Tibetan translates as, “That exemplary man who wanted to be helpful / Took his alms bowl and…”
backgtsug lag khang song zas la spyad/ D. “Went back to his monastery” has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backmu stegs rnams la rab dad nas/ /bstan pa la ni de mi mchod/ D. The Tibetan has two additional pādas at this point that translate as, “He was devoted to the heretics and / Did not worship the teachings.”
back“Bald head” is a derogatory term describing a Buddhist monk.
backbyis pa de yi sems can la/ /de lta bu yi zhe sdang skyes/ /ston pas nye bar bsngags pa yi/ /chos kyi zam pa grags pa dang / /sa steng lha khang mchod rten mchog/ /mu stegs rnams kyis de dag bshig/ /tshong dpon mchog gi bu de la/ /kun nas ’khrug pa’i sems kyang byas/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15100 translates as, “This made the being / Who was that young boy angry as well, / And the famous Bridge of the Dharma / That the teacher had praised / And the earthly monasteries and supreme caityas / Were destroyed by the tīrthikas. / The senior merchant’s son / Was thoroughly disturbed by this.”
backgnyis pa’i byis pa gang yin de/ /zla ba zhes bya’i rgyal po yin/ /rnam smin de yis mi ’dod pa/ /yun ring sdug bsngal rjes su myong / D. The Tibetan translates as, “The one who was the second child / Was the king Soma. / He will experience undesirable suffering / For a long time due to the maturation [of his karma].”
backde tshe de tshe de dang der/ Tib. This pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan (Skt.: lacunae).
backtha ma’i skye ba thob pa na/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “In his final human birth.”
backThis king is the king mentioned earlier with the initial P, identified by Jayaswal as Prakaṭāditya.
backrgyal po de yi bstan pa nyams/ Tib. This pāda is problematic. The Skt. reading nagnasandhi (“naked joint”) has been tentatively emended to bhagnasandhi (“broken joint”). The Tibetan translates as, “The teaching that king possessed will fade away.”
backrnam par smin pa’i las de yis/ /byis pa rgyal po’i dbang phyug byed/ /med par rgyal po byed par ’gyur/ /yod pa rab tu ’jig par ’gro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Due to the maturation of that karma, / The boy will be made king / When he lacks a king’s power to rule, / And what he has will be brought to ruin.”
backblo grol Y; blo gros D.
backThe P-initialed king is first mentioned in verse #UT22084-088-038-7211 above.
backAnother name of Vārāṇasī.
backThe Skt. of the first two pādas is clearly corrupt and the meaning unclear. The name Pañcakesarī (“Five Lions”) seems to correspond to the city in Orissa of the same name, where a dynasty called Siṃha (“Lion”) ruled.
backde ni seng ge lnga zhes bya/ /pham nas rgyal pos gzhan yang pham/ Tib. The first three pādas correspond to two pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “After the ones called the Five Lions / Are defeated, the other kings will also be defeated.”
back53.757–759 are translated from the Tibetan, as they are omitted in the Skt.
backIt is unclear who is being referred to by “he,” whether Deva or the P-initialed kṣatriya king, but it is likely to be the latter, as he is mentioned again in verse #UT22084-088-038-7332 below.
backAgain, it is unclear whether this kṣatriya king is the P-initialed king first mentioned in verse #UT22084-088-038-7211 above, or a new king called “Born Prosperous” (Abhivardhamānajanma). The Tibetan (from where this and the previous two verses have been supplied) seems to take abhivardhamānajanma as the name of a new king. However, the narrative in this section of the prophecy seems to indicate that “born prosperous” is just an epithet of the P-initialed kṣatriya king, whose section began at verse #UT22084-088-038-7211 above and will end with verse #UT22084-088-038-7332 below; this also is the understanding of Jayaswal (Jayaswal 1934, p. 66).
backAbhivardhamānajanma literally means “one whose birth/life is of increasing prosperity.”
backIt is unclear what the two numbers seven refer to—possibly months and days respectively.
backrdzu ’phrul chen po klu yi rgyal/ /blo ldan dud ’gro’i nang du gnas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be born in the animal realm / As a wise and powerful nāga king.”
back#UT22084-088-038-15149om. Tib.
backtshong pa sngags ni grub pa ste/ /ji ltar ’dod pa’i blo byed cing / /de tshe rig pa’i rgyal po dang / /de tshe bde ’gro dag tu gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The merchant will be a master of mantra. / He will accomplish whatever his mind desires and / Then become a king of the vidyās. / Then he will be in the higher realms.”
backEach of the three epithets used here, jina (“victor”), sugata, and cakravartin, imply the highest realization of a buddha.
backde yi tshe na ’khor los gyur/ /sna tshogs rtog ces rgyal por ’gyur/ /de bzhin du ni blo ldan de/ /de tshe rig ’dzin chos kyang ’chad/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then he will become a cakravartin / King named Citraketu, / And that wise one will / Then teach the vidyādhara dharma.”
backIt is unclear what the two numbers refer to, but possibly months and days.
backThis half-stanza, about him progressing toward awakening, is somewhat at odds with the epithets used earlier—jina, sugata, and cakravartin—that suggest that he had already attained the highest accomplishment.
backde yang lo ni gsum dag tu/ /rgyal po’i dbang phyug byas nas ni/ / Tib. Before this pāda, the Tibetan adds another two pādas that translate as, “Moreover, after carrying out the / Sovereign duties of a king for three years.”
backThe Tibetan includes the material in #UT22084-088-038-15158 but omits the material in Skt. 53.769c. It then omits the material in Skt. 769ef–53.771.
backThe Skt. anuja can mean “younger brother,” as well as younger relative or person.
backThe phrase rājyavardhana (“[one who brings] prosperity to the kingdom”) is taken by Jayaswal to be a proper name (Jayaswal 1934, p. 66).
backde yi nu bo yig pa zhes/ /brtul zhugs can du rnam par gnas/ /lo ni gsum dang gcig dag tu/ /rgyal srid yongs su ’phel bar byas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “His younger brother with the initial P / Will be consecrated as a vow observer. / Over a period of four years / He will make the kingdom prosperous.”
backThis passage, including the preceding verse, is rather unclear. “Both of them” possibly means the V-initialed king and his supervisor. Jayaswal, however, interprets this passage differently, namely that “both of them” refers to the V-initialed king, whom he identifies as Vajra, and his successor Rājyavardhana (Jayaswal 1934, p. 66).
backde ma thag tu ’khru bas btab/ /’di dag gnyis ga ’chi bar gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Shortly after that they will / Contract dysentery and both die.”
back“His” seems to refer to the king with the initial V.
backde’i yang nu bo yig pa zhes/ Tib. In the Tibetan his initial is P.
backThis king, with the initial Dh, has been identified by Jayaswal as the ruler of Magadha, Dharasena IV (Jayaswal 1934, p. 66).
backde’i yang nu bo rgyal po ni/ Tib. The word “brother” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. kanyasa suggests either the youngest brother or the youngest son. Jayaswal, however, identifies this king, despite his initial V, as the Magadhan ruler Dhruvasena III. Jayaswal interprets the term kanyasa (“youngest”) as the “youngest uncle,” based on his identification of this king as the youngest of the grand uncles of Dharasena IV (Jayaswal 1934, p. 67).
backyi ge dza zhes rnam par bsgrags/ D. In the Tibetan his initial is given as J.
backrta dang shing rta glang po dmag /kun nas gru dang theg pa yis/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “With horses, chariots, war elephants, / Boats, and vehicles in every direction.”
backde tshe sngon gyi rgyal po de’i/ /bram ze de bzhin shA ga rigs skye/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Then a previous king / Will take birth as a brahmin in a Śāka family.” All of the Tibetan witnesses contain some rendering of the Sanskrit *Śāka instead of the extant Skt. Śākya. They also all indicate that these lines describe a brahmin who is the companion of the kṣatriya king who is the subject of this prophecy. Brahmins, kṣatriyas, and vaiśyas are all technically considered to be “twice-born” or dvija, though brahmins tend to be most closely associated with this title.
backde tshe dus kyi tha ma la/ /de nyid ’di yi grogs nyid ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “At that time, during the debased eon, / He will be this one’s friend.” In the Tibetan the extant Skt. sukhāyatām (sukhāyatam?) is translated as “friend,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *sahāyatām.
backu DI ya na rgyal po che/ D. In place of Gauḍa, the Tibetan translates as, Uḍīyana.
backu DI yan gyi grong mchog la/ /grong khyer yi ge pa zhes bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “In the capital city of Uḍīyana, / A city that begins with the initial P.” Jayaswal suggests that this city could be Vāruṇikā, which corresponds to the modern Deo Barnark in Bihar.
backder ni de tshe brgyad dag gi/ /gtsug lag khang yang byed par ’gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will construct / Eight monasteries there.”
backThis king has been identified by Jayaswal as Yaśovarman of the early eighth century.
backThe “P dynasty” seems to be the Gupta dynasty that begins with King Śrī (Jayaswal 1934, p. 68).
backdes ni bran tshogs rnams bsad nas/ /rang dbang du ni yongs su gyur/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will kill the assemblies of ministers, / And then rule on his own.”
backde yi spun zla gnyis pa ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “His second brother.”
backThe person with the initial R has been identified by Jayaswal as the Gupta emperor Viṣṇugupta Candrāditya, earlier in the text referred to as Candra (Jayaswal 1934, p. 71).
backde nas gzhan yang sa bdag ni/ /de tshe rgyal po bzang po byung / Tib. The meaning of this pāda is unclear. The Skt. śvāda (“dog eater”), if this reading is correct, implies someone of a degraded social status. In place of “dog eater,” the Tibetan reads bzang po, which cannot be a translation of śvāda, as it means “good,” “kind,” etc.
backgdengs ka che ldan mgyogs par ’gro/ Tib. The Skt. mahābhogin can mean “having a great hood” or “rich in comforts/opulent.” The Tibetan translation reflects the former.
backThere is a play on words here in the Skt., as sphuṭāṭopin can be translated as both “possessing an expanded hood” and “puffed up with pride.”
backmchog tu ’jigs rungs lus ldan zhing / /de tshe sgra ni drag par sgrogs/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will have an extremely frightening body / And will utter a fierce roar.”
backde la lor ni mi ’dod pa/ D. In the Tibetan the Skt. naiṣṭhika (“inevitable [result]”) is translated as “undesirable [result],” probably being read as na-iṣṭika.
backsa srung ’jig rten ’phel byed pa/ /’jig rten kun gyis shes pa ste/ /lus can shar phyogs gnas pa yin/ Tib. The Tibetan condenses this material into three pādas that translate as, “These kings who will bring prosperity to the world / And be known throughout the entire world / Will rule over the eastern people.”
backrgyal po yi ge pa zhes pa’i/ /rgyud rnams rgyud du skyes pa gzhan/ /rgyal rigs dpa’ bo rnam par gnon/ /de bzhin rgya mtsho gsum gyi bdag D. The Tibetan translates as, “Another king will be born in that royal line / Who bears the first initial P. / He will overcome a kṣatriya hero / And likewise [become] lord of the three oceans.”
backThis seems to be about the eight states where one has the freedom to practice the Dharma, and the eight states without this freedom.
backJayaswal has identified this king as Kumāragupta III, the late Gupta emperor of the Gauḍa dynasty.
backThe Gopālas are the dynasty better known under the name of Pāla.
backde bzhin ’od ma’i tshal chen dang / Tib. In place of the “grove of Mahābodhi,” the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *veṇuvana, which translates as the “Bamboo Grove.”
backsnying po med pa’i ’bab chu mchog/ Tib. This description of this river in the Skt. is somewhat of a mystery. The Tibetan translates as, “The supreme river Phalgu.” Phalgu is another name for the Nairañjana.
backBoth Tāra and Tārā mean “savior,” the first being masculine and the other feminine.
backsa bcu thob pa’i bdag po ni/ /gang yang byang chub sems de yang / /sems can rnams ni ’dul byed pa/ /zla ba zhes ni rnam par sgrags/ /rig pa’i rgyal mo rdzu ’phrul che/ /de ni sgrol ma zhes kyang bstan/ /bud med gzugs ’chang lha mo ni/ /’gro ba kun tu rnam par rgyu/ /snying rjes brlan pa’i sems kyis ni/ /sems can rnams la phan don du/ /mi mjed ’jig rten khams gnas nas/ /bud med ming gis ’jug par byed/ /sa bcu la ni rab gnas thob/ /byang chub sems dpa’ rdzu ’phrul che/ D. The Tibetan appears to repeat the material in #UT22084-088-038-15235, leading it to render the content in Skt. 53.814–816 in fourteen lines instead of twelve. The Tibetan translates as, “A lord who has attained the tenth level, / The bodhisattva who / Tames all beings / Known as Candra // Is also called Tārā, / The very powerful vidyārājñī. / Bearing the form of a woman, the goddess / Wanders all the realms of rebirth. // His mind flowing with compassion, / He remains in the Saha world / And exists nominally as a woman / In order to benefit beings. // He has attained mastery over on tenth level / And is a great powerful bodhisattva.”
backlongs spyod dbang phyug ’phel byed pas/ /’di ni lha mo bsgrub par bya/ /byang chub tshogs kyi ched du ni/ /skyed pa nyid nas brtsam par bya/ Tib. The last pāda is missing in the Skt., and the phrase “Merit and wisdom” supplied here is a conjecture. The Tibetan translates as, “This goddess should be accomplished / In order to increase wealth and power. / For the accumulation of awakening, / One should begin following the generation.” The final two pādas are obscure in the Tibetan as well as the Skt., but they seem to be indicating a bifurcation of rituals to Tārā along the lines of the accumulation of worldly wealth and power and the accumulation of the various factors that lead to awakening. The final pāda in the Tibetan, which is missing in the Skt., might refer to accomplishing the deity Tārā following the generation (skyed nyid nas) of bodhicitta, which would ground the practice in a more soteriological approach.
backHer being present in the eastern region could also be an allusion to her position in the maṇḍala, where the eastern quarter would likely be occupied by White Tārā.
backre ba thams cad dga’ rgyas phyir/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “To increase happiness and fulfill all hopes.”
backbdag nyid rnam pa stong dang ni/ Tib. “Five hundred” could be an allusion to the fact that Tārā manifests in seven, eight, twenty-one, or five hundred forms. In place of “five hundred,” the Tibetan has “one thousand.”
backde bzhin du yang ’grub par ’gyur/ Tib. “Also” reflects the Tibetan reading. The Skt. has “at that time.”
backdbus kyi yul du de bzhin sngags/ Tib. In place of “ministers” (mantrī, sngags pa), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mantra (sngags).
back#UT22084-088-038-15257om. Tib.
backdang po’i yi ge sha dang na/ /dang po’i yi ge par yang bstan/ /dang po’i yi ge ba dang e/ /dang po’i yi ge ar yang bstan/ /dang po’i yi ge har bstan te/ /dang po’i yi ge par yang sgrags/ D. The form and content of this list from #UT22084-088-038-15254 differs in the Tibetan and translates as, “Those who are known by the first initial Ś and N, / One known by the first initial P, / Those with the first initial V and E, / One known by the first initial A, / One known by the first initial H, / And again one with the first initial P.”
backzla ba’i rigs/ Tib. “Lunar dynasty” is the Tibetan translation of somacihnitaḥ (“marked by the moon”).
backThese three initials are given in the Tib. as J, V, and Dh.
backdang po’i yi ge dza dang ba/ /dang yig d+ha ni zla ba’i rigs/ /yi ge ha nyid rnam bsgrags dang / /de bzhin yang ni dang po’i a/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The lunar dynasty with the first initial / J, B, and the initial Dh, / One known by the initial H, / And again the first initial A.”
backdang po’i yi ge sa la yang / /bud med rigs min ’jig rten sdang / /dang po’i yi ge a dang ma/ /’jig rten rnams la mthu dang ldan/ Tib. This verse also differs slightly in the Tibetan and translates as, “Those with the first initials S and L / Who will not marry and will anger the people, / And those with the first initial A and M / Who will have power over the entire world.” The Tibetan phrase bud med rigs min that is translated here as “who will not marry” (lit. “not joined/endowed with a woman”) reflects the Sanskrit *srtyayuktāḥ in place of the extant Skt. stryākhyayā.
backde dag bar ma bzang po las/ /khyad par ring dang thung ba yin/ D. It is not clear what the words ucca (“high”) and nīca (“low”) in the Skt. refer to, whether their lifespan (as the context seems to indicate), or their physical height, or perhaps their high and low morals. The Tibetan translates as, “Based on whether they are middling or best, / [Their] particular [lifespan] will be short or long.”
backThe “middle” kings are missing from the enumerations below.
backdang po’i gtso bo chen po ni/ /rna can rgyal por rab tu bsgrags/ D. The form vṛtsudhāna could be corrupt. Jayaswal takes this to be the name of a king, Vṛtasudhāna. The Tibetan translates as, “The first great leader / Will be known as Karṇarāja.” Here the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Karṇarāja instead of the extant Skt. *Karmarāja.
backJayaswal interprets the phrase subhūtir bhūtiḥ as a single name, Subhūtibhūti. This could also be two names, Subhūti and Bhūti, or perhaps “the wealthy (subhūti) Bhūti.”
backlegs byin Tib. In place of the extant Skt. Sudaha, the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *Sudatta.
back#UT22084-088-038-15273om. Tib.
backThis half-stanza is very unclear. The second of the two initials (Th) has been supplied from the Tibetan, as the Skt. just translates as, “of the two letters V.” It is not clear what these letters refer to. Also, the names Subhū and Mṛga could be a single name, but Jayaswal takes them to be two names. It is also uncertain whether this verse is about the future or the past—the remainder of the verse seems to indicate that the narrative has now reverted to the time prior to the birth of the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backtha mar legs ’byor gzhon nu dang / /yi ge ba dang tha gnyis ni/ /yangs pa can du yang dag byung / /gang du thub pa de skyes pa/ ser skya zhes bya’i grong mchog tu/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The last were prince Subhūti, and / The two with the initials V and Th / Who were in Vaiśālī. / In the place where the Sage was born, / The capital city of Kapilavastu…” Here the Tibetan renders the material in #UT22084-088-038-15278 in six verses instead of four.
backtha mar zas btsang shA ga rigs kyi/ /nyi ma bu ram rigs skyed pa/ /tha mar zas gtsang rnam bsgrags pa/ /shAkya shaAkya’i rnam ’phel byed/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Śuddho[dana], the last of the Śākya clan, / Was born into the Solar lineage. / Śuddho[dana] is known as the last / Śākya who brought prosperity to the Śākya people.”
backsems can brtson ’grus chung bar ni/ /’jig rten skyed mchog bstan pa yin/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The preeminent being taught / Beings with little discipline.”
backReferences to the mantras “residing” in Madhyadeśa (or anywhere) reflect the underlying notion that the mantra and the deity are one and the same.
backrnam pa sna tshogs rtags dang ni/ /rnam pa sna tshogs rgyud dag dang / /rnam pa sna tshogs sbyor bar ldan/ /lus can rnam pa sna tshogs ’grub/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “The various types of signs / And the various types of tantras / With their various applications / Are effective for various types of beings.”
backThe “three times” possibly refers to the three times of the day (or night) that are said to be most suitable for performing rites.
backrnam pa bzhi ru mtshon pa yi/ /gling dag de bzhin kun tu yang / D. It is unclear if the four groups of islands are meant, or perhaps the four continents with their different four characteristics (caturdhā paricihnitaiḥ). The Tibetan reflects the second option.
back“With reference to kings” might imply a double meaning that these mantras can be used by the kings and that they also can be used to target the kings, e.g., to remove a bad king or promote a good one.
backrdzu ’phrul rtse dang rnam ’phrul dang / /’dir ni dus kyi spyod pa’ang bstan/ /sngags kyi bdag nyid sems can gyi/ /’gro ba skye gnas rgyal po’i ming / D. The Skt. syntax of this verse is not very clear, and the Tibetan doesn’t make it any clearer. The Tibetan translates as, “The magical play and emanation as well as / The practices according to time were taught here, / As was the great mantra being, beings’ / Types of rebirth, and the names of kings.”
backThe structure of this section is confusing, with the content and order of the stanzas possibly corrupt. Those that are prophesied next are not kings, but rather politically active “ascetics.” Further on in the prophecy come the “kings,” but, apart from the four great kings who are traditionally referred to as such, they are rather lords of the different classes of beings.
back’jig rten mig gcig gyur pa yi/ /tub pa’i mchog ni med pa na/ D. The material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15309 appears here in the Tibetan translation and translates as, “When the Sage who is the lone / Eye of the world is no more.”
backrtag tu sngags smra la dad pas/ /bstan pa’i don ni byed par ’gyur/ /de dag gzhon nu bshad par bya/ /rtse gcig yid kyis mnyan par gyis/ D. The material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15305 appears at the beginning of this verse in the Tibetan translation, which translates as, “Beings will carry out the goal of the teachings / By devoting themselves to the constant recitation of mantras. / I will teach them, divine youth, / So listen with single-pointed focus.”
backyi ge ma zhes gzhon nu zhes/ Tib. In place of “one with the initial Ku,” the Tibetan translates as, “Kumāra,” reflecting the Sanskrit *kumāra instead of the extant Skt. kukāra.
backJayaswal identifies him, rightly or wrongly, with Nāgārjuna (Jayaswal 1934, p. 75).
back#UT22084-088-038-15320om. Tib.
backJayaswal identifies this ascetic, rightly or wrongly, with Aśvaghoṣa (Jayaswal 1934, p. 75).
backThe Skt. further describes him as passionate (rāgin), which somehow doesn’t agree with his being an ascetic, at least not in the tantra system espoused in the MMK.
backThe Skt. word for “another,” apara, is taken by Jayaswal to be a proper name, a renunciant by the name of Apara.
backsing ga la yi grong na gnas/ D. Reading the Skt. saihnikā as saiṃhikā. The “city of lions” refers to Siṃhala.
backyi ge da dang Tib. The Tibetan has D instead of V.
backbyed par ’gyur bar the tshom med/ /mtshon gyis lus zhig mtho ris ’gro/ D. This line has been translated from the Tibetan. The Skt. seems to translate as, “one who strayed from the path of the Teacher.”
backIt is unclear whether it is “Suṣeṇa” or “Sena” that is meant to be the proper name.
backde nas yi ge sa dang ka /dang po dag tu brjod pa dang / /de bzhin yi ge ra dang g+ha/ /dang po dag tu rab brjod dang / dang por yi ge ba dang ni/ /legs byin legs de sde zhes bstan/ /sbyin byed byin par byed pa nyid/ /gzhan gyi grub mtha’ sun byed pa/ D. The Tibetan that corresponds to #UT22084-088-038-15342 differs in its content, renders this material in eight verses instead of six, and includes one verse with additional content. The Tibetan translates as, “Then there will be the ones known / By the first initials S and K, and / Likewise the ones known / By the first initials R and Gh, / The ones with the first initials V and *Ni, / Sudatta and **Suṣeṇa who is known as Sena, / And Dattaka and Dāyaka / Who will refute the doctrinal systems of others.”
back
*This ni is assumed to represent the first initial of a name and not the usual nominative particle, following the pattern already established in this section of verses. It is also quite possible that this is a scribal error for na that has been mistakenly rendered to look like a nominative particle ni in the Tibetan.
** The Tibetan translation of this line is problematic and does not resolve the issue with the Skt. rendering of this line mentioned above.yi ge ba zhes sdom brtson bsgrags/ D. The Tibetan has V instead of C.
backdang por yi ge ba grags dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “The one whose name has the first syllable V.”
back“Direct application” is here a translation of the Skt. abhiyoga. In the context of applying (yoga) the mantras, the prefix abhi possibly implies that the mantras target specific beings, human or otherwise.
backgrags pa ’dzin par shes par bya/ Tib. The translation of the last pāda may be a little problematic. The Skt. kīrtikarāḥ seems to imply that they confer fame on others. The Tibetan translates as, “They will be known as famous supports.” The translation “famous supports” is a rendering of the Tibetan grags pa ’dzin pa, which reflects the Sanskrit *kīrtidharāḥ instead of the extant Skt. kīrtikarāḥ.
backThe six-syllable mantra is probably oṁ vākyeda namaḥ, the main heart mantra of Mañjuśrī.
backgang phyir dang po gtso bo’i tshig /sems can rnams la phan ’dod pas/ /gzon nus yongs su gsungs gyur pa/ /yi ge drug pa’i sngags kyang zlos/ /cho ga rab ’byam ’di dag las/ /des ni de phan de la bsten/ D. The Tibetan material corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15367 differs somewhat and translates as, “Which is why one should recite the six-syllable mantra, / The premier and highest verbal utterance / That the divine youth taught / Out of a desire to help beings. / From among these extensive ritual manuals, / He *taught that to benefit them.” The translation “taught” follows the variant bstan in Y, K, N and H. The Tibetan for this particular line is obscure.
backgrags ldan dge ba de las gzhan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “And the famous Śubha after that.”
backkhyab ’jug Tib. The Tibetan renders the Sanskrit Mādhava using the generic Tibetan translation for the name Viṣṇu.
backdregs bral dang / D; dreg bral dang / Y, J, K, C. The Tibetan translation might reflect the Sanskrit *gatamadaḥ (which is unmetrical) instead of the extant Skt. namas tadā.
backde bzhin ka shir skyes pa gzhan/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “[And] likewise other citizens of Kāśī,” reflecting the Sanskrit *kāśījātās instead of the extant Skt. śakajātās. In the last two verses, it is difficult to tell which of these terms are proper names and which are merely epithets.
backJayaswal identifies this brahmin as Viṣṇugupta (Jayaswal 1934, p. 76).
backAnother name of Pāṭaliputra, the ancient capital of Magadha.
backAs the next verse makes clear, Krodha (also called Mahākrodha, Krodharāja, etc.) refers here to Yamāntaka.
backbram ze yi ge dang po a/ D. Jayaswal tentatively identifies this brahmin as Subandhu (Jayaswal 1934, p. 76). The Tibetan gives the initial of this brahmin not as S, but as A.
backchos don dge ba ldan bdag nyid/ Tib. Because of the meter, the Skt. mantrārtha° should probably be emended to the standard phrase, mantratantrārtha°. Instead of mantrārtha° (literally, the “business” of the mantras), the Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *dharmārtha° (“Dharma and wealth”).
backbden par smra zhing dbang po thul/ D. The last pāda has been supplied from the Tibetan. (Skt.: lacunae).
backde nas mthar ni dang yig sha/ Tib. The Skt. includes the word ante (“at the end”) in this pāda, but it is unclear what it refers to, though possibly that this brahmin’s name will begin and end with Ś.
backrig pa rjes bzung ma rungs dang / D. The Tibetan translates as, “[He will enthrall] the benevolent and wicked vidyās,” which reflects the Sanskrit *vidyānugrahaduṣṭāṃ instead of the extant Skt. vetāḍagrahaduṣṭāṃ.
backrnam pa sna tshogs sha za dang / Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “And the various piśācas.”
backdang po’i yi ge na zhes pa/. The Tibetan translates as, “With the first initial N.”
backdang yig b+ha ni nor gyi spyan/ /rgyal po rnams ni sngags mchod byed/ D. The Tib. resolves the syntax of this half-stanza differently and translates as, “There will be a treasurer with the initial Bh / Who will perform the offering and mantra for kings.”
backthog ma bar mthar gtso bo ste/ D. It is unclear what the “beginning, middle, and end” refers to.
backrang byung sangs rgyas chos kyi rgyal/ D. It is unclear who is here meant by “Dharma king.” It could be the Buddha Śākyamuni, but also Yama or other deities. The Skt. svayambuddha (“self-realized”) suggests Buddha Śākyamuni. The Tibetan seems to confirm this and reflects the Sanskrit *svayambhūbuddha.
backThe “king of the yakṣas” is Kubera.
backnges pa’i tsher ni Y, K; nges pa’i tshar ni N; nges pa’i tshig ni D.
backAs the singular number alternates in this verse with the plural, it is difficult to tell if this is about the classes of gods, or the chief deity (of the same name) presiding over each of the respective realms.
backThe Tib. cuts off here (F.327.a.7) and picks up again in the next chapter at #UT22084-088-038-7612. There is no chapter break in the Tibetan text. Possibly the Tibetan translators omitted this section because of the corruptions in the text and dead ends in the content structure.
backThe Skt. actually reads vidyācitraketu, which is hypermetrical and unlikely to be a name. Citraketu, the king of vidyādharas, was also mentioned in verse #UT22084-088-038-7325 above.
backThe exact meaning of the Skt. tathāhetau (“for the same/similar reason”) is unclear. It could have something to do with the etymology of the names Citraketu and Vemacitri, both of which include the elementcitra.
back“Days” are meant here as the personified astrological entities.
backThe Skt. of this verse has been heavily emended to make some sense and the translation should be regarded as tentative.
backThis verse, again, is very unclear and the meaning has been half guessed.
backThe text includes, between the last two pādas, the phrase m-urvyām (“on earth”), which spoils the meter and doesn’t fit the context very well. Therefore, it has been omitted in the translation here.
backŚākyamuni is using here the plural number referring to himself, or perhaps he includes in the statement also Mañjuśrī and Vajrapāṇi who likewise contributed to the discourse presented in the MMK.
back“How should I remember them?” means “What should I remember them as?” The direct answer to this question is three verses below, in the very last sentence of this chapter, “You … should … remember [them] as.”
back“And so forth…” is an instruction telling what Mañjuśrī’s question should include if quoted in full. The text, however, is unclear, and the two sentences in prose included here seem a bit out of place and possibly don’t belong here.
backThe Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtrahttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh119.htmlhttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh120.htmlhttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh121.html is largely in the form of a dialogue between the Buddha and Mañjuśrī, in the course of which the sūtra and its teachings are entrusted to Mañjuśrī.
backThis and the next two verses, up to the end of this chapter, are probably part of the Buddha’s reply to Mañjuśrī’s question, as Mañjuśrī is addressed in the very last sentence (#UT22084-088-038-7607ef) in the second person. The entirety of chapter 54 could also be regarded as part of the Buddha’s reply.
backThere is no chapter break at this point in the Tibetan text.
back’jam dpal de bas na/ de ltar phyi ma’i tshe phyi ma’i dus su rigs kyi bu’am/ rigs kyi bu mo gang la las de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyi chos kyi mdzod ’di glegs bam du chud par byas te/ ’dri bar ’gyur/ klog par ’gyur/ kha ton du byed par ’gyur ba’am glegs bam du byas te ’chang bar ’gyur/ gus par byas te yid la byed par ’gyur/ gos rnam pa sna tshogs dang / phye ma dang / gdugs dang / rgyal mtshan dang / ba dan dang / dril bu dang / rol mo dang / phreng ba dang / byug pa dang / spos dang / dri dang / dri zhim po dag gis mchod par byed par ’gyur/ ri mor byed par ’gyur/ yang dag par ’dzin par byed par ’gyur/ yid rtse gcig pa’i sems kyis chos byed par ’gyur ba de la ni/ phan yon bcu po ’di dag tu ’gyur te/ bcu gang zhe na/ D. The entire section started from #UT22084-088-038-15428 up to the beginning of this paragraph is missing from the Tibetan text. The Tibetan translation corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15469 also differs somewhat and translates as, “Since that is the case, Mañjuśrī, at a later time in the future, the activities for any son or daughter of the lineage who has written this treasury of the Dharma of the tathāgatas down in a book; who copies it; reads it; chants it; makes it into a volume and then wears it; who reveres it and is focused on it; who worships it with various types of cloth, powders, parasols, victory banners, flags, bells, music, garlands, ointments, incense, perfumes, and sweet smells; who illustrates it; who upholds it perfectly; and who enacts its qualities with a singular focus will incur the following ten advantages.”
backder ’di pha rol gyi dmag tshogs kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ char ’bab pa mi mkhas pa dang gza’ dang ’ching ba chen po’i ’tshe ba ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ mi ma yin pa’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la mi’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur/ phyir rgol ba thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la nas kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /dus ma yin par ’chi ba’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la dus ma yin pa’i char gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /char ches pa’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la rlung chen po’i dkyil ’khor gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /sha za thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la dgra’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /de bzhin du g.yon can rkun po’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la ’chi ba’i ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /gshin rje’i rgyal pos khyer ba’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la chom rkun gyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /lha thams cad dang klu dang gnod sbyin dang dri za’i ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la gzhan gyi sngags kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur ro/ /sbyar ba’i dug thams cad kyi ’jigs pa’am/ der ’di la nad kyi ’jigs pa dang / rims dang / tshad par ’khu ba dang / ma zhu ba dang / yan lag dang / nying lag gi nad kyi ’jigs pa ’byung bar mi ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan rendering of this list differs in its arrangement and content. The Tibetan translators marked each of the ten advantages in this list by using the phrase der ’di la, translated here as “then they will have” and “they will have.” The arrangement of these “ten advantages” (daśānuśaṃsā, phan yon bcu po) in this English translation follows the Tibetan translators’ organization of the passage, which can at times seem counterintuitive. The Tibetan translates as, “(1) Then they will have no fear of enemy armies, there will be no danger of drought, planetary influences, or great pestilence (mahāmārī, ’ching chen po), and they will have no fear of nonhuman beings; (2) They will have no fear of human beings or any opponents; (3) They will have no fear of sickness and no fear of premature death; (4) They will have no fear of unseasonal rains and no fear of floods; (5) They will have no fear of typhoons and no fear of any pīśacas; (6) They will have no fear of enemies, and likewise no fear of rogues and robbers; (7) They will have no fear of death and no fear of being carried off by the Lord of Death; (8) They will have no fear of bandits and no fear of any of the gods, nāgas, yakṣas, and gandharvas; (9) They will have no fear of the mantras of other sects and no fear of any poison they might consume; (10) They will have no fear of sickness, fever, contracting dysentery, indigestion, or diseases that affect the major and minor limbs of the body.”
backphan yon bcu po ’di dag tu shes bar bya’o/ /gang du de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyi cho ga chen po rab ’byam chos kyi mdzod ’di glegs bam du byas te/ bzhag la ’dri ba dang / klog pa dang / mchod pa dang / ’dzin pa dang kha ton du byed na de bzhin gshegs pa rnams kyis shin tu bzung zhing chos kyi mdzod mngon du ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “One should know that these are the ten advantages. Wherever this treasury of Dharma, this extensive manual of the tathāgatas, has been made into a book, if one sets it down and copies it, reads it, worships it, upholds it, and chants it, one will be embraced by the tathāgatas and the treasury of Dharma will manifest.”
backThis sentence is missing from the Tib.
backThe Tib. does not mention the master (ācārya).
back’dis ni thams cad mtshon pa yin na sems can rnams kyi dran pa med par ma byed cig D. The last two sentences are missing from the Tibetan. The alternate reading in the Tibetan here translates as, “Since this manual illustrates everything, beings must not forget it.”
back’on kyang khyod kyis shes par ’gyur mchod pa byed par ’gyur yang dag par ’dzin par ’gyur zhing bsod nams chen po yang rab tu skye bar ’gyur ro/ /sems can skal ba med pa rnams la bstan par mi bya ste/ /gzhan du na dbul ba dang / nad dang / mdze dang / ’tshe ba dang / ’go ba’i nad nyid byed par ’gyur ro/ D. The Tibetan for the first part of this paragraph translates as, “However, you should understand it, worship it, enact it, perfectly uphold it, and you will produce a great deal of merit. Do not teach it to unfortunate beings or it will cause poverty, illness, leprosy, injury, and infectious diseases. That is why you should not teach it to others.”
backbsam gtan la rab tu zhugs pa dang Tib. In place of “who keep their samaya concerning the sense bases and psychophysical elements,” the Tibetan translates as, “who have penetrated samādhi,” possibly reflecting the Sanskrit *°samādhyanupraveśa° instead of the extant Skt. °samayānupraveśa°.
backbcom ldan ’das chis kyi rnam grangs ’di’i min ci zhes bya/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One, what is the name of this Dharma discourse?” This indicates that the Tibetan translators understood the Skt. nāma not as a term indicating emphasis but as “name.”
backbyang chub sems dpa’i spyod pa’i rjes su ’jug pa rgyud thams cad kyi mdzod ces bya bar yang zung shig D. The Tibetan translates as, “You should remember it as the treasury of all of the systems of engaging in bodhisattva conduct.”
backtheg pa chen po shin tu rgyas pa nges par bstan pa nyams pa med pa zhes bya bar yang zung shig /byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod ces bya bar yang zung shig Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “You should remember it as the unparalleled exceedingly vast and definitive Great Vehicle teaching.” The Tibetan then adds a line that is absent from the Skt. that translates as, “You should remember it as a bodhisattva basket.”
backdrang don mdo yis yongs su brgyan/ D. “The meaning that needs to inferred” (Skt. neyārtha, Tib. drang don) refers to a hermeneutic for the heirarchical arrangment of sūtra texts and teachings that was perhaps most famously set forth in the Saṃdhinirmocanasūtrahttps://read.84000.co/translation/toh106.html, where the term neyārtha/drang don refers to teachings that require further interpretation and the term nītārtha/nges don refers to definitive teachings that require no further interpretation.
backtheg pa rnam gsum bdag po dang / Tib. This pāda has been translated based on the Tibetan, which reflects the Sanskrit *tridhāyānapatis (“lord of the three vehicles”) instead of the extant Skt. tridhā janagatis (“threefold human destiny”?).
back“Thieves” om. Tib.
backThis verse seems to be missing one pāda in both the Skt. and the Tib.
back“Music” om. Tib.
backsangs rgyas sku mdog thob par ’gyur/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “One will obtain the complexion of a buddha,” which reflects the Sanskrit *buddhavarṇitām instead of the extant Skt. buddhavartitām.
backThe Tibetan skips the remainder of this list of articles and jumps to “The merit thus obtained” in MMK 37.26 below.
backsngags dang rgyud don drang ba’i don/ /don yod tshig ni rab bshad pa/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “The provisional meaning of the goal of the mantra system / Is perfectly explained [in these] meaningful verses.” The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *mantratantrārthaṃ neyārthaṃ instead of the extant Skt. mantrān tattvārthaneyārthaṃ.
backchom rkun nad ni gzhan dag dang / me yi ’jigs pa de la med/ /rgyal po skye bo dag kyang rung / /su zhig de la mchod mi byed/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “He will have no fear of robbers, / Illness, fire, and other things. / Whether he be a king or ordinary person, / They will not affect whoever worships it.”
backrgyal po rgyal rigs spyi bo nas/ /dbang bskur yul du nyer gnas tshe/ /mdo sde mgo la nges bcings nas/ /yang dang yang du phyag ’tshal na/ D. The Tibetan corresponding to #UT22084-088-038-15534 translates as, “When a kṣatriya king receives the crown / Consecration and rules a country, / And this sūtra is held above his head / And worshiped again and again, / Bandits will not trouble him, and / He will not be slain by a weapon.”
backThe epithet kumāra (“the divine or princely youth”) seems to refer to Kārttikeya the god of war, as he is described here as sitting on a peacock seat. Since Kārttikeya is also an emanation of the “divine youth” Mañjuśrī, this epithet should perhaps be understood as referring here to both Mañjuśrī and Kārttikeya.
backser dang dngul dang ra gan gis/ /rgyal mtshan yu ba bsgreng ba la/ /rgyal mtshan ba dan gtags nas ni/ /legs dgad legs par mnyam par bzhag D. The Tibetan translates as, “The banner should be hoisted by a handle / Made of gold, silver, and brass, / The flag should be attached to the banner, and / They should be prominently displayed and evenly distributed.”
backrgyal mtshan sgreng la gnas pa yi/ /gzhon nu las ni sna tshogs pa/ /rnam pa du ma’i gzugs dang ldan/ /bdag nyid chen po ’jam pa’i dbyangs/ /sa bcu’i bdag po’i bdag po ni/ /mthong ba tsam gyis ’jigs par byed/ D. The material in #UT22084-088-038-7684-49 above is reduced to just six pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “They will be terrified by the mere sight / Of the divine youth with his various actions / And his various forms, / The great being Mañjuśrī / Emblazoned on a hoisted banner.”
backIt is not clear who this king is, as his story seems to peter out in the very next verse, unless he is an avatar or a previous incarnation of Indra, who seeks, #UT22084-088-038-7698, help from Kāśyapa.
backgrub par ’dod pas rab tu bya/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Who acted out of a desire for attainment,” reflecting the Sanskrit *siddhi° instead of the extant Skt. sandhi°.
backbrgya byin Tib. The Tibetan specifies that the subject is Śakra/Indra here. The term śacīpatiḥ (“Śacī’s husband”), an epithet of Indra, appears below in Skt. 54.56b, allowing us to identify the subject of the Skt. verse as Indra as well.
backlha dang lha min sngon g.yul ’thab/ /pha rol ’jigs pa byung ba na/ /gang tshe brgya byin sngon gyur pa/ /dpung ni pham byas zhes sdang bas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Long ago a battle raged between the gods and asuras, / When Indra became frightened / By the opposition (as he had before), / And his army was defeated by the enemy.”
backde tshe gcig tu song nas ni/ /sa steng rnam par du bar gyur/ Tib. “He wandered the earth alone / And wept.” Before the emendation, the first stanza in the Skt. actually translates as, “The beings were at that time alone” (ekākinas tadā sattvā[ḥ]).
backde skad bcom ldan gsol nas ni/ Tib. In place of “god of bounty” (maghavān), the Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One” (bhagavān).
back“God of Bounty” (Maghavan) and “one who has performed one hundred sacrifices” (Śatakratu) are epithets of Indra.
back“Thousand-eyed” (sahasradṛk) and Kauśika, again, are epithets of Indra.
backrnyed dka’ sku ni ’bum gyur pa/ D. In place of “endowed with one hundred thousand powers,” the Tibetan translates as, “having one hundred thousand bodies.” The Skt. could also be interpreted as “having the strength of one hundred thousand [men].”
backMaghavan (“God of Bounty”) is another name of Indra. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *bhagavān (“Blessed One”) instead of the extant Skt. maghavān.
backde nas de ni de dran npas/ /byang chub sems dpa’ dran tsam gyis/ /gzhon nu sna tshogs gzugs can ni/ /der ni de yi mod la lhags/ /der ni bcom ldan ’das dang ni/ /bcom ldan lha yi dbang phyug bcas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “So he recollected him, and / Simply by recollecting the bodhisattva / The youthful prince with a universal form / Immediately came to that place / Where Blessed [Kāśyapa] was / Along with the Blessed Lord of the Gods.”
backlhags nas byang chub sems dpa’ des/ Tib. The subject “The bodhisattva [Mañjuśrī]” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt. translates as, “he pronounced the mantras,” which seems premature at this point in the narrative.
backThe mantra proper (beginning with oṁ) is in the Skt.: oṁ hana hana sarvabhayān sādayotsādaya trāsaya moṭaya chinda bhinda jvala jvala huṁ huṁ phaṭ phaṭ svāhā.
backde nas lha ma yin thams cad rgya mtsho chen po’i mtha’i ’gram du gang rang khyer gang yin pa der mngon du phyogs shing song bar gyur te/ sems zhum zhing nyams la dpung gi ’jigs pas sems dkrags shing gdong gi mdog nyams shing nga rgyal dang dregs pa la sogs pa dang bral bar gyur la/ mtshon cha dang bral zhing ri ’bigs byed ’bar ba bzhin du lha’i dbang phyug de mthong nas byer bar gyur to/ D. The material in the Tibetan after the phrase translated here as “[h]e mounted his chariot and rode to where all of the asuras were,” differs from the Skt. and translates as, “Then all the asuras turned toward the area where their own city was on the shore at the edge of the great ocean and left. Disheartened and concerned out of fear that the battle was lost, the color drained from their faces and they lost all pride, confidence, and the like. They dropped their weapons, gazed upon the lord of the gods who looked like the blazing Vindhya mountains, and were routed.”
backde nas lha rnams kyi dbang po brgya byin *gyis chen po la ’od pa’i nor bu rin po che nang ’od dang ldan zhing gsal ba’i phreng ba blangs nas/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Śakra, Lord of the Gods, picked up a garland that was luminous and possessed the inner radiance of an extremely valuable precious gem.” *This translation follows the variant brgya byin gyi preserved in J and C.
backmi ma yin pa’i grangs kyis bgrang bar D. The Tibetan translates as “according to the reckoning of nonhuman beings,” reflecting the Sanskrit *amānuṣikayā gaṇanayā instead of the extant Skt. mānuṣikayā gaṇanā.
back“Qualities” is missing from the Tib.
backde bzhin du phan yon gyi yon tan mchog ’di dag rgya che ba dang / mtha’ yas shing mu med pa sngon gsungs pa yin no/ Tib. The last clause is unclear in the Skt. The Tibetan translates as, “Thus these supreme advantageous qualities were previously described as exceedingly vast, infinite, and limitless.”
backci ste blo chung ba gang gis chos ’di ni thub pa mchog dang / thub pa’i sras blo dang ldan pa ma yin no/ /zhes rab tu spong bar byed do/ D. The Tibetan renders this material in prose and translates as, “And so a feeble-minded person who rejects it, saying, ‘This is not the teaching of the intelligent Sage and the Sage’s heirs.’ ”
backde nyams nas ni dud ’gror ’gro/. The Tibetan translates as, “After experiencing that they will be reborn as animals.” The translation of de nyams nas as “[a]fter experiencing that” is tentative. The term might also refer to the deterioration (nyams) of the karma that led to these beings’ rebirth in the hell realms.
backme ma mur D. In place of Gūthamṛttikā, the Tibetan has Kukūla, which is a different hell.
backde nas phyir yang spu gri sor/ Tib. This pāda appears to be corrupt. Jvaradhāra (a current of fever?) is an unlikely name of a hell. The Tibetan repeats the Kṣuradhārā hell here that was already mentioned in the previous verse.
backyang nga kyi hud zer de bzhin/ Tib. It is not clear whether Avava is the name of a hell. The Tibetan reflects the reading athavā instead.
backma dad sems kyis chos spangs pa/ /sdig pa’i las can gnas yin te/ D. The translation of this half-stanza is problematic. The Tibetan translates as “Is the place for evil beings / Who have rejected the Dharma due to their lack of faith.”
backIn the original text, this line constitutes pāda “b” of the next verse.
backkun gyi mthar thug mnar med pa/ /de nyams de bzhin dmyal chen skye/ Tib. In the original text, this line constitutes the last pāda of the previous verse. The Skt. has been emended, but the meaning remains unclear. The Tibetan for the last two pādas translates as, “Experiencing Avīci, the lowest of all of the hells, / Is like being born in a vast hell realm.”
backmdo sde de ni rgya cher bcas/ /chos kyi nor kun rab spangs nas/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Those who completely reject the Dharma jewel / With its vast and profound sūtras.”
backde ni ’jig rten ngan par ’gro/ /dbang med rtag par dbang du ’gro/ D. This verse, which has only three pādas in the Skt., is reduced to just two pādas in the Tibetan that translate as, “Will take a low rebirth in the world, / Be powerless, and always be controlled.”
backThe Skt. actually begins with a phrase that translates as, “Anyone who [rejects] this sūtra,” but the description of the sūtra that follows is too long to replicate in the English translation the Sanskrit syntax, which is resolved only in the second half-stanza of #UT22084-088-038-7758 below.
backgrub pa sna tshogs brgya rnams ’thob/ /yang dag mtha’ ni sgrib pa med/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Will attain hundreds of various types of siddhis / And the ultimate state and be free from afflictions.”
backphun tshogs Tib. Instead of samyak (“duly,” “properly”), the Tibetan translation reflects the Sanskrit *sampad (“good fortune”).
backrtag dang chad dang thog mtha’ ni/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “Eternalism, nihilism, beginning and end,” reflecting the Sanskrit *śāśvatocchedam ādyantam instead of the extant Skt. śāśvatocchedamadhyāntam.
backle’u rab ’byam rab gsungs pa/ /nges pa’i mdo sde bzang po yin/ Tib. The translation of this half-stanza is based on the Tibetan. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *nītasūtrārtha° (“sūtra of definitve meaning”) instead of the extant Skt. nīlasūtrānta°.
backThe seventh sage is the Buddha Śākyamuni.
backPaṭala usually means a chapter or section of a book, but it can also mean, as seems to be the case here, the complete work.
backrtsa ba rab ’byams le’u zhes/ /sngags dang rgyud dang ldan pa de/ Tib. The Tibetan translates as, “It is called the ‘extensive source text’ / That contains the mantra system.”
backde ni mnar med dmyal bar ’gro/ /bskal pa chen por de ’tshed ces/ /rnam pa du mar dbye bar bstan/ Tib. The last pāda has been partially reconstructed based on the Tibetan, as the Skt. appears incomplete. The Tibetan also adds, “He will be roasted for a great eon.”
backlkugs shing ’on pa yan lag nyams/ /blo nyams long ba nyid dang ni/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “He will be mute, deaf, crippled, / Dumb, and blind.”
backgos ngan D. “Poorly clothed” has been supplied from the Tibetan. The Skt., which is probably corrupt, translates as, “skilled” (kuśala).
backThis verse is missing from the Tib., where some parts of it appear in the next verse.
backmdo sde ’di ni rab spangs na/ /gang dang gang gis ’gro bar ’gro/ /de dang der ni skye ba na/ /blo ngan rmongs par skye bar ’gyur/. The second half-stanza of the Skt. has been reconstructed conjecturally. The Tibetan of this verse differs significantly and translates as, “If one rejects this sūtra, / Wherever one is reborn, / When one takes rebirth there, / One will be an idiotic and deluded being.”
back#UT22084-088-038-15618om. Tib.
back“Folded his hands” om. Tib.
backde la bcom ldan ’das ma ’ongs pa’i dus na sems can mi rigs pa’i chags pas zil gyis non pa slu bar byed pa nga rgyal can ma dad pa gya gyu can dmu rgod tshul khrims ’chal pa dag ’byung bar ’gyur te/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “Blessed One, in the future beings will be overcome by illogical attachment, disagreeable, proud, faithless, dishonest, unruly, and undisciplined.”
backsngags dang / spyod pa dang / D. The Tibetan treats “mantra” and “conduct” as two separate items on this list.
backThe Skt. term dharmadhātu (“the sphere of phenomena”) can also mean a buddha.
backAlthough it is difficult to determine in the vague BHS language of this mantra, the gender here seems feminine. The Skt. uses the form kumārarūpiṇi, which is the vocative of kumārarūpiṇī (“you (feminine) with the form of the divine youth”). This would be in line with the preceding commentary that one uses this mantra to invoke, at the time of death, the form (mūrti, which is feminine in Skt.) of the dharmadhātu, which is Mañjuśrī. As this mantra is a vidyā, this also makes it likely that a female entity is addressed here. The epithet, viśvasambhava (“omnifarious”), could be a vocative form (viśvasambhave before sandhi) of the feminine form viśvasambhavā.
backHūṁ hūṁom. Tib.
backThe part of the mantra jinajit • mañjuśrīya suśriya is difficult to interpret. Like the first part of the mantra, this part could be addressing the same feminine entity. One can expect, in this position, vocatives addressing the deity, but this doesn’t seem to be Mañjuśrī, at least not addressed directly. The form suśriya could be the BHS vocative of the feminine suśriyā (“exquisite splendor”), and mañjuśrīya, the corresponding adjective derived from mañjuśrī. The form jinajit could likewise be taken as feminine.
backa mr-i tod+b+ha ba ba/ D. The Tibetan reflects the Sanskrit *amṛtodbhava instead of the extant Skt. amṛtodbhavodbhava.
backThe mantra proper (starting from oṁ) is in the Skt.: oṁ kumārarūpiṇe viśvasambhava āgacchāgaccha | lahu lahu bhrūṃ bhrūṃ hūṁ hūṁ jinajit • mañjuśrīye suśriye tāraya māṃ sarvaduḥkhebhyaḥ phaṭ phaṭ śamaya śamaya | amṛtodbhavodbhavapāpaṃ me nāśaya svāhā ||.
backrig pa’i rgyal po thams cad gzengs stod par byed pa/ D. The Tibetan translates as, “It excites all of the vidyārājas,” reflecting the Sanskrit *samuttejanaṃ instead of the extant Skt. sattejanaṃ.
backgshin rje’i ’jig rten dang / /dmyal ba’i sems can thams cad kyi sdug bsngal rab tu sbyangs shing / Tib. “The worlds of Yama,” in this context, probably include the hell realms, and the Tibetan includes an explicit reference to the hell realms here.
backbde ba rnams kyang rab tu thob par ’gyur la/ Tib. The Tibetan adds a line that translates as, “and they all attained all manner of happiness.”
backI.e., at the time of death.
backsangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das kyi sangs rgyas dang / chos ni bsam gyis mi khyab ste/ bsam pa’am/ gzhal ba’am/ spang bar ni bdag gis ji zhig nus te/ sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nyid kyis mkhyen par ’gyur ro/ D. This—the final—paragraph of the MMK is probably spoken by Śākyamuni, who voices a reflection that each and every reader should make for him/herself, so it is in the first person. The meaning of these lines, however, is not very clear. The Tibetan translates as, “The buddhahood of the blessed buddhas and their Dharma are inconceivable. How could I be able to contemplate, evaluate, or reject them? Only the buddhas, the blessed ones, understand.” Both interpretations seem possible, given the vagueness of the grammar.
backle’u sum cu rtsa drug pa D. The Tibetan translations of this text record this as chapter 36.
backThe contents of the final part of this chapter indicate that it was intended as the last. The Trivandrum manuscript, however, which is the only complete manuscript of the MMK, includes one other chapter after this. This additional chapter, however, lacks the standard opening and, as far as its contents, seems to be out of place at the end of the work.
back“Above the Pure Abode” or “in the sky (gaganatale) above the Pure Abode,” as specified at the beginning of the text, is the venue for the teaching of the Mañjuśrīmūlakalpa.
backThe name Mahāsthānaprāpta is followed in the text by Mahāsthāna, which probably is the short version of the same name.
backbcom ldan ’das kyis de skad ces bka’ stsal nas/ dge slong de dag dang / byang chub sems dpa’ de dag dang / thams cad dang ldan pa’i ’khor de dag dang/ gnas gtsang ma’i steng na gnas pa’i lha’i bu’i tshogs rnams dang / sems can bye ba khri phrag brgya stong du ma dang / lha dang / klu dang / gnod sbyin dang / dri za dang / lha ma yin dang / nam mkha’ lding dang / mi ’am ci dang / lto ’phye chen po dang / grub pa dang / rig ’dzin dang / drang srong mchog dam pa du ma dang / ’jam dpal gzhon nur gyur pa dang / spyan ras gzigs dang / byams pa dang / mthu chen thob dang / mthu chen gnas dang / phyag na rdo rje la sogs pa byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po rnams dang / ’jig rten gyi khams grangs med pa dang / chos kyi dbyings mtha’ yas pa na bzhugs pa’i sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nyan thos dang / rang sangs rgyas kyi ’khor dang bcas pa dang / sangs rgyas bcom ldan ’das nam mkha’i ngo bo dang ’dra bar bzhugs pa’i sangs rgyas dang / byang chub sems dpa’ sems dpa’ chen po bsam gyis mi khyab pa rnams thugs rangs te/ bcom ldan ’das kyis gsungs pa la mngon par bstod do/ /. This paragraph is omitted in the Skt. and has been supplied in its entirety from the Tibetan.
back’phags pa ’jam dpal gyi rtsa ba’i rgyud rdzogs so// // D. In the Sanskrit text, this colophon comes after the next chapter, which is missing from the Tibetan translation and has been, likewise, omitted here. The omitted chapter, however, which is the final one in the Trivandrum manuscript, seems to have been appended at the end due to redactory confusion, as its contents indicate that it was not intended as the final. The final colophon, therefore, belongs here. The Tibetan translates as, “This concludes Mañjuśrī’s Root Tantra.”
backdpal lha btsan po lha btsun pa byang chub ’od kyi bkas/ rgya gar gyi mkhan po dge bsnyen chen po ku mA ra ka la sha dang / sgra sgyur gyi lo ts+tsha ba dge slong shAkya blo gros kyis bsgyur cing zhus te gtan la phab pa’o// //.
back